MAN12EFA1500_01

Broadcasting Division
Operating Manual
TV TEST RECEIVER /
DEMODULATOR
ANALOG
(B/G, I, D/K, M/N),
DIGITAL
(DVB-C, DVB-T, ATSC, J.83/A/B/C)
R&S EFA
2067.3004.12/.72/.78
2067.3004.20/23
2067.3004.33/.83/.89
2067.3004.40/43
2067.3004.50/53
2067.3004.60/63
2067.3004.70/73
2067.3004.90/93
Volume 1 of 2
Printed in Germany
2068.0950.12-15 1
EFA DIVIDER OVERVIEW
OPERATING MANUAL VOLUME I
Preparation for Use
Manual Operation
General Device Settings
Demodulation of AM-TV signals with IRT 2-

Sound or NICAM Sound
Operation as a Test Receiver / Demodulator EFA Model 90/93,

for NTSC/BTSC-Signals Option B30
EFA digital,
Operation as MPEG2 Measurement Decoder Option B4
Operation as Test Receiver / Demodulator

for Orthogonally Modulated Multiple- EFA Model 40/43,
Frequency Signals (OFDM) to DVB-T- Option B10
Standard
Operation as Test Receiver/Demodulator for

8-Level Vestigial Sideband Modulated EFA Model 50/53,
Carrier Signals (8VSB) to the ATSC Option B20
Standard
Operation as Test Receiver/Demodulator EFA Model 60/63/70/73,

QAM Signals Option B20
2068.0950.12 3 E-14
R&S® EFA Preparation for Use
1 Preparation for Use ................................................................................ 1.1
1.1 Legend for Front View ......................................................................................................1.2

1.2 Legend for Rear View .......................................................................................................1.5
1.3 Unpacking the Unit ...........................................................................................................1.9
1.4 Putting into Operation ......................................................................................................1.9
1.4.1 Positioning the Unit ...........................................................................................................1.10
1.4.2 Connecting the Unit to AC Supply, AC Supply Voltage and Fuses ...................................1.11
1.4.3 EMC Protective Measures ................................................................................................1.11
1.4.4 Switching On .....................................................................................................................1.12
1.4.5 Setting the Contrast of the Display ....................................................................................1.13
1.4.6 Installing the Firmware ......................................................................................................1.13
1.4.7 Connecting Input and Output Signal .................................................................................1.14
1.4.8 Battery Backed Memory....................................................................................................1.14
1.5 Functional Test................................................................................................................1.15
1.6 Installation of Options ....................................................................................................1.15
1.7 Video Standards ..............................................................................................................1.15
1.8 Built-In Loudspeaker / Headphone Connector.............................................................1.16
1.9 Installation of a Printer ...................................................................................................1.16
1.10 Serial Interface ................................................................................................................1.16
1.11 IEC/IEEE-Bus Connector................................................................................................1.16
2067.3004.12 1.1 E-14

Preparation for Use R&S® EFA
2067.3004.12 1.2 E-14

1 Preparation for Use

Introduction
The TV Test Receiver EFA can be used as a platform for analog TV standards as well as for the digital
DVB TV standards. The use of options (analog demodulator, NICAM demodulator, QAM demodulator,
MPEG2 decoder) enables various applications to be covered by only one equipment. Refer to the data
sheet for the options available and how they can be ordered. EFA is available in different models for
various analog TV standards.
Section 1.1 describes the front and section 1.2 the rear panel of the test receiver and shows step by
step how to put the equipment into operation. In addition, it contains a brief description of all external
interfaces and the units that can be connected to them.
Section 2 describes the manual operation of the unit. Section 2.1 is a help for first-time users of the
EFA. Section 2.2 shows basic steps to operate the equipment.
The general settings of the units (eg setup) are explained in section 2.3. They are largely independent of
the hardware and the mode of operation of the equipment.
Section 2.4 describes the operation of the analog TV test receiver and sections 2.5. and 2.6. the opera-
tion of the DVB test receiver without and with the MPEG2 decoder.
Section 3 explains the remote control of the EFA via the IEC-625/IEEE-488 bus and the RS232 inter-
face.
Section 4 gives information on maintenance and troubleshooting.
2067.3004.12 1.1 E-14

1.1 Legend for Front View
Fig. 1-1 Front view

POWER
Standby key; if the power key on the rear panel has been pressed and
the unit is connected to the AC supply, the yellow standby LED lights
up. On pressing the standby key, the standby LED goes off and the
green ON LED lights up; the unit is now ready for operation.
LCD DISPLAY
Black-and-white LCD display (320 x 240 pixels) with backlighting.
SOFTKEYS
Softkey labelling displayed depends on the key pressed in the MAIN
FUNCTION control section or on the submenu selected. The softkeys
enable menu-dependent functions to be activated.
DISPLAY
With the rotary control it is possible to set the optimum contrast of the
display to suit the ambient temperature and viewing angle.
STATE
SIGNAL? LED signals that there is no input signal or the input
signal is too weak or too strong
SYNC? LED signals synchronization problems
AUDIO? LED signals problems with sound carriers
REM LED signals that the unit is remote-controlled
LLO LED signals IEC/IEEE-bus local lockout
SRQ LED signals IEC/IEEE-bus service request
2067.3004.12 1.2 E-14

Fig. 1-2 Front view

MAIN FUNCTION
The following menus are activated by means of these hardkeys:
MODE
MEASURE
INPUT
SETUP
RF
SPEC FUNC: LED lights when a special function has been selected.
STATUS
ALARM: LED lights when there is an alarm.
VARIATION
The cursor keys are provided to modify entries step by step.
With ESC it is possible to go one step back in the menu structure
The data entered are terminated by means of ENT.
CLR serves for the correction of data entered.
DATA
Keyboard for numeric data input. The function and effect depend on the
menu selected.
The entry is terminated with the ENT key.
2067.3004.12 1.3 E-14

Fig. 1-3 Front view

FUNCTION
PRESET for resetting the unit
STO for storing device configurations
RCL for loading device configurations
HARDCOPY activates a printout of the screen on the printer con-
nected .
RF
Front-panel RF input connector 75 or 50 ; provided as an alterna-
tive to the rear-panel RF input connector (customer-specific); the
actual configuration is indicated in the INPUT menu.
VIDEO
Video output connector 75 , 1 V pp
Q SIG
Quadrature signal output 75 
AUDIO
1/L Audio output left or sound 1 unbalanced +6 dBm *)1
2/R Audio output right or sound 2 unbalanced +6 dBm *)2
Headphone connector with 3.5-mm jack plug

AUDIO Calling the AUDIO menu; setting the volume, audio
source, etc.
*)1 MAIN CHANNEL audio output unbalanced for TV standard M/N.
*)2 Not provided for TV standard M/N.
2067.3004.12 1.4 E-14

1.2 Legend for Rear View
Fig. 1-4 Rear view

AC supply connector
AC supply switch and fuses
100/120 V : IEC127-T3.15 H / 250 V 50 to 60 Hz
220/230 V : IEC127-T3.15 H / 250 V 50 to 60 Hz
Automatic voltage selection
BLOWER
Note:
The blower should not be covered to avoid overheating.
Temperature-regulated blower.
An internal temperature protection is provided in the unit for blower
failures; in case of overtemperature (more than 80 °C) the unit
switches to standby operation.
X1 to X4
X1 = Video output 75 CCVS 1V pp *)1
X2 = Video output 75 CCVS 1V pp *)3, *)4
X3 = Quadrature signal output 75 1Vpp *)1
X4 = CCIR601 output *)3,6
measure output *)5
X5 to X8
X5 = QAM/OFDM serial data output 75 *)2,6
X6 = QAM/OFDM serial clock output 75 *)2,6
X7 = MPEG transport stream serial output 75
(see section 2.5.9.6) *)2,6
X8 = MPEG transport stream serial input 75 *)3
*)1 Only provided and connected if analog receiver is integrated.
*)2 Only provided if QAM/OFDM demodulator for DVB is integrated.
*)3 Only provided if MPEG2 decoder for DVB is integrated.
*)4 too provided if option EFA-B6 is installed.
*)5 Only provided if option EFA-B5 is installed.
*)6 In order to avoid EMI, double shielded cables are recommended.
2067.3004.12 1.5 E-14

Fig. 1-5 Rear view

X9 to X12
X9 = RF input 75 *)4
X10 = IF input 50  200 mVpp (always provided)
X11 = IF output 50 200 mVpp (always provided)
X12 = External zero reference pulse input *)1
X13 to X20
X13 = SMPTE310 data output *)7
X13 = NICAM data output *)5
X14 = NICAM clock output *)5
X15 = NICAM I output *)5
X16 = NICAM Q output *)5
X17 = NICAM data input *)5
X18 = NICAM clock input *)5
X19 = NICAM intercarrier input *)5
X19 = Intercarrier input/output *)8
X20 = NICAM clock/2 output *)5
X20 = Audio composite output *)8
X23 to X26 (AUDIO A / AUDIO B)
X23 = Audio source A 1/L output 600  balanced *)1
X24 = Audio source A 2/R output 600 balanced *)1
X25 = Audio source B 1/L output 600  balanced *)3
X26 = Audio source B 2/R output 600 balanced *)3
X27 = Audio source C 1/L output 600 balanced
X28 = Audio source C 2/R output 600 balanced
*)1 Only provided and connected if analog receiver is integrated.

*)2 Not connected for TV standard M/N.
*)3 Audio source B only provided if NICAM demodulator or MPEG2 decoder is installed.
*)4 Only provided and connected if option EFA-B3
*)5 Only provided if NICAM demodulator is integrated.
*)6 Audio source only provided if MPEG2 decoder is installed, alternativ to X25 /X26
*)7 Only provided if ATSC demodulator is integrated.
*)8 Only provided if NTSC/BTSC demodulator is integrated.
2067.3004.12 1.6 E-14

Fig. 1-6 Rear view

X29 (IEC 625/IEEE)
Interface for remote control of the unit. All device functions can be
operated via the IEC/IEEE bus. All device states can also be queried.
X30 (NICAM)
NICAM additional data (see section 2.4.10) *)1
X31 (TS PARALLEL)

MPEG transport stream parallel output *)2, *)5
X21 (RF 50  DEMOD)

RF input demodulator 50  *)3
X22 (RF RECEIVER)

RF input *)4
X32 CENTRONICS
Parallel printer interface, PC-compatible
X33 (RS 232)

Serial remote-control interface; also for firmware update.
X 34 (USER PORT)
Alarms and for service purposes (see section 2.4.10)
*)1 Only provided if NICAM demodulator is installed.

*)2 Only provided if a Digital demodulator is integrated.
*)3 Only provided if broadband demodulator module is installed.
*)4 Depending on the customer's order, the RF inputs (50  or 75 ) are located on the front or
rear panel. 75  or 50 BNC connectors or 50  N connectors can be fitted on the rear panel;
location and type of RF connector are chosen by the customer.
*)5 In order to avoid EMI, double shielded cables are recommended.
2067.3004.12 1.7 E-14

Fig. 1-6 Rear view

X 36 (10 MHz REF IN)
Level range –20 dBm to +16 dBm (see also chapter 2.3.2.5).
X 37 (10 MHz REF OUT)
Output level +11 dBm (see also chapter 2.3.2.5).
2067.3004.12 1.8 E-14

1.3 Unpacking the Unit

After having removed the unit from the package, check it carefully for mechanical damage. If you find
any damage, immediately contact the forwarding company concerned. In such a case, keep the card-
board box, the packing material and the delivery note.
1.4 Putting into Operation

The following section describes how to put the unit into operation.
Caution:
Prior to putting the unit into operation make sure that
 the covers are in place and screwed on,
 the vents (at the top and at the right side, seen from the front) and the blowers (rear)
are not covered,
 the AC supply voltage is within 100 to 120V/220 to 240V +/- 10%,
 voltages applied to the inputs do not exceed the permissible limits (even in the
switched-off state),
 the outputs of the unit are not overloaded or incorrectly connected,
 EMC protective measures (section 1.4.3) are complied with.
Non-compliance with the above may cause damage to the unit or malfunction. The switching power
supply is automatically set to the correct voltage range (100 to 120V/220 to 240V +/- 10%).
2067.3004.12 1.9 E-14

1.4.1 Positioning the Unit
The TV test receiver is designed for use indoors. The location should meet the following requirements:
 Ambient temperature should lie between 0 and +50 °C.
 The vents (at the top and at the right side, seen from the front) and the air outlet at the rear should
not be covered. The minimum distance to the nearest wall should be therefore 10 cm.
 The unit should be placed on an even surface.
Positioning the unit flat:

The bottom of the unit is fitted with feet. The stands at the front feet can be folded out to obtain an opti-
mum viewing angle:
 Place the unit flat
 Lift the unit at its front and fold out the feet downwards until they lock in position.
Positioning the unit upright:

The unit has four feet also on the rear panel to prevent the panel-mounted connectors from being dam-
aged:
 Fold out the rear feet until they lock in position.
 Place the unit upright. Ensure that cables which might be connected will not be damaged.
 Check that the air outlet openings at the rear of the unit are not covered.
Mounting the unit in a 19'' Rack:

Caution:
On rackmounting the unit, make sure that the inlet air can flow freely to the vents at the
top and at the right side (seen from the front) and that the outlet air is not blocked at the
rear panel.
The unit can be mounted in a 19" rack by means of Rack Adapter ZZA-93 (Order No. 396.4892.00). The
mounting instructions are enclosed with the adapter.
2067.3004.12 1.10 E-14

1.4.2 Connecting the Unit to AC Supply, AC Supply Voltage and Fuses
Since the unit is fitted with a switching power supply, it can be

operated in the range of 100 to 120 V/220 to 240 V +/- 10%,
47 to 63 Hz without switchover. The power supply has two
primary fuses which are accessible on the rear panel.
Depending on the configuration of the unit, the current drain is
rated at 2.5 A in the range 100 to 120 V and 1.3 A in the range
220 to 240 V (approx. 100 W at the secondary).
Replacement of fuses:
 Unplug the power cable
 Undo the two fuse holders using a screwdriver
 Check the two fuses
 Replace the defective fuse(s) by a fuse (or fuses) of the same type
 Screw the fuse holders into the socket
 Plug in the power cable.
Fuses: F1/F2 IEC12T - T3.15H/250V
Voltage ranges of the switching power supply (automatic switchover):

100 to 120 V +/- 10%
220 to 240 V +/-10 %
Current drain: 2.5 A (100 to 120 V) / 1.3 A (220 to 240 V)
1.4.3 EMC Protective Measures
To avoid impairment from electromagnetic interference, the unit must be operated completely enclosed
with all internal shielding covers fitted. Suitably shielded signal and control cables are to be exclusively
used. In particular, make sure that the control cables (IEC/IEEE bus, RS232) are fastened to the rear
panel with the locking screws. Experience shows that control cables loosely connected very often cause
the permissible EMI limit values to be exceeded. Make sure that the control cables are properly locked
at the PC end.
Rear connectors X4, X5, X6, X7 and X31: double shielded cables are required.
2067.3004.12 1.11 E-14

1.4.4 Switching On
Connect the unit to the AC supply (see section

1.4.2). Switch on the power switch at the rear panel
(above the AC supply connector). The orange
standby LED above the standby key lights up on
the front panel. Press the standby key. The green
power-on LED must light up and the display back-
lighting should also be on.
The following operations take place during switch-on:


LED test

Switch-on mask specifying the designation of the unit and firmware version
(Depending on the firmware version implemented, the switch-on mask may differ from that shown
below.):
TV TEST RECEIVER
FIRMWARE V05.00
20.01.03 14:00:00
DATE: 20.01.03
TIME: 14.20.21
IEC-625/IEEE 488 - ADDRESS: 6

RS232 : 9600, 8, N, 1
SELFTEST RUNNING . . . . . .

Status mask with installed hardware assemblies

Measurement mask (MEASURE menu) next on display. The unit is now ready for operation.
Observe error messages if any during switch-on.
Note: On switching on the unit for the first time, the factory-set default setting is loaded.
During start-up, all hardware modules are tested and checked for their presence. In addition, all relays
are actuated (input attenuator).
2067.3004.12 1.12 E-14

1.4.5 Setting the Contrast of the Display
The built-in LCD display has a limited viewing angle. It can be vertically adjusted within
certain limits and optimally adapted to the working conditions. Setting is by the control on
the right below the LCD display. The contrast depends on the temperature and the view-
ing angle.
1.4.6 Installing the Firmware
Virtually all the unit firmware/software is stored in a flash EPROM which can be erased and written to
again. This can be done without opening the unit and replacing components. In case of firmware update,
a new firmware version can be loaded via the serial interface (RS232, rear panel) from a PC.
To carry out the firmware update proceed as follows:

1. Connect instrument via null modem cable (Stock No. 1050.0346) to COM1 or COM2 of PC.
2. Switch on instrument and PC.
3. Insert update disk into disk drive of PC.
4. Start SETUP.BAT program on update disk and follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Initial update - No runnable firmware in the unit

In the unlikely event that the unit does not have a runnable and thus updateable firmware, remove the
rear panel as described under section 1.6 (Installing Options) by folding it downwards.
The main processor is located at the bottom right seen from the rear. The board can be recognized from
the flat cable which connects it to the rear panel. Several jumpers are provided in front of the flat cable.
The one at the right is normally in position 1-2. To release an initial firmware update, change this jumper
to position 2-3 (right) and switch on the unit.
If the flashup software is started on the PC, the firmware is loaded into the unit even if the unit has no
runnable firmware. At the end, set the jumper to position 1-2 and close the unit.
Firmware in modules
Most modules (options) are provided with a certain amount of firmware in OTPs (similar to EPROMs but
not ultraviolet erasable) which have to be replaced only in rare cases. If, however, this should become
necessary, the corresponding installation instructions are supplied with the new OTP.
Basically, an OTP is replaced on a module as follows:
1. Loosen the rear panel as described in section 1.6 and fold it out downwards.
2. Loosen all connections between the rear panel and module concerned (all easily undone).
3. Take out the module to the rear.
4. Remove the upper cover to the module.
5. Remove the OTP using an appropriate tool (for the position of OTP, refer to the corresponding en-
closed instructions).
6. Insert the new OTP.
7. Reassemble the parts in reverse order.
8. Watch out for any messages displayed on switching on the unit.
2067.3004.12 1.13 E-14

1.4.7 Connecting Input and Output Signal
Video *)2
*)4
RF *)1 TV Test Receiver
EFA
Audio *)3
*)5
*)1 RF input on the front or rear panel 50 or 75 

*)2 only with integrated analog demodulator or MPEG2 decoder
*)3 only with integrated analog demodulator, NICAM demodulator or MPEG2 decoder;
rear panel and/or front panel
*)4 oscilloscope, monitor or video analyzer
*)5 oscilloscope or audio analyzer
The RF input connector may be located on the front or the rear panel depending on the model (custom-
tailored) and be 50  or 75 . There is always a BNC female connector on the front panel. On the rear
panel, the RF female connector (X22) is of BNC or N type.
1.4.8 Battery Backed Memory
EFA stores the current setup in a nonvolatile memory (battery backed). On power-up, the unit reinstates
the same configuration as before switch-off. The 10 setups stored with STO/RCL are also saved in this
memory. The battery status is indicated on power-up. If the lithium battery which also supplies the built-
in clock is flat (approx. after 5 years), it should be replaced as described in section 4.1.4.
2067.3004.12 1.14 E-14

1.5 Functional Test

On power up, the unit carries out a selftest for checking whether all modules are installed and for overall
testing of their functions. Errors found are indicated on the initial display. If no errors are signalled, it can
be assumed that the unit is ready for operation. Hardware faults can only be detected by means of
measurements requiring a special setup.
1.6 Installation of Options

Various options (hardware modules) are available to expand the EFA. For detailed instructions describ-
ing the installation steps for the options EFA-B4, EFA-B8 und EFA-B11: please refere section 5 of this
manual. The options can be inserted in the guide rails from the rear after removing the covers (top and
bottom) and the rear panel.
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the unit and disconnect all external connections, in particular the AC supply connector.
2. Remove rear blue feet (2 screws each).
3. Push the covers (top and bottom) to the rear and remove them.
4. Undo 4 Phillips screws at the left and right on the side.
5. Fold out downwards the rear panel assembly.
6. Mount the option according to the instructions.
7. Reassemble the unit in reverse order.
8. Carry out a software update, if necessary (section 1.4.6.).
9. Perform a test according to the enclosed instructions and section 1.5.
1.7 Video Standards

The video standards are determined by the hardware installed in the unit. This means that the test re-
ceiver is designed for a particular standard which cannot be configured in terms of software. Refer to the
data sheet for the analog TV standards available. The DVB test receiver is not fixed to a standard. The
video standard is displayed on the status line at the rightmost, eg Std. B/G.
2067.3004.12 1.15 E-14

1.8 Built-In Loudspeaker / Headphone Connector

EFA has a built-in loudspeaker which allows TV audio signals to be lis-
tened without additional aid. Power and sound quality, however, are lim-
ited. The headphone connector on the front panel offers further possibili-
ties. The volume and mode for the built-in loudspeaker and headphone
connector can be configured in the "Audio" menu (see section 2.3.3.). A
built-in loudspeaker/headphone connector is of course useless with a
pure QAM demodulator. But in this way all conditions required to obtain a
full-featured DVB test receiver are created. An MPEG decoder is all that
is needed to complete the configuration.
The built-in loudspeaker is located in the right front part of the unit. The
sound's path is through the air intake openings at the righthand side.
1.9 Installation of a Printer

The EFA has a Centronics printer interface (X32) at the rear panel. The
connector is PC-compatible, ie it is a 25-contact Cannon female connector
with the allocation usual for a PC. The type of printer can be selected in the
setup menu (see section 2.3.2.3.). The hardcopy key allows a print-out of
the current display. Commercial PC printer cables can be used for connect-
ing the EFA to the printer.
1.10 Serial Interface

The unit is provided with a serial RS232 interface (X33) on the rear panel. Via this
interface, the unit can be remote-controlled from a PC. A firmware update can also
be carried out via the interface. The configuration is made in the setup menu, see
section 2.3.2.2.2. The remote-control command set is explained in section 3 and
Annex A. A three-core shielded cable with crossed transmit and receive lines is suf-
ficient for remote control whereas for updating the firmware a null modem is re-
quired.
1.11 IEC/IEEE-Bus Connector

EFA can be connected to the IEC/IEEE bus by means of connector X29 on the
rear panel and remote-controlled. The bus address can be set in the setup
menu (see section 2.3.2.2.1.). The set of remote-control commands is de-
scribed in section 3 and in Annex A. The interface meets the requirements of
standards IEC-625-2 and IEEE 488.2.
A shielded cable PCK can be supplied as an accessory in the following versions:
Length (m) Order No.

0.5 292.2013.05
1 292.2013.10
2 292.2013.20
4 292.2013.40
2067.3004.12 1.16 E-14

EFA Operating Instructions
2 Manual Operation ................................................................................ 2.1.1
2.1 Sample Setting ...............................................................................................................2.1.1

2.1.1 Switching on the Unit........................................................................................................2.1.2
2.1.2 Selecting the Mode...........................................................................................................2.1.3
2.1.3 Selecting the Input............................................................................................................2.1.4
2.1.4 Setting the RF Channel ....................................................................................................2.1.6
2.1.5 Setting the Volume ...........................................................................................................2.1.7
2.1.6 Checking the Measured Values .......................................................................................2.1.8
2.2 Basic Operation..............................................................................................................2.2.9
2.2.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................................2.2.9
2.2.2 Display............................................................................................................................2.2.10
2.2.2.1 Measurement Menu .......................................................................................................2.2.10
2.2.2.2 Setting Menus ................................................................................................................2.2.10
2.2.3 LEDs ..............................................................................................................................2.2.11
2.2.4 Softkeys .........................................................................................................................2.2.12
2.2.5 Cursor Keys....................................................................................................................2.2.12
2.2.6 Numeric Keypad.............................................................................................................2.2.13
2.2.7 Selecting Settings...........................................................................................................2.2.13
2.2.8 Editing of Text and Numerals.........................................................................................2.2.13
2.2.8.1 Editing Numerals ............................................................................................................2.2.13
2.2.8.2 Editing Text ....................................................................................................................2.2.13
2.2.9 PRESET and RESET.....................................................................................................2.2.14
2.2.10 Hardcopy Key.................................................................................................................2.2.16
2.2.11 STO/RCL - Storing Device Settings...............................................................................2.2.17
2.2.12 Hardkeys ........................................................................................................................2.2.18
2.2.13 Mode Key / Selecting the Mode .....................................................................................2.2.18
2067.3004.12 2.1.1 E-14

Operating Instructions EFA
2067.3004.12 2.1.2 E-14

2 Manual Operation
The EFA control elements are arranged on the front panel in separate functional groups each in a
different colour for better distinction (see also section 1.1).
A sample setting of the unit is described in section 2.1 and allows the operator to familiarize quickly with
the operation and the basic functions of the unit.
The different functional groups on the front panel and the first steps are described in section 2.2.
The general description of device settings is contained in section 2.3 and gives details on the different
setting menus of the unit.
The operation of the TV test receiver for analog video signals with IRT 2-sound and for video signals
with NICAM sound is described in section 2.4.
The operation of the TV test receiver as a QAM demodulator for DVB signals is described in section 2.5.
Finally, the operation as a DVB receiver / MPEG 2 is described in section 2.6.
2.1 Sample Setting

The following sample setting serves for the user to familiarize quickly with the operation and basic
functions of the unit.
The operation of EFA is exemplified in its use as a TV test receiver for analog video signals with IRT 2-
sound. The RF signal (channel 35) is fed via the front-panel BNC connector terminated with 75 .
The following device setting is described step by step:

 SwitchingontheUnit section 2.1.1
 SelectingtheMode section 2.1.2
 SelectingtheInput section 2.1.3
 SettingtheRFChannel section 2.1.4
 Setting the Volume section 2.1.5
 Checking the Measured Values section 2.1.6
2067.3004.12 2.1.1 E-14

2.1.1 Switching on the Unit
Prior to power-up check if the unit is connected to the AC supply. If the power supply is
correct, the yellow LED (standby) lights up above the power key on the right bottom of the
front panel (see also section 1.1).
Switch on the unit by pressing the power key. The green LED (ON) lights up.
A LED test is first performed after switching on. This serves for testing the correct operation of all the
diodes.
A start mask then appears on the LCD display showing the unit description, the firmware version, the
IEC/IEEE-bus address and the parameters of the RS232 interface.
The status of the installed hardware modules is displayed next. It shows the firmware version, the
hardware version and the model.
After the test of the hardware modules, the unit is ready for operation and the measurement menu
appears on the LCD display.
Fig. 2.1-1 MEASURE menu
2067.3004.12 2.1.2 E-14

2.1.2 Selecting the Mode
Using the main menu hardkey MODE, the MODE menu is entered. After pressing
the softkey on the right next to menu line Nyquist Demodulator FM Sound, select
the mode "analog TV test receiver with IRT 2-sound". All the parameters stored
last in this mode are restored (see also section 2.3.2.5).
The mode set is shown in the first menu line.
Fig. 2.1-2 MODE menu
2067.3004.12 2.1.3 E-14

2.1.3 Selecting the Input
Using the main menu hardkey INPUT, the INPUT menu is entered. Press the
softkey on the right next to the menu line RECEIVER to select the RF input.
Depending on the unit configuration, the connector used as input is indicated next
to the RECEIVER softkey (see also section 2.4.5).
In the example below, the rear-panel RF connector has been selected with a 50- termination. This is
indicated by the display INPUT 50 OHM REAR on the left of the RECEIVER menu box.
Fig. 2.1-3 INPUT menu
Feed the RF input signal into the RF connector. In this case, the RF 50  connector
(X22) is located on the rear panel (see also section 1.2).
Press the ATTEN... softkey in the INPUT menu to match the input attenuation to the signal fed in. This
provides access to another submenu in which the following can be selected via the AUTO softkey:
2067.3004.12 2.1.4 E-14

Fig. 2.1-4 INPUT:RECEIVER ATTENUATION menu
2067.3004.12 2.1.5 E-14

2.1.4 Setting the RF Channel
Using the main menu hardkey RF, the RF menu is entered.

In this example, what is to be displayed is not the frequency
but the corresponding channel. On pressing the softkey on
the right of the menu line CHANNEL, a channel number
can be entered (see also section 2.4.6).
Enter channel number 35 via the numeric keypad. Then

confirm the entry using the ENT (Enter) key of the cursor
keypad. The entry is thus checked if it is correct and the
value is set.
Optionally, the channel number can also be modified with
the two keys  and of the cursor keypad.
The channel set (35) can be read from the display on the left of the CHANNEL softkey.
In addition, the channel set (35) and the associated RF frequency (583.250 MHz) are indicated on the
status line above the menu box. It is thus possible to have a quick glance at the current setting after
changing to another menu.
Fig. 2.1-5 RF menu
2067.3004.12 2.1.6 E-14

2.1.5 Setting the Volume
Using the AUDIO key on the left of the power key, the AUDIO menu is entered.
In this menu, it is possible to carry out various settings relating to the audio
signal. (see also section 2.3.3).
Press the SPEAKER ON OFF softkey to switch the loudspeaker on and off. Using the softkey AUTO
STEREO, 1/L and 2/R, the audio channel can be set. If several audio sources are available (texts not in
italics), FM SOUND can be selected by pressing the AUDIO SOURCE softkey several times.
Vary the volume of the audio signal as required using the
numeric keypad or the two keys  and  of the cursor
keypad.
The volume can be varied between 0% and 100% in steps of
1%.
Optionally, headphones can be used.
All the audio parameters set (loudspeaker on/off, volume and audio source) can easily be read from the
LC display.
Fig. 2.1-6 AUDIO menu
2067.3004.12 2.1.7 E-14

2.1.6 Checking the Measured Values
Press the MEASURE key in the main menu to check the parameters measured and set. This brings
back the display which is set as standard after power-up (see also section 2.4.6).

The most important setting parameters and measured values for vision and sound carriers are indicated
in this mask.
2067.3004.12 2.1.8 E-14

2.2 Basic Operation

The different functional groups of the front panel and the basic operating steps are described under the
following sections:
 Overview section 2.2.1
 Display section 2.2.2
 Light-emittingDiodes section 2.2.3
 Softkeys section 2.2.4
 CursorKeys section 2.2.5
 NumericKeypad section 2.2.6
 SelectingSettings section 2.2.7
 EditingTextandNumbers section 2.2.8
 PresettingtheUnit section 2.2.9
 HardcopyKey section 2.2.10
 StoringDeviceSettings section 2.2.11
 Hardkeys section 2.2.12
 SelectingtheMode section 2.2.13
2.2.1 Overview
 After power-up, measurement is performed with the settings which were active before the switch-off
of the unit. The measure menu is always shown on the display. This menu gives permanently the
results and the test parameters relevant to the current measurement function.
 The hardkeys are used to change to the setting menus. This allows the display and setting of all the
parameters of the current measurement function.
 Special operating states are signalled via the LEDs on the front panel.
 The display also indicates the allocation of softkeys depending on the menu selected.
 With the cursor keys, it is possible to modify texts in the menus stepwise. Figures entered via the
numeric keypad are confirmed by means of the ENT key. Press the ESC key to access the next
higher menu level.
 Settings are selected in the setting menus via the hardkeys, the softkeys and, for variable
parameters, via the numeric keypad and the cursor keypad.
 The PRESET key enables the unit to be set to a defined default state. All the parameters or
subranges can be reset. The firmware update can also be obtained with this key.
 The HARDCOPY key allows a printout of the mask information.
 The STO and RCL keys are used to store device settings and to reload them as current settings.
 The hardkeys serve to select the different menus which enable all the settings to be carried out.
 The settings are offered and set in the menus depending on the mode selected.
2067.3004.12 2.2.9 E-14

2.2.2 Display
The display indicates various test results, test parameters and configuration settings depending on the
menu selected.
The upper line always informs on the menu which has just been selected (menu info). This facilitates the
allocation of the parameters displayed with respect to the different hardkeys.
2.2.2.1 Measurement Menu

The measurement menu is divided into three parts in the analog TV test receiver mode.
The menu info is indicated in the upper line.
The status line is shown below. Important parameters are permanently displayed which help the test
results to be interpreted.
The main part of the screen is used to display the test results. Parameters related to each other are
shown in a logical sequence. The test results are cyclically refreshed and are thus always up-to-date.
In the mode of the TV test receiver as a QAM demodulator, it is possible to display different
measurement menus. Selection is by means of softkeys (see section 2.2.4) displayed on the right of the
screen.
2.2.2.2 Setting Menus
The menu info is again displayed in the upper line of these menus.
As in the measure menu, a status line is displayed. In this way, important information and measured
values can be read out during the setting of parameters.
The allocation of softkeys is shown on the left in the current menu (softkey bar). If parameters can be
varied by selecting of softkeys, these are inserted next to the softkeys on the screen. Variable
parameters are highlighted.
2067.3004.12 2.2.10 E-14

Fig. 2.2-2 RF menu
2.2.3 LEDs
Special operating states are signalled by LEDs on the front panel of the unit. The following LEDs are
available:
 Status LEDs next to the display to indicate input signal errors (signal, sync, audio)
 Status LEDs next to the display to indicate remote-control operation (REM, LLO, SRQ)
 Spec. Function LED next to the Spec. Function key
 Alarm LED next to the alarm key
The SIGNAL? LED signals the absence of an appropriate input signal at the
corresponding receive frequency (RF level too low or too high, RF squelch). Generally,
the SIGNAL? LED lights up when it is not possible to receive a vision or a sound
signal. The SYNC? LED indicates synchronization problems of the vision carrier, in
particular. AUDIO? signals problems with audio channels (eg audio squelch due to a
too low level of the sound carrier). With these three LEDs, it is possible to have a
general overview of the test signal applied.
The REMOTE LED signals that the unit is remote-controlled. SRQ and LLO are status
signals of the IEC-625/IEEE-488-bus (see chapter 3).
The Spec. Function LED located above the "Spec. Function" key lights up when a special function is
activated in this menu. The unit may possibly not be in normal operation.
ALARM next to the key bearing the same name signals the presence of an alarm (see alarm menu).
2067.3004.12 2.2.11 E-14

2.2.4 Softkeys
The softkeys on the right of the display are allocated different functions depending on the menu
selected.
Fig. 2.2-3 RF menu

The type of representation and selection for a softkey can vary depending on the unit setting.
 Softkey text highlighted: Function active
 Softkey text not highlighted: Function inactive but can be activated
 Softkey text in italics: Function inactive and cannot be activated
On pressing a softkey which can be activated, the associated function is selected and another submenu,
if any, is pulled down. To quit a submenu, press the ESC key in the cursor keypad (see section 2.2.5).
The previous menu is displayed.
There will be no action on pressing a softkey which cannot be activated (letters in italics).
The width and type of representation of the softkey bar vary depending on the parameters to be selected
and displayed (see sections 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 and 2.6)
Note: If a parameter can also be varied in the setting selected, the parameter is displayed next to
it on the screen.
2.2.5 Cursor Keys
The numeric keypad (section 2.2.6) and the cursor keypad can be used to vary
parameters. The two keys  and  are for increasing or decreasing the value. The
two keys  and  are for shifting the cursor below the parameter to the left or right.
The cursor is placed under the figure which is to be modified with the other two
keys. The overflow of a digit is automatically taken into account.
In contrast to a direct entry, the value is modified stepwise via the numeric keypad.
Note: The cursor keypad also contains the ESC, ENT and CLR keys.
The ESC key is for returning from a submenu (see also section 2.2.4).
The ENT key is for confirming a numerical entry (see section 2.2.6).
The CLR key is for erasing a numerical entry (see also section 2.2.6)
2067.3004.12 2.2.12 E-14

2.2.6 Numeric Keypad
Selected parameters can be directly modified via the numeric keypad in contrast to
the cursor keys. To select, enter the figure and confirm it with the ENT key on the
cursor keypad (see section 2.2.5). If a correction is necessary during entry, the
figure in front of the cursor can be erased or overwritten with the CLR key on the
cursor keypad. For this purpose, the cursor can be shifted with the keys  and 
from the end to the required position.
This entry facility is for effecting modifications which otherwise can only be
performed stepwise with the cursor keys.
Note: The entry is terminated after it has been confirmed by means of the ENT key (cursor
keypad, see section 2.2.5). Erroneous entries are rejected and do not modify the value set
before.
2.2.7 Selecting Settings
In most cases, settings are performed by selecting a menu via the main menu hardkeys. The required
setting is selected by pressing the softkey next to the corresponding softkey text on the screen. Some
parameters require additional entries of numerals or text (see section 2.2.8, EditingofTextandNumerals).
Depending on the menu, the settings can be selected in a lower menu level. A submenu is pulled down
by pressing the softkey. For example, several settings can be directly performed in the INPUT menu.
Other settings (eg in RECEIVER ATTEN...) are carried out at a lower menu level. In this case, further
parameters can be set.
On pressing the ESC key (see section 2.2.5), it is possible to return to the next higher menu level from a
submenu.
Press the corresponding hardkey to access to the uppermost menu level.
2.2.8 Editing of Text and Numerals
2.2.8.1 Editing Numerals

As already described in section 2.2.6, the parameters selected via the numeric keypad can be directly
modified. To select the parameters, enter the figure and then confirm it by means of the ENT key on the
cursor keypad. If a correction is required during entry, the figure in front of the cursor can be erased and
overwritten by means of the CLR key on the cursor keypad. For this purpose, the cursor can be shifted
with the keys  and  from the end to the required position.
2.2.8.2 Editing Text

Text entries (eg in the RF:STO RF menu under EDIT TEXT...) are possible using the cursor keys and
the softkeys.
A box with the characters available is shown under the text to be modified. The required character can
be selected by means of cursor keys , ,  and  and inserted in the entry line with the GETCHAR
softkey. The cursor automatically moves to the next position. If a character is to be inserted in the text,
the cursor can be moved to the position using the two keys RIGHT and LEFT and the new character
inserted with GETCHAR.
A character in front of the cursor can be erased by means of the DELCHAR softkey.
2067.3004.12 2.2.13 E-14

Fig. 2.2-4 RF:STO RF:EDIT TEXT menu

The entry is terminated by pressing the ENTER softkey.
2.2.9 PRESET and RESET

The PRESET key sets the unit to a factory-defined default state which allows reliable signal evaluation
and analysis if a signal conforming to standard is applied.
In contrast to the RESET key, not all the factory-set default settings are restored however.
The user-selected RF, operating mode, inputs, alarm settings, channels, settings in the Setup menu,
etc, are retained.
Fig. 2.2-5 PRESET menu
2067.3004.12 2.2.14 E-14

Fig. 2.2-6 PRESET menu (confirmation)

After selection of a preset key, the unit queries if the settings are to be reset. If this is confirmed by
pressing the YES softkey, the unit is reset to the factory-defined default settings.
PRESET and RESET values for analog NYQUIST demodulator and NICAM
see section 2.4.12
demodulator:
PRESET and RESET values for QAM demodulator: see section 2.5.8
PRESET and RESET values for MPEG2 decoder: see section 2.6.10
2067.3004.12 2.2.15 E-14

RESET
The RESET key completely restores the factory-defined default setting of the unit. The PRESET settings
indicated in the table as well as all other device settings are set to the factory-defined default state, with
the exception of the selected RF frequencies and the operating mode, not however all other settings
associated with the operating mode. The device settings stored with the STO key in the SETUP
MEMORY are also retained.
To access the RESET key, proceed as follows: select the SERVICE softkey in the PRESET menu
whereupon the PRESET SERVICE menu with the RESET softkey is opened.
Fig. 2.2-7 PRESET SERVICE menu

After selection of the reset key, the unit queries if the settings are to be reset. If this is confirmed by
pressing the YES softkey, the unit is reset to the factory-defined default settings.
PRESET and RESET values for analog NYQUIST demodulator and NICAM
see section 2.4.12
demodulator:
PRESET and RESET values for QAM demodulator: see section 2.5.8
PRESET and RESET values for MPEG2 decoder: see section 2.6.10
2.2.10 Hardcopy Key
On pressing the Hardcopy key, the current screen contents is output on the printer. The selection of the
type of printer is described under the SETUP PRINTER menu (see section 2.3.2.3).
When the Hardcopy key is pressed, data are written to an internal memory. With the aid of the software
on the disk supplied with the instrument the screen contents in PCX format can be output to a PC via a
standard null-modem cable (eg R&S stock No. 1050.0346) for further processing.
2067.3004.12 2.2.16 E-14

2.2.11 STO/RCL - Storing Device Settings

The user can store or recall up to 10 specific device settings with the STO and RCL keys. Thus, he can
retain his own settings even after the unit has been used by other persons.
Press the STO key to store the current overall device setting.
Fig. 2.2-8 STORE menu

For storing, enter a memory location number under which the setup can be recalled later. Use the
numeric keys for this purpose. The range of values is 0 to 9. After actuating the ENTER key the setup is
stored and the unit returns to the measurement mask.
Fig. 2.2-9 RECALL menu

The contents of a memory location can be recalled in a similar way. Press the RCL key and enter the
number of the memory location required. The overall device setting available under the memory location
number selected is recalled after pressing the ENTER key. The unit returns to the measurement mask
with the overall device setting restored.
2067.3004.12 2.2.17 E-14

2.2.12 Hardkeys
The hardkeys allow the access to the following menus:

MODE (see section 2.2.13)
INPUT (see section 2.4.5 and 2.5.2)
RF (see section 2.4.6 and 2.5.3)
STATUS (see section 2.4.8 and 2.5.4)
MEASURE (see section 2.4.7 and 2.5.7)
SETUP (see section 2.3.2)
ALARM (see section 2.4.10 and 2.5.6)
SPEC FC (see section 2.4.10 and 2.5.6)
Fig. 2.2-10 Hardkeys
2.2.13 Mode Key / Selecting the Mode
The mode key is pressed to get to the MODE menu. The basic mode of the unit can be set by pressing
the corresponding softkey. The user can decide whether EFA is to be operated as an analog TV test
receiver with IRT 2-sound method or NICAM sound, QAM demodulator or MPEG2 DVB receiver. All
settable modes are represented in normal characters. Settable modes depend on the hardware installed
in the unit (see options). Modes which are meaningless because of hardware that is not available are
represented in italics. Such modes cannot be selected.
Fig. 2.2-11 Mode menu

Note:
The basic setting selected in the mode menu determines the overall function of the unit
and largely defines the presentation and the function of many menus.
2067.3004.12 2.2.18 E-14

R&S® EFA General Device Settings
2.3 General Device Settings ................................................................................................2.3.1

2.3.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................2.3.1
2.3.2 SETUP Menu ...................................................................................................................2.3.1
2.3.2.1 Time/Date Menu - Setting Date and Time .......................................................................2.3.2
2.3.2.2 Remote.............................................................................................................................2.3.2
2.3.2.2.1 IEC625-IEEE488 Menu - Setting the IEC/IEEE-Bus Address..........................................2.3.3
2.3.2.2.2 RS232 Menu - Setting the RS232-Interface Parameters.................................................2.3.3
2.3.2.3 Printer Menu - Selecting the Type of Printer ....................................................................2.3.4
2.3.2.4 Level Units Menu..............................................................................................................2.3.4
2.3.2.5 10 MHz Reference Menu .................................................................................................2.3.5
2.3.3 Audio Menu ......................................................................................................................2.3.6
2.3.3.1 Loudspeaker On/Off .........................................................................................................2.3.6
2.3.3.2 Volume Control ................................................................................................................2.3.6
2.3.3.3 Selecting the Audio Source ..............................................................................................2.3.7
2.3.3.4 Setting Audio Modes AUTO STEREO, 1/L, 2/R...............................................................2.3.8
2.3.3.5 Querying the Status of Audio Channels ...........................................................................2.3.8
2067.3004.12 2.3.1 E-14

General Device Settings R&S® EFA
2067.3004.12 2.3.2 E-14

2.3 General Device Settings
2.3.1 Introduction
The general device settings are settings which are independent of the installed hardware or the mode
selected:
 SETUP menu
 AUDIO menu (limited if only a digital demodulator module is installed)
2.3.2 SETUP Menu
In the SETUP menu, the following basic device settings are performed:
Setting time and date Menu: SETUP: TIME AND DATE
Setting the IEC-bus address Menu: SETUP: REMOTE: IEC625-IEEE488
Setting the serial interface parameters Menu: SETUP: REMOTE: RS232
Selecting the type of printer Menu: SETUP: PRINTER
Selection of level units Menu: SETUP: LEVEL UNITS
Selection 10 MHz Reference
Selection of the LCD display mode
All the basic device settings are displayed in the basic setup menu. From there it is possible to access
the corresponding submenus by pressing the associated softkey.
Fig. 2.3-1 SETUP menu

With the LCD INVERS ON/OFF softkey, it is possible to change between two display modes:
 dark letters on white background LCD invers ON
 white letters on dark background LCD invers OFF
This has no influence on hardcopy or print functions.
2067.3004.12 2.3.1 E-14

2.3.2.1 Time/Date Menu - Setting Date and Time
On pressing the TIME/DATE softkey, the menu bearing the same name is displayed. The time and date
of the built-in battery-backed crystal clock can now be set. The time is for storing alarm messages
together with the time of the event and for specifying the time on printed reports.
Fig. 2.3-2 SETUP: TIME DATE menu

Press the TIME softkey to set the time. The time indicated is the system time at the moment of key
actuation. To change the time, enter the time required via the numeric keypad. The new time is set after
confirmation with the ENTER key. To change the date, press the DATE softkey and proceed in the
same way.
2.3.2.2 Remote
This menu enables the remote-control interfaces of the unit to be configured. Pressing the REMOTE
softkey in the main setup menu enters this menu.
Fig. 2.3-3 SETUP:REMOTE menu

 Setting the IEC/IEEE-bus address Menu: SETUP:REMOTE:IEC625 IEEE488
 Setting the RS232-interface parameters Menu: SETUP:REMOTE:RS232
2067.3004.12 2.3.2 E-14

2.3.2.2.1 IEC625-IEEE488 Menu - Setting the IEC/IEEE-Bus Address
The address for the IEC/IEEE-bus interface is entered here. This address must correspond to the
address used for the IEC/IEEE-bus controller to enable the remote control of the unit via the bus (see
section 3).
Fig. 2.3-4 SETUP:REMOTE:IEC625-IEEE488 menu

The entry is performed either by means of the cursor keys or via the numeric keypad. Values are
permissible in the range of 0 to 30.
2.3.2.2.2 RS232 Menu - Setting the RS232-Interface Parameters

The RS232-interface parameters are entered here. The interface parameters must correspond to the
parameters used for the controller (PC) to enable the remote control of the unit via RS232.
Fig. 2.3-5 SETUP:REMOTE:RS232 menu

After pressing one of the 5 softkeys, the associated parameter is directly set.
 BAUDRATE: data transfer rate in bit/s.
 DATABITS: number of data bits transferred per byte without parity bit.
 PARITY: check of data transfer by means of the parity bit. If NO is selected, no check will take place (since no parity
bit is transferred), EVEN is selected to check for even parity, ODD to check for odd parity.
 STOPBITS: number of stop bits set during transfer.
 HANDSHAKE: with NO there is no handshake. XON/XOFF is set if the additional signal lines (RTS, CTS, DTR) are not used
and there is only software handshake. If HARDWARE is set, these additional lines are used.
2067.3004.12 2.3.3 E-14

2.3.2.3 Printer Menu - Selecting the Type of Printer
The type of printer connected to the Centronics interface (X32) can be indicated in this menu.
Fig. 2.3-6 SETUP: PRINTER menu

The type of printer is selected by means of the PRINTER TYPE softkey. The following types of printer
are supported:
 EPSON COMP For all Epson RX80 compatible printers
 HP COMP For all HP compatible printers
 R&S PUD COMP For the ink-jet printer PUD3 from Rohde & Schwarz
With the FORMFEED softkey it is possible to select whether an automatic form feed should take place
or not after a print-out.
2.3.2.4 Level Units Menu
The unit for level indication is selected in this menu.
Fig. 2.3-7 SETUP:LEVEL UNITS menu

The measurement mask offers six level units:
 dBpW (dB, referred to the power of 1 pW)
 dBW (dB, referred to the power of 1  W)
 dBm (dB, referred to the power of 1 mW)
 dBV (dB, referred to the voltage of 1 V)
 dBmV (dB, referred to the voltage of 1 mV)
 V/mV (direct voltage indication).
2067.3004.12 2.3.4 E-14

The conversion is as follows:

Unit Impedance 50  Impedance 75 
V 1 V 1 V
-6 -6
= 10 V = 10 V
mV 1 mV = 1000 V 1 mV = 1000 V
dBV 0 dBV = 1 V 0 dBV = 1 V
dBmV 0 dBmV = 1 mV 0 dBmV = 1 mV
dBm 0 dBm =107 dBV 0 dBm = 108.8 dBV
dBpw 0 dBpW = 17 dBV 0 dBpW = 18.8 dBV
dBW 0 dBW = 77 dBV 0 dBW = 78.8 dBV
2.3.2.5 10 MHz Reference Menu
Available for EFA instruments supplied after 1 Jan. 2003.

By selecting the internal 10 MHz reference, the EFA-internal oscillator is used for all frequency-
determining components (synthesizer, counter, converter). In the EXTernal position, a 10 MHz reference
can be applied from an external source, enormously increasing the accuracy of some measurements
(especially the measurement of the frequency offset and the symbol rate offset in the case of digital
models).
The external 10 MHz reference signal is applied to the X36 connector. A level range from –20 dBm to
+16 dBm is permissible.
The 10 MHz signal is available at X37 for feeding other equipment. It exhibits a constant level and has
an excellent phase noise, as it is generated from the applied 10 MHz signal with the aid of a PLL. The
output level is typically +11 dBm.
2067.3004.12 2.3.5 E-14

2.3.3 Audio Menu
The AUDIO key is located on the front panel on the right of the audio connectors. It serves to get to the
AUDIO menu in which it is possible to set audio parameters such as volume, audio source and audio
mode (mono/stereo) and to call status data via the audio channels. This menu is shown below:
Fig. 2.3-8 AUDIO menu

The settings in the Audio menu affect the loudspeaker and the headphone. Only the audio source
selection affects the audio Lemo connectors on the front panel. The level of the Lemo audio outputs can
be set in the STATUS menu.
The different functions of the AUDIO menu are explained below:
 Loudspeaker on/off
 Volume control
 Selecting the audio source
 Selecting the audio mode (auto stereo, 1/L, 2/R)
2.3.3.1 Loudspeaker On/Off
The built-in loudspeaker can be switched on and off in the audio menu by pressing the SPEAKER
ON/OFF softkey. If a headphone is connected, the loudspeaker is automatically switched off. However,
this is not indicated in the audio menu.
2.3.3.2 Volume Control
In the audio menu, it is possible to vary the volume of the built-in loudspeaker and of headphone
between 0 and 100 % via the cursor keys or by numeric entry after pressing the VOLUME softkey.
2067.3004.12 2.3.6 E-14

2.3.3.3 Selecting the Audio Source
Several audio sources can be made available in the unit:

 FM sound (from analog demodulator module)
 NICAM sound (from NICAM demodulator)
 MPEG sound (from MPEG2 decoder)
Suitable audio sources can be selected via the MODE key. The current audio source is indicated at the
bottom of the audio menu (see Fig. in section 2.3.3). If a selection is possible and meaningful, e.g.
between FM sound and NICAM, this can be done via the AUDIO SOURCE softkey.
The selection of the audio source refers to the loudspeaker and headphone but also to front panel
connectors audio 1/L and 2/R. There are 2 pairs of audio connectors Audio A 1/L, 2/R and Audio B 1/L,
2/R on the rear panel. FM sound is always applied to the Audio A connectors and NICAM sound to
Audio B. MPEG sound is applied to connector X27 (alternatively to Audio B).
RF RF Front End
IF
Video
TV
Analog
Demodulator AUDIO A AUDIO
Rear SOURCE
1/L 2/R
balanced
NICAM
Demodulator AUDIO B AUDIO
Rear Front
1/L 2/R 1/L 2/R
balanced unbalanced
QAM
Demodulator
MPEG-2
Transport Stream
MPEG-2
Video
Decoder
Audio Rear
balanced
(X27)
IF
Fig. 2.3-9 Audio sources in the unit
2067.3004.12 2.3.7 E-14

2.3.3.4 Setting Audio Modes AUTO STEREO, 1/L, 2/R
The user can choose the sound carrier to be reproduced on the loudspeaker or the headphone by using
the 3 softkeys AUTO STEREO, 1/L and 2/R. In the AUTO STEREO mode and depending on the state
of the pilot carrier, the user will hear stereo, mono or sound carrier 1 in case of dual sound. L+R or 1/L is
reproduced in the loudspeaker. On pressing the 1/L softkey, L or sound carrier 1 is output both via the
loudspeaker and the headphone. On pressing the 2/R softkey, R or sound carrier 2 is emitted both via
the loudspeaker and the headphone.
The relationships are explained in the table below:
User-selected audio mode
Identification sent by
AUTOSTEREO 1/L 2/R
transmitter (PILOT)
loudspeaker = loudspeaker =
none, if sound carrier 2
MONO headphones = sound headphones = sound
is muted
carrier 1 carrier 1
loudspeaker = L+R loudspeaker = loudspeaker =
STEREO
headphones = stereo headphones = left headphones = right
loudspeaker = loudspeaker = loudspeaker =
DUAL SOUND
headphones = sound 1 headphones = sound 1 headphones = sound 2
2.3.3.5 Querying the Status of Audio Channels
It is possible to query the status of the two audio channels on the top left below the headbar. The audio
modes MONO, DUAL SOUND or STEREO appear next to the STATUS: text. Below it, the status of the
received sound carrier or NICAM carrier is indicated. The status message depends on the vision/sound
power ratio and on the sound demodulator mode selected in the STATUS: SOUND: SQUELCH menu. A
faulty sound carrier 1 causes the yellow AUDIO? LED to light up.
2067.3004.12 2.3.8 E-14

R&S® EFA TV Test Receiver for Analog Video Signals
2.4 Demodulation of AM-TV signals with IRT 2-Sound or NICAM Sound.......................2.4.1

2.4.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................2.4.1
2.4.1.1 IRT 2-Sound Mode...........................................................................................................2.4.2
2.4.1.2 MONO Mode ....................................................................................................................2.4.2
2.4.1.3 NICAM Sound Mode ........................................................................................................2.4.2
2.4.2 INPUT Menu / Input Selection .......................................................................................2.4.3
2.4.2.1 INPUT Menu / Input Selection for EFA Models 12/ 20/ 72/ 78.........................................2.4.3
2.4.2.2 INPUT Menu / Input Selection for EFA Models 23/ 33/ 83/ 89.........................................2.4.6
2.4.3 RF Menu ..........................................................................................................................2.4.9
2.4.4 Measured Values / MEASURE Key .............................................................................2.4.11
2.4.5 STATUS Menu ..............................................................................................................2.4.17
2.4.5.1 STATUS: GROUP DELAY Menu ...................................................................................2.4.19
2.4.5.2 STATUS: GAIN CONTROL Menu .................................................................................2.4.20
2.4.5.3 STATUS: AUTOMATIC FREQ CONTROL Menu ..........................................................2.4.21
2.4.5.4 STATUS: SOUND Mode ................................................................................................2.4.22
2.4.5.5 STATUS: SOUND: SQUELCH Menu.............................................................................2.4.24
2.4.5.6 STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE Menu............................................................................2.4.26
2.4.5.7 STATUS: MORE 1 / 2 and 2 / 2 Keys ............................................................................2.4.27
2.4.5.8 STATUS: SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR Menu............................................................2.4.27
2.4.5.9 STATUS: VIDEO SQUELCH Menu ...............................................................................2.4.28
2.4.6 Special Function ..........................................................................................................2.4.29
2.4.6.1 Channel definition...........................................................................................................2.4.29
2.4.6.2 NICAM............................................................................................................................2.4.30
2.4.6.3 Vision..............................................................................................................................2.4.31
2.4.6.3.1 RPC Display ...................................................................................................................2.4.31
2.4.6.3.2 Video Bandwidth ............................................................................................................2.4.31
2.4.6.4 Sound .............................................................................................................................2.4.32
2.4.6.4.1 MTS Pilot........................................................................................................................2.4.32
2.4.6.4.2 Reference FM Sound .....................................................................................................2.4.32
2.4.6.4.3 RPC Display ...................................................................................................................2.4.32
2.4.6.4.4 PILOT DEVIATION ........................................................................................................2.4.32
2.4.6.5 Nyquist Demodulator TV Standard M/N Mode...............................................................2.4.32
2.4.6.6 Nyquist Demodulator NICAM Sound Mode (only with option EFA-B2) ..........................2.4.33
2.4.7 Alarm Menu ...................................................................................................................2.4.34
2.4.8 Application Examples ..................................................................................................2.4.41
2.4.8.1 Application as a Relay Receiver.....................................................................................2.4.41
2.4.8.2 Monitoring and Quality Control of TV Transmitters ........................................................2.4.42
2.4.8.3 Monitoring and Quality Control of Broadband Cable Systems .......................................2.4.43
2.4.8.4 Measurement of Incidental Vision Carrier Phase Modulation (ICPM) ............................2.4.44
2.4.9 Preset and Menu Overview .........................................................................................2.4.45
2067.3004.12 2.4.1 E-14

TV Test Receiver for Analog Video Signals R&S® EFA
2067.3004.12 2.4.2 E-14

2.4 Demodulation of AM-TV signals with IRT 2-Sound or

NICAM Sound
2.4.1 Introduction
Nyquist test demodulators which ensure a system-compatible demodulation of the signals generated are
required for the accurate determination of the quality data of TV transmitters and transposers as well as
for the monitoring of the RF signals emitted by them. In addition, precision test receivers with high
selectivity and immunity to external interference are necessary for off-air monitoring and measurements
in broadband networks.
The TV TEST RECEIVER EFA for analog video signals is a Nyquist demodulator, ie it receives and
demodulates amplitude-modulated TV signals transmitted according to the vestigial-sideband method.
TV test receivers / demodulators are available for TV standards B/G, D/K, K1, I and M/N. In addition to a
constant video group delay, which is provided in each model of the TV TEST RECEIVER EFA, the
receiver / demodulator is equipped with a group-delay equalization required by the customer. The group-
delay equalization can be performed according to the following TV standards:
 TV standard B/G EUROPE (general)
 TV standard B/G EUROPE / 2 (reduction to half of group-delay values EUROPE)
 TV standard B/G SWEDEN
 TV standard B/G NORWAY
 TV standard B/G DENMARK
 TV standard B/G AUSTRALIA
 TV standard B/G NEW ZEALAND
 TV standard D/K CCIR, Report 308
 TV standard D/K OIRT, TK-III-830, CSR and Hungary
 TV standard D/K OIRT GUS, GOST 20532-75
 TV standard I BBC
 TV standard I SABC
 TV standard M/N, FCC, EIA 1977
 TV standard M/N, CBC, 1976
The demodulation of the frequency-modulated sound carriers is performed according to the intercarrier
method. In the standard model sound demodulation is according to the IRT 2-sound FM -carrier
method. If the TV test receiver is fitted with the option NICAM DEMODULATOR, the demodulation and
decoding of the NICAM carrier is performed according to the NICAM-sound method. The TV test
receivers for the TV standard M/N comply with the BTSC/MTS method for the demodulation of the
frequency-modulated sound carrier.
The TV TEST RECEIVER EFA is available as a TV test receiver with selective tracking input selection
and as a TV test demodulator without input selection.
The TV test receiver with tracking channel selection is suitable for the monitoring and quality control of
terrestrial TV signals and also for the monitoring of CATV systems.
The TV test demodulator with broadband RF input is particularly suited to the monitoring and quality
assurance of TV transmitters.
Applications in development laboratories, quality assurance and production control of TV consumer
units are possible thanks to this powerful unit.
2067.3004.12 2.4.1 E-14

2.4.1.1 IRT 2-Sound Mode
In the IRT 2-sound mode, the TV test receiver or the TV test demodulator EFA receives and
demodulates signals according to the TV standards B/G, D/K, K1, I or M/N. Sound demodulation is
according to the intercarrier method. With this method, the vision carrier is multiplied by the sound
carrier. The intercarrier obtained (vision carrier frequency - sound carrier frequency) is selected and
frequency-modulated. This method has the advantage that phase-deviation interference from
conversion oscillators as required in TV receivers does not appear in the demodulated audio signal. But
phase interference from the vision modulator (incidental carrier phase modulation, ICPM) is reflected in
the demodulated audio signal with this method. The TV TEST RECEIVER EFA detects these
interference and is therefore optimally suited for the measurement and monitoring of the sound quality
transmitted. The frequency-modulated sound signals are provided at the balanced outputs. The pilot
tone for identifying sound transmission is decoded and controls stereo dematrixing.
The following intercarrier frequencies are taken into account for the different TV standards:
Intercarrier frequency sound Intercarrier frequency sound

TV standard
carrier 1 carrier 2
B/G 5.5 MHz 5.742 MHz

D/K inner 2nd sound carrier 6.5 MHz 6.258 MHz
D/K outer 2nd sound carrier 6.5 MHz 6.742 MHz
I 6.0 MHz -
K1 6.5 MHz -
M/N 4.5 MHz -
Intercarrier frequencies of TV standards with sound transmission by frequency modulation
2.4.1.2 MONO Mode
The basic version of the TV TEST RECEIVER EFA is suitable for the reception of TV signals with two
frequency-modulated sound carriers. This mode is to be selected if TV signals with one FM sound
carrier and one QPSK-modulated NICAM carrier are to be received and the TV Test Receiver EFA is
not equipped with the option NICAM demodulator. This is to avoid faulty measurements and false
messages related to the 2nd FM carrier. Measurements requiring a second sound carrier are not
implemented in this mode. STATUS and ALARM settings in this connection are also not possible. This
mode is selected in the MODE menu.
2.4.1.3 NICAM Sound Mode
The NICAM DEMODULATOR option allows demodulation of the NICAM signal emitted by a TV
transmitter. It enables all the NICAM signal components to be measured and checked. In addition to
providing maximum audio signal quality at the balanced outputs, the NICAM demodulator / decoder
offers the following features:
 Option in the model for standard B/G or I
 Measurement of bit error rate and decoding margin
 Outputs for the I and Q components of the QPSK-demodulated carrier with associated trigger signal
 NICAM-728 data stream output
 Input for decoding a NICAM-728 data stream with internal clock recovery
 Intercarrier input
The NICAM sound mode can be selected in the mode menu.
2067.3004.12 2.4.2 E-14

2.4.2 INPUT Menu / Input Selection
2.4.2.1 INPUT Menu / Input Selection for EFA Models 12/ 20/ 72/ 78
Note: This section describes the INPUT menu for EFA with selective receive section. The INPUT
menu for the broadband demodulator model of EFA (with or without option EFA-B3) is
described in the following section.
The settings for input selection, attenuator control, the selection of tuner and mixer level control and
preamplifier control can be made in the INPUT menu.
Fig. 2.4-1 INPUT menu of EFA models 12/ 20/ 72/ 78
The RF input of the selective TV test receiver is selected in the INPUT menu by means of the
RECEIVER softkey. After pressing the RECEIVER key, the input impedance, the RF input connected
and the current setting of the RF input attenuator are indicated on the display. The model desired by the
user is to be specified on ordering the unit. The display signals which RF input connector is connected.
The IF key enables the IF input of the TV test receiver / demodulator to be activated. The input
impedance is 50 . The input is located on the rear panel and is marked X10. The IF depends on the
model and the operating mode.
EFA model IF of vision carrier IF of QAM signal

.12 38.90 MHz -
.20 - 36.00 MHz
.72 45.75 MHz -
.78 38.90 MHz -
Option EFA-B1 - 36.00 MHz
2067.3004.12 2.4.3 E-14

Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode:

The INPUT: AUXILIARY menu can only be selected in the NYQUIST DEMODULATOR NICAM SOUND
mode. Option EFA-B2 (NICAM demodulator) is required. In the NYQUIST DEMODULATOR FM
SOUND mode the AUXILIARY key is not displayed so that this menu cannot be selected.
Fig. 2.4-2 INPUT: AUXILIARY menu in Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode
The following inputs can be activated in this menu:
NICAM INP: IF enables the IF input of the NICAM option to be selected. The NICAM
demodulator module receives the signal either from the RF or the IF input
depending on whether RECEIVER/DEMODULATOR or IF has been selected
as input in the INPUT menu.
NICAM INP: INTERC enables the NICAM intercarrier input X19 on the rear panel to be activated.
The applied signal is fed to the NICAM demodulator via this input. The
intercarrier frequency depends on the standard installed. The intercarrier
frequency is 5.85 MHz for TV standard B/G. It is 6.552 MHz for TV standard I.
With NICAM DATA: INT the NICAM data signal resulting from the demodulation of the RF/IF or
intercarrier signal is internally transferred to the NICAM decoder which obtains
the audio signal via a D/A converter.
NICAM DATA: EXT enables the NICAM DATA input X17 on the rear panel to be activated. The
NICAM-728 data stream applied is taken to the NICAM decoder via this input.
A clock signal can be applied to the NICAM CLOCK input X18 to synchronize
the data stream. If no clock signal is applied, the clock signal is generated
internally from the data signal.
NIC INTERC: SOV enables a SOV signal (sound over video) to be processed instead of the
normal NICAM intercarrier signal. This requires an additional SOV board on
the NICAM module. With NIC INTERC: NORM the normal mode can be
restored. If there is no additional board, the menu item NIC INTERC does not
appear.
2067.3004.12 2.4.4 E-14

The ATTEN... key is for selecting the INPUT: ATTENUATION menu. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.4-3 INPUT: RECEIVER ATTENUATION menu

The settings for input attenuation, selection of tuner and mixer level control and preamplifier are made in
the INPUT: ATTENUATION menu.
The attenuator is set manually or automatically by means of the ATTEN AUTO MAN key.
With MAN, the attenuator is controlled manually; it can be controlled in 5 dB steps in the 0 dB to 55 dB
range. Setting is possible via the down  or up 
cursor keys, or directly via the numeric keypad and the
Enter key. In the case of direct entry, the numeric value entered is rounded off to n*5.
With Auto, the attenuator is controlled automatically as a function of the measured input level. The
thresholds listed below apply to the NYQUIST DEMODULATOR... operating modes. A switch hysteresis
of ±1 dB is effective.
Attenuator settings Thresholds in
with ATTENuation NYQUIST DEMODULATOR ...
AUTO operating mode
0 dB <-26 dBm
5 dB <-26 dBm to 21dBm
10 dB -21 dBm to -16 dBm
30 dB -1 dBm to +4 dBm
35 dB +4 dBm to +9 dBm
50 dB +19 dBm to +24dBm
55 dB >+24 dBm
The LOW NOISE and LOW DIST keys are used to determine the control of the receive section. In the
LOW NOISE setting, the weighted video S/N ratio (inherent noise) of receive levels exceeding –31 dBm
is typ. 64 dB. In the LOW DISTortion setting, it is typ. 59 dB. In LOW DISTortion, intermodulation
suppression of the receiver increases, i.e. the IP3 of the TV test receiver increases by 5 dB, resulting in
a 10 dB improvement of the inherent intermodulation suppression. Refer to the data sheet for detailed
information.
The 10dB PREAMP key is used to switch on a low-noise 10 dB preamplifier, resulting in an improved
receiver noise figure. This comes in useful when receiving low-level TV signals. Correct attenuator
control is taken into account in automatic operation.
2067.3004.12 2.4.5 E-14

2.4.2.2 INPUT Menu / Input Selection for EFA Models 23/ 33/ 83/ 89
Note: This section describes the INPUT menu for the broadband demodulator model of EFA
(with or without option EFA-B3). The INPUT menu for EFA with selective receive section is
described in the previous section.
The settings for input selection, attenuator control and selection of the mixer level can be made in the
INPUT menu.
Fig. 2.4-4 INPUT menu of demodulator model with RF Preselection EFA-B3
The DEMOD key enables the broadband RF input to be activated. The RF input X21 is an N connector
located on the rear panel and has an impedance of 50 . On the TV test demodulator model without
optional selective receive section (EFA-B3) the RECEIVER and RF INPUT keys are not displayed and
thus cannot be selected.
If option EFA-B3 is fitted, the INPUT menu as shown in Fig. 2.4-4 is displayed. The user can now
choose between a broadband demodulator input (50 , DEMOD key), two selective receiver inputs
(50 and 75 , RECEIVER key) and an IF input (50 , IF key). Switchover between the 50  and 75 
input of the receiver is possible by pressing repeatedly the RF INPUT key (toggle switch).
EFA model IF of vision carrier IF of QAM signal

.23 - 36.00 MHz
.33 38.90 MHz -
.83 45.75 MHz -
.89 38.90 MHz -
Option EFA-B1 - 36.00 MHz
All four inputs are located on the rear panel (X21 = RF 50 DEMOD, X9 = RF 75  RECEIVER, X22 =
RF 50  RECEIVER, X10 = 50 IF).
2067.3004.12 2.4.6 E-14


The INPUT: AUXILIARY menu can only be selected in the NYQUIST DEMODULATOR NICAM SOUND
mode. Option EFA-B2 (NICAM demodulator) is required. In the NYQUIST DEMODULATOR FM
SOUND mode the AUXILIARY key is not displayed so that this menu cannot be selected.
Fig. 2.4-5 INPUT: AUXILIARY menu in Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode
The following inputs can be activated in this mode:

NICAM INP: IF enables the IF input of the NICAM option to be selected. The NICAM
demodulator module receives the signal either from the RF or the IF input
depending on whether RECEIVER, DEMODULATOR or IF has been selected
as input in the INPUT menu
NICAMINP: INTERC enables the NICAM intercarrier input X19 on the rear panel to be activated.
The applied signal is fed to the NICAM demodulator via this input. The
intercarrier frequency depends on the standard installed. The intercarrier
frequency is 5.85 MHz for TV standard B/G. It is 6.552 MHz for TV standard I.
With NICAM DATA: INT the NICAM data signal resulting from the demodulation of the RF/IF or
intercarrier signal is internally transferred to the NICAM decoder which obtains
the audio signal via a D/A converter.
NICAM DATA: EXT enables the NICAM DATA input X17 on the rear panel to be activated. The
NICAM-728 data stream applied is taken to the NICAM decoder via this input.
A clock signal can be applied to the NICAM CLOCK input X18 to synchronize
the data stream. If no clock signal is applied, the clock signal is generated
internally from the data signal.
NIC INTERC: SOV enables a SOV signal (sound over video) to be processed instead of the
normal NICAM intercarrier signal. This requires an additional SOV board on
the NICAM module.
With NIC INTERC: NORM the normal mode can be restored. If there is no additional board,
the menu item NIC INTERC does not appear.
2067.3004.12 2.4.7 E-14

Fig. 2.4-6 INPUT: DEMODULATOR: ATTENUATION menu of demodulator model
After selection of the broadband RF input (INPUT: DEMOD), the INPUT: DEMODULATOR:
ATTENUATION menu as shown in Fig. 2.4-6 can be selected with the ATTEN... key.
With AUTO setting, the attenuator switch and a preamplifier are automatically controlled as a function of
the RF input level. The switching thresholds are approx. 180 mV (105 dBV) and 700 mV (117 dBV),
each with a hysteresis of ±1 dB. The attenuator can also be switched manually.
With MANUAL LOW+PREAMP setting, input levels from approx. 3 mV (70 dBV) can be levelled out
and processed without distortion up to approx. 280 mV (109 dBV).
With MANUAL LOW setting, input levels from approx. 10 mV (80 dBV) are levelled out and processed
without distortion up to approx. 900 mV (119 dBV).
With MANUAL HIGH setting, input levels from approx. 30 mV (90 dBV) are levelled out and processed
without distortion up to approx. 2800 mV (129 dBV).
Fig. 2.4-7 RECEIVER: ATTENUATION menu

of demodulator model with RF Preselector EFA-B3
If option EFA-B3 is fitted and RECEIVER setting selected in the INPUT menu, the menu shown in Fig.
2.4-7 is displayed after pressing the ATTEN... key. The user can select automatic or manual attenuator
control (ATTEN AUTO / MAN). The attenuator can be set in a range from 0 to 55 dB.
Irrespective of the attenuator control (AUTO / MAN), the receive characteristics of the unit can be
optimized for the respective conditions.
2067.3004.12 2.4.8 E-14

LOW NOISE setting is provided for the reception of weak signals (from 30 dBV for analog TV
signals). The required low noise figure is achieved with the aid of an appropriate gain
of the RF input stage, trading off the large-signal immunity.
With NORMAL setting, a good compromise is achieved between noise figure and large-signal
immunity. Signals from 40 dBV (analog TV signals) can be received.
The LOW DIST (= low distortion) setting is for critical receiving conditions with dense channel
occupancy (EG CATV) or strong adjacent-channel transmitters, where low
intermodulation distortion (high large-signal immunity) is important. The noise figure
is slightly increased as compared to the NORMAL setting.
2.4.3 RF Menu
The RF menu is selected by means of the RF key in the MAIN FUNCTION block. The vision carrier
receive frequency can be set in this menu.
Fig. 2.4-8 RF menu in the Nyquist demodulator mode
The receive frequency can be set in different ways:

 After pressing the RF key, the current vision carrier receive frequency appears on the display. The
receive frequency can then be entered directly via the numeric keypad with a frequency resolution of
1 Hz or varied via the cursor keys.
 After pressing the CHANNEL key, a channel from the selected channel/frequency table can be set
via the numeric keypad or by means of the cursor keys.
 After pressing the SPECIAL CHANNEL key, a channel from the selected special channel/frequency
table can be set via the numeric keypad or by means of the cursor keys.
 After pressing the RCL RF key and entering the RF memory number, a receive frequency previously
stored with STO RF in the RF MEMORY can be set again. The RF memory number can be selected
via the numeric keypad or by means of the cursor keys. If the receive frequency is selected via the
RCL RF function, the RF memory number and the associated text are displayed in the head line
(see STO RF).
Note: If the IF input has been selected in the INPUT menu, all the softkeys in the RF menu
appear in italics and cannot be operated.
The STO RF key enables the set RF to be stored in the RF memory. After pressing the STO RF key, the
RF memory number required can be entered via the numeric keypad and confirmed by ENTER. A text
allocated to the RF memory number previously selected can now be edited by pressing the EDIT TEXT
key.
2067.3004.12 2.4.9 E-14

Fig. 2.4-9 RF: STO: EDIT TEXT menu in the Nyquist demodulator mode
 After pressing the EDIT TEXT key, the character set available appears on the display. The
characters can be selected via the cursor keys in the variation block. Using the GETCHAR key, the
character selected is included in the MEMORY TEXT. The keys RIGHT and LEFT enable the cursor
to be moved to the right or the left in the MEMORY TEXT. The DELCHAR key is for erasing the
character in front of the MEMORY TEXT cursor. Seven characters are permissible at maximum to
identify the RF memory number. The ENTER key (softkey or hardkey) enables the MEMORY TEXT
to be allocated to the RF memory number selected and appears on the top right of the display.
2067.3004.12 2.4.10 E-14

2.4.4 Measured Values / MEASURE Key

The MEASURE key in the MAIN FUNCTION block enables the MEASURE menu to be selected. All the
measured values acquired are indicated in the MEASURE menu.
Fig. 2.4-10 MEASURE menu in the Nyquist demodulator FM sound mode
Fig. 2.4-11 MEASURE menu in the Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode
2067.3004.12 2.4.11 E-14

The measured values are divided into vision carrier and sound carrier measurements. The following
measured values are displayed:
VISION CARRIER
LEVEL: The vision carrier level of the activated input is measured. The measured value
corresponds to the rms value during the sync pulse. The units dBpW, dBW, dBm,
dBV, dBmV and V/mV can be selected in the SETUP: LEVEL UNITS menu. The
measurement range for the TV test receiver (EFA models .12 / .72 / .78) and for the
TV demodulator (EFA models .33 / .83 / .89) is as follows (50 models):
TV test receiver (EFA models 12/ 72/ 78)
for the RF input: for the IF input:
30 dBV to 120 dBV 80 dBV to 106 dBV
-30 dBmV to 60 dBmV 20 dBmV to 46 dBmV
-77 dBm to +13 dBm -27 dBm to -1 dBm
13 dBpW to 103 dBpW 63 dBpW to 89 dBpW
-17 dBW to 73 dBW 33 dBW to 59 dBW
30 V to 1000 mV 10 mV to 200 mV
TV demodulator (EFA models 33/ 83/ 89)

for the RF input: for the IF input:
80 dBV to 128 dBV 94 dBV to 111 dBV
20 dBmV to 68 dBmV 34 dBmV to 51 dBmV
-27 dBm to +21 dBm -13 dBm to 4 dBm
63 dBpW to 111 dBpW 77 dBpW to 94 dBpW
33 dBW to 81 dBW 47 dBW to 64 dBW
10 mV to 2500 mV 50 mV to 350 mV
If the vision carrier level at the activated input is out of the defined input level range,
this is indicated by UNDER or OVER.
SET RF is the vision carrier receive frequency set by the user. The selectable vision carrier
receive range depends on the TV standard and the version of the TV receiver /
demodulator. The resolution of the synthesizer is 1 Hz.
MEASURED RF is the vision carrier receive frequency measured. The vision carrier frequency is
indicated in the range of the set RF 500 kHz with a resolution of 20 Hz. A
prerequisite for a display is that the vision carrier is available with a frequency offset
smaller than 500 kHz.
CONTROLLED RF is the vision carrier receive frequency which the TV test receiver has set after
a correction by the digital automatic frequency control AFC.
2067.3004.12 2.4.12 E-14

Additional test parameter:
RPC or MOD DEPTH if option EFA-B8 RESIDUAL PICTURE CARRIER (RPC) is fitted.
Fig. 2.4-12 MEASURE menu with residual carrier measurement

(RPC, only with option EFA-B8)
RPC (RESIDUAL PICTURE CARRIER) is the residual carrier measured in %.

MOD DEPTH Alternatively, switchover to MOD DEPTH (modulation depth = 100 % - RPC) can be made
via a setting in the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu. A zero reference pulse (internal or
external; setting see STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE) as well as a white reference bar are
required (line selection see STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE).
SOUND CARRIER in Nyquist demodulator FM sound mode

VISION/SOUND1 CARRIER RATIO is the power ratio in dB between the vision carrier and sound
carrier 1. The measured value is indicated in the range 7 to 28 dB with a resolution of 0.1 dB.
VISION/SOUND2 CARRIER RATIO is the power ratio in dB between the vision carrier and sound
carrier 2. The measured value is indicated in the range 14 to 35 dB with a resolution of 0.1 dB.
INTERCARRIER1 FREQUENCY is the frequency difference between the vision carrier and sound
carrier 1. The frequency is indicated with a resolution of 0.1 kHz. The intercarrier frequency
depends on the TV standard and is indicated in the range of the nominal intercarrier frequency
50 kHz. Other prerequisite is that the vision carrier and sound carrier 1 are available.
INTERCARRIER2 FREQUENCY is the frequency difference between the vision carrier and sound
carrier 2. The frequency is indicated with a resolution of 0.1 kHz. The intercarrier frequency
50 kHz. Another prerequisite is that the vision carrier and sound carrier 2 are available.
FM DEVIATION SOUND 1 is the FM deviation of sound carrier 1. The FM deviation is indicated in
the range 0 to 80 kHz with a resolution of 0.1 kHz. Prerequisite for the display is that the vision
carrier and sound carrier 1 are available.
FM DEVIATION SOUND 2 is the FM deviation of sound carrier 2. The FM deviation is indicated in
the range 0 to 80 kHz with a resolution of 0.1 kHz. Prerequisite for the display is that the vision
carrier and sound carrier 2 are available.
FM DEVIATION PILOT is the FM deviation of the pilot tone modulated onto the 2nd sound carrier.
The FM deviation is indicated in the range 0 to 7 kHz with a resolution of 0.01 kHz.
Prerequisite for the display is that the vision carrier and sound carrier 2 are available.
2067.3004.12 2.4.13 E-14

PILOT FREQUENCY is the frequency of the pilot tone. The pilot tone frequency is indicated in the
range 54.6875 kHz 500 Hz with a resolution of 2 Hz. Prerequisite for the display is that the
vision carrier, sound carrier 2 and the pilot tone are available.
PILOT is the pilot tone information which serves for the automatic control of the stereo matrixing
and for switching off the 2nd audio channel. Prerequisite for decoding the pilot tone is that the
vision carrier, sound carrier 2 and the pilot tone are available.
SOUND CARRIER in Nyquist demodulator FM sound MONO mode

VISION/SOUND CARRIER RATIO is the power ratio between vision carrier and sound carrier in
dB. The measured value is displayed in the range 7 to 28 dB with a resolution of 0.1 dB
INTERCARRIER FREQUENCY is the frequency difference between vision carrier and sound
carrier. The frequency is displayed with a resolution of 0.1 kHz. The intercarrier frequency
50 kHz. Another prerequisite is that vision carrier and sound carrier are available.
FM DEVIATION SOUND is the FM deviation of the sound carrier. The FM deviation is indicated in
the range 0 to 80 kHz with a resolution of 0.1 kHz. Prerequisite for the display is that vision
carrier and sound carrier are available.
2067.3004.12 2.4.14 E-14

SOUND CARRIER in Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode
NICAM VISION/SOUND Power ratio between vision carrier and NICAM sound carrier
CARRIER RATIO: Range: 13 to 34 dB
Resolution: 0.1 dB
NICAM EYE-HEIGHT: Eye height of the NICAM signal.
The measurement of the eye height consists in evaluating the I and Q signal
(positive and negative halfwave).
Range: 10 to 100 %
Resolution: 1%
NICAM BER: BER (bit error rate).
The elapsed measurement time and the gate delay are shown in brackets.
The gate delay is switched automatically according to the current BER value.
Range: 2E-9 to 1E-2
Resolution: 0.2E-x
NICAM DATA JITTER: Frequency jitter of the NICAM data signal
(AF: 10 to 120 Hz, -3 dB)
Range: 0 to 50 Hz
Resolution: 1 Hz
NICAM FRAME: Frame sync in the NICAM data signal available or not
NICAM MODE: NICAM mode:
UNDEF,
STEREO,
MONO1 + MONO2,
MONO + DATA,
DATA
The NICAM mode corresponds to the information in the NICAM control bits
C1 to C3.
NICAM FM RESERVE: FM reserve available or not.
With FM reserve the FM sound contains the same sound information as the
NICAM sound, ie if the NICAM sound fails switching to the FM sound is
possible. The reserve sound switching flag is the fifth NICAM control bit (C4).
NICAM HEADROOM: Headroom threshold (approx. 0.7 dB below digital overload level) overranged
by one of the two NICAM audio channels.
The Signal? LED lights up in case of overrange or underrange of the measurement NICAM
VISION/SOUND CARRIER RATIO or NICAM INTERCARRIER LEVEL or if the NICAM data signal
is missing.
The SYNC? LED lights up when the frame is missing.
The AUDIO? LED lights up when the headroom is overranged.
2067.3004.12 2.4.15 E-14

SOUND CARRIER in NYQUIST DEMODULATOR STD M/N mode

VISION/SOUND CARRIER RATIO is the power ratio between vision carrier and sound carrier in
dB. The measured value is indicated in the range 7 to 28 dB with a resolution of 0.1 dB.
INTERCARRIER FREQUENCY is the frequency difference between vision carrier and sound
carrier. The frequency is displayed with a resolution of 0.1 kHz. The intercarrier frequency
depends on the TV standard and is indicated in the range 4.5 MHz 50 kHz. Another
prerequisite is that vision carrier and sound carrier are available.
FM DEVIATION SOUND is the FM deviation of the sound carrier. The FM deviation is indicated in
carrier and sound carrier are available.
FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT is the FM deviation of the pilot tone. The FM deviation is indicated in
carrier and sound carrier 2 are available. This value is only displayed if in the SPECIAL
FUNCTION menu PILOT DETECTION MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND ON has been selected.
PILOT FREQUENCY is the frequency of the pilot tone. The pilot tone frequency is indicated in the
range 15.734 kHz 500 Hz with a resolution of 2 Hz. Prerequisite for the display is that vision
carrier, sound carrier and pilot tone available. The pilot frequency is only displayed if in the
SPECIAL FUNCTION menu PILOT DETECTION MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND ON has been
selected.
2067.3004.12 2.4.16 E-14

2.4.5 STATUS Menu

The STATUS key in the MAIN FUNCTION block is for selecting the STATUS menu. In the STATUS
menu, all important device settings of the demodulation mode selected in the MODE menu are
indicated. The settings for input selection, attenuator control, selection of the mixer level control and the
preamplifier are to be made in the INPUT menu.
Fig. 2.4-13 STATUS menu in the Nyquist demodulator FM sound mode
Fig. 2.4-14 STATUS menu in the Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode
The following settings are indicated:

 the mode for the digital automatic frequency setting: AFC
 the RF deviation at which the AFC corrects the frequency setting: AFC THRESHOLD
 the control of the zero reference: ZERO REFERENCE
 the control of the IF gain: GAIN CONTROL
 the mode for the synchronous detector: SYNCHRON DETECTOR
 the group delay equalization selected: GROUP DELAY
 the RF input level at which the automatic squelch of video outputs is activated: VIDEO SQUELCH
THRESHOLD
 the CVS 0-level at the video output with automatic level regulation: AGC VIDEO LEVEL
 the automatic squelch control of audio outputs: SOUND 1 SQUELCH and SOUND 2 SQUELCH
2067.3004.12 2.4.17 E-14

 the switching thresholds at which the automatic squelch of audio outputs is activated:
THRES VIS/SND1 and THRES VIS/SND2
 the audio output level at a deviation of 30 kHz and a signal frequency of 400 Hz: SOUND LEVEL
 the control of stereo dematrixing: STEREO DEMATRIX
 the control of sound deemphasis: SOUND DEEMPHASIS
Note: In the NYQUIST DEMODULATOR FM MONO SOUND and NYQUIST DEMODULATOR

NICAM SOUND modes, the settings for the 2nd sound carrier are not necessary.
The following is additionally indicated in the Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode (option EFA-B2):
DEEMPHASIS FM SOUND: corresponds to DEEMPHASIS SOUND

SQUELCH FM SOUND: corresponds to SQUELCH SOUND1
SQUELCH NICAM SOUND: squelch mode for the NICAM audio outputs
FM SOUND LEVEL: corresponds to SOUND LEVEL
2067.3004.12 2.4.18 E-14

2.4.5.1 STATUS: GROUP DELAY Menu
The STATUS:GROUP DELAY menu is selected in the STATUS menu via the GROUP DELAY softkey.
Fig. 2.4-15 STATUS: GROUP DELAY menu
In the standard version, it is possible to choose between a flat group delay FLAT and a country-specific
receiver group delay equalization STD1. The TV test receivers / TV test demodulators are available with
the following receiver equalizations:
 TV standard B/G EUROPE (general)
 TV standard B/G EUROPE / 2 (reduction to half of group-delay values EUROPE)
 TV standard B/G SWEDEN
 TV standard B/G NORWAY
 TV standard B/G DENMARK
 TV standard B/G AUSTRALIA
 TV standard B/G NEW ZEALAND
 TV standard D/K CCIR, Report 308
 TV standard D/K OIRT, TK-III-830, CSR and Hungary
 TV standard D/K OIRT GUS, GOST 20532-75
 TV standard I BBC
 TV standard I SABC
 TV standard M/N, FCC, EIA 1977
 TV standard M/N, CBC, 1976
The receiver equalization required is to be specified on ordering the unit.

If receiver equalization to TV standard B/G EUROPE is required, an additional receiver equalization can
be optionally selected according to any other TV standard. This receiver equalization can be selected in
the STATUS: GROUP DELAY menu with the STD2 key.
2067.3004.12 2.4.19 E-14

2.4.5.2 STATUS: GAIN CONTROL Menu
The STATUS: GAIN CONTROL menu is selected from the STATUS menu via the GAIN CONTROL
softkey.
Fig. 2.4-16 STATUS: GAIN CONTROL menu
In the STATUS: GAIN CONTROL menu, it is possible to select the mode for the IF gain control and the
CVS 0-level at the video output in case of automatic level control.
The TV test receiver / TV test demodulator EFA is provided with an automatic level control for selection
of the control bandwidth. In the AUTO FAST mode, low-frequency level variations of the input signal (eg
50 Hz) are almost completely eliminated. This mode is therefore useful when the unit is used as a relay
receiver. In the AUTO SLOW mode, low-frequency level variations of the input signal remain. Level
variations can be evaluated via the video signal at the video output. This mode corresponds to the
typical test receiver setting. The controlled variable in the AUTO GAIN CONTROL AGC mode depends
on the applied signal. If a signal is applied without sync pulses, the IF amplitude is regulated via a quasi-
peak-responding detector. If a carrier signal modulated with sync pulses is applied, the sync pulse of the
video signal at the video output is the controlled variable. The CVS 0 amplitude is regulated.
The magnitude of the video signal at the video output can be set in AGC via the AGC VIDEO LEVEL
key. The amplitude of the CVS 0-signal is set at the video output with a termination of 75 . The VIDEO
LEVEL can be set in mV by a numeric entry at the DATA block and confirmed by means of the ENTER
key on the VARIATION block or with the cursor keys on the VARIATION block. The amplitude of the
CVS 0-signal can be set between 800 and 1500 mV.
The automatic level control can be switched off to determine accurately level variations and to perform
sweep measurements without sync pulses at a slow sweep (sweep time). This mode is selected by
means of the MANUAL key. The IF gain setting element has a typical gain of 34 dB and is provided via
an 8-bit D/A converter. The MANUAL GAIN can be set by a numeric entry at the DATA block and a
confirmed by means of the ENTER key on the VARIATION block or with the cursor keys on the
VARIATION block. The entry range is 0 to 255, 0 being the minimum and 255 the maximum IF gain.
Internal level meters are provided as a setting aid to ensure the correct level control of the receiver /
demodulator in this mode. If a signal without sync pulses is applied, the measured value IF LEVEL
serves as a setting aid. The value indicated in percent corresponds to the nominal level at the
synchronous detector or at the IF output. If a signal with sync pulses is applied, the nominal video output
level is indicated in percent.
2067.3004.12 2.4.20 E-14

2.4.5.3 STATUS: AUTOMATIC FREQ CONTROL Menu
The STATUS: AUTOMATIC FREQ CONTROL menu is selected from the STATUS menu via the AUTO
FREQ CONTROL softkey.
Fig. 2.4-17 STATUS: AUTOMATIC FREQ CONTROL menu
The settings for the digital input frequency control AFC can be performed in the STATUS: AUTOMATIC
FREQ CONTROL menu.
The AFC is switched off by means of the AFC OFF key. This means that a frequency offset between the
set vision carrier receive frequency SET RF and the applied vision carrier frequency MEASURED RF
causes an error in the Nyquist filtering and the subsequent demodulation. This mode corresponds to the
typical test receiver / test demodulator setting which enables vision carrier frequency errors to be
detected in the demodulated signal.
With the AFC SINGLE key, it is possible to perform a single correction of the set vision carrier receive
frequency. The prerequisite for a correction is that the difference between the selected vision carrier
receive frequency SET RF and the measured vision carrier frequency MEASURED RF is higher than
the set AFC THRESHOLD. If this is the case, the synthesizer is set to the vision carrier frequency set
CONTROLLED RF. The setting is performed with a resolution of 100 Hz. If the frequency offset of the
vision carrier is smaller than the AFC THRESHOLD, the vision carrier receive frequency setting is not
corrected (CONTROLLED RF = SET RF).
The vision carrier offset frequency is permanently monitored by means of the AFC CONTINUOUS key.
As soon as the frequency difference between the set vision carrier receive frequency CONTROLLED
RF and the measured vision carrier frequency MEASURED RF is higher than the set AFC
THRESHOLD, the vision carrier receive frequency setting is corrected.
The AFC THRESHOLD key enables the AFC THRESHOLD to be set in steps of 1 kHz in the range 1 to
500 kHz. The setting is performed by a numeric entry at the DATA block and confirmed by means of the
ENTER key on the VARIATION block or with the cursor keys on the VARIATION block.
2067.3004.12 2.4.21 E-14

2.4.5.4 STATUS: SOUND Mode
The STATUS: SOUND menu is selected from the STATUS menu via the SOUND softkey.
Fig. 2.4-18 STATUS: SOUND menu in the Nyquist demodulator FM sound mode
Fig. 2.4-19 STATUS: SOUND menu in the Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode
2067.3004.12 2.4.22 E-14

The settings for deemphasis, squelch, output level and stereo dematrixing can be made in the STATUS:
SOUND menu.
The DEEMPHASIS ON / OFF key is used for switching the sound deemphasis on and off. The time
constant of the receiver deemphasis is 50 s with TV standards B/G, D/K, K1 and I. The time constant
for TV standard M/N is 75 s.
The audio output level can be set with the SOUND LEVEL key. On delivery, the unit generates a level of
+6 dBm at a frequency deviation of 30 kHz and signal frequency of 400 Hz with 600  at the audio
outputs AUDIO MAIN. This preset value can be set in steps of 0.1 dB in the range 0 to 10 dBm. This
setting affects both audio channels.
For TV standard M/N the output level of the audio mono output can be set relative to 25 kHz FM
deviation. The setting range is -6 to +6 dBm. The factory-set value is +4.2 dBm. This corresponds to a
voltage of 1.25 V into 600 .
The STEREO DEMATRIX key is used to control stereo dematrixing. In the AUTO position, stereo
dematrixing is activated when the pilot tone deviation is greater than 1.7 kHz and the pilot tone is
amplitude-modulated with the stereo frequency. In the FIXED STEREO position, stereo dematrixing is
always active.
In the NYQUIST DEMODULATOR FM SOUND MONO, NYQUIST DEMODULATOR STD M/N and
NYQUIST DEMODULATOR NICAM SOUND modes, stereo dematrixing is always off and cannot be
selected.
DEEMPH FM: corresponds to DEEMPHASIS

DEEMPH NIC: switching on and off the deemphasis (J17) for the NICAM audio outputs
SQUELCH FM: corresponds to SQUELCH (no SOUND2)
2067.3004.12 2.4.23 E-14

2.4.5.5 STATUS: SOUND: SQUELCH Menu
The SQUELCH key is used to open the STATUS: SOUND: SQUELCH menu.
Fig. 2.4-20 STATUS: SOUND: SQUELCH menu in Nyquist demodulator FM sound mode
Fig. 2.4-21 STATUS: SOUND: SQUELCH NIC menu in the Nyquist demodulator NICAM
sound mode
The SQUELCH AUTO / MAN key is used to switch off and manually control the automatic squelch of
the audio outputs. In manual squelch control, the squelch of audio channels can be individually
controlled by means of the keys SOUND1 ON / OFF and SOUND2 ON / OFF.
The keys THRESHOLD SND1 SQUELCH and THRESHOLD SND2 SQUELCH are used to set the
power ratios between vision carrier and sound carriers at which the automatic squelch mutes the audio
channels. The entry for the VISION SOUND 1 THRESHOLD can be performed in steps of 1 dB in the
range 13 to 28 dB. The entry for the threshold value VISION SOUND 2 THRESHOLD can be performed
in steps of 1 dB in the range 20 to 35 dB. The settings are performed by numeric entry at the DATA
block and confirmed by means of the ENTER key on the VARIATION block or with the cursor keys on
the VARIATION block.
If a sound carrier is squelched (manually or automatically), the corresponding measured values are
suppressed in the Measure menu. If sound 1 is squelched in the AUTO mode, the AUDIO? LED lights
up. The absence of a sound carrier 2 is normal operating status (eg with MONO) and is not signalled by
the AUDIO? LED. If sound 1 or sound 2 have been manually switched off (special operating status),
this will be signalled in any case by the AUDIO? LED.
2067.3004.12 2.4.24 E-14

Note: In the NYQUIST DEMODULATOR FM SOUND MONO, NYQUIST DEMODULATOR STD

M/N and NYQUIST DEMODULATOR NICAM SOUND modes, the settings for the 2nd FM
sound carrier cannot be performed.
For TV standard M/N the setting range of SQUELCH THRESHOLD VISION SOUND is 10
to 25 dB.
SQUELCH NIC: Automatic or manual squelch of the NICAM audio outputs

NIC SOUND: Squelch with manual squelch control
TRESHOLD VIS/NIC SND: Threshold of the vision/NICAM sound power ratio for automatic squelch
(input: RF/IF)
TRESHOLD INTERC: Threshold of the NICAM intercarrier level for automatic squelch (input:
NICAM intercarrier)
TRESHOLD EYE-HEIGHT: Threshold of eye height for automatic squelch
TRESHOLD BER: Threshold of BER (bit error rate) for automatic squelch
(squelch ON if THRESHOLD BER is overranged,
squelch OFF if THRESHOLD BER * 0.7 is underranged)
Setting range of switching thresholds for automatic audio squelch:
Lower setting limit Upper setting limit
NICAM VISION/SND CARR RATIO 13 dB 34 dB

NICAM INTERC LEVEL 83 dBV 104 dBV
NICAM EYE-HEIGHT 10 % 100 %
NICAM BER 1E-9 1E-2
The AUDIO? LED lights up with squelch (auto or man).
2067.3004.12 2.4.25 E-14

2.4.5.6 STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE Menu
The STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE menu is selected from the STATUS menu via the ZERO
REFERENCE softkey.
Fig. 2.4-22 STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE menu
The internal zero reference control pulse can be activated in the STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE menu
by means of the INTERNAL key. The carrier signal is then referenced to zero on the lines 15 and 328.
For TV standard M/N the received signal is referenced to zero on line 14. The middle of the zero
reference pulse is approx. at 35/64 of the line. The width is approx. 40 s. The EXTERNAL key is used
to switch off the control pulse. When applying a positive control pulse (TTL level) to the rear-panel zero
reference pulse input, the IF carrier signal is referenced to zero with a delay of less than 3 s during the
period of the pulse delivered.
Fig. 2.4-23 STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE menu with option EFA-B8

(RESIDUAL PICTURE CARRIER MEASUREMENT)
With an externally applied zero reference pulse (rear-panel input X12) and option EFA-B8 fitted, a test
line (10 to 22) can be selected for the RPC measurement with the aid of ZERO PULSE. With
INTERNAL, the measurement time is fixed to line 15. The line in which the white reference bar is
measured is selected with the aid of BAR.
2067.3004.12 2.4.26 E-14

2.4.5.7 STATUS: MORE 1 / 2 and 2 / 2 Keys
The MORE 2 / 2 key brings on the 2nd page of the STATUS menu. In this menu, the synchronous
detector and the video output can be controlled.
The MORE 1 / 2 key is used to scroll back to the 1st page of the STATUS menu.
2.4.5.8 STATUS: SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR Menu
Press the SYNCHRON. DETECTOR key to get to the STATUS: SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR menu.
Fig. 2.4-24 STATUS: SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR menu
The synchronous demodulator mode can be set in the STATUS: SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR menu.
The user can select whether the phase of the switching carrier is tracked to the vision carrier phase
continuously (also during the picture contents) or only during the back porch. The switching carrier
phase does not depend on the picture contents. In addition, the loop bandwidth of the synchronous
detector can be selected.
The following synchronous demodulator modes can be selected:
SLOW BACK PORCH: The phase of the switching carrier is tracked with a small loop gain only
during the back porch. Modulation-dependent phase interference of the carrier signal are not
suppressed and can be measured subsequently at the Q-signal output via the quadrature
components of the synchronous demodulator (ICPM measurement). Only phase noise of very low
frequency is suppressed due to the small loop gain.
NORMAL BACK PORCH: This corresponds to the typical setting of a TV test receiver or TV test
demodulator. The phase of the switching carrier is tracked with a small loop gain during the back
porch. Modulation-dependent phase interference of the carrier signal are not suppressed and can
be measured subsequently at the Q-signal output via the quadrature components of the
synchronous demodulator (ICPM measurement). Low-frequency phase noise is suppressed due
to the higher loop gain.
SLOW CONTINUOUS: The phase of the switching carrier is tracked with a low loop gain even
during the picture contents.
NORMAL CONTINUOUS: The phase of the switching carrier is tracked with a medium loop gain even
during the picture contents.
FAST CONTINUOUS: This corresponds to the typical setting of a TV relay receiver, since phase
interference and phase noise are suppressed to a large extent by the synchronous demodulator.
The phase of the switching carrier is tracked with a large loop gain even during the picture
contents.
2067.3004.12 2.4.27 E-14

2.4.5.9 STATUS: VIDEO SQUELCH Menu
Press the VIDEO SQUELCH key to get to the STATUS: VIDEO SQUELCH menu.
Fig. 2.4-25 STATUS: VIDEO SQUELCH menu
In the STATUS: VIDEO SQUELCH menu, the RF input level threshold can be set. With RF input levels
below this threshold, the video output is switched off in AUTO setting. In OFF setting, the video output is
always active. The threshold can be set by numeric entry or by means of the cursor keys. The
permissible range of values is 30 to 100 dBV.
2067.3004.12 2.4.28 E-14

2.4.6 Special Function
Fig. 2.4-26 The display of SPECIAL FUNCTION in the Nyquist Demodulator FM Sound mode
2.4.6.1 Channel definition
Channel frequency tables can be selected and defined.

The RCL TABLE function can be used to select an already defined channel frequency table.
Frequently used channel frequency tables are already saved in EFA.
The COPY TABLE function allows copying of an existing channel frequency table into a user-specific
table. Up to three user-specific tables can be configured.
The EDIT TABLE function allows the user-specific channel frequency tables to be edited and stored.
The CLEAR TABLE function allows a user-specific channel frequency table to be cleared.
2067.3004.12 2.4.29 E-14

2.4.6.2 NICAM
Fig. 2.4-27 The SPECIAL FUNCTION / NICAM menu

In the operating mode NICAM sound and inserted option EFA-b2 selectable, otherwise appear soft key
closed (italically). After selection of the key NICAM... the following special functions are adjustable over
soft keys:
DATA OUTPUT: Operating mode of the NICAM DATA output (X13):

NORM: Normal
DESCR: Descrambled
(NICAM clock output: X14):
DATA INPUT: Operating mode of the NICAM DATA input (X17)
NORM: Normal
DESCR: Descrambled
(NICAM Clock input: X18)
The operating mode DATA INPUT DESCR is intended for the operation feed
RF/ZF (or NICAM Intercarrier), From supply NICAM DATA and refeed NICAM
DATA descrambled (possibly under inserting a decoding device). In the
operating mode DATA INPUT DESCR the RF/ZF (or NICAM Intercarrier) must
be available signal.
The SPECIAL FUNCTION LED lights up with selection of DATA INPUTS DESCR or DATA OUTPUT
DESCR.
2067.3004.12 2.4.30 E-14

2.4.6.3 Vision
2.4.6.3.1 RPC Display
With the option remainder carrier measurement (EFA-B8) is measured additionally the modulation factor
of the AM TV signal. The measured value is displayed alternatively as remainder carrier or modulation
depth.
2.4.6.3.2 Video Bandwidth
The option adjustable video tape recording width (EFA-B7) enables switching the video tape recording
width on 6 MHz to B/G for the TV standard. This offers an accurate frequency response investigation to
5.5 MHz at TV transmitters and modulators, where a disconnection of the tone carriers is possible.
2067.3004.12 2.4.31 E-14

2.4.6.4 Sound
2.4.6.4.1 MTS Pilot
With the EFA versions .72 and .83 (standard M/N) the analysis of the pilot reference for the North
American stereo transmission method is controllable MULTICHANNEL TELEVISION SOUND (MTS). If
PILOT is selected DETECTION MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND ON, then the FM stroke and the
frequency of the pilot reference in the MEASURE menu are displayed. In the ALARM menu the
threshold value for the FM stroke of the MTS pilot reference is configurable. With PILOT DETECTION
MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND OFF are suppressed the displays concerning the MTS pilot reference and
are not analysed.
2.4.6.4.2 Reference FM Sound
This menu item allows selection of the reference deviation (30 kHz / 50 kHz) for an audio output level of
+6 dBm (see STATUS: SOUND: SOUND LEVEL).
2.4.6.4.3 RPC Display
If option EFA-B8 is installed, display of the residual picture carrier (RPC) or of the modulation depth
(MOD DEPTH) can be selected (see MEASURE menu).
2.4.6.4.4 PILOT DEVIATION
With the option pilot point stroke measurement (EFA-B9) is measured and displayed the FM stroke of
the pilot reference as FM Average value stroke or as FM Peak value stroke. Thereby the amplitude
modulation degree of the pilot reference can be determined. This function is only possible with the
operating mode Nyquist demodulator of FM sound.
2.4.6.5 Nyquist Demodulator TV Standard M/N Mode
EFA models 72 and 83 allow the evaluation of the pilot tone for the North American stereo transmission
mode MULTICHANNEL TELEVISION SOUND (MTS) to be controlled by the user. If PILOT
DETECTION MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND ON is selected, the FM deviation and the frequency of the
pilot tone are displayed in the MEASURE menu. The threshold for the FM deviation of the MTS pilot
tone can be configured in the ALARM menu. With PILOT DETECTION MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND
OFF, all displays for the MTS pilot tone are blanked and not evaluated.
2067.3004.12 2.4.32 E-14

2.4.6.6 Nyquist Demodulator NICAM Sound Mode (only with option EFA-B2)
Fig. 2.4-28 SPECIAL FUNCTION: NICAM menu in Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound
mode
After selection of the NICAM... key, the following special functions can be selected via softkeys:
DATA OUTPUT: Operating mode of NICAM data output (X13):

NORM: Normal
DESCR: Descrambled
(NICAM clock output: X14):
DATA INPUT: Operating mode of NICAM data input (X17):
NORM: Normal
DESCR: Descrambled
(NICAM clock input: X18)
The DATA INPUT DESCR mode is intended for the input of RF/IF (or NICAM
intercarrier), output of NICAM data and re-input of NICAM data descrambled
(with a descrambler being connected if required). In the DATA INPUT DESCR
mode the RF/IF (or NICAM intercarrier) signal must be present.
The SPECIAL FUNCTION LED lights upon selection of DATA INPUT DESCR or DATA OUTPUT
DESCR.
2067.3004.12 2.4.33 E-14

2.4.7 Alarm Menu

The ALARM key in the MAIN FUNCTION block is used to select the ALARM menu. All the selectable
alarm criteria are listed in the ALARM menu.
Fig. 2.4-29 ALARM menu in the Nyquist demodulator FM sound mode
Fig. 2.4-30 ALARM menu in the Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode
The alarm list shows the signal data that are OK and the selected criteria which cause an alarm
message [X]. If an alarm message is generated, this is indicated by the yellow LED next to the ALARM
key in the user field MAIN FUNCTION. In the ALARM CONFIG menu, the criteria causing an alarm
message can be selected. The threshold values for the different criteria can be set in the ALARM
THRESHOLD menu.
2067.3004.12 2.4.34 E-14

The alarm messages are also present as hardware alarms at the USER PORT (X34; rear panel):
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
X34 USER PORT (rear view)
(TTL high level = alarm)
Alarm message Alarm message

Pin
Nyquistdemodulator FM Sound Nyquistdemodulator FM Sound Mono
1 Sum alarm message Sum alarm message
2 LEVEL LEVEL
3 RF OFFSET RF OFFSET
4 TV SYNC TV SYNC
5 VISION/SOUND1 CARR RATIO VISION/SOUND CARR RATIO
6 VISION/SOUND2 CARR RATIO
7 FM DEVIATION PILOT
8 FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MAX FM DEVIATION SOUND MAX
9 FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MAX
10 FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MIN FM DEVIATION SOUND MIN
11 FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MIN
12 FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER1 FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER
13 FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER2
14 to 40 Not assigned at present. Not assigned at present.
Note: Do not wire these pins! Note: Do not wire these pins!
41 to 48 Ground Ground
49, 50 +5 V (200 mA) +5 V (200 mA)
Alarm message
Pin
Nyquistdemodulator Std M/N
1 Sum alarm message
2 LEVEL
3 RF OFFSET
4 TV SYNC
5 VISION/SOUND CARR RATIO
6
7 FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT
8 FM DEVIATION SOUND MAX
9
10 FM DEVIATION SOUND MIN
11
12 FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER
13
14 to 40 Not assigned at present.
Note: Do not wire these pins!
41 to 48 Ground
49, 50 +5 V (200 mA)
2067.3004.12 2.4.35 E-14

The following alarm criteria are available:

RF LEVEL causes an error message if the TV signal selected has a level which is smaller than the set
threshold.
RF OFFSET causes an error message if the difference between the measured vision carrier receive
frequency and the set vision carrier receive frequency exceeds the set threshold.
TV SYNC causes an error message if the sync pulses are missing or disturbed. The sync separator of
the receiver is not locked.
VISION/SOUND1 CARR RATIO causes an error message if the power ratio vision carrier/sound carrier
1 exceeds the set threshold.
VISION/SOUND2 CARR RATIO causes an error message if the power ratio vision carrier/sound carrier
2 exceeds the set threshold.
FM DEVIATION PILOT causes an error message if the FM deviation of the pilot tone is smaller than the
set threshold.
FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MAX causes an error message if the FM deviation of sound carrier 1
exceeds the set threshold.
FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MAX causes an error message if the FM deviation of sound carrier 2
exceeds the set threshold.
FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MIN causes an error message if the FM deviation of sound carrier 1 is below
the set threshold for a certain period of time (no modulation).
FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MIN causes an error message if the FM deviation of sound carrier 2 is below
the set threshold for a certain period of time (no modulation).
FM DEV SND MIN WATCH TIME is the time for monitoring the sound modulation.
The minimum watch time for the two alarm messages FM DEVIATION SOUND1/2 MIN can be set
in the range 1 to 999 via FM DEV SND MIN WATCH TIME in the ALARM THRESHOLD submenu.
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER1 causes an error message if the frequency difference between the
nominal intercarrier frequency and the set intercarrier frequency exceeds the set threshold.
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER2 causes an error message if the frequency difference between the
nominal intercarrier frequency and the set intercarrier frequency exceeds the set threshold.
Press the ALARM THRESHOLD key to get to ALARM THRESHOLD PAGE 1. The first alarm criteria
appear on the display with the associated threshold values. The softkeys are used to select the alarm
criteria whose thresholds are to be modified. Press the MORE softkey to get to ALARM THRESHOLD
PAGE 2/3. The threshold settings are performed by numeric entry at the DATA block and confirmed by
means of the ENTER key on the VARIATION block or with the cursor keys on the VARIATION block.
The following table contains the threshold values which can be set.
2067.3004.12 2.4.36 E-14

NYQUIST DEMODULATOR FM SOUND mode
Alarm criteria Lower threshold limit Upper threshold limit

LEVEL 30 dBV 120 dBV
RF OFF SET 1 kHz 500 kHz
VISION/SOUND1 CARR RATIO 13 dB 28 dB
VISION/SOUND2 CARR RATIO 20 dB 35 dB
FM DEVIATION PILOT 0.5 kHz 5 kHz
FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MAX 10 kHz 80 kHz
FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MIN 0 kHz 80 kHz
FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MAX 10 kHz 80 kHz
FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MIN 0 kHz 80 kHz
FM DEV SND MIN WATCH TIME 1 second 999 seconds
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER1 1 kHz 50 kHz
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER2 1 kHz 50 kHz
Switching thresholds for alarm criteria in the Nyquist demodulator FM sound mode
Note: The settings for the 2nd FM sound carrier cannot be selected in the NYQUIST
DEMODULATOR FM SOUND MONO, NYQUIST DEMODULATOR STD M/N and
NYQUIST DEMODULATOR NICAM SOUND modes. For TV standard M/N the setting
range of SQUELCH THRESHOLD VISION SOUND is 10 to 25 dB.
NYQUIST DEMODULATOR STD M/N mode

RF OFF SET 1 kHz 500 kHz
VISION/SOUND CARR RATIO 10 dB 25 dB
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER 1 kHz 50 kHz
FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT 0.5 kHz 5 kHz
FM DEVIATION SOUND MAX 10 kHz 80 kHz
FM DEVIATION SOUND MIN 0 kHz 80 kHz
The FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT alarm can only be selected if in the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu
PILOT DETECTION MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND ON has been selected.
2067.3004.12 2.4.37 E-14

NYQUIST DEMODULATOR NICAM SOUND mode:

Alarm criteria:
RF LEVEL: see above (Nyquist demodulator FM sound)
RF OFFSET FREQ: see above (Nyquist demodulator FM sound)
TV SYNC: see above (Nyquist demodulator FM sound)
FM VIS/SND CARR RATIO: corresponds to VISION/SOUND1 CARR RATIO, see above
FM DEVIATION SOUND MAX: corresponds to FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MAX, see above
FM DEVIATION SOUND MIN: corresponds to FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MIN, see above
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER: corresponds to FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER1, see above
VISION/NICAM CARR RATIO: Vision/NICAM sound power ratio > threshold
(input: RF/IF)
NICAM INTERCARRIER LEVEL: NICAM intercarrier level < threshold
(input: NICAM intercarrier)
EYE-HEIGHT: Eye height < threshold
BER: BER (bit error rate) > threshold
DATA JITTER: NICAM data jitter > threshold
NICAM DATA: NICAM data not available
NICAM CLOCK: NICAM clock not available (clock regeneration)
NICAM FRAME: Frame sync not available
HEADROOM: Headroom threshold exceeded by one of the two NICAM audio
channels.
Threshold = full scale - 0.7 dB (typ.). Full scale means the
maximum output level of the D/A converter prior to the CCITT
J.17 deemphasis.
Setting ranges of the alarm thresholds:

RF OFFSET 1 kHz 500 kHz
FM VISION/SOUND CARR RATIO 13 dB 28 dB
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER 1 kHz 50 kHz
FM DEVIATION SOUND MAX 10 kHz 80 kHz
FM DEVIATION SOUND MIN 0 kHz 80 kHz
VISION/NICAM CARR RATIO 13 dB 34 dB
NICAM INTERC LEVEL 83 dBV 104 dBV
EYE-HEIGHT 10 % 100 %
BER 1E-9 1E-2
DATA JITTER 0 Hz 50 Hz
2067.3004.12 2.4.38 E-14

The following alarm messages and additional NICAM data are also available as hardware
information at the NICAM connector (X30; rear panel) in the Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound
mode:
(TTL high level = alarm)

Pin Alarm message
14 VISION/NICAM SND CARR RATIO
or NICAM INTERC LEVEL
16 EYE-HEIGHT
18 NICAM FRAME
20 BER
22 HEADROOM
24 Ground
Pin Additional NICAM data

1 FRAME SYNC
3 ADD DATA SYNC
5 C0
7 C1
9 C2
11 C3
13 C4
15 ADD DATA 0
17 ADD DATA 1
19 ADD DATA 2
21 ADD DATA 3
23 ADD DATA 4
25 ADD DATA 5
2 ADD DATA 6
4 ADD DATA 7
6 ADD DATA 8
8 ADD DATA 9
10 ADD DATA 10
12 BIT ERRORS
24 Ground
Floating one announces lines (relay)

An activated alarm ("enabled") can for EFA models with suitable hardware (standard starting from
January 2003) also over 7 integrated relays (floating announces lines) be signaled. For the configuration
of the relays you press ALARM: CONFIG RELAY.... The following menu picture appears for example (if
the appropriate hardware is equipped):
2067.3004.12 2.4.39 E-14

Fig. 2.4-31 Menu ALARM: CONFIG: RELAYS

With the upper two soft keys select you the alarm, which is to be announced over relays. With the soft
key " MODIFY " modify you the allocation of an alarm to the relay, which is to be activated with requests
of the appropriate alarm. In the position NONE the alarm at no relay is signaled. Several alarm criteria
can be assigned to a relay. This corresponds then to a OR linkage of the alarm criteria. In the picture for
example both a falling below of the receipt level is announced above as well as an exceeding of the
picture tone deviation on relay contact 1. It is to be noted that alarms for a signaling at the relays also it
activates ("enabled") be must (see above). The sum alarm is always active. The relays are connected
with the socket USER PORT (X34) as follows:
X34-26 X34-27 X34-28 X34-29 X34-30 X34-31 X34-32 X34-25
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Relais X34, Pin

Common (R1 to R7) 25
R1 26
R2 27
R3 28
R4 29
R5 30
R6 31
R7 32
Fig. 2.4-32 Relay and pin assignment of the USER PORT (X34)
2067.3004.12 2.4.40 E-14

2.4.8 Application Examples

This section gives some application examples of TV Test Receiver/Demodulator Family EFA.
Application-specific settings will be pointed out. The following applications will be described:
TV Test Receiver EFA as a relay receiver
TV Test Demodulator EFA for monitoring and quality control of TV transmitters
TV Test Receiver EFA for monitoring and quality control of broadband cable systems
Measurement of incidental vision carrier phase modulation
2.4.8.1 Application as a Relay Receiver
The cost-effective and continuously tunable TV test receiver and high-quality TV test demodulator
with selective receiver section option are suitable for use as a relay receiver. The following figure
shows a typical TV relay receiver application.
TV Receiver V IDEO
RF RF
TV
EFA
transmitter
A UDIO
Fig. 2.4-33 Application as a TV relay receiver
Some useful hints are given below for setting the unit when it is to be used as a TV relay receiver:
The synchronous demodulator should be operated in the FAST CONTINUOUS mode. This mode
offers the highest loop bandwidth. The phase interference and noise of the vision carrier will thus be
suppressed by the synchronous demodulator.
TV Test Receiver/ TV Test Demodulator EFA is provided with an automatic level control allowing the
selection of the bandwidth. With TV Test Receiver EFA used as a relay receiver, the AUTO FAST mode
should be selected. Low-frequency level variations of the input signal (eg 50 Hz) will almost completely
be eliminated.
With automatic attenuator control, variations of the input level could alter the attenuation which would
cause a brief interruption of the video signal. For this reason the input attenuator RECEIVER
ATTENUATION should be set to manual. The receiver input level range will then be limited.
If only a few unwanted transmitters (eg other TV signals) are received whose level is not higher than that
of the wanted signal and if the wanted signal is smaller than 1 mV, LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER can be
connected. The receive signal will then be preamplified by 10 dB by means of a low-noise amplifier. The
receiver noise figure will thus be improved which would result in a higher S/N ratio.
Balanced audio outputs should be used to prevent RF to be picked up by the audio lines.
A user-configurable alarm register allows unattended monitoring of the received TV signal as well as
switchover to a standby relay receiver link.
2067.3004.12 2.4.41 E-14

2.4.8.2 Monitoring and Quality Control of TV Transmitters
A high-precision test demodulator (EFA models 33/ 83/ 89) providing distortion-free demodulation of the
signal emitted by the transmitter is required for measurements on the TV transmitters and converters
and for continuous monitoring at the transmitter site. TV Test Demodulator EFA fully meets these
requirements and - due to the very low inherent error - ensures optimum transmitter alignment and
permanent quality control.
Audio
Sound modulator
TV transmitter
Video
Vision modulator
VF Video analyzer
RF
TV Test Demodulator
IF
EFA AF
TV network Audio analyzer

analyzer
Fig. 2.4-34 TV transmitter monitoring and quality control
Some useful hints are given below for setting the unit when it is to be used as a TV test demodulator:
The synchronous demodulator should be operated in the NORMAL BACK PORCH mode. In this
mode, the phase of the vision carrier will be sampled at the back porch. The sample value serves as a
reference phase for the synchronous demodulator. The synchronous demodulator does not eliminate
incidental vision carrier phase modulation. The latter can be measured at the Q-signal output of the
synchronous demodulator. See section 2.4.11.4 Measurement of Incidental Vision Carrier Phase
Modulation.
selection of the bandwidth. With TV Test Receiver EFA used as a TV test demodulator, the AUTO
SLOW mode should be selected. Low-frequency level variations of the input signal will not be eliminated
and can be measured by a subsequent video analyzer.
If measurements are to be performed by the modulator with the group-delay precorrection switched off,
receiver delay equalization can be switched off (GROUP DELAY FLAT).
If sweep measurements are to be performed without TV frame signals at a low rate, gain control can
be operated manually. As a setting aid, the IF amplitude is measured in % and displayed. 100%
corresponds to the nominal IF level.
Balanced audio outputs should be used to prevent RF to be picked up by the audio lines.
A user-configurable alarm register is provided for automatic monitoring which in turn makes for
automatic switchover to the standby transmitter.
2067.3004.12 2.4.42 E-14

2.4.8.3 Monitoring and Quality Control of Broadband Cable Systems
TV Test Receivers of high selectivity and immunity to interference are required for measurements in
broadband networks.
TV BB cable system
Broadband cable
TV modulator 1
VF Video analyzer
TV modulator 2
TV Test Receiver
RF
TV modulator 3
EFA Audio analyzer
AF
TV modulator N
TV modulator N+1
Fig. 2.4-35 Monitoring of a broadband TV cable system
Some useful hints are given below for setting the unit when it is to be used as a TV test demodulator:
The synchronous demodulator should be operated in the NORMAL BACK PORCH mode In this
mode, the phase of the vision carrier will be sampled at the back porch. The sample value serves as a
reference phase for the synchronous demodulator. The synchronous demodulator does not eliminate
incidental vision carrier phase modulation. The latter can be measured at the Q-signal output of the
synchronous demodulator. See section 2.4.11.4 Measurement of Incidental Vision Carrier Phase
Modulation.
selection of the bandwidth. With TV Test Receiver EFA used as a TV test demodulator, the AUTO
SLOW mode should be selected. Low-frequency level variations of the input signal will not be eliminated
and can be measured by a subsequent video analyzer.
If measurements are to be performed by the modulator with the group-delay precorrection switched off,
receiver delay equalization can be switched off (GROUP DELAY FLAT).
The AUTO LOW DISTORTION mode can be useful for accurate measurements of intermodulation
products. In this mode, the RF levels are reduced by 5 dB which increases the intermodulation
suppression of the TV test receiver correspondingly. In the AUTO LOW NOISE mode, the RF levels are
increased by 5 dB which yields a better S/N ratio of the receiver.
If sweep measurements are to be performed without TV frame signals at a low rate, gain control can
be operated manually. As a setting aid, the IF amplitude is measured in % and displayed. 100%
corresponds to a nominal IF level.
A user-configurable alarm register allows unattended monitoring of the broadband cable system. It is
thus possible to switch off a faulty modulator and to replace it by a standby modulator.
2067.3004.12 2.4.43 E-14

2.4.8.4 Measurement of Incidental Vision Carrier Phase Modulation (ICPM)
Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation, ICPM is of vital importance for sound demodulation when the
intercarrier is used as demodulation method. For this method, the vision and sound carrier are
multiplied. The intercarrier obtained this way will then be frequency-modulated. The unwanted phase
modulation of the vision carrier ICPM will also be demodulated giving rise to the so-called intercarrier
interference which determines the S/N ratio of the audio signals.
Measurement of ICPM is performed via the outputs of synchronous detector (in-phase output = video
output and quadrature output). The measured value ICPM is defined as follows:
ICPM = arctan (quadrature amplitude / in-phase amplitude)
The measurement can be carried out using the X-Y display of an oscilloscope.
RF / IF
TV modulator
or
Zero reference pulse
TV transmitter
TV Test Receiver White level
I Y
or
Black level
Sync value
TV Test
Q X Oscilloscope or
Demodulator
EFA
TV analyzer
Fig. 2.4-36 Test setup for measuring incidental vision carrier phase modulation (ICPM)
Please find hereafter some remarks on ICPM measurement:

The inphase amplitude corresponding to the video signal determines the Y deflection of the
oscilloscope.
The quadrature amplitude of the synchronous demodulator represents the phase change of the vision
carrier and determines the X deflection of the oscilloscope.
A staircase signal with five or ten grey scales is a suitable test signal.
Modern video analyzers as Video Measurement System VSA from Rohde & Schwarz measure the
ICPM by means of insertion signal testing and the ICPM value is displayed numerical and graphical.
Hints for receiver setting:
The synchronous demodulator should be operated in NORMAL BACK PORCH or SLOW BACK
PORCH modes. In these modes, the phase of the vision carrier will be sampled at the back porch. The
sample value serves as a reference phase for the synchronous demodulator. The synchronous
demodulator does not eliminate incidental vision carrier phase modulations which can therefore be
evaluated.
The zero reference pulse provides the reference values for the inphase and quadrature phase channel
and must be available for a correct ICPM measurement.
2067.3004.12 2.4.44 E-14

2.4.9 Preset and Menu Overview
Note: When the PRESET key is actuated, the settings or numeric values shown in bold letters
are used.
When the RESET key is actuated (PRESET: SERVICE: RESET menu), the parenthesized
settings and numeric values in bold letters (abc) are used in addition.
For EFA models 12/ 20/ 72/78:

INPUT (2.4.2.1) (RECEIVER)
IF
AUXILIARY... (EFA-B2) NICAM INP IF / INTERC
NICAM DATA INT / EXT
NIC INTERC NORM / SOV
ATTEN... AUTO
AUTO LOW NOISE
AUTO LOW DIST
AUTO LOWEST DIST
MANUAL 0 to 55dB
10dB PREAMP ON / OFF
For EFA models 33/ 83/ 89:

INPUT (2.4.2.2) (RECEIVER) (EFA-B3)
(DEMOD) without EFA-B3
IF
AUXILIARY... (EFA-B2) NICAM INP IF / INTERC
NICAM DATA INT / EXT
NIC INTERC NORM / SOV
ATTEN... AUTO
MANUAL LOW+PREAMP
MANUAL LOW
MANUAL HIGH
ATTEN... (EFA-B3) ATTEN AUTO / MAN 0 to 55dB
LOW NOISE
NORMAL
LOW DIST
RF INPUT (EFA-B3) (50)
75
2067.3004.12 2.4.45 E-14

RF (2.4.3) RF (numeric entry) (no change caused by PRESET / RESET)

CHANNEL (no change caused by PRESET / RESET)
SPECIAL CHANNEL (no change caused by PRESET / RESET)
SEARCH... CHANNEL SEARCH UP
CHANNEL SEARCH DN
SEARCH ABORT
SEARCH LVL THRESHOLD (30dBV)
RCL RF
STO RF... EDIT TEXT... LEFT
RIGHT
GET CHARACTER
DELETE CHARACTER
SAVE & EXIT
STATUS GROUP DELAY... FLAT

1/2 STD1 (depending on model)
(2.4.5) STD2 (depending on model)
GAIN CONTROL... AUTO SLOW
AUTO FAST
MANUAL
AGC VIDEO LEVEL (1120mV) (models 12/ 33/
78/ 89)
(1140mV) (models 72/ 83)
AUTO FREQ CONTROL... AFC OFF
AFC SINGLE
AFC CONTINUOUS
AFC THRESHOLD 10kHz
SOUND... DEEMPH (FM) ON / OFF
DEEMPH NIC (EFA-B2) ON / OFF
SQUELCH (FM)... AUTO MAN
SOUND(1) ON / OFF
THRESHOLD VIS/FM
SND(1) 22dB
SOUND2 (ON) / OFF (not at
NICAM)
THRESHOLD VIS SND2
29dB (not at NICAM)
SQUELCH NIC... (EFA-B2) AUTO MAN
NIC SOUND (ON) OFF
THRESHOLD VIS/NIC SND
34dB
THRESHOLD INTERC
2067.3004.12 2.4.46 E-14

83dBV
THRESHOLD EYE-HEIGHT
30%
THRESHOLD BER
1E-3
(FM) SOUND LEVEL (6dBm) (models 12/ 33/ 78/
89)
(4.2dBm) (models 72/ 83)
STEREO DEMATRIX (not for AUTO / FIXED STEREO
NICAM / Std. M/N / Mono)
ZERO REFERENCE... EXTERNAL
INTERNAL
BAR (only EFA-B8) (Line 17)
ZERO PULSE (only EFA-B8) (Line 15)
MORE 2/2
2/2 SYNCHRON DETECTOR... SLOW BACK PORCH
NORMAL BACK PORCH
SLOW CONTINUOUS
NORMAL CONTINUOUS
FAST CONTINUOUS
VIDEO SQUELCH... AUTO OFF
THRESHOLD VID 30dBV
SQUELCH
MORE 1/2
2067.3004.12 2.4.47 E-14

SETUP TIME & DATE... TIME (numeric entry)

(2.3.2) DATE (numeric entry)
REMOTE... IEC625 / iEEE488 (numeric entry) 6
RS232 BAUDRATE 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
DATABITS 7BIT
8BIT
PARITY NO
EVEN
ODD
STOPBITS 1BIT
2BIT
HANDSHAKE NO
XON/XOFF
HARDWARE
PRINTER... PRINTER TYPE EPSON COMP.
R&S PUD COMP.
HP COMP.
FORMFEED NO
AFTER PRINTOUT
LEVEL UNITS... dBpW
dBuW
dBm
dBuV
dBmV
uV/mV
LCD INVERS (ON) (Reset)
OFF
2067.3004.12 2.4.48 E-14

SPECIAL CHANNEL DEFINITION RCL TABLE STANDARD TABLE

FUNCTION USER TABLE
(2.4.6) SELECT TABLE
ENTER
COPY TABLE COPY FROM SELECT TABLE
EXIT
COPY TO SELECT TABLE
EXIT
ENTER
CLEAR TABLE SELECT TABLE
ENTER
EDIT TABLE EDIT TABLE NAME LEFT
RIGHT
GET CHARACTER
DELETE
CHARACTER
SAVE & EXIT
EDIT TABLE DATA CHANNEL
SPECIAL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL UP
CHANNEL DOWN
SELECT TABLE
EXIT
NICAM... (EFA-B2) DATA NORM / DESCR
OUTPUT
DATA INPUT NORM / DESCR
PILOT DEVIATION (AVERAGE) / PEAK (special model
only, not for Std. M/N)
REFERENCE (+/-30kHz) / +/-50kHz (not for Std.
FM SOUND M/N)
RPC DISPLAY (EFA-B8) (RPC) / MOD DEPTH
PILOT DETECTION (ON) / OFF
MULTICHANNEL TV
SOUND (models 72/ 83
only)
2067.3004.12 2.4.49 E-14

For EFA with option EFA-B2 in the nyquist demodulator FM NICAM sound mode:
ALARM ALARM THRESHOLD... LEVEL (40 dBV)

(2.4.7) 1/3 RF OFFSET (30 kHz)
VISION/SOUND1 CARR RATIO (22 dB)
VISION/SOUND2 CARR RATIO (29 dB)
FM DEVIATION PILOT (1.7 kHz)
MORE 2/3
2/3 FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MAX (55 kHz)
FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MAX (55 kHz)
FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MIN (10 kHz)
FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MIN (10 kHz)
FM DEVIATION SND MIN WATCH (20 s)
TIME
MORE 3/3
3/3 FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER1 (25 kHz)
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER2 (25 kHz)
MORE 1/3
ALARM CONFIG... LEVEL ENABLED DISABLED
1/3 RF OFFSET ENABLED DISABLED
TV SYNC ENABLED DISABLED
FM VIS/SND1 CARR RATIO ENABLED DISABLED
FM VIS/SND2 CARR RATIO ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 2/3
2/3 FM DEVIATION PILOT ENABLED DISABLED
FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MAX ENABLED DISABLED
FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MAX ENABLED DISABLED
FM DEVIATION SOUND1 MIN ENABLED DISABLED
FM DEVIATION SOUND2 MIN ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 3/3
3/3 FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER1 ENABLED DISABLED
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER2 ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 1/3
2067.3004.12 2.4.50 E-14

For Nyquist demodulator FM sound mono mode:
ALARM ALARM THRESHOLD... LEVEL (40dBV)

(2.4.7) 1/2 RF OFFSET (30kHz)
VISION/SOUND CARR RATIO (22dB)
FM DEVIATION SOUND MAX (55kHz)
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER (25kHz)
MORE 2/2
2/2 FM DEVIATION SOUND MIN (10kHz)
FM DEVIATION SND MIN WATCH (20s)
TIME
MORE 1/2
FM VIS/SND CARR RATIO ENABLED DISABLED
FM DEVIATION SOUND MAX ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 2/2
2/2 FM DEVIATION SOUND MIN ENABLED DISABLED
FREQ OFFSET INTERCARRIER ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 1/2
2067.3004.12 2.4.51 E-14

For Nyquist demodulator Std. M/N mode:

(2.4.7) 1/2 RF OFFSET (30kHz)
VISION/SOUND CARR RATIO (22dB)
MORE 2/2
TIME
FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT (2.5kHz)
MORE 1/2
MORE 2/2
FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 1/2
2067.3004.12 2.4.52 E-14

For EFA with option EFA-B2 in Nyquist demodulator NICAM sound mode:

(2.4.8.4) 1/3 RF OFFSET (30kHz)
FM VISION/SOUND CARR RATIO (22dB)
MORE 2/3
TIME
VISION/NICAM CARR RATIO (34dB)
NICAM INTERCARRIER LEVEL (83dBV)
EYE-HEIGHT (30%)
MORE 3/3
3/3 BER (1.0E-3)
DATA JITTER (30Hz)
MORE 1/3
MORE 2/4
VISION/NICAM CARR RATIO ENABLED DISABLED
NICAM INTERCARRIER LEVEL ENABLED DISABLED
EYE-HEIGHT ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 3/4
3/4 BER ENABLED DISABLED
DATA JITTER ENABLED DISABLED
NICAM DATA ENABLED DISABLED
NICAM CLOCK ENABLED DISABLED
NICAM FRAME ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 4/4
4/4 HEADROOM ENABLED DISABLED
MORE 1/4
2067.3004.12 2.4.53 E-14

AUDIO SPEAKER ON / OFF

Volume 20 %
AUTO STEREO
L/1
R/2
AUDIO SOURCE PRESET: corresponding to the selected MODE
2067.3004.12 2.4.54 E-14

EFA Model 90/93, Option B30 NTSC/BTSC Demodulator
2.5 Operation as a Test Receiver /

Demodulator for NTSC/BTSC-Signals ............................................... 2.5.3
2.5.1 Introduction and Overview............................................................................................2.5.3

2.5.1.1 Options Available .............................................................................................................2.5.5
2.5.1.2 Getting Started .................................................................................................................2.5.6
2.5.2 MODE Menu....................................................................................................................2.5.7
2.5.3 INPUT Menu / Input Selection .......................................................................................2.5.8
2.5.3.1 Standard Test Receiver with Tracking Channel Selection EFA Model 90 .......................2.5.8
2.5.3.2 Demodulator EFA Model 93...........................................................................................2.5.10
2.5.3.3 High-End Test Receiver EFA Model 53 with EFA-B3 Preselector Option .....................2.5.12
2.5.4 RF Menu ........................................................................................................................2.5.15
2.5.5 STATUS Menu ..............................................................................................................2.5.17
2.5.5.1 STATUS: AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL .....................................................................2.5.17
2.5.5.2 STATUS: VIDEO BANDWIDTH / GROUP DELAY ........................................................2.5.17
2.5.5.3 STATUS: VISION...........................................................................................................2.5.18
2.5.5.3.1 VISION DETECTOR ......................................................................................................2.5.18
2.5.5.3.2 SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR PLL...............................................................................2.5.18
2.5.5.3.3 VIDEO OUTPUT ............................................................................................................2.5.19
2.5.5.3.4 VIDEO SQUELCH THRESHOLD ..................................................................................2.5.19
2.5.5.4 STATUS: SOUND ..........................................................................................................2.5.20
2.5.5.4.1 SOUND DEMODULATION ............................................................................................2.5.20
2.5.5.4.2 DEEMPHASIS MONO CHANNEL .................................................................................2.5.21
2.5.5.4.3 AUDIO LEVEL MONO CHANNEL .................................................................................2.5.21
2.5.5.4.4 BTSC DECODER...........................................................................................................2.5.21
2.5.5.4.5 AUDIO OUTPUT ............................................................................................................2.5.22
2.5.5.4.6 SOUND SQUELCH THRESHOLD.................................................................................2.5.22
2.5.5.5 STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE ......................................................................................2.5.23
2.5.5.5.1 ZERO REFERENCE ......................................................................................................2.5.23
2.5.5.5.2 ZERO REFERENCE: SETTINGS ..................................................................................2.5.24
2.5.6 SPECIAL FUNCTION Menu..........................................................................................2.5.25
2.5.6.1 CHANNEL DEFINITION.................................................................................................2.5.25
2.5.6.1.1 Selecting Channel Tables ..............................................................................................2.5.26
2.5.6.1.2 Generating User-Specific Channel Tables (USER TABLE):..........................................2.5.26
2.5.6.2 GAIN CONTROL............................................................................................................2.5.29
2.5.6.3 MANUAL GAIN CONTROL............................................................................................2.5.29
2.5.6.4 4.5 MHz INTERCARRIER Input.....................................................................................2.5.29
2.5.6.5 Selection of TV Standard ...............................................................................................2.5.30
2.5.6.6 Configuration of the Measurement Window...................................................................2.5.31
2.5.6.6.1 VISION MODULATION ..................................................................................................2.5.31
2.5.6.6.2 FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT .........................................................................................2.5.31
2.5.6.6.3 MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND........................................................................................2.5.31
2.5.7 ALARM Menu ................................................................................................................2.5.32
2.5.7.1 Configuration of the Alarm Register (ALARM CONFIG) ................................................2.5.34
2.5.7.2 Setting Limit Values (ALARM: THRESHOLD) ...............................................................2.5.35
2.5.8 AUDIO Menu .................................................................................................................2.5.36
2.5.8.1 Loudspeaker ..................................................................................................................2.5.36
2.5.8.2 Volume Control ..............................................................................................................2.5.36
2.5.8.3 Configuration of the Loudspeaker and the Headphone Output .....................................2.5.37
2.5.8.4 Audio Status Message ...................................................................................................2.5.37
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.1 E-14

NTSC/BTSC Demodulator EFA Model 90/93, Option B30
2.5.9 Measurement Window .................................................................................................2.5.38

2.5.9.1 Vision Carrier Measurements.........................................................................................2.5.38
2.5.9.1.1 LEVEL ............................................................................................................................2.5.38
2.5.9.1.2 RESIDUAL PICTURE CARRIER ...................................................................................2.5.38
2.5.9.1.3 MODULATION DEPTH ..................................................................................................2.5.38
2.5.9.1.4 BAR AMPLITUDE ..........................................................................................................2.5.39
2.5.9.1.5 SYNC AMPLITUDE........................................................................................................2.5.39
2.5.9.1.6 VIDEO AMPLITUDE ......................................................................................................2.5.39
2.5.9.2 Vision Carrier Measurements.........................................................................................2.5.40
2.5.9.2.1 Vision/Sound Carrier Power Ratio..................................................................................2.5.40
2.5.9.2.2 FM Deviation of the Audio-Mono Signal.........................................................................2.5.40
2.5.9.2.3 FM Deviation of the BTSC Composite Signal ................................................................2.5.40
2.5.9.2.4 FM Deviation of the MTS Pilot Tone ..............................................................................2.5.40
2.5.9.2.5 BTSC/MTS Status ..........................................................................................................2.5.40
2.5.10 Notes and Applications ...............................................................................................2.5.41
2.5.10.1 Traces of the Receiver Selection ...................................................................................2.5.41
2.5.10.1.1 RF Selection ...................................................................................................................2.5.41
2.5.10.1.2 IF Selection ....................................................................................................................2.5.42
2.5.10.2 Synchronous Demodulation and Envelope Demodulation with AM TV .........................2.5.43
2.5.10.3 Sound Carrier Measurements in the Absence of Vision Carrier ....................................2.5.48
2.5.10.3.1 Effect on EFA-NTSC Measurements .............................................................................2.5.48
2.5.10.4 Measurement of Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation (ICPM) ......................................2.5.49
2.5.10.4.1 Effect on Video Demodulation........................................................................................2.5.50
2.5.10.4.2 Effect on Audio Demodulation........................................................................................2.5.50
2.5.10.4.3 Measuring ICPM ............................................................................................................2.5.50
2.5.10.4.4 Recommended Receiver Settings for Measuring ICPM ................................................2.5.51
2.5.10.4.5 ICPM Measurement Using Oscilloscope .......................................................................2.5.51
2.5.10.4.6 ICPM Measurement Using XY Display of Oscilloscope .................................................2.5.54
2.5.10.4.7 ICPM Measurement Using Video Measurement System VSA ......................................2.5.55
2.5.10.5 Use of Split-Carrier and Intercarrier Sound Demodulation ............................................2.5.57
2.5.10.6 Channel Frequency Tables ............................................................................................2.5.59
2.5.10.6.1 Channel Table USA .......................................................................................................2.5.59
2.5.10.6.2 Channel Table CANADA ................................................................................................2.5.62
2.5.10.6.3 Channel Table KOREA ..................................................................................................2.5.64
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.2 E-14

2.5 Operation as a Test Receiver / Demodulator for

NTSC/BTSC-Signals
2.5.1 Introduction and Overview

Note: For the sake of simplicity, the NTSC/BTSC Test Receiver EFA to the M/N Standard will be
designated as the "EFA-NTSC" instead of "EFA Model 90/93 / Option B30" in the following.
Nyquist demodulators which ensure system-compatible demodulation of the signals generated are
required for the accurate determination of the quality parameters of TV transmitters and transposers as
well as for the monitoring of the RF signals emitted by them. In addition, precision test receivers with
high selectivity and immunity to external interference are necessary for transmitter monitoring and
measurements in broadband networks.
The Test Receiver EFA-NTSC is a Nyquist demodulator that receives and demodulates amplitude-
modulated vestigial band signals in accordance with TV standards M-NTSC, M-PAL and N-PAL.
The EFA-NTSC is available as a test receiver with tracking selection (EFA 90) or as a test demodulator
with a non-selective receive section (EFA 93). The test receiver with tracking channel selection is
suitable for monitoring and quality control of terrestrial radio channels. The test demodulator with non-
selective RF input is particularly suited for direct monitoring and quality control of transmitters. The test
demodulator can be extended to a high-end test receiver with the option Selection EFA-B3.
These powerful units can be used at any time for applications in research and development laboratories,
broadband networks, quality assurance, service, as well as for monitoring transmitters and production of
TV consumer electronics.
A configurable synchronous detector and an envelope detector are available for vision demodulation.
The video bandwidth can be selected between "4 MHz" (sound carrier suppressed) and "5 MHz" (sound
trap switched off). Group delay equalization in line with the FCC standard can be switched to constant
group-delay frequency response.
The frequency-modulated sound carrier is demodulated either according to the split-carrier, quasi-split
carrier or intercarrier method. In addition to the balanced audio-mono output (main channel) and the
broadband BTSC composite output, the EFA-NTSC has a BTSC decoder that supplies the decoded
stereo signal or the second audio program (SAP) depending on the setting. The BTSC-decoded audio
signals can also be listened to via the integrated loudspeaker or the headphone connector.
The EFA-NTSC measures the most important transmission parameters and displays them separately
according to vision and sound carrier measurements.
Fig. 2.5-1 The MEASURE menu in the NTSC/BTSC demodulator mode
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.3 E-14

Alarm messages can be output for monitoring tasks. The alarms can be individually configured and
selected.
The EFA-NTSC is provided with the following signal inputs and outputs. For more detailed
specifications, refer to the data sheet.
Signal inputs
RF DEMOD Non-selective RF demodulation input, only with demodulator

models.
RF SELECTIVE Selective RF inputs
On demodulator models with the EFA-B3 option: 50 and
75 .
On the standard test receiver: 50 or 75  depending on the
customer's order.
IF INPUT IF input
Vision carrier frequency 38.9 MHz
ZERO REFERENCE INPUT Signal input for external control of the carrier zero reference
(>+1 V)
INTERCARRIER INPUT 4.5 MHz FM demodulation input
Signal outputs
IF OUTPUT IF output
Vision carrier frequency 38.9 MHz
–7 dBm regulated
VIDEO OUTPUT Video signal of the selected demodulator.
One output on the front panel and another on the rear panel.
Q OUTPUT Quadrature signal of the synchronous detector
AUDIO COMPOSITE Broadband audio signal output (BTSC composite)
AUDIO MAIN Balanced audio-mono output
AUDIO STEREO OUTPUTS BTSC-decoded audio signals on the front panel
Table 2.5-1 Signal inputs and outputs of EFA-NTSC
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.4 E-14

2.5.1.1 Options Available
The models EFA 90 and EFA 93 can be extended with the following options.
EFA-B3 Additional selective RF inputs with an

input impedance of 50 or 75 ,
only for demodulator model EFA 93.
EFA-B4 MPEG test decoder, only with options
QAM/8VSB Demodulator EFA-B20 or
OFDM/DVB-T Demodulator EFA-B10
EFA-B10 OFDM/DVB-T Demodulator
EFA-B11 6 MHz SAW filter for adjacent-channel rejection
for QAM/8VSB Demodulator EFA-B20 and
for OFDM/DVB-T Demodulator EFA-B10
for QAM/8VSB Demodulator EFA-B20 and
EFA-B14 2 MHz SAW filter for QAM/8VSB Demodulator EFA-B20
adjacent-channel rejection
EFA-B20 QAM/8VSB Demodulator
EFA-K21 DVB-C/J.83/A/C (QAM) Firmware
for QAM/8VSB Demodulator EFA-B20
EFA-K22 ATSC/8VSB firmware
EFA-K23 J.83/B firmware
EFA-K25 FIR coefficient readout firmware
Table 2.5-2 Options available for EFA-NTSC
The NTSC/BTSC demodulator is also available as the EFA-B30 option. The following EFA models can
easily be upgraded with the NTSC/BTSC demodulator.
EFA 40 OFDM/DVB-T test receiver

EFA 43 OFDM/DVB-T test demodulator
EFA 50 8VSB/ATSC test receiver
EFA 53 8VSB/ATSC test demodulator
EFA 60 DVB-C/J.83/A/C (QAM) test receiver
EFA 63 DVB-C/J.83/A/C (QAM) test demodulator
EFA 70 J.83/B (QAM) test receiver
EFA 73 J.83/B (QAM) test demodulator
Table 2.5-3 EFA models that can be retrofitted with option NTSC/BTSC Demodulator EFA-B30.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.5 E-14

2.5.1.2 Getting Started
For users who are basically familiar with the EFA, the procedure for direct synchronization of a NTSC
signal is listed below:
1. Switch on unit and establish RF (IF) connection.
2. Select the NTSC / BTSC ANALYZER / DEMODULATOR mode in the MODE menu.
3. Press PRESET.
4. Select the input (INPUT).
5. Set the receive frequency (RF = vision carrier frequency).
The most important transmission parameters are represented in the MEASURE menu according to
vision and sound carrier measurements.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.6 E-14

2.5.2 MODE Menu

The MODE menu is used to select the demodulator mode required. The content of the MODE menu
depends on the options installed. Select the demodulator mode required for demodulation, decoding
and analysis. The currently selected demodulator mode is in inverse video. The demodulator mode
required is selected using the cursor keys (and ). The selected demodulator mode is activated by
pressing the ENTER key. The device settings of the RF, INPUT, STATUS, ALARM and SPECIAL
FUNCTION menus are assigned to the MODE and saved accordingly. That is to say, if the MODE is
changed, the EFA restores the settings last used in the corresponding demodulator mode.
Note: This section only describes the NTSC/BTSC demodulator mode. For descriptions of the
other demodulator modes, see the relevant sections.
The appearance of the MODE menu depends on the options available in the instrument.
MODE menu with the following options:

 EFA-B20 DIGITAL DEMODULATOR PLATFORM
 EFA-K21 DVB-C FIRMWARE
 EFA-K22 ATSC FIRMWARE
 EFA-K23 J.83/B FIRMWARE
 EFA-B4 MPEG2 DECODER
Fig. 2.5-2 The MODE menu depends on the options available in the instrument.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.7 E-14


In the INPUT menu, the input selection, RF input attenuator and preamplifier settings can be entered. All
the settings in the INPUT menu refer to the selected demodulation mode (MODE menu), i.e. if the
demodulation mode is changed, the settings previously selected in that mode are effective.
The INPUT menu of the test receiver with tracking channel selection (EFA model 90) is different from
that of the non-selective demodulator (EFA model 93). If the non-selective demodulator (EFA model 93)
is equipped with the EFA-B3 PRESELECTOR option, the preselector is also controlled via the INPUT
menu. The description of the INPUT menu is organized according to instrument models:
 EFA model 90 or EFA receiver model with EFA-B30 option, see section 2.5.3.1.
 EFA model 93 or EFA demodulator model with EFA-B30 option, see section 2.5.3.2.
 EFA model 93 with EFA-B3 option (PRESELECTOR) or EFA demodulator model with EFA-B3 and
EFA-B30 options, see section 2.5.3.3.
2.5.3.1 Standard Test Receiver with Tracking Channel Selection EFA Model 90
Fig. 2.5-3 INPUT menu of NTSC/BTSC Test Receiver EFA model 90

The RF input of the selective test receiver is chosen in the INPUT menu using the RECEIVER softkey.
When this key is pressed, the input impedance and the active RF input are displayed. Depending on the
EFA model, this can be a 50  or 75  input. The message INPUT 75 OHM REAR indicates that the
rear BNC connector X9 is selected. The message INPUT 50 OHM REAR indicates that the rear N
connector X22 is selected. When message INPUT 75 OHM FRONT or INPUT 50 OHM FRONT is
displayed, the BNC connector on the front panel is enabled. This input allows NTSC/BTSC signals with
a vision carrier frequency of 45 MHz to 860 MHz to be received.
The IF input of the test receiver is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 . The input is
located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF vision carrier frequency is 38.900 MHz (lower
sideband).
The INPUT: ATTENUATION menu is called up using the ATTEN... key. The following menu is
displayed:
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.8 E-14

Fig. 2.5-4 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of NTSC/BTSC Test Receiver EFA model 90
In the INPUT: ATTENUATION menu, the input attenuation, tuner and mixer level, and preamplifier are
set.
The ATTEN AUTO/MAN key sets the attenuator to manual or automatic control.
When MAN is set, the attenuator is controlled manually. The attenuator can be set in steps of 5 dB in
the range 0 dB to 55 dB. Settings can be carried out using the cursor keys (up or down ) or by direct
entry via the numeric keypad and confirmation with ENTER. When entries are made directly, the
entered numerals are rounded to a value divisible by 5. Where receive conditions are exceptionally
critical, the manual mode can be used to improve the intermodulation or noise characteristics of the
demodulated signal.
Manual control can also be used when large level variations occur in the receive signal, and these
should be prevented from causing a sync loss. Switching the input attenuator results in a brief
interruption, which causes a brief sync loss.
Normally, the AUTO mode is preferable.
Note: When the attenuator is controlled manually, the receivable level range of the test receiver is
considerably restricted.
In the Auto mode, the attenuator is controlled automatically depending on the measured input level. The
following switching thresholds apply to the NTSC/BTSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode; a
switching hysteresis of 1 dB applies in each case.
Attenuator
ATTEN AUTO Preamp OFF Preamp ON
0 dB < -26 dBm < -36 dBm
5 dB -26 dBm to -21 dBm -36 dBm to -31 dBm
30 dB -1 dBm to +4 dBm -11 dBm to -6 dBm
35 dB +4 dBm to +9 dBm -6 dBm to -1 dBm
40 dB +9 dBm to +14 dBm -1 dBm to +4 dBm
45 dB > +14 dBm +4 dBm to +9 dBm
50 dB - +9 dBm to +14 dBm
55 dB - > +14 dBm
Table 2.5-4 Switching thresholds of the input attenuator of NTSC/BTSC Standard Test
Receiver EFA model 90
The LOW NOISE and LOW DIST keys are used to determine the levels in the receiver section. In LOW
DISTortion mode, the intermodulation characteristics of the receiver are improved, i.e. the third-order
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.9 E-14

intercept point (TOI) of the TV test receiver is increased by 5 dB, resulting in an improvement of 10 dB
of the receiver's inherent suppression of intermodulation products. In LOW DIST mode, the noise figure
of the receiver is somewhat higher. The switching thresholds of the attenuator as specified in Table
2.5-4 are the same in the LOW NOISE and LOW DIST modes.
Using the 10 dB PREAMP key, a low-noise preamplifier can be connected to improve the receiver noise
figure to typically 6 dB. This is useful when low-level signals are received. The attenuator is correctly set
in automatic operation. For the switching thresholds with automatic attenuator control, see Table 2.5-1.
2.5.3.2 Demodulator EFA Model 93
Fig. 2.5-5 INPUT menu of demodulator EFA model 93
The non-selective RF input X21 is activated with the DEMOD key. The RF input X21 is an N connector
located on the rear panel and has an impedance of 50 . This input allows NTSC/BTSC signals with a
vision carrier frequency of 45 MHz to 1000 MHz to be received. It is suitable for carrying out
measurements on transmitters where only one carrier signal is available. The test signals are not
subject to filtering of any kind in the RF receiver section. These characteristics have a number of
advantages:
 Optimum adjustment of the RF input, return loss 30 dB.
 Best possible instrument characteristics with regard to linear distortion, since there is no RF
selection.
 The internal level setting is optimized for reception of a single signal. This allows the best possible
signal/noise ratio to be obtained.
Note 1: If the RF signal includes other signals in addition to the useful channel, this can result in
test signal distortion or even sync loss.
Note 2: The image frequency rejection of the RF input is 0 dB.
Image vision carrier frequency RF 77.8 MHz
The IF input of the demodulator is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 . The input is
located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF vision carrier frequency is 38.900 MHz. Other
intermediate frequencies can be received via the selective RF inputs (option EFA-B3 required); for
further details see section 2.5.3.3. A message is then displayed when the IF input is activated.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.10 E-14

Fig. 2.5-6 Message showing that IF signals are received
The menu for controlling the input sensitivity of the RF input DEMOD is selected by pressing the
ATTEN... key. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.5-7 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of demodulator EFA model 93
In the AUTO setting, the internal level setting of the receiver section is automatically adapted and
optimized depending on the level of the receive signal. The automatically selected setting appears in the
display header above the measured level. The AUTO setting is generally recommended.
For special applications, it may be useful to set the attenuation switch manually:
 No switching of input attenuation in the event of level loss or large level variations.
 Measurements can be reproduced exactly.
Manual control of the level attenuation switch results in a restriction of the input level range. Table 2.5-1
shows the switching thresholds with automatic control.
Level attenuation switch Switching level threshold

MANUAL LOW+PREAMP < -1.5 dBm
MANUAL LOW -1.5 dBm to +8.5 dBm
MANUAL HIGH > 8.5 dBm
Table 2.5-5 Switching thresholds of level attenuation switch of RF input DEMOD
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.11 E-14

2.5.3.3 High-End Test Receiver EFA Model 53 with EFA-B3 Preselector Option
If the demodulator EFA model 93 is equipped with the EFA-B3 (preselector) option, the RECEIVER and
DEMOD keys can be used to switch between the selective (RECEIVER) and non-selective (DEMOD)
input. This model provides 3 RF inputs, which can be used simultaneously: selective inputs into 50 
(N connector) and 75 (BNC connector), as well as 50  (N connector) non-selective input.
Fig. 2.5-8 INPUT menu of high-end Test Receiver EFA model 93 with option EFA-B3
The non-selective RF input is activated with the DEMOD softkey. For more details, see section 2.5.3.2.
The RF input of the selective test receiver is selected in the INPUT menu using the RECEIVER softkey.
When this key is pressed, the input impedance and the active RF input are displayed.
The selective inputs are available as 50  (N connector) and 75  (BNC connector) inputs. When the
RECEIVER input is activated, the RF INPUT 50/75 key is used to select either the 50  or the 75 
input.
The selective RF inputs allow NTSC/BTSC signals with a vision carrier frequency of 5 MHz to 1000 MHz
to be received.
The IF input of the test receiver/demodulator is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 .
The input is located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF vision carrier frequency is 38.900 MHz.
For other intermediate frequencies, one of the selective RF inputs must be used. To demodulate the
lower sideband, enter the IF frequency with a negative sign. The IF frequency range that can be
received is 20 MHz to 50 MHz. A message is then displayed when the IF input is activated.
Fig. 2.5-9 Message showing that IF signals are received
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.12 E-14

displayed:
Fig. 2.5-10 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of High-end Test Receiver EFA model 93 with option
EFA-B3
The settings for the receiver attenuator of the RF inputs and the tuner and mixer levels are made in the
INPUT: ATTENUATION menu.
The ATTEN AUTO/MAN allows the RF attenuator control to be set to manual or automatic.
demodulated signal.
should be prevented from causing sync loss. Large level variations can cause the receiver attenuator to
switch. Switching the input attenuator results in a brief interruption of the receiver section, which causes
a brief sync loss.
Normally, however, the AUTO mode is preferable.
When Auto is set, the attenuator is controlled automatically depending on the measured input level. The
following switching thresholds apply to the NTSC/BTSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode; a
switching hysteresis of 1 dB applies in each case.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.13 E-14

Attenuator setting with Input level

ATTENuation AUTO
0 dB < -33 dBm
20 dB -18 to -13 dBm
55 dB > +17 dBm
Table 2.5-6 Switching threshold of receiver attenuator of selective RF inputs

The LOW NOISE, NORMAL and LOW DIST keys are used to determine the levels in the receiver
section. In the LOW DISTortion mode, the intermodulation characteristics of the receiver, i.e. the third-
order intercept point (TOI) of the TV test receiver, are improved. In LOW NOISE mode, the receiver
noise figure is improved to typically 7 dB. In NORMAL mode, the noise figure is typically 9 dB. The
switching thresholds of the attenuator as specified in Table 2.5-6 are the same in the LOW NOISE,
NORMAL and LOW DIST modes.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.14 E-14

2.5.4 RF Menu
The RF menu is selected via the RF key in the MAIN FUNCTION block. The receive frequency (vision
carrier) of the NTSC signal to be demodulated and analyzed is set in this menu. The settings in this
menu are assigned to the demodulator mode (MODE menu). That is to say, when the demodulator
mode is changed, the RF last used in the selected demodulator mode is restored.
Fig. 2.5-11 RF menu in NTSC/BTSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode
The receive frequency can be entered as RF (Vision carrier frequency) via CHANNEL or SPECIAL
CHANNEL, or by calling up a previously stored RF (RCL RF). The current RF settings are shown in the
display.
Pressing the RF softkey allows the vision carrier frequency to be entered via the numeric keypad with a
frequency resolution of 0.1 Hz, or changed via the cursor keys. If the set frequency is within 40 kHz of
the frequency of a channel or special channel of the selected channel frequency table, the
corresponding channel number is displayed.
Pressing the CHANNEL softkey allows the desired channel number to be entered via the numeric
keypad or changed via the cursor keys. The associated channel frequency table can be selected and
defined in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu. The corresponding vision carrier
frequency is displayed.
Pressing the SPECIAL CHANNEL softkey allows the desired channel number to be entered via the
numeric keypad or changed via the cursor keys. The associated channel frequency table can be
selected and defined in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu. The corresponding
vision carrier frequency is displayed.
A receive frequency previously stored with STO RF in the RF MEMORY can be recalled by pressing the
RCL RF key and entering the RF memory number. The RF memory number may be selected by means
of the keypad or the cursor keys. If the receive frequency is selected using the RCL RF function, the RF
memory number and the associated text (see STO RF) are displayed in the header. Up to 100 memory
locations (0 to 99) can be used.
The currently set frequency can be stored in the RF memory and assigned to a memory location number
using the STO RF key. Pressing the STO RF key allows the desired RF memory number to be entered
via the keypad and confirmed with ENTER. A text can be edited by pressing the EDIT TEXT key and
assigned to the previously selected RF memory number.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.15 E-14

Fig. 2.5-12 RF: STO RF: EDIT TEXT menu

Pressing the EDIT TEXT key displays the available characters. Characters can be selected using the
cursor keys. Pressing the GET CHARACTER key adds the selected character to the MEMORY TEXT.
The cursor can be moved to the right or left in the MEMORY TEXT by means of the RIGHT and LEFT
cursor keys. The DELETE CHARACTER key clears the character to the left of the MEMORY TEXT
cursor. A maximum of eight characters is permissible for RF memory number identification. When the
SAVE & EXIT key is pressed, the MEMORY TEXT is assigned to the selected RF memory number and
displayed at the top right of the menu window the next time this RF memory number is called.
Example: Saving the pilot carrier frequency 123.456789 MHz with channel designation
"Test" to memory location 99.
 RF menu
 RF
 123.456789 <ENTER>
 STO RF ...
 99 <ENT>
 EDIT TEXT ...
 Edit "Test"
 SAVE & EXIT
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.16 E-14

2.5.5 STATUS Menu

The STATUS menu is selected using the STATUS key in the MAIN FUNCTION block. The illustrations
below provide examples of the different menu contents.
Fig. 2.5-13 STATUS menu of the EFA-NTSC

All important device setups selected in the MODE menu are displayed and set in the STATUS menu.
Settings concerning input selection or attenuator and preamplifier settings must be made in the INPUT
menu.
2.5.5.1 STATUS: AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL
Switches the bandwidth of the automatic gain control.

SLOW: The tracking speed of the automatic gain control (AGC) is slow, i.e., if a hum signal is
superimposed on the RF signal, these two signals are retained in the demodulation
signal and can be measured.
FAST: The tracking speed of the automatic gain control (AGC) is fast, i.e., if a hum signal is
superimposed on the RF signal, the hum is suppressed to a large extent by the AGC
and is no longer present in the demodulation signal.
2.5.5.2 STATUS: VIDEO BANDWIDTH / GROUP DELAY
Switches the video bandwidth and group delay equalization.

4MHz/FCC: The sound carrier is suppressed. Group delay equalization meets the FCC standard.
4MHz/FLAT: The sound carrier is suppressed. Group delay equalization is flat (constant group delay).
5MHz/FCC: The sound carrier is not suppressed. Group delay equalization meets the FCC standard.
Note: An available sound carrier disturbs the video demodulator. If a sound carrier is present,
always select a video bandwidth of 4 MHz.
5MHz/FLAT: The sound carrier is not suppressed. Group delay equalization is flat (constant group
delay).
Note: An available sound carrier disturbs the video demodulator. If a sound carrier is present,
always select a video bandwidth of 4 MHz.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.17 E-14

2.5.5.3 STATUS: VISION...
Vision demodulation settings are performed in the STATUS: VIDEO menu.
Fig. 2.5-14 STATUS: VIDEO menu of the EFA-NTSC
2.5.5.3.1 VISION DETECTOR
Selection between synchronous detection and envelope detection:

SYNCHRONOUS: Synchronous detection
ENVELOPE: Envelope detection
2.5.5.3.2 SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR PLL

Selection between sampled and continuous phase control of the synchronous detector and selection of
the PLL bandwidth of the synchronous detector.
BACK PORCH: MED: The PLL bandwidth of the synchronous detector is approx. 3 kHz. The PLL is
tracked only during the back porch. In this setting, the phase modulation of
the vision carrier is maintained and can be measured via the video outputs
(quadrature signal) (recommended setting when the instrument is used as a
test demodulator)
BACK PORCH: SLOW: The PLL bandwidth of the synchronous detector is approx. 300 Hz. The PLL
is tracked only during the back porch. Even low-frequency phase
modulations of the vision carrier are not suppressed in this setting and can
thus be measured via the video outputs (quadrature signal).
CONTINUOUS: FAST: The actual PLL bandwidth depends on the vision modulation since the PLL is
continuously tracked. The PLL bandwidth is approx. 60 kHz at the all-black
level. Owing to its large bandwidth, this mode is the most stable one for
vision carrier signals with lots of phase noise.
CONTINUOUS: MED: The PLL bandwidth setting corresponds to the NORMAL BACK PORCH
setting. The actual bandwidth depends on vision modulation (approx. 300 Hz
at all-white level and approx. 3 kHz at all-black level) since the PLL is
continuously tracked.
CONTINUOUS: SLOW: The PLL bandwidth setting corresponds to the SLOW BACK PORCH
setting. The actual bandwidth depends on vision modulation (approx. 30 Hz
at all-white level and approx. 300 Hz at all-black level) since the PLL is
continuously tracked.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.18 E-14

2.5.5.3.3 VIDEO OUTPUT
The video outputs are controlled with this function.

AUTO: The video outputs are activated depending on the measured receive level; see 2.5.5.3.4.
ON: The video outputs are always activated irrespective of the receive level.
2.5.5.3.4 VIDEO SQUELCH THRESHOLD
Entry of the receive level threshold value for activating the video outputs in the case of VIDEO OUTPUT:
AUTO; see 2.5.5.3.3.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.19 E-14

2.5.5.4 STATUS: SOUND
Sound demodulation settings are performed in the STATUS: SOUND menu.
Fig. 2.5-15 STATUS: SOUND menu of the EFA-NTSC
2.5.5.4.1 SOUND DEMODULATION
Selection of the sound demodulation method. For characteristics and use of the various methods see
section 2.5.10.5.
SPLIT: Sound demodulation irrespective of vision carrier.
In this mode, demodulation of the sound carrier is possible without vision
carrier. For more details, refer to the section Applications.
QUASI SPLIT: Sound demodulation depending on vision carrier (vision carrier selection
bandwidth approx. 15 kHz). In this mode, the 4.5 MHz intercarrier is obtained
by mixing the vision and sound carriers. For this purpose, the vision carrier is
selected with a bandwidth of 15 kHz.
INTERCARRIER: Intercarrier demodulation method.
In this mode, the 4.5 MHz intercarrier is obtained by mixing the vision and
sound carriers. For this purpose, the vision carrier is selected with a bandwidth
of 150 kHz. In this setting, it is possible to verify the influence of incidental
carrier phase modulation (ICPM) on demodulated audio signals.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.20 E-14

2.5.5.4.2 DEEMPHASIS MONO CHANNEL
The deemphasis for the replay of audio signals with the correct frequency response can be switched off
in the audio-mono channel (audio main channel, rear-panel audio output):
Note: This setting has no effect on the audio signal outputs of the BTSC decoder in which the
deemphasis is always active.
75µs: Deemphasis with a time constant of 75 µs

OFF: Deemphasis switched off
2.5.5.4.3 AUDIO LEVEL MONO CHANNEL
The output level of the audio-mono channel (audio main channel, rear-panel audio output) can be set.
The editable output level is referenced to a FM deviation of 25 kHz with a modulation frequency of
500 Hz and the deemphasis switched on for a terminating impedance of 600 . The setting range is
0 dBm to 10 dBm.
Note: This does not affect the level of the BTSC composite signal output.
2.5.5.4.4 BTSC DECODER
The BTSC stereo decoder settings are performed in the BTSC DECODER menu.
Fig. 2.5-16 STATUS: SOUND: BTSC DECODER menu of the EFA-NTSC
The STEREO OUTPUT setting is used to configure the audio signals of the BTSC decoder on the front
panel of the EFA-NTSC. These settings also have an effect on the internal loudspeaker and the
headphone output. Press the AUDIO key to set the volume.
AUTO: STEREO>MONO: When the MTS pilot (multichannel TV sound) is detected, the stereo
signals are replayed independently of a detected SAP signal;
otherwise, the mono signal is output to the two BTSC audio outputs.
AUTO: SAP>STEREO>MONO: When the SAP signal (second audio program) is detected, it is output
to the two BTSC audio outputs. If no SAP signal is detected, the
stereo signals are replayed if the MTS pilot is detected; otherwise, the
mono signal is output to the two BTSC audio outputs.
MANUAL: STEREO: Stereo coding is performed independently of the receive signal and
the decoded signals are output to the BTSC audio outputs.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.21 E-14

MANUAL: SAP: The SAP-decoded signal is output to the BTSC audio outputs
independently of the receive signal.
MANUAL: L+R/L-R: Independently of the receive signal, the sum signal L+R is output to
the BTSC audio output 1/L and the difference signal L-R to the BTSC
audio output 2/R.
The BTSC OUTPUT STATUS displays the current status of the BTSC audio outputs. The status
depends on the received signal.
2.5.5.4.5 AUDIO OUTPUT
The audio outputs (rear-panel mono output and front-panel BTSC decoder outputs) are controlled with
this function. The current status of the audio outputs is displayed in brackets next to the softkey.
AUTO: The audio outputs are activated depending on the vision/sound power ratio;
see 2.5.5.4.6.
ON: The audio outputs are always activated independently of the vision/sound
carrier power ratio.
OFF: The audio outputs are always deactivated independently of the vision/sound
carrier power ratio.
Note: This does not affect the level of the BTSC composite signal output.
2.5.5.4.6 SOUND SQUELCH THRESHOLD
Entry of the vision/sound carrier power ratio threshold value for activating the audio outputs in the case
of AUDIO OUTPUT: AUTO; see 2.5.5.4.5.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.22 E-14

2.5.5.5 STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE
The settings for the zero-reference pulse and sampling pulse are performed in the STATUS: ZERO
REFERENCE menu for the measurement of the residual carrier (modulation depth) and the video
signal.
Fig. 2.5-17 STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE menu of the EFA-NTSC
2.5.5.5.1 ZERO REFERENCE
INT: A zero-reference control pulse is generated in the EFA-NTSC. The field and the line are
selected in the ZERO REFERENCE: SETTINGS menu; see 2.5.5.5.2.
EXT: Zero reference is performed via an external control pulse which has to be applied to
rear-panel connector ZERO REF. The control pulse must be >+1 V for generating a
zero reference pulse. The delay between the zero reference pulse and the control pulse
is smaller than 3 µs. The impedance of the ZERO REF input is 75 . The position of the
external zero reference control pulse is to be entered in the ZERO REFERENCE:
SETTINGS menu so that the measurement of the video parameters can be performed.
OFF: No zero reference of the carrier signal takes place. A calculation of video parameters is
not possible in this setting.
Note: The video analyzer requires the zero reference pulse to obtain correct measurement of the ICPM
(incidental carrier phase modulation). The settings for the video analyzer and EFA-NTSC should be
matched to each other; see also section 2.5.10.4.7.
2.5.5.5.1.1 BAR MEASUREMENT TEST LINE
The EFA-NTSC samples a test line for measuring the video amplitude, the sync pulse amplitude, the
BAR amplitude and the modulation depth or residual picture carrier. The test line depends on the
selected TV standard in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: TV STANDARD menu.
With TV standards M/NTSC and M/PAL, the BAR MEASUREMENT TEST LINE key is used to select
whether the measurement of the BAR pulse is to be performed in the NTC7 COMP or FCC COMP test
line.
With TV standard N/PAL, the BAR pulse is always sampled in the CCIR17 test line.
The position of the corresponding test line is to be entered in the ZERO REFERENCE: SETTINGS
menu and tuned to the receive signal; see also section 2.5.5.5.2.
Note: A correct setting is a precondition for the correct calculation of video parameters.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.23 E-14

2.5.5.5.2 ZERO REFERENCE: SETTINGS
The positions of the internal and external zero reference pulse and of the test line are set in this menu to
measure the BAR amplitude. The selectable lines depend on the selected TV standard in the SPECIAL
FUNCTION: TV STANDARD menu.
Fig. 2.5-18 STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE: SETTINGS menu of the EFA-NTSC
INT ZERO REF: Setting of the internal zero reference control pulse. This pulse is to be tuned to
the downstream video analyzer so that the analyzer can correctly perform the
measurements depending on this pulse, e.g. ICPM.
EXT ZERO REF: Setting of the external zero reference control pulse for correct zero reference
pulse sampling in the EFA-NTSC such that the sampling of the zero reference
pulse takes place at the right time. This is important for the correct calculation of
video parameters.
TEST LINE: Setting of the test line sampling in the EFA-NTSC to the received NTSC signal.
Note: A correct setting is a precondition for the correct calculation of video
parameters.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.24 E-14

2.5.6 SPECIAL FUNCTION Menu

In the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu, it is possible to define the appearance of the measurement window,
select or configure a channel/frequency table and perform special settings. If a special function of this
type is selected, the yellow LED next to the key comes on. This LED goes off only when all of these
functions have been reset to their standard values (the functions CHANNEL DEFINITION, TV
STANDARD and DISPLAY are exceptions).
Fig. 2.5-19 SPECIAL FUNCTION menu of the EFA-NTSC
2.5.6.1 CHANNEL DEFINITION
As described in section 2.5.4 (RF Menu), the receive frequency can be selected by entering a channel
number. In the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu, an RF is assigned to the channel
number. This is done by selecting either a predefined channel frequency table from the EFA or a user-
defined channel frequency table.
Fig. 2.5-20 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu of the EFA-NTSC
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.25 E-14

2.5.6.1.1 Selecting Channel Tables
In the RCL TABLE menu, a predefined channel frequency table can be selected. The EFA-NTSC
contains the standard channel tables (STANDARD TABLE) for the USA, Canada, and Korea; see
section 2.5.10.6 Channel Frequency Tables. These tables can be used as the basis for programming
user-specific channel tables (USER TABLE).
Fig. 2.5-21 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: RECALL menu
Selecting a channel table:

The STANDARD TABLE and USER TABLE softkeys are used to select a standard channel table or a
user-specific channel table. The channel table designation displayed in inverse video is the currently
activated channel frequency table. Pressing the STANDARD TABLE or USER TABLE key displays the
list of the channel frequency tables stored in the EFA. The desired table is selected using the SELECT
TABLE key and activated by pressing ENTER. Table names displayed in italics are not defined and
cannot be selected. Up to three user-specific channel frequency tables can be configured.
2.5.6.1.2 Generating User-Specific Channel Tables (USER TABLE):
User-specific channel frequency tables are defined using the COPY TABLE and EDIT TABLE functions
in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.26 E-14

2.5.6.1.2.1 COPY TABLE
First press the COPY TABLE key. Use COPY FROM to select the standard channel table that is to form
the basis for your user-specific table (press SELECT TABLE until the desired table is displayed in
inverse video). Then press EXIT. Now press COPY TO and use SELECT TABLE to select one of the
three USER tables available. Then press EXIT. The following display will appear, for example:
Fig. 2.5-22 Copying a channel frequency table
The names of the source and destination tables are now displayed. Pressing the ENTER softkey copies
the data of the source table to the destination table. In the above example, the USA table is copied to
USER TABLE 2.
2.5.6.1.2.2 EDIT TABLE
The names and data of the user-specific channel frequency tables can now be edited using the EDIT
TABLE function.
First, press the EDIT TABLE key in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu. Then use
the SELECT TABLE key to select the table that you wish to change.
 EDIT TABLE NAME
Fig. 2.5-23 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: EDIT TABLE NAME menu
If you wish to change the table name, press the EDIT TABLE NAME key. You can now use the editor to
change the name of the table. The cursor in the NAME text field can be moved using the LEFT and
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.27 E-14

RIGHT softkeys. The character to the left of the cursor is deleted using the DELETE CHARACTER key.
A character, letter, or digit is selected using the cursor keys in the VARIATION block on the front panel.
The selected character is inserted at the current cursor position using the GET CHARACTER key. A
maximum of 20 characters is permitted. After entering the desired name, press SAVE&EXIT.
 EDIT TABLE DATA
Fig. 2.5-24 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: EDIT TABLE DATA menu
If you wish to change the table data, press the EDIT TABLE DATA key. The channel frequency table of
the table selected previously is displayed. The frequencies correspond to the channel center frequency.
Every table contains two channel frequency allocations, which can be selected using the CHANNEL and
SPECIAL CHANNEL keys. Every table has 100 memory locations. Memory locations with the frequency
value 0.000000 MHz cannot subsequently be called up in the RF menu. The channel number for which
the frequency is to be changed is selected using the CHANNEL UP and CHANNEL DOWN keys. The
frequency value is entered using the hardkeys of the VARIATION and DATA blocks. Once the channel
table has been changed, press the ESCape hardkey and then the EXIT softkey. The channel table
becomes effective after it has been selected using the RCL TABLE function.
2.5.6.1.2.3 Clearing user-specific channel tables (CLEAR TABLE)
The CLEAR TABLE function allows a user-specific channel frequency table to be cleared. After
pressing the CLEAR TABLE key, use SELECT to choose the channel table to be cleared, and then
press the ENTER key.
Note: The DELETE RAM function in the PRESET: SERVICE menu clears all the user-specific
channel tables.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.28 E-14

2.5.6.2 GAIN CONTROL
AUTO: Automatic gain control. When an NTSC signal is received, the instrument is regulated to a
constant video output signal (sync tip). If the EFA-NTSC does not detect an NTSC signal,
the instrument is regulated to the signal peak value.
MAN: Manual gain control. The amplifier is set by means of an 8-bit D/A converter; see section
2.5.6.3. If the automatic gain control is to be switched off for special measurements, the
input attenuator has to be manually controlled (INPUT: ATTEN... menu). The SPEC FUNC
LED comes on if a special measurement is selected.
2.5.6.3 MANUAL GAIN CONTROL
D/A CONVERTER: Sets the gain when GAIN CONTROL: MANUAL is selected.
VIDEO LEVEL: Displays the relative video level at the video output. The measured value can be
used as a setting aid for manual gain control. If the sync separator is not
synchronized, the demodulation level DEMOD LEVEL is displayed.
DEMOD LEVEL: Displays the demodulation level. This measured value can be used as a setting
aid for manual gain control. If the sync separator is synchronized, the VIDEO
LEVEL is displayed instead of DEMOD LEVEL.
2.5.6.4 4.5 MHz INTERCARRIER Input
INTERNAL: The signal applied to the RF or IF input is taken to the FM demodulator and
demodulated.
EXTERNAL: The signal applied to the rear-panel 4.5 MHz intercarrier input INT CARR is taken
to the FM demodulator and the demodulated signal to the audio outputs. The
SPEC FUNC LED comes on if a special measurement is selected.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.29 E-14

2.5.6.5 Selection of TV Standard
The TV Test Receiver EFA-NTSC supports the M-NTSC as well as the M-PAL and N-PAL TV
standards. These standards differ in field frequency, line frequency, number of lines per frame, and the
assignment of lines to fields. The differences are listed in Table 2.5-7.
TV standard M-NTSC M-PAL N-PAL

Field frequency 59.94 Hz 59.94 Hz 50 Hz
Line frequency 15734 Hz 15734 Hz 15625 Hz
Number of lines per 525 525 625
frame
Assignment of lines to Field 1: lines 1 to 263 Field 1: lines 1 to 262 Field 1: lines 1 to 312
fields Field 2: lines 1 to 262 Field 2: lines 263 to 525 Field 2: lines 313 to 625
Table 2.5-7 Comparison of M-NTSC, M-PAL and N-PAL TV standards

The EFA-NTSC takes these differences into account, which is particularly useful when making the
settings for the zero reference pulse and the bar measurement test signal. Table 2.5-8 shows the
possible settings for the EFA-NTSC for the various TV standards.
TV standard M-NTSC M-PAL N-PAL

Bar measurement test NTC7 COMP or NTC7 COMP or CCIR 17
signal FCC COMP FCC COMP
Position of bar Line 10 to 21 of field 1, Line 10 to 21 of field 1, Line 7 to 18 of field 1,
measurement test signal line 10 to 21 of field 2 line 273 to 284 of field 2 line 320 to 331 of field 2
Position of internal zero Line 10 to 21 of field 1, Line 10 to 21 of field 1, Line 7 to 18 of field 1,
reference pulse line 10 to 21 of field 2 line 273 to 284 of field 2 line 320 to 331 of field 2
Position of external zero Line 10 to 21 of field 1, Line 10 to 21 of field 1, Line 7 to 18 of field 1,
reference pulse line 10 to 21 of field 2 line 273 to 284 of field 2 line 320 to 331 of field 2
Table 2.5-8 Possible EFA-NTSC settings for the various TV standards
Note: To ensure correct calculation of RESIDUAL PICTURE CARRIER, MODULATION DEPTH,

BAR AMPLITUDE, SYNC AMPLITUDE and VIDEO AMPLITUDE, make sure that the
settings for the zero reference pulse, the test signal, and the BAR pulse sampling are
correct.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.30 E-14

2.5.6.6 Configuration of the Measurement Window
Press the SPEC FUNC: DISPLAY... key to configure the measurement window. The following menu is
displayed:
Fig. 2.5-25 SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu of the EFA-NTSC
2.5.6.6.1 VISION MODULATION
MOD DEPTH: The modulation depth of the vision carrier is displayed in the measurement menu.
RPC: The modulation depth of the vision carrier is displayed as the residual picture carrier
in the measurement window.
2.5.6.6.2 FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT
ON: The FM deviation of the MTS pilot tone is displayed in the measurement window.
OFF: The FM deviation of the MTS pilot tone is not displayed in the measurement window.
2.5.6.6.3 MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND
ON: The status of the BTSC signal is displayed in the measurement window.
OFF: The status of the BTSC signal is not displayed in the measurement window.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.31 E-14

2.5.7 ALARM Menu

The EFA-NTSC allows the most important transmission parameters to be monitored. If the alarm
criterion is fulfilled, an alarm is triggered if this is desired by the user; see section 2.5.7.1. The alarm
threshold values can be set; see section 2.5.7.2. The alarm menu provides an overview of the current
alarm status. In the square brackets on the right it is indicated whether [X] or not [ ] an alarm is
triggered when the alarm criterion is fulfilled.
Fig. 2.5-26 ALARM menu of the EFA-NTSC
From January 2003, instruments will be equipped with floating signalling contacts in addition. Plus, the
CONFIG RELAYS .... softkey will be available on these instruments. For details see below.
The following parameters are monitored by the EFA-NTSC:
Alarm Alarm criterion
LEVEL Vision carrier level < threshold value

TV SYNC Sync separator unlocked
VIS/SND POWER RATIO MAX Vision/sound carrier power ratio > threshold value
VIS/SND POWER RATIO MIN Vision/sound carrier power ratio < threshold value
FM DEV BTSC MAX FM deviation of the BTSC signal > threshold value
FM DEV MAIN MAX FM deviation of the mono signal > threshold value
FM DEV MTS PILOT MIN FM deviation of the MTS pilot tone < threshold value
FM DEV MTS PILOT MAX FM deviation of the MTS pilot tone > threshold value
FM DEV BTSC MIN FM deviation of the BTSC signal < threshold value
FM DEV MAIN MIN FM deviation of the mono signal < threshold value
Table 2.5-9 Alarms of the EFA-NTSC
The LED next to the ALARM key signals that at least one of the enabled alarm criteria has been violated.
All alarm messages are also output at the TTL interface USERPORT in positive logic. A precondition for
an alarm message is that the alarm criterion is fulfilled and the alarm is enabled. The message remains
active as long as the alarm criterion is fulfilled. The SUM ALARM message is output in addition to the
individual messages. The sum alarm message results from the ORing of individual alarms.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.32 E-14

Assignment of the USER PORT:

17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Table 2.5-10 Assignment of the USER PORT interface (X34)
Alarm Pin
SUM ALARM 1
VISION CARRIER LEVEL 2
TV SYNC 4
VIS/SND POW RATIO MAX 5
VIS/SND POW RATIO MIN 6
FM DEV MTS PILOT MIN 7
FM DEV MTS PILOT MAX 8
FM DEV BTSC MAX 9
FM DEV BTSC MIN 10
FM DEV MAIN MAX 11
FM DEV MAIN MIN 12
Table 2.5-1 Assignment of the USER PORT interface (X34)
For EFA-NTSC models with suitable hardware (installed as standard from January 2003), alarm
messages (for enabled alarms) can also be signalled via seven integrated relays (floating signalling
lines). For relay configuration, press ALARM: CONFIG RELAYS... . The following window will come up
(if the required hardware is installed):
Fig. 2.5-27 ALARM: CONFIG: RELAYS menu
Select the alarm to be signalled via a relay using the UP and DOWN softkeys on the right. Select the
relay to be assigned to the alarm using the MODIFY softkey. If NONE is selected, the alarm is not
signalled by any of the relays. Several alarms can be assigned to the same relay, which means that the
alarm criteria are ORed. In the above example, relay 4 is used to signal both the min. and the max.
threshold of the vision/sound power ratio being exceeded.
Please note that alarms must be enabled for relay signalling to operate (see above).
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.33 E-14

The relays are assigned to the USER PORT (X34) pins as follows:
X34-26 X34-27 X34-28 X34-29 X34-30 X34-31 X34-32 X34-25
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Relay X34 pin

R1 26
R2 27
R3 28
R4 29
R5 30
R6 31
R7 32
Fig. 2.5-28 Assignment of relays to pins of USER PORT (X34)
2.5.7.1 Configuration of the Alarm Register (ALARM CONFIG)
Each alarm message can be separately disabled. To do so, press the ALARM key in the MAIN
FUNCTION block and then the ALARM CONFIG softkey. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.5-29 ALARM: CONFIG menus of the EFA-NTSC

Pressing the appropriate key allows one of the alarm modes to be individually configured. If an alarm
should not be signalled, select DISABLED. Pressing this key again switches back to ENABLED.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.34 E-14

2.5.7.2 Setting Limit Values (ALARM: THRESHOLD)
To change the thresholds, press the ALARM THRESHOLD key in the ALARM menu. The following
menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.5-30 ALARM THRESHOLD menu of the EFA-NTSC
Alarm Alarm criterion
LEVEL Vision carrier level < threshold value

VIS/SND POWER RATIO MAX Upper threshold value of the vision/sound carrier power ratio
VIS/SND POWER RATIO MIN Lower threshold value of the vision/sound carrier power ratio
FM DEV BTSC MAX Upper threshold value of the FM deviation of the BTSC signal
FM DEV MAIN MAX Upper threshold value of the FM deviation of the audio-mono
signal
FM DEV MTS PILOT MIN Lower threshold value of the FM deviation of the MTS pilot tone
FM DEV MTS PILOT MAX Upper threshold value of the FM deviation of the MTS pilot tone
FM DEV BTSC MIN Lower threshold value of the FM deviation of the BTSC signal
TIMER FOR FM DEV BTSC MIN Time for monitoring the minimum FM deviation of the BTSC signal
FM DEV MAIN MIN Lower threshold value of the FM deviation of the audio-mono
signal
TIMER FOR FM DEV MAIN MIN Time for monitoring the minimum FM deviation of the audio-mono
signal
Table 2.5-11 Alarm thresholds of the EFA-NTSC
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.35 E-14

2.5.8 AUDIO Menu

The built-in loudspeaker and the headphone output are controlled in the AUDIO menu.
Fig. 2.5-31 AUDIO menu of the EFA-NTSC
2.5.8.1 Loudspeaker
The EFA-NTSC has an internal loudspeaker that allows the demodulated audio signals of the internal
BTSC decoder to be listened to.
ON: Loudspeaker or headphone output switched on
OFF: Loudspeaker or headphone output switched off
The current status of the audio outputs is displayed in the same line. In the above figure, AUTO SND
ON means that the audio outputs are controlled depending on the measured vision/sound carrier power
ratio and are active in this example.
If a headphone is connected, the loudspeaker is automatically muted.
2.5.8.2 Volume Control
The volume of the loudspeaker and headphone can be regulated by means of the VOLUME key.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.36 E-14

2.5.8.3 Configuration of the Loudspeaker and the Headphone Output
The loudspeaker and the headphone can be configured by means of the SPEAKER / PHONE key. The
loudspeaker and the headphone output receive the audio signals from the BTSC decoder.
STEREO: If a stereo signal is received, the headphone output is supplied with signals L (left
information of the stereo channel) and R (right information of the stereo channel).
The loudspeaker receives the sum signal L+R (addition of the left and right
information of the stereo channel). If no stereo signal is received, the loudspeaker
and the headphone output are supplied with the audio signal provided by the BTSC
decoder; see BTSC OUTPUT STATUS.
L/1: If a stereo signal is received, the loudspeaker and the headphone output are
supplied with the signal L (left information of the stereo channel). If no stereo signal
is received, the loudspeaker and the headphone output are supplied with the audio
signal provided by the BTSC decoder; see BTSC OUTPUT STATUS.
R/2: If a stereo signal is received the loudspeaker and the headphone output is supplied
with the signal R (right information of the stereo channel). If no stereo signal is
received the loudspeaker and the headphone outputs are supplied with the audio
signal provided by the BTSC decoder, see BTSC OUTPUT STATUS.
2.5.8.4 Audio Status Message
The status message of the MTS pilot tone and the BTSC decoder are displayed.
MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND: Current pilot tone status of the received signal.
BTSC OUTPUT STATUS: Information on the current audio output signals of the BTSC
decoder.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.37 E-14

2.5.9 Measurement Window

The transmission parameters measured by the EFA-NTSC are grouped in the measurement window.
The measurement parameters are divided into vision and sound carrier measurements. For this
purpose, press the MEASURE key.
Fig. 2.5-32 Measurement window of the EFA-NTSC
2.5.9.1 Vision Carrier Measurements
2.5.9.1.1 LEVEL
Vision carrier level referenced to the value at the time of the sync pulse. If no NTSC signal is received
(sync separator cannot synchronize) the signal peak value is measured and displayed.
The unit can be selected in the SETUP: LEVEL UNITS menu.
2.5.9.1.2 RESIDUAL PICTURE CARRIER
Residual carrier of the vision modulator (modulation depth); also refer to section 2.5.6.6.1.
The zero reference pulse, the test line and the BAR pulse sampling should be correctly set to obtain a
correct calculation; see section 2.5.5.4.
BAR ZERO
RESIDUAL PICTURE CARRIER / %  *100
SYNC ZERO
2.5.9.1.3 MODULATION DEPTH
Modulation depth of the vision carrier; also refer to section 2.5.6.6.1.

MODULATION DEPTH / % 100 RESIDUAL _ PICTURE _ CARRIER
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.38 E-14

2.5.9.1.4 BAR AMPLITUDE
Magnitude of the BAR amplitudes referenced to the complete video output signal (sync value – zero
reference value).
BLACK BAR
BAR AMPLITUDE / IRE  *160
SYNC ZERO
2.5.9.1.5 SYNC AMPLITUDE
Magnitude of the sync pulse referenced to the complete video output signal (sync value – zero reference
value).
SYNC BLACK
SYNC AMPLITUDE / IRE  *160
SYNC ZERO
2.5.9.1.6 VIDEO AMPLITUDE
Magnitude of the video signal referenced to the complete video output signal (sync value – zero
reference value).
SYNC BAR
VIDEO AMPLITUDE / IRE  *160
SYNC ZERO
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.39 E-14

2.5.9.2 Vision Carrier Measurements
2.5.9.2.1 Vision/Sound Carrier Power Ratio
VISION / SOUND CARRIER RATIO provides the power ratio between the vision carrier and the sound
carrier.
2.5.9.2.2 FM Deviation of the Audio-Mono Signal
FM DEVIATION MAIN CHANNEL provides the FM deviation of the audio-mono signal up to 15 kHz.
2.5.9.2.3 FM Deviation of the BTSC Composite Signal
FM DEVIATION BTSC CHANNEL provides the FM deviation of the BTSC composite signal up to
150 kHz.
2.5.9.2.4 FM Deviation of the MTS Pilot Tone
FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT provides the FM deviation of the BTSC/MTS pilot tone (15734 Hz).
2.5.9.2.5 BTSC/MTS Status
MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND provides the status of the BTSC/MTS signal (stereo + SAP, stereo, SAP
or mono).
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.40 E-14

2.5.10 Notes and Applications

This section is divided into the following subsections:
2.5.10 Notes and Applications ...............................................................................................2.5.41

2.5.10.1 Traces of the Receiver Selection ...................................................................................2.5.41
2.5.10.1.1 RF Selection ...................................................................................................................2.5.41
2.5.10.1.2 IF Selection ....................................................................................................................2.5.42
2.5.10.2 Synchronous Demodulation and Envelope Demodulation with AM TV .........................2.5.43
2.5.10.3 Sound Carrier Measurements in the Absence of Vision Carrier ....................................2.5.48
2.5.10.3.1 Effect on EFA-NTSC Measurements .............................................................................2.5.48
2.5.10.4 Measurement of Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation (ICPM) ......................................2.5.49
2.5.10.4.1 Effect on Video Demodulation........................................................................................2.5.50
2.5.10.4.2 Effect on Audio Demodulation........................................................................................2.5.50
2.5.10.4.3 Measuring ICPM ............................................................................................................2.5.50
2.5.10.4.4 Recommended Receiver Settings for Measuring ICPM ................................................2.5.51
2.5.10.4.5 ICPM Measurement Using Oscilloscope .......................................................................2.5.51
2.5.10.4.6 ICPM Measurement Using XY Display of Oscilloscope .................................................2.5.54
2.5.10.4.7 ICPM Measurement Using Video Measurement System VSA ......................................2.5.55
2.5.10.5 Use of Split-Carrier and Intercarrier Sound Demodulation ............................................2.5.57
2.5.10.6 Channel Frequency Tables ............................................................................................2.5.59
2.5.10.6.1 Channel Table USA .......................................................................................................2.5.59
2.5.10.6.2 Channel Table CANADA ................................................................................................2.5.62
2.5.10.6.3 Channel Table KOREA ..................................................................................................2.5.64
2.5.10.1 Traces of the Receiver Selection
2.5.10.1.1 RF Selection
Fig. 2.5-33 shows the typical RF selection of option EFA-B3. The image-frequency selection is greater
than 100 dB.
The RF input DEMOD has no RF selection (image-channel selection = 0 dB).
Scale: 10 dB / div
SAW = OFF
(100 MHz)
Fig. 2.5-33 RF selection of option EFA-B3
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.41 E-14

2.5.10.1.2 IF Selection
Fig. 2.5-34 shows the IF selection of the EFA-NTSC depending on the device configuration.
STATUS: Scale: 10 dB / div

VIDEO BANDWIDTH 2 MHz / div
5 MHz CH1 S21 dB MAG 10 dB/ REF -3.03 dB
-3 dB 
+8-3.03
MHz dB
10 dB/
CPL
FIL
10k
-103.03 dB
2 MHz/ CENTER 36 MHz SPAN 20 MHz
Date: 26.MAR.02 16:00:04
4 MHz
Fig. 2.5-34 The IF selection depends on the selected video bandwidth
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.42 E-14

2.5.10.2 Synchronous Demodulation and Envelope Demodulation with AM TV
To reduce bandwidth, only the upper sideband of the amplitude-modulated TV signal is transmitted over
the entire video bandwidth with AM TV. The lower sideband, which is referred to as vestigial sideband, is
transmitted only up to a video bandwidth of 0.75 MHz. The AM TV signal, therefore, constitutes a double
sideband AM signal up to a bandwidth of 0.75 MHz. For modulation frequencies above 0.75 MHz, the
AM TV signal constitutes a single sideband AM signal (SSB AM).
Upper
sideband
Envelope
Carrier
I Component
Q Component
Fig. 2.5-35 Vector diagram representing SSB AM
Demodulation is best performed by means of synchronous detectors, since these are capable of
demodulating SSB AM signals distortion-free. The video signal in this case corresponds to the
I component. With envelope demodulation, the video signal corresponds to the signal envelope, i.e.
I 2 Q 2
. This means that the video signal is distorted by the amount of the quadrature component.
The error is therefore referred to as quadrature distortion. Quadrature distortion increases with the
modulation depth and causes differential gain and chrominance-luminance intermodulation. It may lead
to incorrect transmitter settings; for this reason, synchronous demodulation is recommended for all
transmitter measurements. It should be taken into account, however, that the transmitter may exhibit
incidental carrier phase modulation (ICPM). This error, which is dependent on the modulation depth,
may invalidate measurement results in the case of synchronous demodulation. It should therefore be
ensured that the transmitter ICPM is negligible.
Checking the transmitter for incidental carrier phase modulation (ICPM)

ICPM is determined from the quadrature output of the synchronous detector. If no ICPM is present on
the transmitter, the DC values of the quadrature signal have equal level irrespective of the video
modulation, see Fig. 2.5-36 left. If ICPM is present, the video modulation is mapped into the quadrature
signal, see Fig. 2.5-36 right. It is therefore recommended that any ICPM error of the transmitter be
eliminated prior to carrying out detailed video parameter measurements.
If ICPM is negligibly small, the quadrature signal reveals no video modulation, see Fig. 2.5-36 left. In this
case, the synchronous detector will demodulate the AM TV signal distortion-free, and all video
parameters will be measured correctly.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.43 E-14

Video signal (in-phase)
Quadrature signal
Demodulated signal without ICPM Demodulated signal with ICPM
Fig. 2.5-36 Video signal (in-phase) and quadrature signal with and without ICPM
Why envelope demodulation?

As explained above, envelope demodulation is not the optimal method for detecting SSB AM signals.
So, why consider envelope demodulation at all, when synchronous demodulation provides a distortion-
free video signal?
Envelope detectors have the advantage over synchronous detectors that they deliver demodulated
signals even at frequencies far off the carrier. Synchronous detectors cannot synchronize to the vision
carrier at large carrier offsets.
Moreover, envelope detectors are capable of handling receive signals carrying marked phase
interference or phase noise. Synchronous detectors, on the other hand, are phase-sensitive, i.e. they
can handle only a limited amount of phase noise or phase interference, which depends on the selected
PLL bandwidth of the detector.
These advantages, however, come to bear only if the transmitter does not operate correctly, in which
case detailed video parameter measurements are not very meaningful anyway.
Another reason for the use of envelope detectors is a historical one. In the early days of synchronous
demodulation, synchronous detectors revealed an incorrect or unstable switching carrier phase. In
modern top-class TV test receivers, the switching carrier phase is accurately adjusted to its nominal
value. An inherent test receiver error resulting from incorrect switching carrier phase is thus prevented.
In the following, the effect of such an error on the demodulation signal is described, as well as a method
of checking the switching carrier phase of the synchronous detector by means of an envelope detector.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.44 E-14

Checking the switching carrier phase of the synchronous detector

by means of an envelope detector
An error of the switching carrier phase of the synchronous detector has an effect on the demodulated -
signal similar to that of transmitter ICPM. Fig. 2.5-37 illustrates this effect by the example of the 2T
pulse. An ICPM error of the transmitter may be blanked out by a switching carrier phase error of the
synchronous detector, see Fig. 2.5-37 upper right. The switching carrier phase of the synchronous
detector can be checked by comparing the 2T pulse of the demodulated video signal obtained with a
synchronous detector to that obtained with an envelope detector. If the switching carrier phase of the
synchronous detector is correct, the baseline distortion of the 2T pulse reveals transient response
identical to that obtained with envelope detection, see Fig. 2.5-37 center and bottom.
Demodulated signal without ICPM Demodulated signal with ICPM
Synchronous demodulation with

switching carrier phase error
The transmitter ICPM is blanked

out (right) by the switching
carrier phase error of the
synchronous detector.
Synchronous demodulation with

correct switching carrier phase
The transmitter ICPM is

indicated correctly (right). The
transient response of the
baseline distortion of the 2T
pulse is identical to that obtained
with envelope demodulation.
Envelope demodulation
The 2T pulse reveals quadrature

distortion. Any asymmetry in the
transient response of the 2T
pulse resulting from transmitter
ICPM is indicated correctly. The
asymmetry in transient response
is clearly visible in the diagram
on the right.
Fig. 2.5-37 Effect of transmitter ICPM and synchronous detector phase error on 2T pulse
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.45 E-14

Comparison of video signals obtained with synchronous and envelope demodulation

The diagrams below show the effect of quadrature distortion, produced by envelope demodulation,
on the demodulated signal for 87.5 % modulation depth, as contrasted with synchronous demodulation.
Synchronous demodulation Envelope demodulation
2T pulse and 12.5T pulse
250 kHz with 125 ns rise time
Colour bars
Multiburst
Frequency response calculated with

FFT using sin x signal
x
Fig. 2.5-38 Comparison of video signals obtained with synchronous and envelope
demodulation
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.46 E-14

Overview of main video parameters and detector types for transmitter measurements
The table below lists the relevant transmitter video parameters as well as the detector types suitable for
their measurement.
Detector type suitable for

Video parameter Remarks
measurement
Bar amplitude Envelope and synchronous detector Quadrature distortion has no effect on
measurement results.
Sync amplitude Envelope and synchronous detector Quadrature distortion has no effect on
measurement results, provided that the
black level is not measured during the
colour burst.
Burst amplitude Envelope and synchronous detector Quadrature distortion can be disregarded
because of the modulation depth
(62.5 % / 87.5 %).
Modulation depth Envelope and synchronous detector Transmitter ICPM has an effect on
measurement results in the case of
synchronous demodulation.
Chrominance-luminance gain Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
Chrominance-luminance delay Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
measurement results, especially in the
case of signals with significant
chrominance-luminance delay.
Chrominance-luminance intermodulation Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
Chrominance nonlinearity, Envelope and synchronous detector Quadrature distortion invalidates
chrominance amplitude error measurement results.
Chrominance nonlinearity, Envelope and synchronous detector Quadrature distortion has no effect on
chrominance phase error measurement results.
Differential gain Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
Differential phase Envelope and synchronous detector Quadrature distortion has no effect on
Luminance nonlinearity Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
Line-time distortion Envelope and synchronous detector Quadrature distortion has no effect on
2T pulse k factor Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
2T pulse amplitude Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
Multiburst Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
Frequency response (sin x/x) Synchronous detector must be used Quadrature distortion invalidates
Signal-to-noise ratio Envelope and synchronous detector
ICPM Synchronous detector must be used
Table 2.5-12 Suitable detector types for video parameter measurements
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.47 E-14

2.5.10.3 Sound Carrier Measurements in the Absence of Vision Carrier
In some cases, measurements on the sound carrier may have to be performed in the absence of the
vision carrier, e.g. on a TV transmitter or in the lab. The EFA-NTSC is capable of carrying out such
measurements. This section describes the required settings to be made on the test receiver.
Receive frequency:
Tune the receive frequency to the vision carrier frequency of the channel to be measured
(RF = vision carrier frequency = sound carrier frequency 4.5 MHz).
IF bandwidth and gain control:
INPUT: ATTEN: AUTO
SPECIAL FUNCTION GAIN CONTROL: AGC
STATUS: 5MHZ/FLAT or 5MHZ/FCC
Select the IF bandwidth for vision carrier processing large enough so that the sound carrier is not
suppressed. The attenuator and IF gain of the receiver will then be set to match the received sound
carrier level.
Sound demodulation method:
STATUS: SOUND: DEMODULATION: SPLIT
The 4.5 MHz sound intercarrier must be formed independently of the vision carrier. This is possible only
by using the split-carrier method (parallel sound demodulation).
Caution: Sound demodulation will also be performed if the quasi-split-carrier or the

intercarrier method is used to generate the 4.5 MHz sound intercarrier.
However, with no vision carrier available, the PLL cannot synchronize to that
carrier. A free-running LC oscillator is used instead to form the 4.5 MHz sound
intercarrier. Results obtained in this way are not reliable.
2.5.10.3.1 Effect on EFA-NTSC Measurements
LEVEL
The displayed receive level is referenced to the sound carrier and therefore too large by approx. 6 dB.
VISION/SOUND CARRIER RATIO
The displayed vision/sound carrier power ratio is irrelevant and can be disregarded.
FM DEVIATION MAIN CHANNEL
Measurement ranges and measurement accuracy comply with data sheet specifications.
FM DEVIATION BTS CHANNEL
FM DEVIATION MTS PILOT
MULTICHANNEL TV SOUND
Status display remains fully functional.
Effects on Instrument Interfaces

IF output
The sound carrier is available with a level of approx. –14 dBm at the IF output. With correct RF setting,
the IF is approximately 34.4 MHz.
Audio interfaces
All audio interfaces comply with data sheet specifications.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.48 E-14

2.5.10.4 Measurement of Incidental Carrier Phase Modulation (ICPM)
Incidental carrier phase modulation (ICPM) is spurious phase modulation of the vision carrier dependent
on the modulation depth and occurring synchronously with the video information. ICPM may be
generated through amplitude modulation of the vision carrier and/or amplification of the modulated
carrier. Each level value of the vision carrier is assigned a defined phase value. Incidental carrier phase
modulation results from the deviation of the phase values from the ideal characteristic in vision carrier
modulation.
Phase modulation characteristic Phase modulation signal
of vision modulator
1 deg
-1 deg
black
sync
white
Video modulation signal
Fig. 2.5-39 ICPM generated by vision modulator
Q Q
Zero reference
Zero reference
White signal
White signal
I 1st grey level I
1st grey level
2nd grey level

2nd grey level
3rd grey level

3rd grey level
4th grey level

4th grey level
Black signal
Black signal Transfer locus
Sync tip
Sync tip
Ideal vision modulator; only the I com- This vision modulator produces incidental
ponent of the vision carrier is modulated. phase modulation.
The Q component is zero irrespective of
the modulation signal.
Fig. 2.5-40 Vector diagrams illustrating ICPM
Incidental carrier phase modulation affects both video and audio demodulation. This will be explained in
the following.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.49 E-14

2.5.10.4.1 Effect on Video Demodulation
ICPM influences video transmission and thus measurement results for most video parameters. To
prevent misinterpretation of results, it is advisable to check and measure ICPM prior to measuring and
evaluating any video parameters. Fig. 2.5-41 illustrates the effect of ICPM on the 2T pulse. For more
information refer to section 2.5.10.4.2
Fig. 2.5-41 Effect of ICPM on 2T pulse
2.5.10.4.2 Effect on Audio Demodulation

If the intercarrier method is used for audio demodulation, ICPM will affect the demodulated audio signal.
In all variants of intercarrier demodulation (including quasi-split-carrier demodulation), the frequency-
modulated sound IF carrier and the amplitude-modulated vision IF carrier are used to produce an
intermediate frequency – the intercarrier. The intercarrier method involves both advantages and
disadvantages. The advantage is that intercarrier demodulation is independent of local oscillators
(e.g. receiver synthesizers), since any phase interference introduced by local oscillators affects both the
vision and the sound carrier, and the errors balance each other out during intercarrier generation. The
disadvantage is that any ICPM, originally present only on the vision carrier, will be transferred upon the
intercarrier from which it cannot be removed. This leads to audio interference in intercarrier frequency
demodulation. This interference is referred to as intercarrier interference.
2.5.10.4.3 Measuring ICPM
In ICPM measurements, the vision carrier is examined for phase modulation. The vision carrier is
vestigial sideband modulated, which means that for frequencies above the vestigial sideband limit it is
single sideband amplitude modulated. Since SSB AM modulation involves inherent carrier phase
modulation, only modulation frequencies up to the vestigial sideband limit may be taken into account
when measuring ICPM.
ICPM is defined as the phase deviation caused to the vision carrier as a function of the amplitude of the
video modulation signal.
Demodulation of the vision carrier is best carried out by means of a synchronous detector, as it
demodulates both the in-phase component (corresponding to the amplitude modulation (video signal))
and the quadrature component (corresponding to the phase modulation) of the vision carrier. Both
amplitude values are referenced to the vision carrier keyed to zero (zero reference).
quadrature amplitude - quadrature amplitude (zero reference)
ICPM arctan
video amplitude - video amplitude (zero reference)
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.50 E-14

The zero reference pulse can be selected in the STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE menu. The EFA-NTSC
generates a field- and line-repetitive zero reference pulse. An external zero reference pulse can also be
used.
The EFA-NTSC performs synchronous demodulation and so delivers the quadrature signal necessary
for measuring ICPM. The in-phase and the quadrature signal component have equal gain.
2.5.10.4.4 Recommended Receiver Settings for Measuring ICPM
Receiver setting Remarks
STATUS: VISION: VISION DETECTOR: The quadrature signal necessary for measuring
SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR ICPM is obtained only with synchronous
demodulation.
STATUS: VISION: VISION DETECTOR: The PLL of the synchronous detector performs
SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR PLL: phase correction during the back porch only.
BACK PORCH MEDIUM or Phase control of the synchronous detector is,
BACK PORCH SLOW therefore, carried out independently of the picture
contents. During the back porch, the phase of the
vision carrier equals the reference phase.
STATUS: ZERO REFERENCE: To eliminate any DC components that may be

ZERO REFERENCE: INT or EXT present in the quadrature signal, ICPM
measurements should be made with zero
reference. In modern video analyzers, the
measured ICPM value is suppressed if no zero
reference is available.
Table 2.5-13 Recommended receiver settings for measuring ICPM
2.5.10.4.5 ICPM Measurement Using Oscilloscope
The simplest way of measuring ICPM is by using an oscilloscope. The quadrature and in-phase
components are measured for each video level (sync, black, grey and white level) with zero reference,
and the phase modulation angle is determined by means of the above ICPM equation.
Due to vestigial sideband modulation, signal components above 500 kHz must not be taken into account
in measuring the quadrature component. Moreover, the spikes produced at the signal edges during
transition between grey levels must not be taken into account. To suppress the colour subcarrier, a
lowpass filter (approx. 200 kHz, 75 ) may be connected each between the EFA-NTSC quadrature and
video signal output and the oscilloscope. Superimposed noise may be averaged out of the measured
amplitudes, since this is amplitude or phase noise and not ICPM.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.51 E-14

Example of measurement:
In-phase signal (video signal)
Sync level: 160 IRE

Black level: 120 IRE
1st grey level: 100 IRE
2nd grey level: 80 IRE
3rd grey level: 60 IRE
4th grey level: 40 IRE
White level: 20 IRE
Quadrature signal
Sync level: 4 IRE

Black level: 0 IRE (reference)
1st grey level: 2 IRE
2nd grey level: 4 IRE
3rd grey level: 6 IRE
4th grey level: 8 IRE
White level: 10 IRE
Fig. 2.5-42 In-phase and quadrature signals obtained by synchronous demodulation with zero
reference and grey scale (example)
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.52 E-14

Calculation of ICPM:
Modulation depth ICPM as a function of modulation depth
Sync level - 4IRE

ICPM(sync level) arctan 1.43 deg
160IRE
Black level 0IRE
ICPM(black level) arctan 0 deg = reference
120IRE
1st grey level 2IRE
ICPM(1st grey level) arctan 1.14 deg
100IRE
2nd grey level 4IRE
ICPM(2nd grey level) arctan 2.86 deg
80IRE
3rd grey level 6IRE
ICPM(3rd grey level) arctan 5.71deg
60IRE
4th grey level 8IRE
ICPM(4th grey level) arctan 11.31deg
40IRE
White level (bar) 10IRE
ICPM(bar) arctan 26.67 deg
20IRE
The maximum ICPM in this example is 26.67 deg. It occurs with white-level modulation. The minimum
ICPM value is –1.43 deg. It occurs at sync level. The peak-to-peak ICPM value is obtained by forming
the difference between the maximum and the minimum ICPM values:
ICPM pp 26.67 deg (1.43 deg) 28 deg
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.53 E-14

2.5.10.4.6 ICPM Measurement Using XY Display of Oscilloscope
For some oscilloscopes, special templates are offered that allow ICPM determination without performing
any calculation. The in-phase amplitude, which corresponds to the video signal, controls the Y deflection
of the oscilloscope. The quadrature amplitude obtained with the synchronous detector corresponds to
the phase deviation of the vision carrier and controls the X deflection of the oscilloscope. The
oscilloscope displays the locus of the vision modulator, see Fig. 2.5-1. To suppress the colour
subcarrier, a lowpass filter (approx. 200 kHz, 75 ) may be connected each between the EFA-NTSC
quadrature and video signal output and the oscilloscope. Superimposed noise may be averaged out of
the measured ICPM values, since this is amplitude or phase noise and not ICPM. For modulation, a
grey scale is particularly suitable. The deflected beam of the oscilloscope remains stationary during
transmission of a grey level. During this time, the beam appears as a bright point, which facilitates
reading of the measured value. The transition regions between grey levels must not be taken into
account since they contain modulation frequencies above the vestigial sideband limit. Zero reference is
required for correct calibration. Moreover, the correct gain must be set on the oscilloscope.
RF signal
TV transmitter
Zero re ferenc e
White
TV test receiver I Y
Black
EFA
Q X Sync
TV oscilloscope
Fig. 2.5-43 Test setup for ICPM measurement using XY display of oscilloscope
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.54 E-14

2.5.10.4.7 ICPM Measurement Using Video Measurement System VSA
Modern video analyzers such as the Video Measurement System VSA from Rohde & Schwarz perform
automatic ICPM calculation and graphic display of the vision modulator locus. As a special feature, the
VSA offers equidistant scaling of the phase (ICPM), i.e. the scaling is independent of the modulation
depth, see Fig. 2.5-44. This improves resolution towards small residual carriers (large modulation
depths). The zero reference is not displayed.
Video
RF
EFA-NTSC 75 Ohm
VSA
EXT DC
75 Ohm
Zero Ref Monitor/Video
Fig. 2.5-44 Test setup with Video Measurement System VSA
Requirements for ICPM measurement:

- The video signal must be connected to one of the four video inputs (A, B, C or D).
- The quadrature signal must be connected to EXT DC and terminated externally with 75 .
- A zero reference is required for measuring ICPM. If the VSA detects no zero reference, or the
sampling time (line and line position) does not coincide with the actual zero reference level, ICPM is
not measured correctly. If the VSA detects such a condition, results are suppressed.
With internal zero reference pulse from EFA-NTSC With external zero reference pulse
Fig. 2.5-45 Setting of sampling window and generation of zero reference pulse in a line
The sampling time for the zero reference level can be user-adjusted on the VSA.
The line is selected under MEASURE: SET TEST LINES: Z-REF PULSE.
The sampling time within a line is set under MEASURE: PARAMETER RES PICTURE CARRIER:
WAVEFORM: LOCATION ZERO LEVEL, see Fig. 2.5-45 (Location 0). Upon pressing the Edit key, the
sampling window (Location 0) on the display can be adjusted with the Move and Expand keys. Upon
confirmation with the Select key, sampling will be performed according to the selected setting.
Measurement with external zero reference pulse:

The VSA generates a zero reference pulse for the TV test receiver. This control pulse is available at the
Monitor/Video multifunction output on the instrument rear. The position (Edit: Move) and width (Edit:
Expand) of the control pulse (Location 1) can be set under MEASURE: PARAMETER RES PICTURE
CARRIER: WAVEFORM: LOCATION CONTROL PULSE. Upon confirmation with the Select key, the
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.55 E-14

selected setting will be active. The line is selected with the Testline key or under MEASURE: SET TEST
LINES: Z-REF PULSE. Please note that the VSA Monitor/Video multifunction output must be configured.
When using the EFA-NTSC, select the following in the SETUP menu: MONITOR: ZERO-REFERENCE
CONTROL PULSE (POS). Moreover, the external zero reference control pulse input of the EFA-NTSC
must be enabled. This is done in the STATUS menu: ZERO REFERENCE: ZERO REFERENCE EXT. It
should be noted that, when using a pulse from the EFA-NTSC, the vision carrier will be keyed to zero
with a delay of max. 3 µs, see Fig. 2.5-45 right.
ICPM measurement with NTC7 composite test signal ICPM measurement with FCC composite test signal
Fig. 2.5-46 Test signal selection
The in-phase and the quadrature component of the vision carrier can be sampled using either an FCC
or an NTC7 composite test signal. The test signal can be selected under MEASURE: SET TEST
SIGNAL: ICPM. The insertion line for the test signal can be selected under MEASURE: SET TEST
LINES as required for the video signal to be measured.
Fig. 2.5-47 ICPM measurement with Video Measurement System VSA
The ICPM measurement window of the VSA displays the phase modulation characteristic of the vision
carrier as well as the minimum, maximum and peak-to-peak ICPM. Additional values displayed include
luminance nonlinearity, differential gain, differential phase, residual picture carrier and average picture
level (APL). ICPM measurement can be controlled as a function of APL.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.56 E-14

2.5.10.5 Use of Split-Carrier and Intercarrier Sound Demodulation
The EFA-NTSC performs split-carrier as well as intercarrier (including split-carrier) sound demodulation.
The two methods differ in the generation of the 4.5 MHz sound intercarrier. With split-carrier
demodulation, the 4.5 MHz sound intercarrier is generated independently of the vision carrier. With
intercarrier and quasi-split-carrier demodulation, the 4.5 MHz sound intercarrier is generated by mixing
the sound and the vision IF carrier. The EFA-NTSC masters all three methods of demodulation. The
table below explains the characteristics of the various methods and their effects on the demodulated
audio signal.
Demodulation method
Split-carrier Quasi-split-carrier Intercarrier
Measurement of signal-to- Intercarrier interference has Intercarrier interference up to Intercarrier interference up to

noise (S/N) ratio of no effect on measurement 15 kHz from the vision carrier 150 kHz from the vision
demodulated audio signal results. Results are is detected correctly, see also carrier is detected correctly,
independent of vision carrier below. Interference due to see also below. Interference
phase modulation, see also intermodulation is also due to intermodulation is also
below. Interference due to detected. Interference caused detected. Interference caused
intermodulation is detected, by frequency converters is not by frequency converters is not
as well as interference caused detected. detected.
by frequency converters. The
EFA-NTSC inherent error is
determined by the
synthesizer, see data sheet.
Phase noise or phase ... is transferred to the ... has no effect on the ... has no effect on the
interference affecting entire demodulated audio signal. demodulated audio signal. demodulated audio signal.
AM TV signal (vision and The noise or interference can
sound carrier), caused for thus be detected by means of
example by frequency the integrated FM
converters ... measurements and by
analyzing the demodulated
audio signal.
Phase noise or phase ... has no effect on the ... is transferred to the ... is transferred to the
interference of the vision demodulated audio signal. demodulated audio signal. demodulated audio signal.
carrier (not the sound carrier) The noise or interference can The noise or interference can
in the form of ICPM ... thus be detected by means of thus be detected by means of
the integrated FM the integrated FM
measurements and by measurements and by
analyzing the demodulated analyzing the demodulated
audio signal. The weighting audio signals. The weighting
bandwidth corresponds to the bandwidth corresponds to the
vision carrier filter bandwidth vision carrier filter bandwidth
and is 15 kHz. This means and is 150 kHz. This means
that noise or interference up that noise or interference
to 15 kHz from the vision signals up to 150 kHz from
carrier is not suppressed but the vision carrier are not
detected correctly. Noise or suppressed but detected
interference spaced more correctly.
than 15 kHz from the vision
carrier is suppressed with a
filter skirt selectivity of
20 dB/decade.
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.57 E-14

Demodulation method
Split-carrier Quasi-split-carrier Intercarrier
Phase modulation of the ... has no effect on the ... is transferred to the ... is transferred to the
vision carrier caused by demodulated audio signal. demodulated audio signal. demodulated audio signal.
nonlinear amplification ... The interference signals can The interference signals can
thus be detected by means of thus be detected by means of
the integrated FM the integrated FM
measurements and by measurements and by
analyzing the demodulated analyzing the demodulated
audio signal. The weighting audio signal. The weighting
bandwidth corresponds to the bandwidth corresponds to the
vision carrier filter bandwidth vision carrier filter bandwidth
and is 15 kHz. This means and is 150 kHz. This means
that interference signals up to that interference signals up to
15 kHz from the vision carrier 150 kHz from the vision
are not suppressed but carrier are not suppressed but
detected correctly. detected correctly.
Interference spaced more
than 15 kHz from the vision
carrier is suppressed with a
filter skirt selectivity of
20 dB/decade.
Nonlinear distortion of the ... is independent of the ... is independent of the ... is independent of the
audio signal ... demodulation method. Split- demodulation method. Split- demodulation method. Split-
carrier demodulation is carrier demodulation is carrier demodulation is
recommended because this recommended because this recommended because this
method excludes nonlinear methods excludes nonlinear methods excludes nonlinear
distortion to be misinterpreted distortion to be misinterpreted distortion to be misinterpreted
as intercarrier interference. as intercarrier interference. as intercarrier interference.
Linear distortion of the audio ... is independent of the ... is independent of the ... is independent of the
signal ... demodulation method. demodulation method. demodulation method.
Sound carrier measurements ... are possible only with the ... are possible only with the ... are possible only with the
on AM TV signals in the split-carrier method. For more split-carrier method. For more split-carrier method. For more
absence of vision carrier ... information refer to section information refer to section information refer to section
2.5.10.3. 2.5.10.3. 2.5.10.3.
Table 2.5-14 Use of split-carrier and intercarrier sound demodulation
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.58 E-14

2.5.10.6 Channel Frequency Tables
Several channel frequency tables are stored in the EFA. The tables can be selected using the SPECIAL
FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION function; see section 2.5.6.1. The frequency setting is carried out
in the RF menu by entering the channel or special channel number; see Chapter 2.5.4. Channels with
the data item 0 cannot be selected. In the MODE NTSC/BTSC DEMODULATOR mode, the vision
carrier frequency is the RF (VISION CARRIER column).
2.5.10.6.1 Channel Table USA
CHANNEL SPECIAL CHANNEL

(AIR CHANNEL) (CATV CHANNEL)
Center Center
No. Vision carrier No. Vision carrier
frequency frequency
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0
2 57000000 55250000 2 57000000 55250000
3 63000000 61250000 3 63000000 61250000
4 69000000 67250000 4 69000000 67250000
5 79000000 77250000 5 79000000 77250000
6 85000000 83250000 6 85000000 83250000
7 177000000 175250000 7 177000000 175250000
8 183000000 181250000 8 183000000 181250000
9 189000000 187250000 9 189000000 187250000
10 195000000 193250000 10 195000000 193250000
11 201000000 199250000 11 201000000 199250000
12 207000000 205250000 12 207000000 205250000
13 213000000 211250000 13 213000000 211250000
14 473000000 471250000 14 123000000 121250000
15 479000000 477250000 15 129000000 127250000
16 485000000 483250000 16 135000000 133250000
17 491000000 489250000 17 141000000 139250000
18 497000000 495250000 18 147000000 145250000
19 503000000 501250000 19 153000000 151250000
20 509000000 507250000 20 159000000 157250000
21 515000000 513250000 21 165000000 163250000
22 521000000 519250000 22 171000000 169250000
23 527000000 525250000 23 219000000 217250000
24 533000000 531250000 24 225000000 223250000
25 539000000 537250000 25 231000000 229250000
26 545000000 543250000 26 237000000 235250000
27 551000000 549250000 27 243000000 241250000
28 557000000 555250000 28 249000000 247250000
29 563000000 561250000 29 255000000 253250000
30 569000000 567250000 30 261000000 259250000
31 575000000 573250000 31 267000000 265250000
32 581000000 579250000 32 273000000 271250000
33 587000000 585250000 33 279000000 277250000
34 593000000 591250000 34 285000000 283250000
35 599000000 597250000 35 291000000 289250000
36 605000000 603250000 36 297000000 295250000
37 611000000 609250000 37 303000000 301250000
38 617000000 615250000 38 309000000 307250000
39 623000000 621250000 39 315000000 313250000
40 629000000 627250000 40 321000000 319250000
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.59 E-14


Center Center
frequency frequency
41 635000000 633250000 41 327000000 325250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 333000000 331250000
43 647000000 645250000 43 339000000 337250000
44 653000000 651250000 44 345000000 343250000
45 659000000 657250000 45 351000000 349250000
46 665000000 663250000 46 357000000 355250000
47 671000000 669250000 47 363000000 361250000
48 677000000 675250000 48 369000000 367250000
49 683000000 681250000 49 375000000 373250000
50 689000000 687250000 50 381000000 379250000
51 695000000 693250000 51 387000000 385250000
52 701000000 699250000 52 393000000 391250000
53 707000000 705250000 53 399000000 397250000
54 713000000 711250000 54 405000000 403250000
55 719000000 717250000 55 411000000 409250000
56 725000000 723250000 56 417000000 415250000
57 731000000 729250000 57 423000000 421250000
58 737000000 735250000 58 429000000 427250000
59 743000000 741250000 59 435000000 433250000
60 749000000 747250000 60 441000000 439250000
61 755000000 753250000 61 447000000 445250000
62 761000000 759250000 62 453000000 451250000
63 767000000 765250000 63 459000000 457250000
64 773000000 771250000 64 465000000 463250000
65 779000000 777250000 65 471000000 469250000
66 785000000 783250000 66 477000000 475250000
67 791000000 789250000 67 483000000 481250000
68 797000000 795250000 68 489000000 487250000
69 803000000 801250000 69 495000000 493250000
70 809000000 807250000 70 501000000 499250000
71 815000000 813250000 71 507000000 505250000
72 821000000 819250000 72 513000000 511250000
73 827000000 825250000 73 519000000 517250000
74 833000000 831250000 74 525000000 523250000
75 839000000 837250000 75 531000000 529250000
76 845000000 843250000 76 537000000 535250000
77 851000000 849250000 77 543000000 541250000
78 857000000 855250000 78 549000000 547250000
79 863000000 861250000 79 555000000 553250000
80 869000000 867250000 80 561000000 559250000
81 875000000 873250000 81 567000000 565250000
82 881000000 879250000 82 573000000 571250000
83 887000000 885250000 83 579000000 577250000
84 0 0 84 585000000 583250000
85 0 0 85 591000000 589250000
86 0 0 86 597000000 595250000
87 0 0 87 603000000 601250000
88 0 0 88 609000000 607250000
89 0 0 89 615000000 613250000
90 0 0 90 621000000 619250000
91 0 0 91 627000000 625250000
92 0 0 92 633000000 631250000
93 0 0 93 639000000 637250000
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.60 E-14


Center Center
frequency frequency
94 0 0 94 645000000 643250000
95 0 0 95 93000000 91250000
96 0 0 96 99000000 97250000
97 0 0 97 105000000 103250000
98 0 0 98 111000000 109250000
99 0 0 99 117000000 115250000
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.61 E-14

2.5.10.6.2 Channel Table CANADA

Center Center
frequency frequency
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0
2 57000000 55250000 2 57000000 55250000
3 63000000 61250000 3 63000000 61250000
4 69000000 67250000 4 69000000 67250000
5 79000000 77250000 5 79000000 77250000
6 85000000 83250000 6 85000000 83250000
7 177000000 175250000 7 177000000 175250000
8 183000000 181250000 8 183000000 181250000
9 189000000 187250000 9 189000000 187250000
10 195000000 193250000 10 195000000 193250000
11 201000000 199250000 11 201000000 199250000
12 207000000 205250000 12 207000000 205250000
13 213000000 211250000 13 213000000 211250000
14 473000000 471250000 14 123000000 121250000
15 479000000 477250000 15 129000000 127250000
16 485000000 483250000 16 135000000 133250000
17 491000000 489250000 17 141000000 139250000
18 497000000 495250000 18 147000000 145250000
19 503000000 501250000 19 153000000 151250000
20 509000000 507250000 20 159000000 157250000
21 515000000 513250000 21 165000000 163250000
22 521000000 519250000 22 171000000 169250000
23 527000000 525250000 23 219000000 217250000
24 533000000 531250000 24 225000000 223250000
25 539000000 537250000 25 231000000 229250000
26 545000000 543250000 26 237000000 235250000
27 551000000 549250000 27 243000000 241250000
28 557000000 555250000 28 249000000 247250000
29 563000000 561250000 29 255000000 253250000
30 569000000 567250000 30 261000000 259250000
31 575000000 573250000 31 267000000 265250000
32 581000000 579250000 32 273000000 271250000
33 587000000 585250000 33 279000000 277250000
34 593000000 591250000 34 285000000 283250000
35 599000000 597250000 35 291000000 289250000
36 605000000 603250000 36 297000000 295250000
37 611000000 609250000 37 303000000 301250000
38 617000000 615250000 38 309000000 307250000
39 623000000 621250000 39 315000000 313250000
40 629000000 627250000 40 321000000 319250000
41 635000000 633250000 41 327000000 325250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 333000000 331250000
43 647000000 645250000 43 339000000 337250000
44 653000000 651250000 44 345000000 343250000
45 659000000 657250000 45 351000000 349250000
46 665000000 663250000 46 357000000 355250000
47 671000000 669250000 47 363000000 361250000
48 677000000 675250000 48 369000000 367250000
49 683000000 681250000 49 375000000 373250000
50 689000000 687250000 50 381000000 379250000
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.62 E-14


Center Center
frequency frequency
51 695000000 693250000 51 387000000 385250000
52 701000000 699250000 52 393000000 391250000
53 707000000 705250000 53 399000000 397250000
54 713000000 711250000 54 405000000 403250000
55 719000000 717250000 55 411000000 409250000
56 725000000 723250000 56 417000000 415250000
57 731000000 729250000 57 423000000 421250000
58 737000000 735250000 58 429000000 427250000
59 743000000 741250000 59 435000000 433250000
60 749000000 747250000 60 441000000 439250000
61 755000000 753250000 61 447000000 445250000
62 761000000 759250000 62 453000000 451250000
63 767000000 765250000 63 459000000 457250000
64 773000000 771250000 64 465000000 463250000
65 779000000 777250000 65 471000000 469250000
66 785000000 783250000 66 477000000 475250000
67 791000000 789250000 67 483000000 481250000
68 797000000 795250000 68 489000000 487250000
69 803000000 801250000 69 495000000 493250000
70 809000000 807250000 70 501000000 499250000
71 815000000 813250000 71 507000000 505250000
72 821000000 819250000 72 513000000 511250000
73 827000000 825250000 73 519000000 517250000
74 833000000 831250000 74 525000000 523250000
75 839000000 837250000 75 531000000 529250000
76 845000000 843250000 76 537000000 535250000
77 851000000 849250000 77 543000000 541250000
78 857000000 855250000 78 549000000 547250000
79 863000000 861250000 79 555000000 553250000
80 869000000 867250000 80 561000000 559250000
81 875000000 873250000 81 0 0
82 881000000 879250000 82 0 0
83 887000000 885250000 83 0 0
84 0 0 84 0 0
85 0 0 85 0 0
86 0 0 86 0 0
87 0 0 87 0 0
88 0 0 88 0 0
89 0 0 89 0 0
90 0 0 90 0 0
91 0 0 91 0 0
92 0 0 92 0 0
93 0 0 93 0 0
94 0 0 94 0 0
95 0 0 95 0 0
96 0 0 96 0 0
97 0 0 97 0 0
98 0 0 98 111000000 109250000
99 0 0 99 117000000 115250000
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.63 E-14

2.5.10.6.3 Channel Table KOREA

Center Center
frequency frequency
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 107000000 105250000
2 50000000 48250000 2 114000000 112250000
3 57000000 55250000 3 121000000 119250000
4 64000000 62250000 4 128000000 126250000
5 177000000 175250000 5 135000000 133250000
6 184000000 182250000 6 142000000 140250000
7 191000000 189250000 7 149000000 147250000
8 198000000 196250000 8 156000000 154250000
9 205000000 203250000 9 163000000 161250000
10 212000000 210250000 10 170000000 168250000
11 219000000 217250000 11 233000000 231250000
12 226000000 224250000 12 240000000 238250000
13 0 0 13 247000000 245250000
14 0 0 14 254000000 252250000
15 0 0 15 261000000 259250000
16 0 0 16 268000000 266250000
17 0 0 17 275000000 273250000
18 0 0 18 282000000 280250000
19 0 0 19 289000000 287250000
20 0 0 20 296000000 294250000
21 473000000 471250000 21 305000000 303250000
22 481000000 479250000 22 313000000 311250000
23 489000000 487250000 23 321000000 319250000
24 497000000 495250000 24 329000000 327250000
25 505000000 503250000 25 337000000 335250000
26 513000000 511250000 26 345000000 343250000
27 521000000 519250000 27 353000000 351250000
28 529000000 527250000 28 361000000 359250000
29 537000000 535250000 29 369000000 367250000
30 545000000 543250000 30 377000000 375250000
31 553000000 551250000 31 385000000 383250000
32 561000000 559250000 32 393000000 391250000
33 569000000 567250000 33 401000000 399250000
34 577000000 575250000 34 409000000 407250000
35 585000000 583250000 35 417000000 415250000
36 593000000 591250000 36 425000000 423250000
37 601000000 599250000 37 433000000 431250000
38 609000000 607250000 38 441000000 439250000
39 617000000 615250000 39 449000000 447250000
40 625000000 623250000 40 457000000 455250000
41 633000000 631250000 41 465000000 463250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 0 0
43 649000000 647250000 43 0 0
44 657000000 655250000 44 0 0
45 665000000 663250000 45 0 0
46 673000000 671250000 46 0 0
47 681000000 679250000 47 0 0
48 689000000 687250000 48 0 0
49 697000000 695250000 49 0 0
50 705000000 703250000 50 0 0
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.64 E-14


Center Center
frequency frequency
51 713000000 711250000 51 0 0
52 721000000 719250000 52 0 0
53 729000000 727250000 53 0 0
54 737000000 735250000 54 0 0
55 745000000 743250000 55 0 0
56 753000000 751250000 56 0 0
57 761000000 759250000 57 0 0
58 769000000 767250000 58 0 0
59 777000000 775250000 59 0 0
60 785000000 783250000 60 0 0
61 793000000 791250000 61 0 0
62 801000000 799250000 62 0 0
63 809000000 807250000 63 0 0
64 817000000 815250000 64 0 0
65 825000000 823250000 65 0 0
66 833000000 831250000 66 0 0
67 841000000 839250000 67 0 0
68 849000000 847250000 68 0 0
69 857000000 855250000 69 0 0
70 865000000 863250000 70 0 0
71 0 0 71 0 0
72 0 0 72 0 0
73 0 0 73 0 0
74 0 0 74 0 0
75 0 0 75 0 0
76 0 0 76 0 0
77 0 0 77 0 0
78 0 0 78 0 0
79 0 0 79 0 0
80 0 0 80 0 0
81 0 0 81 0 0
82 0 0 82 0 0
83 0 0 83 0 0
84 0 0 84 0 0
85 0 0 85 0 0
86 0 0 86 0 0
87 0 0 87 0 0
88 0 0 88 0 0
89 0 0 89 0 0
90 0 0 90 0 0
91 0 0 91 0 0
92 0 0 92 0 0
93 0 0 93 0 0
94 0 0 94 0 0
95 0 0 95 0 0
96 0 0 96 0 0
97 0 0 97 0 0
98 0 0 98 0 0
99 0 0 99 0 0
2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.65 E-14

2067.3004.90/93/B30 2.5.66 E-14

R&S® EFA Model 20 / Option B4 MPEG2 Measurement Decoder
2.6 Operation as MPEG2 Measurement Decoder.................................... 2.6.3
2.6.1 Introduction to Digital TV Transmission Technique ..................................................2.6.3

2.6.1.1 Definitions and Standards ................................................................................................2.6.3
2.6.1.1.1 MPEG2.............................................................................................................................2.6.4
2.6.1.1.2 DVB ..................................................................................................................................2.6.4
2.6.1.2 Transmission Scenario for DVB.......................................................................................2.6.5
2.6.1.3 MPEG2 Systems ..............................................................................................................2.6.6
2.6.1.3.1 Transport Stream Synchronization and Packet Identification ..........................................2.6.7
2.6.1.3.2 Contents of Transport Stream..........................................................................................2.6.8
2.6.1.3.3 Access to a Program........................................................................................................2.6.9
2.6.1.3.4 Descrambling ...................................................................................................................2.6.9
2.6.1.3.5 Program Synchronization ...............................................................................................2.6.10
2.6.1.3.6 Service Information ........................................................................................................2.6.11
2.6.1.3.7 Syntax Diagrams ............................................................................................................2.6.12
2.6.1.3.7.1 Transport Packet............................................................................................................2.6.12
2.6.1.3.7.2 Adaptation Field .............................................................................................................2.6.12
2.6.1.3.7.3 PES Header ...................................................................................................................2.6.13
2.6.1.3.7.4 Program Association Section .........................................................................................2.6.13
2.6.1.3.7.5 Program Map Section ....................................................................................................2.6.14
2.6.1.3.7.6 Conditional Access Section............................................................................................2.6.14
2.6.1.3.7.7 Private Section ...............................................................................................................2.6.15
2.6.2 Overview for EFA-M .....................................................................................................2.6.15
2.6.3 Quick Reference...........................................................................................................2.6.16
2.6.4 INPUT Menu / Input Selection .....................................................................................2.6.16
2.6.5 RF Menu ........................................................................................................................2.6.19
2.6.6 STATUS Menu ..............................................................................................................2.6.21
2.6.6.1 Features Identical to EFA-Q...........................................................................................2.6.21
2.6.6.2 SYNC CONDITION ........................................................................................................2.6.21
2.6.6.3 SET LIMITS....................................................................................................................2.6.21
2.6.6.3.1 Modification of Limit Values ...........................................................................................2.6.23
2.6.6.3.2 Loading Predefined Limit Values ...................................................................................2.6.23
2.6.7 SPECIAL FUNCTION Menu..........................................................................................2.6.23
2.6.8 ALARM Menu ................................................................................................................2.6.24
2.6.8.1 Display............................................................................................................................2.6.25
2.6.8.2 ALARM CONFIG............................................................................................................2.6.25
2067.3004.12 2.6.1 E-14

MPEG2 Measurement Decoder R&S® EFA Model 20 / Option B4
2.6.9 MEASURE Menu...........................................................................................................2.6.26

2.6.9.1 Description of Measurement Functions .........................................................................2.6.26
2.6.9.1.1 Elements of Transport Stream Syntax ...........................................................................2.6.26
2.6.9.1.2 Overview of All Measurement Functions........................................................................2.6.27
2.6.9.1.3 TS_Sync_Loss - ( 1st priority) .......................................................................................2.6.28
2.6.9.1.4 Sync_byte_error - ( 1st priority ) ....................................................................................2.6.28
2.6.9.1.5 PAT_error - ( 1st priority ) ..............................................................................................2.6.29
2.6.9.1.6 PMT_error - ( 1st priority )..............................................................................................2.6.29
2.6.9.1.7 Continuity_count_error - ( 1st priority )...........................................................................2.6.30
2.6.9.1.8 PID_error - ( 1st priority ) ...............................................................................................2.6.30
2.6.9.1.9 Transport_error - ( 2nd priority ).....................................................................................2.6.31
2.6.9.1.10 CRC_error - ( 2nd priority ) ............................................................................................2.6.31
2.6.9.1.11 PCR_error, PCR_accuracy_error - ( 2nd priority) ..........................................................2.6.32
2.6.9.1.12 PTS_error - (2nd priority) ...............................................................................................2.6.33
2.6.9.1.13 CAT_error - (2nd priority) ...............................................................................................2.6.34
2.6.9.1.14 SI_repetition_error - ( 3rd priority) ..................................................................................2.6.34
2.6.9.1.15 NIT_, SDT_, EIT_, RST_ and TDT_error - (3rd priority) ...............................................2.6.35
2.6.9.1.16 Unreferenced PID - ( 3rd priority)...................................................................................2.6.36
2.6.9.2 Error Second Counter ....................................................................................................2.6.37
2.6.9.3 START/STOP/CLEAR COUNTER.................................................................................2.6.37
2.6.9.4 Decoding Program/Elementary Stream .........................................................................2.6.38
2.6.9.4.1 VIEW PROGRAM ..........................................................................................................2.6.38
2.6.9.4.2 VIEW PROG COMP ......................................................................................................2.6.40
2.6.10 Preset and Menu Overview .........................................................................................2.6.41
2067.3004.12 2.6.2 E-14

2.6 Operation as MPEG2 Measurement Decoder

Note: For reasons of clarity, the designation used in the following for MPEG2 Measurement
Decoder is simply EFA-M instead of EFA Model 20 / Option B4.
2.6.1 Introduction to Digital TV Transmission Technique

Both DVG (MPEG2 measurement generator) and EFA-M (MPEG2 measurement decoder) are based
on a completely new technique that is currently being phased in and has become known as the ‘digital
TV transmission technique’. Not many users of the above units will have sufficient knowledge about this
new technique. Therefore, this introductory chapter preceding the other sections of the manual is
provided to give an outline of the subject matter and to inform in detail about the aspects relevant for
DVG or EFA-M.
The first section gives an overview of the relevant definitions and standards. The keywords MPEG and
DVB are focused upon.
The second section presents a possible transmission scenario. The fields of application of DVG and
EFA-M are taken into account in particular.
The third section provides information about a special aspect of MPEG2 (Part 1 / Systems), which is of
special interest with regard to the operation of DVG and EFA-M.
2.6.1.1 Definitions and Standards

Digital TV transmission is understood to mean the transmission of (moving) pictures, sound and data
from the source to the sink by means of digital methods. The aim is essentially to multiply the
transmission capacity by minimizing the redundancy as well as to obtain flexibility in quality
(transmission standards) and contents (any combination of vision, sound, data).
Implementation is made in two steps.
Source coding and multiplexing:

First, data reduction for vision and sound is performed. Next, compressed data streams together with
additional data (eg teletext) have to be combined to form a multiplex stream. Such multiplex streams are
generated by DVG and evaluated by EFA-M. The required methods are defined by MPEG2 (see
2.6.1.1.1). As for additional data, MPEG only defines the basic syntax. The European DVB project
stipulates the additional data to be integrated into the multiplex stream and their form (see 2.6.1.1.2).
Channel coding and transmission:

The transmission of compressed, almost redundancy-free data streams requires a high transmission
quality or a bit error rate approaching zero to ensure decoding. That is why channel coding is performed
before digital modulation methods QPSK (quadrature phase shift keying, for satellite transmission) and
QAM (quadrature amplitude modulation, for transmission via cable). A certain number of bit errors can
be corrected at the end of the transmission link. The methods for channel coding and transmission are
defined by the European DVB project.
2067.3004.12 2.6.3 E-14

2.6.1.1.1 MPEG2
MPEG stands for "Moving Pictures Experts Group". This standard committee works on the coding of
moving pictures and the associated sound. MPEG2 (ISO/IEC 13818) defines a corresponding standard
documentation describing the compression of vision and sound data. Moreover, there is MPEG1, for
example, which deals in particular with the recording of video on CD, or MPEG4 for the transmission of
pictures by means of very narrowband transmission channels. MPEG3, which was to define the
distribution of high-resolution TV pictures has finally become a part of MPEG2.
MPEG2, which is subdivided into many sections, is exclusively relevant for this manual. The following
MPEG2 sections are applicable to DVG and EFA-M:
Part 1 / Systems ISO/IEC 13818-1 Multiplexing of several compressed vision and

sound data streams as well as of additional data
streams to a transport multiplex
Part 2 / Video ISO/IEC 13818-2 Compression of video data
Part 3 / Audio ISO/IEC 13818-3 Compression of audio data
Part 4 / Compliance ISO/IEC 13818-4 Test procedure for compressed streams
(encoder) and decoder
Part 9 / Real-Time Interface Specification for Explanation of system-clock jitter during the
Low Jitter Applications distribution of transport streams
Table 2.6-1 MPEG2 standards
The interface for DVG and EFA-M is the transport stream (TS). The composition and structure of this
multiplex stream is described in Part 1 / Systems. Part 1 / MPEG2 systems will be described below in a
separate section (see 2.6.1.3).
2.6.1.1.2 DVB
In addition to transmission methods based on the MPEG results, the European DVB project (Digital
Video Broadcasting) laid down a number of additional definitions that were submitted to ETSI /
CENELEC for standardization. The following standards are relevant for DVG / EFA-M:
ETS 300 468: Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcast (DVB)
Systems
ETS 300 472: Specification for conveying ITU-R System B Teletext in Digital Video
Broadcasting (DVB) Bitstreams
ETR 162: Allocation of Service Information (SI) Codes for Digital Video Broadcasting
(DVB) Systems
ETR 211: Guidelines on implementation and usage of service information
ETR 290: Measurement Guidelines for DVB Systems
DVB Technical Module:

Document A010: Interfaces for CATV / SMATV Headends and similar Professional
Equipment
TM 1341 Common Interface Specification for Conditional Access and other Digital
Video Broadcasting Decoder Applications
Table 2.6-2 DVB standards
2067.3004.12 2.6.4 E-14

2.6.1.2 Transmission Scenario for DVB

Fig. 2.6-1 illustrates a possible transmission scenario for DVB. ‘TS’ indicates the interfaces for the
transport stream. The transport stream is the output and input interface of DVG and EFA-M. At any of
these interfaces, signals from DVG can be fed in or applied to EFA-M for analysis and decoding. A TS
analysis is of vital importance especially after every TS multiplexer. A program can run through several
multiplexers if, for example, programs from different transmission paths are combined and sent on a
new path.
Feed of terrestrial transmitters
Terrestrial
reception
Processing
similar to
cable headend
Cable headend
Programs
Receiver Receiver
Direct satellite
Video
TS reception
Audio Trans-
Data port TS Trans-
TS
stream TS multi- Modulator
Modulator TS plexer
multi-
Video Data Broadband cable
Audio plexer
Data
Data
TS = Transport stream interface services
Video on Demand Server
Fig. 2.6-1 Scenario for a DVB distribution network
2067.3004.12 2.6.5 E-14

2.6.1.3 MPEG2 Systems

This section describes the structure of a transport stream starting with decoding. The individual steps
required for decoding a program are illustrated and the relevant elements of the data stream required
are explained. presents an overview of the steps involved. The following subsections describe the
decoding steps. The most important syntax elements are given in diagrams at the end of this chapter.
Procedure Required elements
Explanation in section
of data stream
Transport stream 2.6.1.3.1
Sync Byte 0x47
synchronization
2.6.1.3.2
Reading transport stream Program Specific Information
contents (PAT + PMTs)
2.6.1.3.3 Packet Identification

Accessing a program
(PID)
transport_scrambling_control,
Descrambling, 2.6.1.3.4 Conditional Access Table
if required
(CAT)
Program Clock Reference

(PCR),
Synchronizing 2.6.1.3.5 Time Stamps der
a program
Elementarströme
(PTS + DTS)
2.6.1.3.6 Service Information

Decoding additional data
(SI)
Fig. 2.6-2 Functions of a transport stream demultiplexer
2067.3004.12 2.6.6 E-14

2.6.1.3.1 Transport Stream Synchronization and Packet Identification

The transport stream as a multiplex stream has to receive data from different elementary streams. The
beginning of a new packet is marked by a sync byte (0x47). The packets of a transport stream have a
fixed length of 188 bytes. The value 47 Hex is not exclusively reserved for the beginning of a packet.
Thus, this value does not always indicate a packet start.
To ensure stable synchronization the repetitive occurrence of a sync byte at 188-byte intervals has to be
checked. The hysteresis parameters define how often the value 0x47 has to occur at 188-byte intervals
for the packet synchronization to be considered locked or how often the sync byte has to be faulty for
the packet synchronization to be declared lost.
The sync byte interval can also be 204 bytes (188 + 16 bytes). In this case, the last 16 bytes originate
from channel coding (Reed-Solomon error protection). Channel decoding has already taken place at the
transport stream level so that the 16 bytes at the end of each packet do not carry any useful information.
Only the clock conversion from 204 to 188 bytes per packet duration has not been performed.
A header with a length of four bytes precedes each transport stream packet. The first byte of the header
is the sync byte, as described above. If not all the bit errors caused by transmission can be eliminated
during channel decoding, the transport error indicator is set in the header of the packet concerned.
A useful information for identifying a packet is the PID (Packet IDentification). The PID is a field of 13
bits. It can thus have 8196 different values. A PID is assigned to each elementary stream such as a
video or audio stream (not to a program). Some PID values are fixed such as value 0x000 for the PAT
(see 2.6.1.3.7.4), the value 0x0001 for the CAT (see 2.6.1.3.7.6) and value 0x1FFF for null packets, that
do not contain any useful data but only dummy bytes.
2067.3004.12 2.6.7 E-14

2.6.1.3.2 Contents of Transport Stream

The transport stream normally contains several programs consisting of several elementary streams. The
contents of the transport stream is described in the program specific information (PSI). Each transport
stream contains a program association table (PAT) as well as one or several program map tables
(PMT).
The PAT is contained in the transport stream packets with PID 0x0000. It refers to all the programs
contained in the transport stream indicating the program number and the corresponding PID for the
program map table (PMT).
The elementary streams (vision, sound, data) that belong to the individual programs are described in a
PMT. A PMT consists of one or several sections each describing a program.
TS Packet
TS Packet
TS TS
Header Header
program_map_PID elementary_PID
TS Packet Programm
Map
Table Payload
TS elementary
Header PID 0x0000
elementary_PID
Programm
Association elementary_PID
Table
Program Number
program_map_PID TS Packet TS Packet
Program Number TS TS
program_map_PID Header Header
program_map_PID elementary_PID
Programm
Map Payload
Table elementary
elementary_PID
elementary_PID
Fig. 2.6-3 PAT and PMT describe the contents of a transport stream
2067.3004.12 2.6.8 E-14

2.6.1.3.3 Access to a Program

A program to be decoded can be selected on the basis of the information about the contents of a
transport stream. If the programs contains contending elementary streams, eg several audio streams, a
selection has to be made. The packets of the selected elementary streams identified by PID now have
to be conveyed from the demultiplexer to the associated decoders.
Analyzing the continuity counter in the packet header permits checking whether individual packets
belonging to an elementary stream arrive completely and in the correct order. The continuity counter is
represented by the four least significant bits of the last header byte, ie bit 29 to bit 32 of each packet.
The value (0 to 15) is incremented with each new packet. Value 15 is followed by a zero. Two
exceptions are permissible:
The discontinuity indicator is set in the adaptation field (see Fig. 5) (ie during a program step). The
continuity counter can then have any value.
A packet may be transferred twice. The continuity counter must not be incremented.
2.6.1.3.4 Descrambling
The received data can be scrambled. Scrambling is performed at the level of the transport stream (TS)
or of the packetized elementary stream (PES).
The corresponding header information (PES header or TS header) remains unscrambled. If scrambling
is required at the transport stream level, this also includes the PES header whereas the TS headers
remain unscrambled in any case.
If a packet (TS packet or PES packet) is scrambled, this is indicated by the first bit of the scrambling
control field of the associated header (TS header or PES header). The second bit in the scrambling
control field is required since the scrambling code changes from time to time. This bit is set if a new
scrambling code is valid for the packet in question.
To be able to perform descrambling the decoder requires specific control data that are transmitted with
the entitlement control messages (ECM) and the entitlement management messages (EMM). The ECM
contain the scrambling codes, the EMM distribute the access authorizations for the receivers. ECM and
EMM are included and referred to in the program specific information (CAT or PMT).
Descrambling is performed in a supplier-specific hardware which can be connected to the decoder via a
universally defined interface (common interface).
2067.3004.12 2.6.9 E-14

2.6.1.3.5 Program Synchronization

In general, a program comprises several elementary streams. A common clock reference is required to
synchronize the decoding and display (or output) of the individual elementary streams. This clock
reference for each program comes as program clock reference (PCR) and is carried along in an
elementary stream of the program. To this effect, every 40 ms at maximum, the 4-byte header of a
transport packet is extended by an adaptation field (see Fig. 2.6-22), which contains not only a variety of
other signalling information that cannot be dealt with here, but also the PCR. The adaptation field is
always unscrambled.
The PCR value (length 42 bits) corresponds to the state of a counter with a 27 MHz clock at the time of
arrival of the first TS-packet byte containing the PCR value. It is used in the decoder for controlling the
27 MHz system clock PLL. Thus, the synchronization of the multiplexer at the transmitter end and of the
demultiplexer at the receiver end is ensured.
The individual elementary streams contain time stamps such as the decoding time stamps (DTS) and
the presentation time stamps (PTS). The packetized elementary streams (PES) are transmitted in
packets with a maximum length of 64 Kbytes (more bytes for video streams) which define a certain
display duration (eg a picture in case of video streams). A header precedes each packet of an
elementary stream (PES). The header also contains the DTS and PTS. If a transport packet contains
the beginning of a PES packet, the 10th bit (payload unit start indicator) is set in the header of the
transport packet.
The PTS / DTS value (33 bits) corresponds to the state of a 90-kHz counter and refers to the 33 most
significant bits of the PCR. The ratio of 27 MHz (PCR) to 90 kHz (PTS/DTS) is 300 and is attained by
the fact that the 9 least significant bits of the PCR only count to 300 (instead of 512).
Two different time stamps (DTS and PTS) are provided as the order of arrival of the PES packets and
their decoding does not always correspond to the order of display, for instance during the transmission
of differential pictures in video streams. In many cases, PTS and DTS have the same value or only one
PTS is available.
2067.3004.12 2.6.10 E-14

2.6.1.3.6 Service Information

The tables defined by the DVB project (see ETS 300 468) are to be seen as service information. The
information contained in these tables is not required for decoding, but provides convenient access for
the end user: it might be program information for the viewer or control information for the decoder and
the units connected to it.
In many cases, PSI (Program Specific Information) is also mentioned in connection with SI (Service
Information). PSI is already defined in MPEG2 and contains the above-mentioned tables PAT (Program
Association Table), PMT (Program Map Table), CAT (Conditional Access Table) and NIT (Network
Information Table). The latter contains data provided by the network operator for tuning the receivers,
eg orbit positions or transponder numbers. The CAT and NIT contents are not specified by MPEG but
by the DVB project.
Tables additionally defined by the DVB project are as follows:
The BAT (Bouquet Association Table) contains information about the different programs of a
broadcaster irrespective of their propagation paths.
The SDT (Service Description Table) describes the programs offered.
The EIT (Event Information Table) supplies the data base for an electronic TV guide with information
about the type of program and age classification for the viewer.
The RST (Running Status Table) comprises status information about the individual programs and
especially serves for controlling video recorders.
The TDT (Time and Date Table) provides information about date and current time (UTC).
The TOT (Time Offset Table) provides information about the local time offset in addition to date and
time.
The ST (Stuffing Table) has no relevant contents. It is generated when invalid tables are overwritten
during transmission (eg at cable headends).
The PIDs for the tables are predefined. The PMTs whose PIDs are defined in the PAT are an exception.
Moreover each table has a Table_ID at the beginning of each table. This Table_ID is required to
transmit different tables using a single PID. The interrelation of table type, Table_ID and PID is given in
Table 2.6-3:
Table PID Table_ID

PAT 0x0000 0x00
PMT 0x0020 to 0x1FFE 0x02
CAT 0x0001 0x01
NIT 0x0010 0x40 to 0x41
BAT 0x0011 0x4A
SDT 0x0011 0x42, 0x46
EIT 0x0012 0x4E to 0x6F
RST 0x0013 0x71
TDT 0x0014 0x70
TOT 0x0014 0x73
ST 0x0010 to 0x0014 0x72
Table 2.6-3 PID and Table_ID for PSI/SI
2067.3004.12 2.6.11 E-14

2.6.1.3.7 Syntax Diagrams
2.6.1.3.7.1 Transport Packet

transport packet
188 bytes
header payload header payload header payload
sync transport payload transport transport adaptation continuity adaptation

error unit start PID scrambling field counter field
byte priority
indicator indicator control control
8 1 1 1 13 2 2 4
see below
Fig. 2.6-4 Transport packet
2.6.1.3.7.2 Adaptation Field
adaptation discontinuity random elementary

optional stuffing
field indicator access stream
5 flags fields bytes
priority
length indicator
indicator
8 1 1 1 5
transport transport adaptation optional

splice private field
PCR OPCR private 3 flags fields
countdown data extension
data
length length
42 42 8 8 8 3
ltw_valid ltw piecewise splice

DTS_next_au
flag offset rate type
1 15 2 22 4 33
Fig. 2.6-5 Adaptation field
2067.3004.12 2.6.12 E-14

2.6.1.3.7.3 PES Header
packet
PES optional
start stream
packet PES PES packet data bytes
code id
length HEADER
prefix
24 8 16
PES PES data PES stuffing

original optional
scrambling priority alignment copyright header bytes
'10' or copy 7 flags fields
data
control indicator (0xFF)
length
2 2 1 1 1 1 8 8 m*8
ES DSM additional previous PES

PTS
ESCR rate trick copy info PES extension
DTS
mode CRC
33 42 22 8 7 16
33 optional
5 flags
fields
PES pack program P-STD PES PES

extension extension
private header packet buffer
field
data field seq cntr length field data
128 8 8 16 7
Fig. 2.6-6 PES header
2.6.1.3.7.4 Program Association Section
table section section transport version current section last N CRC

id syntax length stream number next number section loop 32
'0'
indicator id indicator number
8 1 1 2 12 16 2 5 1 8 8 32
program network program program

number 0 PID ... number i map ...
PID_i
16 3 13 16 3 13
Fig. 2.6-7 Program association section (PAT)
2067.3004.12 2.6.13 E-14

2.6.1.3.7.5 Program Map Section
table section section program version current section last PCR

id syntax length number number next number section PID
'0'
indicator indicator number
8 1 1 2 12 16 2 5 1 8 8 3 13 4
program N N
info loop loop CRC_32
length descriptors
32
stream elementary ES info N

type PID length loop
descriptors
8 3 13 4 12
Fig. 2.6-8 Program map section (PMT)
2.6.1.3.7.6 Conditional Access Section
table section section version current section last N CRC

id syntax length number next number section loop 32
'0'
indicator indicator number descriptors
8 1 1 2 12 18 5 1 8 8 32
Fig. 2.6-9 Conditional access section (CAT)
2067.3004.12 2.6.14 E-14

2.6.1.3.7.7 Private Section
table section private

private
id syntax section
indicator indicator length
8 1 1 2 12
N private data bytes
table version current section last N CRC

id number next number section private 32
extension indicator number data
16 2 5 1 8 8 32
Fig. 2.6-10 Private section
2.6.2 Overview for EFA-M

Test Receiver EFA fitted with the appropriate equipment can detect and process digital and analog
signals in a single unit. Depending on the required application, the unit should be configured using the
MODE key. For the MPEG2 application, press the MPEG2 DECODER in the MODE menu (see also
section 2.2.13). All hardkeys have a single function independently of the modules integrated in the EFA.
With EFA-M the function of menus INPUT and RF is to a large extent the same as the function of
menus for analog methods, the values (such as frequency) can, however, be selected separately. The
menus STATUS and SPECIAL FUNCTION have a completely different structure. Only the SETUP
menu is identical for all EFA modes and is described in section 2.3.2.
The various functions are subsequently presented and described in their logic sequence in this manual.
2067.3004.12 2.6.15 E-14

2.6.3 Quick Reference

For users who are basically familiar with the EFA, the steps required for direct decoding of MPEG2
transport streams using the EFA-Q are listed below in their sequence:
1. Switch on unit and establish RF(IF) connection.
2. Actuate PRESET.
3. Activate MPEG2 DECODER with MODE.
4. Select receive frequency (RF) and input (INPUT).
5. Select order of QAM (STATUS menu).
6. Select symbol rate (STATUS: SYMBOL RATE menu).
7. Press MEASURE.
8. Press VIEW PROGRAM.
9. Mark required program with UP/DOWN.
10. Decode with ACTIVATE PROGRAM.
It is then possible to observe the decoded program at video output X2.

In the INPUT menu, the input selection, attenuator and preamplifier settings can be made. When the
instrument is used as a Nyquist demodulator, settings in this menu are independent of the settings in
the INPUT menu.
Fig. 2.6-13 gives an overview of the possible settings.
Fig. 2.6-11 INPUT menu in the MPEG2 DECODER mode

• EFA used as a decoder for a QAM-demodulated serial MPEG2 transport stream:
In the INPUT menu the signal applied to rear-panel BNC connector X8 is connected to the MPEG2
decoder using AUXILIARY.../TS ASI SERIAL softkey. The set receive frequency and the
attenuation are blanked out of the upper status line.
2067.3004.12 2.6.16 E-14

• EFA used as a selective test receiver:

The RF input of the selective test receiver is chosen in the INPUT menu using the RECEIVER
softkey. After this key has been pressed, the input impedance and the active RF input are indicated
in the display. Depending on the EFA model, this can be a 50 or 75 input. The message INPUT
75 OHM REAR indicates selection of the rear BNC connector X9; message INPUT 50 OHM REAR
is for the rear N connector X22. With message INPUT 75 OHM FRONT or INPUT 50 OHM FRONT
displayed, the BNC connector on the front panel is enabled. The DEMOD key is labelled in italics
and disabled.
• EFA used as a test demodulator:

The broadband RF input X21 is activated with the DEMOD key. This N-type connector is located at
the rear of the instrument and has an impedance of 50 . If option EFA-B3 (selection) is integrated
in addition to a broadband receiver section, the selective or the broadband input can be selected
with the RECEIVER and DEMOD keys, respectively. When EFA is used as a test demodulator
without a selective receiver section (option EFA-B3), the RECEIVER key is labelled in italics and
disabled.
The IF input of the test receiver/demodulator is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 .
The input is located at the rear of the instrument and marked X10.
The INPUT: ATTENUATION menu is called up with the ATTEN... key. This menu can only be called up
in the selective test receiver model; in the test demodulator without a selective receiver section (option
EFA-B3) the ATTEN... key is labelled in italics and disabled.
Fig. 2.6-12 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu

In the INPUT: ATTENUATION menu the input attenuation, the tuner and mixer levelling as well as the
preamplifier can be selected and set.
When the AUTO, AUTO LOW NOISE, AUTO LOW DIST or AUTO LOWEST DIST key is pressed, the
attenuator in the receiver input is set automatically.
### With AUTO LOW NOISE selected, the input attenuation is reduced by 5 dB below the setting under
AUTO. This improves the signal-to-noise ratio of the receiver.
### With AUTO LOW DIST selected, the input attenuation is increased by 5 dB above the setting under
AUTO. This improves the signal-to-intermodulation ratio of the receiver.
### With AUTO LOWEST DIST selected, the input attenuation is increased by 10 dB above the setting
under AUTO. This is only useful if, for instance, the level in the adjacent channel is considerably
higher than that of the signal channel.
With MANUAL selected, the attenuator can be set manually in 5 dB steps in the range from 0 to 55 dB.
Setting can be made by means of the up and down cursor keys or by direct entry via the numeric
2067.3004.12 2.6.17 E-14

keypad and confirmation with ENTER. In the case of direct entry, the entered numerals are rounded to a
value that can be divided by 5.
With the 10dB PREAMP key a low-noise preamplifier can be connected to improve the noise figure of
the receiver. This is useful when low-level signals are received. The attenuator is correctly set in
automatic operation. In the AUTO LOW DIST and AUTO LOWEST DIST modes, the 10 dB preamplifier
cannot be switched on as preamplification of the TV signal in these modes is not useful. In this case the
label 10dB PREAMP is in italics.
RF receive
section
QAM MPEG2
demodulator measurement
decoder
Fig. 2.6-13 Inputs and outputs in the MPEG2 DECODER mode
2067.3004.12 2.6.18 E-14

2.6.5 RF Menu
The RF menu is selected in the MAIN FUNCTION block using the RF key. In this menu the center
frequency of the QAM signal (= carrier frequency) can be set. If the instrument is operated as a Nyquist
demodulator, the settings in the submenus are independent of the settings in the main menu.
Fig. 2.6-14 RF menu in the MPEG2 DECODER mode
Pressing the RF key causes the currently set center frequency to be displayed. This frequency can be
changed with a 1 kHz resolution either direct via the numeric keypad or by means of the cursor keys.
When the RCL RF key is pressed and the RF memory number entered, a receive frequency previously
stored with STO RF in the RF MEMORY can be recalled. The RF memory number may be selected by
means of the keypad or the cursor keys. If the receive frequency is selected with the aid of the RCL RF
function, the RF memory number and the associated text (see STO RF) are displayed in the header.
The currently set frequency can be stored in the RF memory with the aid of the STO RF key. When the
STO RF key is pressed, the desired RF memory number can be entered on the keypad and confirmed
with ENTER. After pressing the EDIT TEXT key a text can be edited which is assigned to the previously
selected RF memory number.
2067.3004.12 2.6.19 E-14

Fig. 2.6-15 RF: STO: EDIT TEXT menu in the MPEG2 DECODER mode
When the EDIT TEXT key is pressed, the available characters are be displayed. Characters may be
selected with the aid of the cursor keys. Pressing the GETCHAR key adds the selected character to the
MEMORY TEXT. The cursor can be moved in the MEMORY TEXT to the right or left with the aid of the
RIGHT and LEFT cursor keys. DELCHAR clears the character in front of the MEMORY TEXT cursor. A
maximum of eight characters is permissible for RF memory number identification. When the SAVE &
EXIT key is pressed, the MEMORY TEXT is assigned to the selected RF memory number and
displayed at the top right of the display.
2067.3004.12 2.6.20 E-14

2.6.6 STATUS Menu
2.6.6.1 Features Identical to EFA-Q

The settings in the MPEG2 DECODER mode for
• SAW filter
• SYMBOL RATE
• order of QAM
correspond to those of the QAM DEMODULATOR mode (see section 2.5.4).
2.6.6.2 SYNC CONDITION

For monitoring synchronization to the MPEG2 transport stream it is possible to set a sync hysteresis
separately for the lock and loss of synchronization. The sync hysteresis gives the number of consecutive
valid/invalid sync words before lock (TS SYNC LOCK) or loss (TS SYNC LOSS) is signalled by the
measurement decoder.
LOCK Number of valid sync words before TS SYNC LOCK is signalled, settable from 1 to 31
LOSS Number of invalid sync words before TS SYNC LOSS is signalled, settable from 1 to 7
2.6.6.3 SET LIMITS

In addition to the activation of the various parameters (see section 2.6.8.2), it is possible to specify the
limits for the distances of PCR values and PSI/SI tables. The pre-defined limit values are given in
Settable limits to DVB to MPEG
Parametername
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
PAT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 0.5 s 25 ms 0.5 s
CAT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 0.5 s 25 ms 0.5 s
PMT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 0.5 s 25 ms 0.5 s
NIT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 10 s --- ---
SDT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 2s --- ---
BAT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 10 s --- ---
EIT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 2s --- ---
RST Distance 0 ms to 100 ms --- 25 ms --- --- ---
TDT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 30 s --- ---
TOT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 30 s --- ---
PCR Distance 0 ms to 10 ms 0.01 s to 1.00 s 0 ms 0.04 s 0 ms 0.1 s
PCR Discontinuity --- 0.01 s to 1.00 s --- 0.1 s --- ---
PTS Distance --- 0.1 s to 60.0 s --- 0.7 s --- ---
PID Distance --- 0.1 s to 60.0 s --- 0.5 s --- ---
PID unref. Duration --- 0.1 s to 60.0 s --- 0.5 s --- ---
Table 2.6-4. When limits are overranged, the error condition is fulfilled and this is stored in the error
seconds of statistics for the activated parameters.
2067.3004.12 2.6.21 E-14

Fig. 2.6-16 STATUS/SET LIMITS menu
2067.3004.12 2.6.22 E-14

2.6.6.3.1 Modification of Limit Values

Select the required parameter with the UP and DOWN keys. The MIN and MAX keys are used to mark
the minimum or the maximum. Enter the required limit value with the numeric keypad.
2.6.6.3.2 Loading Predefined Limit Values

For this purpose, press DEFAULT key in the STATUS/SET LIMITS menu.
The two standards below can be selected:
• for MPEG ISO/IEC 13818-1 of 13. November 1994
• for DVB ETR 290 of 28. June 1996
Only the limit values defined in the relevant standard are preset. The values marked with '---' in Table
2.6-4 are not influenced by this setting.
The limit values are preset by pressing the associated key.
Settable limits to DVB to MPEG
Parametername
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
PAT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 0.5 s 25 ms 0.5 s
CAT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 0.5 s 25 ms 0.5 s
PMT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 0.5 s 25 ms 0.5 s
NIT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 10 s --- ---
SDT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 2s --- ---
BAT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 10 s --- ---
EIT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 2s --- ---
RST Distance 0 ms to 100 ms --- 25 ms --- --- ---
TDT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 30 s --- ---
TOT Distance 0 ms to 100 ms 0.1 s to 60.0 s 25 ms 30 s --- ---
PCR Distance 0 ms to 10 ms 0.01 s to 1.00 s 0 ms 0.04 s 0 ms 0.1 s
PCR Discontinuity --- 0.01 s to 1.00 s --- 0.1 s --- ---
PTS Distance --- 0.1 s to 60.0 s --- 0.7 s --- ---
PID Distance --- 0.1 s to 60.0 s --- 0.5 s --- ---
PID unref. Duration --- 0.1 s to 60.0 s --- 0.5 s --- ---
Table 2.6-4 Limit values of parameters to DVB and MPEG

In the MPEG2 DECODER mode no function is implemented in this menu.
2067.3004.12 2.6.23 E-14

2.6.8 ALARM Menu

In this menu the error second counters are registered (section 2.6.8.1) and the parameters to be
monitored are selected (section 2.6.8.2).
The LED next to the ALARM key signals that at least one new alarm message has been registered
since the register was called up last. The LED goes out by calling up the alarm menu using the ALARM
key.
All alarm messages are also made available electrically (positive logic) at the USERPORT as the TTL
interface. When an alarm fulfills the criteria for storage in the register (i.e. when it occurs, is enabled and
a calculation is basically possible and not impossible because of a conflict setting) the respective bit is
set. In addition to the individual messages, a summary alarm message (SUM ALARM) is output. The
summary alarm message is produced by ORing the individual alarms. Pin assignment of the USER
PORT connector:
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Fig. 2.6-17 USER PORT connector (X34)
Alarm Pin
Sum Alarm 1
First Priority Alarm (Sum) 14
Second Priority Alarm (Sum) 15
Third Priority Alarm (Sum) 16
Ground 40 to 48
+5 V (200 mA) 49, 50
Table 2.6-5 Pin assignment of USER PORT connector (X34)
2067.3004.12 2.6.24 E-14

2.6.8.1 Display
By pressing the ALARM key the current error second counters are displayed. The measurement
performed in the MEASURE menu (see section 2.6.8.2) is continued. Parameters which are not
monitored are marked with „[--]“ for the error counter.
Fig. 2.6-18 ALARM menu

The error second counter is cleared with MEASURE/CLEAR COUNTER (see section 2.6.9.3).
2.6.8.2 ALARM CONFIG

The following menu is displayed on pressing the ALARM CONFIG key:
Fig. 2.6-19 ALARM/ : CONFIG menu

By pressing the key for the required parameter it can be selected whether this parameter should
monitored (ENABLED) or not (DISABLED). Further parameters are switched with the MORE ../.. key.
2067.3004.12 2.6.25 E-14

2.6.9 MEASURE Menu
2.6.9.1 Description of Measurement Functions

In this section you will find a comprehensive description of all measurement functions and error LEDs
provided on the EFA-M to monitor an MPEG2 transport stream. These measurement functions fully
comply with the DVB guidelines for monitoring MPEG2 transport stream syntax (DVB Measurement
Guidelines ETR 290). Moreover, the EFA-M calculates the total transport stream data rate as well as the
data rates of all programs contained in the transport stream and their elementary streams.
2.6.9.1.1 Elements of Transport Stream Syntax

This figure gives you a clear overview of the basic structure of a transport stream. Elements of the
transport stream syntax which are relevant for monitoring such as packet header, adaptation field or
PES header (PES = packetized elementary stream) are shown in detail.
33 Bit 33 Bit 42 Bit 22 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 16 Bit
DSM Additional Previous
PTS DTS ES PES
ESCR Trick Copy PES
Value Value Rate Extension
Mode Info CRC
Transport Stream Syntax

2 Bit 2 Bit 12 Bit 1 Byte
PES PES Header
'10' Scrambling 11 Flags Data Optional Fields Stuffing Bytes
Control Lenght
24 Bit 1 Byte 16 Bit

Packet PES Optional
Stream
Startcode Packet PES
ID
Prefix length Header
Transport Stream
4 Byte 188 Byte

Adaptation Field PES Payload : PES
Header Payload Header Header Payload
(optional) Header (ES - Start - Packet)
13 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 4 Bit 1 Byte 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 5 Bit up to 182 Bytes
1 Byte 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit
Transport Payload PID Tranport Adaptation Continuity Adaptation Random Elementary
Sync Tranport Discontinuity
Byte
Error Unit Start
Priority Scrambl. Field
Counter
Field
Indicator
Access Stream Priority Flags Optional Field Stuffing Bytes
Indicator Indicator Control Control Lenght Indicator Indicator
1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 42 Bit 42 Bit n Bit

Program Org Splicing Transport Adaptation
Clock Program Clock Point Private Field PCR - OPCR -
Value Value Other
Reference Flag Reference Flag Flag Data Flag ExtensionFlag
Fig. 2.6-20 Elements of the transport stream syntax
2067.3004.12 2.6.26 E-14

2.6.9.1.2 Overview of All Measurement Functions

The measurement functions of the EFA-M fully comply with the recommendations contained in the DVB
Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) for the analysis of MPEG2 transport stream syntax.
Table 2.6-6 gives an overview of all measurement functions of the EFA-M.
In addition to the measurement functions shown in Table 2.6-6, the EFA-M also calculates the following
values from the transport stream multiplex:
• Total transport stream data rate [Mbit/s]
• Data rates of all individual programs in the TS multiplex [Mbit/s]
• Data rates of all elementary streams of the individual programs in the TS multiplex [Mbit/s]
Priority Error No.
Measurement Error display Error condition
(ETR 290) (ETR 290)
TS_sync_loss 1 Ts-Sync Loss 1.1
OK
Sync_byte_error 1 Sync Byte Single 1.2
Burst
PAT_error 1 PAT Upper Distance 1.3
Table ID
Scrambled
Continuity_count_error 1 Cont. Count Packet Order 1.4
More Than Twice
Lost Packet
PMT_error 1 PMT Upper Distance 1.5
Scrambled
PID_error 1 PID Missing 1.6
Transport_error 2 Transport 2.1
CRC_error 2 CRC PAT 2.2
CAT
PMT
NIT
EIT
BAT
SDT
TOT
PCR_error 2 PCR Discontinuity 2.3
and Upper Distance and
PCR_accuracy_error 2 2.4
PTS_error 2 PTS 2.5
CAT_error 2 CAT Table ID 2.6
Missing
SI_repetition_error 3 SI REP PAT Upp/Low Dist. 3.2
CAT Upp/Low Dist.
PMT Upp/Low Dist.
NIT Upp/Low Dist.
SDT Upp/Low Dist.
BAT Upp/Low Dist.
EIT Upp/Low Dist.
RST Upp Dist.
TDT Upp/Low Dist.
TOT Upp/Low Dist.
NIT_error 3 NIT Table ID 3.1
NIT Upper Dist.
SDT_error 3 SDT Table ID 3.5
SDT Upper Dist.
EIT_error 3 EIT Table ID 3.6
EIT Upper Dist.
RST_error 3 RST Table ID 3.7
TDT_error 3 TDT Table ID 3.8
TDT Upper Dist.
unreferenced_PID 3 Unref. PID 3.4
Table 2.6-6 Overview of measurement functions according to DVB Measurement Guidelines
2067.3004.12 2.6.27 E-14

2.6.9.1.3 TS_Sync_Loss - ( 1st priority)

Each packet of the transport stream is preceded by a header consisting of four bytes. The first byte of
the header is the synchronization byte (SyncByte), whose content is always the hexadecimal value 0x47.
In the MPEG2 decoder the SyncByte serves for synchronization with the packetized transport stream.
DVB recommendations define synchronism such that a sequence of at least five SyncBytes has to be
detected by the MPEG2 decoder. Synchronism is not attained or is lost, if the SyncBytes in a sequence
of at least three TS packets are not detected according to the DVB recommendations. This status is
referred to as TS_Sync_Loss. The synchronization hysteresis of 5/3 SyncBytes recommended in the
DVB guidelines is also a basic setting in the EFA-M, although it may be modified for synchronization
tests (see section 4.3.5.2 TS Input / Sync Condition).
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR290) the preconditions for a TS_Sync_Loss message are set
as follows:
TS_Sync_Loss is signalled if
• the content of the synchronization bytes in a sequence of three TS packets does
not equal 0x47 (hexadecimal)
2.6.9.1.4 Sync_byte_error - ( 1st priority )

Each packet of the transport stream is preceded by a header consisting of four bytes. The first byte of
the header is the synchronization byte (SyncByte), whose content is always the hexadecimal value 0x47.
In the MPEG2 decoder the SyncByte serves for synchronization with the packetized transport stream. If
the SyncByte is missing or contains errors too often, the decoder will not be able to synchronize to the
transport stream.
EFA-M checks the SyncByte of every packet in the transport stream for correct contents.
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR290) the preconditions for a SyncByte_Error message are set
as follows:
SyncByte ERROR is signalled if

• the content of the synchronization byte in the TS header does not equal 0x47
(hexadecimal).
2067.3004.12 2.6.28 E-14

2.6.9.1.5 PAT_error - ( 1st priority )

The PAT (program association table) contains a list of all programs and PIDs contained in the transport
stream and of associated PMTs (Program Map Tables), which contain detailed program description.
The PAT is therefore of key importance for decoding TV and audio programs. If the PAT is not available
or contains an error, the MPEG2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the
transport stream multiplex.
The syntactic structure of a PAT is comprehensively defined in MPEG2 systems (ISO/IEC 13818-1).
The PAT is exclusively transmitted in packets with 0x0000 as PID. The table may be divided up in
several (max. 256) sections with the table index (table_id) of each section being 0x00.
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR290) the preconditions for a PAT_Error message are set as
follows:
PAT ERROR is signalled if

• PAT table index does not equal 0x00 (TABLE ID) or
• PAT is transmitted in encrypted form (SCRAMBLED) or
• PAT is not transmitted at least every 0.5 second (UPPER DISTANCE).
2.6.9.1.6 PMT_error - ( 1st priority )

The PMT (Program Map Table) is a table for detailed program descriptions referenced in the PAT. As
essential information for the MPEG2 decoder it contains the PIDs of all packets of the individual TV,
audio and data streams (elementary-stream PIDs) as well as the PIDs of packets serving for the
transmission of PCR values associated with the program. Like the PAT, the PMT is therefore of key
importance for decoding TV and audio programs. If PMT is not available or contains an error, the
MPEG2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the transport stream multiplex.
The syntactic structure of a PMT is defined in MPEG2 systems (ISO/IEC 13818-1). In contrast to the
PAT, the PIDs of the individual PMTs are variable: MPEG2 permits values ranging from 0x0010 to 0x1
FFE (compare to DVB ETS 300468: 0x0020 to 0x1 FFE). The table may be divided up in several (max.
256) sections with one section for each program. The table index (table_id) of each section must be
0x02.
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR290) the preconditions for a PMT_Error message are set as
follows (abbreviated designations in brackets are as text displayed in the monitoring report):
PMT ERROR is signalled if

• PMT table index does not equal 0x02 (TABLE ID) or
• PMT is transmitted in encrypted form (SCRAMBLED) or
• PMT is not transmitted at least every 0.5 second (UPPER DISTANCE).
2067.3004.12 2.6.29 E-14

2.6.9.1.7 Continuity_count_error - ( 1st priority )

Each packet of the transport stream is preceded by a header consisting of four bytes. The fourth byte of
the header contains the count of a four-bit continuity counter. The count must be increased by one for
every packet of the transport stream that has the same PID. The count may consist of values ranging
from 0 to 15; beyond 15, it will start from 0 again (modulo-16 counter). The continuity counter serves to
recognize packets of a TV or audio program that are either missing or repeated more than once and
thus to indicate errors of the multiplexer produced during the compilation or modification (remultiplexing)
of a transport stream.
The MPEG2 standard also tolerates count discontinuity, provided this is indicated by a so-called
discontinuity indicator) in the optional adaptation field (AF) of the same packet. This method is primarily
used for the suppression of error messages when changing programs preceded by remultiplexing of the
transport stream.
In case of so-called zero packets, ie packets that do not contain any useful data but have a PID of 0x1
FFF, continuity is not checked, as the value of the continuity counter in zero packets is not defined in the
MPEG2 standard.
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for a Continuity_Count_Error
message are set as follows (abbreviated designations in brackets are as text displayed in the monitoring
report):
Continuity Count ERROR is signalled if

• the same packet has been transmitted more than twice without discontinuity or
indicator (MORE THAN TWICE)
• a packet is missing, ie new count = old count + 2 without discontinuity indicator or
(LOST PACKET)
• there is a wrong sequence of packets, ie discontinuity without discontinuity
indicator, without any of the above conditions present (PACKET ORDER)
2.6.9.1.8 PID_error - ( 1st priority )

The PMT (Program Map Table) entries reveal the elementary-stream PIDs that are contained in the
transport-stream multiplex. To decode a program with the corresponding PID, these packets must be
contained in the transport stream, and for the MPEG2 decoder to function error-free these packets also
need to be transmitted at certain intervals. The DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) speak of a
‘user specified period’, which means that it can be freely selected by the user. The preset value for the
DVMD is 0.5 s, but it can be modified in the STATUS/SET LIMITS menu according to individual
requirements (see section 2.6.6.3).
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for a PID_Error message are defined
as follows:
PID ERROR is signalled if

• the interval between two elementary-stream packets of the same PID > 0.5
second
2067.3004.12 2.6.30 E-14

2.6.9.1.9 Transport_error - ( 2nd priority )

The second byte of every packet header in the transport stream contains the so-called
transport_error_indicator, which is a flag that serves to indicate bit errors in the following packet. This
flag is generated and inserted by the Viterbi or Reed-Solomon decoder at the receiver end, if the
decoder is no longer capable of correcting all bit and byte errors in the transport stream.
Because it is not possible in case of a set transport_error_indicator to predict which bit or byte contains
an error, this packet must not be evaluated by an MPEG2 decoder. For this reason, in a case like this
the EFA-M only indicates the Transport_Error, which means that the packet is not checked for further
transport stream errors.
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for a Transport_Error message are
defined as follows:
Transport ERROR is signalled if

• a transport_error_indicator bit is set in the packet header
2.6.9.1.10 CRC_error - ( 2nd priority )

If program-specific information (PSI tables) such as PAT, CAT, PMT, NIT, EIT, SDT, BAT and TOT is
transmitted, a value for checking the check sum of this section is inserted at the end of each table
section. The so-called CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is used for calculating the check sum at the
transmitter and receiver end. Combined with the additionally transmitted CRC value, the check sum for
each table section must be zero.
If the resulting check sum does not equal zero, the MPEG2 decoder must reject the information
contained in this table.
If a CRC_error is detected, it cannot be predicted which part of the information contained in the table is
not correct. In this case, the DVMD signals the CRC_error, but the transport stream is not checked for
further errors which are derived from the faulty content of this table (eg search for PMT PIDs from a
PAT or ES PIDs from a PMT).
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for a CRC_Error message are
defined as follows:
CRC ERROR is signalled if

• a packet with PAT, CAT, PMT, NIT, EIT, BAT, SDT or TOT and CRC check of a
section does not equal zero
2067.3004.12 2.6.31 E-14

2.6.9.1.11 PCR_error, PCR_accuracy_error - ( 2nd priority)

In every transport stream, coded time values obtained from the system time are transmitted to enable
the MPEG2 decoder to link its own timing to the system timing of the coder to allow decoding (PLL).
Each program contained in the transport stream may have its own independent program system timing
(referenced in PMT). The program map table (PMT) reveals for all programs contained in the transport
stream in which packets (PIDs) the PCR values (Program Clock Reference)are transmitted.
PCR values are transmitted with a width of 42 bits in the optional adaptation field. The 42 bits consists of
two parts, a PCR base of 33 bits and a PCR extension of 9 bits. The following formulae apply:
33
PCR base (i) = ( System clock frequency * t(i) DIV 300 ) % 2
PCR extension (i) = ( System clock frequency * t(i) DIV 1 ) % 300
PCR (i) = ( PCR base (i) * 300 ) + PCR extension (i)
33
The 42-bit PCR value coded in this way starts from 0 after 2 * 300 timing sequences (an interval of
approx. 26.5 hours).
The MPEG2 standard also tolerates discontinuity of PCR values following one another, provided this is
indicated by the so-called discontinuity indicator in the optional adaptation field (AF) of the same packet.
This method is primarily used for the suppression of PCR error messages when changing programs
preceded by remultiplexing of the transport stream.
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for a PCR_Error message are
defined as follows (abbreviated designations in brackets are as text displayed in the monitoring report):
PCR ERROR is signalled if

• the difference of two consecutive PCR values of a program > 100 ms and no or
discontinuity is indicated in the optional adaptation field (DISCONTINUITY)
• the interval between two packets with PCR values of a program > 40 ms (UPPER
DISTANCE)
The above mentioned intervals are given in the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) and are
preset in the EFA-M, but they can also be modified according to individual requirements in the
STATUS/SET LIMITS menu (see section 2.6.6.3).
The DVB Measurement Guidelines also recommend additional monitoring of the accuracy of the PCR
values transmitted. Accuracy of PCR values may be impaired by inaccurate calculation of the 42-bit
PCR word width or by errors during modification of PCR values in a remultiplex.
Note : The term accuracy in this case does not refer to absolute frequency accuracy of the
27 MHz system timing, but to the fluctuation width of the PCR values of a program which is
caused by the above mentioned errors.
2067.3004.12 2.6.32 E-14

The MPEG2 standard (ISO/IEC 13818-1) as well as the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290)
prescribe a maximum tolerance of ± 500 ns for PCR values. The MPEG2 standard (ISO/IEC 13818-4)
also describes a method to be used for testing the so-called timing accuracy, which serves to monitor
the compliance of these PCR tolerances. The description of this method contains an inequality, which
must be fulfilled for all PCR values of a program. This inequality is as follows:
( i - i’’-1 ) ( i - i’’ +1)
k
PCR(i) - PCR(i’’) + PCR(i) - PCR(i’’) -
i index of the byte, in which the current PCR value was transmitted
i’’ index of the byte, in which the previous PCR value was transmitted
27 + 810 * (PCR(i)-PCR(i’’)) / 27E6;
If the above inequality is not fulfilled for any consecutive pairs of PCR values, (maximum value of the left
side and minimum values of the right side are stored) the precondition for a PCR_accuracy_error is
fulfilled:
PCR Accuracy ERROR is signalled if

• the PCR tolerance within a program > ± 500 ns
2.6.9.1.12 PTS_error - (2nd priority)

Presentation Time Stamps (PTS values) in the PES headers are transmitted by transport stream
packets of a program. They enable the MPEG2 decoder to identify the exact time when a transmitted
data block (TV picture in case of video streams and beginning of an audio sequence in case of audio
streams) is to be presented. The time stamps are transmitted with a word width of 33 bits and relate to
the 27-MHz system timing sequence transmitted in the transport stream together with the PCR values.
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for a PTS_Error message are defined
as follows:
PTS ERROR is signalled if

• the difference of two consecutive PTS values following one another > 700 ms.
The above mentioned interval is given in the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) and is preset in
the EFA-M, but it can also be modified according to individual requirements in the STATUS/SET LIMITS
menu (see section 2.6.6.3).
2067.3004.12 2.6.33 E-14

2.6.9.1.13 CAT_error - (2nd priority)

If encrypted data are contained in a packet of the transport stream, this must be indicated in the packet
header (2nd byte) within the field that is two bits wide and is labelled transport_scrambling_control. The
individual values indicate the following:
Value
Description
(binary)
00 No encrypted data contained in the packet
01, 10, 11 Defined by user
If encrypted data are to be transmitted, the MPEG2 standard recommends the additional transmission
of the tables containing the encrypted data (Conditional Access Table, CAT) in separate packets with
(0x0001) as PID and 0x01 as table index.
The MPEG2 standard prescribes that packet header including the optional adaptation fields must not be
transmitted in encrypted form. According to DVB specifications (ETS 300468), the same applies to
tables containing service information (S tables PAT, PMT, NIT, EIT, BAT, TDT, TOT and SDT) The only
exception to this rule is the EIT (Event Information Table) when program overviews are transmitted.
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for a CAT_Error message are
defined as follows (abbreviated designations in brackets are as text displayed in the monitoring report):
CAT ERROR is signalled if

• a packet contains encrypted data, but no CAT is found (MISSING) or
• a packet with CAT-PID (0x0001) is found, but table index does not equal 0x01
(TABLE ID)
2.6.9.1.14 SI_repetition_error - ( 3rd priority)

The DVB standard (ETR211) prescribes minimum and maximum intervals for the repetition of individual
packets and complete tables containing service information (SI) (see Table 2.6-7). These values are
preset in the EFA-M, but each value can be modified according to individual requirements in the
STATUS/SET LIMITS menu (see section 2.6.6.3).
Max. interval Min. interval

Service Information
(complete table) (individual sections)
PAT 0.5 s 25 ms
1 1
CAT 0.5 s ) 25 ms )
PMT 0.5 s 25 ms
NIT 10 s 25 ms
2
SDT 2s ) 25 ms
1 1
BAT 10 s ) 25 ms )
2
EIT 2s ) 25 ms
RST - 25 ms
TDT 30 s 25 ms
TOT 30 s 25 ms
)1 if present )2 For current transport stream multiplex
Table 2.6-7 Repetition rates for service information according to DVB
2067.3004.12 2.6.34 E-14

In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETS 300 468) the preconditions for a SI_repetition_error are
defined as follows:
SI_repetition_error is signalled if
• time difference between SI tables is too long or
• time difference between SI sections is too short
2.6.9.1.15 NIT_, SDT_, EIT_, RST_ and TDT_error- (3rd priority)

These types of service information (SI) are also inserted into the transport stream as additional data
(multiplex) and contain among other things the current date, time, description of the TV program, etc.
Each of these tables is transmitted in the form of packets with a given packet number (PID) and must be
contained in the transport stream at certain intervals according to the DVB specification. However, not
every SI has a different PID, but packets for TDT and TOT as well as SDT and BAT have identical PIDs.
These tables are differentiated by an entry in the table header, the so-called table index (table_id). This
table_id enables an MPEG2 decoder working in compliance with the DVB standard to identify the type of
service information it is dealing with.
Table 2.6-8 gives an overview of the service information according to the DVB guideline ETS 300468:
Service Information PID [hex] Table_id [hex] Max. interval [sec]

NIT 0x0010 0x40, 0x41,0x42 10
SDT 0x0011 0x42, 0x46 2
1
BAT 0x0011 0x4A 10 )
2
EIT 0x0012 0x4E to 0x4F, 2 )
0x50 to 0x6F
RST 0x0013 0x71 -
TDT 0x0014 0x70 30
TOT 0x0014 0x73 30
Stuffing Table 0x0010 to 0x0013 0x72 -
)1 Only if present
)2 For the current transport stream multiplex
Table 2.6-8 Overview of service information according to DVB guideline ETS 300468
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for NIT_error, SDT_error, EIT_error,
RST_error or TDT_error messages are defined as follows:
NIT_error, SDT_error, EIT_error, RST_error or TDT_error are signalled if

• a packet with the PID of an SI packet NIT, SDT, EIT, RST, TDT or TOT, but or
wrong table index is contained in the transport stream (TABLE ID)
• time difference between SI sections of NIT, SDT, EIT, TDT or TOT is too long.
2067.3004.12 2.6.35 E-14

2.6.9.1.16 Unreferenced PID - ( 3rd priority)

The PMT (Program Map Table) contains a complete list of all program definitions contained in the
transport stream. In turn, each program definition contains the information on all PIDs of the elementary
stream packets of this program. This means that by evaluating the PMT one obtains the PIDs of all
transport stream packets which are permitted to convey the useful data of the program. Besides these
referenced packets, the transport stream multiplex is only permitted to contain packets with program-
specific information (PSI tables) such as PAT, CAT, CA-PID, PMT, NIT, BAT, SDT, TDT, TOT, EIT,
RST or having packet numbers reserved by the MPEG2 standard.
Only if the program is changed (new PMT) a non-referenced PID may be contained in the transport
stream during 0.5 s according to the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290). This interval of 0.5 s is
preset in the EFA-M to comply with DVB, but it can be modified according to individual requirements in
the STATUS/SET LIMITS menu (see section 2.6.6.3).
In the DVB Measurement Guidelines (ETR 290) the preconditions for an Unreferenced_PID_Error
message are set as follows:
Unreferenced PID ERROR is signalled if

• the transport stream contains a packet with a PID which is not the PID of PAT,
CAT, CA-PID, PMT, NIT, BAT, SDT, TDT, TOT, EIT or RST and which is not
referenced in a PMT that is at least 0.5 second old (ES-PID or PCR-PID).
2067.3004.12 2.6.36 E-14

2.6.9.2 Error Second Counter

In this menu, the errors which have occurred in the MPEG2 transport stream are displayed according to
ETR 290.
The menu is divided into first, second and third priority. The associated parameters are indicated under
each priority. In front of each parameter name its error counter is specified.
The errors are displayed in error seconds, ie the counter is increased by 1 for each second in which an
error has occurred at least once. The counter stops at a maximum of 99 error seconds until the
monitoring is cleared (see section 2.6.9.3).
If the monitoring is switched off for one parameter (see section 2.6.8.2), this is indicated on the LCD
display by „[--]“ for the error counter.
When an error occurs for a monitored parameter, a ' ' is output for one second in form of the parameter
name. If the error condition is not fulfilled after one second, the character ' ' is cleared in front of the
parameter.
The monitoring duration is indicated in days, hours, minutes and seconds at the bottom of the screen in
the field ELAPSED TIME.
2.6.9.3 START/STOP/CLEAR COUNTER

In this menu it is possible to control the transport stream monitoring. This has an effect on the
indications in the menus MEASURE and ALARM.
The following actions are available for monitoring:
START COUNTER The transport stream monitoring is started. The error seconds are determined
and the errors occurred indicated.
STOP COUNTER The transport stream monitoring is stopped. The error seconds are not
determined. An interrupted measurement can be continued with START.
CLEAR COUNTER The indications for error seconds are reset to 0. Clearing has no effect on the
status of a measurement, ie a current measurement is not stopped and a
measurement interrupted with STOP is not re-started. Only the indications for
error seconds are reset, the report content is cleared and the time is set to
0:00:00 in the field ELAPSED TIME.
2067.3004.12 2.6.37 E-14

2.6.9.4 Decoding Program/Elementary Stream
2.6.9.4.1 VIEW PROGRAM

By pressing the VIEW PROGRAM key the user calls up a menu for decoding a program. This is done
independently of the error second counters.
If the selected program consists of more than one video, audio and data stream, a detailed selection of
program elements can be effected in the VIEW PROGRAM/VIEW PROG COMP menu.
To do this, the tables PAT, PMT and SDT contained in the MPEG2 transport stream are evaluated and
the program assignment of the transport stream is indicated on the display (see Fig. 2.6-22). In this
example the CCIR17 program is decoded with number 6. This is marked by an asterisk placed in front
of the program name.
Fig. 2.6-22 MEASURE/VIEW PROGRAM menu
2067.3004.12 2.6.38 E-14

This menu is divided into five columns:
NO Indication of program number

NAME Indication of program name
ELEMENT Indication of various elements forming the program.
The following syntax is used:
V = Video A = Audio D = Data O = Others
The elements currently decoded are marked with capital letters.
For example, the indication 'VaAad' means that:
the program consists of one video stream, three audio streams and one data
stream; the video stream and the second audio stream are decoded.
CA Conditional Access
A ' ' means that at least one program element is encrypted.
Mbs Indication of the program data rate in Mbit/s
Information on SI TABLES and NULL PACKET are indicated in addition to the programs:
SI TABLES Indication of the total data rate of SI tables.
Pressing on VIEW PROG COMP has no effect.
NULL PACKET Indication of the null packet data rate.
Pressing on VIEW PROG COMP has no effect.
Select the program to be decoded:

Place the bar to the required program entry by means of the UP and DOWN keys and decode with the
ACTIVATE PROGRAM key. Note that the list of programs is available after the MPEG2 transport stream
has been applied. If there is no description of the program name in the transport stream (eg SFT table
or service descriptor not available), '--------' is output for the name.
2067.3004.12 2.6.39 E-14

2.6.9.4.2 VIEW PROG COMP

Place the bar on the required program entry using the UP and DOWN keys in the MEASURE/VIEW
PROGRAM menu to indicate the elements of a program. By pressing the VIEW PROG COMP key the
associated elements are displayed with the indication of PID, type, code, conditional access and data
rate in the following menu for this program:
Fig. 2.6-23 MEASURE/VIEW PROGRAM/VIEW PROG COMP menu for programs
The program, program number, program name, short indication for elements, conditional access and its
total data rate are displayed at the top of the screen. The associated program elements are listed below.
The five columns have the following meaning:
PID PID of the program element

TYPE Type of the program element, eg VIDEO
the PMT in which the program is referenced is indicated as first element
the second element is the PID of PCR values
CODE Type of the program element as number as defined in the IEC/ISO 13818 standard
CA PID Conditional Access
a ' ' means that this program element is encrypted
the CA PID is also displayed if the CA descriptor is available
Mbs Indication of the data rate of a program element in MBit/s
The video and audio stream appearing first is automatically selected for decoding. If the program
contains several elementary streams, a video and audio stream can be selected from the list of
elements using the UP and DOWN keys. If the required video/audio stream is to be decoded, press the
ACTIVATE PROG COMP key. If the selected program is decoded, the settings of elements have
immediately effect on decoding. If the program is not decoded at the moment, the settings for program
elements are effective if this program is selected in the MEASURE/VIEW PROGRAM menu. The
selected elements are marked with „#“.
The settings for the program elements are assigned to the transport stream presently applied to the
EFA-M and are stored until the content of the transport stream changes or another transport stream is
fed or another input is selected.
Press the VIEW PROGRAM key to go back to the MEASURE/VIEW PROGRAM menu.
2067.3004.12 2.6.40 E-14

2.6.10 Preset and Menu Overview
Note: The PRESET and RESET (in parentheses) values are printed in bold.
INPUT (RECEIVER) (RESET)

DEMOD
IF
AUXILIARY... TS ASI SERIAL
ATTENUATION... AUTO
AUTO LOW NOISE
AUTO LOW DIST
AUTO LOWS DIST
MANUAL
10dB PREAMPLIFIER
RF RF (numeric entry) (no change caused by PRESET)

RCL RF
STO RF... RIGHT
LEFT
GET CHAR
DEL CHAR
ENTER
STATUS SAW FILTER BW OFF

2 MHz (depending on configuration)
SYMBOL RATE... UPPER SEARCH LIMIT (numeric entry) 7.000
LOWER SEARCH LIMIT (numeric entry) 1.000
SYMBOL RATE VALUE (numeric entry) 6.900
START AUTO SEARCH
STOP AUTO SEARCH
ORDER OF QAM AUTO
4
16
32
64
128
256
SYNC CONDITION... LOCK AFTER...PACKETS (numeric entry) 5
LOSS AFTER...PACKETS (numeric entry) 2
SET LIMITS... (no change caused by PRESET)
MIN
MAX
UP
DOWN
DEFAULT... DVB ETR 290...
MPEG ISO/IEC 138-18-1..
2067.3004.12 2.6.41 E-14

ALARM ALARM CONFIG... (no change caused by PRESET)

TS SYNC ENABLED
DISABLED
SYNC BYTE ENABLED
DISABLED
PAT ENABLED
DISABLED
CONT COUNT ENABLED
DISABLED
PMT ENABLED
DISABLED
MORE 2/4
PID ENABLED
DISABLED
TRANSPORT ENABLED
DISABLED
CRC ENABLED
DISABLED
PCR ENABLED
DISABLED
PCR ACCURACY ENABLED
DISABLED
MORE 3/4
PTS ENABLED
DISABLED
CAT ENABLED
DISABLED
NIT ENABLED
DISABLED
SI REPEAT ENABLED
DISABLED
UNREF PID ENABLED
DISABLED
MORE 4/4
SDT ENABLED
DISABLED
EIT ENABLED
DISABLED
RST ENABLED
DISABLED
TDT ENABLED
DISABLED
MORE 1/4
SPEC FUNC (no further functions implemented)
2067.3004.12 2.6.42 E-14

MEASURE VIEW PROGRAM... (no change caused by PRESET)

START COUNTER error second counters are started
STOP COUNTER error second counters are stopped
CLEAR COUNTER error second counters are cleared

REMOTE... IEC625 / iEEE488 (numeric entry) 6
RS232 BAUDRATE 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
DATABITS 7BIT
8BIT
PARITY NO
EVEN
ODD
STOPBITS 1BIT
2BIT
HANDSHAKE NO
XON/XOFF
HARDWARE
R&S PUD COMP.
HP COMP.
FORMFEED NO
AFTER PRINTOUT
LEVEL UNITS... dBpW
dBuW
dBm
dBuV
dBmV
uV/mV
OFF
AUDIO SPEAKER OFF

ON
Volume (numeric entry) 20%
AUTO STEREO
L/1
R/2
AUDIO SOURCE PRESET: according to selected MODE
2067.3004.12 2.6.43 E-14

2067.3004.12 2.6.44 E-14

R&S® EFA Model 40/43, Option B10 OFDM Analyzer / Demodulator DVB-T
2.7 Operation as Test Receiver / Demodulator for Orthogonally Modulated

Multiple-Frequency Signals (OFDM) to DVB-T-Standard ................2.7.3
2.7.1 Introduction and Overview..........................................................................................2.7.3
2.7.1.1 Quick Reference ............................................................................................................2.7.4
2.7.2 INPUT Menu / Input Selection .....................................................................................2.7.4
2.7.3 RF Menu ........................................................................................................................2.7.8
2.7.4 STATUS Menu ............................................................................................................2.7.10
2.7.4.1 SAW FILTER BW ........................................................................................................2.7.10
2.7.4.2 CHANNEL BW .............................................................................................................2.7.11
2.7.4.3 OFDM/CODE RATE MODE and SETTINGS...............................................................2.7.11
2.7.4.4 MPEG DATA OUTPUT ................................................................................................2.7.12
2.7.4.5 BEEPER.......................................................................................................................2.7.13
2.7.5 SPECIAL FUNCTION Menu........................................................................................2.7.14
2.7.5.1 DISPLAY ......................................................................................................................2.7.15
2.7.5.2 MIN BER INTEGRATION.............................................................................................2.7.17
2.7.5.3 SYNC CONDITION ......................................................................................................2.7.17
2.7.5.4 FREQUENCY RECOVERY LOOP BANDWIDTH .......................................................2.7.18
2.7.5.5 SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION ............................................................................................2.7.19
2.7.5.6 SER / PAR MPEG FRAME SIZE .................................................................................2.7.20
2.7.6 ALARM Menu ..............................................................................................................2.7.21
2.7.6.1 Configuring the Alarm Register (ALARM CONFIG) .....................................................2.7.22
2.7.6.2 Alarm Register .............................................................................................................2.7.23
2.7.6.3 Setting Limit Values (ALARM: THRESHOLD) .............................................................2.7.25
2.7.6.4 Statistics (STATISTICS) ..............................................................................................2.7.27
2.7.6.5 Printing the Register (PRINT...) ...................................................................................2.7.28
2.7.6.6 Clearing the Register (REGISTER CLEAR).................................................................2.7.29
2.7.7 MEASURE Menu .........................................................................................................2.7.30
2.7.7.1 Measurement Window .................................................................................................2.7.31
2.7.7.1.1 FREQUENCY OFFSET Measurement ........................................................................2.7.31
2.7.7.1.2 Bit Rate Offset Measurement.......................................................................................2.7.32
2.7.7.1.3 Modulation Error (MER) Measurement ........................................................................2.7.33
2.7.7.1.4 BER Measurement.......................................................................................................2.7.33
2.7.7.1.5 OFDM / CODE RATE Measurement ...........................................................................2.7.34
2.7.7.1.6 TPS Measurement .......................................................................................................2.7.34
2.7.7.1.7 Messages.....................................................................................................................2.7.36
2.7.7.2 Carrier Range, Symbol Counter, HOLD and FREEZE.................................................2.7.38
2.7.7.2.1 Carrier Range...............................................................................................................2.7.38
2.7.7.2.2 Symbol Counter; HOLD and FREEZE .........................................................................2.7.39
2.7.7.3 Constellation Diagram ..................................................................................................2.7.40
2.7.7.4 Measurements in the Frequency Domain ....................................................................2.7.41
2.7.7.4.1 Measurement of MER dB, Interference, MER % .........................................................2.7.41
2.7.7.4.2 I/Q Measurement (Eye Diagram) .................................................................................2.7.43
2.7.7.4.3 Measurement of Amplitude, Phase, Group Delay and Polar Plot ................................2.7.44
2.7.7.5 Measurements in the Time Domain .............................................................................2.7.47
2.7.7.5.1 Measurement of Spectrum...........................................................................................2.7.47
2.7.7.5.2 Measurement of Amplitude Distribution / CCDF ..........................................................2.7.52
2.7.7.5.3 Measurement of the Channel Impulse Response and the Frequency Offset ..............2.7.55
2.7.7.5.4 HISTORY Measurement ..............................................................................................2.7.62
2.7.7.6 OFDM Parameters .......................................................................................................2.7.65
2.7.7.7 Noise Generator (ADD NOISE)....................................................................................2.7.66
2.7.8 PRESET Values and MENU Overview......................................................................2.7.67
2.7.9 Examples of Application ...........................................................................................2.7.76
2.7.9.1 Application and Interpretation of Constellation Diagram ..............................................2.7.76
2.7.9.1.1 I/Q Quadrature Error ....................................................................................................2.7.77
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.1
OFDM Analyzer / Demodulator DVB-T R&S ® EFA Model 40/43, Option B10
2.7.9.1.2 I/Q Amplitude Imbalance..............................................................................................2.7.77

2.7.9.1.3 Interferer.......................................................................................................................2.7.78
2.7.9.1.4 Carrier Suppression .....................................................................................................2.7.79
2.7.9.1.5 Additive Gaussian Noise ..............................................................................................2.7.80
2.7.9.1.6 Phase Jitter ..................................................................................................................2.7.81
2.7.9.2 Explanation of Calculated Parameters, Formulas and Limit Values ............................2.7.82
2.7.9.2.1 I/Q Quadrature Error ....................................................................................................2.7.82
2.7.9.2.2 I/Q Amplitude Imbalance..............................................................................................2.7.83
2.7.9.2.3 Carrier Suppression .....................................................................................................2.7.83
2.7.9.2.4 S/N Ratio SNR .............................................................................................................2.7.84
2.7.9.2.5 Phase Jitter ..................................................................................................................2.7.84
2.7.9.2.6 Modulation Error (Error Vector) ....................................................................................2.7.85
2.7.9.2.7 Other Errors .................................................................................................................2.7.86
2.7.9.2.8 Limits of Computing Methods ......................................................................................2.7.88
2.7.9.3 Function and Selection of Integration Time for BER Measurements...........................2.7.89
2.7.9.4 BER Measurement with External Equipment ...............................................................2.7.92
2.7.9.4.1 BER Measurement Before or After the Reed-Solomon Decoder.................................2.7.92
2.7.9.4.2 BER Measurement Before the Viterbi Decoder ...........................................................2.7.94
2.7.9.4.3 Measurement and Calculation of the C/N Ratio using a Spectrum Analyzer ...............2.7.96
2.7.9.5 BER as a function of C/N, Calculation of Further Parameters .....................................2.7.97
2.7.9.5.1 C/N Required for Error-free Reception ........................................................................2.7.97
2.7.9.6 Assignment and Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs ...........................2.7.102
2.7.9.7 Analog and Digital Cascading of Two Test Receivers EFA-T....................................2.7.104
2.7.9.8 Use of the EFA-T as Relay Receiver .........................................................................2.7.104
2.7.9.9 Definition and Application of the CCDF and Amplitude Distribution Measurement Functions
...................................................................................................................................2.7.105
2.7.9.9.1 Definitions of CCDF ...................................................................................................2.7.105
2.7.9.9.2 Comparison of Carrier Signal and Baseband Signal Measurement ..........................2.7.106
2.7.9.9.3 Conclusion .................................................................................................................2.7.107
2.7.10 List of Figures ..........................................................................................................2.7.108
2.7.11 List of Tables ............................................................................................................2.7.111
2.7.12 Index..........................................................................................................................2.7.112
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.2
2.7 Operation as Test Receiver / Demodulator for

Orthogonally Modulated Multiple-Frequency Signals
(OFDM) to DVB-T-Standard
Note: For simplicity, the designation used in the following for the OFDM Receiver EFA to the
DVB-T standard is EFA-T instead of EFA Model 40/43 / Opt. B10.

The Test Receiver EFA-T measures orthogonally modulated multiple-frequency signals as are used in
terrestrial digital video broadcasting (DVB-T). A number of special characteristics for measuring DVB-T
signals make this instrument particularly suitable for accurate analysis and measurements of all main
parameters (see section 2.7.7 MEASURE Menu). Such characteristics are the newly developed steep-
edge channel filters, which were especially developed for use in terrestrial transmission channels, the
realtime measurement of all parameters and the DVB-specific error correction.
The input signal is processed in line with DVB-T specifications (ETS 300 744, all modes). This includes
demapping, de-interleaving, the Viterbi and the Reed-Solomon decoder as well as energy dispersal. The
decoded MPEG2 data is available in serial or parallel form for all measurements at the same time. The
optional MPEG2 decoder EFA-B4, which can be integrated in the EFA-T, is available for processing
MPEG2 data.
Extremely powerful digital signal processing permits accurate analysis of the applied OFDM signal. A
newly developed data storage technique allows a very flexible and efficient collection of measurement
results for all relevant signal parameters providing valuable information on problems that may occur
during transmission. The focus of interest is the display of constellation diagrams on the LCD. It can be
individually configured and allows variable result hold times (up to ) to be set. Thus signal events
lasting an extended period of time can be displayed. Numerous helpful measurement functions which
have been implemented in the unit for the first time permit specific measurement of the DVB-T signal.
Another benefit is the automatic storage of messages in the alarm register, which was developed by
Rohde & Schwarz.
The Test Receiver EFA comes as a receiver with a tracking selection or as a broadband demodulator.
The test receiver with tracking channel selection is particularly suitable for monitoring and quality
assurance of terrestrial radio channels, whereas the test demodulator with its broadband RF input is
used for direct monitoring and quality assurance of DVB-T transmitters.
This powerful unit can of course be used any time for applications in research and development
laboratories, quality assurance, servicing as well as transmitter and production monitoring of TV
consumer electronics.
When suitably configured, the test receiver EFA is able to detect and process both digital DVB-T
signals. The instrument is configured with the MODE key according to the required application. For
DVB-T applications, the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T softkey in the MODE menu has to
be pressed (see also section 2.2.13). All hardkeys are assigned a specific function irrespective of any
other modules that may be integrated in the EFA. In the DVB-T mode the function of the INPUT and RF
menus is practically identical to the menu function of analog measurements but the values (e.g. the
frequency) can be varied independently. The STATUS and SPECIAL FUNCTION menus are of a
completely different structure. Only the SETUP menu is the same for all EFA models and described in
section 2.3.2.
This manual presents and describes the different functions in their logical order. To be able to make full
use of the instrument capabilities, particular attention should be paid to the characteristics mentioned in
section 2.7.9 Examples of Application. This section also gives information on how to interpret the
measurement results obtained with the Test Receiver EFA-T.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.3
2.7.1.1 Quick Reference
For users who are basically familiar with the EFA, the steps required for the direct synchronization of a
DVB-T signal are listed below in their sequence:
1. Switch on instrument and establish RF (IF) connection.
2. Select OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T in the MODE menu.
3. Press PRESET.
4. Select input frequency (RF) and input (INPUT).
5. Select channel bandwidth (Channel BW) (STATUS menu).
The characteristics of the EFA-T related to mobile or stationary reception can be optimized in the
SPECIAL FUNCTION: SYSTEM OPTIMISATION menu.
After this the constellation diagram can be displayed in the MEASURE menu or one of the other
measurements can be selected.

In the INPUT menu, the input selection, attenuator and preamplifier settings can be made. A mode
especially designed for reception conditions involving extremely strong adjacent channels can be
selected. When the instrument is used as a Nyquist demodulator, settings in this menu are independent
of the settings in the INPUT menu.
Fig. 2.7-1 INPUT menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.4
 The EFA-T used as a selective test receiver (EFA models .12/ .40/ .72/ .78):
The RF input of the selective test receiver is chosen in the INPUT menu using the RECEIVER
softkey. After this key has been pressed, the input impedance and the active RF input are indicated
in the display. Depending on the EFA model, this can be a 50- or 75- input. The message INPUT
75 OHM REAR indicates selection of the rear BNC connector X9; message INPUT 50 OHM REAR
is for the rear N connector X22. With message INPUT 75 OHM FRONT or INPUT 50 OHM FRONT
displayed, the BNC connector on the front panel is enabled. The DEMOD key is labelled in italics
and disabled.
 The EFA used as a broadband test demodulator (EFA models .33/ .43/ .83/ .89):
The broadband RF input X21 is activated with the DEMOD key. This N-type connector is located at
the rear of the instrument and has an impedance of 50 . When the EFA is used as a test
demodulator without a selective receiver section (option EFA-B3), the RECEIVER key is labelled in
italics and disabled (for details see section 2.4.5).
 The EFA used as a test demodulator (EFA models .33/ .43/ .83/ .89) with the option Selective
Receiver Section EFA-B3:
If the option EFA-B3 (selection) is integrated in addition to a broadband receiver section, the
selective (RECEIVER) or the broadband input (DEMOD) can be selected with the RECEIVER and
DEMOD keys. When the EFA is used as a test demodulator, 3 RF inputs are available which can be
assigned simultaneously: selective 50  (N connector) and 75  (BNC connector) inputs and
broadband 50 input (N connector).
The input is located at the rear of the instrument and marked X10. The IF is 36.000 MHz.
The INPUT: ATTENUATION menu is called up with the ATTEN... key. The following menu is obtained
on EFA models .12/ .40/ .72/ .78:
Fig. 2.7-2 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu
In the INPUT: ATTENUATION menu the input attenuation, the tuner and mixer levelling as well as the
preamplifier can be selected and set.
The attenuator is set manually or automatically with the ATTEN AUTO/MAN key.
With MAN selected, the attenuator can be set manually in 5 dB steps in the range from 0 to 55 dB.
Setting can be made by means of the up and down cursor keys or by direct entry via the numeric
keypad and confirmation with ENTER. In the case of direct entry, the entered numerals are rounded to a
value that can be divided by 5. In critical situations the instrument receive characteristics related to
intermodulation or noise can be improved by means of the manual mode depending on the given
conditions. However, the AUTO mode should normally be given preference.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.5
With Auto selected, the attenuator is automatically controlled depending on the measured input level.
The following switching thresholds are valid for the OFDM ANALYZER / DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode,
a switching hysteresis of 1 dB being active for each threshold:
Attenuator setting with

EFA models .12/ .40/ .78 EFA models .33/ .43/ .89
ATTENuation AUTO
0 dB <-37 dBm <-41 dBm
5 dB <-37 to -32 dBm <-41 to -36 dBm
10 dB -32 to -27 dBm -36 to -31 dBm
15 dB -27 to -22 dBm -31 to -26 dBm
20 dB -22 to -17 dBm -26 to -21 dBm
25 dB -17 to -12 dBm -21 to -16 dBm
30 dB -12 to -7 dBm -16 to -11 dBm
35 dB -7 to -2 dBm -11 to -6 dBm
40 dB -2 to +3 dBm -6 to -1 dBm
45 dB +3 to +8 dBm -1 to +4 dBm
50 dB +8 to +13 dBm +4 to +9 dBm
55 dB >+13 dBm >+9 dBm
Table 2.7-1 Switching thresholds in the OFDM DEMODULATOR DVB -T mode when the HIGH
ADJ CHAN POWER mode is not selected
The LOW NOISE and LOW DIST keys are used to determine the level conditions in the receive section.
rd
With LOW DISTortion selected, the receiver intermodulation suppression, i.e. the 3 order intercept
point (TOI) of the TV test receiver increases by 5 dB, which improves the inherent intermodulation
suppression by 10 dB. In the LOW DIST mode, the receiver noise figure is slightly increased. The
switching thresholds of the attenuator specified in Table 2.7-1 are the same in the LOW NOISE and
LOW DIST modes.
The HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER key is used to optimize the instrument for the reception of weak signals
in the presence of strong adjacent signals. Three steps are switched on internally at the same time:
 The switching threshold for the attenuator is reduced by 21 dB (EFA models .12/ .40/ .78) or 17 dB
(EFA models .33/ .43/ .89, with the option Selective Receiver Section EFA-B3) as compared to the
values specified in Table 2.7-1.
 The level of the useful signal at the SAW filter is reduced by 24 dB.
 An additional SAW filter is used for increased selection.
It is thus possible, depending on the mode (order and code rate of the DVB-T signal), to receive DVB-T-
signals with analog adjacent channels stronger by more than 40 dB. The receive characteristics may be
significantly improved even in the presence of digital adjacent channels.
This mode can be selected irrespective of LOW NOISE or LOW DIST mode. The LOW NOISE mode is
recommended especially for very weak signals requiring an excellent noise figure from the receiver.
When the demodulator input of the EFA-T is used, the HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER mode is not relevant
and cannot therefore be selected.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.6
It should be noted that the inherent errors of the EFA-T related to noise and MER for unimpaired signals
increase in the HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER mode. It should be checked on a case-by-case basis if
operating the unit with the HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER setting is useful or not. This mode should always
be deactivated under normal receiving conditions.
EFA models .12/ .40/ .78:

With the 10dB PREAMP key a low-noise preamplifier can be connected to improve the noise figure of
the receiver. This is useful when low-level signals are received. The attenuator is correctly set in
automatic operation.
For EFA models .33/ .43/ .89, see section 2.4.5.2.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.7
2.7.3 RF Menu
Select the RF menu using the RF key in the MAIN FUNCTION block. In this menu the center frequency
of the DVB-T signal (= frequency of the central carrier, with 2K-FFT mode: carrier 852, with 8K-FFT
mode: carrier 3408) can be set. If the instrument is operated as a Nyquist demodulator, settings in this
menu are independent of the settings in the RF menu.
Fig. 2.7-3 RF menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode

Pressing the RF key causes the currently set center frequency to be displayed. This frequency can be
changed with a 0.1 Hz resolution either direct via the numeric keypad or by means of the cursor keys.
When the RCL RF key is pressed and the RF memory number entered, a receive frequency previously
stored with STO RF in the RF MEMORY can be recalled. The RF memory number may be selected by
means of the keypad or the cursor keys. If the receive frequency is selected with the aid of the RCL RF
function, the RF memory number and the associated text (see STO RF) are displayed in the header.
The currently set frequency can be stored in the RF memory with the aid of the STO RF key. When the
STO RF key is pressed, the desired RF memory number can be entered on the keypad and confirmed
with ENTER. After pressing the EDIT TEXT key a text can be edited which is assigned to the previously
selected RF memory number.
Fig. 2.7-4 Menu RF: STO: EDIT TEXT in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.8
When the EDIT TEXT key is pressed, the available characters are be displayed. Characters may be
selected with the aid of the cursor keys. Pressing the GET CHARACTER key adds the selected
character to the MEMORY TEXT. The cursor can be moved in the MEMORY TEXT to the right or left
with the aid of the RIGHT and LEFT cursor keys. DELETE CHARACTER clears the character in front of
the MEMORY TEXT cursor. A maximum of eight characters is permissible for RF memory number
identification. When the SAVE & EXIT key is pressed, the MEMORY TEXT is assigned to the selected
RF memory number and displayed at the top right of the display.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.9
2.7.4 STATUS Menu

The STATUS menu is selected using the STATUS key in the MAIN FUNCTION block. In this menu, all
main device settings of the mode selected in the MODE menu (here OFDM
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T) are displayed. This particularly applies to the DVB-T parameters
channel bandwidth and SAW filter bandwidth as well as the selection of the MPEG2 transport stream for
hierarchical modulation. Settings concerning input selection, attenuator control and preamplifier must be
made in the INPUT menu.
Fig. 2.7-5 STATUS menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
2.7.4.1 SAW FILTER BW
The Test Receiver EFA-T has three slots for accommodating SAW filters. Up to two filters can be
inserted as an option in addition to the 8 MHz filter which is fitted as standard. The three filter
bandwidths (6, 7 and 8 MHz) provided for DVB-T can thus be operated with a filter especially optimized
for this channel bandwidth. The required filter is selected by pressing the SAW FILTER BW softkey
several times. Unused slots are automatically identified. They are displayed in italics and cannot be
selected.
Note: The setting of the SAW filter bandwidth is internally coupled to the setting of the DVB-T
channel bandwidth (CHANNEL BW). The correct SAW filter is selected when the channel
bandwidth is changed (exception: SAW = OFF remains unchanged). However, the filter can
subsequently be selected again.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.10
2.7.4.2 CHANNEL BW
The CHANNEL BW softkey is used to configure the channel bandwidth of the DVB-T demodulator.
Accurate setting is absolutely necessary to ensure proper function of the unit. In Europe a 7 MHz
channel is normally used for the VHF channels and 8 MHz for UHF. 6 MHz is used among other things
in America. On selecting the channel bandwidth, the correct SAW filter is automatically set if it is
installed. If the filter does not have the optional matching bandwidth, the next higher available filter is
automatically activated. Exception: the selection SAW = OFF is not influenced by a modification of the
channel bandwidth.
When the internal noise generator is active (see section 2.7.7.7), the noise power is automatically
adapted so that a constant noise level is obtained in the selected channel bandwidth.
The selected channel bandwidth is given in brackets on the display status line in the info box for RF
(SET RF) as a reference to the set channel bandwidth.
2.7.4.3 OFDM/CODE RATE MODE and SETTINGS
In this menu the setting of the following parameters can be influenced:

 FFT mode (2K-FFT with 1705 carriers or 8K-FFT with 6817 carriers),
 guard interval with GI = 1/4 or 1/8 or 1/16 or 1/32 of the period of an OFDM symbol,
 order of QAM of the OFDM signal (QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM),
 alpha for hierarchical modulation (1 not hierarchical, as well as 1 or 2 or 4 hierarchical),
 code rate of the high-priority data stream with hierarchical transmission or code rate of the data
stream with non-hierarchical transmission (1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8), as well as
 code rate of the low-priority data stream with hierarchical transmission (1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8).
Three synchronization strategies are available for all parameters.
1. TPS: preferred mode. The parameters are set using the information in the OFDM spectrum
concerning the TPS carriers (Transmission Parameter Signalling). The transmission parameters are
sent within 68 symbols with a very high error protection. However, a synchronized OFDM signal is
required (i.e. FFT mode and guard interval should have been first correctly recognized). Automatic
synchronization is used for this purpose.
2. AUTO: all parameters are automatically determined independently of the TPS carriers. This
procedure is recommended if there is some doubt about TPS modulation at the transmitter end. The
procedure has its limits with hierarchical modulation, since a hierarchical 64QAM, for example, can
always be synchronized as non-hierarchical QPSK (ambiguity).
3. MAN: all parameters are manually predefined provided the parameters are known. The
OFDM/CODE RATE SETTINGS... menu can be selected in this mode. All parameters mentioned
before are manually configured here. The low-priority code rate can be selected only for hierarchical
modulation or if there is no synchronization. The settings are maintained on switching to the AUTO
mode. In this mode synchronization to the OFDM signal is fastest.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.11
Fig. 2.7-6 STATUS: OFDM/CODE RATE SETTINGS menu in the OFDM

ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
2.7.4.4 MPEG DATA OUTPUT
The user can select the MPEG2 transport stream to be processed in the case of hierarchical
modulation. The selection is possible only for hierarchical modulation or in the absence of
synchronization. Depending on this selection, the BER parameters are distinguished according to the
origin of their calculation in the measurement window. The transport stream set in the MPEG DATA
OUTPUT is always used for the calculation of the BER values. The BER measurement is output with
reference to the selected transport stream. This also applies to the indication of the code rate in the
measurement window. With hierarchical modulation, FREQUENCY / BER (HP): or FREQUENCY / BER
(LP): as well as OFDM / CODE RATE (HP): or OFDM / CODE RATE (LP): appears in the measurement
window to indicate the origin of values.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.12
2.7.4.5 BEEPER
The internal acoustic signal generator can be configured in the BEEPER... submenu. With the different
kinds of error that may occur, the generator is active when the corresponding parameter has been set to
ENABLED, or inactive when the corresponding parameter is set to DISABLED. The following errors
may be acoustically signalled:
1. Level below the threshold set in the alarm register.

2. OFDM signal not synchronized.
3. Sync byte of MPEG2 frame not found.
4. At least one faulty bit was corrected by the Viterbi decoder.
5. At least one faulty byte was corrected by the Reed-Solomon decoder in the 204-byte MPEG2 frame.
6. At least one faulty byte in the 188-byte MPEG2 frame could not be corrected, the frame thus
contains at least 9 faulty bytes.
Especially in the latter case there is a close relation between an acoustically signalled MPEG2 error and
the visible picture anomaly.
Fig. 2.7-7 STATUS: BEEPER menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.13

In the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu selected in the MAIN FUNCTION block, special settings can be
made for values that need not be changed in normal operation. In this menu the instrument can be set
to a state where normal operation is not always guaranteed. If a special function has been selected, the
yellow LED next to the key comes on and goes out only after all functions have been reset to standard
values. These standard values are given in section PRESET Values and MENU Overview (2.7.8) and
are selected in the following example.
The yellow LED next to the SPECIAL FUNCTION key is always activated when a special setting is
selected in the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu (exception: DISPLAY).
Fig. 2.7-8 SPECIAL FUNCTION menu in the OFDM

2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.14
2.7.5.1 DISPLAY
The DISPLAY... key is used to configure the appearance of the measurement menu. The following
menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.7-9 SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR

DVB-T mode
R&S LOGO
The R&S symbol is indicated in the display of the constellation diagram and in some other graphical
representations. This symbol can be disabled for non-corporate printouts (R&S LOGO: OFF).
CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM ZOOM:

The constellation diagram can be displayed either as a whole (OFF) or separately for each quadrant
(zoom function). On selecting the zoom not only the display of the I/Q values is expanded but its
resolution (accuracy) is also increased. The quadrants are divided as follows:
OFF
Q2 Q1
Q3 Q4
Fig. 2.7-10 SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY: ZOOM: Constellation diagram divided in quadrants
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.15
MEASURE DISPLAY:
This key is used to configure the appearance of the measurement menu. In the FULL position, a
detailed measurement menu is offered with numerous types of display. In the PARTIAL position, a
definable measured value can be expanded such that it can be read at a distance of some meters. The
measured value to be expanded is selected by means of the MEASUREMENT ZOOM key (see below).
Fig. 2.7-11 Measurement window in the MEASURE DISPLAY: FULL (left) or PARTIAL (right)
setting using the example of BER BEFORE RS.
In the PARTIAL mode, the following parameters are not displayed due to the selected zoom window:
 FREQUENCY OFFSET,
 BITRATE OFFSET,
 ALPHA,
 CODE RATE,
 CELL ID and
 TPS RES (F1 to F4).
MEASUREMENT ZOOM:
This key is used to select the measured value to be expanded with the MEASUREMENT ZOOM:
PARTIAL mode is activated. One of four measured values can be selected for the zoom display (see
example in Fig. 2.7-11 above):
LEVEL,
BER BEFORE VIT (bit error rate before Viterbi decoder),
BER BEFORE RS (bit error rate before Reed-Solomon decoder),
BER AFTER RS (bit error rate after Reed-Solomon decoder).
MER (modulation error, RMS)
MEASURE:
This setting (see Fig. 2.7-9) is used to determine if the selection of the carrier range to be measured
should be made by
 entering the start carrier and the stop carrier (START/STOP CARR) or
 entering the center carrier and the carrier range (CENTER/SPAN CARR).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.16
The choice of one of the two methods depends on the measurement to be performed or the way the
user is used to work. The carrier number is always entered as a natural number with the number 0
being permissible. The numbering depends on the numbering used in the DVB-T standard and always
begins with the value 0 for the first active carrier of the OFDM spectrum. The unused carriers generated
during the IFFT of the DVB-T transmitter are not counted. The value range is defined as follows:
In the START/STOP CARR setting the following applies:
0 START CARR STOP CARR 1704 (2K FFT) or
0 START CARR STOP CARR 6816 (8K FFT).
In the CENTER/SPAN CARR setting the following applies:
0 CENTER CARR 1704, 1 SPAN CARR 1705 (2K FFT) or
0 CENTER CARR 6816, 1 SPAN CARR 6817 (8K FFT).
The carrier range (SPAN CARR) entry is always rounded up to the next odd value. If the carrier range
exceeds the maximum stop value (or falls below the minimum start value), the graphics display is limited
to stop value kmax (start value kmin= 0). In this case, the carrier selected as CENTER CARR may not be
displayed in the center of the corresponding graphics (MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN). When the
center carrier is selected, the carrier range entered can be entirely displayed if the above conditions for
the start and stop carrier are fully complied with.
WHEN MEASURE DISPLAY IS ACTIVATED:

This setting is used to determine whether the modulation error MER should be calculated when the
measurement window is displayed. The setting is important in connection with the HISTORY and the
remote control of the instrument (from software version 4.50 onwards).
 MER CALC IN BACKGROUND: The MER measurement is also performed when the normal
measurement window is displayed. The serial data and clock (before Viterbi decoder, X5 and X6)
are deactivated in this case.
 SERIAL DATA OUTPUT: The serial data and clock (before Viterbi decoder, X5 and X6) are
activated. The MER calculation is not performed when the measurement window is displayed.
The yellow LED next to the SPECIAL FUNCTION key is usually not activated when a special setting is
selected in the SPECIAL FUNCTION:DISPLAY menu. The PRESET values are given in section 2.7.8
(PRESET Values and MENU Overview).
2.7.5.2 MIN BER INTEGRATION
With the MIN BER INTEGRATION (SAMPLES) key the BER measurement can be influenced. For
details on operation and usefulness of this setting refer to section 2.7.9.3 (Function and Selection of
Integration Time for BER Measurements). The preset value is 10 samples.
2.7.5.3 SYNC CONDITION
Using the SYNC CONDITION key, it can be determined whether a valid MPEG data stream must be
present so that the EFA-T synchronizes. Resynchronization is triggered in the FEC SYNC REQUIRED
position if the forward error correction is not synchronized.
FEC SYNC NOT REQUIRED is very useful or necessary under certain conditions. This is the case
when, for example, the constellation data is to be analyzed even if no valid MPEG data stream is
available.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.17
2.7.5.4 FREQUENCY RECOVERY LOOP BANDWIDTH
When the FREQUENCY RECOVERY LOOP BANDWIDTH key is pressed, the loop bandwidth
(dynamic range) for carrier recovery can be configured. The typical capture range for carrier recovery is
more than 100 kHz. This wide (permanently set) capture range is sufficient for any kind of application.
The dynamic characteristic can be changed with the aid of the LOOP BANDWIDTH function:
 A wide loop bandwidth should be chosen if the phase of the input signal is subject to considerable
jitter. In this case most of the phase jitter to be analyzed can be compensated for.
 The medium loop bandwidth is ideal for general applications.
 The narrow bandwidth can be chosen when the jitter in the signal is exceptionally low.
The lower the loop bandwidth, the more reliable the recovery of the transmitted signal. In the case of
problems refer to the constellation diagram and the calculated parameters (particularly phase jitter).
Selected loop bandwidth High Med Low

Set loop bandwidth (-3 dB) 24 Hz 8 Hz 2 Hz
The specified loop bandwidths were measured for a sinusoidal frequency modulation of the DVB-T
signal. With 2K FFT the frequency deviation was 200 Hz and 50 Hz with 8K FFT. Small deviations yield
wide loop bandwidths.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.18
2.7.5.5 SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION
The user can optimize the Test Receiver EFA-T for the current application by means of the SYSTEM
OPTIMIZATION key. Three settings are available:
 MOBILE:
The mobile use requires in particular quick level control (AGC) as well as very quick channel
estimation or correction. Both requirements are complied with in the MOBILE setting. In addition, the
signal level is reduced before sampling by the A/D converter so that the headroom of the A/D
converter increases. Channel estimation mainly operates in the frequency range and the symbols
adjacent in time are taken into account in the 8K mode only by temporarily storing the scattered pilots
over 3 symbols. In the 2K mode, the positions of scattered pilots of symbols adjacent in time are
linearly interpolated. It is thus possible to react very quickly to modified conditions in the transmission
channel (e.g. fading, level drop under a bridge, sudden reflections by buildings). The very fast time
channel estimation or correction means however – for physical reasons – reduced correction
capability in the frequency range in the 8K mode, since only every twelfth carrier can effectively be
used for correction. This corresponds to a reference point spacing of 13.3 kHz at a bandwidth of
8 MHz.
Note: Due to the brief level drops in mobile operation, automatic setting of the attenuator can
switch over and result in signal failures. In this case, MANUAL setting should be selected
and adjusted if necessary (see INPUT: ATTEN...)
 STATIONARY FAST / SFN:

This key serves to configure rapid stationary operation which is suitable for use in single frequency
networks (SFN). In SFN networks the same DVB-T signal is radiated on the same frequency
simultaneously by several spatially separated transmitters. The characteristics of the transmission
are the very long delayed echoes due to the reception of two or more transmitters as well as the
resulting ripple in the frequency range at a very low frequency (i.e. high repetition rate). The
transmission channel is relatively static in stationary reception. However, a change in the receive field
strength can be quickly corrected in this setting (quick AGC). Characteristic for this mode is that
channel estimation is interpolated in the time domain which yields a particularly high resolution in the
frequency domain. The reference point spacing is then 13.3 kHz with 2K FFT or 3.33 kHz with 8K
FFT (both at a bandwidth of 8 MHz).
Time interpolation is performed in two ways at the same time:
 A first digital filtering is used to determine the correction values lying in time between two
correction values of a carrier used as a scattered pilot provided the carrier contains useful data.
 A second digital filtering serves to average the found correction values over several symbols
with a weighting function (weak).
Without interpolation and averaging, a scattered pilot disturbed by superimposed noise, for example,
would transmit the interference directly to the useful data. The described methods considerably
reduce the influence of the interference on the useful data.
 STATIONARY SLOW / LABORATORY:

In this setting the same applies as in the STATIONARY FAST / SFN setting, except that the level
control (AGC) is switched to slow operation. In addition, the correction values found in the above
second digital filtering are more strongly averaged over several symbols with a weighting function.
This reduces the influence of a disturbed scattered pilot on the useful data more than the setting
STATIONARY FAST / SFN. This setting is suitable especially for use in laboratories, production and
development as well as for monitoring at the transmitter site where the low inherent noise of the
measuring instrument is of particular importance.
 STATIONARY SLOW / HIGH NOISE
In this setting the level control (AGC) is also switched to slow operation. In addition, the correction
values from the second digital filtering undergo maximum averaging. This setting is useful especially
for very noisy stationary signals.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.19
STATIONARY STATIONARY
STATIONARY
MOBILE SLOW / SLOW /
FAST / SFN
LABORATORY HIGH NOISE
Limit frequency (-3 dB) of
400 Hz 400 Hz 20 Hz 20 Hz
level control
Interpolation in the
Yes Yes Yes Yes
frequency domain
Sample spacing in the
frequency domain with 13.3 kHz 13.3 kHz 13.3 kHz 13.3 kHz
2K FFT
Sample spacing in the
frequency domain with 13.3 kHz 3.33 kHz 3.33 kHz 3.33 kHz
8K FFT
Interpolation in the time 2K mode: linear
domain between two interp. Yes Yes Yes
scattered pilots 8K mode: No
Averaging in the time
domain No Weak Medium Strong
Table 2.7-2 Overview of the SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION settings for the 8 MHz bandwidth
2.7.5.6 SER / PAR MPEG FRAME SIZE
With the aid of this key a selection can be made whether the serial and parallel MPEG2 outputs should
use the whole information (including the 16 error-protection bytes per frame) for data transmission or
whether only the 188 relevant data bytes should be transmitted. This makes no difference for the error
protection function. However, some of the MPEG2 decoders accept only one data format. The Rohde &
Schwarz MPEG2 decoder is able to handle both formats and switchover between the 188 and 204-byte
operation is automatic. For more details concerning the interfaces see section 2.7.9.6 (Assignment and
Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs ).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.20
2.7.6 ALARM Menu

2.7.6 ALARM Menu ...............................................................................................................2.7.21
2.7.6.1 Configuring the Alarm Register (ALARM CONFIG) .....................................................2.7.22
2.7.6.2 Alarm Register .............................................................................................................2.7.23
2.7.6.3 Setting Limit Values (ALARM: THRESHOLD) .............................................................2.7.25
2.7.6.4 Statistics (STATISTICS) ..............................................................................................2.7.27
2.7.6.5 Printing the Register (PRINT...) ...................................................................................2.7.28
2.7.6.6 Clearing the Register (REGISTER CLEAR).................................................................2.7.29
The alarm register is an internal memory for storing alarm messages together with their respective date
and time. The memory has a depth of 1000 lines and comes in the form of a ring register. Every second
the EFA-T checks whether any of the following errors has occurred in the DVB-T signal:Input level (LV):
level at the analog RF or IF inputs below the threshold value
 Synchronization (SY): OFDM synchronization or frame synchronization of MPEG2 transport stream

 Modulation error (ME): MER below the threshold value
 BER before Viterbi decoder (BV) below the threshold value
 BER before Reed-Solomon decoder (BR) below the threshold value
 Data error caused by uncorrectable events (DE).
The LED next to the ALARM key signals that at least one new alarm message has been registered since
the register was called up last. The LED goes out when the alarm register is called up with the ALARM
key. An example is described in section 2.7.6.2.
All alarm messages are also made available electrically (positive logic) at the USERPORT as the TTL
interface. When an alarm fulfills the criteria for storage in the register (i.e. when it occurs, is enabled and
a calculation is possible since there are no conflict settings) the respective bit is set. In addition to the
individual messages, a summary alarm message (SUM ALARM) is output. The summary alarm
message is produced by ORing the individual alarms. Pin assignment of the USER PORT connector:
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Alarm Pin
Sum alarm 1
Level 2
Sync 18
MER 19
BER BEFORE VIT 21
BER BEFORE RS 22
Data Error 23
Ground 40 to 48
+5 V (200 mA) 49, 50
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.21
2.7.6.1 Configuring the Alarm Register (ALARM CONFIG)
Any of the alarm messages can be disabled so that it is not entered into the alarm register. To do so
press the ALARM key in the MAIN FUNCTION block and then the ALARM CONFIG / Register...
softkey. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.7-13 ALARM: CONFIG menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
By pressing the respective key, each one of the alarm modes can be individually configured. If an alarm
should not be signalled, select DISABLED. Another keystroke switches back to ENABLED. Any change
of the configuration is stored in the alarm register. If an alarm is disabled, the EFA-T enters "" in the
respective column. An enabled alarm is indicated by "- -".
Note: A disabled alarm is not stored in the alarm register.
Disabling the alarm is only useful, for instance, if the cable-network operator is not interested in the data
errors (DE). In this case the lines available in the alarm register may be used for relevant messages.
For EFA models with appropriate hardware (standard as of January 2003), an enabled alarm can also
be signalled via seven integrated relays (floating signalling lines). To configure the relays, press ALARM:
CONFIG: RELAYS... . The following window appears (provided the associated hardware is fitted):
Using the two softkeys at the top, select the alarm to be output via relays. Use the MODIFY softkey to
change the assignment of an alarm to the relay that should be enabled when the associated alarm is
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.22
present. In the NONE position, an alarm is not signalled to any relay. Please note that for signalling to
relays, alarms must also be enabled (see above).
The relays are connected to the USER PORT connector (X34) as follows:
X34-26 X34-27 X34-28 X34-29 X34-30 X34-31 X34-32 X34-25
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Relay X34, pin

R1 26
R2 27
R3 28
R4 29
R5 30
R6 31
R7 32
Fig. 2.7-15 Relay and pin assignment of USER PORT connector (X34)
2.7.6.2 Alarm Register
The alarm register is an internal memory where alarm messages are stored together with their
respective date and time. The memory has a depth of 1000 lines and comes in the form of a ring
register. Every second the EFA-T checks whether any of the following errors has occurred in the DVB-T
signal:
 Input level (LV): level at the analog RF or IF inputs below the threshold value
 Synchronization (SY): OFDM synchronization or frame synchronization of MPEG2 transport stream
 Modulation error (ME) below the threshold value
 BER before Viterbi decoder (BV) below the threshold value
 Data error caused by uncorrectable events (DE).
If one of the above-mentioned errors is identified, it is entered in the register with the abbreviation in
brackets (for disabling messages see section 2.7.6.1). Please note the following:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.23
 If, for instance, several data errors occur within one second, the error messages (DE) are combined
to one entry.
 Alarm messages are not registered every second in the alarm register. An alarm is recorded once at
the time when it (e.g. "BV") first occurs, and at the time when it disappears for the first time ("- -").
 When an alarm has been DISABLED in the ALARM CONFIG... menu, two asterisks ("") are
entered in the respective column. They indicate that an alarm has been masked and cannot trigger
an alarm message.
 The value of the modulation error (MER) can only be calculated if one of the following two
measurements is active: OFDM PARAMETERS, HISTORY. It is also calculated if one of the screens
is active, which appear on pressing one of the function keys MODE,... ALARM (conditionally with
MEASURE, for further information see section 2.7.5.1). If the calculation of the modulation error is
not possible, a disable symbol (“ ”) is entered in the alarm register instead of the MER value.
 The constellation data of the carrier range is decisive for the calculation of the modulation error. The
carrier range can be varied by entering the START CARR or STOP CARR in the following
measurements: OFDM PARAMETERS, CONSTELL DIAGRAM, as well as all measurements in the
FREQUENCY DOMAIN.
 If the carrier range is selected by entering START CARR and STOP CARR in such a way that it
contains only one TPS carrier or continual pilot (e.g. START CARR = STOP CARR = 0), no
modulation error can be determined. In such cases, two asterisks (“  ”) are entered in the
appropriate column of the alarm register.
 If the RESET BER key is pressed in the MEASURE menu, all bit error rate values are not defined for
a short period of time. This causes two asterisks (“ ”) to be entered in the columns BER before
Viterbi and BER before Reed-Solomon in the alarm register.
 The alarm messages are always entered in the alarm register in the associated column. The order is
from left to right: LV SY ME BV BR DE.
Pressing the ALARM key in the MAIN FUNCTION block causes the alarm register to appear on the LC
display. An example is given below:
Fig. 2.7-16 ALARM menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
Alarm messages are entered in the register in chronological order. The latest entry is entered in the
lowest line. The display mode is such that the line entered last is displayed at the bottom of the screen
when the LINE: NEWEST softkey is pressed. The number at the beginning of each line indicates the
currently used line of the alarm register.
Any line of the alarm register can be displayed by entering a number (terminate with ENTER) or by
means of the cursor keys provided LINE: MAN is first selected. Newly arriving messages continue to be
entered in the register. The current alarm message is displayed when the LINE: NEWEST softkey is
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.24
pressed again. The indication is switched back to the current alarm message. The register contains
1000 lines. If this number is attained, the oldest messages are automatically overwritten by the latest
ones starting at line 0. In this case the entry in line 0 is no longer the oldest but the latest entry.
Three entries in the alarm register are made automatically by the EFA-T without an alarm message
being received:
 Date and time when the register was cleared (REGISTER CLEARED).
 Date and time to which the internal system clock was changed last (TIME CHANGED).
 Date and time at which the user disabled ("") or enabled (e.g. "- -") an alarm.
The EFA-T continuously monitors the applied DVB-T signal for compliance with set limit values. These
limit values are error thresholds. If one of these limits is exceeded, the ALARM LED on the front panel
lights and a message with date and time is entered in the alarm register provided this type of alarm is not
disabled (see section 2.7.6.1). This applies to the following parameters:
 LEVEL: Monitoring of input level (40 dBuV = -67 dBm at 50 )

 MOD ERROR RATIO: Monitoring of modulation error (30.0 dB)
 BER BEFORE VIT: Monitoring of bit error rate before the Viterbi decoder (1.0E-3)
 BER BEFORE RS: Monitoring of bit error rate before the Reed-Solomon decoder (2.0E-4).
Values in brackets are preset in the EFA-T (PRESET values).

For changing thresholds press the ALARM THRESH... key in the ALARM menu. The following menu is
displayed:
Fig. 2.7-17 ALARM THRESHOLD menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
For setting the level control limit value the LEVEL key has to be pressed. The limit value is always
entered in the same unit as is used for indicating the measured level. The unit of level measurement can
be defined in the SETUP: LEVEL UNITS... menu. The setting range is 20 to 130 dBV (-87 to +23 dBm
for an input impedance of 50 ). The entry of the limit value is confirmed with the ENTER key.
The user can define the limit value for the modulation error ratio (MER) after pressing the MOD ERR
RATIO key. The value is to be indicated in dB.
For setting the bit error rate limit value the associated key has to be pressed. A numeric value can now
be directly entered. The lowest useful threshold that can be entered is 0.1E-15. In this case an alarm is
triggered whenever the BER is not 0.0. If 0.0E-xx is entered (xx: any number) an alarm is continuously
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.25
triggered. Note that the exponent entered should always be a two-digit number. If only one digit is
required it should be completed by a leading 0 (example: 2.1E-04).
Note 1: The following tips are useful for setting the BER limit value:
BER before Reed-Solomon decoder:

A BER of 2.0E-4 at the Reed-Solomon decoder input yields a BER of approx. 1E-11 (QEF,
quasi error-free) at the Reed-Solomon decoder output (MPEG2 transport stream) in the
presence of Gaussian distributed white noise.
BER before Viterbi decoder:
Depending on the code rate different limit values are available to obtain a BER of 2.0E-4 at
the Reed-Solomon decoder input.
Note 2: If 0.1E-15 is chosen as the alarm limit value, a period of 12 years is required until this
resolution (0.1E-15) is obtained for the maximum possible net data rate with DVB-T. This
period is necessary to transmit 1E+16 bits via the DVB-T channel. However, the BER
measurement is hardware-designed up to the value of 0.1E-15.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.26
2.7.6.4 Statistics (STATISTICS)
Messages in the alarm register of the EFA-T can be statistically evaluated. The whole monitoring period
is considered in the evaluation, i.e. all alarm messages that occurred between the last entry of
REGISTER CLEARED or TIME CHANGED and the calling up of the statistics function. The evaluated
period is indicated (MONITORING TIME) in the statistics. The statistics function is called up by first
pressing the ALARM function key and then the STATISTICS... softkey. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.7-18 ALARM: STATISTICS menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
The displayed times are the sums of times during which an alarm was active over the monitoring time. In
the case of the MPEG DATA ERROR TIME (DE) message, the number of events (to be more exact, the
duration of the event in seconds) is summed up.
Statistical values are calculated in addition and indicated as an error in %. The percentage values are
always referred to the elapsed monitoring time (MONITORING TIME). 0.13 % for MPEG DATA ERROR
TIME would mean that faulty MPEG2 data was received for 0.13% of the seconds of the monitoring
period. At this point it cannot be distinguished whether the error lasted for one second or whether it
occurred several times within this period.
Detailed information on the frequency of occurrence of error or correction events can be obtained from
the three MPEG DATA ERROR CNT AFTER RS, CORR CNT BEFORE RS and CORR CNT BEFORE
VIT, which indicate the absolute number of faulty MPEG2 frames detected (MPEG DATA ERROR CNT,
1 frame comprises 188 payload bytes) or the absolute number of corrected bytes (CORR CNT BEFORE
RS) and the absolute number of corrected bits (CORR CNT BEFORE VIT). When the alarm register is
cleared, the three counters are reset to 0. The counting limit is 4 294 836 225. When this figure is
reached, the counter stops. In the worst case, the ERROR counter attains this maximum value after
56.66 hours for continuous errors with 64QAM modulation, GI = 1/32, CR = 7/8, 8 MHz channel
bandwidth. In practice the number of faulty MPEG2 frames is below 1%, which extends the
measurement time of the ERROR counter to approximately 1 year.
The statistics display is not permanently updated to allow accurate and easy reading. If required, the
screen can be updated by pressing the REFRESH key without quitting the menu.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.27
Note: The three counters MPEG DATA ERROR CNT, CORR CNT BEFORE RS and CORR CNT
BEFORE VIT are reset to 0 when the alarm register is cleared. If in the course of time more
than 1000 entries are made in the alarm register, the MONITORING TIME in the register
and the statistical calculation are referred to the period indicated in the register, but the
three counters are not reset. They show the total count since the register was cleared even
if there are more than 1000 entries in the alarm register.
With the aid of the statistics, the user is able to assess the DVB-T signal over an extended period of
time. Particularly the error indication in % is important as a proof for the correct functioning of a
transmission link.
2.7.6.5 Printing the Register (PRINT...)
The currently displayed screen content can be printed any time by pressing the HARDCOPY key. A
precondition is that the printer driver in the SETUP: PRINTER menu has been set correctly.
Since the alarm register or parts thereof can be printed in so many ways, the selectable modes are
offered in a separate menu. This menu can be opened by pressing the ALARM key in the MAIN
FUNCTION block and then the PRINT... softkey. The following menu will be displayed:
Fig. 2.7-19 ALARM: PRINT menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
The alarm register continuous to be displayed, only the softkeys have changed. Now the desired printout
can be selected. Pressing the ACTUAL key once switches the EFA-T to a status where the head of the
hardcopy with the most important settings is printed first. Each subsequently arriving alarm message is
then output separately to the printer. In this case the ACTUAL field is in inverse video. When the
ACTUAL key is pressed again, this function is disabled. It serves for recording of incoming alarm
messages. Date and time are indicated in each printed line.
Note: With no printer connected or if a connected printer has run out of paper, an error message
is displayed briefly in the EFA display and printing is interrupted. This also happens when
the actual line is printed (PRINT: ACTUAL). After the error has been eliminated (e.g. a
printer is connected), the setting has to be selected again.
When the LAST LINES... key is pressed, any number of lines can be printed starting from the alarm
message received last. To do so press the LAST LINES... softkey and the following menu is displayed:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.28
Fig. 2.7-20 ALARM: PRINT: LAST LINES... menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
DVB-T mode
The value can be varied by an entry on the numeric keypad (terminate with ENTER) or by means of the
cursor keys. The entered numeral indicates the number of lines to be printed starting from the last line.
Once the correct number has been entered, printing can be started by pressing the PRINT key.
Printing of alarm messages with LINES... is performed in a similar way. Contrary to the printout selected
with LAST LINES..., any group of lines in the alarm register can be printed. The EFA asks for the start-
and end-line numbers, which can be entered separately. Entries are made in the same way as described
for the printout selected with LAST LINES... . When the PRINT key is pressed, the alarm messages
pertaining to the selected line numbers are printed. If the start-line number is higher than the stop-line
number, an error message is output. Exception: If there are exactly 1000 entries in the alarm register,
printing can be continued beyond line 000.
Example: START LINE = 995
STOP LINE = 005
PRINT: 11 lines from 995 to 005 are printed.
A printing procedure in progress can be aborted with the ABORT key.
2.7.6.6 Clearing the Register (REGISTER CLEAR)
The alarm register of the EFA-T is automatically cleared when
 the supply voltage is switched on or

 the PRESET key is pressed.
The register can also be manually cleared. This is done by pressing the ALARM function key and then
the REGISTER CLEAR... softkey. The instrument queries whether the register should really be cleared.
When the YES softkey is pressed, the register is cleared completely and date and time of the clearing
are entered in line 0 of the register. The register is now ready for entering new alarm messages.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.29
2.7.7 MEASURE Menu

The Test Receiver EFA-T offers the user a large number of different measurements for the assessment
the transmission quality of DVB-T signal. It is recommended to read the following operating instructions
to utilize the various capabilities of the instrument. This section is divided as follows:2
2.7.7 MEASURE Menu .........................................................................................................2.7.30

2.7.7.1 Measurement Window .................................................................................................2.7.31
2.7.7.1.1 FREQUENCY OFFSET Measurement ........................................................................2.7.31
2.7.7.1.2 Bit Rate Offset Measurement.......................................................................................2.7.32
2.7.7.1.3 Modulation Error (MER) Measurement ........................................................................2.7.33
2.7.7.1.4 BER Measurement.......................................................................................................2.7.33
2.7.7.1.5 OFDM / CODE RATE Measurement ...........................................................................2.7.34
2.7.7.1.6 TPS Measurement .......................................................................................................2.7.34
2.7.7.1.7 Messages .....................................................................................................................2.7.36
2.7.7.2 Carrier Range, Symbol Counter, HOLD and FREEZE.................................................2.7.38
2.7.7.2.1 Carrier Range...............................................................................................................2.7.38
2.7.7.2.2 Symbol Counter; HOLD and FREEZE .........................................................................2.7.39
2.7.7.3 Constellation Diagram ..................................................................................................2.7.40
2.7.7.4 Measurements in the Frequency Domain ....................................................................2.7.41
2.7.7.4.1 Measurement of MER dB, Interference, MER % .........................................................2.7.41
2.7.7.4.2 I/Q Measurement (Eye Diagram) .................................................................................2.7.43
2.7.7.4.3 Measurement of Amplitude, Phase, Group Delay and Polar Plot ................................2.7.44
2.7.7.5 Measurements in the Time Domain .............................................................................2.7.47
2.7.7.5.1 Measurement of Spectrum...........................................................................................2.7.47
2.7.7.5.1.1 START FREQ, STOP FREQ .......................................................................................2.7.48
2.7.7.5.1.2 DETECTOR .................................................................................................................2.7.48
2.7.7.5.1.3 PEAK HOLD .................................................................................................................2.7.49
2.7.7.5.1.4 AVERAGE CNT ...........................................................................................................2.7.49
2.7.7.5.1.5 SHOULDER ATTEN ....................................................................................................2.7.50
2.7.7.5.1.5.1Definition ......................................................................................................................2.7.50
2.7.7.5.1.5.2Recommended Settings (Measurement to ETSI TR 101290) .....................................2.7.51
2.7.7.5.2 Measurement of Amplitude Distribution / CCDF ..........................................................2.7.52
2.7.7.5.3 Measurement of the Channel Impulse Response and the Frequency Offset ..............2.7.55
2.7.7.5.3.1 Measurement of the Channel Impulse Response (µs, km, miles) ...............................2.7.55
2.7.7.5.3.2 Measurement of the Frequency Offset ........................................................................2.7.60
2.7.7.5.4 HISTORY Measurement ..............................................................................................2.7.62
2.7.7.5.4.1 INTERVAL....................................................................................................................2.7.62
nd
2.7.7.5.4.2 CONFIG 2 SCREEN..................................................................................................2.7.63
2.7.7.5.4.3 FREEZE .......................................................................................................................2.7.64
2.7.7.5.4.4 AVERAGE, MAX; MIN, MAX&MIN ...............................................................................2.7.64
2.7.7.5.4.5 Restart..........................................................................................................................2.7.64
2.7.7.6 OFDM Parameters .......................................................................................................2.7.65
2.7.7.7 Noise Generator (ADD NOISE)....................................................................................2.7.66
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.30
2.7.7.1 Measurement Window
The Test Receiver EFA-T provides a measurement window in which all main parameters are displayed.
To activate this display press the MEASURE key in the function key block. The following menu is
displayed:
Fig. 2.7-21 MEASURE menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode
On the status line at the top of the screen the main settings (set receive frequency, channel bandwidth
used, used attenuator setting) and the measured level are indicated. The latter is continuously updated.
The level unit is configured in the SETUP: LEVEL UNITS menu and automatically converted. It is also
considered whether the instrument is a 50  or 75 model. This status line appears in most menus.
In the main field of the measurement window the key measurements are displayed according to the
generic terms FREQUENCY / BER and OFDM / CODE RATE.
Further instrument settings such as system optimization (SPEC FUNC: SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION
menu) and the SAW filter bandwidth (STATUS: SAW FILTER BW menu) are displayed in the small field
below the dotted line. Messages regarding the synchronization status of the instrument are also
displayed in this field (refer to section 2.7.7.1.7, Messages).
Note: The MER measurement (alarm, history, IEC/IEEE bus) is possibly not available in the
MEASURE mode. For further information see section 2.7.5.1.
2.7.7.1.1 FREQUENCY OFFSET Measurement
The difference between the receive frequency set in the RF menu and that internally measured is
indicated by means of this parameter. The frequency offset is defined as follows:
FrequencyOffset Frequencymeasured Frequencyset .
The value is independent of the inverted receive spectrum, if any, and also applies to the IF input as
defined above. The resolution for the measured value is 1 Hz. The frequency offset may be more than
100 kHz (SAW filter off) to ensure an error-free synchronization of the EFA-T.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.31
2.7.7.1.2 Bit Rate Offset Measurement
The bit rate of the transmitted signal essentially determines the transmission parameters of the DVB-T
signal. It directly influences the following parameters:
 Frequency spacing of individual carriers within the OFDM spectrum

 Symbol period
 Absolute length of the guard interval
The bit rate of a DVB-T transmitter should therefore be within very tight limits (±20 ppm) to ensure error-
free operation. The bit rate offset is defined as follows:
BitrateOffset Bitrate measured Bitrate nominal

 
106 .
ppm Bitratenominal
It must be ensured that bit rates are indicated either as gross or net values, the result is then the same
in both cases. The unit of the measured value is ppm (parts per million), i.e. a relative quantity. Bit rate
offset values can thus be compared to each other without taking into account their absolute values.
The nominal bit rate depends on the following factors:
 order of QAM,
 length of the guard interval and
 channel bandwidth.
The useful net bit rate also depends on the following factors:
 hierarchy (alpha) and

 code rate.
The attainable nominal net bit rate is indicated in the measurement menu below the dotted line (TS BIT
RATE) in case of a synchronized OFDM signal. This indication is calculated from the channel
parameters and is only of informative value. The actual bit rate can then be averaged from the nominal
bit rate and the bit rate offset according to the following equation:
BitrateOffset
Bitratemeasured Bitrate nominal (1  ).
ppm 10 6
The resolution of the measured value is 0.1 ppm, the accuracy is typically ±1 ppm. The DVB-T Test
Receiver EFA-T can correctly synchronize signals with more than ±40 ppm (8K FFT) or ±160 ppm (2K
FFT).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.32
2.7.7.1.3 Modulation Error (MER) Measurement
A calculation of the MER is started in the background in the MEASURE mode and displayed in the MER
(RMS) line. The evaluation of this value takes into account the carrier range from START CARR to
STOP CARR, which can be defined in one of the in-depth measurements. For further information on
defining the carrier range to be analyzed see section 2.7.7.2.1.
The modulation error is indicated in dB. For detailed information on defining the parameter see section
2.7.9.2.6.
Note : The special function SPEC FUNC: DISPLAY: WHEN MEASURE DISPLAY IS ACTIVATED:
MER CALC IN BACKGROUND is used to determine whether the MER measurement is
active in the background when the MEASURE measurement window is displayed.
2.7.7.1.4 BER Measurement
During normal reception, the BER is continuously calculated in the Test Receiver EFA-T. The raw BER
is indicated, i.e. the BER before any error correction (BER before Viterbi) is made, as well as the BER
before and after the Reed-Solomon decoder. BER measurements are fully automatic and independent
of each other. The instrument selects the required integration rate depending on the error rate
measured. The integration rate is indicated in brackets after the measured value. It is always specified in
samples; the duration of a sample depends on the selected order of QAM (QPSK, 16 or 64 QAM) the
guard interval, the channel bandwidth (6, 7 or 8 MHz) and on the code rate used.
The first value in brackets indicates the currently recorded samples. The second value states the
number of samples used by the instrument after the measurement is completed (last count). The
indication (1K33/10K0) means that 1330 of the 10000 desired measurement results (last count) have
already been collected and stored. Of course, the BER can be evaluated now, but the accuracy is not of
optimum value. The first value is regularly increased until the last count is reached.
If the counter final value has been attained, a switchover is made to running BER calculation: the last
10, 100, 1000, 10K, 100K, 1M, 10M, 100M or 1 Samples (depending on the final value required) are
combined to one measured value so that a new set of values is obtained for each new sample. The
great advantage of this method is that indicated BER is always the latest value, i.e. the measured value
is continuously updated. On the other hand, the system is flexible enough to immediately reduce the
number of integrated samples at a sudden deterioration of the input signal quality (e.g. when a noise
generator is connected).
The BER measurement is re-initialized whenever
 a basic system setting (e.g. ADD. NOISE) has been modified or
 the RESET BER key in the measurement menu is pressed.
In case of hierarchical modulation the BER is always calculated from the selected transport stream
(High Prio or Low Prio, see section 2.7.4.4). In the case of hierarchical modulation, this is indicated by
HP for the high priority data stream or LP for the low priority data stream on title in bold of the
measurement menu FREQUENCY / BER.
For further information on BER measurements see section 2.7.9.3 (Function and Selection of Integration
Time for BER Measurements) and 2.7.9.4 (BER Measurement with External Equipment ).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.33
2.7.7.1.5 OFDM / CODE RATE Measurement
The transmission parameters displayed in this block of the measurement menu are:
 FFT mode (2K or 8K FFT),

 Guard interval (1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32),
 Order of QAM (QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM),
 Hierarchy (non-hierarchical with alpha = 1, hierarchical with alpha = 1, 2, 4),
 Code rate (1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8)
The DVB-T Test Receiver EFA-T allows these parameters to be synchronized independently of the TPS
bits (STATUS: OFDM / CODE RATE MODE: AUTO, see section 2.7.4.3). If the measured values differ
from the TPS bits generated at the transmitter end, this is an indication of a problem.
In case of hierarchical modulation the code rate is always calculated from the selected transport stream
(High Prio or Low Prio, see section 2.7.4.4). In the case of hierarchical modulation, this is indicated by
HP for the high priority data stream or LP for the low priority data stream in bold in the title of the
measurement menu OFDM / CODE RATE.
2.7.7.1.6 TPS Measurement
The parameters described in the previous section are coded at the transmitter end in the TPS carriers
(Transmission Parameter Signalling) of the OFDM signal and transmitted together with it. They have a
particularly high error protection and allow the DVB-T receiver to synchronize rapidly. These bits are
coded in the EFA-T and displayed on the measurement menu. The graphical assignment is such that a
direct comparison with the OFDM and code rate parameters found by the EFA is possible.
For the hierarchical modulation the code rates of the two transport streams are transmitted in the TPS
bits and displayed by the EFA-T. The first value refers to the high-priority transport stream, the second
one to the low-priority transport stream.
Moreover, a 16-bit-wide information on network cell identification is coded in the TPS carriers. This
information is displayed in the CELL ID line. The hexadecimal system is used with one digit standing for
four bits. The hexadecimal number can be reconverted by replacing each digit by the associated binary
value according to the following table:
Hex F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bin 1111 1110 1101 1100 1011 1010 1001 1000 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001 0000
Table 2.7-4 Conversion of displayed hexadecimal code into binary code
The information on network cell identification is coded in the TPS bits over all 4 DVB-T frames. For this
reason, the information is displayed in the CELL ID line only after the TPS data of all DVB-T frames has
been read. Dashes (----) are displayed in the corresponding line until all data required has been
determined.
The first 6 bits of the TPS bits are used as TPS length indicator. The value is displayed as a
hexadecimal number on the CELL ID line (“LI“). The transmission of the Cell Identification is optional.
The TPS length indicator carries then the values:
- 0x17: DVB-T, when Cell Identification information is not transmitted (23 TPS bits in use),
- 0x1F: DVB-T, when Cell Identification information is transmitted (31 TPS bits in use),
- 0x21: DVB-H, Cell Identification information is always transmitted (33 TPS bits in use).
With DVB-H, the inner interleaver can be used in two different modes. In mode NATIVE which is also
used in DVB-T the inner interleaver covers one OFDM symbol. EFA-T displays this mode with
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.34
„INT:NAT“. Contrary to DVB-T the inner interleaver can also be used in IN DEPTH mode. EFA-T
displays this mode with „INT:IND“.
With DVB-T, the last 6 bits of the 68 TPS bits transmitted are reserved for future applications. To obtain
sufficient flexibility, these 6 bits are also displayed in the measurement menu of the EFA-T on the TPS
RES (F1-F4) line. This information is indicated separately for each of the 4 possible DVB-T frames (F1
to F4). The numeric format used is the hexadecimal systems.
The display is right-aligned, i.e. the first two (most significant) bits are always 0. The following mapping
of the TPS reserved bits is obtained (the designations are taken from the DVB-T standard ETS
300 744).
Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(MSB) (LSB)
TPS 0 0 S48 S49 S50 S51 S52 S53
Table 2.7-5 Mapping of the TPS reserved bits
Example: Message displayed:

"TPS RES (F1-F4): 12, 34, 3A, 15 (Hex)"
 Binary: 0001 0010, 0011 0100, 0011 1010, 0001 0101
(conversion of the indication displayed according to Table 2.7-5)
In this example, the TPS bits S49 and S52 of the first DVB-T frame are set to 1. All other bits of this
frame are 0. The same method is used for the remaining 3 DVB-T frames.
DVB-H signalling
With DVB-H, also the TPS bits S48 and S49 are used. The meaning is as follows:
s 48 s49 DVB-H signalling

0 x Time Slicing is not used
1 x At least one elementary stream uses Time Slicing
x 0 MPE-FEC not used
x 1 At least one elementary stream uses MPE-FEC
Note: “x” means whatever bit state.
Table 2.7-6 DVB-H service indication
Example: Message displayed:

"TPS RES (F1-F4): 30, 30, 30, 30” (Hex)
 Binary: 0011 0000, 0011 0000, 0011 0000, 0011 0000
(conversion of the indication displayed according to Table 2.7-5)
In this example, the TPS bits S48 and S49 are set to 1. All other bits of this frame are 0. According to
Table 2.7-6, Time Slicing and MPE-FEC are active.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.35
2.7.7.1.7 Messages
In the measurement window the following messages

 OFDM UNSYNC,
 MPEG TS UNSYNC and
 I/Q INTERCHANGED
are displayed if applicable. If none of the messages is displayed, the corresponding synchronization is in
order. The measured level should be taken into account in case of debugging.
Meaning of messages:
Message Meaning Possible sources
OFDM UNSYNC Symbol rate recovery or carrier recovery not The set receive frequency (RF) is not correct or
synchronized. OFDM UNSYNC is always the signal jitter too high.
displayed together with MPEG TS UNSYNC.
The channel bandwidth is incorrectly selected
(STATUS menu).
OFDM / CODE RATE MODE is not on TPS:
manual configuration of OFDM / CODE RATE
SETTINGS not correct (STATUS menu).
The SAW filter is switched off (SAW OFF)
although adjacent channels are occupied.
The attenuator is set to a wrong value in the
manual control.
The input stages are overdriven by very strong
adjacent-channel signals (>20 dB above the
useful signal level); in this case the HIGH ADJ
CHAN POWER mode can be selected (INPUT:
ATTEN menu).
Modulator or transmitter error
MPEG TS UNSYNC No MPEG2 sync word found. OFDM UNSYNC The signal to be measured does not include an
is always displayed together with MPEG TS MPEG2 transport stream. This is the case when
UNSYNC. PRBS before Mapping is set on DVB-T modulator
SFQ or if the BER is too high.
I/Q INTERCHANGED Recovery of MPEG2 transport stream correct If the DVB-T signal is converted to another
but the signal spectrum was internally inverted. frequency, the spectrum is inverted if the
conversion oscillator frequency is higher than the
signal frequency. The EFA-T identifies this
inversion and automatically corrects the decoded
data information so that a valid MPEG2 data
stream is available at the MPEG2 outputs.
On the modulator, the I and Q paths (after IFFT)
are interchanged, which causes the
above-mentioned spectral inversion.
Table 2.7-7 Messages displayed in the measurement window
If a hardware-relevant error occurs, the SELFTEST ERROR CODE is displayed in the bottom line of the
measurement window. For evaluation of the SELFTEST ERROR CODE press the keys PRESET,
SERVICE and SELFTEST. The menu is typically as follows:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.36
Fig. 2.7-22 PRESET: SERVICE: SELFTEST menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR

DVB-T mode
Distinction is made between messages indicating a hardware fault (such as 55 MHz CLOCK) and those
showing a non-synchronized state (e.g. OFDM or MPEG TS). If a DVB-T signal is synchronized all
messages should be indicated as OK. In the lower part the test results are displayed, which aids trained
servicing personnel in troubleshooting.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.37
2.7.7.2 Carrier Range, Symbol Counter, HOLD and FREEZE
2.7.7.2.1 Carrier Range
For most of the measurements performed with the EFA-T, the carrier range (frequency range) can be
defined for the current measurement. This applies to the following measurements:
 Constellation diagram,
 MER dB,
 Interference
 MER %,
 I/Q (eye diagram),
 Amplitude frequency response,
 Phase frequency response,
 Group delay frequency response,
 Polar plot and with the
 OFDM parameters.
The following description applies to all these measurements.
For selecting the carrier limits one of the above measurements should be activated by pressing the
corresponding softkey. Once a setting has been made, it is active for all measurements at the same
time (transparency of the setting).
The user can select the required carrier range with the keys START CARR and STOP CARR for the
selective assessment of the constellation diagram. A specific carrier or a group of carriers can be
selected from the OFDM spectrum. The carrier number is always entered as a natural number. The
carrier with the number 0 is permissible. The numbering depends on the numbering used in the DVB-T
standard (ETS 300 744) and always begins with the value 0 for the first active carrier of the OFDM
spectrum. The unused carriers generated during the IFFT of the DVB-T transmitter are not counted. The
following limit values apply:
 0 START CARR STOP CARR 1704 (2K FFT) or

 0 START CARR STOP CARR 6816 (8K FFT).
The EFA-T stores separately the settings according to the FFT modes 2K and 8K. If the FFT mode is
changed the limits of the carrier range to be displayed last chosen in this mode are used. It is thus
possible to use different limit values for the two modes.
Switchover can be made from the entry of start and stop carrier (START/STOP CARR) to the entry of
center carrier and carrier range (CENTER/SPAN CARR). Refer to section 2.7.5.1 (DISPLAY:
MEASURE). In the CENTER/SPAN CARR setting the following applies:
 0 CENTER CARR 1704, 1 SPAN CARR 1705 (2K FFT) or

 0 CENTER CARR 6816, 1 SPAN CARR 6817 (8K FFT).
The carrier span (SPAN CARR) entry is always rounded up to the next odd value. If the carrier span
exceeds the maximum stop value (or falls below the minimum start value), the graphics display is limited
to stop value kmax (start value kmin= 0). In this case, the carrier selected as CENTER CARR may not be
displayed in the center (MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN). When the center carrier is selected, the
carrier range entered can be displayed in full if the above conditions for the start and stop carrier are
fully complied with.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.38
2.7.7.2.2 Symbol Counter; HOLD and FREEZE
The functions are available in the two measurements

 Constellation diagram and
 I/Q(eye diagram).
The user can adapt the constellation or I/Q eye diagram to his requirements by means of the keys
SYMBOL CNT, HOLD and FREEZE.
The time needed for collecting measured data and calculating the results depends first directly on the
set number of carriers to be displayed in the measurement, secondly on the number of the OFDM
symbols to be processed. In order to obtain a quick display of the test results, the number of the
symbols to be processed can be set automatically (depending on the number of the carriers). To do this
the SYMBOL CNT key is in the AUTO position. the number of symbols to be processed and displayed
is always indicated on the upper part of the measurement window.
The user can set any other required value by means of the SYMBOL CNT key. To do this the SYMBOL
CNT key should be pressed once and the required numeric value entered on the numeric keypad
(confirm with ENTER). When the key is pressed again, the automatic mode is switched back on (the
manually edited value, however, is maintained in the background).
The manual entry of the value is limited to 999999 displayed symbols. The HOLD key is used to display
a greater number of symbols (in this case the editor window of SYMBOL CNT shows the infinite value
as an indication). When the SYMBOL CNT key is pressed again, the user accesses the manual mode
or the automatic mode if he continues to press the key.
A large number of symbols would take considerable time until a complete measurement is available on
the screen with the required number of symbols. For this reason the screen is refreshed at regular
intervals to give the user a first impression of the measurement even if the required number of symbols
has not yet been attained. The count of the symbol counter is also updated at the top of the
measurement menu.
The function of SYMBOL CNT can be illustrated with the aid of the setting SYMBOL CNT N, 2xN and
INFINITE (HOLD) and the diagram below, N being the maximum number of symbols which can be
displayed with only one screen update (N depends on the number of displayed carriers):
Graphical Graphical Graphical

Acquisition of I/Q evaluation and Acquisition of I/Q evaluation and Acquisition of I/Q evaluation and
values for N symbols display of values for N symbols display of values for N symbols display of
measured measured measured
Display range for SYMBOL CNT = 1xN etc.
Display range for SYMBOL CNT = 2xN
Display range for SYMBOL CNT = INFINITE (HOLD)
Fig. 2.7-23 Function of SYMBOL CNT with N = maximum number of symbols which can be
displayed with only one screen update
With small numbers of symbols (N) the display contains completely new measured values at each
update. With large numbers of symbols (>N), the presentation of symbols is distributed over several
consecutive displays: the first set of measured values is displayed. The display is retained while a
second set of measured values is recorded. The new display now contains the two sets of measured
values. A third set of measured values is then recorded, etc., until the total of the required measured
values (symbols) are on display. The subsequent display update deletes the oldest values so that the
required number of symbols will from now on be always displayed.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.39
Once recorded the measured values will be not be deleted in the INFINITE (HOLD) setting. With the aid
of this function, long-term monitoring can be performed since the I/Q values are only cleared when the
function is terminated.
With the aid of the FREEZE: ON key the currently displayed constellation diagram can be frozen. This
function is useful when, for instance, a particular event should be retained on the screen for printing.
The measurement, however, is continued in the background and can be reactivated by pressing the key
again.
2.7.7.3 Constellation Diagram
Using the CONSTELL DIAGRAM... key, the EFA-T is switched to the constellation analyzer mode. The
constellation diagram is an extremely useful tool for assessing the quality of the transmitted signal. Fig.
2.7-24 shows a correctly synchronized constellation diagram for 64QAM transmission. In the
constellation diagram all OFDM carriers are displayed which are in the range selected with the START
CARR and STOP CARR keys (each included). For details refer to section 2.7.7.2.1. Each carrier is
represented in its own baseband by means of an internal complex FFT (derotation with the aid of
complex rotational vector). The constellation diagram can be considered as a complex numerical
values, each value being defined in this level by its inphase component (I component, horizontal axis)
and its quadrature component (Q component, vertical axis). The numerical values can be interpreted as
amplitude and phase, the amplitude being measured from the center of the diagram. For the display of
the constellation diagram all pilots (TPS, continual and scattered pilots) are recorded and displayed.
Fig. 2.7-24 MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM menu in the OFDM

The decision field limits are entered in the constellation diagram as vertical and horizontal lines. All
measured values within such a decision field are assigned to a specific identical bit pattern in the
demapping block. The more measured values lie in the center of such a decision field, the larger the
margin of the transmission link for interference such as noise. The decision field limits are displayed
automatically and correctly by the EFA-T depending on the order of constellation and the hierarchy.
A particularly clear form of the constellation diagram is the eye diagram display I/Q versus frequency
(see section 2.7.7.4.2).
Note: No MER measurement (alarm, history, IEC/IEEE bus) is available in the constellation
diagram mode.
For further examples and a description of individual errors parameters see section 2.7.9.1 (Application
and Interpretation of Constellation Diagram ).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.40
2.7.7.4 Measurements in the Frequency Domain
In all measurements in the frequency domain only those OFDM carriers are displayed which are in the
range selected with the START CARR and STOP CARR keys (each included). For details refer to
section 2.7.7.2.1.
Note: No MER measurement (alarm, history, IEC/IEEE bus) is available in the mode
"Measurement in the frequency domain".
2.7.7.4.1 Measurement of MER dB, Interference, MER %
The frequency-dependent curve of the modulation error (MER) can be calculated with the EFA-T and
displayed on its screen. To do so press the MEASURE key in the MAIN FUNCTION block and then the
FREQUENCY DOMAIN softkey. The top softkey is used to select the three different types of modulation
error display (toggle function), the active display is highlighted in inverse video:
 MER in decibel (dB),

 MER in the interpretation as interference (interference: like dB, but rotated and inverted vertical
scale) and
 MER in percent (%).
For calculation of the parameters all pilots (TPS, continual and scattered pilots) are automatically
removed from the data material. If solely such a pilot has been selected, an error message is output.
Traces are always calculated on the basis of an internally optimized number of symbols which cannot be
modified by the user. Different measurements can thus be compared directly. The number of symbols
taken for a measurement directly depends on the number of the carriers to be calculated. For the
display the same number of I/Q values is always processed for each pixel column.
When the number of the carriers to be displayed exceeds the number of pixel columns available,
several carriers are combined to one measured value. The quadratic weighting of the measured values
is strictly taken into consideration. Thus, the MER value of a single disturbed carrier may be correctly
displayed only when a smaller carrier range is represented because the (bad) value of the disturbed
carrier is first combined with the (good) values of the undisturbed adjacent carrier.
The carrier numbers of a relevant frequency range can be directly read or, if required, determined more
precisely using the zoom function (see section 2.7.7.2.1).
With a small number of OFDM carriers the display of the measured values is enlarged for clarity. This
enlargement takes place in two steps: three or five pixel columns per measured value and an empty
column separating the neighbouring measured value are used for display if there is enough space. A
single carrier can thus be exactly assigned to a measured value (see Fig. 2.7-25, right).
There are always two MER values on all displays:
 the quadratic weighted MER value (RMS, root mean square) and
 the minimum (MIN, MER dB) or maximum MER value (MAX, MER % and interference).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.41
Fig. 2.7-25 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: MER dB menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/
DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Display of the whole carrier range on the left, a subrange
with the larger presentation of measured values on the right.
The reference for the MER measurement (0 dB or 100 %) according to ETSI TR 101290 is always the
rms value of the data carrier modulated with payload. This rms value mainly depends on the order of
QAM and on the hierarchical modulation. For further details refer to section 2.7.9.2.6.
The traces are labelled with RMS, MAX or MIN at the right edge of the measurement window. In the two
displays MER dB and MER %, the MER value based on the selected carrier range is given as a numeric
value. For the enlarged display of the measured values with a few carriers, the rms values are indicated
by a bar chart so that reading and distinction to the MAX/MIN values is considerably simplified. The
basis for the bars is the quadratic weighted value of the displayed rms values. For the normal display
(i.e. not enlarged) the rms values are combined with lines.
The result of the MIN/MAX calculation always depends on the number of processed measured values.
The internally defined number of symbols as a function of the number of the carriers ensures that the
results of two measurements are consistent with each other, even if a carrier range differing in size is
selected. For the display of MIN/MAX values these values are not combined with lines.
The most unfavourable (worst) value of the MIN/MAX calculation can be directly compared with the
result of the MIN/MAX calculation of OFDM parameters after several measurement runs since it is more
probable to obtain an even worse value over a longer measurement time than for the MER
measurement due to the average or hold process.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.42
2.7.7.4.2 I/Q Measurement (Eye Diagram)
A particularly clear representation of the constellation diagram is the eye diagram display I/Q versus
frequency. For this display, the I and Q components of measured values are not registered at a complex
level but real values are recorded. The two values are displayed in a plot versus the frequency. The
measurement can be thought of as follows: the I component of the constellation diagram is assumed to
be rotated by 90° onto the Q component. Two real values which are vertically plotted (see Fig. 2.7-26
Illustration of the I/Q measurement method (eye diagram) ) are obtained for each
measured value from the complex constellation level. For displaying the eye diagram all pilots (TPS,
continual and scattered pilots) are automatically removed from the data material. If only such a pilot has
been selected, an error message is output.
Q I/Q
Q I/Q
Q I/Q
Q I/Q
k
Q I I/Q
Q I I/Q k St opp
I
I
I
k St a r t
Fig. 2.7-26 Illustration of the I/Q measurement method (eye diagram)
The decision field limits are inserted as horizontal lines in this display. It is thus very easy to recognize
when the measured values get close to the thresholds. A special algorithm ensures that the measured
values do not coincide with the grid to make them invisible. As for the constellation diagram, the number
of symbols currently presented on the display is indicated on the upper part of the measurement
window. The carrier number of a selective interference can be read or, if required, be determined more
precisely using the zoom function (see section 2.7.7.2.1). With the aid of the SYMBOL CNT, HOLD and
FREEZE the user may adapt the display of the measurement to his special requirements (see section
2.7.7.2.2).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.43
Fig. 2.7-27 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: I/Q menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/
DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode.
Display of a measurement with a quick fading interference.
With a small number of OFDM carriers the display of the measured values is enlarged for clarity. This
enlargement takes place in two steps: three then five pixel columns per measured value and an empty
column separating the neighbouring measured value are used for display if there is enough space. A
single carrier can thus be exactly assigned to a measured value.
2.7.7.4.3 Measurement of Amplitude, Phase, Group Delay and Polar Plot
The Test Receiver EFA-T is fitted with a powerful channel estimation routine which evaluates the pilots
contained in the DVB-T signal and computes information on the linear distortion of the transmission
channel from their amplitude or phase. The following measurements can be performed at the same
time:
 Amplitude frequency response (spectrum) and phase frequency response (spectrum) or

 Amplitude frequency response (spectrum) and group delay response (spectrum) or
 Polar plot (complex display in polar coordinates).
For selection press the third key from the top in the MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN menu until the
required type of display appears in inverse video on the softkey.
The carrier numbers of a relevant frequency range can be directly read or, if required, be determined
more precisely using the zoom function (see section 2.7.7.2.1). With a small number of OFDM carriers
the display of the measured values is enlarged for clarity. This enlargement takes place in two steps:
three then five pixel columns per measured value and an empty column separating the neighbouring
measured value are used for display if there is enough space. A single carrier can thus be exactly
assigned to a measured value.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.44
Fig. 2.7-28 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: AMPL/PHASE menu in the OFDM

ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Strong fading is superimposed on the
right.
To calculate the phase note that all pilots should undergo the following two process steps:
 the average phase of all pilots is subtracted so that a display normalized to = 0° is obtained and
 a phase component increasing linearly (linear phase) with the carrier number is into account.
Physically this means that a constant group delay of the DVB-T signal is not displayed as a linear
phase ramp but as a constant line for = 0°.
The unit of the amplitude scale is decibel (dB), the unit of the phase scale degree (°), the unit of the
group delay scale s. All scales of the spectrum are automatically scaled and cannot be modified
manually. For all scales, the zero point is defined such that the average of the measured values
coincides with the zero point.
POLAR PLOT
In the POLAR PLOT mode the complex pilots are entered as complex numerical values. This display is
particularly interesting for qualitative analysis since the trace type of the complex channel spectrum is
recorded in a clear way. The display is no longer unambiguous as far as carrier numbers are concerned,
i.e. it is not possible to draw conclusions on the associated carrier number from a specific point of the
curve. However, the carrier number which has produced a specific measured value can be determined
by stepwise limiting the carrier range to be displayed. An example of display in the POLAR_PLOT mode
is shown in Fig. 2.7-29.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.45
Fig. 2.7-29 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: POLAR PLOT menu in the OFDM
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Display of a DVB-T signal with strong
fading.
With POLAR PLOT the ideal signal is a single point in the bottom right or top left quadrant. This means
that all amplitudes and all phases are equal.
Note 1: The spectrum is correctly displayed with respect to the frequency axis if the signal is
applied to the RF input in normal position. With IF operation or inverted position the upper
and the lower limit frequency of the display range are interchanged with respect to the RF
or IF input. The phase spectrum is additionally displayed in inverted form. With IF operation
and inverted position at the same time, the spectrum is correctly displayed again. The
message I/Q INTERCHANGED of the measurement menu (see section 2.7.7.1.7) indicates
if feeding is in the inverted position.
Note 2: The spectrum calculation comprises the recording of all components involved in
transmission. To keep the inherent error of the EFA-T as low as possible, the SAW filters of
the EFA (see section 2.7.4.1) should be switched off for spectral measurements provided
occupied adjacent channels allow this.
Note 3: The display modes for the spectrum and the channel impulse response are not completely
independent of each other but rather the pilots are interpreted in the one or other direction.
The display modes are of equal priority and this is physically correct. If the cause of a
distortion is, for instance, an echo, a spectrum can still be displayed. The spectrum is only
another way of displaying the echo.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.46
2.7.7.5 Measurements in the Time Domain
The measurements in the time domain cannot be configured for a carrier range. A setting made in
another menu has no effect in this case.
"Measurement in the time domain". Exception: the MER measurement is always available
for the HISTORY measurement.
2.7.7.5.1 Measurement of Spectrum
The spectrum measurement function is to be started by pressing the MEASURE key (hardkey) and also
the SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN and SPECTRUM softkeys. The measurement is based on the
sampled values of the input signal mixed to the baseband and converts it to the frequency with the aid of
fast Fourier transform (FFT). The following menu is displayed e.g.:
Fig. 2.7-30 MEASURE: SPECTRUM/TIME DOMAIN: SPECTRUM menu in the OFDM

The level scale is normalized to the total power applied during sampling. It is automatically scaled and
cannot be modified manually.
The indications on the frequency axis are always relative to the RF or IF set in the INPUT menu. An
inverted signal spectrum due to internal mechanisms, if any, is taken into account in the display and set
correctly.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.47
2.7.7.5.1.1START FREQ, STOP FREQ
Press the START FREQ and STOP FREQ keys and enter a number on the keypad (confirm with
ENTER) to set the frequency range to be displayed. The frequency can be entered within the following
limits:
 -4.48 MHz START FREQ (STOP FREQ –1.00 MHz), or
 (START FREQ +1.00 MHz) STOP FREQ 4.48 MHz.
Note : If a SAW filter is active and the frequency range is selected so that it goes beyond the SAW
filter bandwidth, an info box requesting the user to limit the frequency range to be displayed
according to the filter bandwidth will be displayed for a few seconds. This message is
displayed until the frequency range has been adapted or the SAW filter setting corrected.
2.7.7.5.1.2DETECTOR
N N
The spectrum is calculated by means of 2 FFT, which can be interpreted as a filter bank comprising 2
equidistant filters. Depending on the frequency range selected, a section of this result field is displayed.
N
The number of available results (2 ) is larger than the pixel columns available for display. For this
reason, several individual values of the result filed are assigned to a pixel column. Pressing the
DETECTOR toggle key defines the principle used to combine the individual values. Three settings are
available:
 MIN: the smallest value of a group is displayed
 RMS: the (amplitude) values of a group undergo square averaging (root mean
square). This corresponds to an averaging of the power values (rms value)
 MAX: the largest value of a group is displayed
The following graphics shows the principle of grouping several values or of the detector function:
Resu lt field of 2 N -F F T
n =0 n =2 N -1
Gr ou p
Assign m en t of resu lt
t o P pixel colu m n s:
p=0 p=1 … p=P -1
Fig. 2.7-31 Operational principle of the DETECTOR function
When selecting the detector mode, bear in mind that with MIN and MAX the resolution bandwidth
(RBW) is independent of the selected frequency range. If the rms detector is used, the resolution
bandwidth is automatically adapted to the selected frequency span.
The applicable resolution bandwidth, which in the case of FFT is identical to the equivalent noise
bandwidth, is displayed on top of the diagram.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.48
2.7.7.5.1.3PEAK HOLD
The PEAK HOLD key of the spectrum function enables the user to detect e.g. sporadic sinusoidal
spurious signals. Pressing this key starts the measurement again and all maximum or minimum values
obtained since the start of the measurement are displayed. Pressing the key again starts a new
measurement. This function is coupled with the setting of the DETECTOR mode. If an rms detector is
used, the peak hold function cannot be selected. However, if the detector is set to MAX / MIN (frequency
domain), the maxima / minima in the time domain are also detected by means of the peak hold function.
2.7.7.5.1.4AVERAGE CNT
For a more accurate spectrum analysis, the display should be made easier to interpret by averaging. For
this purpose, the EFA-T spectrum function offers a very powerful averaging function. Press the
AVERAGE CNT key in the SPECTRUM measurement. Pressing this key several times changes the
display from OFF to a numeric value that can be entered on the numeric keypad (confirm with ENTER).
The following limit values have to be observed:
1 AVERAGE CNT 999.
If AVERAGE CNT is set to OFF, this is equal to manually entered 1. When this function is activated, the
spectrum is averaged in the time domain according to the rms method. This ensures the correct display
of the mean power density values.
Depending on the number entered via the keypad, two different averaging methods are activated:
 AVERAGE CNT 200: All frequency characteristics displayed are stored in a pipeline structure
and used for averaging (in the time domain). When the number of traces set in AVERAGE CNT
is attained, the oldest traces are discarded.
 AVERAGE CNT >200: The frequency characteristics are averaged by means of recursion.
The progress of the averaging process is displayed above the frequency characteristic (AVG), provided
AVERAGE CNT is not set to OFF or 1. The first figure indicates the current number of traces used and
the second figure the target value (setting from AVERAGE CNT).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.49
2.7.7.5.1.5SHOULDER ATTEN
2.7.7.5.1.5.1 Definition
fr ef = P osit ion of t h e la st
DVB-T ca r r ier
m a x level of DVB-T Spect r u m

level
Sh ou lder
At t en u a t io
n (u pper )
DVB-T Spect r u m
fr ef + 300 +500 +700 kH z fr equ en cy
Fig. 2.7-32 Determination of shoulder distances (shoulder attenuation) for a DVB-T signal. The
figure refers to the upper shoulder distance.
In addition to calculation and display, the SPECTRUM measurement function measures the shoulder
distances. In accordance with the recommendations of document ETSI TR 101290, the shoulder
distance is measured in several steps:
1. Search of the maximum within the useful signal spectrum

2. Drawing a straight line across the two test points, which are read at 300 kHz and 700 kHz from the
first and the last carrier respectively of the useful signal
3. Parallel shifting of this or these straight lines until they cross the maximum occurring in the above
frequency range of 300 kHz to 700 kHz (distance from first/last carrier).
4. Calculating the level at 500 kHz from the first/last carrier by substitution in the straight-line equation
5. The difference between the maximum mentioned in item 1 and the levels mentioned in item 4
(upper and lower value) is the shoulder distance.
The values indicated on the EFA-T under SHOULDER ATTEN are divided into a LOWER and UPPER
shoulder distance. They indicate the shoulder distance values at the beginning and the end of the useful
signal spectrum.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.50
Note 1: The different frequency ranges used to determine the shoulder distances are automatically
defined and coupled to the set channel bandwidth. The bandwidth can be set in SETUP:
CHANNEL BW and is always indicated (CHAN BW) as a check when the spectrum is
displayed.
Note 2: The signal must be applied with a small frequency offset to obtain an error-free
determination of the shoulder distances. For determining the position of the first and last
carrier of a DVB-T signal, it is assumed that a signal without frequency offset is applied.
2.7.7.5.1.5.2 Recommended Settings (Measurement to ETSI TR 101290)
The following settings are recommended to ensure the error-free determination of shoulder distances in
line with ETSI TR 101290:
 Switch off an active SAW filter, if any: SETUP: SAW FILTER  OFF; Caution: only possible if no
other signals are applied.
 Set the DETECTOR mode to MAX.
 Select the maximum frequency span: START FREQ = -4.48 MHz, STOP FREQ = 4.48 MHz.
If the shoulder distances cannot be determined accurately in accordance with ETSI TR 101290
recommendations, an asterisk (*) precedes the value concerned. This occurs in the following cases:
 When the DETECTOR mode is set to MIN or RMS because the required filter bandwidth is not
obtained on RMS and the maxima cannot be detected on MIN.
 When the whole useful signal spectrum or a range of 700 kHz from the first/last carrier of the DVB-T
signal is not available due to the selected frequency range. The check for a sufficient frequency
range is performed separately for the lower and upper shoulder distance. In such cases, the shoulder
distance is calculated on the basis of the data that is available in the limited frequency range.
 If the frequency range relevant to the determination of the shoulder distance is influenced by an
activated SAW filter. This setting can be adapted by means of SETUP: SAW FILTER and is always
indicated as a check when the shoulder distances are output (SAW).
With broadband noise, for example, poorer shoulder distance results might be obtained due to the
convolution or alias effects generated by noise. In such cases, it is recommended to use an additional
function for measuring one of the two shoulder distances. Proceed as follows:
 Activate a SAW filter to blank out signal components outside the channel frequency range.
 Apply a DVB-T signal with a frequency shift of ±1 MHz. A precision of ±100 kHz for the frequency
shift is sufficient.
With this method, only the distance of the shoulder that is located within the SAW filter passband range
is determined. Note that no synchronization of the applied DVB-T signal is possible during this
measurement due to the required frequency shift.
Note: No MER measurement (alarm, history, IEC/IEEE bus) is available in the mode "Spectrum
measurement".
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.51
2.7.7.5.2 Measurement of Amplitude Distribution / CCDF
Measurement of amplitude distribution or CCDF is used for evaluating nonlinearities (of amplifiers and
transmitter output stages, for example). For the signal under observation in these measurements, it is
specified how often the signal reaches or exceeds a specific level.
"Measurement of amplitude distribution/CCDF".
Amplitude distribution
For this measurement the EFA-T records 10.24 million instantaneous values of the sampled carrier
frequency signal and accumulates their frequency of occurrence. The rms value is determined from this
distribution and is used as a reference for the display of the voltage level on a logarithmic scale.
To activate the measurement of amplitude distribution press the MEASURE function key and then the
SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN key. Then press the AMPLDIST(RF) / CCDF(RF) toggle key until
AMPLDIST(RF) appears in the softkey field in inverse video. The following is displayed e.g.:
Fig. 2.7-33 MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: AMPLDIST(RF) menu in the OFDM
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. The reference values are displayed as
dashed lines.
In the horizontal direction, the voltage level is logarithmic relative to the rms value of the voltage
characteristic. The vertical axis marks the frequency of occurrence. The (bell-shaped) frequency
distribution of the DVB-T signal is divided into several 1 dB windows to determine the amplitude
distribution. In the AMPLDIST(RF) measurement, the height of the different columns illustrates the
frequency of occurrence inside the respective 1 dB window. The figure below demonstrates this
calculation method:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.52
Distribution density
Rm s voltage (0 dB)
+1 dB
+2 dB
+3 dB
+4 dB
+5 dB
+6 dB
+7 dB
+8 dB
Volt a ge
Integral via the distribution density function of
the voltage from (rms value) to
(rms value +1 dB)
Fig. 2.7-34 Distribution density function of an ideal DVB-T signal.
The distribution density function is divided into 1 dB steps to determine the amplitude distribution. The
size of the hatched area corresponds to the height of the first column in the AMPLDIST(RF) diagram.
The reference quantity used to determine the relative frequencies is the total number of acquired
samples. The number of acquired samples is displayed below the diagram under ACQU (acquisition).
The display is updated after every 102400 values (1%). The data is collected until the final value is
obtained with 10.24 million samples (100 %). From this time, the current data is acquired and the oldest
data is discarded (pipeline structure).
The ideal frequencies are displayed as short dashed horizontal lines (reference values) to enable a
comparison of the amplitude distribution of the applied signal with that of an ideal DVB-T signal. An ideal
signal is applied if all column heights of the measured distribution are identical to the heights of the
reference values. A deviation from the ideal distribution is thus identified by the deviations of the column
heights and the value of the crest factor, for example due to the clipping effects of the transmitter output
stage. These reference values are only valid for an OFDM signal and cannot be applied to other signals.
CCDF (complementary cumulative distribution function)

A measurement that is similar to the measurement of amplitude distribution is the CCDF measurement.
Unlike amplitude distribution, this curve indicates how often a particular voltage level is reached or
exceeded. The CCDF measurement is divided into two methods, CCDF(RF) and CCDF(ENV), whose
distribution characteristics are based on different data. To start this measurement, press the
AMPLDIST(RF) / CCDF(RF) / CCDF(ENV) toggle key in MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN until,
depending on the desired measurement, CCDF(RF) or CCDF(ENV) is displayed in inverse video. The
following is displayed for instance:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.53
Fig. 2.7-35 MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: CCDF(RF) and CCDF(ENV) menu in the
OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. The reference values are marked
by short horizontal lines in 1 dB steps.
To determine the CCDF(RF) diagram, 10.24 million instantaneous values of the sampled carrier
frequency signal are recorded according to the same method used for amplitude distribution, and the
distribution density is determined. In contrast to this, the CCDF(ENV) measurement, which records the
distribution density of the envelope of the carrier frequency signal, is based on only 1 million frequency
points.
The rms value of the carrier frequency signal (CCDF(RF)) or the envelope signal (CCDF(ENV)) is
determined from this distribution and used as a reference value for the display of the voltage level on a
logarithmic scale.
In the horizontal direction, the voltage level is logarithmic relative to the rms value of the voltage
characteristic. The vertical axis marks the CCDF values.
In contrast to amplitude distribution, the individual points of the trace indicate how often a certain voltage
level is attained or exceeded. The indicated frequency refers to the total number of read samples
specified under ACQUisition.
The reference values for each integral voltage level are displayed as short horizontal lines to compare
the distribution of the applied signal with that of an ideal DVB-T signal. The voltage level associated with
each reference line is highlighted by a scaling line extended up to the reference value. The points at
which the trace crosses the extended scaling lines are in inverse video in order to identify clearly the
value measured at such levels.
The reference values are only valid for an OFDM signal and cannot be applied to other signals.
For further information on amplitude distribution and CCDF see section 2.7.9.9.
Crest factor
Information on the crest factor is determined from the frequency distribution characteristic and displayed
in the upper right-hand corner of the diagram. The displayed values refer to the type of analyzed signal:
the characteristic of the instantaneous values of the carrier frequency signal for the AMPLDIST(RF) and
CCDF(RF) measurements or the envelope characteristic for the CCDF(ENV) measurement. There are
three categories of values:
 MARGIN: This value indicates the crest factor that could currently be
measured due to the clipping effects from the Test
Receiver EFA-T. This value is a measure for margin.
 MAX: The maximum crest factor is the ratio of the maximum
voltage to the rms value of the voltage characteristic. The
maximum voltage that occurred since the start of the
measurement is used.
 CURR: In contrast to MAX, the current samples under ACQUisition
are used for calculation.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.54
2.7.7.5.3 Measurement of the Channel Impulse Response and the Frequency

Offset
2.7.7.5.3.1Measurement of the Channel Impulse Response (µs, km, miles)
"Measurement of the channel impulse response".
The powerful channel estimation routine of the EFA-T allows a fast assessment of the linear distortion of
the transmission channel (see section 2.7.7.4.3). In the channel impulse response (IMPULSE
RESPONSE) diagram the channel estimation data is interpreted as a result of echo interference. The
data is transformed from the frequency domain to the time domain using inverse fast Fourier transform
(IFFT). The result of this transformation is the impulse response of the transmission channel. The time
axis can be scaled in three different units:
 s (microsecond)
 km (kilometer)
 mile (1 mile = 1.609344 km)
To activate this measurement, please press the MEASURE key in the function key block and then the
SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN keys. Make sure that the SFN FRQ OFFS softkey is on OFF. If the SFN
FRQ OFFS softkey is on ON, please press it once. Then press the first key from the top repeatedly until
the desired unit appears in the softkey field in inverse video. The following window is displayed, for
example:
Fig. 2.7-36 MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: IMPULSE RESPONSE: µs menu in the
OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. This represents a DVB-T signal
with a number of post-echoes. In the screenshot on the right, there is also a pre-
echo. A bar above the diagram indicates the duration of the guard interval of the
applied signal.
Fig. 2.7-36 clearly shows the position of the main pulse at t = 0. The pre-echoes are displayed on the left
of the main pulse and the post-echoes on the right. Pre-echoes can be generated especially by
crosstalk in filters or by multipath reception (e.g. strongly attenuated direct path and less attenuated
echo which becomes the main pulse) whereas post-echoes are caused by reflections (e.g. from
buildings, mountains, air layers).
The unit of level scale is decibel (dB). It is permanently set and normalized to the main pulse level.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.55
ZOOM
The scale of the time/position axis can be zoomed to make it easier to identify very close echoes. Press
the IMPULSE RESP ZOOM key and, via the numeric keypad, enter a whole-number value as the zoom
factor. This value can be set within the following limits:
1 IMPULSE RESP ZOOM 20.
The scale is always zoomed in such a way that the pulse is visible on the display at t = 0 µs.
A horizontal bar above the display of the channel impulse response shows the duration of the guard
interval of the received DVB-T signal.
guard position of FFT
interval window
main signal: symbol n symbol n+1
post-echo:
pre-echo:
t
dB guard interval
0
μs
0
Fig. 2.7-37 Example of the representation of the channel impulse response and the guard
interval of the received signal in the case of a DVB-T signal with pre- and post-echo.
A time window defines the interval used for performing the FFT. This window is positioned in such a way
that no intersymbol interference occurs. The above diagram illustrates this using a signal that comprises
a main signal, a pre-echo and a post-echo. The FFT window is positioned at the end of the echo signal
first received (the pre-echo in this example). The remaining time from the start of the symbol to the
beginning of the FFT window defines the guard interval.
The first automatically detected echo is always at the position where the beginning of the guard interval
is marked in the graphic on the measurement screen.
Within the guard interval, echoes can occur without causing intersymbol interference. This interval is
displayed as a horizontal bar above the diagram of the impulse response in the IMPULSE RESP
measurement. The beginning and end of the interval are marked by vertical lines. If one end of the
interval lies outside the displayed time range, this is indicated by an arrow.
ZERO POS
Two options for setting the zero position on the time/position axis are available under the ZERO POS
softkey:
 MAX LEVEL
 GUARD START
To switch between the two settings, press the softkey labelled ZERO POS.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.56
Fig. 2.7-38 The MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: IMPULSE RESPONSE: µs menu in the
OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Both screenshots show two strong
pulses; the one occurring first in time is somewhat weaker. In the screenshot on the
left, the ZERO POS: MAX LEVEL setting causes the pulse with the highest level to be
recognized as the main pulse. The ZERO POS: GUARD START setting (right-hand
screenshot) defines the first detected pulse within the guard interval as the zero
reference on the time/position axis.
In the MAX LEVEL mode, the pulse with the maximum level is interpreted as the main pulse and its
position on the time/position axis is defined as the zero point. If another echo with an attenuation of
approx. 0 dB is received, a hysteresis algorithm ensures that this echo is not immediately interpreted as
the new main pulse. The hysteresis becomes active if the new echo signal is not at least 0.5 dB stronger
than the current main pulse. The values of the main pulse are not displayed in the table.
In the GUARD START setting, the first pulse detected within the guard interval is used as a reference
and its position on the time/position axis is defined as the zero point. This mode is suitable primarily
when two pulses with virtually identical levels are received (e.g. a weak transmitter nearby and a strong
transmitter far away) but the first of the two is to be used for defining the zero point.
If the first pulse detected is also the one with the highest level, the GUARD START setting is basically
the same as the MAX LEVEL setting. The only difference is that with GUARD START the values of all
pulses are displayed in the table, including those of the main pulse.
PRE ECHO
If a pre-echo is not automatically recognized, it appears as a post-echo at the right-hand edge of the
diagram (see Fig. 2.7-39, left-hand screenshot, post-echo at 278,7 µs). The PRE ECHO softkey allows
the area before the guard interval to be manually shifted (see Fig. 2.7-39, right-hand screenshot, correct
display of pre-echo at -20 µs). Two modes are available:
 AUTO
 MANUAL: 0 % to 100 % (possible only if ZERO POS: MAX LEVEL is set)
To switch between the two settings, press the softkey labelled PRE ECHO.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.57
OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. The screenshot on the left shows a
DVB-T signal with a weak pre-echo that was not automatically detected. This echo
appears as a post-echo at the right-hand edge of the diagram. In the screenshot on
the right, the main pulse was manually shifted to the right by the setting PRE ECHO
25 %. The pre-echo is now correctly displayed in the graphic and the table. However,
the guard interval does not cover the pre-echo.
Note: Please note that the percent entry is only possible in the MAX LEVEL mode. The default
setting for PRE ECHO is AUTO.
In the AUTO mode, the display range is internally set. The guard interval starts at the extreme left of the
diagram.
In the MANUAL mode, the position of the reference pulse (t = 0 µs) can be cyclically shifted to the right.
The pulses that are shifted rightward out of the diagram are thus re-inserted from the left as pre-echoes,
whereby the pre-echo area is manually enlarged at the expense of the post-echo area.
The percent specification is referenced to the entire displayable time/position range, independent of a
selected zoom. To enter a percent value, switch to the MAX LEVEL mode by pressing the ZERO POS
key. Then enter a whole-number value via the numeric keypad and confirm with the Enter key.
Although a pre-echo is displayed now, it does not necessarily lie within the guard interval, and this may
cause intersymbol interferences.
With small percent values, the guard interval may start on the right-hand side of the diagram. In this
case, the guard interval is continued at the left-hand side of the diagram. This is indicated by arrows
pointing outward at the left- and right-hand edges of the diagram.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.58
Table display
Up to five echoes (remote control: 25 echoes) ranked according to their level values are listed in
numerical form beneath the graphic display of the channel impulse response. Only echoes above the
–40 dB line (relative to the main pulse) are taken into account. As already mentioned, in the ZERO POS:
GUARD START setting the pulse with the highest level also appears in the table. This makes sense,
because the pulse with the highest level does not automatically have to be the one at the zero position of
the time/position axis. The pulse with the highest level can therefore have a delay other than zero and
must be indicated in the table.
Note 1: The channel impulse response is calculated by means of inverse fast Fourier transform
(IFFT). This kind of transformation allows the calculated spectrum to be periodically
continued. In this case, this means that the spectrum exhibits identical values at the right
and left edge of the display range and that echoes can be displayed as post-echoes
although they are actually non-automatically detected pre-echoes. Remedy: Enter PRE
ECHO manually.
Note 2: The spectrum and channel impulse response displays do not involve two independent
display modes. On the contrary, the pilots are interpreted either as spectrum or as channel
impulse response. Both display modes are equivalent, which is also physically correct. For
example, if a distortion is caused by an echo, a spectrum can be displayed nevertheless.
The spectrum is merely a different display mode of the echo.
Note 3: To determine the channel impulse response, the positions of the scattered pilots of several
symbols are averaged. If the channel characteristics vary rapidly, this averaging may lead
to misinterpretations of the impulse response. For this reason, pilot positions are not
averaged in the case of MOBILE and STATIONARY FAST / SFN. This setting can be
checked/changed in the SPEC FUNC: SYSTEM OPTIMISATION menu item.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.59
2.7.7.5.3.2 Measurement of the Frequency Offset
Note 1: The SFN frequency offset measurement is only available with the EFA-K10 SFN
FREQUENCY OFFSET MEASUREMENT option. If this option is not installed, the SFN
FRQ OFFS softkey cannot be activated.
Note 2: The MER measurement (alarm, history, IEC/IEEE bus) is not available in the frequency
offset measurement mode.
In addition to plotting the magnitude of the channel impulse response (section 2.7.7.5.3.1), the
frequency offsets of the measured pulses can be displayed. With single-frequency networks, the
different transmitters can thus be checked for their correct transmit frequency. Frequency offsets are
referenced to the pulse located at the zero position of the time/position axis. Consequently, this pulse
always has a frequency offset of zero as a reference.
To activate this measurement, press the MEASURE key in the function key block and then the
SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN keys. By pressing the SFN FREQ OFFS softkey, you can switch between
the pure magnitude display of the impulse response (setting: OFF) and the frequency offset
measurement (setting: ON).
Fig. 2.7-40 The MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: IMPULSE RESPONSE: SFN FRQ OFFS
ON menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. A DVB-T signal
with several post-echoes is shown. The diagram in the lower part of each
screenshot displays the frequency offsets relative to the impulse response shown in
the upper diagram. The screenshot on the right in addition contains a pre-echo. The
frequency offset is numerically indicated in the last line of the table. OOR indicates
that measured values are outside the measurement range (left-hand screenshot).
In Fig. 2.7-40 the magnitude of the impulse response described in section 2.7.7.5.3.1 is displayed in the
upper part of the screenshot. The diagram is merely somewhat compressed and limited to –40 dB. The
new information is in the lower diagram, where the frequency offset values are plotted on a time/position
axis. The frequency offset values can thus be assigned at a glance to the pulse magnitudes in the upper
diagram.
If only small frequency offset values occur, automatic scaling of the frequency axis of the diagram
ensures that the values in the diagram can be clearly recognized (auto-scale function).
Compared against the pure magnitude display (SFN FRQ OFFS setting: OFF), the list of pulses
includes the line f. To attain a steadier display of the f measured values, the values are averaged with
an averaging depth of 20. The averaged values are displayed in both the table display and the diagram.
To check the averaging fill state, the current fill state of the first pulse in the list is indicated by e.g.
AVG:13/20. The first number indicates the fill state, the second the fixed averaging depth. Each pulse
has its own averaging process that is started individually for each pulse. Once a pulse has a relative
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.60
level above –40 dB, the averaging process for this pulse is started. However, the f measured value is
not displayed until there is an associated level of at least –35 dB.
The measurement range is from –5 Hz to +5 Hz. If measured values outside of this range occur, the
character string OOR (out of range, see Fig. 2.7-40) is output in the list instead of a numerical value. An
"out of range" statement is not possible for a pulse until after the first complete cycle of its pulse-specific
averaging process (i.e. after 20 cycles). An OOR measured value is graphically displayed in the diagram
as a maximum frequency offset that changes its sign with each cycle.
To calculate the frequency offset, the first detected pulse within the guard interval is first used as an
internal reference with f = 0. Its actual frequency offset is only determined later by recalculating to the
pulse at the zero position of the time/position axis. This limits the dynamic range for the subsequent
pulses. The following applies: |f first detected pre-echo (reference) - f post-echo| 5 Hz. If a magnitude value greater
than 5 Hz is obtained, OOR is displayed. If the first detected pre-echo has, for example, a f = –2 Hz,
the resulting dynamic range for the subsequent pulses is from –7 Hz to +3 Hz. The position of the first
automatically detected echo is always where the beginning of the guard interval is marked in the
graphic.
The IMPULSE RESP, PRE ECHO, ZERO POS and IMPULSE RESP ZOOM softkeys have the same
functionality as described in section 2.7.7.5.3.1.
Note 1: To determine the frequency offset, the positions of the scattered pilots of several symbols
must not be averaged. The frequency offset can therefore only be measured in the
MOBILE and STATIONARY FAST / SFN settings. This setting can be checked/changed in
the SPEC FUNC: SYSTEM OPTIMISATION menu item.
Note 2: An "out of range" statement is not possible for a pulse until after the first complete cycle of
its pulse-specific averaging process (i.e. after 20 cycles).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.61
2.7.7.5.4 HISTORY Measurement
The HISTORY measurement function is very useful for the continuous recording and graphical or
numerical replay of several parameters. The parameters that can be displayed in the measurement are
stored irrespective of the measurements currently active in the background. This means that HISTORY
is automatically started immediately after switching on the EFA-T (measurement in the background).
To display the recorded parameters start this measurement by pressing the MEASURE key in the
function key block and then the keys SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN and HISTORY. The following is
displayed, for example:
Fig. 2.7-41 MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: HISTORY menu in the OFDM
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode.
The upper half of the graphics shows the level characteristic of the input signal during the last 2 minutes.
In the left-hand picture the lower half of the graphics shows the corresponding time characteristic of the
bit error rates before the Viterbi and the Reed-Solomon decoder. The two characteristics at the bottom
display synchronization failure and data errors in the MPEG transport stream. In the right-hand picture
the lower half of the graphics gives a tabular overview of all parameters involved in the HISTORY
measurement.
In the HISTORY measurement, the picture comprises a part that is permanently displayed (upper half)
nd
and another part that can be configured by the user (lower half, 2 screen).
The upper half of the picture always displays the level characteristic of the input signal. The level
specification in the vertical direction is specified in the unit set in SETUP: LEVEL UNITS. The horizontal
axis indicates the time reference.
The graphics are updated every second. At the beginning of the measurement, the characteristics are
built up from 0 second up to longer periods of time. When the maximum time that can be displayed in
the graphics is attained, the scaling of the time axis changes to the next higher time interval, if required.
This is repeated until a preset maximum time interval is attained. From this time the oldest measured
values are rejected so that the characteristics move to the left. The time marked by 0 thus no longer
refers to the beginning of the measurement but to the beginning of the current measurement interval.
2.7.7.5.4.1INTERVAL
The maximum time interval that can be displayed can be set in the range from 1 minute to 1000 days.
Press the INTERVAL key. A list of the settable time intervals is then displayed, which can be selected
with the softkeys marked as down and up cursor keys. The entry is terminated by pressing the ENTER
softkey.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.62
Note: The INTERVAL key can be used to increase the time interval displayed. The collected data
is compressed in a larger interval upon automatic changeover. If the time elapsed since the
start of the measurement is longer than the time set in menu item INTERVAL, the data
already measured is reset and measurement is restarted.
Two other characteristics that are always displayed relate to synchronization loss ( SYNC ) or MPEG
data error (D. ERR). The indicated synchronization refers to status of FEC (forward error correction).
When the traces are directly above the reference line, synchronization is correct and the MPEG
transport stream is error-free.
2.7.7.5.4.2CONFIG 2nd SCREEN
The graphics or the table below the level characteristic can be freely selected. Press the CONFIG 2nd
SCREEN key. The softkey labelling is then replaced by a selection of graphics, which can be displayed
in the lower half of the HISTORY screen. The softkey labelling remains in this form until a selection is
made by pressing a key. The following graphics can be selected:
 BER BEFORE VIT: The bit error rate before the Viterbi decoder is displayed. The vertical axis
has logarithmic scaling. If the bit error rate is 0, this is shown by a line below the least-significant
scaling line.
 BER BEFORE RS: The bit error rate before the Reed-Solomon decoder is displayed. The
vertical axis has logarithmic scaling. If the bit error rate is 0, this is shown by a line below the
least-significant scaling line.
 BER BEFORE VIT / RS: The two bit error rates (before the Viterbi and before the Reed-
Solomon decoder) are displayed in a diagram.
 MER dB: The time characteristic of the modulation error (modulation error ratio) is displayed.
The indication is in decibel and refers to the power of one useful-signal carrier. For details refer
to section 2.7.9.2.6.
 MER %: The modulation error ratio is specified in percent after selection of this display mode.
100% corresponds to the power of one data carrier modulated with payload.
 NUMERIC VALUES: A numeric list of all parameters acquired in the HISTORY measurement is
displayed in tabular form. Based on all acquired parameters of the measurement interval that is
represented in the graphics, the current value (CURRent), the minimum/maximum value and
the respective average value are calculated and entered in the table. If the bit error rate cannot
be indicated e.g. due to synchronization loss, this is marked by an asterisk (*). In this case,
: TEMPORARY NOT MONITORED lights up below the table. If the modulation error ratio MER
cannot be determined, this is displayed in the same way.
The times, during which the bit error rates or the modulation error is not defined, are not taken
into account in the calculation of the average values (AVG). If a value cannot be specified, this
is indicated by three dashes (---). Bit error rates undergo linear averaging, level and MER
undergo square averaging (averaging power values).
All traces are output in the HISTORY measurement in such a way that each test point can be
distinguished from the position of a scaling line. The output algorithm ensures that no test point
coincides with a horizontal scaling line. If a measurement trace crosses a vertical scaling line, the
intersection is displayed in inverse video.
If one of the measured parameters is temporarily not defined, it is not graphically output for this
particular period of time. Such a temporarily undefined parameter may result in a gap in the measured
trace. The calculation and display of the BER is stopped if either the FEC is not synchronized or if the
RESET BER key was pressed in the MEASURE menu.
The modulation error ratio MER can be calculated independent of the FEC, depending on the setting of
SPEC FUNC: SYNC CONDITION (see section 2.7.5.3). The following specific features are to be taken
into account:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.63
 If clock rate or carrier recovery fails, the modulation error cannot be determined.
 The modulation error ratio MER is determined by means of I/Q data of the carriers that were
defined under START CARR or STOP CARR. If the carrier range is limited to one carrier with
no payload, the calculation of MER is not started. The carrier range can be modified in the
CONSTELL DIAGRAM and OFDM PARAMETERS measurements as well as in all
measurements of the FREQUENCY DOMAIN.
 Due to technical reasons, the MER can only be determined if one of the following
measurements is active: OFDM PARAMETERS or HISTORY. An additional calculation is
performed if one of the following hardkeys is pressed: INPUT, RF, SPEC FUNC, STATUS and
ALARM.
 The special function DISPLAY: WHEN MEASURE DISPLAY IS ACTIVATED: MER CALC IN
BACKGROUND can be used to influence whether the MER measurement is also active in the
background during the normal measurement display.
2.7.7.5.4.3FREEZE
A measurement in progress can be halted on the display by activating the FREEZE function. The
measurement continues to run in the background. Press FREEZE again to display the continued
measurement.
2.7.7.5.4.4AVERAGE, MAX; MIN, MAX&MIN
All detectors operate in parallel and in the background with the HISTORY function. The storage of
measured values is performed for each measurement by taking all detectors into account. It is thus
possible to select the desired detector afterwards without having to restart the measurement. The
detectors have the following characteristics:
AVERAGE: Averaging of the measured values that are combined to form one screen point. The power
is averaged (square averaging) for level values and MER measurement whereas averaging
is linear for BER measurements. Connecting lines are drawn for AVERAGE values.
MAX: The MAX value of the measured values is displayed, the time position of which is assigned
to a pixel column. The MAX values are connected by lines.
MIN: The MIN value of the measured values is displayed, the time position of which is assigned
to a pixel column. The MIN values are combined with lines.
MAX&MIN: The MAX and MIN value of the measured values is displayed, the time position of which is
assigned to a pixel column. Vertical lines are drawn for a MAX/MIN pair of values for the
MAX&MIN representation.
2.7.7.5.4.5Restart
Press RESTART to delete and restart the entire measurement.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.64
2.7.7.6 OFDM Parameters
In the measurement of OFDM parameters only those OFDM carriers are displayed which are in the
range selected with the START CARR and STOP CARR keys (each included). For details refer to
section 2.7.7.2.1. For calculation of the parameters all pilots (TPS, continual and scattered pilots) are
automatically removed from the data material. If only such a pilot has been selected, an error message
is output.
Using the OFDM PARAMETERS... key, the EFA-T is switched to the parameter calculation mode. For
the parameter calculation, two cases are distinguished:
 the center carrier (852 with 2K FFT and 3408 with 8K FFT) valid for the FFT mode selected by
means of the START CARR and STOP CARR keys or
 any other carrier range selected
Center carrier is selected:

In this case the calculated transmission parameters I/Q amplitude imbalance, I/Q quadrature error and
carrier suppression referred to the modulator of the DVB-T system, i.e. after the IFFT at the transmitter
end, are indicated. This is indicated by the title of the parameter block: MODULATOR:. Another
indication is in the form of the header PARAMETERS: CENTR CARR ONLY. The center carrier plays a
special role at the modulator end:
 It is influenced by the DC conditions of the signal directly before the modulator which directly affects
the measured value of carrier suppression.
 The modulator parameters I/Q amplitude imbalance and I/Q quadrature error can be determined
exclusively at this carrier in the case of 2K FFT. This parameter cannot be determined in the case of
8K FFT.
 In the case of 2K FFT the center carrier is a scattered pilot and even a continual pilot with 8K FFT. In
the case of 8K FFT a calculation of the phase jitter, SNR value and MER values are not possible
physically (the measured values would be idealized by channel estimation. These parameters are not
calculated and output in the 2K FFT mode.
 The value of carrier suppression is completed by the value of the carrier leakage value. The
reference for the angle indication is the real axis (I axis, 0°). A purely positive imaginary carrier
leakage would have a phase of +90°. The value range is ±180°.
Any other carrier range is selected:

In this case the calculated transmission parameters I/Q amplitude imbalance, I/Q quadrature error and
carrier suppression referred to the coder of the DVB-T system, i.e. before the IFFT at the transmitter
end, are indicated. This is indicated by the title of the parameter block: CODER:. Another indication is
the header PARAMETERS: CENTR CARR EXCLUDed. In this case the center carrier is excluded from
the data material taken in order to prevent corruption of measurements by the types of errors defined by
the modulator.
 The coder parameters I/Q amplitude imbalance and I/Q quadrature error are calculated for 2K FFT
and 8K FFT and output to the display since they affect all carriers in this particular case.
 The calculation of the phase jitter, SNR value and MER values is performed without any restriction.
A specified value is completely independent of all other values. Using suitable computation, a value can
be completely separated from the effects of other values. The signal to be measured should comprise a
minimum of errors (I/Q amplitude imbalance, I/Q quadrature error and carrier suppression) so that
available margins are free for unavoidable disturbances (e.g. noise).
Valuable information on the definition of parameters, calculation methods and interpretation are given in
section 2.7.9.2 (Explanation of Calculated Parameters, Formulas and Limit Values).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.65
2.7.7.7 Noise Generator (ADD NOISE)
Common to all measurement menus is that a noise generator can be connected. The noise generator in
the OFF condition is activated with the ADD. NOISE key. The desired value for the C/N ratio can now be
entered in dB. When a noise signal is added to the information signal, conclusions can be drawn on the
system characteristics. For a more detailed information refer to section 2.7.9.5.
The noise power is always derived from the noise power set in the instrument in connection with the
selected channel bandwidth (6, 7 or 8 MHz, see section 2.7.4.2).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.66
2.7.8 PRESET Values and MENU Overview
Note: When the PRESET key is actuated, the settings or numeric values printed in bold are
used.
When the RESET key (PRESET: SERVICE: RESET menu) is actuated, the parenthesized
settings and numeric values printed in bold (abc) are used in addition.
The parenthesized values not in bold give the number of the section in which the
corresponding menu is described.
INPUT (2.7.2) RECEIVER

(EFA mod. 40) IF
MPEG TS ASI (only with the option MPEG2 Decoder EFA-B4 installed)
ATTENUATION... AUTO
MANUAL (numeric entry) 10 dB
LOW NOISE
LOW DIST
HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER
10dB PREAMPLIFIER
INPUT (2.7.2) RECEIVER (Preset with the option Selection EFA-B3 installed)
(EFA mod. 43) 50 
75 
IF
DEMOD (Preset without the option Selection EFA-B3)
MPEG TS ASI (only with the option MPEG2 Decoder EFA-B4 installed)
ATTENUATION... AUTO
MANUAL (numeric entry) 10 dB
LOW NOISE
NORMAL
LOW DIST
HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER
10 dB PREAMPLIFIER
RF (2.7.3) RF (numeric entry) (no change caused by Preset/Reset)

RCL RF
STO RF... RIGHT
LEFT
GET CHAR
DEL CHAR
ENTER
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.67
STATUS SAW FILTER BW 6.0 MHz

(2.7.4) (2.7.4.1) 7.0 MHz
8.0 MHz
OFF
CHANNEL BW (2.7.4.2) 6.0 MHz
7.0 MHz
8.0 MHz
OFDM/CODE RATE AUTO
MODE (2.7.4.3) MAN
TPS
OFDM/CODE RATE FFT MODE AUTO
SETTINGS... (2.7.4.3) 2K
8K
GUARD INTERVAL AUTO
1/4
1/8
1/16
1/32
ORDER OF QAM QPSK
16
64
ALPHA (hierarchical 1 (NH)
modulation) 1
2
4
HIGH PRIO CODE RATE 1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8
LOW PRIO CODE RATE 1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8
MPEG DATA OUTPUT HIGH PRIO
(2.7.4.4) LOW PRIO
BEEPER... (2.7.4.5) LEVEL UNDER THRESHOLD ENABLED
DISABLED
OFDM SYNC LOST ENABLED
DISABLED
MPEG TS SYNC LOST ENABLED
DISABLED
MPEG DATA CORRECTION ENABLED
(VITERBI) DISABLED
(REED SOLOMON) DISABLED
MPEG DATA ERROR ENABLED
DISABLED
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.68
SPECIAL DISPLAY... R&S LOGO ON

FUNCTION (2.7.5.1) OFF
(2.7.5)
CONSTELLATION OFF
DIAGRAM ZOOM Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
MEASURE DISPLAY FULL
PARTIAL
MEASUREMENT ZOOM LEVEL
BER BEFORE VIT
BER BEFORE RS
BER AFTER RS
MER
MEASURE START/STOP CARR
CENTER/SPAN CARR
WHEN MEASURE MER CALC IN BACK-
DISPLAY IS GROUND
ACTIVATED: SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
MIN BER INTEGRATION 1
(SAMPLES) (2.7.5.2) 10
100
1000
SYNC CONDITION (2.7.5.3) FEC SYNC REQUIRED
FEC SYNC NOT REQUIRED
FREQUENCY RECOVERY HI
LOOP BANDWIDTH MED
(2.7.5.4) LO
SYSTEM OPTIMISATION MOBILE
(2.7.5.5) STATIONARY FAST / SFN
STATIONARY SLOW / HIGH NOISE
STATIONARY SLOW / LABORATORY
SER/PAR MPEG FRAME 188 BYTES
SIZE (2.7.5.6) 204 BYTES
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.69
ALARM REGISTER CLEAR... YES

(2.7.6) (2.7.6.6) NO
ALARM THRESHOLDS... LEVEL (numeric entry) 40.0 dBuV
(2.7.6.3)
MOD ERR RATIO (numeric entry) 30.0 dB
BER BEFORE VIT (numeric entry) 1.0E-03
BER BEFORE RS (numeric entry) 2.0E-04
ALARM CONFIG... (2.7.6.1) LEVEL ENABLED

DISABLED
SYNC ENABLED
DISABLED
MOD ERR RATIO ENABLED
DISABLED
BER BEFORE VIT ENABLED
DISABLED
BER BEFORE RS ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
LINE NEWEST
MAN
PRINT... (2.7.6.5) LAST LINES... Entry of number of last lines
to be printed, start with
PRINT. 5
PRINT
ABORT
LINES... Entry of range of lines to be

printed, start with PRINT.
PRINT
ABORT
ACTUAL (toggle key)

LINE NEWEST
MAN
ABORT
STATISTICS (2.7.6.4) LEVEL
SYNCHRONISATION
MOD ERR RATIO
BER BEFORE VIT
BER BEFORE RS
MPEG DATA ERROR TIME
COR CNT BEFORE VIT

COR CNT BEFORE RS
MPEG DATA ERROR CNT AFTR RS
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.70
MEASURE CONSTELL DIAGRAM... SYMBOL CNT AUTO

(2.7.7) (2.7.7.3) MAN (numeric entry) 100
HOLD
FREEZE ON / OFF
START CARR or (numeric entry)
CENTER CARR START:
0...1704 (2K mode) or
0...6816 (8K mode)
SPAN:
0...852...1704 (2K mode)
or
0...3408...6816 (8K mode)
STOP CARR or (numeric entry)
SPAN CARR STOP:
0...1704 (2K mode) or
0...6816 (8K mode).
SPAN:
1...1705 (2K mode) or
1...6817 (8K mode)
ADD:NOISE OFF
(numeric entry)
C/N=2...56.0 dB
FREQUENCY DOMAIN... MER dB
(2.7.7.4) INTERFERENCE
MER %
I/Q... SYMBOL CNT AUTO /100
HOLD
FREEZE ON / OFF
START CARR or
CENTER CARR
STOP CARR or
SPAN CARR
ADD. NOISE OFF / C/N
AMPL/PHASE
AMPL/GD
POLAR PLOT
CENTER CARR START:
0...1704 (2K mode) or
0...6816 (8K mode)
SPAN:
0...852...1704 (2K mode)
or
0...3408...6816 (8K mode)
SPAN CARR STOP:
0...1704 (2K mode) or
0...6816 (8K mode).
SPAN:
1...1705 (2K mode) or
1...6817 (8K mode)
ADD NOISE OFF / C/N 56.0 dB
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.71
SPECTRUM / SPECTRUM… AVERAGE CNT:

TIME DOMAIN... OFF
(2.7.7.5)
MAN (numeric entry)
1..50..999
PEAK HOLD
DETECTOR:
MIN RMS MAX
START FREQ
-4.48 ... +3.48 MHz
STOP FREQ
-3.48 ... +4.48 MHz
ADD NOISE:
OFF / C/N 56.0 dB
nd
HISTORY... CONFIG 2 BER
SCREEN… BEFORE
VIT
BER
BEFORE
RS
BER
BEFORE
VIT & RS
MER dB
MER %
NUMERIC
VALUES
FREEZE ON / OFF
AVERAGE
MIN,
MAX
MIN&MAX
INTERVAL.. (Selection)
1 MIN(S)
...
1000
DAY(S)
RESTART
ADD NOISE:
OFF / C/N 56.0 dB
AMPLDIST(RF)
CCDF (RF)
CCDF(ENV)
IMPULSE RESPONSE
µs km miles
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.72
IMPRESP ZOOM (numeric entry)

1..20
ADD NOISE OFF / C/N 56,0 dB
OFDM PARAMETERS... CONSTELL DIAGRAM... As for constellation
(2.7.7.6) diagram
FREQUENCY DOMAIN... As for FREQUENCY
DOMAIN
SPECTRUM / As for SPECTRUM / TIME
TIME DOMAIN... DOMAIN

CENTER CARR START:
0...1704 (2K mode) or
0...6816 (8K mode)
SPAN:
0...852...1704 (2K mode)
or
0...3408...6816 (8K mode)
SPAN CARR STOP:
0...1704 (2K mode) or
0...6816 (8K mode).
SPAN:
1...1705 (2K mode) or
1...6817 (8K mode)
RESET BER
(2.7.7.1.4)
(2.7.7.7)
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.73

REMOTE... IEC625 / IEEE488 (numeric entry) 6
RS232 BAUD RATE 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
DATA BITS 7BIT
8BIT
PARITY NO
EVEN
ODD
STOP BITS 1BIT
2BIT
HANDSHAKE NO
XON/XOFF
HARDWARE
R&S PUD COMP.
HP COMP.
FORMFEED NO
AFTER PRINTOUT
LEVEL UNITS... dBpW
dBW
dBm
(dBV) (Reset)
dBmV
V/mV
10 MHz REFerence INTernal
External
OFF
MODE NYQUIST DEMODULATOR FM SOUND

NYQUIST DEMODULATOR FM SOUND MONO
NYQUIST DEMODULATOR NICAM SOUND
OFDM ANALYZER / DEMODULATOR DVB-T
MPEG2 DECODER
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.74
PRESET PRESET YES

NO
PRESET TEST SETTINGS SAW OFF
(available only with SAW LOW DIST
servicing connector) SAW 8 MHz
SAW 7 MHz
SAW 6 MHz
ADD NOISE 0 dB
ADD NOISE OFF
ADD NOISE –4 dB
ADD NOISE –8 dB
ADD NOISE –16 dB
ADD NOISE –24 dB
ADD NOISE –3.9 dB
SAW OFF
ADD NOISE 0dB
OFDM I2C OFF
CAL DIG OSZ
SERVICE... FIRMWARE UPDATE... YES
NO
DELETE RAM... YES
NO
RESET... YES
NO
BOARD INFO...
SELFTEST...
STATE INFO...
STO 0
1
2
3
4
RCL 0
1
2
3
4
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.75
2.7.9 Examples of Application

2.7.9 Examples of Application.................................................................................................2.7.76

2.7.9.1 Application and Interpretation of Constellation Diagram ...............................................2.7.76
2.7.9.2 Explanation of Calculated Parameters, Formulas and Limit Values ..............................2.7.82
2.7.9.3 Function and Selection of Integration Time for BER Measurements .............................2.7.89
2.7.9.4 BER Measurement with External Equipment ................................................................2.7.92
2.7.9.5 BER as a function of C/N, Calculation of Further Parameters.......................................2.7.97
2.7.9.6 Assignment and Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs ............................2.7.102
2.7.9.7 Analog and Digital Cascading of Two Test Receivers EFA-T......................................2.7.104
2.7.9.8 Use of the EFA-T as Relay Receiver ...........................................................................2.7.104
2.7.9.1 Application and Interpretation of Constellation Diagram
In this section, the basic causes of specific modulation errors are described with the aid of simulated
constellation diagrams. Using simulated data is expedient especially because it allows different effects
to be demonstrated separately. The following examples were generated with the I/Q Simulation
Software IQSIM from Rohde & Schwarz. This software allows errors to be introduced into an ideal QAM
signal.
In practice, there is always a combination of various modulation errors that may be difficult to separate
and identify. To this end, the DVB-T Test Receiver EFA-T evaluates the measured constellation
diagram using mathematical and statistical methods and furnishes a quantitative representation of
results (see section 2.7.9.2).
All constellation diagrams shown are based on 64QAM modulation. The effects of the modulation errors
shown, however, apply to all other orders of QAM. Firstly, a constellation diagram is shown, representing
an ideal, undisturbed 64QAM signal:
Fig. 2.7-42 Constellation diagram of ideal 64QAM signal without pilots
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.76
2.7.9.1.1 I/Q Quadrature Error
The I/Q quadrature error (sometimes also referred to as quadrature offset) is the difference between the
phase angles of the I and Q components referred to 90°. A quadrature error is caused by an error of the
phase shifter in the I/Q modulator. The I and Q components are in this case not orthogonal to each
other after demodulation. As the Test Receiver EFA-T is fully digital, its inherent phase error can be
assumed to be zero. In the constellation diagram, a phase error shows up as a distortion in the
arrangement of the signal points. The center points of four adjacent decision fields form a rhombus
rather than a square.
Depending on the origin of the quadrature error (modulator, i.e. after the IFFT at the transmitter end; or
coder, i.e. before the IFFT at the transmitter end), the effects on the constellation diagram are
completely different (see section 2.7.7.6). The more important case of a modulator fault (i.e. after the
IFFT at the transmitter end) is examined below. This fault affects all carriers of the OFDM spectrum
except the center carrier as a noise-like process (rotation of interference vectors by the FFT at the
transmitter end) and can be verified only at the center carrier of the transmitted OFDM signal. The
phase error of the I axis is compensated by means of channel correction. The total quadrature error
affects exclusively the Q axis.
Fig. 2.7-43 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with 10° phase error (only center carrier)
without pilots
2.7.9.1.2 I/Q Amplitude Imbalance
Amplitude imbalance (I/Q amplitude imbalance) describes the different gains of the I and Q components
of a signal. Depending on the origin of amplitude imbalance (modulator, i.e. after the IFFT at the
transmitter end; or coder, i.e. before the IFFT at the transmitter end), the effects on the constellation
diagram are completely different (see section 2.7.7.6). The more important case of a modulator fault
(i.e. after the IFFT at the transmitter end) is examined below. This fault affects all carriers of the OFDM
spectrum except the center carrier as a noise-like process (rotation of interference vectors by the FFT at
the transmitter end) and can be verified only at the center carrier of the transmitted OFDM signal.
Amplitude imbalance is generated by different gains in the two signal paths of the transmitter. The
inherent error of the Test Receiver EFA-T is negligible due to the fully digital modulation. In the
constellation diagram the amplitude imbalance shows up as an expansion or compression of the Q
component since channel correction in the receiver keeps the I component at a constant level:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.77
Fig. 2.7-44 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with 20% amplitude imbalance
(only center carrier) without pilots
2.7.9.1.3 Interferer
Interferers are understood to be sinusoidal spurious signals occurring in the transmission frequency
range and superimposed on the OFDM signal at some point in the transmission path. After
demodulation, the interferers consisting of low-frequency sinusoidal spurious signals are contained in
the baseband of the OFDM carrier at the frequency of which the interference is superimposed on the
OFDM signal. In the constellation diagram, an interferer shows up in the form of a rotating pointer
superimposed on each signal status of the OFDM carrier. The example below applies on condition that
there is no other error present at the same time. The constellation diagram shows the path of the pointer
as a circle around each ideal signal status. Depending on the frequency of the interferer, the latter can
be superimposed by a useful data carrier (payload) or a pilot which is used for channel correction. The
constellation diagram can have a completely different appearance if the pilot used as reference for the
correction rotates itself. In this case the circles have a radius depending on the spacing from the pilot.
Fig. 2.7-45 Constellation diagram of a 64QAM signal with interferer C/I = 25.0 dB without pilots
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.78
2.7.9.1.4 Carrier Suppression
Carrier leakage is a special type of interference whose frequency in the RF channel equals the carrier
frequency of the center carrier in the OFDM spectrum. Carrier leakage can be superimposed on the
DVB-T signal only in the I/Q modulator. With the interference and the carrier having the same
frequency, a DC component is produced in the center carrier baseband whose distribution to the I and Q
components depends on the phase difference between the carrier leakage and the restored carrier. The
magnitude of the DC component is equal to the radius of the circle that would be obtained in the event
of a frequency offset of the interference relative to the carrier signal. Carrier leakage affects directly only
the center carrier of the OFDM signal.
2K FFT:
The center carrier is a scattered pilot. In the constellation diagram before channel estimation a carrier
leakage shows up as a shift of the signal points corresponding to the DC components of the I and Q
components. Due to channel estimation the value of the measured pilot is displayed around the center
by means of rotation and expansion or compression.
8K FFT:
The center carrier is a continual pilot. In the constellation diagram before channel estimation a carrier
leakage shows up as a shift of the pilot value corresponding to the DC components of the I and Q
components. Due to channel estimation the value of the measured pilot is displayed around the center
by means of rotation and expansion or compression. The carrier leakage can no longer be directly
determined from the constellation diagram after channel estimation (see section 2.7.9.2.3).
Fig. 2.7-46 Constellation diagram before channel correction (only center carrier) of a 64QAM
signal for 2K FFT with carrier leakage in the I component (CS = 22.3 dB) without
pilots
Note: The above display is only valid for a constellation diagram before channel correction in the
case of 2K FFT. Since the center carrier is a scattered pilot at the same time, the actual
value of the pilot is displayed on its ideal value around the zero point of the constellation
diagram by means of rotation and expansion or compression. Due to channel correction,
the whole diagram undergoes the same rotation and expansion or compression so that the
original center point of the diagram is also rotated and expanded or compressed after a
shift of the diagram by the carrier leakage and after correction by channel estimation.
Carrier leakage with only one I component results in an expansion or reduction of the
constellation of the center carrier but not in a rotation.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.79
2.7.9.1.5 Additive Gaussian Noise
Noise can disturb the digitally modulated signal during analog transmission, i.e. in the RF channel.
Additive noise normally has a constant power density and a Gaussian amplitude distribution throughout
the bandwidth of a channel. If no other error is present at the same time, the points representing the
ideal signal status are expanded to form circular 'clouds':
Fig. 2.7-47 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with additive noise (SNR = 30.0 dB)
For the interpretation of the above constellation diagram it should be noted that the same diagram may
be obtained for the following types of interference so that a distinction from the noise-produced pattern
cannot be made:
 impulsive noise,
 nonlinearities in amplifiers,
 intermodulation,
 amplitude imbalance of a modulator with analysis of a carrier other than the center carrier,
 quadrature error of a modulator with analysis of a carrier other than the center carrier,
 errors due to uncompensated echoes and linear frequency response.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.80
2.7.9.1.6 Phase Jitter
Phase jitter or phase noise in the DVB-T signal is caused by transposers in the transmission path or by
the I/Q modulator. It may also be produced in carrier recovery, a possibility that is to be excluded here.
In contrast to the quadrature error described above, phase jitter is a statistical quantity that affects the I
and Q path equally. In the constellation diagram, phase jitter shows up as a shift of the signal points
around the coordinate origin:
Fig. 2.7-48 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with phase jitter: PJRMS = 1.73°
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.81
2.7.9.2 Explanation of Calculated Parameters, Formulas and Limit Values
The constellation diagram of a demodulated DVB-T signal is an excellent tool also for a quantitative
assessment of the above-named transmission parameters, allowing fast and accurate conclusions to be
drawn as to interference in transmission. The constellation diagram as a graphical tool for the qualitative
assessment of a signal has been described in section 2.7.9.1. This section deals with some basic
algorithms that allow a quantitative assessment of the parameters named above. The calculations are
based on the constellation diagram in a modified form. The I/Q values are available as discrete values
due to digital signal processing. Additionally, it is known in this mode how frequently each I/Q value
occurred within a given measurement time (e.g. 1 s).
2.7.9.2.1 I/Q Quadrature Error
Depending on the origin of the I/Q quadrature error (modulator, i.e. after the IFFT at the transmitter end;
or coder, i.e. before the IFFT at the transmitter end), the effects on the constellation diagram are
completely different (see section 2.7.7.6).
The more important case of a modulator fault (i.e. after the IFFT at the transmitter end) is first
examined below: This fault affects all carriers of the OFDM spectrum except the center carrier) as a
noise-like process (rotation of interference vectors by the FFT at the transmitter end) and can be verified
only at the center carrier of the transmitted OFDM signal. To verify this the influence of possible carrier
leakage on the constellation is first taken into account. The whole constellation diagram is rotated
around the position of the ideal pilot such that its calculated center point coincides with the ideal center
point of the whole constellation diagram. The phase difference to the I axis is compensated by means of
channel correction and the mentioned reverse rotation. The total quadrature error thus affects entirely
the Q axis. The calculation can be performed only for 2K FFT.
Regarding the coder of the DVB-T transmitter, the conditions are more simple: all carriers of the OFDM
signal are equally disturbed. The quadrature error is calculated in this case taking into account all
selected carriers except the center carrier. The calculation can be performed both for 2K FFT and 8K
FFT.
The I/Q quadrature error can thus be determined by two-dimensional averaging for all points of a
decision field and then for all decision fields. Evaluating these center points gives the ascent of
regression lines which connect the different points, separately for I and Q. Further averaging over the
gradient of the regression lines sorted according to I and Q gives an average error angle. The I/Q
quadrature error QE is thus calculated:
180 
QE  
1 2 
.

The value can be positive or negative because the assignment of the I and Q path of the demodulator to
the associated modulator path is possible due to channel correction by pilots. The results obtained are
modified for all subsequent calculations so that the influence of the quadrature error is eliminated. In
other words, the center points are calculated that would be obtained if there were no quadrature error.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.82
2.7.9.2.2 I/Q Amplitude Imbalance
Depending on the origin of amplitude imbalance AI (modulator, i.e. after the IFFT at the transmitter end;
or coder, i.e. before the IFFT at the transmitter end), the effects on the constellation diagram are
completely different (see section 2.7.7.6).
The more important case of a modulator fault (i.e. after the IFFT at the transmitter end) is first
examined below: This fault affects all carriers of the OFDM spectrum except the center carrier) as a
noise-like process (rotation of interference vectors by the FFT at the transmitter end) and can be verified
only at the center carrier of the transmitted OFDM signal. To verify this the influence of possible carrier
leakage on the constellation is first taken into account. The whole constellation diagram is rotated
around the position of the ideal pilot such that its calculated center point coincides with the ideal center
point of the whole constellation diagram. The calculation can be performed only for 2K FFT.
Regarding the coder of the DVB-T transmitter, the conditions are more simple: all carriers of the OFDM
signal are equally disturbed. The amplitude imbalance is calculated in this case taking into account all
selected carriers except the center carrier. The calculation can be performed both for 2K FFT and 8K
FFT.
The amplitude imbalance can thus be determined by two-dimensional averaging for all points of a
decision field and then for all decision fields. By evaluating the center points thus formed separately for
the I and Q components, the distances between the points are obtained for each component. Next, the
distances between the points are averaged separately for I and Q, resulting in an average I and an
average Q distance (expressed as vI and v Q). From this the amplitude imbalance (AI) is determined:
v I 
 1

100 for v I v Q
AI 
vQ 
 .
%  v Q 
1   100 for v Q v I

 v I 
The value can be positive or negative because the assignment of the I and Q path of the demodulator to
the associated modulator path is possible due to channel correction by pilots. The results obtained are
modified for all subsequent calculations so that the influence of the amplitude imbalance and the
quadrature error is eliminated. In other words, the center points are calculated that would be obtained if
there were no amplitude imbalance and no quadrature error.
2K FFT:
To calculate the carrier suppression (CS, carrier suppression) a rotational vector is calculated in
amplitude and phase which turns the constellation diagram of the center carrier rotated around the ideal
position of the pilot back to its origin. This rotational vector can be converted to the carrier suppression
in amplitude and phase by means of complex algorithms (patent pending). From this the carrier leakage
power is PRT obtained.
8K FFT:
No conclusions can be drawn as to the carrier suppression from the constellation of the center carrier.
However, the carrier leakage can be calculated using an indirect method. To do so the constellations of
the carriers adjacent to the center carrier are analyzed. It is thus possible to obtain the carrier leakage in
amplitude and phase even for 8K FFT from the filter algorithm used for channel estimation and from the
measurable interference of the adjacent carriers (patent pending). From this the carrier leakage power
is PRT obtained.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.83
Moreover, the effective signal power PSig can easily be determined from the constellation diagram. It
depends on the order of QAM and on the alpha value with hierarchical modulation. The carrier leakage
power is always referred to the carrier power (signal power) of a single OFDM payload carrier, i.e.
excluding pilots (continual, scattered and TPS). Therefore values for carrier suppression lower by
32.3 dB (2K FFT) or 38.3 dB (8K FFT) are obtained for the same absolute carrier leakage as compared
to single-carrier methods such as QAM. The OFDM method should therefore be considered as
particularly critical as to carrier leakage. However, a strong carrier leakage with OFDM only disturbs the
center carrier range due to channel correction and the other carriers remain undisturbed. The total error
is thus limited to the disturbed carriers.
CS P 
lg RT 
10 
dB P 
 Sig 
2.7.9.2.4 S/N Ratio SNR
To determine the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) only the four innermost decision fields of the constellation
diagram are used. The 'clouds' visible in the constellation diagram will then be interpreted exclusively as
additive Gaussian noise superimposed on the DVB-T signal.
The standard deviation N can be calculated by means of statistical methods. Only the radial
components are taken into account for the mentioned decision fields in order to eliminate the influence
of possible phase jitter. The rms value of the noise power N and the SNR are obtained from the
standard deviation N as follows:
SNR EVAL PSig 

10 
lg 
N  N 2
with N k 
dB  
According to the definition of the DVB Measurement Group (ETSI TR 101290), the SNR value is a pure
baseband quantity. This means that the calculated SNR (SNREVAL ) cannot be compared directly with
the C/N value of the transmission channel. The difference between SNREVAL and C/N lies in the filtering
due to digital sampling and in the time quantization of the baseband signal For details refer to section
2.7.9.5.
As a last step, the rms value of the phase jitter is to be determined. To this end, the four outer corners of
the constellation diagram are assessed since it is there where phase jitter has the strongest effect. In a
first step the frequency distribution in each decision field is examined from the calculated center point in
tangential direction. As for the SNR calculation, the standard deviation PJ+N can be calculated, which is
affected by additive noise. In a second step the frequency distribution in this decision field is examined
from the calculated center point in radial direction. This direction is influenced only by noise and not by
phase noise. Her, too, the standard deviation N can be calculated.
According to the addition theorem of the Gaussian distribution, the following applies:
PJ  PJ2 N 2N
The rms phase jitter can thus be obtained by means of trigonometric conversion.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.84
2.7.9.2.6 Modulation Error (Error Vector)
The modulation error (MER) is not a single physical error but the combination of all impairments that
occur. The modulation error is a calculated quantity indicating the mean and maximum deviation of the
I/Q values from the ideal signal points and thus is a measure of signal quality. The modulation error can
be specified as rms or peak value. To calculate the modulation error in line with ETSI TR 101290, all
decision fields are examined one after the other:
 To obtain the peak modulation error, the maximum magnitude of the difference vector (error vector)
formed by the vectors of the ideal and the actual signal states is determined for each decision field.
From the maximum value of these results, the peak MER (modulation error ratio) is calculated using
the following formula:
MER %MAX maxError vector 

100 
% VM
where VM is the rms value of the amplitudes of all ideal signal points excluding the pilots.
 To obtain the rms modulation error, the squares of the magnitudes of all difference vectors formed
by the vectors of the ideal and the actual signal states are added up and the number of I/Q values is
counted. The rms modulation error is then calculated as follows:
The following diagram shows the vectors used for calculating the modulation error:
Actual status
Q Error vector
Ideal center point
Actual status
Ideal center point
I
Fig. 2.7-49 Positions of the vectors for determining the modulation error
(64QAM, first quadrant only)
The peak and rms modulation error can also be specified on a logarithmic scale. Conversion is
performed as:
MER dB MER% 
20 
lg   .
dB 100% 
The MER%,MAX value then becomes the MERdB,MIN .value.
The term 'modulation error ratio' and the corresponding calculation method were declared international
standard (ETSI TR 101290) by the DVB Measurement Group. Since some measurement systems
output the "error vector magnitude" (EVM) instead, a conversion table for the two quantities is given
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.85
below. The two quantities only differ in the reference used: the modulation error ratio is referred to the
rms value of the baseband signal, the error vector magnitude to the peak value.
Order MER  EVM [%] EVM  MER [%] MER  EVM [dB] EVM  MER [dB]
4 EVM = MER MER = EVM |EVM| = MER MER = |EVM|
16 (=1) EVM = MER / 1.342 MER = EVM * 1.342 |EVM| = MER + 2.56 dB MER = |EVM| - 2.56 dB
16 (=2) EVM = MER / 1. 265 MER = EVM * 1.265 |EVM| = MER + 2.04 dB MER = |EVM| - 2.04 dB
Table 2.7-8 Conversion MER, EVM
2.7.9.2.7 Other Errors
This section describes the effects of such errors on the DVB-T signal that have not been investigated
before. These are:
Impulsive noise
Impulsive noise is caused by switching and ignition processes. The pulses are very short and of widely
differing shapes. Since a very large number of I/Q values is recorded for the constellation diagram, a
very close analysis of the receive signal is possible. Especially in the display of the eye diagram (I/Q,
see section 2.7.7.4.2) such interference can be assigned to a carrier range.
Nonlinearities in amplifiers
Nonlinearities of amplifiers cause amplitude and phase distortion of modulated signals (nonlinear
distortions). In most cases, such distortions are generated in the power output stages of transmitters in
which defined precorrections are performed so that nonlinearities of the transmit output stages can be
compensated. What is particularly disturbing with such distortions is the intermodulation of the different
OFDM carriers relative to each other (in-band intermodulation) and this affects the MER or SNR
calculation as an interference which cannot be distinguished from noise. However, a deviation of the
amplitude frequency distribution from the theoretical characteristic can be determined using the
AMPLITUDE DISTRIBUTION measurement (see section 2.7.7.5.2). This deviation gives directly the
AM-AM conversion.
Intermodulation
For terrestrial transmission, different signals are often radiated via a single antenna. These signals are
passively combined in a coupler before the antenna. This produces interactive effects which may cause
intermodulation. Intermodulation on a DVB channel CN with a carrier frequency N due to 2nd-order
nonlinearity occurs for the following channel configuration, for example:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.86
Amplitude
N 
1 
2
C C C
N 2 1
0     
 
N 2 1 2 1
Intermodulation of Further intermodulation
of C and C
of C1 and C2 in channel C
N 1 2
Fig. 2.7-50 Intermodulation due to 2nd-order nonlinearities
3rd-order nonlinearity is caused by the cubic component of the amplifier characteristic. Intermodulation
on a channel CN with a carrier frequency N is obtained for the following channel configuration, for
example:
N 
4 
3
Amplitude
C C C
N 4 3
0    
  
N 4 3 3 4
Intermodulation Further Intermodulation
of C3and C 4 in channel CN of C3and C 4
Fig. 2.7-51 Intermodulation due to 3rd-order nonlinearity
Intermodulation between adjacent channels can be regarded as additive random noise. It has the effect
of superimposed noise, therefore special requirements have to be fulfilled with higher-order DVB-T
signals.
Frequency and phase errors, echoes

Possible causes:
1. Reflections (echoes, multipath reception) by buildings, mountains, atmospheric layers, in feed

cables (mismatched cable terminations);
2. Amplitude frequency response and group-delay distortion resulting from the lowpass characteristics
of feed cables and amplifiers and from amplitude and phase ripple from channel filters.
The errors described above are linear distortions and can be compensated well by the EFA-T thanks to
the integrated channel correction. The compensation features can be modified by means of special
function SYSTEM OPTIMISATION (see section 2.7.5.5).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.87
2.7.9.2.8 Limits of Computing Methods
For calculation of the parameters, there are limit values that are listed in Table 2.7-9. The limits result
from the quantization of the measured I/Q values on the one hand and from the location of the decision
fields on the other. For each limit value specified, it is assumed that the demodulation is ideal and all
other interfering quantities are zero.
Order,  AI min/max |QE|max 2K: CSmax 8K: CSmax CSmin SNRmax PJmax
4 (QPSK) -218.7% / 80.0° 4.81dB -7.4dB 

40dB 42.0dB 11.26°
900%
16, =1 -97.2% / 19.4° 6.34dB -11.5dB 
40dB 42.0dB 4.17°
+47.9%
16, =2 -48.2% / 14.4° 6.34dB 
40dB 42.0dB
+31.7%
16, =4 -23.7% / 9.5° 6.34dB 

40dB 42.0dB
+18.8%
64, =1 -18.7% / 8.2° 6.29dB -12.7dB 

40dB 42.0dB 1.85°
+15.4%
64, =2 -15.6% / 7.1° 6.29dB 

40dB 42.0dB
+13.2%
64, =4 -11.4% / 5.7° 6.29dB 
40dB 42.0dB
+10.1%
Table 2.7-9 Theoretical max. and min. values of calculated parameters for various orders of
M-QAM
MER:
For quantized I/Q values, the peak value is output in discrete form only since no averaging is performed
in the calculation. The rms modulation error can be calculated within the limit values specified in Table
2.7-10. The following limit values are obtained for quantized I/Q values:
QPSK 16-QAM 64-QAM

MER%,min 0.8 % 0.8 % 0.8 %
MER%,max 98.75 % 43.48 % 20.46 %
α= 1
MERdB,min 0.11 dB 7.23 dB 13.78 dB
MERdB,max 42 dB 42 dB 42 dB
MER%,min 0.8 % 0.8 %
MER%,max 30.49 % 17.11 %
α= 2 X
MERdB,min 10.31 dB 15.33 dB
MERdB,max 42 dB 42 dB
MER%,min 0.8 % 0.8 %
MER%,max 18.63 % 12.47 %
α= 4 X
MERdB,min 14.60 dB 18.08 dB
MERdB,max 42 dB 42 dB
Table 2.7-10 Overview of the possible maximum and minimum MERPK values as a
function of QAM order and hierarchy
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.88
2.7.9.3 Function and Selection of Integration Time for BER Measurements
For BER measurements (BER), the measurement speed and stability of display can be modified. To
illustrate this, the principle of BER measurement is briefly described below.
The Test Receiver EFA-T continuously evaluates the error correction events of the incoming DVB-T
data stream. Three bit error rates are calculated simultaneously and completely independently of each
other in the EFA-T: bit error rate before the Viterbi decoder (BER BEFORE VIT), bit error rate before the
Solomon decoder (BER BEFORE RS) and bit error rate after the Reed-Solomon decoder (BER AFTER
RS) which is identical to the bit error rate at the MPEG2 transport stream.
Bit error rate before the Viterbi decoder (BER BEFORE VIT):
The measurement is performed in line with a recommendation stipulated in ETSI TR 101290. For the
measurement of the BER before the Viterbi decoder a bit-by-bit comparison of the nominal and the
actual data is done. The nominal data stream is obtained from re-encoding the signal output of the
Viterbi decoder. Assuming that the data stream is error-free after the Viterbi decoder, the data stream
originally sent (nominal data stream) can be reconstructed, allowing the bit-by-bit comparison between
the nominal and actual data stream. If a bit deviation occurs a first counter is incremented. A second
counter is incremented for each processed bit. The first counter is read out exactly when the second
7
counter has a count of 10 (processed bits). The first measured value determined in this way is referred
to as the first sample of the BER measurement before the Viterbi decoder. Depending on the order of
modulation, the guard interval and the channel bandwidth, samples between 1.08 (QPSK, GI = ¼, 8
MHz) and 3.93 (64QAM, GI = 1/32, 8 MHz) are obtained per second. For a resolution of 0.1E-9 a time of
255 s to 926 s should elapse for 1000 samples. The method is very accurate in practice provided the
ratio between BER before the Viterbi decoder and BER before the Reed-Solomon decoder shows the
following condition:
BERbeforeVit
BERbeforeRS 100 .
All sent bits, even those ensuring error protection thanks to their redundancy, are used for the
calculation of the BER before the Viterbi decoder. This BER value indicates the error rate in the
transmission channel since the evaluated bits have not gone through any error protection.
BER before the Reed-Solomon decoder (BER BEFORE RS):

All bytes are checked for compliance by evaluation of the correction characteristics of the Reed-
Solomon decoder within a MPEG2 frame of 204 bytes (= 1632 bits) in length. If a bit difference occurs
the count of a third counter is incremented. This counter is read out after 6127 frames (fourth counter,
7
the value corresponds to 10 sent bits). The value of the third counter forms the first sample of the BER
measurement before the Reed-Solomon decoder.
Depending on the order of modulation, the guard interval and the channel bandwidth as well as the code
rate, samples between 3.436 (64QAM, GI = 1/32, CR = 7/8) and 0.540 (QPSK, GI = 1/4, 8 MHz, CR =
1/2) are obtained per second. For a resolution of 0.1E-9 a time of 291 s to 1851 s should elapse for
1000 samples. The method functions very accurately in practice provided
a) the ratio between BER before Reed-Solomon decoder and BER after Reed-Solomon decoder shows
the following condition:
BERbeforeRS
BERafterRS 100 , and
b) an erroneous byte represents exactly an erroneous bit. This condition is well fulfilled especially for
channels with Gaussian noise. However, the measured value may be too optimistic for impulsive
noise.
All bytes of the MPEG2 frame, even those 16 bytes ensuring error protection thanks to their redundancy,
are used for the calculation of the BER before the Reed-Solomon decoder.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.89
BER after Reed-Solomon decoder (BER AFTER RS):

This measured value is also derived from the correction characteristics of the Reed-Solomon decoder.
The 188 payload bytes of an MPEG2 frame are examined and checked for a set error indication flag. If
a flag is set, at least 9 bits are erroneous in the available MPEG2 frame (up to 8 erroneous bytes can be
corrected by the Reed-Solomon decoder in DVB-T). When such a flag appears, a fifth counter is
incremented. The sixth counter counts the processed MPEG2 frames. When the sixth counter reaches
a value of 5984 frames,
Bytes bits
5984 Frames 188 8 9 10 6 bit
Frames bytes
have been processed. An error indication flag stands for 9 erroneous bits, i.e. the BER is 1E-6 in this
case. The count of the fifth counter forms the first sample of the BER measurement after the Reed-
Solomon decoder.
Depending on the order of modulation, the guard interval and the channel bandwidth as well as the code
rate, samples between 3,52 (64QAM, GI = 1/32, CR = 7/8) and 0,553 (QPSK, GI = 1/4, 8 MHz, CR =
1/2) are obtained per second. For a resolution of 0.1E-9 a time of between 2842 s and 18070 s should
elapse for 10 000 samples. The method is accurate provided 9 erroneous bits stand for a set error
indication flag. In practice bit error components higher than 9 errors/frame may occur. In this case the
value indicated is too optimistic. The value 5.98E-3 is attained as upper limit. However, vision
transmission is strongly disturbed with values of around 1E-7 so that the measured values has a good
accuracy for the range relevant for practice (BER < 1E-6).
Processing of individual samples for BER values and selection of integration time
The three BER measurements have the further processing (integration) of samples is common to the
three measurements. A dynamic ring memory with up to 1000 cells is available for each measurement.
Depending on the BER rate, the test depth has to be adjusted. This is done by using only the value
stored last for calculating the BER or by carrying out an integration over the last 10, 100, 1000, 10K,
100K, 1M, 10M, 100M or 1G measured values. In BER calculation, the unit automatically switches to a
longer integration time if this is expedient or necessary (see at the end of this section Running BER
calculation). The unit switches back automatically to a shorter integration time if this is desired by the
user.
The user can define a minimum number of BER samples to be taken in a measurement.
If 1000 samples are selected, for example, the test receiver operates exclusively in the 1000-sample or
higher mode. This also means that sufficient time must be allowed for a measurement to obtain a useful
result, e.g. upon switch-on. On the other hand, a very stable indication is obtained with this mode, which
is suitable especially for stationary applications where the operating conditions for the test receiver
remain the same.
If a minimum integration time of 1 sample is selected, the receiver switches the measurement time to 1
sample when a high BER (>3E-6, BER AFTER RS: >3E-5) is measured. In calibration, for example, this
allows a change of the BER value to be detected immediately. However, the indication is relatively
instable due to the short measurement time. In practice, a minimum integration time of 10 samples has
proven expedient for normal applications.
In addition to the indication of the BER value, information on the status of integration is useful especially
with a high number of samples. Two figures are therefore specified together with the BER value: the first
one indicates the number of samples actually used for the displayed BER value. The second one
indicates the number of samples to be currently achieved (counter final value). The letters K, M and G
3 6 9
stand for a multiplication by 10 , 10 and 10 , the digits following K, M and G being decimal places
3
(example: BER BEFORE RS = 7.2E-10 (1K44/10K) means: 1K44 = 1.44x10 = 1440 samples of 10K =
3 9
10x10 = 10 000 samples have been processed). The memory has a limit of 1 000 000 000 = 1x10
samples. This value means in practice a limitation of recording to a period of time of approximately 12
years. After this period the BER samples recorded first (they are 12 years old) are overwritten by the
current measured values.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.90
If the counter final value is attained, a switchover is made to running BER calculation: the last 10, 100,
1000, 10K, 100K, 1M, 10M, 100M or 1 samples (depending on the final value required) are combined to
one measured value so that a new set of values is obtained for each new sample. The great advantage
of this method is that the indicated BER is always the latest value, i.e. the measured value is
continuously updated. On the other hand, the system is flexible enough to immediately reduce the
number of integrated samples for a sudden deterioration of the input signal quality (e.g. when a noise
generator is connected).
The running BER calculation can best be explained with the aid of an example using 10 as the last
count. The other counts can be deducted therefrom:
Start of BER measurement
Individual samples
n n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4 n+5 n+6 n+7 n+8 n+9 n+10 n+11 n+12 n+13 n+14 n+15 ...
st
1 measured
value nd
2 measured
value rd
3 measured
value th
4 measured
value th
5 measured
value th
6 measured
value th
7 measured
value th
8 measured
value th
9 measured
value
10th measured
value
11th measured
value
12th measured
value
14th measured
value
14th measured
value
15th measured
value
16th measured
value
Fig. 2.7-52 Recording the BER: running BER calculation over 10 samples
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.91
2.7.9.4 BER Measurement with External Equipment
The EFA-T has an internal BER measurement function which does not require any interruption of the
program since the error control mechanisms of the DVB-T signal are used for calculating the BER (see
section 2.7.9.3). This method has its limitations however when very high bit error rates are involved
(>10-3 for the BER before Reed-Solomon, >10-6 for the BER after Reed-Solomon, see also section
2.7.9.3). For measuring the BER (or for checking the internal BER measurement function), the following
setup can be used:
2.7.9.4.1 BER Measurement Before or After the Reed-Solomon Decoder
Noise DEVICE
generator UNDER
OFDM Modulator EFA-T
TEST
SFQ
(fading / noise)
X61 IN X31
TS PARALLEL TS PARALLEL
RF OUT
AUX
Spectrum
Analyzer
FSE
MPEG DATA
Fig. 2.7-53 Setup for external BER measurement before or after the Reed-Solomon decoder
SFQ EFA
Coder: STATUS:
MODE: NULL PRBS PACKET OFDM/CODE RATE MODE: TPS
SPECIAL: Reed Solomon = OFF (BER before CHANNEL BW: like SFQ
Reed-Solomon decoder)
SAW FILTER BW: depending on application
SPECIAL: Reed Solomon = ON (BER after Reed-
Solomon decoder)
RF/INPUT: like SFQ
PRESET: PRBS SEQUENCE = 2^23 – 1
SPECIAL FUNCTION:
SPECIAL: BER MEASUREMENT = ON SYSTEM OPTIMISATION: depending on
application
BER INPUT = PARALLEL
MODE = NULL PRBS PACKET
INPUT:
BER PRBS SEQUENCE = 2^23 – 1
ATTENUATION: depending on application
Feeding: X61 (TS PARALLEL AUX)

Data decoupling: X31 (TS parallel)
Table 2.7-11 Test setup for external BER measurement before or after Reed-Solomon
decoder at the parallel MPEG2 output
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.92
Mode of operation: Modulator SFQ provides a DVB-T signal which contains complete MPEG2 frames.
These frames are filled with an internally generated PRBS signal (pseudo random bit sequence) with the
exception of the headers. The DVB-T signal can still be disturbed by noise and/or fading and is taken to
a coupler via an attenuator. The resulting signal can be displayed on a spectrum analyzer (e.g. FSE) for
determining the C/N value (see section 2.7.9.4.3). The signal is then taken to the EFA-T where it is
demodulated. Of course the noise generator integrated in the EFA-T and the noise generator in FSQ
can be used.
The received signal is synchronized in terms of carrier and sampling clock. The signal passes through
the complete error protection (SFQ: CODER: SPECIAL: REED SOLOMON DECODER: ON). Here the
16 error protection bytes at the transmitted end are added, the Reed-Solomon decoder of the EFA-T
can thus continue normal operation and outputs the data to its MPEG2 output after error correction by
the Reed-Solomon decoder (BER after Reed-Solomon decoder).
In the SFQ: CODER: SPECIAL: REED SOLOMON DECODER: OFF setting the 16 error protection
bytes are filled with PRBS data at the transmitted end, the Reed-Solomon decoder of the EFA-T cannot
perform correction and outputs the data to its MPEG2 output without error correction by the Reed-
Solomon decoder (BER before Reed-Solomon decoder).
The external BER measurement unit recognizes the data sequence and synchronizes to it. The BER is
determined by bit-by-bit nominal/actual-value comparison.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.93
2.7.9.4.2 BER Measurement Before the Viterbi Decoder
Noise DEVICE
generator UNDER
OFDM Modulator EFA-T
TEST
SFQ
(fading / noise)
X8 X7 IN X6 X5
OUT
Spectrum
Analyzer
FSE
SERIAL CLOCK
SERIAL DATA
Fig. 2.7-54 Setup for external BER measurement before the Viterbi decoder
Note 1: It is recommended to use a double-screened coaxial cable for the clock and data lines
(Serial Clock and Serial Data) to minimize the emissions radiated by the cable to the
environment.
Note 2: The input connectors of the SFQ (Serial Clock and Serial Data) have an impedance of
75 . If other units than the SFQ are to be used, the line should be terminated into 75 .
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.94
SFQ EFA
Coder: STATUS:
MODE: PRBS AFTER CONV. OFDM/CODE RATE MODE: TPS
CHANNEL BW: like SFQ
PRESET: PRBS SEQUENCE = 2^23 – 1 SAW FILTER BW: depending on application
SPECIAL: BER MEASUREMENT = ON RF/INPUT: like SFQ

BER INPUT = SERIAL
CLOCK = NORMAL SPECIAL FUNCTION:
DATA = NORMAL SYSTEM OPTIMISATION:
ENABLE: ALWAYS depending on application
BER PRBS SEQUENCE = 2^23 – 1
INPUT:
Feeding: Data: X8, Clock: X7 ATTENUATION: depending on application
Data decoupling: EFA-T: DATA X5 and CLOCK

X6
Activate MEASURE or any other menu (the serial

output is not active with all other measurements)
Table 2.7-12 Test setup for external BER measurement before the Viterbi decoder at the serial
data output (X5/X6)
Mode of operation: Modulator SFQ provides a DVB-T signal which contains PRBS data (pseudo random
bit sequence) instead of payload. This data is inserted directly after the Viterbi decoder. The data
contains no MPEG2 frame structure. Only the TPS data and the pilots are used. The DVB-T signal can
still be disturbed by noise and/or fading and is taken to a coupler via an attenuator. The resulting signal
can be displayed on a spectrum analyzer (e.g. FSE) for determining the C/N value (see section
2.7.9.4.3). The signal is then taken to the EFA-T where it is demodulated. Of course the noise generator
integrated in the EFA-T and the noise generator in SFQ can be used.
The received signal is synchronized in terms of carrier and sampling clock. The serial data is taken from
connectors SERIAL CLOCK and SERIAL DATA (valid with rising clock edge) on the rear of the EFA-T.
The data is taken after the demapping and bit/frequency deinterleaver block (i.e. directly before the
Viterbi decoder), has not undergone any error correction and is therefore available in its original form
(BER BEFORE VITerbi decoder). The external BER measurement unit recognizes the data sequence
and synchronizes to it. The BER is determined by bit-by-bit nominal/actual-value comparison.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.95
2.7.9.4.3 Measurement and Calculation of the C/N Ratio using a Spectrum

Analyzer
The DVB signal can be deteriorated by adding noise, thus increasing the BER. The increased BER can
well be discerned from the constellation diagram. The decisive criterion for the BER is the C/N ratio of a
signal. The C/N ratio can be measured with the aid of a suitable spectrum analyzer (e.g. FSE from
Rohde & Schwarz). For this the following steps are to be carried out:
 Select a high resolution bandwidth (e.g. 300 kHz) and a low video bandwidth on the analyzer so that
the signals are displayed in the form of smooth horizontal lines and not as noise bars.
 Switch noise generator off and measure the signal of the DVB-T modulator on the analyzer. Set the
marker to the same frequency as the DVB-T carrier and select the NOISE marker mode. The value
C' is indicated on the analyzer in dBm/Hz with the filter bandwidth and the characteristics of the log
amplifier of the analyzer being automatically taken into account.
 Switch the signal of the DVB-T modulator off, switch noise generator on and measure the noise
power density on the analyzer. Set the marker again to the same frequency as the DVB-T carrier
and select the NOISE marker mode. The value N' is indicated on the analyzer.
The C/N ratio is thus obtained as:

C N C' N' C' N'
  
dB dB dBm Hz dBm Hz
The noise level and thus the BER can be changed by altering the attenuator setting. The relationship
between the BER and the signal-to-noise ratio C/N will be examined in section 2.7.9.5.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.96
2.7.9.5 BER as a function of C/N, Calculation of Further Parameters
2.7.9.5.1 C/N Required for Error-free Reception
Two independent noise processes with the same parameters are superimposed on the I and the Q
component of the DVB-T signal. In mathematical terms, the superposition of two independent noise
processes results in a two-dimensional Gaussian distribution of the amplitude:
f(X 1 ,X 2 )
X2
X1
Fig. 2.7-55 Two-dimensional Gaussian distribution
The two-dimensional Gaussian distribution is rotationally symmetric as the two noise processes have
identical parameters. The resulting representation has a conspicuous shape, so that the characteristic
has become known as ”bell-shaped curve”. The characteristic of rotational symmetry enables
determination of the parameters of the noise superimposed on the DVB-T signal independent of the
direction. If in addition to the I/Q position of a measured value the frequency of occurrence is determined
in the constellation diagram, a bell-shaped curve will be obtained for the frequency-distribution function
of each decision field. This curve will be visible only as a "cloud" in the diagram.
If a DVB-T signal is disturbed by additive Gaussian noise, error-free demodulation is not possible. The
error frequency is indicated by the bit error rate. If only noise is superimposed on an ideal DVB-T signal,
Table 2.7-11 to Table 2.7-13 show the theoretical relationship between the C/N ratio and the bit error
rate for quasi-error-free reception (QEF). Any additional errors such as quadrature error cause a shifting
(increase) of the displayed C/N values for QEF corresponding to the magnitude of the error or a higher
bit error rate for a given C/N. The tables are taken from the ETS 300 744. The profiles for the Ricean
and Rayleigh channels are given in DVB-T standard ETS 300 744.
Annex A (normative): Simulated system performance

Tables A.1, A.2 and A.3 give simulated performance anticipating 'perfect channel
estimation and without phase noise' of channel coding and modulation combinations, and
are subject to confirmation by testing. These results are given for the Gaussian channel,
Ricean channel (F 1) and Rayleigh channel (P1). F 1 and P1 are described in annex B.
Associated useful bit rates available are also indicated as a function of the guard interval to
active symbol duration for the four different values of guard interval.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.97
Table A.1: Required C/N for non-hierarchical transmission to achieve a BER = 2 x 10-4 after the
Viterbi decoder for all combinations of coding rates and modulation types. The net
bit rates after the Reed-Solomon decoder are also listed
Required C/N for

BER = 2 x 10-4 after Viterbi Net bit rate (Mbit/s)
QEF after Reed-Solomon
Modu- Code Gaussian Ricean Rayleigh
lation rate channel channel channel 
U = 1/4 
U = 1/8 
U = 1/16 
U = 1/32
(F1) (P1 )
QPSK 1/2 3.1 3.6 5.4 4.98 5.53 5.85 6.03

QPSK 2/3 4.9 5.7 8.4 6.64 7.37 7.81 8.04
QPSK 3/4 5.9 6.8 10.7 7.46 8.29 8.78 9.05
QPSK 5/6 6.9 8.0 13.1 8.29 9.22 9.76 10.05
QPSK 7/8 7.7 8.7 16.3 8.71 9.68 10.25 10.56
16-QAM 1/2 8.8 9.6 11.2 9.95 11.06 11.71 12.06
16-QAM 2/3 11.1 11.6 14.2 13.27 14.75 15.61 16.09
16-QAM 3/4 12.5 13.0 16.7 14.93 16.59 17.56 18.10
16-QAM 5/6 13.5 14.4 19.3 16.59 18.43 19.52 20.11
16-QAM 7/8 13.9 15.0 22.8 17.42 19.35 20.49 21.11
64-QAM 1/2 14.4 14.7 16.0 14.93 16.59 17.56 18.10
64-QAM 2/3 16.5 17.1 19.3 19.91 22.12 23.42 24.13
64-QAM 3/4 18.0 18.6 21.7 22.39 24.88 26.35 27.14
64-QAM 5/6 19.3 20.0 25.3 24.88 27.65 29.27 30.16
64-QAM 7/8 20.1 21.0 27.9 26.13 29.03 30.74 31.67
NOTE: Figures in italics are approximate values.
Quasi Error Free (QEF) means less than one uncorrected error event per hour,
corresponding to BER = 10-11 at the input of the MPEG2 demultiplexer.
Table 2.7-13 Required C/N and net bit rate for non-hierarchical modulation to achieve a
BER=2.0E-4 before the Reed-Solomon decoder for a 8 MHz DVB-T channel
(source: ETS 300 744)
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.98
Table A.2: Required C/N for hierarchical transmission to achieve a BER = 2 x 10-4
after Viterbi decoder
Required C/N for

lation Rate  Channel Channel Channel 
U = 1/4 
U = 1/8 
U =.1/32 
U = 1/16
(F1 ) (P1)
1/2 4.8 5.4 6.9 4.98 5.53 5.85 6.03

QPSK 2/3 7.1 7.7 9.8 6.64 7.37 7.81 8.04
3/4 8.4 9.0 11.8 7.46 8.29 8.78 9.05
in 2 +
1/2 13.0 13.3 14.9 4.98 5.53 5.85 6.03
non- 2/3 15.1 15.3 17.9 6.64 7.37 7.81 8.04
uniform 3/4 16.3 16.9 20.0 7.46 8.29 8.78 9.05
16-QAM 5/6 16.9 17.8 22.4 8.29 9.22 9.76 10.05
 7/8 17.9 18.7 24.1 8.71 9.68 10.25 10.56
1/2 3.8 4.4 6.0 4.98 5.53 5.85 6.03
QPSK 2/3 5.9 6.6 8.6 6.64 7.37 7.81 8.04
3/4 7.1 7.9 10.7 7.46 8.29 8.78 9.05
in 4 +
1/2 17.3 17.8 19.6 4.98 5.53 5.85 6.03
non- 2/3 19.1 19.6 22.3 6.64 7.37 7.81 8.04
uniform 3/4 20.1 20.8 24.2 7.46 8.29 8.78 9.05
16-QAM 5/6 21.1 22.0 26.0 8.29 9.22 9.76 10.05
 7/8 21.9 22.8 28.5 8.71 9.68 10.25 10.56
Table 2.7-14 Required C/N and net bit rate for hierarchical modulation (QPSK in 16QAM) to
achieve a BER = 2.0E-4 before the Reed-Solomon decoder for a 8 MHz DVB-T
channel (source: ETS 300 744)
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.99
Table A.3: Required C/N for hierarchical transmission to achieve a BER = 2 x 10-4
after Viterbi decoder
Required C/N for
lation Rate  Channel Channel Channel 
U = 1/4 
U = 1/8 
U = 1/16 
U = 1/32
(F 1) (P1)
1/2 8.9 9.5 11.4 4.98 5.53 5.85 6.03

QPSK 2/3 12.1 12.7 14.8 6.64 7.37 7.81 8.04
3/4 13.7 14.3 17.5 7.46 8.29 8.78 9.05
in 1 +
1/2 14.6 14.9 16.4 9.95 11.06 11.71 12.06
uniform 2/3 16.9 17.6 19.4 13.27 14.75 15.61 16.09
64-QAM 3/4 18.6 19.1 22.2 14.93 16.59 17.56 18.10
 5/6 20.1 20.8 25.8 16.59 18.43 19.52 20.11
7/8 21.1 22.2 27.6 17.42 19.35 20.49 21.11
1/2 6.5 7.1 8.7 4.98 5.53 5.85 6.03
QPSK 2/3 9.0 9.9 11.7 6.64 7.37 7.81 8.04
3/4 10.8 11.5 14.5 7.46 8.29 8.78 9.05
in 2 +
1/2 16.3 16.7 18.2 9.95 11.06 11.71 12.06
non- 2/3 18.9 19.5 21.7 13.27 14.75 15.61 16.09
uniform 3/4 21.0 21.6 24.5 14.93 16.59 17.56 18.10
64-QAM 5/6 21.9 22.7 27.3 16.59 18.43 19.52 20.11
 7/8 22.9 23.8 29.6 17.42 19.35 20.49 21.11
Results for QPSK in non-uniform 64-QAM with = 4 are not included due to the poor
performance of the 64-QAM signal.
Table 2.7-15 Required C/N and net bit rate for hierarchical modulation (QPSK in 64QAM) to
achieve a BER=2.0E-4 before the Reed-Solomon decoder of a 8 MHz DVB-T
channel (source: ETS 300 744)
It should be noted that the C/N ratio shown in Table 2.7-13 to Table 2.7-15 was measured after the
Viterbi decoder so that a residual error of 1E-11 (quasi error free, QEF) is obtained at the output of the
MPEG2 transport stream.
The C/N values indicated in the tables are referred to a noise bandwidth corresponding to the actually
carriers used in DVB-T (i.e. 7.61 MHz with a 8 MHz channel bandwidth). These indications are in line
with the method for the determination of C/N described in section 2.7.9.4.3.
The C/N ratio of the internal noise generator is referred to the bandwidth of the receive channel (i.e.
8 MHz if the 8 MHz SAW filter is selected). For an exact value, the C/N ratio of the internal noise
generator is to be set to a value lower by 0.22 dB (8, 7 and 6 MHz channel) than the required C/N value
referred to the used DVB-T channel. On the other hand, the method described is appropriate for
practical purposes, where the C/N value is to be determined for a real channel.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.100
D=1 /32
D=1/16
D=1 /8
31.67 30.74 net b it rat e (Mbit/s) in an 8 MHz chann el
Rice Ra yle ig h
30.16 29.27 29.03 p rofile p ro file
D=1/4
27.14 27.65
26.35 26.13 64QAM 7/8
24.88 24.88 6 4QAM 5 /6
24.13
23.42
22.39
22.12 64QAM 3/4
21.11
20.49 19.91 6 4QAM 2/ 3
20.11 19.35
19.52
18.43 17.42 16 QAM 7/8
18.10
17.56 16.59 16.59
1 6QAM 5/ 6
16.09 14.93 64QAM 1/2
15.61 14.75
16 QAM 3/4
13.27
16QAM 2/3
12.06
11.71
11.06
10.56 10.25 9.95 16 QAM 1/ 2
10.05 9.68
9.76 8.71 4QAM 7 /8
9.05 9.22
8.78 8.29 4 QAM 5/ 6
8.04 8.29
7.81 7.46 4 QAM 3/4
7.37
6.03 6.64 4QA M 2/3
5.85
5.53
4.98 4QAM 1 /2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 C/ N (dB)
req uired C/ N fo r qu asi error-free DV B-T re ception (a ssu ming a
perfect rece iver)
Fig. 2.7-56 C/N and net bit rate as a function of constellation, code rate, guard interval and
channel profile for all DVB-T modes
Calculation of other parameters
If the BER (e.g. 2.0E-4 for QEF, quasi error-free) has been determined for a given C/N value, this rate
can be used for indicating various parameters defined by the DVB Measurement Group (ETSI TR
101290). This standardization of terms allows a direct comparison of different measurement systems
and is thus of international relevance. The two most important parameters will be described in brief. A
precondition for this is the determination of a C/N scenario that causes a BER of 2.0E4 (e.g. with the aid
of the internal noise generator).
Equivalent noise degradation (END):
The equivalent noise degradation is a measure for the 'insertion loss' of the whole system from the
modulator via the transmission link to the demodulator. The equivalent noise degradation indicates the
deviation of the real from the ideal C/N ratio in dB for a BER of 2.0E-4. In practice, values of approx. 1
dB are obtained. The above correction by 0.22 dB is to be taken into account when an internal noise
generator is used.
NOISE MARGIN:
The noise margin is understood to be the difference between the C/N resulting in a BER of 2.0E-4
(determination of the internal noise generator) and the C/N value of the transmission system (actual
C/N, determination, for example, from the OFDM parameters: C/N SNR, without additional noise).
When measuring the C/N ratio on the cable, the channel bandwidth of the DVB-T signal is to be used as
the noise bandwidth.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.101
2.7.9.6 Assignment and Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs
The Test Receiver EFA-T has three different interfaces for the output of transmitted data: a parallel
MPEG2 interface, a serial MPEG2 interface and a serial data interface. The latter is described in section
2.7.9.4 and is not suitable for the output of transmitted MPEG2 data. In this section, the two other
interfaces are described. They were internationally standardized by the "DVB-TM Ad Hoc Group
Physical Interfaces". For both interfaces it can be selected in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: SER/PAR
MPEG FRAME SIZE menu if the 16 error protection bytes are to be transmitted in addition to the 188
data bytes of the MPEG2 frame (yielding a total of 204 bytes).
The parallel MPEG2 interface (transport-stream-synchronous parallel interface TS-SPI(X31) operates

according to the LVDS (LVDS = low voltage differential signalling) standard, which provides symmetrical
data. The key characteristics are:
Source impedance: 100 ,

DC component: +1.25 V
Signal amplitude: 247 to 454 mV
Length of transmission link (cable): approx. 5 m
The parallel interface has the following assignment (front view):
13 2 1
X31 Parallel MPEG Data

25 14
Fig. 2.7-57 Assignment of parallel MPEG data interface (X31)
Non-inverting output Inverting output

Name (pin No.) (pin No.)
CLOCK 1 14
GND 2 15
DATA 7 3 16
DATA 6 4 17
DATA 5 5 18
DATA 4 6 19
DATA 3 7 20
DATA 2 8 21
DATA 1 9 22
DATA 0 10 23
DATA VALID 11 24
PSYNC 12 25
GND 13 -
Table 2.7-16 Assignment of parallel MPEG data interface
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.102
transmission of 188 information bytes transmission of 16 error correction bytes + gap (max 20us)
SY 1 2 3 4 5 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 SY 1 2 3 4 DATA(0...7)
CLOCK
PSYNC
DATA VALID
SY: sync-byte
Fig. 2.7-58 Signals at parallel interface in 188-byte mode (SPECIAL FUNCTION: SER/PAR MPEG
FRAME SIZE)
transmission of 188 information bytes transmission of 16 error correction bytes + gap (max 20us)
SY 1 2 3 4 5 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 SY 1 2 3 4 DATA(0...7)
CLOCK
PSYNC
DATA VALID
SY: sync-byte
Fig. 2.7-59 Signals at parallel interface in 204-byte mode

(SPECIAL FUNCTION: SER/PAR MPEG FRAME SIZE)
The serial MPEG2 interface (X7) uses asynchronous data transmission (transport-
stream-asynchronous serial interface, TS-ASI). Asynchronous means that the data transmission rate is
fixed, irrespective of the data rate of the transmitted MPEG2 signal. To this end, special padding bytes
are inserted where no valid information is present. With the serial MPEG2 interface, very long
transmission links (several hundred meters) can be realized. The switch SER/PAR MPEG FRAME
SIZE: 188/204 bytes has the same function as the parallel interface: in the 204-byte mode, the error
protection bytes are transmitted, and in the 188-byte mode the 188th byte is transmitted instead. The
key characteristics are:
Transmission rate (fixed): 270 MBit/s

Source impedance: 75 , unbalanced (BNC)
DC component: 0V
Signal amplitude: 0.8 0.08 V into 75 
Length of transmission link: depending on cable type; cable attenuation must not exceed 12 dB at
70 MHz over the used length.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.103
2.7.9.7 Analog and Digital Cascading of Two Test Receivers EFA-T
Two Test Receivers EFA-T can be coupled via the analog and digital interfaces of the unit. Thus,
separate programs can be decoded by each cascaded unit . It is also possible to use two test receivers
for the simultaneous generation of a constellation diagram and MPEG2 decoding. For this, the following
setup can be used:
Connection
EFA-T 1 EFA-T 2
RF
Fig. 2.7-60 Cascading of two Test Receivers EFA-T
The two units can be connected in the following ways:
Application EFA-T 1 Connection Application EFA-T 2
MPEG2 data or constellation X11 (IF 50 )  X10 (IF 50 ) MPEG2 data or constellation diagram
diagram or other measurement or other measurement
MPEG2 decoding (program A) X7 (SER MPEG DATA OUT)  MPEG2 decoding (program B)
X8 (SER MPEG DATA IN)
Table 2.7-17 Cascading of two Test Receivers EFA-T
2.7.9.8 Use of the EFA-T as Relay Receiver
If EFA-Q is used for feeding TV programs, the PRESET settings should be modified as follows in order
to achieve optimum reliability:
Menu Function Meaning
INPUT: ATTENUATION MAN With small fluctuations of the input level, it is possible that the
EFA-T automatically changes the attenuation value, which
would result in a short interruption of the program to avoid an
unnecessary entry in the alarm register.
ALARM: FAILURE THRESH BER..., LEVEL Setting of alarm thresholds to required values
Table 2.7-18 Settings on the EFA-T for relay receiver operation
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.104
2.7.9.9 Definition and Application of the CCDF and Amplitude Distribution

Measurement Functions
To minimize the contribution to the overall signal degradation on the path to the receiver, amplification of
the transmitted RF signals should be as unaltered as possible. However, it is necessary to limit the
power of the transmitted signal (clipping) to avoid unnecessarily reducing the lifetime of transistor
transmitter output stages. For this reason, particular attention is given to the CCDF measurement as
well as to the related crest factor û/urms in the development and operation of high-power transmitters.
2.7.9.9.1 Definitions of CCDF
In practice, two different definitions of the CCDF function are used, which yield different results.
Osc Osc
LO LO
IF Envelope
RF IF Filter RF IF Resolution Detector CCDF
ADC CCDF BW
(SAW) Video BW
Mixer Mixer
Fig. 2.7-61 Signal path for determining CCDF(RF) with the Test Receiver EFA (left) and with a
spectrum analyzer or CCDF(ENV) with the Test Receiver EFA (right), simplified
representation
2.7.9.9.1.1Definition 1: Sampling of the RF/IF Signal
In the Test Receiver EFA, the modulated signal is mixed to a suitable intermediate frequency, where it is
digitized (Fig. 2.7-61 left). The digital samples are used directly to evaluate and display the CCDF(RF).
For an ideal continuous wave signal (CW signal), the crest factor is therefore 3.0 dB. IF filtering is
carried out by means of a SAW filter adapted to the signal bandwidth; video filtering of the signal is not
carried out. This means that the signal itself is not changed.
2.7.9.9.1.2Definition 2: Sampling the Envelope
The central element of a spectrum analyzer is the envelope detector. This is where a level is assigned to
a modulated signal by means of suitable temporal filtering (Fig. 2.7-61 right). The high-frequency
modulation component is removed from the signal, and only the envelope signal is used. In the case of
a pure CW signal, the measured values always have the same amplitude. The measured values are
used directly to evaluate and display the CCDF. For a CW signal, the crest factor is therefore 0.0 dB.
With IF and video filtering, it must be ensured that the resolution bandwidth (RBW) and the video
bandwidth (VBW) do not alter the signal:
BW Resolution > BW Signal , BW Video 3BW Resolution .
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.105
2.7.9.9.2 Comparison of Carrier Signal and Baseband Signal Measurement
For CCDF(RF), the Test Receiver EFA analyzes the signal as it is fed to the RF connector (carrier signal
measurement, see section 2.7.9.9.1). In particular, a pure CW signal has a crest factor of 3.0 dB in
accordance with its definition. By contrast, the CCDF(ENV) measurement in the Test Receiver EFA with
a spectrum analyzer analyzes the signal as it is in the baseband (baseband signal measurement, see
section 2.7.9.9.1. In the case of a CW signal, this results in a DC voltage and therefore in a crest factor
of (ideally) 0.0 dB. Investigations have shown that even with signals of any type the crest factors of the
two methods differ by 3.0 dB. In general, however, conversion cannot be carried out between the two
traces by simply taking the 3 dB difference into consideration. Fig. 2.7-62 shows the time characteristic
of a modulated signal. In addition, the example shows the data from which the CCDF measurement is
calculated using the Spectrum Analyzer FSP and the Test Receiver EFA.
Fig. 2.7-62 Time characteristic of a modulated signal. The graph shows the original waveform,
the samples that are used by the Test Receiver EFA in the CCDF(RF) measurement,
and the envelope of the signal that is used by the Spectrum Analyzer FSP and the
Test Receiver EFA during CCDF(ENV).
Fig. 2.7-63 Comparison of the two measurements CCDF(RF) (left) and CCDF(ENV) (right) of an
ideal DVB-T signal with the Test Receiver EFA.
The crest factor in the CCDF(ENV) measurement is 3 dB lower than in the CCDF(RF)
measurement.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.106
Fig. 2.7-64 Measuring the CCDF with the Spectrum Analyzer FSP; same signal as in Fig. 2.7-63.
The crest factor is 3 dB lower than in the CCDF(RF) measurement with the EFA.
2.7.9.9.3 Conclusion
Measuring the CCDF is a simple and effective method for determining nonlinear characteristics of active
elements. If the measurement of the CCDF is to be referenced to the signal actually transmitted (instead
of to the envelope), it is advisable to use the Test Receiver EFA with its CCDF(RF) measurement. The
EFA also determines the crest factor by means of the signal actually transmitted.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.107
2.7.10 List of Figures

Fig. 2.7-1 INPUT menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode........................2.7.4
Fig. 2.7-2 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu.........................................................................................2.7.5
Fig. 2.7-3 RF menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode..............................2.7.8
Fig. 2.7-4 Menu RF: STO: EDIT TEXT in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode 2.7.8
Fig. 2.7-5 STATUS menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode ..................2.7.10
Fig. 2.7-6 STATUS: OFDM/CODE RATE SETTINGS menu in the OFDM
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode...............................................................................2.7.12
Fig. 2.7-7 STATUS: BEEPER menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode..2.7.13
Fig. 2.7-8 SPECIAL FUNCTION menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode2.7.14
Fig. 2.7-9 SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T
mode 2.7.15
Fig. 2.7-10 SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY: ZOOM: Constellation diagram divided in quadrants2.7.15
Fig. 2.7-11 Measurement window in the MEASURE DISPLAY: FULL (left) or PARTIAL (right)
setting using the example of BER BEFORE RS. ........................................................................2.7.16
Fig. 2.7-12 USER PORT connector (X34)...................................................................................2.7.21
Fig. 2.7-13 ALARM: CONFIG menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode2.7.22
Fig. 2.7-14 ALARM: CONFIG: RELAYS menu............................................................................2.7.22
Fig. 2.7-15 Relay and pin assignment of USER PORT connector (X34) ....................................2.7.23
Fig. 2.7-16 ALARM menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode................2.7.24
Fig. 2.7-17 ALARM THRESHOLD menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode2.7.25
Fig. 2.7-18 ALARM: STATISTICS menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode2.7.27
Fig. 2.7-19 ALARM: PRINT menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode...2.7.28
Fig. 2.7-20 ALARM: PRINT: LAST LINES... menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
DVB-T mode................................................................................................................................2.7.29
Fig. 2.7-21 MEASURE menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode..........2.7.31
Fig. 2.7-22 PRESET: SERVICE: SELFTEST menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
DVB-T mode................................................................................................................................2.7.37
Fig. 2.7-23 Function of SYMBOL CNT with N = maximum number of symbols which can be
displayed with only one screen update........................................................................................2.7.39
Fig. 2.7-24 MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM menu in the OFDM
Fig. 2.7-25 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: MER dB menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/
DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Display of the whole carrier range on the left, a subrange with the
larger presentation of measured values on the right. ..................................................................2.7.42
Fig. 2.7-26 Illustration of the I/Q measurement method (eye diagram).......................................2.7.43
Fig. 2.7-27 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: I/Q menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/
DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Display of a measurement with a quick fading interference. ...2.7.44
Fig. 2.7-28 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: AMPL/PHASE menu in the OFDM
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Strong fading is superimposed on the right.........2.7.45
Fig. 2.7-29 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: POLAR PLOT menu in the OFDM
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Display of a DVB-T signal with strong fading. .....2.7.46
Fig. 2.7-30 MEASURE: SPECTRUM/TIME DOMAIN: SPECTRUM menu in the OFDM
Fig. 2.7-31 Operational principle of the DETECTOR function.....................................................2.7.48
Fig. 2.7-32 Determination of shoulder distances (shoulder attenuation) for a DVB-T signal. The
figure refers to the upper shoulder distance................................................................................2.7.50
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.108
Fig. 2.7-33 MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: AMPLDIST(RF) menu in the OFDM
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. The reference values are displayed as dashed lines.2.7.52
Fig. 2.7-34 Distribution density function of an ideal DVB-T signal...............................................2.7.53
Fig. 2.7-35 MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: CCDF(RF) and CCDF(ENV) menu in the
OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. The reference values are marked by short
horizontal lines in 1 dB steps. ......................................................................................................2.7.54
Fig. 2.7-36 MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: IMPULSE RESPONSE: µs menu in the
OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. This represents a DVB-T signal with a number
of post-echoes. In the screenshot on the right, there is also a pre-echo. A bar above the diagram
indicates the duration of the guard interval of the applied signal.................................................2.7.55
Fig. 2.7-37 Example of the representation of the channel impulse response and the guard interval of
the received signal in the case of a DVB-T signal with pre- and post-echo. ...............................2.7.56
OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. Both screenshots show two strong pulses; the
one occurring first in time is somewhat weaker. In the screenshot on the left, the ZERO POS: MAX
LEVEL setting causes the pulse with the highest level to be recognized as the main pulse. The
ZERO POS: GUARD START setting (right-hand screenshot) defines the first detected pulse within
the guard interval as the zero reference on the time/position axis. .............................................2.7.57
OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. The screenshot on the left shows a DVB-T
signal with a weak pre-echo that was not automatically detected. This echo appears as a post-echo
at the right-hand edge of the diagram. In the screenshot on the right, the main pulse was manually
shifted to the right by the setting PRE ECHO 25 %. The pre-echo is now correctly displayed in the
graphic and the table. However, the guard interval does not cover the pre-echo. ......................2.7.58
Fig. 2.7-40 The MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: IMPULSE RESPONSE: SFN FRQ
OFFS ON menu in the OFDM ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode. A DVB-T signal with
several post-echoes is shown. The diagram in the lower part of each screenshot displays the
frequency offsets relative to the impulse response shown in the upper diagram. The screenshot on
the right in addition contains a pre-echo. The frequency offset is numerically indicated in the last line
of the table. OOR indicates that measured values are outside the measurement range (left-hand
screenshot)..................................................................................................................................2.7.60
Fig. 2.7-41 MEASURE: SPECTRUM / TIME DOMAIN: HISTORY menu in the OFDM
Fig. 2.7-42 Constellation diagram of ideal 64QAM signal without pilots......................................2.7.76
Fig. 2.7-43 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with 10° phase error (only center carrier) without
pilots 2.7.77
Fig. 2.7-44 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with 20% amplitude imbalance (only center
carrier) without pilots ...................................................................................................................2.7.78
Fig. 2.7-45 Constellation diagram of a 64QAM signal with interferer C/I = 25.0 dB without pilots2.7.78
Fig. 2.7-46 Constellation diagram before channel correction (only center carrier) of a 64QAM signal
for 2K FFT with carrier leakage in the I component (CS = 22.3 dB) without pilots......................2.7.79
Fig. 2.7-47 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with additive noise (SNR = 30.0 dB) ..........2.7.80
Fig. 2.7-48 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with phase jitter: PJ RMS = 1.73° ...............2.7.81
Fig. 2.7-49 Positions of the vectors for determining the modulation error (64QAM, first quadrant
only) 2.7.85
Fig. 2.7-50 Intermodulation due to 2nd-order nonlinearities ........................................................2.7.87
Fig. 2.7-51 Intermodulation due to 3rd-order nonlinearity............................................................2.7.87
Fig. 2.7-52 Recording the BER: running BER calculation over 10 samples ................................2.7.91
Fig. 2.7-53 Setup for external BER measurement before or after the Reed-Solomon decoder..2.7.92
Fig. 2.7-54 Setup for external BER measurement before the Viterbi decoder ............................2.7.94
Fig. 2.7-55 Two-dimensional Gaussian distribution.....................................................................2.7.97
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.109
Fig. 2.7-56 C/N and net bit rate as a function of constellation, code rate, guard interval and channel
profile for all DVB-T modes .......................................................................................................2.7.101
Fig. 2.7-57 Assignment of parallel MPEG data interface (X31).................................................2.7.102
FRAME SIZE)............................................................................................................................2.7.103
FRAME SIZE)............................................................................................................................2.7.103
Fig. 2.7-60 Cascading of two Test Receivers EFA-T ................................................................2.7.104
Fig. 2.7-61 Signal path for determining CCDF(RF) with the Test Receiver EFA (left) and with a
spectrum analyzer or CCDF(ENV) with the Test Receiver EFA (right), simplified representation2.7.105
Fig. 2.7-62 Time characteristic of a modulated signal. The graph shows the original waveform, the
samples that are used by the Test Receiver EFA in the CCDF(RF) measurement, and the envelope
of the signal that is used by the Spectrum Analyzer FSP and the Test Receiver EFA during
CCDF(ENV)...............................................................................................................................2.7.106
ideal DVB-T signal with the Test Receiver EFA. The crest factor in the CCDF(ENV) measurement
is 3 dB lower than in the CCDF(RF) measurement...................................................................2.7.106
Fig. 2.7-64 Measuring the CCDF with the Spectrum Analyzer FSP; same signal as in Fehler!
Ungültiger Eigenverweis auf Textmarke.. The crest factor is 3 dB lower than in the CCDF(RF)
measurement with the EFA. ......................................................................................................2.7.107
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.110
2.7.11 List of Tables

Table 2.7-1 Switching thresholds in the OFDM DEMODULATOR DVB-T mode when the HIGH ADJ
CHAN POWER mode is not selected ...........................................................................................2.7.6
Table 2.7-2 Overview of the SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION settings for the 8 MHz bandwidth..........2.7.20
Table 2.7-3 Pin assignment of USER PORT connector (X34) .....................................................2.7.21
Table 2.7-4 Conversion of displayed hexadecimal code into binary code....................................2.7.34
Table 2.7-5 Mapping of the TPS reserved bits .............................................................................2.7.35
Table 2.7-6 Messages displayed in the measurement window ....................................................2.7.36
Table 2.7-7 Conversion MER, EVM..............................................................................................2.7.86
Table 2.7-8 Theoretical max. and min. values of calculated parameters for various orders of M-QAM
integer table except .....................................................................................................................2.7.88
Table 2.7-9 Overview of the possible maximum and minimum MERPK values as a function of QAM
order and hierarchy .....................................................................................................................2.7.88
Table 2.7-10 Test setup for external BER measurement before or after Reed-Solomon decoder at the
parallel MPEG2 output ................................................................................................................2.7.92
Table 2.7-11 Test setup for external BER measurement before the Viterbi decoder at the serial data
output (X5/X6) .............................................................................................................................2.7.95
Table 2.7-12 Required C/N and net bit rate for non-hierarchical modulation to achieve a BER=2.0E-4
before the Reed-Solomon decoder for a 8 MHz DVB-T channel (source: ETS 300 744)...........2.7.98
Table 2.7-13 Required C/N and net bit rate for hierarchical modulation (QPSK in 16QAM) to achieve a
BER = 2.0E-4 before the Reed-Solomon decoder for a 8 MHz DVB-T channel (source: ETS 300
744) 2.7.99
Table 2.7-14 Required C/N and net bit rate for hierarchical modulation (QPSK in 64QAM) to achieve
a BER=2.0E-4 before the Reed-Solomon decoder of a 8 MHz DVB-T channel (source: ETS 300
744) 2.7.100
Table 2.7-15 Assignment of parallel MPEG data interface...........................................................2.7.102
Table 2.7-16 Cascading of two Test Receivers EFA-T ................................................................2.7.104
Table 2.7-17 Settings on the EFA-T for relay receiver operation .................................................2.7.104
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.111
2.7.12 Index
A Measurement speed............................. 2.7.94

Raw ...................................................... 2.7.35
ADD. NOISE.............................................2.7.70
Sample ................................................. 2.7.94
Adjacent channels ..........................2.7.7, 2.7.38
Bit rate
AGC ..........................................................2.7.21
Net ........................................................ 2.7.34
ALARM
Offset .................................................... 2.7.34
ACTUAL................................................2.7.30
BR ............................................................ 2.7.26
CONFIG ................................................2.7.24
Broadband test demodulator...................... 2.7.6
LAST LINES..........................................2.7.30
BV ............................................................ 2.7.26
Limit values ...........................................2.7.27
C
LINES....................................................2.7.31
Messages..............................................2.7.38 C/N......................................................... 2.7.102
PRINT ...................................................2.7.30 ratio..................................................... 2.7.101
REGISTER CLEAR...............................2.7.31 Carrier
THRESHOLD........................................2.7.27 center.... 2.7.69, 2.7.81, 2.7.83, 2.7.86, 2.7.87
ALARM menu ...........................................2.7.23 Carrier leakage ........................................ 2.7.83
Alarm messages.......................................2.7.23 Carrier number......................................... 2.7.18
disable...................................................2.7.24 Carrier range ............................................ 2.7.18
Alarm register ...........................................2.7.26 Carrier recovery
clear ......................................................2.7.31 Capture range....................................... 2.7.20
Printing ..................................................2.7.30 Carrier span ............................................. 2.7.40
AM-AM conversion ...................................2.7.91 Carrier suppression.......... 2.7.69, 2.7.83, 2.7.87
Amplitude distribution .................2.7.56, 2.7.110 Phase ................................................... 2.7.69
Amplitude frequency response .....2.7.40, 2.7.47 Cascading
Amplitude imbalance ....................2.7.81, 2.7.87 of two units ......................................... 2.7.109
Attenuator .......................................2.7.6, 2.7.38 CCDF ......................................... 2.7.56, 2.7.110
Switching thresholds ...............................2.7.7 CELL ID...............See network cell identification
AVERAGE center carrier ....................................See Carrier
History...................................................2.7.68 Center frequency........................................ 2.7.9
Spectrum...............................................2.7.52 CENTER/SPAN CARR ................ 2.7.18, 2.7.40
B Channel bandwidth .......... 2.7.11, 2.7.12, 2.7.38
Channel correction ................................... 2.7.82
BEEPER ...................................................2.7.14
Channel estimation .......... 2.7.21, 2.7.47, 2.7.69
BER ............................................2.7.35, 2.7.102
Code rate ..................................... 2.7.12, 2.7.36
after Reed Solomon decoder ....2.7.95, 2.7.98
Constellation diagram ...... 2.7.42, 2.7.43, 2.7.80
before Reed Solomon decoder2.7.26, 2.7.94,
selective assessment ........................... 2.7.40
2.7.98, 2.7.100, 2.7.105
Zoom .................................................... 2.7.16
before the Reed-Solomon decoder.......2.7.67
CORR CNT BEFORE RS ........................ 2.7.29
before the Viterbi decoder.........2.7.67, 2.7.99
CORR CNT BEFORE VIT........................ 2.7.29
before Viterbi decoder...............2.7.26, 2.7.94
Correction events ..................................... 2.7.29
Counter final value ................................2.7.96
Crest factor ................................ 2.7.58, 2.7.110
external .................................................2.7.97
CURR (Crest factor)................................. 2.7.59
Integration rate ......................................2.7.35
Limit value.............................................2.7.28
Measurement........................................2.7.95
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.112
D Guard intervall.......................................... 2.7.35

GUARD START ....................................... 2.7.62
Date and time ...........................................2.7.27
Guard-Intervall ....................................... 2.7.102
DE.............................................................2.7.26
Decision field ............................................2.7.43 H
Decision field limit .........................2.7.43, 2.7.46 Hex display............................................... 2.7.36
DELETE CHARACTER hierarchical modulation2.7.12, 2.7.13, 2.7.104,
RF EDIT TEXT......................................2.7.10 2.7.105
Detector hierarchical Modulation ............................ 2.7.45
Spectrum...............................................2.7.51 Hierarchical modulation ... 2.7.35, 2.7.36, 2.7.88
Display HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER ...................... 2.7.38
FULL .....................................................2.7.17 HIGHADJCHANPOWER ........................... 2.7.7
PARTIAL ...............................................2.7.17 HISTORY ................................................. 2.7.66
Distortions HOLD ....................................................... 2.7.42
linear .........................................2.7.47, 2.7.92 HP ............................................................ 2.7.13
nonlinear ...............................................2.7.56 I
nonlinear ...............................................2.7.91
I/Q INTERCHANGED .................. 2.7.38, 2.7.49
DVB-H.......................................................2.7.37
I|Q ........................................... See eye diagram
E
IF input ....................................................... 2.7.6
Echo..............................................2.7.21, 2.7.92 Impulse response..................................... 2.7.60
EDIT TEXT ................................................. 2.7.9 Inherent errors ........................................... 2.7.8
Equivalent noise degradation.................. 2.7.106 Inherent noise .......................................... 2.7.21
Error correction .........................................2.7.94 Input level................................................. 2.7.26
Error protection bytes .................2.7.22, 2.7.107 INPUT menu .............................................. 2.7.5
Error Vector Magnitude.............................2.7.91 INPUT: ATTENUATION............................. 2.7.6
ETS 300 744......... 2.7.3, 2.7.37, 2.7.40, 2.7.102 Intercept point ............................................ 2.7.7
ETSI TR 1012902.7.45, 2.7.53, 2.7.55, 2.7.88, Interference.............................................. 2.7.40
2.7.90, 2.7.91, 2.7.94, 2.7.106 Interferers................................................. 2.7.82
EVM ..........................................................2.7.91 Intermodulation .............................. 2.7.7, 2.7.91
Eye diagram......................2.7.40, 2.7.42, 2.7.46 Intermodulation suppression...................... 2.7.7
F L
FFT ...................................2.7.12, 2.7.36, 2.7.50 LABORATORY......................................... 2.7.21
FFT mode.................................................2.7.12 LED
FREEZE........................................2.7.42, 2.7.43 Alarm .................................................... 2.7.23
History...................................................2.7.68 ALARM ................................................. 2.7.27
Frequency Offset ......................................2.7.33 SPECIAL FUNCTION............... 2.7.15, 2.7.18
Frequency offset, Frequency shift ............2.7.64 Length indicator........................................ 2.7.36
FREQUENCY RECOVERY LOOP Level......................................................... 2.7.33
BANDWIDTH ........................................2.7.20
Level control............................................. 2.7.21
G Limit value ............................................ 2.7.28
GET CHARACTER Level drop ................................................ 2.7.21
RF EDIT TEXT......................................2.7.10 LOW DIST ................................................. 2.7.7
Group delay frequency response..............2.7.40 LOW NOISE............................................... 2.7.7
Group delay response ..............................2.7.47 LP............................................................. 2.7.13
Guard interval ...................2.7.12, 2.7.36, 2.7.94 LV............................................................. 2.7.26
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.113
LVDS ...................................................... 2.7.107 OFDM CODE RATE MODE..................... 2.7.12

M OFDM CODE RATE SETTINGS ............. 2.7.12
OFDM parameters ........... 2.7.40, 2.7.69, 2.7.86
MARGIN (Crest factor) .............................2.7.58
Limit values........................................... 2.7.93
MAX (Crest factor)....................................2.7.58
OFDM UNSYNC ...................................... 2.7.38
MAX LEVEL..............................................2.7.62
Order of QAM............................... 2.7.12, 2.7.45
MEASURE menu ......................................2.7.33
P
MEASUREMENT
ZOOM ...................................................2.7.17 PEAK HOLD (spectrum) .......................... 2.7.52
Measurement window...............................2.7.33 Phase frequency response .......... 2.7.40, 2.7.47
MER..................................2.7.69, 2.7.90, 2.7.93 Phase jitter ....................... 2.7.20, 2.7.85, 2.7.88
frequency-dependent ............................2.7.44 Pilot2.7.43, 2.7.44, 2.7.46, 2.7.47, 2.7.69,
Measurement in the background .........2.7.18, 2.7.82, 2.7.88, 2.7.90
2.7.35 continual ............................................... 2.7.69
MER %..........................................2.7.40, 2.7.67 scattered............................................... 2.7.69
MER dB ........................................2.7.40, 2.7.67 Pilote ...................................................... 2.7.100
MIN BER INTEGRATION .........................2.7.18 Polar Plot...................................... 2.7.40, 2.7.47
MOBILE ....................................................2.7.21 POLAR PLOT .......................................... 2.7.48
MODE menu...............................................2.7.3 PRE ECHO .............................................. 2.7.62
Modulation error.................................. See MER PREAMP ..................................See Preamplifier
Modulation errors......................................2.7.80 Preamplifier................................................ 2.7.8
MONITORING TIME.................................2.7.29 Programm feeding ................................. 2.7.109
MPEG Q
FRAME SIZE.........................................2.7.22
QAM ............................................. 2.7.36, 2.7.88
MPEG DATA ERROR CNT ......................2.7.29
QEF.......................................... 2.7.102, 2.7.105
MPEG DATA OUTPUT.............................2.7.13
Quadrature error .............. 2.7.69, 2.7.81, 2.7.86
MPEG FRAME SIZE...............................2.7.107
MPEG TS UNSYNC .................................2.7.38 R
MPEG2 interface R&S LOGO .............................................. 2.7.16
parallel................................................. 2.7.107 RCL RF ...................................................... 2.7.9
serial....................................................2.7.107
Receive frequency ......................... 2.7.9, 2.7.38
MPEG2 transport stream..........................2.7.13 Reception of weak signals ......................... 2.7.7
Multipath reception ...................................2.7.92 Reflections ................................... 2.7.21, 2.7.92
N Relay reception ...................................... 2.7.109
RF input...................................................... 2.7.6
Net bit rate ................................................2.7.34
RF menu .................................................... 2.7.9
Network cell identification .........................2.7.36
Noise.................................2.7.7, 2.7.84, 2.7.102 S
impulsive ...............................................2.7.91
Sample ..................................................... 2.7.94
Noise figure................................................. 2.7.7 SAW filter ......................... 2.7.12, 2.7.38, 2.7.49
Noise generator ............................2.7.12, 2.7.70 SAW FILTER BW .................................... 2.7.11
Nonlinearity...............................................2.7.91 SAW-Filter.............................................. 2.7.105
2nd-order...............................................2.7.91 Scattered pilot .......................................... 2.7.21
3rd-order ...............................................2.7.92
Selective Receiver Section EFA-B3........... 2.7.6
O Selective test receiver ................................ 2.7.6
SELFTEST ............................................... 2.7.38
OFDM / CODE RATE ...................2.7.36, 2.7.38
SELFTEST ERROR CODE ..................... 2.7.38
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.114
SFN...........................................................2.7.21 TIME RECOVERY LOOP BANDWIDTH . 2.7.19

SFN FREQ OFFS .....................................2.7.64 TPS ................................ 2.7.12, 2.7.36, 2.7.100
shoulder attenuation .......See shoulder distance TPS RESERVED ..................................... 2.7.37
Shoulder distance .....................................2.7.53 Transmission channel
Signal-to-noise ratio .............................See SNR linear distortions ................................... 2.7.47
SNR ..............................................2.7.69, 2.7.88 Transmission link ..................................... 2.7.30
SPECIAL FUNCTION menu.....................2.7.15 TS-ASI.................................................... 2.7.108
Spectrum ..................................................2.7.50 TS-SPI.................................................... 2.7.107
Spectrum inverted position .......................2.7.49 U
START/STOP CARR....................2.7.17, 2.7.40
USER PORT ............................................ 2.7.23
START/STOP FREQ (spectrum)..............2.7.51
STATIONARY FAST.................................2.7.21 X
STATIONARY SLOW ...............................2.7.21 X10............................................... 2.7.6, 2.7.109
Statistical calculations...............................2.7.29 X11......................................................... 2.7.109
STATISTICS.............................................2.7.29 X21............................................................. 2.7.6
Status line.................................................2.7.33 X31............................................. 2.7.97, 2.7.107
STATUS menu .........................................2.7.11 X5............................................... 2.7.18, 2.7.100
STO RF.......................................................2.7.9 X6............................................... 2.7.18, 2.7.100
SY.............................................................2.7.26 X7............................................. 2.7.108, 2.7.109
SYMBOL CNT ..........................................2.7.42 X8........................................................... 2.7.109
Symbols
Z
Setting the number................................2.7.42
SYNC CONDITION...................................2.7.18 ZERO POS............................................... 2.7.61
Synchronization ............................2.7.26, 2.7.67 Zoom
Synchronization strategies........................2.7.12 Constellation diagram: .......................... 2.7.16
SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION ........................2.7.21 impulse response ................................. 2.7.61
T Zoom function .................. 2.7.44, 2.7.46, 2.7.47
TIME CHANGED ......................................2.7.29
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.7.115
R&S® EFA Model 50/53, Option B20 8VSB/ATSC Analyzer/Demodulator
2.8 Operation as Test Receiver/Demodulator for 8-Level Vestigial Sideband Modulated

Carrier Signals (8VSB) to the ATSC Standard ......................................................... 2.8.3
2.8.1 Introduction and Overview......................................................................................... 2.8.3
2.8.1.1 Quick Reference ........................................................................................................... 2.8.4
2.8.2 MODE Menu ................................................................................................................. 2.8.4
2.8.3 INPUT Menu/Input Selection ...................................................................................... 2.8.5
2.8.3.1 Standard Test Receiver with Tracking Channel Selection EFA Model 50.................... 2.8.5
2.8.3.2 Demodulator EFA Model 53.......................................................................................... 2.8.7
2.8.3.3 High-End Test Receiver EFA Model 53 with EFA-B3 Preselector Option.................... 2.8.9
2.8.4 RF Menu ..................................................................................................................... 2.8.11
2.8.5 STATUS Menu ........................................................................................................... 2.8.13
2.8.5.1 SET SYMBOL RATE................................................................................................... 2.8.13
2.8.5.2 SAW FILTER BW........................................................................................................ 2.8.14
2.8.5.3 REJECTION FILTER .................................................................................................. 2.8.15
2.8.5.4 BEEPER...................................................................................................................... 2.8.16
2.8.6 SPECIAL FUNCTION Menu ...................................................................................... 2.8.17
2.8.6.1 CHANNEL DEFINITION ............................................................................................. 2.8.17
2.8.6.2 FREQUENCY SETTINGS .......................................................................................... 2.8.21
2.8.6.3 EQUALIZER................................................................................................................ 2.8.25
2.8.6.4 LOOP SETTINGS ....................................................................................................... 2.8.26
2.8.6.5 DISPLAY ..................................................................................................................... 2.8.29
2.8.6.6 BER/FEC..................................................................................................................... 2.8.31
2.8.7 ALARM Menu............................................................................................................. 2.8.32
2.8.7.1 Configuring the Alarm Register (ALARM CONFIG).................................................... 2.8.33
2.8.7.2 Alarm Register ............................................................................................................ 2.8.35
2.8.7.3 Setting Limit Values (ALARM: THRESHOLD) ............................................................ 2.8.36
2.8.7.4 Statistics (STATISTICS) ............................................................................................. 2.8.38
2.8.7.5 Printing the Register (PRINT...) .................................................................................. 2.8.39
2.8.7.6 Clearing the Register (REGISTER CLEAR) ............................................................... 2.8.40
2.8.8 MEASURE Menu........................................................................................................ 2.8.41
2.8.8.1 Measurement Window ................................................................................................ 2.8.42
2.8.8.2 Constellation Diagram................................................................................................. 2.8.49
2.8.8.3 Histograms .................................................................................................................. 2.8.51
2.8.8.4 Measurements in the Frequency Domain................................................................... 2.8.53
2.8.8.5 Measurements in the Time Domain ............................................................................ 2.8.63
2.8.8.6 8VSB Parameters ....................................................................................................... 2.8.74
2.8.8.7 Noise Generator (ADD NOISE) .................................................................................. 2.8.80
2.8.9 PRESET Values and Menu Overview ...................................................................... 2.8.81
MODE Menu ............................................................................................................... 2.8.81
INPUT Menu ............................................................................................................... 2.8.82
RF Menu ..................................................................................................................... 2.8.83
STATUS Menu ............................................................................................................ 2.8.83
MEASURE Menu ........................................................................................................ 2.8.84
SETUP Menu .............................................................................................................. 2.8.89
SPECIAL FUNCTION Menu ....................................................................................... 2.8.90
PRESET-Menu............................................................................................................ 2.8.93
2.8.10 Hints and Applications ............................................................................................. 2.8.94
2.8.10.1 Receiver Selectivity Characteristics............................................................................ 2.8.94
2.8.10.2 Function and Selection of Integration Time for BER Measurements.......................... 2.8.95
2.8.10.3 Assignment and Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs............................ 2.8.98
2.8.10.4 Definition and Application of the CCDF and
Amplitude Distribution Measurement Function ......................................................... 2.8.100
2.8.10.5 Channel Frequency Tables....................................................................................... 2.8.102
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.1
8VSB/ATSC Analyzer / Demodulator R&S® EFA Model 50/53, Option B20
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.2
2.8 Operation as Test Receiver/Demodulator for 8-Level

Vestigial Sideband Modulated Carrier Signals (8VSB) to the
ATSC Standard
Note: For the sake of clarity, the 8VSB Test Receiver EFA to the ATSC Standard will be
designated simply as the "EFA-ATSC" instead of "EFA Model 50/53 / Opt. B20" in the
following.

The Test Receiver EFA-ATSC measures 8-level vestigial sideband modulated signals (8VSB) as used
in digital terrestrial broadcasting to the 8VSB/ATSC TV standard. The instrument has a number of
special characteristics for measuring 8VSB signals, which make it particularly suitable for accurate
analysis and measurement of all the important parameters.
The input signal is processed in line with ATSC specifications. This includes demapping, deinterleaving,
and the Viterbi and Reed-Solomon decoders. The decoded MPEG-2 data is made available in serial
(SMPTE310M and TS-ASI interface) as well as parallel (TS-PARALLEL) form. Irrespective of the
measurement selected, the data is simultaneously available at all interfaces whenever required.
Extremely powerful digital signal processing allows accurate analysis of the applied 8VSB signal. A
newly developed data storage technique permits very flexible and efficient collection of measurement
results for all the relevant signal parameters, providing valuable information on problems that may occur
during transmission. A central feature is the constellation diagram display on the LCD, which can be
individually configured and permits a variable number of symbols to be displayed (to ∞). This allows
signal events covering an extended period of time to be displayed. A large number of useful functions
for specifically measuring 8VSB signals have been implemented in this unit for the first time. Another
feature is the automatic storage of various messages in an alarm register.
The Test Receiver EFA-ATSC is optionally available as a receiver with tracking selection or as a
demodulator with a non-selective receiver section. The test receiver with tracking channel selection is
selective RF input is particularly suited for direct monitoring and quality control of 8VSB transmitters.
The demodulator can be upgraded to the high-end measurement receiver.
This powerful unit can, of course, be used at any time for applications in research and development
laboratories, quality assurance, service, as well as for monitoring transmitters and production of TV
consumer electronics.
With the appropriate options, the Test Receiver EFA provides a one-box solution capable of detecting,
demodulating, decoding, and measuring digital TV signals to the 8VSB/ATSC and ITU-T J.83/A/B/C
standards, as well as analog NTSC signals. The instrument is configured for the specific application
required via the MODE key. The 8VSB/ATSC application is set by pressing the 8VSB
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR ATSC softkey in the MODE menu. All the hardkeys are assigned a
specific function irrespective of the demodulator/decoder modules integrated in the EFA. The functions
of the INPUT and RF menus are largely identical. The STATUS and SPECIAL FUNCTION menus
depend on the demodulator mode selected and have completely different structures. Only the SETUP
menu is identical for all EFA modes. It is described in section 2.3.2.
This manual presents and describes the various functions in their logical order.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.3

For users who are basically familiar with the EFA, the steps required for direct synchronization of an
8VSB signal are listed below in sequence:
2. Select 8VSB/ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR in the MODE menu.
3. Press PRESET.
4. Select input (INPUT).
5. Set receive frequency (RF).
6. Select filter bandwidth (STATUS:SAW FILTER BW menu).
In the MEASURE menu, the constellation diagram can now be displayed, or another of the
measurements selected.
For possible causes of non-synchronization, see 2.8.8.1.8.
2.8.2 MODE Menu

depends on the options installed. The illustrations below provide examples of the different menu
contents. For demodulation, decoding and analysis of 8VSB signals, select the 8VSB/ATSC
ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode. The currently selected demodulator mode is in inverse video. The
demodulator mode required is selected using the cursor keys (⇑ and ⇓). The selected demodulator
mode is activated by pressing the ENTER key. The device settings of the RF, INPUT, STATUS,
ALARM and SPECIAL FUNCTION menus are assigned to the MODE and saved accordingly. That is to
say, if the MODE is changed, the EFA restores the settings last used in the relevant demodulator mode.
Note: This chapter (2.8) describes only the 8VSB/ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode.
For descriptions of the other demodulator modes, see the relevant chapters.
The content of the MODE menu depends on the device options installed. Fig. 2.8-1 shows two
examples:
MODE menu with the options: MODE menu with the options:
• EFA-K21 DVB-C FIRMWARE • EFA-B4 MPEG2 DECODER
• EFA-B30 NTSC/BTSC DEMODULATOR
• EFA-K22 ATSC FIRMWARE
• EFA-K21 DVB-C FIRMWARE
• EFA-K23 J.83/B FIRMWARE • EFA-K22 ATSC FIRMWARE
• EFA-K23 J.83/B FIRMWARE
Fig. 2.8-1 The MODE menu depends on the device options installed
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.4
2.8.3 INPUT Menu/Input Selection

In the INPUT menu, the input selection, RF input attenuator and preamplifier settings can be made. A
mode specially designed for receiving conditions with extremely strong adjacent channels can also be
selected. All the settings in the INPUT menu refer to the selected demodulation mode (MODE menu),
i.e. if the demodulation mode is changed, the settings previously selected in that mode are effective.
The INPUT menu of the test receiver with tracking channel selection (EFA model 50) is different from
that of the non-selective demodulator (EFA model 53). If the non-selective demodulator (EFA model 53)
is equipped with the EFA-B3 PRESELECTOR option, the preselector is also controlled via the INPUT
menu. The description of the INPUT menu is organized according to instrument models:
• EFA model 50 or EFA receiver model with EFA-B20 option, see section 2.8.3.1
• EFA model 53 or EFA demodulator model with EFA-B20 option, see section 2.8.3.2
• EFA model 53 with EFA-B3 option (PRESELECTOR) or EFA demodulator model with EFA-B3 and
EFA-B20 options, see section 2.8.3.3
2.8.3.1 Standard Test Receiver with Tracking Channel Selection

EFA Model 50
Fig. 2.8-2 INPUT menu of 8VSB/ATSC standard test receiver EFA model 50
EFA model, this can be a 50 Ω or 75 Ω input. The message INPUT 75 OHM REAR indicates that the
displayed, the BNC connector on the front panel is enabled. This input allows 8VSB/ATSC signals with
a channel center frequency of 48 MHz to 862 MHz to be received.
The IF input of the test receiver is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 Ω. The input is
located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF center frequency is 36.000 MHz. For notes on
selecting the sideband for demodulation, see in section 2.8.6.2.
displayed:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.5
Fig. 2.8-3 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of 8VSB/ATSC Test Receiver EFA model 50
set.
the range 0 dB to 55 dB. Settings can be carried out using the cursor keys (up ⇑ or down ⇓) or by direct
demodulated signal.
Note: When the attenuator is controlled manually, the receivable level range of the test receiver
is considerably restricted.
In the Auto mode, the attenuator is controlled automatically depending on the measured input level.
The following switching thresholds apply to the 8VSB/ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode; a
switching hysteresis of ±1 dB applies in each case.
Attenuator
High Adj Chan Power OFF High Adj Chan Power OFF High Adj Chan Power ON
ATTEN
Preamp OFF Preamp ON Preamp OFF
AUTO
0 dB < -37 dBm < -47 dBm < -58 dBm
5 dB -37 dBm to -32 dBm -47 dBm to -42 dBm -58 dBm to -53 dBm
40 dB -2 dBm to +3 dBm -12 dBm to -7 dBm -23 dBm to -18 dBm
45 dB +3 dBm to +8 dBm -7 dBm to -2 dBm -18 dBm to -13 dBm
50 dB +8 dBm to +13 dBm -2 dBm to +3 dBm -13 dBm to -8 dBm
55 dB > +13 dBm > +3 dBm > -8 dBm
Table 2.8-1 Switching thresholds of the input attenuator of 8VSB/ATSC standard Test
Receiver EFA model 50
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.6
of the receiver is somewhat higher. The switching thresholds of the attenuator to Table 2.8-1 are the
same in the LOW NOISE and LOW DIST modes.
The HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER key is used to optimize the instrument for receiving weak signals when
strong adjacent-channel signals are present. The internally set levels are reduced to cut down
interference due to intermodulation products. HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER can be selected independently
of the LOW NOISE or LOW DIST modes.
It should be noted that in the HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER mode, there is an increase in the inherent
errors of the EFA-ATSC with regard to signal/noise ratio and MER for unimpaired signals. In each
particular case, it should be checked whether operation with HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER mode is useful
or not. Under normal receive conditions, this mode should always be deactivated.
Using the 10 dB PREAMP key, a low-noise preamplifier can be connected to improve the receiver
noise figure to typically 6 dB. This is useful when low-level signals are received. The attenuator is
correctly set in automatic operation. For the switching thresholds with automatic attenuator control, see
Table 2.8-1.
2.8.3.2 Demodulator EFA Model 53
Fig. 2.8-4 INPUT menu of demodulator EFA model 53
located on the rear panel and has an impedance of 50 Ω. This input allows 8VSB/ATSC signals with a
channel center frequency of 42 MHz to 1000 MHz to be received. It is suitable for carrying out
measurements on transmitters where only one carrier signal is available. The test signals are not
subject to filtering of any kind in the RF receiver section. These characteristics have a number of
advantages:
• Optimum adjustment of the RF input, return loss ≥30 dB.
• Best possible instrument characteristics with regard to linear distortion, since there is no RF
selection.
• The internal level setting is optimized for reception of a single signal. This allows the best possible
signal/noise ratio to be obtained, (typically inherent SNR = 48 dB).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.7
Image frequency = RF + 72 MHz
The IF input of the demodulator is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 Ω. The input is
located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF center frequency is 36.000 MHz. For other
intermediate frequencies, use one of the RF inputs. To ensure that the inverse sideband position of the
IF signal is taken into consideration during demodulation, the frequency must be entered with a
negative sign (see also section 2.8.4). The sideband to be demodulated can also be selected in the
SPECIAL FUNCTION/ FREQUENCY SETTINGS menu, see section 2.8.6.2. This chapter also explains
the relationship between channel center frequency and pilot frequency.
Fig. 2.8-5 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of demodulator EFA model 53
optimized depending on the level of the receive signal. The automatically selected setting appears in
the display header above the measured level. The AUTO setting is generally recommended.
For special applications, it may be useful to set the attenuation switch manually:
• No switching of input attenuation in the event of level loss or large level variations.
• Measurements can be reproduced exactly.
Level attenuation switch Switching level threshold

MANUAL LOW+PREAMP <-1 dBm
MANUAL LOW -1 dBm to +9 dBm
MANUAL HIGH >9 dBm
Table 2.8-2 Switching thresholds of level attenuation switch of RF input DEMOD
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.8
2.8.3.3 High-End Test Receiver EFA Model 53 with EFA-B3 Preselector Option
If the demodulator EFA model 53 is equipped with the EFA-B3 (preselector) option, the RECEIVER and
DEMOD keys can be used to switch between the selective (RECEIVER) and non-selective (DEMOD)
input. This model provides 3 RF inputs, which can be used simultaneously: selective inputs in 50 Ω (N
connector) and 75 Ω (BNC connector) selective inputs, as well as 50 Ω (N connector) non-selective
input.
Fig. 2.8-6 INPUT menu of high-end Test Receiver EFA model 53 with option EFA-B3
The selective inputs are available as 50 Ω (N connector) and 75 Ω (BNC connector) inputs. When the
RECEIVER input is activated, the RF INPUT 50/75 key is used to select either the selective 50 Ω or the
75 Ω input.
The selective RF inputs allow 8VSB/ATSC signals with a channel center frequency of 3 MHz to
1000 MHz to be received.
The IF input of the test receiver/demodulator is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 Ω.
The input is located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF center frequency is 36.000 MHz. For
other intermediate frequencies, one of the RF inputs must be used.
displayed:
Fig. 2.8-7 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of high-end Test Receiver EFA model 53 with option
EFA-B3
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.9
the range 0 dB to 55 dB. Settings can be carried out using the cursor keys (up ⇑ or down ⇓) or by direct
demodulated signal.
a brief sync loss.
When Auto is set, the attenuator is controlled automatically depending on the measured input level.
The following switching thresholds apply to the 8VSB/ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode; a
switching hysteresis of ±1 dB applies in each case.
Attenuator setting with High Adjacent Channel Power High Adjacent Channel Power
ATTENuation AUTO OFF ON
0 dB <-41 dBm <-61 dBm
30 dB -16 dBm to -11 dBm -36 dBm to –31 dBm
40 dB -6 dBm to -1 dBm -26 dBm to –21 dBm
45 dB -1 dBm to +4 dBm -21 dBm to –16 dBm
55 dB >+9 dBm >-11 dBm
switching thresholds of the attenuator to Table 2.8-3 are the same in the LOW NOISE, NORMAL and
LOW DIST modes.
The HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER key is used to optimize the instrument for receiving weak signals when
strong adjacent-channel signals are present. The gain is reduced internally to cut down interference due
to intermodulation products. The HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER mode can be selected independently of the
LOW NOISE or LOW DIST modes. It should be noted that in the HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER mode,
there is an increase in the inherent errors of the EFA-ATSC with regard to noise and MER for
unimpaired signals. In each particular case, it should be checked whether operation with
HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER mode is useful or not. Under normal receive conditions, this mode should
always be deactivated. For the switching thresholds with automatic attenuator control, see Table 2.8-3.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.10
2.8.4 RF Menu
The RF menu is selected via the RF key in the MAIN FUNCTION block. The receive frequency of the
8VSB signal to be demodulated and analyzed is set in this menu. The settings in this menu are
assigned to the demodulator mode (MODE menu, section 2.8.2). That is to say, when the demodulator
mode is changed, the RF last used in the selected demodulator mode is restored, see also section
2.8.2.
Fig. 2.8-8 RF menu in 8VSB/ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode

The receive frequency can be entered as CENTER FREQUENCY, PILOT FREQUENCY via CHANNEL
or SPECIAL CHANNEL, or by calling up a previously stored RF (RCL RF). The current RF settings are
shown in the display.
Pressing the CENTER FREQUENCY softkey allows the channel center frequency to be entered via the
numeric keypad with a frequency resolution of 0.1 Hz, or changed via the cursor keys. The associated
frequency of the pilot carrier is calculated via the set symbol rate and displayed. For more details on
calculating the pilot carrier frequency, see section 2.8.6.2. If the set frequency is within 40 kHz of the
frequency of a channel or special channel of the selected channel frequency table, the corresponding
channel number is displayed.
Pressing the PILOT FREQUENCY softkey allows the pilot carrier frequency to be entered via the
numeric keypad with a frequency resolution of 0.1 Hz or changed via the cursor keys. The associated
channel center frequency is calculated via the set symbol rate, and displayed. For more details on
calculating the channel center frequency, see section 2.8.6.2. If the set frequency is within 40 kHz with
the frequency of a channel or special channel of the selected channel frequency table, the
corresponding channel number is displayed.
defined in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu (section 2.8.6.1). The
corresponding channel center frequency and pilot carrier frequency are displayed.
Pressing the SPECIAL CHANNEL softkey allows the desired special channel number to be entered via
the numeric keypad, or changed via the cursor keys. The associated channel frequency table can be
selected and defined in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu (section 2.8.6.1). The
A receive frequency previously stored with STO RF in the RF MEMORY can be recalled by pressing the
of the keypad or the cursor keys. If the receive frequency is selected using the RCL RF function, the RF
memory number and the associated text (see STO RF) are displayed in the header. Up to 100 memory
locations (0 to 99) can be used.
The currently set frequency can be stored in the RF memory and assigned to a memory location
number using the STO RF key. Pressing the STO RF key allows the desired RF memory number to be
entered via the keypad and confirmed with ENTER. A text can be edited by pressing the EDIT TEXT
key and assigned to the previously selected RF memory number.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.11
Example: Saving the pilot carrier frequency 123.456789 MHz with channel designation
• RF menu
• PILOT FREQUENCY
• 123.456789 <ENTER>
• STO RF ...
• 99 <ENT>
• EDIT TEXT ...
• Edit "Test"
• SAVE & EXIT
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.12
2.8.5 STATUS Menu

The STATUS menu is selected using the STATUS key in the MAIN FUNCTION block.
In this menu, all the main device parameters of the mode selected in the MODE menu (here
8VSB/ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR) are displayed and set. The settings include: symbol rate,
SAW filter bandwidth, as well as setting of the rejection filter and configuration of the beeper. Settings
concerning input selection or attenuator and preamplifier control must be made in the INPUT menu, see
section 2.8.3.
Fig. 2.8-10 STATUS menu: this instrument is equipped with the 2 MHz and 8 MHz SAW
filters.
2.8.5.1 SET SYMBOL RATE
Pressing the SET SYMBOL RATE key allows the desired symbol rate to be entered directly via the
numeric keypad in the range 2 Msymb/s to 11 Msymb/s with a resolution of 0.1 symbol/s. The symbol
rate of 10.7622378 Msymb/s specified in the ATSC standard is set as default upon delivery, and after
an instrument reset or preset.
The symbol rate determines the bandwidth of the signal and thus the carrier power. With 8VSB/ATSC
signals, the signal bandwidth corresponds to half the symbol rate (vestigial sideband transmission).
The internal noise generator is adapted to the set symbol rate so that the C/N power ratio always
corresponds to the set value.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.13
The 8VSB/ATSC Test Receiver EFA has three slots for SAW filters. SAW filters with different
bandwidths are available for the SAW filter slots:
SAW filter bandwidth Option Rohde & Schwarz Order No.

6 MHz EFA-B11 2067.3691.00
7 MHz EFA-B12 2067.3591.00
8 MHz EFA-B13 2067.3579.03
2 MHz EFA-B14 2067.3562.00
Table 2.8-4 Available filter bandwidths
The required filter is selected by repeatedly pressing the SAW FILTER BW softkey. The SAW filters
used are identified automatically. Unused SAW filters are displayed in italics and cannot be selected.
2.8.5.2.1 6 MHz Filter (Option EFA-B11)
The filter optimally selects signals transmitted with 6 MHz channel spacing. This applies to the
terrestrial broadcasting of TV signals to the 8VSB/ATSC standard as well as to QAM signals to the ITU-
T J.83/B/C standard for broadcasting in cable systems.
The EFA 50 and EFA 53 models can be retrofitted for the DVB-C standards (ITU-T J.83/A/B/C). The
hardware of these instruments is ready to handle these transmission standards, so retrofitting is
performed by loading Firmware Option EFA-K21 or EFA-K23.
In Europe, the channel bandwidth in the VHF range is 7 MHz. In addition to analog TV signals, DVB-C
signals are transmitted in this frequency range. This optional filter ensures optimal filtering of the 7 MHz
channel.
The filter optimally selects signals transmitted with 8 MHz channel spacing, such as QAM signals to the
DVB-C standard (ITU-T J.83/A).
This filter is particularly important for 8VSB/ATSC, since it is the only one that ensures error-free
measurement of the shoulder distance to FCC recommendation. For more details, see section 2.8.8.4.1
The filter selects the receive signal in a bandwidth of 2 MHz. It is used for selecting back-channel
information.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.14
2.8.5.3 REJECTION FILTER
Fig. 2.8-11 STATUS menu: REJECTION FILTER in 8VSB/ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR

mode
The NTSC co-channel rejection filter is used to suppress NTSC co-channels. It is formed by three notch
filters that are to be tuned to the vision carrier, the sound carrier and the colour subcarrier of the NTSC
signal received in the same channel. The notch filters have a fixed frequency spacing between the
vision carrier and the sound carrier (4.5 MHz) as well as between the vision carrier and the colour
subcarrier (3.58 MHz), i.e. these values cannot be varied. The spacing between the channel center
frequency and the vision carrier frequency can be selected with SET NOTCH FREQUENCY, see Fig.
2.8-12. The filter bandwidth can be selected with NOTCH WIDTH.
S e t n o tc h fre q u e n c y
d e fa u lt 1 .7 5 M H z
C hannel C hannel C hannel
fr e q u e n c y c e n te r fre q u e n c y
lo w e r lim it fr e q u e n c y u p p e r l i m it
V i s io n
c a rrie r
Sound
C o lo r c a rrie r
s u b c a r r ie r
3 .5 8 M H z RF
4 .5 M H z
6 M Hz
C hannel
Fig. 2.8-12 Frequency spectrum of NTSC channel

Note 1: With the NTSC co-channel rejection filter activated, system performance is degraded in
comparison with an undisturbed 8VSB/ATSC signal.
Note 2: The NTSC co-channel rejection filter has an effect on the frequency response
measurement (MEASURE/ FREQUENCY RESPONSE).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.15
2.8.5.4 BEEPER
The internal acoustic signal generator can be configured in the BEEPER... submenu. In the event of
different kinds of error, the signal generator is active if the appropriate parameter has been set to
ENABLED, or inactive if the parameter is set to DISABLED. The following errors can be signalled
acoustically:
• Signal level below the threshold set in alarm register, see section 2.8.7.3.
• Sync byte of MPEG2 frame not found
• Measured logarithmic MER (rms value) is below the threshold set in the alarm register, see section
2.8.7.3.
• Measured linear MER or EVM (rms value) is above the threshold set in the alarm register, see
section 2.8.7.3.
• Reed-Solomon decoder has corrected at least one faulty byte.
• Reed-Solomon decoder was unable to correct at least one faulty MPEG2 frame; the MPEG2 frame
therefore contains at least 11 faulty bytes.
Fig. 2.8-13 STATUS: BEEPER menu in 8VSB/ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.16

In the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu, the channel definitions (selection of a channel frequency table) and
the relative frequency response of the instrument (relative to channel center frequency or pilot carrier
frequency) can be selected. In addition, special settings are offered (settings for equalizer and RF
control loop), which do not have to be changed in normal operation. In this menu the instrument can be
set to a state where normal operation is not always guaranteed. If a special function of this type is
selected, the yellow LED next to the key comes on. This LED goes off only when all of these functions
have been reset to their standard values (the functions CHANNEL DEFINITION, FREQUENCY
SETTINGS: RF FIXED and DISPLAY are exceptions). For the standard values, see section 2.8.9
PRESET Values and Menu Overview.
Fig. 2.8-14 SPECIAL FUNCTION menu
Fig. 2.8-15 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.17
In the RCL TABLE menu, a predefined channel frequency table can be selected. The EFA-ATSC
contains the standard channels tables (STANDARD TABLE) for the USA, Canada, and Korea, see
section 2.8.10.5 Channel Frequency Tables. These tables can be used as the basis for programming
user-specific channel tables (USER TABLE).
Fig. 2.8-16 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: RECALL menu. On the left, the
standard table USA has been selected; and on the right, the user-specific
channel table PETERS TABLE.

activated channel frequency table. Pressing STANDARD TABLE or USER TABLE key displays the list
of the channel frequency tables stored in the EFA. The desired table is selected using the SELECT
TABLE key and activated by pressing ENTER. Table names displayed in italics are not defined and
cannot be selected. Up to three user-specific channel frequency tables can be configured.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.18
2.8.6.1.2 Generating User-Specific Channel Tables (USER TABLE)
in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu, see Fig. 2.8-15.
COPY TABLE
Fig. 2.8-17 Copying a channel frequency table
USER TABLE 2.
EDIT TABLE
TABLE function.
First, press the EDIT TABLE key in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu, see Fig.
2.8-15. Then use the SELECT TABLE key to select the table that you wish to change.
• EDIT TABLE NAME
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.19
Fig. 2.8-18 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: EDIT TABLE NAME menu
If you wish to change the table name, press the EDIT TABLE NAME key. You can now use the editor
to change the name of the table. The cursor in the NAME text field can be moved using the LEFT and
maximum of 20 characters is permitted. After entering the desired name, press SAVE&EXIT.
• EDIT TABLE DATA
Fig. 2.8-19 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: EDIT TABLE DATA menu
Every table contains two channel frequency allocations, which can be selected using the CHANNEL
and SPECIAL CHANNEL keys. Every table has 100 memory locations. Memory locations with the
frequency value 0.000000 MHz cannot subsequently be called up in the RF menu. The channel number
for which the frequency is to be changed is selected using the CHANNEL UP and CHANNEL DOWN
keys. The frequency value is entered using the hardkeys of the VARIATION and DATA blocks. Once
the channel table has been changed, press the ESCape hardkey and then the EXIT softkey. The
channel table becomes effective after it has been selected using the RCL TABLE function, see section
2.8.6.1.1.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.20
Clearing user-specific channel tables (CLEAR TABLE)

channel tables.
2.8.6.2 FREQUENCY SETTINGS
In the SPECIAL FUNCTION: FREQUENCY SETTINGS menu, the SIDEBAND POSITION function can
be used to select whether the demodulator demodulates the upper or the lower sideband. The RF
FIXED function is used to specify whether the receiver operates relative to the channel center
frequency or pilot carrier frequency.
Fig. 2.8-20 SPECIAL FUNCTION: FREQUENCY SETTINGS menu
2.8.6.2.1 SIDEBAND POSITION Function
The SIDEBAND POSITION softkey is used to select the sideband to be demodulated.

In the NORMAL setting, the upper sideband is demodulated in accordance with the ATSC standard
when signals are fed in at the RF input. When signals are fed in at the IF input (center frequency
36 MHz), the lower sideband is demodulated.
In the INVERTED setting, the lower sideband is demodulated when signals are fed in at the RF input;
and the upper sideband when they are fed in at the IF input (center frequency 36 MHz). When
INVERTED is activated, the LED next to the SPECIAL FUNCTION hardkey lights.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.21
2.8.6.2.2 RF FIXED Function
The RF FIXED softkey is used to specify whether the receiver operates relative to the channel center
frequency or pilot carrier frequency. The setting of the receive window is always based on the center
frequency, since selection is always made symmetrically to the received spectrum. Depending on the
setting selected, the display header shows the channel center frequency (CENTER FREQ) or the pilot
carrier frequency (PILOT FREQ).
If CENTER FREQ is selected and the symbol rate in the STATUS menu or the selection of the
sideband (SPECIAL FUNCTION: FREQUENCY SETTINGS: SPECTRUM) is changed, the receive
window of the receiver does not change. The synthesizer setting of the receiver remains unchanged. In
the FREQUENCY DOMAIN menu, the frequency scale is referred to the set channel center frequency.
If PILOT FREQ is selected and the symbol rate or the selection of the sideband is changed, the set pilot
carrier frequency is kept constant and the center frequency is recalculated.
With normal RF spectrum, the following holds:
SYMBOL _ RATE
CENTER _ FREQ = PILOT _ FREQ +
4
With inverted RF spectrum, the following holds:
SYMBOL _ RATE
CENTER _ FREQ = PILOT _ FREQ −
4
This means that the receiver synthesizer and, thus, the receive window is reset. The frequency scale in
the FREQUENCY DOMAIN menu is referred to the pilot carrier frequency.
2.8.6.2.3 Examples of SPECIAL FUNCTION: FREQUENCY SETTINGS
The following examples illustrate the representation of the 8VSB/ATSC frequency spectra and
amplitude frequency responses with the associated frequency scales in the FREQUENCY DOMAIN
menu, depending on the FREQUENCY SETTINGS special function.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.22
2.8.6.2.3.1 SPEC FUNC: FREQUENCY SETTINGS: RF FIXED: PILOT FREQ
If the FREQUENCY SETTINGS: RF FIXED special function is set to PILOT FREQ, the frequency scale
refers to the pilot carrier frequency.
The FREQUENCY DOMAIN: SPECTRUM measurement always shows the sideband position of the
test signal at the receiver input. Zero on the frequency axis corresponds to the pilot carrier frequency.
The reference level is always the channel power (including the pilot carrier power).
The FREQUENCY DOMAIN: AMPL/PHASE/GD measurement shows the frequency response of the
demodulated 8VSB signal. Zero on the frequency axis corresponds to the pilot carrier frequency.
0 dB
0 0 f / MHz
f / MHz 0 f / MHz
Spectrum at receiver input Frequency spectrum on display Amplitude frequency response
Fig. 2.8-21 8VSB/ATSC signal modulated to standard applied to RF input with pilot
frequency as reference frequency
0 dB
0 0
0 f / MHz f / MHz f / MHz
Fig. 2.8-22 8VSB/ATSC IF signal modulated to standard applied to IF input with pilot
0 dB
0 f / MHz f / MHz 0 0
f / MHz
Fig. 2.8-23 Frequency-inverted 8VSB signal applied to RF input with pilot frequency as
reference frequency
0 dB
0 0 0
f / MHz f / MHz f / MHz
Fig. 2.8-24 Frequency-inverted 8VSB IF signal applied to IF input with pilot frequency as
reference frequency
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.23
2.8.6.2.3.2 SPEC FUNC: FREQUENCY SETTINGS: RF FIXED: CENTER FREQ
If the FREQUENCY SETTINGS: RF FIXED special function is set to CENTER FREQ, the frequency
scale is referred to the channel center frequency.
The FREQUENCY DOMAIN: SPECTRUM measurement always shows the frequency spectrum of the
test signal at the receiver input. Zero on the frequency axis corresponds to the channel center
frequency. The reference level is always the channel power (including the pilot carrier power).
The FREQUENCY DOMAIN: AMPL/PHASE/GD measurement shows the frequency response of the
demodulated 8VSB signal. Zero on the frequency axis corresponds to the channel center frequency.
0 dB
0 0 0
Fig. 2.8-25 8VSB/ATSC signal modulated to standard applied to RF input with center
0 dB
0 f / MHz 0 f / MHz 0
f / MHz
Fig. 2.8-26 8VSB/ATSC IF signal modulated to standard applied to IF input with center
0 dB
0 f / MHz 0 f / MHz
0 f / MHz

Fig. 2.8-27 Frequency-inverted 8VSB signal applied to RF input with center frequency as
reference frequency
0 dB
0 0 0
Fig. 2.8-28 Frequency inverted 8VSB IF signal applied to IF input with center frequency as
reference frequency
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.24
2.8.6.3 EQUALIZER
The EFA-ATSC is equipped with a powerful self-adapting equalizer. This equalizer can be configured in
the SPECIAL FUNCTION: EQUALIZER menu.
Fig. 2.8-29 SPECIAL FUNCTION: EQUALIZER menu
The self-adapting equalizer can be frozen (freezing the coefficients) and switched off using the
EQUALIZER softkey. In the ON position, the equalizer adapts itself to the 8VSB signal received and
compensates for the linear distortion. When the equalizer is switched ON after FREEZE, the filter
coefficients effective last are retained. The equalizer is "frozen". If the unit is switched off or if there is a
power failure, the frozen equalizer coefficients are lost. When the equalizer is switched OFF, the filter
coefficients are set so that the frequency response of the received signal is not affected. When the unit
is preset or reset, the equalizer is set to ON.
Note 1: Measurement of amplitude, phase and group-delay frequency response, polar plot, and
ghost pattern can be carried out only if the equalizer is switched on.
Note 2: In the CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM measurement window, the deviation of the pilot value
from the standard value is displayed only if the equalizer is switched off.
The EQUALIZER MODE softkey is used to select whether the equalizer operates in the complex or real
mode. When the unit is preset or reset, the equalizer is set to COMPLEX.
The adaptation speed of the self-adapting equalizer is configured using the EQUALIZER
ADAPTATION softkey. When the unit is preset or reset, the equalizer is set to SLOW.
In the SLOW position, the equalizer follows the changes of the transmission channel only slowly.
However, it is also less sensitive to superimposed noise. This setting is preferable with static
transmission channels.
In the FAST position, the equalizer can adapt itself to a dynamically changing channel. This setting is
preferable with dynamic transmission channels. In comparison to the SLOW setting, the sensitivity to
noise is slightly higher.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.25
2.8.6.4 LOOP SETTINGS
Fig. 2.8-30 SPECIAL FUNCTION: LOOP SETTINGS menu
2.8.6.4.1 CARRIER FREQUENCY LOOP BANDWIDTH

The CARRIER FREQUENCY LOOP BANDWIDTH softkey allows the PLL bandwidth of the carrier
frequency loop to be set. In the LOW setting, the PLL bandwidth is small, i.e. phase noise close to the
carrier is not suppressed by the demodulator and is reflected in the test results. This setting is also
recommended for pilot carrier frequency measurements (default setting).
In the HIGH setting, the PLL bandwidth is large, i.e. phase noise close to the carrier is partially or
completely suppressed by the demodulator. This setting should be selected if the demodulation results
for impaired receive signals are to be improved.
Depending on the setting the following PLL bandwidths are set
(values are valid for symbol rate 10.762 MSymb/s):
CARRIER FREQUENCY LOOP PLL bandwidth (3 dB)

BANDWIDTH
LOW 200 Hz
MEDIUM 10 kHz
HIGH 30 kHz
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.26
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.27
2.8.6.4.2 BAUD RECOVERY LOOP BANDWIDTH

The BAUD RECOVERY LOOP BANDWIDTH softkey allows the PLL bandwidth of the phase-locked
loop to be set. In the LOW setting, the PLL bandwidth is small, i.e. the demodulation content I and Q is
virtually independent of the modulation content. A symbol rate jitter at the transmitter end is reflected in
the demodulation result (default setting).
In the HIGH setting, the PLL bandwidth is large, i.e. the demodulation components I and Q are affected
by symbol rate variations at the transmitter end. A symbol rate jitter at the transmitter end is partially
suppressed by the demodulator.

(values are valid for symbol rate 10.762 MSymb/s):
BAUD RECOVERY LOOP
PLL bandwidth (3 dB)
BANDWIDTH
LOW 100 Hz
MEDIUM 200 Hz
HIGH 500 Hz
2.8.6.4.3 AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL

Pressing the AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL key allows the gain control speed to be set. For
measurement tasks, the automatic gain control (AGC) should be set to SLOW. If SLOW is selected, the
AGC is set so that superimposed low-frequency signal impairments (e.g. hum) are not suppressed. As
a result, these impairments of the 8VSB signal can be measured. This setting is made after an
instrument reset or preset.
If the test receiver is used as a relay receiver, for example, FAST is preferable, since slow level
variations and superimposed low-frequency impairments are then suppressed by the test receiver, thus
improving the quality of the demodulated signal for signals that were originally impaired.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.28
2.8.6.5 DISPLAY
The DISPLAY... key is used to configure the measure menu. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-31 SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu
2.8.6.5.1 CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM ZOOM

The constellation diagram displayed can be zoomed by factor 4 using the CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
ZOOM key. To select the quadrant, press the softkey repeatedly.
• OFF: normal display of constellation diagram
• Q1: positive I components and positive Q components
• Q2: negative I components and positive Q components
• Q3: negative I components and negative Q components
• Q4: positive I components and negative Q components
THE SPEC FUNC LED lights up when a zoomed display of the constellation diagram is selected.
Fig. 2.8-32 Zoomed constellation diagram of 1st quadrant
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.29
2.8.6.5.2 Selecting the VSB PARAMETER MER% / EVM%
The VSB PARA/HISTORY/ALARM softkey is used to select whether the modulation error ratio (MER)
or the error vector magnitude (EVM) is shown in the linear display (in %). The selection MER% refers
the modulation error to the average signal power. If EVM% is selected, the measured value is referred
to the maximum amplitude.
The selection affects the following functions:
• MEASURE: VSB PARAMETERS, see 2.8.8.6.1
• MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: HISTORY: CONFIG 2nd SCREEN, see 2.8.8.5.4
• ALARM, see 2.8.7.1
• MEASURE, see 2.8.8.1.2
2.8.6.5.3 MEASURE DISPLAY
This key is used to configure the appearance of the MEASURE menu. In the FULL position, a detailed
MEASURE menu is offered with numerous types of display. In the PARTIAL position, a definable
measured value can be zoomed in so that it can be read at a distance of some meters. The measured
value to be zoomed in is selected by means of the MEASUREMENT ZOOM key (see below).
Fig. 2.8-33 Measurement window in the MEASURE DISPLAY: FULL (left) and PARTIAL (right)
settings (example: BER BEFORE RS)
In the PARTIAL mode, the following parameters are not displayed due to the zoom window being
selected:
• SET CENTER FREQUENCY,

• SET PILOT FREQUENCY,
• CALC PILOT FREQ,
• PILOT FREQ OFFSET and
• SYMBOL RATE OFFSET.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.30
2.8.6.5.4 MEASUREMENT ZOOM
The MEASUREMENT ZOOM key can be used to select the measured value to be zoomed in if the
MEASUREMENT ZOOM: PARTIAL mode is selected. One of eight measured values can be selected
for zoom display (see example in Fig. 2.8-33):
FREQUENCY OFFS (frequency offset)
LEVEL,
BER BEFORE RS (bit error ratio before Reed-Solomon decoder),
BER AFTER RS (bit error ratio after Reed-Solomon decoder),
SYMB RATE OFFS (symbol rate offset in Hz),
MER/EVM% (MER or EVM in % depending on setting in SPEC FUNC: DISPLAY: VSB PARA/
HISTORY/ ALARM),
MER dB (modulation error ratio in dB),
ERR/s (segment error ratio).
2.8.6.5.5 PILOT REF POS (SPECTRUM)
This key allows the nominal position of the pilot carrier to be shown in the display when a spectrum
measurement is carried out in the MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: SPECTRUM menu. The
nominal value for frequency and level is indicated by means of crosshairs in the display. The frequency
of the pilot carrier is determined using the set pilot carrier frequency or channel center frequency and
calculation over the set symbol rate. Inversion of the frequency (NORMAL/INVERTED, see section
2.8.6.2.1, is also taken into account). The nominal level is calculated from the received total power of
the receive signals.
2.8.6.6 BER/FEC
This menu allows settings to be made for the bit-error-ratio measurement.
Fig. 2.8-34 SPECIAL FUNCTION: BER/FEC menu
The MIN BER INTEGRATION (SAMPLES) key can be used to influence the integration characteristics
of the BER measurement. For details of the operating principle and application of this function, see
section 2.8.10.2. The preset value is 10 samples.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.31
2.8.7 ALARM Menu

2.8.7 ALARM Menu............................................................................................................. 2.8.32

2.8.7.2 Alarm Register ............................................................................................................ 2.8.33
The alarm register is an internal memory where all alarm messages are stored together with their
respective date and time. The memory has a depth of 1000 lines and is in the form of a ring register.
Every second the EFA checks whether any of the following errors has occurred in the 8VSB/ATSC
signal:
• Input level (LV): level at the RF or IF inputs below the threshold value
• Synchronization (SY): 8VSB synchronization or frame synchronization of the MPEG2 transport
stream;
• Logarithmic modulation error ratio (ME) below the set threshold value;
• Linear error vector magnitude / linear modulation error ratio (EV) above the set threshold value;
• BER before Reed-Solomon decoder (BR) below the threshold value
• Data error in MPEG2 transport stream caused by uncorrectable events (DE).
since the register was called up last. The LED goes out when the alarm register is called up with the
ALARM key. An example is given in section 2.8.7.1.
All alarm messages are also made available electrically (positive logic) at the USER PORT as the TTL
interface. For an alarm message to be output, the alarm criterion must be fulfilled and the alarm
activated, see section 2.8.7.1. The message is active as long as the alarm criterion persists. The alarm
thresholds are configurable, see section 2.8.7.3. In addition to the individual messages, a summary
alarm message (SUM ALARM) is output. The summary alarm message is obtained by ORing the
individual alarms.
Pin assignment of the USER PORT connector:
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Alarm Pin
Sum alarm 1
Level 2
MPEG TS Sync 18
MER dB 19
EVM/MER % 20
BER BEFORE RS 22
Data Error 23
Ground 40 to 48
+5 V (200 mA) 49, 50
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.32
Any of the alarm messages can be disabled so that it is not entered in the alarm register. This is done
by pressing the ALARM key in the MAIN FUNCTION block and then the ALARM CONFIG:
REGISTER... softkey. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-36 ALARM: CONFIG menu
should not be signalled, select DISABLED. Pressing this key again switches back to ENABLED. Any
change in the configuration is stored in the alarm register. If an alarm is disabled, the EFA enters a " ∗ ∗
" in the relevant column. An enabled alarm is indicated by " - - ".
Disabling the alarm is only useful, for instance, if the cable-network operator is not interested in the data
errors (DE). In this case, the lines available in the alarm register may be used for relevant messages.
be signalled via seven integrated relays (floating signalling lines). To configure the relays, press
ALARM: CONFIG: RELAYS... . The following window appears (provided the associated hardware is
fitted):
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.33
present. In the NONE position, an alarm is not signalled to any relay. Please note that for signalling to
The relays are connected to the USER PORT connector (X34) as follows:
X34-26 X34-27 X34-28 X34-29 X34-30 X34-31 X34-32 X34-25
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Relay X34, pin

R1 26
R2 27
R3 28
R4 29
R5 30
R6 31
R7 32
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.34
Every second the EFA checks whether any of the following errors has occurred in the 8VSB/ATSC
signal:
• Input level (LV): level at the RF or IF inputs below the threshold value
• Synchronization (SY): 8VSB synchronization or frame synchronization of the MPEG2 transport
stream;
• Logarithmic modulation error ratio (ME) below the threshold value;
• Linear error vector magnitude / linear modulation error ratio (EV) above the threshold value;
• BER before Reed-Solomon decoder (BR) below the threshold value
• Data error in MPEG2 transport stream caused by uncorrectable events (DE).
If one of the above errors is identified, it is entered in the register with the abbreviation in brackets (for
how to disable messages: see section 2.8.7.1). Please note the following:
• If, for instance, several data errors occur within one second, the data error messages (DE) are
combined to form one entry.
• Alarm messages are not registered every second in the alarm register. An alarm is recorded once at
the time when it (e.g. "BR") first occurs, and at the time when it disappears for the first time ( " - - " ).
• When an alarm has been DISABLED in the ALARM CONFIG... menu, two asterisks ( " ∗ ∗ " ) are
entered in the relevant column. They indicate that an alarm has been masked and cannot trigger an
alarm message. For technical reasons, MER and EVM cannot be calculated with the following
measurements: constellation diagram, histogram I/Q, spectrum, amplitude distribution, CCDF and
pilot value. While these measurements are active, the MER and EVM measurements are also
marked with the two asterisks ( " ∗ ∗ " ).
• The alarm messages are always entered in the associated column of the alarm register. They are in
the following order (from left to right): LV SY ME EV BR DE.
Pressing the ALARM key in the MAIN FUNCTION block causes the alarm register to appear on the LC
Alarm messages are entered in the register in chronological order. The most recent entry is entered in
the bottom line. Pressing the LINE: NEWEST softkey displays the line entered last at the bottom of the
screen. The number at the beginning of each line indicates the line of the alarm register currently
displayed.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.35
When LINE: MAN is selected, any line of the alarm register can be displayed by entering a number
(confirm with ENTER) or by means of the cursor keys. Any new messages that arrive continue to be
entered in the register. The current alarm message is displayed again when the LINE: NEWEST softkey
is pressed. The register contains 1000 lines. When this number is reached, the oldest messages are
automatically overwritten by the newest ones, starting at line 0. In this case, the entry in line 0 is the
newest and not the oldest entry.
Three entries in the alarm register are made automatically by the EFA without an alarm message being
received:
• Date and time when the register was cleared (REGISTER CLEARED).
• Date an time to which the internal system clock was changed last (TIME CHANGED).
• Date and time at which the user disabled ( "∗ ∗" ) or enabled (e.g. " - - " ) an alarm.
The EFA continuously monitors the applied 8VSB/ATSC signal for compliance with set limit values.
These limit values are error thresholds. If one of these limits is exceeded, the ALARM LED on the front
panel lights and a message with date and time is entered in the alarm register, provided that this type of
alarm has not been disabled (see section 2.8.7.1). This applies to the following parameters:
• LEVEL: Monitoring of input level (40.0 dBµV = -67.0 dBm at 50 Ω)

• MER dB: Monitoring of modulation error ratio (30.00 dB);
• MER % / EVM %: Monitoring of error vector magnitude (2.00 %);
• BER BEFORE RS: Monitoring of bit error ratio before Reed-Solomon decoder (2.0 E-4);
Values in brackets are preset in the EFA (PRESET values).
To change the thresholds, press the ALARM THRESH... key in the ALARM menu. The following menu
is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-40 ALARM THRESHOLD menu
The level control limit value is set by pressing the LEVEL key. The limit value is always entered in the
unit in which the measured level is displayed. The unit of the measured level can be defined in the
SETUP: LEVEL UNITS... menu. The setting range is 20 dBµV to 130 dBµV (-87 dBm to +23 dBm for an
input impedance of 50 Ω). The entry of the limit value is confirmed with the ENTER key.
The limit value settings for the modulation error ratio MER (dB) are carried out by pressing the
appropriate key. A numeric value can now be directly entered.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.36
The limit value settings for the modulation error ratio MER % or the error vector magnitude EVM %
are carried out by pressing the appropriate key. A numeric value can now be directly entered. For
details refer to section 2.8.6.5.2.
The limit value setting for the bit error ratio before the Reed-Solomon decoder is carried out by
pressing the appropriate key. A numeric value can now be directly entered. The lowest useful threshold
that can be entered is 0.1E-15. In this case an alarm is triggered whenever the BER is not 0.0. Note
that the exponent entered should always be a two-digit number. If only one digit is required it should be
completed by a leading 0 (e.g. 2.1E-04). The setting range is 0.1E-15 to 5.0E-03.
Note 1: BER before Reed-Solomon decoder:

A BER of 2.0E-4 at the Reed-Solomon decoder input yields a BER of approx. 1E-11 at the
Reed-Solomon decoder output (MPEG2 transport stream) in the presence of Gaussian
distributed white noise.
Note 2: If 0.1E-15 is chosen as the alarm limit value, a period of 12 years is required until this
resolution (0.1E-15) is obtained for the maximum possible net data rate with 8VSB/ATSC.
This period is necessary to transmit 1E+16 bits via the 8VSB/ATSC channel. However, the
BER measurement is hardware designed up to the value of 0.1E-15.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.37
The EFA can statistically evaluate the messages recorded in the alarm register. The evaluation takes
into account the whole monitoring period, i.e. all the alarm messages that occurred between the last
entry of REGISTER CLEARED or TIME CHANGED and calling up the statistics function. The evaluated
period is indicated in the statistics (MONITORING TIME). The statistics function is called up by pressing
the ALARM function key and then the STATISTICS... softkey. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-41 ALARM: STATISTICS menu
The displayed times are the sums of times during which an alarm was active over the monitoring period.
In the case of the MPEG DATA ERROR TIME (DE) message, the number of events (to be more
precise, the duration of the event in seconds) is summed.
Statistical values are additionally converted and indicated as an error in %. The percentage values are
always referred to the elapsed monitoring time (MONITORING TIME). A value of 0.13 % for MPEG
DATA ERROR TIME would mean that faulty MPEG2 data was received for 0.13% of the monitoring
period. At this point, it is not possible to distinguish whether the error lasted for one second or whether it
Information on the frequency of occurrence of the error or correction events is provided by the MPEG
DATA ERROR CNT AFTER RS and CORR CNT BEFORE RS counters, which indicate the absolute
number of faulty MPEG2 frames detected (MPEG DATA ERROR CNT, 1 frame comprises 188 payload
bytes) or the absolute number of corrected bytes (CORR CNT BEFORE RS). When the alarm register is
cleared, the two counters are reset to 0. The counting limit is 4 294 836 225. When this figure is
reached, the counter stops.
To allow accurate and easy reading, the statistics display is not constantly updated. If required, the
Note: The two counters MPEG DATA ERROR CNT AFTER RS and CORR CNT BEFORE RS
are reset to 0 when the alarm register is cleared. If in the course of time more than 1000
entries are made in the alarm register, the MONITORING TIME in the register and the
statistical calculation are referred to the period indicated in the register, but the two
counters are not reset. They show the total count since the register was cleared even if
there are more than 1000 entries in the alarm register.
The statistics help the user to assess the 8VSB/ATSC signal over an extended period of time. The error
indication in % is particularly important as a proof of the correct functioning of a transmission link.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.38
The currently displayed screen content can be printed at any time by simply pressing the HARDCOPY
key. A precondition is that the printer driver in the SETUP: PRINTER menu has been set correctly.
Since there are many different options for printing the alarm register or parts thereof, these are offered
in a separate menu. This menu can be opened by pressing the ALARM key in the MAIN FUNCTION
block and then the PRINT softkey. The following menu will be displayed:
Fig. 2.8-42 ALARM: PRINT menu
The alarm register continues to be displayed; only the softkeys have changed. Now the desired printout
can be selected. Pressing the ACTUAL key once switches the EFA to a status in which the header of
the hardcopy with the most important settings is printed first. Each alarm message that subsequently
arrives is then output separately to the printer. In this case, the ACTUAL field is in inverse video. This
function is disabled when the ACTUAL key is pressed again. It is used to continuously record incoming
alarm messages. Date and time are indicated in each printed line.
Note: If no printer is connected or if a connected printer has run out of paper, an error message is
displayed briefly in the EFA display and the print job is interrupted. This also happens when
the current line is printed (PRINT: ACTUAL). After the error has been eliminated (e.g. a
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.39
Pressing the LAST LINES... key allows any number of lines to be printed starting from the alarm
message received last. To select this function, press the LAST LINES... softkey. The following menu is
displayed:
Fig. 2.8-43 ALARM: PRINT: LAST LINES... menu
The value can be varied by an entry via the numeric keypad (terminate with ENTER) or by means of the
The procedure for printing alarm messages with LINE... is very similar. In contrast to the printout
selected with LAST LINES..., any group of lines in the alarm register can be printed. The EFA asks for
the numbers of the start and end line, which can be entered separately. Entries are made in the way
described for the printout selected with LAST LINES... . When the PRINT key is pressed, the alarm
messages pertaining to the selected lines are printed. If the start-line number is higher than the stop-line
Example:
START LINE = 995

STOP LINE = 005
Print jobs that have been started can be aborted with the ABORT key.
The alarm register of the EFA is cleared automatically when

• the supply voltage is switched on, or
• the PRESET key is pressed.
The register can also be cleared manually. This is done by pressing the ALARM function key and then
Pressing the YES softkey clears the register completely, and the date and time of clearing are entered
in line 0 of the register. New alarm messages can now be entered in the register.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.40
2.8.8 MEASURE Menu

The Test Receiver EFA-ATSC offers the user a large number of different measurements for assessing
the transmission quality of 8VSB signals. It is recommended that you read the following operating
instructions in order to utilize the various capabilities of the instrument. This section is structured as
follows:
2.8.8 MEASURE Menu........................................................................................................ 2.8.41

2.8.8.1 Measurement Mask..................................................................................................... 2.8.42
2.8.8.1.1 Level Measurement..................................................................................................... 2.8.43
2.8.8.1.2 Modulation................................................................................................................... 2.8.44
2.8.8.1.3 PILOT FREQUENCY OFFSET Measurement............................................................ 2.8.44
2.8.8.1.4 SYMBOL RATE OFFSET and TS BIT RATE Measurements .................................... 2.8.45
2.8.8.1.5 BER Measurement...................................................................................................... 2.8.46
2.8.8.1.6 SEGMENT ERROR RATIO Measurement ................................................................. 2.8.46
2.8.8.1.7 SEGMENT ERROR / s Measurement ........................................................................ 2.8.46
2.8.8.1.8 Messages in the Measurement Window..................................................................... 2.8.47
2.8.8.2.1 Symbol Counter, HOLD and FREEZE ........................................................................ 2.8.50
2.8.8.3 Histograms .................................................................................................................. 2.8.51
2.8.8.3.1 Histogram I.................................................................................................................. 2.8.51
2.8.8.3.2 Histogram Q ................................................................................................................ 2.8.52
2.8.8.4 Measurements in the Frequency Domain................................................................... 2.8.53
2.8.8.4.1 Measuring the Frequency Spectrum........................................................................... 2.8.53
2.8.8.4.2 Amplitude/Phase/Group-Delay Frequency Response and Polar Plot ........................ 2.8.58
2.8.8.5.1 Amplitude Distribution and CCDF ............................................................................... 2.8.63
2.8.8.5.2 Measuring the Channel Impulse Response (Ghost Pattern) ...................................... 2.8.67
2.8.8.5.3 Measuring EYE MONITORING................................................................................... 2.8.68
2.8.8.5.4 HISTORY Measurement ............................................................................................. 2.8.70
2.8.8.6 8VSB Parameters ....................................................................................................... 2.8.74
2.8.8.6.1 MODULATION ERROR RATIO and ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE ...................... 2.8.74
2.8.8.6.2 SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO............................................................................................... 2.8.77
2.8.8.6.3 PHASE JITTER........................................................................................................... 2.8.79
2.8.8.6.4 PILOT VALUE ............................................................................................................. 2.8.79
2.8.8.7 Noise Generator (ADD NOISE) .................................................................................. 2.8.80
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.41
The Test Receiver EFA-ATSC includes a measurement window in which all the main parameters are
displayed. To activate this, press the MEASURE key in the function key block. With synchronized
demodulator, for example, the following menu is displayed:
The main settings (receive frequency, attenuator setting) and the measured level are displayed in the
status line at the top of the screen. This status line is displayed in most menus.
In the main field of the measurement window, the most important measurements are displayed
according to the generic terms FREQUENCY, MODULATION, and BER (bit error ratio) / SEG ERR
(Segment Error).
The bottom quarter of the main field indicates, among other things, additional instrument settings such
as the SAW filter bandwidth (STATUS: SAW FILTER BW menu). Furthermore, messages concerning
the synchronization status of the instrument are displayed, as well as others. See section 2.8.8.1.8,
Messages in the Measurement Window. If the demodulator/decoder is synchronized, the measured
MPEG transport stream rate TS BIT RATE is displayed.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.42
2.8.8.1.1 Level Measurement
The EFA-ATSC calculates the receive level via the automatic gain control (AGC) voltage, which
controls the gain control elements of the receiver. A PI regulator controls the gain control elements so
that the demodulation level is always kept constant. This means that there is a fixed relationship
between the AGC voltage and the level at the receiver input. The EFA-ATSC uses this relationship for
level measurements. The level value displayed corresponds to the rms value of the received signal.
The level measurement bandwidth corresponds to the receiver bandwidth selected. This depends on
the receiver input and SAW filter selected, as well as the HIGH ADJACENT CHANNEL POWER mode.
Selectivity characteristics of the RF inputs and SAW filter, see section 2.8.10.1.
Note: The HIGH ADJACENT CHANNEL POWER mode is recommended if adjacent-channel
transmitters are received which are considerably more powerful than the in-channel power
received.
Automatic control of the receiver input attenuator is carried out via level measurement. The attenuation
currently set is displayed in the header above the measured level value, e.g. ATTEN: 45 dB. If the
signal level at the selected receiver input cannot be levelled out by the automatic gain control (AGC),
the message "UNDER" is displayed if the receiver level is too low. If the level is too high, "OVER" is
displayed. The measured level always refers to the receiver input selected and is updated every second
on the display. The level unit is configured in the SETUP: LEVEL UNITS menu. The level calculation
takes into account whether the 50 Ω or 75 Ω input of the receiver is selected.
Note: UNDER or OVER may be displayed when the receiver input attenuator has been set
manually.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.43
2.8.8.1.2 Modulation
The MODULATION message in the second quarter of the main field of the measurement window
indicates immediately whether the demodulator/decoder is synchronized to the applied signal. If the
demodulator/decoder is synchronized, "8VSB" is displayed. If the receiver is unable to synchronize to
the receive signal, "- - -" is displayed. All the other measured values in this window are then
suppressed, and "- - -" is displayed in each case. Possible causes of a non-synchronized
demodulator/decoder include:
• input level too low (measured level UNDER is displayed),
• input level too high (measured level OVER is displayed),
• receiver attenuator control set to manual (INPUT menu), see section 2.8.3,
• large adjacent-channel carrier causing interference with reception (switch to HIGH ADJACENT
CHANNEL POWER mode in INPUT: ATTEN) menu, see section 2.8.3,
• wrong receiver input selected (INPUT menu), see section 2.8.3,
• receiver frequency set incorrectly (control via the SIDEBAND POSITION function), see section
2.8.4,
• symbol rate set incorrectly (STATUS menu), see section 2.8.5.1,
• sideband set incorrectly (RF or SPECIAL FUNCTION: FREQUENCY SETTING menu), see section
2.8.6.2.
For other causes, see also 2.8.8.1.8 Messages in the Measurement Window.
The MER (modulation error ratio) and EVM (error vector magnitude) are displayed in the same segment
of the measurement window. These values reflect the quality of the 8VSB signal. They indicate the ratio
of the error vector to the signal power. For more information on determining the modulation error, see
section 2.8.8.6.1.
The only difference in determining the MER or EVM modulation error is the reference. In the SPEC
FUNC: DISPLAY: VSB PARA / HISTORY / ALARM menu, users can select whether the modulation
error should be specified in the form of MER % or EVM %, depending on which factor they are more
familiar with.
2.8.8.1.3 PILOT FREQUENCY OFFSET Measurement
The difference between the pilot carrier frequency set in the RF menu and that measured is indicated
by means of the PILOT FREQUENCY OFFSET parameter. The PILOT FREQUENCY OFFSET is
defined as follows:
Pilot Frequency Offset = Measured Pilot Frequency − Set Pilot Frequency
The resolution for the measured value is 0.1 Hz. For error-free synchronization of the EFA-ATSC, the
frequency offset can be 150 kHz. If the receiver is not synchronized, "- - -" is displayed. In addition to
the frequency offset, the SET PILOT FREQUENCY and SET CENTER FREQUENCY are displayed in
the measurement window. The channel center frequency and pilot frequency are coupled to one
another via the symbol rate. The measured pilot frequency is displayed in the CALC PILOT
FREQUENCY line.
With the sideband of the receive signal in accordance with the ATSC standard (upper sideband) the
following holds:
Symbol Rate
Center Frequency = Pilot Frequency +
4
If the lower sideband is transmitted, the following holds:
Symbol Rate
Center Frequency = Pilot Frequency −
4
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.44
2.8.8.1.4 SYMBOL RATE OFFSET and TS BIT RATE Measurements
The symbol rate determines the bandwidth of the 8VSB signal and is therefore the most important
transmission parameter. The symbol rate of an 8VSB transmitter should be within very tight limits to
ensure error-free operation. The symbol rate is stipulated by the 8VSB/ATSC standard as
10.7622378 Msymbols/s, with a permissible tolerance of 30 symbols/s. This corresponds to a relative
offset of
30 Symb/s
rel. Offset ≤ = 2.811 ⋅ •10 −6 = 2.811 ppm .
10762258 Symb/s
The TV Test Receiver EFA measures the symbol rate of the received 8VSB signal, compares the
measured symbol rate with the symbol rate set by the user, and displays the symbol rate offset as an
absolute value in Hz.
Symbol Rate Offset = Measured Symbol Rate - Set Symbol Rate
The resolution of the measured value is 0.1 Hz; If no external reference signal is applied, the accuracy
is typically less than ±1 ppm (10.8 Hz). With EFA models, permitting an external 10 MHz reference
signal to be used (standard as of January 2003), an accuracy of ±0.1 Hz can be achieved. The 8VSB
Test Receiver EFA-ATSC can correctly synchronize signals with an offset of ±150 ppm.
In the case of a synchronized 8VSB signal, the MPEG transport stream rate (TS BIT RATE) in Mbit/s is
displayed below the dotted line in the measurement window. This value is calculated from the measured
symbol rate.
TS Bit Rate Measured Symbol Rate 2 312 188

= ∗3∗ ∗ ∗
MBit/s MSymb/s 3 313 208
The factors are yielded by the
• modulation mode (8 amplitude steps = 23 )→ 3,

• Viterbi error protection with the code rate → 2/3,
• field sync word → 312/313 and
• Reed-Solomon error protection → 188/208.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.45
During normal operation, the Test Receiver EFA-ATSC continuously calculates the BER. The bit error
ratios before and after the Reed-Solomon decoder are displayed. The BER measurements are carried
out completely automatically and independently of each other. The instrument selects the required
integration rate depending on the error rate measured. The integration rate is indicated in brackets after
the measured value. It is always specified in "samples".
The first value in brackets indicates the number of samples currently recorded. The second value
shows the number of samples used by the instrument after the measurement has been completed (last
count). The indication (1K33/10K0) means that 1330 of the 10000 desired measurement results (last
count) have already been collected and stored. Of course, the BER can be evaluated now, but the
accuracy is not of optimum value. The first value is regularly increased until the last count is reached.
When the counter final value is reached, a switchover is made to the next highest value (running BER
calculation): the last 10, 100, 1000, 10 K, 100 K, 1 M, 10 M, 100 M or 1 G samples (depending on the
final value required) are combined to form one measured value so that a new set of values is obtained
for each new sample. The great advantage of this method is that the indicated BER is always the most
recent value, i.e. the measured value is continuously updated. The system is also flexible enough to
immediately reduce the number of integrated samples should a sudden deterioration of the input signal
quality occur.
• a basic system setting (e.g. ADD. NOISE) has been modified,

• the RESET BER key in the measure menu is pressed.
For further information on BER measurements, see section 2.8.10.2.
2.8.8.1.6 SEGMENT ERROR RATIO Measurement
Simultaneously with the calculation of the bit error ratio BER, the Test Receiver EFA-ATSC computes
the ratio of incorrectly transmitted segments during normal reception. A segment is defined as a 188-
byte MPEG2 frame.
In the calculation of the segment error ratio, the integration rate is determined separately according to
the principle used for calculating the bit error ratio. The integration rate is indicated in brackets to the
right of the measured value.
2.8.8.1.7 SEGMENT ERROR / s Measurement
In contrast to the segment error ratio, the SEG ERR / s measurement yields the number of faulty
MPEG2 frames in the last second. If no error occurs in the MPEG data stream, "00000" is displayed. If
a data error does occur, the number of faulty segments is displayed for one second.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.46
2.8.8.1.8 Messages in the Measurement Window
If the demodulator/decoder has not synchronized to the input signal, the TS BIT RATE value in the
measurement window is replaced by the messages:
¾ MPEG TS UNSYNC and

¾ CARRIER LOOP OUT OF LOCK
If troubleshooting is carried out, the measured level should be taken into account.
The meaning of the messages and their possible sources are as follows:
CARRIER LOOP OUT Clock rate recovery or carrier recovery not Receive frequency (pilot carrier frequency or
OF LOCK synchronized. The message CARRIER channel center frequency) set incorrectly.
LOOP OUT OF LOCK always appears
together with the message MPEG TS Symbol rate set incorrectly.
UNSYNC.
Sideband selection set incorrectly.
Amplitude noise of receive signal too high.
Phase noise of receive signal too high.
SAW filter deactivated although adjacent

channels are occupied.
RF input attenuator set to incorrect value in

manual control.
Receiver overdriven by very strong adjacent

channels (>20 dB above useful signal level);
in this case, HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER
mode can be selected (INPUT: ATTEN).
Other modulator or transmitter error
MPEG TS UNSYNC No MPEG2 sync word found. Signal to be measured does not include an
MPEG2 transport stream. This is the case,
for example, if the 8VSB Modulator SFQ is
set to "PRBS before Viterbi" or the BER is
too large.
Table 2.8-6 Meaning of measurement
The bottom line of the measurement window displays the SAW filter setting. The SAW filter can be set
in the STATUS: SAW FILTER BANDWIDTH menu. If the respective condition is met, the bottom line
also displays the following messages:
• NREJ: ON
This message appears if a filter for suppressing NTSC-Co channels has been activated. This filter
can be set in the STATUS: REJECTION FILTER menu. For details, see section 2.8.5.3
(REJECTION FILTER).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.47
• HADJ: ON:
This message appears if EFA has been optimized for receiving weak signals in the presence of
strong adjacent channel signals (high adjacent channel power). This option is available in the EFA
model 53 with option B3 or in the EFA model 50. Optimization can be activated in the INPUT:
ATTEN: HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER menu. For details, see section 2.8.3 (INPUT Menu/Input
Selection).
• SELFTEST ERROR CODE:
If a hardware-related error occurs, the SELFTEST ERROR CODE is displayed in the bottom line of
the measurement window. The decoded SELFTEST ERROR message is displayed in the
PRESET:SERVICE: SELFTEST menu. To display this message, press the PRESET, SERVICE
and SELFTEST keys. The menu is typically as follows:
Fig. 2.8-45 PRESET: SERVICE: SELFTEST menu
A distinction is drawn between messages that indicate hardware faults (such as 56 MHz CLOCK, which
means that the 56 MHz clock generator has failed) and messages that indicate a currently non-
synchronized state (e.g. ATSC or MPEG TS, which indicate a non-synchronized demodulator/decoder).
If an 8VSB signal is synchronized, all the messages should be displayed as OK. In the lower part of the
screen, the test results are displayed. These can be used by trained service personnel to carry out
troubleshooting.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.48
Note: For technical reasons, MER and EVM cannot be calculated in the background (ALARM,
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) while the constellation diagram is displayed.
The EFA-ATSC is switched to the constellation analyzer mode by pressing the CONSTELL
DIAGRAM... key. The constellation diagram is an extremely useful tool for assessing the quality of the
transmitted signal. Fig. 2.8-46 shows a correctly synchronized constellation diagram for an 8VSB
transmission. The constellation diagram can be considered as a plane of complex numerical values,
each value in this plane being defined by its inphase component (I component, horizontal axis) and its
quadrature component (Q component, vertical axis). The complex numerical values can be interpreted
as amplitude and phase, the amplitude being measured from the center of the diagram. The pilot
carrier, which shifts the constellation in the I direction, is not displayed if the equalizer is activated, see
Fig. 2.8-46
Fig. 2.8-46 MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM: CONST DIAG menu with activated
equalizer
If the equalizer is deactivated in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: EQUALIZER menu, the nominal pilot carrier
value of 1.25 of the I component is deducted. Deviations of the pilot carrier value from its nominal value
are then visible in the constellation diagram, see Fig. 2.8-47.
Fig. 2.8-47 MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM: CONST DIAG menu with deactivated
equalizer and pilot carrier value of 0.75
The decision field limits are entered in the constellation diagram as vertical lines. All the measured
values within such a decision field are assigned to a specific identical bit pattern in the demapping
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.49
block. The more measured values lie in the center of such a decision field, the larger is the margin of
the transmission link for interference such as noise. When 8VSB signals are demodulated, only the
inphase component is evaluated. The quadrature component is not evaluated. The horizontal line
represents the zero line of the Q component.
For a detailed evaluation, the constellation diagram display can be zoomed by factor 4. The quadrant is
set and selected in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu, see section 2.8.6.5.1.
2.8.8.2.1 Symbol Counter, HOLD and FREEZE
The user can adapt the constellation diagram display to his requirements by means of the SYMBOL
CNT, HOLD, and FREEZE keys.
The desired symbol number is set by pressing the SYMBOL CNT key and then entering a number via
the numeric keypad (confirm with ENTer). The value entered is limited to 999 999 999 displayed
symbols. The HOLD key can be used to display more symbols. In this case, the editor window of
SYMBOL CNT indicates "infinite". The previously selected number of symbols is displayed by pressing
the SYMBOL CNT key again.
If the number of symbols is very large, it would take a very long time to display a complete
measurement with the required number of symbols. For this reason, the screen is refreshed at regular
intervals to provide the user with a first impression of the measurement even if the required number of
symbols has not yet been reached. The count of the symbol counter is also displayed at the top of the
measurement window.
Note: The calculation of the 8VSB parameters is independent of the symbol counter setting.
The FREEZE: ON key is used to freeze the measurement window currently displayed. This function is
useful if, for instance, a particular event should be halted on the display for printing. The measurement
continues in the background, however, and can be reactivated by pressing the key again (FREEZE:
OFF).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.50
2.8.8.3 Histograms
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) while the histogram is displayed.
As an alternative to the constellation diagram, Histogram I or Histogram Q can be displayed in the

MEASURE: CONSTELL DIAGRAM menu. The histograms show the frequency distribution versus the I
or Q components. The functions with SYMBOL CNT, HOLD and FREEZE correspond to those of the
constellation diagram. Scaling is carried out automatically and cannot be set manually. The SCALE key
is used to select either the linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) display. The display shows the density of
the distribution function.
2.8.8.3.1 Histogram I
The HISTOGRAM I measurement function calculates the amplitude distribution of the I component. Fig.
2.8-48shows the typical distribution of the I component of an 8VSB/ATSC signal. For calculating the
frequency distribution, the symbol counter can be set from 1 to 999 999 999. The HOLD key can be
used to process a greater number of symbols. In this case, the editor window of SYMBOL CNT
indicates "infinite". The previously selected number of symbols is reset by pressing the SYMBOL CNT
key again. The symbols that have already been processed for the calculation are displayed at the top of
the measurement window. In the example below, Fig. 2.8-48, 1 million symbols (1.00000E+06
SYMBOLS PROCESSED) have been processed for the calculation. Once the desired number of
symbols has been reached, the measured data is continuously updated (pipeline structure).
Fig. 2.8-48 The MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM: HISTOGRAM I menu with

logarithmic scale
The abscissa is scaled in amplitude steps from -8 to +8, with the decision limit fields at the amplitude
steps -6, -4, -2, 0, +2, +4 and +6. The current relative frequency (integral calculation of the density over
the decision field in question) is indicated as a numeric value at the top of the display. With an ideal
uniform distribution, 0.125 symbol components would be allotted to each of the eight decision field.
Since for 8VSB/ATSC the synchronization pulse is defined at ±5, more components can be found in
these decision fields.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.51
2.8.8.3.2 Histogram Q
The HISTOGRAM Q measurement function calculates the amplitude distribution of the Q component.
Fig. 2.8-49 shows the typical distribution of the Q component of an 8VSB/ATSC signal. For calculating
the amplitude distribution, the symbol counter can be set from 1 to 999 999 999. The HOLD key can be
used to process a greater number of symbols. In this case, the editor window of SYMBOL CNT
indicates "infinite". The previously selected number of symbols is reset by pressing the SYMBOL CNT
key again. The symbols already processed for the calculation are displayed at the top of the measuring
menu. In the example below, Fig. 2.8-49, 1 million symbols (1.00000E+06 SYMBOLS PROCESSED)
have been processed for the calculation. Once the desired number of symbols has been reached, the
measured data is continuously updated.
Fig. 2.8-49 MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM: HISTOGRAM Q menu with linear scale
The abscissa here is also scaled in amplitude steps from -8 to +8. With 8VSB modulation, the Q
component is not evaluated. The current relative frequency is displayed as a numeric value for each
decision field.
The functions SYMBOL CNT, HOLD, FREEZE, and SCALE correspond to the HISTOGRAM I
measurement, see section 2.8.8.3.1.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.52
2.8.8.4.1 Measuring the Frequency Spectrum
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) while the spectrum is displayed.
The spectrum measurement function is started by pressing the MEASURE hardkey and then the
FREQUENCY DOMAIN and SPECTRUM softkeys. The measurement is based on the sampled values
of the input signal. The input signal is sampled after the receiver input selection. This means that the
measurement range (frequency span) is determined by the SAW filter selected in the STATUS menu.
For further details, see section 2.8.5.2. The samples are transformed to the frequency domain by
means of a fast Fourier transform (FFT). The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-50 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: SPECTRUM menu with pilot carrier frequency
value displayed. The reference frequency is the channel center frequency.
The level scale is normalized to the total power. This must be taken into account if an adjacent-channel
transmitter is received and OFF or 8.0 MHz is selected in the STATUS: SAW FILTER BW menu. The
level scale is set automatically and cannot be modified manually.
The scaling of the frequency axis is relative to the RF or IF set in the INPUT menu. The numeric values
of the frequency axis refer to the reference frequency (channel center frequency or pilot carrier
frequency) specified in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: FREQUENCY SETTINGS: RF FIXED menu. If the
pilot carrier frequency is selected as the reference frequency and all other conditions are unchanged,
the display is as follows:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.53
Fig. 2.8-51 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: SPECTRUM menu with pilot carrier frequency
displayed. The reference frequency is the pilot carrier frequency.
If the signal spectrum is inverted due to internal mechanisms, this is taken into account in the display
and corrected. In other words, the spectrum of the signal referred to the receiver input is always
displayed (lower frequency on the left, higher frequency on the right).
SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY can be used to display the nominal value of the pilot carrier by means
of crosshairs. If the demodulator/decoder is not synchronized, this function shows quickly whether the
transmitted pilot carrier power, the transmitted or set pilot carrier frequency, and the symbol rate are
correct.
Measuring shoulder attenuation

To measure the shoulder attenuation, press the MEASURE key and then the FREQUENCY DOMAIN...
and SPECTRUM softkeys. The shoulder attenuation measurement is carried out in accordance with the
recommendations of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC).
According to FCC, the spurious emissions in the adjacent channels must be <-47 dB in the first 500 kHz
referred to the total in-channel power. From the frequency offset ∆f of 500 kHz from the channel limit,
the spurious emissions must decrease according to the formula
Attenuation / dB = −11.5 ( ∆f + 3.6)
where ∆f is the frequency offset from the channel limit in MHz.
The FCC tolerance mask is shown in Fig. 2.8-52. To measure the spurious emission, the rms value
referred to a bandwidth of 500 kHz must be taken into account. Shoulder attenuation denotes the power
ratio of the total in-channel power (including pilot signal) to the rms power of the first 500 kHz in the
adjacent channel. A distinction is drawn between the shoulder attenuation in the lower and upper
adjacent channel. According to FCC, the spurious emission can be measured with a measurement
bandwidth of less than 500 kHz, but must be converted to a bandwidth of 500 kHz to calculate the
shoulder attenuation.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.54
Attenuation
Reference = Total average DTV power including pilot signal
0 dB
-10 dB
Shoulder attenuation of
upper adjacent channel

Shoulder attenuation of
lower adjacent channel
-20 dB
-30 dB
-40 dB
-47 dB -47 dB
-50 dB
FCC mask
FCC mask
-60 dB
-70 dB
-80 dB
-90 dB
-100 dB 500 kHz Frequency range for calculation

500 kHz Frequency range for calculation of Shoulder Attenuation
of shoulder attenuation upper adjacent channel
lower adjacent channel
-110 dB
fo - 3 MHz fo fo + 3 MHz Frequency

Lower adjacent channel In-channel Upper adjacent channel
Fig. 2.8-52 Spurious emissions to FCC and calculation of the shoulder attenuation
The EFA-ATSC always carries out the shoulder attenuation measurement with a measurement
bandwidth of 11.8 kHz, while the measurement bandwidth for calculating the displayed spectrum curve
depends on the set start and stop frequency. To calculate the rms power value in the 500 kHz shoulder
attenuation ranges (see hatched areas in Fig. 2.8-52), the individual power components (measurement
bandwidth = 11.8 kHz) are added up. The calculations are carried out separately for the LOWER and
UPPER adjacent channel and shown at the bottom of the display, see Fig. 2.8-50 and Fig. 2.8-51.
To measure the shoulder attenuation correctly, the 8.0 MHz SAW filter must be activated in the
STATUS: SAW FILTER BW menu (EFA-B13 option)!
Due to image frequency reception in the conversion to the last intermediate frequency of the EFA-
ATSC, the shoulder attenuation measurement cannot be carried out correctly if the SAW filter is
deactivated (STATUS: SAW FILTER BW: OFF menu). The LOWER SHOULDER ATTENUATION value
measured deteriorates by approx. 3 dB. The UPPER SHOULDER ATTENUATION value measured
deteriorates by a few tenths of a dB. For the user's information, the measured values displayed are
marked by an asterisk (*).
The 6.0 MHz filter (STATUS: SAW FILTER BW: 6.0 MHz menu) must not be activated, since this filter
eliminates the spurious emissions due to the transmitter so that these cannot be measured any more.
For the user's information, the values displayed are marked by an asterisk (*).
Note: Calculation of the shoulder attenuation can only be carried out if the start and stop
frequency are selected so as to include the appropriate frequency ranges (see hatched
areas in Fig. 2.8-52). If one or both of the areas are not inside the frequency range
displayed, the measured value(s) is/are suppressed ("- - -").
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.55
START FREQ, STOP FREQ

The frequency range to be displayed is set by pressing the START FREQ and STOP FREQ keys and
entering a numeric value on the keypad (confirm with ENTER). The frequencies must be specified
relative to the set receive frequency. The reference frequency (either the pilot carrier frequency or
channel center frequency) is selected via the SPECIAL FUNCTION: FREQUENCY SETTINGS menu.
For further details, see section 2.8.6.2. Depending on the reference frequency selected, the labelling of
the frequency axis, the start and stop frequency is normalized either to the pilot carrier frequency or
channel center frequency. If the frequency axis is normalized to the channel center frequency,
frequencies can be set within the following limits:
Input limits Start frequency Stop frequency
SAW OFF - 4.48 MHz + 4.48 MHz

SAW 8 MHZ - 4.0 MHz + 4.0 MHz
Table 2.8-7 Limits of start and stop frequencies for normalization to channel center
frequency depending on SAW filter bandwidth selected
The minimum frequency range that can be set is 1.3 MHz.

If the pilot carrier frequency is selected as the reference frequency, the maximum input range depends
additionally on the symbol rate set and the sideband to be demodulated. If the value is exceeded, the
maximum possible frequency is set or an info box indicates the maximum possible frequency settings.
When modulation is to standard (transmission of the upper sideband of the RF carrier) and the receiver
is set relative to the pilot carrier, the maximum start and stop frequencies are calculated as follows:
 SAW filter bandwidth /MHz symbol rate / MHz 
Start frequency limit / MHz = -  − 
 2 4
SAW filter bandwidth /MHz symbol rate / MHz
Start frequency limit / MHz = +
2 4
Note: If a SAW filter is activated and the frequency range is selected to exceed the SAW filter
bandwidth, an Info box is displayed for several seconds, which prompts the user either to
adapt the frequency range to the selected SAW filter bandwidth or to select a different
SAW filter with a larger bandwidth or deactivate the SAW filter. This message is displayed
until the frequency range is adapted or the SAW filter setting has been corrected.
DETECTOR
The spectrum is calculated by means of 2N FFT, which can be interpreted as a filter bank comprising 2N
The number of available results (2N) is larger than the pixel columns available for display. For this
reason, several individual values of the result field are assigned to a pixel column. Pressing the
DETECTOR toggle key defines the principle used to group the individual values. The following can be
selected:
• MIN: the smallest value of a group is displayed
• RMS: the root mean square is taken of the (amplitude) values of a group. This corresponds to
averaging the power values (rms value)
• MAX: the largest value of a group is displayed
The following graph shows the principle of grouping several values or of the detector function:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.56
Result field of 2N FFT:
0 2N 1
Group
Assignment of result
p=0 p=1 p=P-1
Fig. 2.8-53 Operation of DETECTOR function
When selecting the detector mode, it must be noted that in the cases of MIN and MAX the resolution
bandwidth (RBW) is independent of the frequency range selected. If the rms detector is used, the
resolution bandwidth is automatically adapted to the selected frequency range.
bandwidth, is displayed at the top of the diagram.
PEAK HOLD
The PEAK HOLD key of the spectrum function enables the user to detect sporadic sinusoidal spurious
signals, for example. Pressing this key starts the measurement again, and all the maximum or minimum
values obtained since the start of the measurement are displayed. Pressing the key a second time
starts a new measurement. This function is coupled with the setting of the DETECTOR mode. If the rms
detector is used, the peak hold function cannot be selected. If the detector is set to MAX or MIN
detector, the maximum or minimum values are detected by the peak hold function.
AVERAGE CNT
For a more accurate spectrum analysis, the display must be made easier to interpret by averaging. For
this purpose, the spectrum function offers a very powerful averaging function. Press the AVERAGE
CNT key in the SPECTRUM measurement. Pressing this key several times changes the display from
OFF to a numeric value that can be entered via the numeric keypad (confirm with ENTER). The
following limit values must be complied with:
1 ≤ AVERAGE CNT ≤ 999.
• AVERAGE CNT ≤ 180: All frequency characteristics displayed are stored in a pipeline structure and
used for averaging. When the number of traces set in AVERAGE CNT is reached, the oldest traces
are discarded.
• AVERAGE CNT > 180: The frequency characteristics are averaged by means of recursion.
The progress of the averaging process is shown at the top of the display (AVG), provided that
AVERAGE CNT is not set to OFF or 1. The first figure indicates the current number of traces used, and
the second figure the target value (setting of AVERAGE CNT counter).
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.57
2.8.8.4.2 Amplitude/Phase/Group-Delay Frequency Response and Polar Plot
The Test Receiver EFA-ATSC is equipped with a powerful self-adapting equalizer. The filter coefficients
are used by the EFA-ATSC to calculate the linear distortion of the transmission channel. The following
measurements can be performed at the same time:
• Amplitude frequency response and phase frequency response, or

• Amplitude frequency response and group-delay frequency response, or
• Polar plot (complex representation in polar coordinates)
To select the measurement, press the second softkey in the MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN menu
until the desired type of representation is displayed in inverse video.
Fig. 2.8-54 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: AMPL/PHASE and AMPL/GD menu
The unit of the amplitude scale is decibel (dB); the unit of the phase is scale degree (°); and the unit of
the group delay scale is microseconds (µs) or nanoseconds (ns). The scale of the quantities is
automatically adapted to the measured value and cannot be changed manually. The measured peak-to-
peak values are output in the bottom line of the display.
Fig. 2.8-55 Error messages with deactivated equalizer or non-synchronized receiver
Amplitude, phase, group-delay frequency response and polar plot can only be measured with the
equalizer activated, see also section SPECIAL FUNCTION: EQUALIZER. If the equalizer is not
activated, the following message is displayed: "THE EQUALIZER MUST BE SWITCHED ON IN
SPECIAL FUNCTION MENU EQUALIZER", see Fig. 2.8-55.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.58
Another prerequisite for these measurements is an 8VSB demodulator synchronized to the receive
signal. With a non-synchronized demodulator, the message SYNC FAILED is displayed, see Fig.
2.8-55.
In the 8VSB demodulation mode, the frequency span always corresponds to half the symbol rate and is
automatically adapted. This setting cannot be carried out manually.
The frequency scale depends on the setting in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: FREQUENCY SETTINGS
menu (see also section 2.8.6.2.2).
• If CENTER FREQUENCY is selected, the frequency axis is scaled relative to the set channel center
frequency. This display mode represents the frequency response in the transmission channel.
• In the PILOT FREQUENCY setting, the frequency axis is referred to the pilot carrier frequency. In
this display mode, the frequency response of the baseband signal is represented. The baseband
frequency = 0 is always displayed on the left of the measurement window, which corresponds to the
pilot carrier frequency at RF level.
Fig. 2.8-56 shows the frequency response of an 8VSB signal with post-echo in the displays with
channel center frequency and pilot carrier frequency as the reference frequency. Other examples are
illustrated in section 2.8.6.2.3.
Fig. 2.8-56 Frequency response measurement of an 8VSB signal with echo (echo attenuation
10 dB, echo delay 1 µs). Left, AMPL/PHASE in the display with CENTER
FREQUENCY as reference frequency; right, AMPL/GD in the display with PILOT
FREQUENCY as reference frequency.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.59
POLAR PLOT
The POLAR PLOT is a different type of channel frequency response display. Here the amplitude error
vector is displayed with the corresponding phase length depending on the modulation frequency. The
locus of this error vector is known as POLAR PLOT. With POLAR PLOT, the ideal 8VSB signal is a
single point in the middle of the measurement window.
Fig. 2.8-57 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: POLAR PLOT menu. Left, with a very high
quality receive signal; right, with an echo attenuated by 10 dB and lagging by
0.1 µs.
The scaling of the real and imaginary axis cannot be set.
Note 1: To minimize the instrument error of the EFA-ATSC, the SAW filter should not be activated
(STATUS: SAW FILTER BW OFF menu) if permitted by the receive signal (e.g. adjacent-
channel occupancy).
Note 2: The display modes for the channel frequency response and the channel impulse response
are not completely independent of each other; these are interpreted in the one direction or
the other. The display modes are equivalent and this is physically correct. If the cause of a
distortion is, for instance, an echo, a frequency response can still be displayed. The
frequency response is simply another way of displaying the echo.
2.8.8.4.3 Measurement of Phase Jitter and Amplitude Jitter Spectrum
Note: While the phase jitter or amplitude jitter spectrum is being displayed, MER and EVM
cannot be calculated in the background (ALARM, HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) for technical
reasons.
The R&S EFA-ATSC function for measuring the phase jitter and amplitude jitter spectra makes it
possible to analyze and monitor the quality of the various mixer oscillators and amplifier loops of a
transmitter. Jitter analysis can easily be performed during normal operation without switching off the
carrier modulation.
These measurement functions are started by first pressing the MEASURE key (hardkey) and then
FREQUENCY DOMAIN and PHASE JITTER or AMPL JITTER on the softkey bar. A display similar to
the following will appear:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.60
Fig. 2.8-58 The MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: PHASE JITTER menu display (left) with
NOISE set and AMPL JITTER (right) with CW set. The graph on the right shows a
discrete noise line at 50 kHz.
The horizontal axis shows the frequency range from 1 kHz to 1 MHz (fixed) in logarithmic scale
subdivided at 1-2-4-6-8. The vertical axis definition depends on the setting of APPLICATION.
• NOISE: This setting is recommended for the analysis of noise-like interferences. It is not suitable for
the analysis of discrete noise lines.
In this mode, the phase or amplitude jitter interference is displayed in dBc/Hz (reference value is
the power of either the unmodulated carrier or the entire VSB signal, effective noise bandwidth = 1
Hz). The combination of several frequency points into a pixel column yields the average power
density (RMS detector) in this case.
• CW: This setting should be activated when discrete interferences need to be analyzed. The
frequency characteristic of the phase or amplitude jitter is specified in dBc. Unlike when NOISE is
set, the effective noise bandwidth is the bandwidth specified under RBW. It is displayed on top of
the diagram in this mode.
• The combination of several frequency points into a pixel column yields the maximum
power density (MAX detector) in this case.
To average the displayed measured jitter spectra over time (power density averaging), the number of
characteristics to be averaged can be defined by setting the AVERAGE CNT counter. The value range
is as follows: 1 = AVERAGE CNT = 9999.
Pressing the AVERAGE CNT softkey again deactivates averaging.
The bottom line will show the current setting of the equalizer (EQU) and the carrier frequency loop
bandwidth (CF LOOP).
Measurement is based on the demodulated I/Q baseband data after the equalizer. The R&S EFA-ATSC
partially suppresses jitter of the carrier phase or the input signal gain. Depending on the bandwidth of
the control loops in the R&S EFA, high-frequency jitter may not be eliminated. Uneliminated phase jitter
is indicated by jitter in the constellation diagram in the tangential direction, while amplitude jitter is
indicated as an error in the radial direction in the constellation diagram. This is shown in the following
example of a constellation diagram whose signal is impaired by phase jitter.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.61
Q
phase jitter
amplitude jitter
phase jitter
Fig. 2.8-59 Constellation diagram of a VSB signal impaired by phase jitter, which affects the
constellation diagram tangentially, while amplitude jitter would cause radial
distortions.
Jitter spectra can be measured only if the receiver is synchronized to the incoming signal. If
synchronization fails, a message box stating SYNC FAILED appears. The jitter spectrum is obtained by
comparing a sequence of receive signal I/Q data with the ideal position (in the center of the decision
field). Depending on the measurement that is set, the amplitude or phase component is analyzed from
the difference signal:
• PHASE JITTER: The ratio of the amplitude of the received I/Q value to the ideal position is
assumed to be 1 (ideal). The determining factor is the sequence of phase errors φ(t).
This measurement can be used to monitor the phase stability quality of the oscillators used to
generate the ATSC signal.
• AMPL JITTER: In this measurement, the error in the tangential direction φ(t) is assumed to be zero.
The determining factor in each case is the ratio of the amplitude of the received I/Q value to the
amplitude of the ideal position. The chronological sequence of amplitude ratios A(t) is processed
further.
This measurement is useful for checking amplifier control loops in the transmission path.
In Fig. 2.8-58, the current setting of the carrier frequency loop bandwidth (SPEC FUNC: LOOP
SETTINGS menu) is displayed in the bottom right of the diagram. This value should always be set to
LOW when measuring the jitter spectra to prevent the measurement result from being affected if the
control loop bandwidth is too large. If this bandwidth is not set to LOW, a message box indicating that
the bandwidth needs to be corrected appears for several seconds.
A further recommendation is to set the equalizer to ON when measuring the jitter spectrum (SPEC
FUNC: EQUALIZER menu). This prevents linear distortions from affecting the jitter spectrum result. If
the equalizer is not activated, a message box indicating that the equalizer needs to be set to ON will
appear for several seconds.
If a noise signal is added (e.g. white noise), it will cause radial and tangential interference in the
constellation diagram. It will thus limit the dynamic range for measuring the jitter spectra.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.62
The MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN menu comprises the following measurements:

• Amplitude distribution
• Complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF)
• Ghost pattern (echo pattern)
• History
• Eye monitoring
2.8.8.5.1 Amplitude Distribution and CCDF
specified how often the signal observed reaches or exceeds a specific level.
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) in the amplitude distribution/CCDF measurement mode.
Amplitude distribution
This measurement yields 10.24 million instantaneous values of the sampled carrier frequency signal
and accumulates their rates of occurrence. The root mean square (rms) value, which is used as a
reference for displaying the voltage level on a logarithmic scale, is determined from this distribution.
To activate the amplitude distribution measurement, press the MEASURE function key and then the
TIME DOMAIN key. Next, press the AMPLDIST(RF) / CCDF(RF) / CCDF(ENV) toggle key repeatedly
until AMPLDIST(RF) appears in the softkey field in inverse video. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-60 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: AMPLDIST(RF) menu. Reference values displayed as
dotted lines.
In the horizontal axis, the voltage level is logarithmic relative to the rms value of the receive signal. The
vertical axis indicates the frequency of occurrence. The (bell-shaped) frequency distribution of the 8VSB
signal is divided into several 1 dB windows to determine the amplitude distribution. In the
AMPLDIST(RF) measurement, the height of the different columns represents the frequency of
occurrence within the corresponding 1 dB window. The figure below demonstrates this calculation
method:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.63
Distribution density
rms voltage (0dB)
+1 dB
+2 dB
+3 dB
+4 dB
+5 dB
+6 dB
+7 dB
+8 dB
Voltage
Integral via the distribution density function of the voltage from (rms value) to
(rms value +1 dB)
Fig. 2.8-61 Distribution density function of an ideal 8VSB signal. The distribution density
function is subdivided into 1 dB steps for the calculation of the amplitude
distribution. The size of the hatched area corresponds to the height of the first
column in the AMPLDIST(RF) diagram.
The display is updated after every 102400 values (1 %). The data is collected until the final value is
To enable a comparison of the amplitude distribution of the applied signal with that of an ideal
8VSB/ATSC signal, the ideal frequencies are displayed as short dotted horizontal lines (reference
values). An ideal signal is applied if all the column heights of the measured distribution are identical to
the heights of the reference values. A deviation from the ideal distribution is therefore identified by the
deviations of the column heights and the value of the crest factor (for example, due to the clipping
effects of the transmitter output stage). These reference values are only valid for an 8VSB/ATSC signal
and cannot be applied to other signals.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.64
CCDF (complementary cumulative distribution function)

The CCDF is a measurement function similar to the amplitude distribution measurement. Unlike
amplitude distribution, this curve indicates how often a particular voltage level is reached or exceeded.
The CCDF measurement is divided into two methods, CCDF(RF) and CCDF(ENV), whose distribution
characteristics are based on different data.
To activate the CCDF measurement, press the MEASURE function key and then the TIME DOMAIN
key. Next, press the AMPLDIST(RF) / CCDF(RF) / CCDF(ENV) toggle key repeatedly until, depending
on the desired measurement, CCDF(RF) or CCDF(ENV) appears in the softkey field in inverse video.
The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-62 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: CCDF(RF) and CCDF(ENV) menu. The reference
values are marked by short horizontal lines in 1 dB steps.
frequency signal are recorded according to the same method used with amplitude distribution, and the
distribution density is determined. In contrast to this, the CCDF(ENV) measurement, which determines
the distribution density of the envelope of the carrier frequency signal, is based on only 1 million
frequency points.
The rms value of the carrier frequency signal (CCDF(RF)) or envelope signal (CCDF(ENV)) is
determined from this distribution and used as a reference value for the display of the voltage level on a
logarithmic scale.
vertical axis marks the CCDF values.
In contrast to amplitude distribution, the individual points of this trace indicate how often a certain
voltage level is reached or exceeded. The indicated frequency refers to the total number of read
samples specified under ACQUisition. From a physical point of view, the CCDF measurement is the
integral of the distribution function (integration of observed level to infinity). Direct comparison of
measured values and theoretical reference values enables information on the nonlinear response of all
types of active elements to be acquired at a glance.
In addition to the graphic display of the CCDF values, the level at which the distribution reaches the
value 1E-3 is numerically displayed. To compare this value with that of an ideal 8VSB signal, the
difference to the ideal level is indicated in the ∆ (delta) line. These two values indicate which minimum
level above the rms value of the signal is present during 0.1 % of the time, allowing an initial
quantitative statement to be made about the nonlinearity of the measured signal.
To compare the distribution of the applied signal with that of an ideal 8VSB/ATSC signal in greater
detail, the reference values for each integral voltage level are displayed as short horizontal lines in a
1 dB grid. The voltage level associated with each reference line is highlighted by a scaling line extended
up to the reference value. In order to clearly identify the value measured at such levels, the points at
which the trace crosses the extended scaling lines are in inverse video.
The reference values are only valid for an 8VSB/ATSC signal and cannot be applied to other signals.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.65
However, the great advantage of the CCDF measurement is that the useful signal itself is directly
recorded; as a result, it is not necessary to transmit complex test sequences.
Crest factor
Information on the crest factor is determined from the distribution density characteristic and displayed in
the upper right-hand corner of the diagram. The displayed values refer to the type of analyzed signal:
the characteristic of the instantaneous values of the carrier frequency signal for the AMPLDIST(RF) and
CCDF(RF) measurements or the characteristic of the envelope for the CCDF(ENV) measurement.
There are three categories of values:
• MARGIN: This value indicates the crest factor that could currently be measured due to the
clipping effects from the test receiver. This value is a measure for margin.
• MAX: The maximum crest factor is the ratio of the maximum voltage to the rms value of
the voltage characteristic. The maximum voltage that has occurred since the start
of the measurement is used.
• CURR: In contrast to MAX, the current samples under ACQUisition are used for
calculation.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.66
2.8.8.5.2 Measuring the Channel Impulse Response (Ghost Pattern)
The powerful channel estimation routine of the EFA-ATSC allows fast assessment of the linear
distortion of the transmission channel (see section 2.8.8.4.2). In the channel impulse response diagram
(GHOST PATTERN), the channel estimation data is interpreted as the result of echo interference. The
• µs (microseconds)
• km (kilometers), and
• miles (miles; 1 mile = 1.609344 km).
To activate this measurement, press the MEASURE key in the function key block and then the TIME
DOMAIN keys. Now, repeatedly press the fourth key from the top until the desired unit appears in the
softkey field in inverse video. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-63 The MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: GHOST PATTERN: µs menu shows an
8VSB/ATSC signal with echoes (ghosts). The test signal has echoes with post-
echoes delayed by 1 µs (-10 dB), 1.5 µs (-30 dB), 15 µs (-20 dB) and 20 µs (-25 dB).
The main pulse can be seen at 0 µs. For better identification of the very close
echo at 1 µs, the area around the main pulse is zoomed by the factor 2 (ZOOM1)
in the window on the right.
In the Ghost Pattern display mode, the position of the main pulse at t = 0 can be clearly identified. The
pre-echoes are displayed to the left of the main pulse and the post-echoes to the right. Pre-echoes can
be generated especially by crosstalk in filters or by multipath reception (e.g. strongly attenuated direct
path and less attenuated echo which becomes the main pulse), whereas post-echoes are caused by
reflections (e.g. from buildings, mountains, air layers).
The unit of the level scale is decibel (dB). This setting is fixed and normalized to the level of the main
pulse. The scale of the time/distance axis can be zoomed for better identification of very close echoes.
To zoom the scale, press the RANGE key repeatedly until the desired subrange is displayed. To further
increase the time resolution, the time domain in the vicinity of the main pulse can be zoomed by the
factor 2 (ZOOM1) or the factor 4 (ZOOM2). The equalizer COMPLEX setting in the SPECIAL
FUNCTION: EQUALIZER menu allows pre-echoes of up to 1.5 µs (symbol rate 10.762 Msymb/s). If
equalizer REAL is selected, pre-echoes of up to 6 µs can be recorded and displayed.
The NUM VALUES ON/OFF key can be used to divide the screen: below the graphical display of the
channel impulse response up to 10 echoes are sorted according to their respective level values and
listed in numeric form. Only echoes with an amplitude greater than -40 dB relative to the main pulse are
taken into consideration.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.67
Note: Spectrum and channel response diagrams are not independent display modes; rather, the
interpretation is carried out in the one direction or the other. The display modes are
equivalent and this is physically correct. If the cause of distortion is, for instance, an echo,
a spectrum can still be displayed. The spectrum is simply another way of displaying the
echo.
2.8.8.5.3 Measuring EYE MONITORING
The eye monitoring measurement function is available as of firmware version V04.60.

For the analysis and measurement-oriented evaluation of digitally modulated signals, Rohde & Schwarz
introduces a new measurement procedure with the Test Receiver EFA, which is an important
contribution to the evaluation and monitoring of modern communication systems. The classic
constellation diagram is extended by the time dimension, so the user has new features for evaluating
quality and errors. In addition, a completely new hardware topology allows unprecedented density of
results.
With the classic constellation diagram, only a small fraction of the actual demodulation data (I/Q data) is
processed and displayed. Numerous measured values are not evaluated, which results in large
temporal gaps. In particular, the constellation diagram does not contain sufficient information on the
temporal behaviour of impairments. For example, periodic interference pulses cannot be detected.
In order to display the eye monitoring of 8VSB signals, the data of all consecutive constellation
diagrams is measured and stored. The I component of each diagram is entered in vertical direction. In a
second step, the I projections of consecutive constellation diagrams are displayed in the eye monitoring
next to each other. In this way, time is added as a dimension. A periodic interference, for example, can
thus be reliably detected. The Q data is not represented in the eye monitoring of 8VSB signals.
In practice, numerous parallel detectors are used, which permanently monitor the whole value range of
the I/Q samples. If a measured value assigned to a certain detector is acquired by the receiver, the
detector stores the information. This configuration allows 100% measured-data acquisition. Interference
due to very short pulses (e.g. 10 ns) are recorded, even if only one symbol is affected during
transmission.
Eye monitoring differs from the well-known eye diagram in that it clearly assigns measured values in
time and does not display redundant information. The two diagrams graphically display the eye height,
but only eye monitoring ensures continuous data acquisition. Eye monitoring can thus be considered as
a follow-on development of the eye diagram.
Eye monitoring has advantages over other measurements. Compared to the BER (bit error ratio)
measurement, a problem is detected before a limit value is exceeded (bit error). Compared to the MER
(modulation error ratio) and EVM (error vector magnitude) measurements, short interference pulses are
reliably detected. The MER and EVM measurements cannot reliably detect such interference because it
seldom occurs. Besides, short interference pulses would not significantly contribute to the effective
MER or EVM value.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.68
Fig. 2.8-64 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: EYE MONITORING menu
The eye monitoring time window to be represented can be configured by the user over wide ranges.
Press the INTERVAL key to display a list of the settable time intervals, which can be selected using the
softkeys marked as up and down cursor keys, see Fig. 2.8-65. The entry is completed by pressing the
ENTER softkey.
Fig. 2.8-65 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: EYE MONITORING: INTERVAL menu
A user-defined time window is displayed starting with the smallest interval (20 seconds). When this
interval has elapsed, the instrument automatically switches to the next higher interval (and so on) until
the user-selected time window is displayed. The display is then switched to the scroll mode, i.e. new
measured values are shown at the right edge of the display and the oldest measured values are cleared
from the left edge. The entire user-defined time window with the current measured values is thus
continuously displayed. The maximum time window which can be displayed comprises 1000 days. Of
course, continuous measured-value acquisition is also obtained with this setting.
FREEZE
A measurement in progress can be stopped on the display by activating the FREEZE function. The
measurement, however, continues to run in the background. To display the measurement again, press
FREEZE once more.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.69
INTERVAL
The time interval to be displayed can be selected between 20 seconds and 1000 days. Press the
INTERVAL key to display a list of the settable time intervals, which can be selected with the softkeys
marked as up and down cursor keys. The entry is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey.
Note: The INTERVAL key can be used to increase the time interval displayed. The data already
collected is compressed in a larger interval when automatic switchover is carried out. If the
time that has elapsed since the start of the measurement is longer than the time set in the
INTERVAL menu, the data already measured is reset and the measurement is restarted.
RESTART
Press RESTART to clear and restart the entire measurement.
ADD NOISE
A noise signal can be added to the receive signal.. For details refer to section 2.8.8.7.
is automatically started immediately after the EFA-ATSC has been switched on (measurement in the
background).
To display the recorded parameters, start this measurement by pressing the MEASURE key in the
function key block and then the keys TIME DOMAIN and HISTORY. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-66 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: HISTORY menu.
In the graph on the left, the time characteristic of the input level and the MER value are displayed. It can
clearly be seen how the input level slowly drops before dropping out completely. This results in a sync
loss and MPEG data error. A little later, the level remains constant, but the MER deteriorates. At the
end of the time window, the MER value is stable again.
In the graph on the right, the time characteristic of the input level and all the parameters recorded in the
HISTORY measurement are displayed in a table with the maximum, minimum, and average values of
the set time interval. The table shows that the level was stable in the last two minutes, but that the MER
value has dropped to 19.2 dB.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.70
In the HISTORY measurement, the screen comprises a part that is permanently displayed (upper half)
and another part that can be configured by the user (lower half, 2nd screen).
The upper half of the screen always displays the level characteristic of the input signal. The level unit on
the vertical axis is the one set in SETUP: LEVEL UNITS. The horizontal axis indicates the time
reference.
The graphs are updated every second. At the beginning of the measurement, the characteristics are
the graphs is reached, the scaling of the time axis changes to the next higher time interval, if required.
This is repeated until a preset maximum time interval is attained. From this time, the oldest measured
INTERVAL
To carry out this setting, press the INTERVAL key. This calls up a list of the settable time intervals,
which can be selected with the softkeys marked as up and down cursor keys. The entry is completed by
pressing the ENTER softkey.
is compressed in a larger interval when automatic changeover is carried out. If the time
that has elapsed since the start of the measurement is longer than the time set in menu
item INTERVAL, the data already measured is reset and measurement is restarted.
data error (D. ERR). The indicated synchronization refers to the status of FEC (forward error
correction). When the traces are directly above the reference line, synchronization is correct and the
MPEG transport stream is error-free.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.71
CONFIG 2nd SCREEN
Fig. 2.8-67 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: HISTORY: CONFIG 2nd SCREEN menu
The graphs or the table below the level characteristic can be freely selected. To do so, press the
CONFIG 2nd SCREEN key. The softkey labelling is then replaced by a selection of graphs that can be
displayed in the lower half of the HISTORY screen. The softkey labelling remains in this form until a
selection is made by pressing a key. The following graphs can be selected:
• BER BEFORE RS: The bit error ratio before the Reed-Solomon decoder is displayed. The vertical
axis has logarithmic scaling. If the bit error ratio is 0, this is shown by a line below
the least-significant scaling line.
• BER AFTER RS: The bit error ratio after the Reed-Solomon decoder is displayed. The vertical axis
has logarithmic scaling. If the bit error ratio is 0, this is shown by a line below the
• BER B&A RS: The two bit error ratios (BER before and after the Reed-Solomon decoder) are
displayed in one diagram.
• MER dB: The time characteristic of the modulation error ratio is displayed. This is
specified in logarithmic scale (dB) and refers to the average power of the useful
signal minus the pilot carrier power. For information on defining the measured
value, see section 2.8.8.6.1. For technical reasons, MER cannot be calculated
with the following measurements: constellation diagram, histogram I/Q,
spectrum, amplitude distribution, CCDF and pilot value. While these
measurements are activated, the MER measurement is represented by a dotted
line.
• EVM/MER %: The time characteristic of the modulation error vector EVM or error ratio MER is
recorded in linear scale (%). EVM or MER must be selected in the SPECIAL
FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu, see section 2.8.6.5.2. For more information on the
definition of EVM and MER, see section 2.8.8.6.1. For technical reasons, EVM %
and MER % cannot be calculated with the following measurements: constellation
diagram, histogram I/Q, spectrum, amplitude distribution, CCDF and pilot value.
While these measurements are activated, the EVM % / MER % measurement is
represented by a dotted line.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.72
• NUMERIC VALUES: A numeric list of all parameters acquired in the HISTORY measurement is
displayed in tabular form. Based on all acquired parameters of the measurement
interval represented in the graphs, the current value (CURRent), the
minimum/maximum value and the corresponding average value are calculated
and entered in the table. If the bit error ratio cannot be indicated (e.g. due to
synchronization loss), this is marked by an asterisk (*). In this case,
∗: TEMPORARY NOT MONITORED lights up below the table. If the modulation
errors MER and EVM cannot be determined, this is displayed in the same way.
The times, during which the bit error ratios or the modulation error is not defined,
are not taken into account in the calculation of the average values (AVG). If a
value cannot be specified, this is indicated by three dashes (---). Bit error ratios
undergo linear averaging, level and MER and EVM undergo square averaging
(averaging power values).
RESET BER key was pressed in the MEASURE menu. For technical reasons, calculation of the
modulation error MER/EVM cannot be carried out if the FEC is not synchronized, if the constellation
diagram, histogram I/Q, spectrum, amplitude distribution function/CCDF or pilot carrier measurement is
active.
FREEZE
measurement continues to run in the background. To display the continued measurement, press
FREEZE again.
AVERAGE, MAX; MIN, MAX&MIN

All detectors operate in parallel with the HISTORY function. The of measured values are stored for each
measurement by taking all the detectors into account. It is thus possible to select the desired detector
afterwards without having to restart the measurement. The detectors have the following characteristics:
AVERAGE: Averages the measured values that are combined to form one point on the screen. For the
level, MER, and EVM measurement, the power is averaged (root mean square). Averaging
is linear for the BER measurements. Connecting lines are drawn for AVERAGE values.
MAX: Displays the MAX value of the measured values, the time position of which is assigned to a
pixel column. The MAX values are connected by lines.
MIN: Displays the MIN value of the measured values, the time position of which is assigned to a
pixel column. The MIN values are combined with lines.
MAX&MIN: Displays the MAX and MIN value of the measured values, the time position of which is
Restart
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.73
2.8.8.6 8VSB Parameters
The VSB parameters provide information on the quality of the transmitted 8VSB/ATSC signal.
To display the 8VSB parameters, press the MEASURE key and then the VSB PARAMETERS... key.
Fig. 2.8-68 The MEASURE: VSB PARAMETERS menu
To measure the 8VSB parameters, the demodulated I and Q data is collected and saved. A digital
signal processor (DSP) calculates the following transmission parameters from the data:
• PHASE JITTER (rms) in degrees
• SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO on a logarithmic scale (dB)
• MODULATION ERROR RATIO (rms) on a logarithmic scale (dB)
• MODULATION ERROR RATIO (min) on a logarithmic scale (dB)
• MODULATION ERROR RATIO (rms) on a linear scale (%)
• MODULATION ERROR RATIO (max) on a linear scale (%)
• ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE (rms) on a linear scale (%)
• ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE (max) on a linear scale (%)
Note: The error on the linear scale is displayed as MODULATION ERROR RATIO or as ERROR
VECTOR MAGNITUDE. The setting has to be selected in the SPECIAL FUNCTION:
DISPLAY menu (section 2.8.6.5.2).
2.8.8.6.1 MODULATION ERROR RATIO and ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE
The MODULATION ERROR RATIO (MER) and ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE (EVM) parameters
reflect the quality of the 8VSB signal. They represent the sum errors, i.e. they do not indicate whether
the transmission errors were caused by amplitude noise, phase noise, linear or nonlinear distortion.
The MER and EVM values show the relationship of the error vector to the signal power and only differ
as regards the reference quantity. While the MER value is referred to the average signal power (without
pilot carrier power), the EVM value is referred to the maximum signal power (without pilot carrier
power).
Fig. 2.8-72 shows the determination of the error vector for an I/Q value pair. The error vectors are
determined with a resolution of 10 bits. To calculate the measured values, 409600 I/Q value pairs are
collected.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.74
Q Actual state
Error vector
Ideal state
Fig. 2.8-69 Determining the error vector
The EFA-ATSC calculates the rms value and the peak value and displays them on a linear (%) and
logarithmic (dB) scale.
MODULATION ERROR RATIO (MER) value with 8VSB signals

The MER value is the ratio between the average error vector and the average signal power (without
pilot carrier power).
MOD ERROR RATIO (rms)

MOD ERROR RATIO (rms) is the ratio of the modulation error to the average signal power. To calculate
this ratio, squares of all the error vector magnitudes are added together and the number of symbols n is
counted.
where
Psig_without_pilot = signal power of the real component without pilot carrier
n = number of recorded error vectors = 409600.
The value is specified on a linear scale if MER% is selected in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY:
VSB PARAMETERS/HISTORY menu. To calculate the MOD ERROR RATIO (rms) / %, the following
formula applies:
MOD ERROR RATIO (peak)

The modulation error is also specified as a peak value. To determine the peak level, the maximum
magnitude of the error vector is searched for in every decision field and used as a basis for calculation.
The minimum modulation error on a logarithmic scale MOD ERROR RATIO (min) is calculated
according to the formula:
2
max{ error vector }
MOD ERROR RATIO (min) / dB = −10 ⋅ log( )
Psig _ without _ pilot
where
Psig_without_pilot = signal power of the real components without pilot carrier
The maximum modulation error on a linear scale is calculated according to the following formula:
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.75
2
max{ error vector }
MOD ERROR RATIO (max) / % = 100 ⋅
Psig _ without _ pilot
MODULATION ERROR RATIO (MER) value with 8VSB signals

The ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE (EVM) value is the ratio of the real error vector to the real ideal
maximum signal power (without pilot carrier power).
It is distinguished from the MER value only by the reference value. While the MER value is referred to
the average signal power (without pilot carrier power), the EVM value is referred to the maximum signal
power (without pilot carrier power). The relation between the MER and EVM values is fixed.
1
Psig _ without _ pilot [(−7) 2 + (−5) 2 + (−3) 2 + (−1) 2 + (1) 2 + (3) 2 + (5) 2 + (7) 2 ]
EVM / % 8 21
= = = = 0.65465...
max Psig _ without _ pilot MER / % 7 7
On a logarithmic scale, the following therefore holds:
MER EVM  21  EVM

= + 20 ⋅ lg =
 − 3.679 dB.
dB dB  7  dB
ERROR VECTOR MAG (rms)

ERROR VECTOR MAG (rms) is the ratio of the modulation error to the maximum signal power. To
calculate this ratio, the squares of all the error vector magnitudes are added together and the number of
symbols n is counted.
The value is specified on a linear scale if EVM% is selected in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY:
VSB PARAMETERS/HISTORY menu. To calculate the measured value MOD VECTOR MAG (rms), the
following formula applies:
where
max Psig_without_pilot = maximum real signal power without pilot carrier
n = number of recorded error vectors
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.76
ERROR VECTOR MAG (peak)

The vector error is also specified as a peak value. To determine the peak level, the maximum
magnitude of the error vector is searched for in every decision field and used as a basis for calculation.
The maximum vector error is calculated according to the following formula:

2
max{ error vector }
ERROR VECTOR MAG (max) / % = 100 ⋅
max Psig_without_pilot
where
max Psig_without_pilot = maximum real signal power without pilot carrier
2.8.8.6.2 SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO

The SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO is a value used to determine the modulation error caused by amplitude
noise. To ensure that the measured value is not affected by phase noise, only the I/Q value pairs with
low Q amplitude are evaluated, see Fig. 2.8-70. Otherwise, the calculation corresponds to that of the
MER value (section 2.8.8.6.1). To calculate the signal/noise ratio, the I/Q data is read in with a
resolution of 10 bits.
Q
8
0.5
-8 -4 4 8
I
-0.5
-8
Fig. 2.8-70 I/Q value range for evaluating the SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO
As in the MER calculation, squares of all the error vector magnitudes are added together and the
number of symbols n is counted.
where
Psig_without_pilot = signal power of the real components without pilot carrier
n = number of recorded error vectors = 409600.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.77
The SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO value is the ratio between the error vector and the average signal power
(without pilot carrier power).
SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO with very noisy signals

With very noisy signals, the bell-shaped noise curves of the I component of the individual decision fields
overlap, Fig. 2.8-71.
Fig. 2.8-71 Constellation diagram and I histogram of a very noisy signal (C/N=18 dB)
This normally results in deviations between the actual and calculated noise power. The EFA-ATSC
compensates for the measurement error by means of a correction function.
Fig. 2.8-72 shows an example of the 8VSB parameters measured by the EFA-ATSC with a noisy signal.
The measurement was carried out by means of the internal noise generator of the EFA-ATSC. Noise
with a C/N=18 dB was added to the signal. With ideal demodulation, a C/N of 18 dB corresponds to a
signal/noise ratio of 17.7 dB, since a power of 0.3 dB must be taken into account for the pilot carrier.
The EFA-ATSC measures a SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO of 17.6 dB, see Fig. 2.8-72.
Fig. 2.8-72 8VSB PARAMETER measurement of a very noisy signal (C/N=18 dB);
SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO (theoretical ideal value) = 17.7 dB; SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO
(actual value) = 17.6 dB;
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.78
2.8.8.6.3 PHASE JITTER
The PHASE JITTER is a value used to determine the modulation error caused by phase noise. To
ensure that the measured value is not affected by amplitude noise, only the I/Q value pairs with low
I amplitude and high Q amplitude are evaluated. To calculate the phase jitter value, the I/Q data is read
in with a resolution of 8 bits.
To determine the phase jitter, regression lines are determined in the relevant data fields. In addition, the
amplitude noise component is determined and taken into account in the phase jitter calculation.
The phase jitter is calculated by means of trigonometric conversion from the difference between the
amplitude noise power in the center of the measurement field (real components) and the noise power at
the edge of the field. The noise power at the edge of the field Pnoise_jitter is compensated for by the
amplitude noise power in the center of the field Pnoise_amplitude. ameasure is the rms amplitude value at the
edge of the field, by means of which the jitter power was determined.
 Pnoise _ jitter − Pnoise _ amplitude 
ϕ jitter = arctan 
 ameasure 
 
2.8.8.6.4 PILOT VALUE
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) while the pilot values are displayed.
When the 8VSB signal is generated, the pilot carrier is created by adding a DC component before
IQ modulation of the I component. This DC offset is known as the pilot value. In the ATSC standard for
8VSB transmission, the PILOT VALUE is defined as 1.250, with the amplitude step having the value
2.0. The DC offset of the I component causes a carrier in the RF signal, the pilot carrier. The value of
the DC offsets (PILOT VALUE) determines the power of the pilot carrier. The frequency of the pilot
carrier corresponds to that of the unmodulated RF signal. The pilot carrier is necessary for
synchronizing the 8VSB receiver.
To display the 8VSB pilot carrier test parameters, press the MEASURE key and then the VSB
PARAMETERS... key. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.8-73 MEASURE: VSB PARA: PILOT VALUE menu; left, with a PILOT VALUE of 1.250
(standard value) and right, with a PILOT VALUE of 1.475
The EFA-ATSC calculates the PILOT VALUE from the demodulated I/Q data. To determine the PILOT
VALUE, the distribution of the I components in the 8 decision fields is first searched for maxima. The
positions of the maxima are then averaged, and the result is used to determine the deviation from the
standard value and normalize it in accordance with the ATSC standard.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.79
The EFA-ATSC uses the PILOT VALUE to calculate the power ratio of the data signal power to the pilot
carrier power and the deviation of the pilot carrier power from the standard power of the pilot carrier.
• DATA SIGNAL/PILOT
The DATA SIGNAL/PILOT value specifies the ratio of the data signal power (without pilot carrier
power) to the pilot carrier power on a logarithmic scale (dB). If the test signal corresponds to the
8VSB/ATSC standard, this yields a measured value of 11.3 dB.
• PILOT AMPLITUDE ERROR
The PILOT AMPLITUDE ERROR value specifies the power deviation of the received pilot carrier
from the ideal pilot carrier power to the ATSC standard on a logarithmic scale (dB).
Note 1: The MER measurement (Alarm, History, IEC/IEEE bus) is not available in the MEASURE:
VSB PARAMETERS: PILOT VALUE mode.
Note 2: In the CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM measurement window, the deviation of the pilot value
from the standard value is displayed only if the equalizer is switched off, see also 2.8.8.2.
2.8.8.7 Noise Generator (ADD NOISE)
All the measure menus allow the internal noise generator to be activated. The noise generator is
switched on and off by pressing the ADD. NOISE key (toggle function). If the noise generator is
deactivated, the message ADD. NOISE OFF is displayed. If the noise generator is activated, the ratio of
carrier power to noise signal power is displayed. With the noise generator activated, the numeric value
of the desired C/N ratio can be entered in dB. The noise power is referred to the bandwidth of the
baseband signal of the useful signal.
The noise generator allows conclusions to be drawn on the system characteristics (system margins).
Note: The C/N ratio differs from the MER or SNR value by the power of the pilot carrier. With
pilot carrier power to standard, this difference is 0.3 dB.
With pilot carrier power to standard, a C/N of 30.0 dB corresponds to a theoretically ideal
MER value of 29.7 dB.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.80
2.8.9 PRESET Values and Menu Overview
Note: When the PRESET key is pressed, the settings or numeric values printed in bold are
used.
When the RESET key is pressed (PRESET: SERVICE: RESET menu), the settings and
numeric values in brackets and bold (abc) are also used.
MODE Menu
MODE NTSC / BTSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR

8VSB / ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
QAM / DVB-C / J.83/A ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
QAM / J.83/B ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
QAM / DVB-C / J.83/C ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
MPEG2 DECODER QAM / J.83B
MPEG2 DECODER QAM / DVB-C / J.83A
MPEG2 DECODER QAM / DVB-C / J.83C
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.81
INPUT Menu
EFA Model 50
INPUT RECEIVER
IF
ATTEN... AUTO
(only with INPUT: MANUAL (numeric entry) 0, 5, 10, 15, to 50, 55 dB
RECEIVER) LOW NOISE
LOW DIST
HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER
10 dB PREAMP
EFA Model 53
INPUT RECEIVER (preset with RF preselection option EFA-B3 fitted)

RF INPUT 50 ohm
75 ohm
IF
DEMOD (preset without RF preselection option EFA-B3 fitted)
ATTEN... AUTO
(only with INPUT: DEMOD) MANUAL LOW+PREAMP
MANUAL LOW
MANUAL HIGH
ATTEN... AUTO
RECEIVER) LOW NOISE
NORMAL
LOW DIST
HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.82
RF Menu
RF CENTER FREQUENCY (preset/reset does not change frequency setting)
(numeric entry)
PILOT FREQUENCY (preset/reset does not change frequency setting)
(numeric entry)
CHANNEL (numeric entry)
SPECIAL CHANNEL (numeric entry)
RCL RF (numeric entry)
STO RF... (numeric entry)
EDIT TEXT... LEFT
RIGHT
GET CHARACTER
DELETE CHARACTER
SAVE & EXIT
STATUS Menu
STATUS SET SYMBOL RATE (numeric entry) 2 to 10.762238 to 11 Msymb/s
SAW FILTER BW 6.0 MHz
2.0 MHz
7.0 MHz
8.0 MHz
OFF (if the 6.0 MHz FILTER is not installed)
REJECTION FILTER... NTSC CO CHAN REJECT ON
FILTER OFF
NOTCH WIDTH 100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
SET NOTCH (numeric entry)
FREQUENCY 1.666 to 1.75 to
1.834 MHz
BEEPER... LEVEL < THRESHOLD ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
MER dB< THRESHOLD ENABLED
DISABLED
EVM/MER % > ENABLED
THRESHOLD DISABLED
MPEG DATA ENABLED
CORRECTION DISABLED
(REED-SOLOMON)
DISABLED
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.83
MEASURE Menu
MEASURE CONSTELL DIAGRAM... SYMBOL CNT (numeric entry) 10000

1 to 10 000 to 999 999 999
HOLD
FREEZE ON
OFF
CONST DIAG
HISTOGRAM I SCALE LIN
HISTOGRAM Q LOG
ADD. NOISE OFF
(numeric entry)
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB with symbol
rate ≥ 6 Msymb/s
rate < 6 Msymb/s
FREQUENCY DOMAIN... SPECTRUM... AVERAGE OFF
CNT 1 to 50 to 9999
(numeric entry)
PEAK HOLD (not with RMS
detector)
DETECTOR MIN
RMS
MAX
START FREQ
(numeric entry referred to center
or pilot frequency)
-4.48 MHz to +3.18 MHz with CF
as reference frequency
STOP FREQ
(numeric entry referred to center
or pilot frequency)
-3.18 MHz to +4.48 MHz with CF
as reference frequency
ADD. OFF
NOISE C/N=5 to 56.0 dB
with symbol rate
≥6 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB
with symbol rate
<6 Msymb/s
(numeric entry)
AMPL/PHASE DETECTOR RMS
AMPL/GD PEAK
POLAR PLOT
PHASE / AMPL AVERAGE OFF
JITTER... CNT 1 to 50 to 9999
(numeric entry)
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.84
MEASURE Menu
FREEZE ON
OFF
PHASE JITTER
AMPL JITTER
APPLICATION CW
NOISE
ADD. OFF
with symbol rate
≥6 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB
with symbol rate
<6 Msymb/s
(numeric entry)
ADD. NOISE OFF
rate ≥6 Msymb/s
rate <6 Msymb/s
(numeric entry)
TIME DOMAIN... GHOST RANGE FULL
PATTERN... 1
2
3
ZOOM1
ZOOM2
FREEZE ON
OFF
NUM ON
VALUES OFF
SCALE µs
KM
MILES
ADD. OFF
with symbol rate
≥6 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB
with symbol rate
<6 Msymb/s
(numeric entry)
AMPLDIST(RF)
CCDF(RF)
CCDF(ENV)
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.85
MEASURE Menu
EYE MONITORING FREEZE ON

OFF
INTERVAL.. 20 SECONDS
40 SECONDS
1 MINUTE
2 MINUTES
4 MINUTES
10 MINUTES
20 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
2 HOURS
5 HOURS
10 HOURS
1 DAY
2 DAYS
5 DAYS
10 DAYS
20 DAYS
50 DAYS
100 DAYS
200 DAYS
500 DAYS
1000 DAYS
RESTART
ADD. OFF
with symbol rate
≥6 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB
with symbol rate
<6 Msymb/s
(numeric entry)
HISTORY... CONFIG BER
2nd BEFORE RS
SCREEN...
BER
AFTER RS
BER
B&A RS
MER dB
EVM/MER %
NUMERIC
VALUES
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.86
MEASURE Menu
FREEZE ON
OFF
AVERAGE
MAX
MIN
MAX&MIN
INTERVAL.. 1 MINUTE
2 MINUTE
5 MINUTE
10 MINUTE
20 MINUTE
30 MINUTE
1 HOUR
2 HOUR
5 HOUR
10 HOUR
1 DAY
2 DAY
5 DAY
10 DAY
20 DAY
50 DAY
100 DAY
200 DAY
500 DAY
1000 DAY
RESTART
ADD. NOISE OFF
rate ≥6 Msymb/s
rate <6 Msymb/s (numeric entry)
VSB PARAMETERS... CONSTELL As for CONSTELL DIAGRAM...
DIAGRAM...
FREQUENCY As for FREQUENCY DOMAIN...

DOMAIN...
TIME DOMAIN... As for TIME DOMAIN...
VSB PARA PILOT CONSTELL As for

VALUE... DIAGRAM... CONSTELL
DIAGRAM...
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.87
MEASURE Menu
FREQUENCY As for
DOMAIN... FREQUENCY
DOMAIN...
TIME As for TIME
DOMAIN... DOMAIN..
VSB As for VSB
PARAMETERS. PARAMETERS
..
ADD. NOISE OFF
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB
with symbol rate
≥6 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to
56.0 dB with
symbol rate
<6 Msymb/s
(numeric entry)
ADD. NOISE OFF
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB
with symbol rate ≥6 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB
with symbol rate <6 Msymb/s
(numeric entry)
RESET BER
ADD. NOISE OFF
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB with symbol rate ≥6 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB with symbol rate <6 Msymb/s
(numeric entry)
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.88
SETUP Menu
SETUP TIME TIME (numeric entry)

DATE...
DATE (numeric entry)
REMOTE... IEC625 0 to 6 to 30
IEEE488... (numeric entry)
RS232... BAUD RATE 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
DATA BITS 7BIT
8BIT
PARITY NO
EVEN
ODD
STOP BITS 1BIT
2BIT
HANDSHAKE NO
XON/XOFF
HARDWARE
PRINTER... PRINTER TYPE EPSON COMP
R&S PUD COMP
HP COMP
FORMFEED NO
AFTER PRINTOUT
LEVEL UNITS... dBpW
dBµW
dBm
dBµV
dBmV
µV/mV
External
LCD INVERS ON
OFF
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.89
SPECIAL FUNCTION Menu
SPECIAL CHANNEL DEFINITION... RCL TABLE STANDARD TABLE

FUNCTION USER TABLE
SELECT TABLE
ENTER
COPY TABLE COPY FROM
COPY TO
ENTER
ENTER
EDIT TABLE EDIT TABLE NAME
EDIT TABLE DATA
SELECT TABLE
EXIT
FREQUENCY SETTINGS... SIDEBAND POSITION NORMAL
INVERTED
RF FIXED CENTER FREQ
PILOT FREQ
EQUALIZER... EQUALIZER ON
FREEZE
OFF
EQUALIZER MODE COMPLEX
REAL
EQUALIZER SLOW
ADAPTATION MEDIUM
FAST
LOOP SETTINGS... CARRIER FREQUENCY LOW
LOOP BANDWIDTH MEDIUM
HIGH
BAUD RECOVERY LOOP LOW
BANDWIDTH MEDIUM
HIGH
AUTOMATIC GAIN SLOW
CONTROL FAST
DISPLAY... CONSTELLATION OFF
DIAGRAM ZOOM Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
VSB PARA/ MER %
HISTORY/ALARM EVM %
PARTIAL
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.90

BER BEFORE RS
BER AFTER RS
PILOT REF POSITION ON
(SPECTRUM) OFF
BER/FEC... MIN BER INTEGRATION 1
10
100
1000
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.91
ALARM Menu
ALARM REGISTER CLEAR... NO
YES
THRESHOLD... LEVEL (numeric entry)
20 to 40.0 to 130 dBuV
MER dB (numeric entry)
0 to 30 to 50 dB
EVM/MER % (numeric entry)
0.20 to 2.00 to 65 %
BER BEFORE RS (numeric entry)
0.1E-15 to 2.0E-04 to 9.9E-05
CONFIG... LEVEL ENABLED
DISABLED
MPEG TS SYNC ENABLED
DISABLED
MER dB ENABLED
DISABLED
EVM/MER % ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
LINE NEWEST
MAN
PRINT... LAST LINES... (Entry of the number of the
last lines to be printed,
start with PRINT.)
0 to 5 to 999
PRINT
ABORT
LINES... START LINE

0 to 999
STOP LINE
0 to 20 to 999
PRINT
ABORT
ACTUAL
LINE NEWEST
MAN
ABORT
STATISTICS... REFRESH
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.92
PRESET-Menu
PRESET PRESET... YES

NO
SOFTWARE OPTIONS... SERIAL NUMBER (the serial number is entered in the
factory and cannot be changed)
ENABLE SW OPTION
DISABLE SW OPTION
NO
DELETE RAM... YES
NO
RESET... YES
NO
BOARD INFO... (Overview of the modules
installed)
SELFTEST... Selftest overview
STO-Menu
STO (numeric entry) 0 to 4
RCL-Menu
RCL (numeric entry) 0 to 4
HARDCOPY
HARDCOPY (writes the current display data to RAM)
AUDIO
AUDIO (no audio menu is available in the 8VSB/ATSC mode)
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.93
2.8.10 Hints and Applications

2.8.10.1.1 RF Selection................................................................................................................ 2.8.94
2.8.10.1.2 IF Selection ................................................................................................................. 2.8.95
2.8.10.3 Assignment and Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs............................ 2.8.98
2.8.10.4 Definition and Application of the CCDF and Amplitude Distribution Measurement Function
.................................................................................................................................. 2.8.100
2.8.10.4.1 Definitions of CCDF .................................................................................................. 2.8.100
2.8.10.4.2 Comparison of Carrier Signal and Baseband Signal Measurement ......................... 2.8.101
2.8.10.4.3 Conclusion ................................................................................................................ 2.8.102
2.8.10.5 Channel Frequency Tables....................................................................................... 2.8.102
2.8.10.5.1 Channel Table USA .................................................................................................. 2.8.103
2.8.10.5.2 Channel Table CANADA........................................................................................... 2.8.105
2.8.10.5.3 Channel Table KOREA ............................................................................................. 2.8.107
2.8.10.1 Receiver Selectivity Characteristics
2.8.10.1.1 RF Selection
Fig. 2.8-74 shows the typical RF selection of the EFA 53 with the EFA-B3 option. The image frequency
rejection is more than 100 dB.
The RF input DEMOD shows no RF selection (image frequency rejection = 0 dB).
Scale: 10dB / Div
SAW = OFF
Fig. 2.8-74 Receiver selectivity of EFA 53 with the EFA-B3 receiver option
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.94
2.8.10.1.2 IF Selection
Fig. 2.8-75 shows the typical IF selection of the EFA-ATSC depending on the device configuration.
Note: The setting HIGH ADJACENT CHANNEL POWER is only possible if the RECEIVER input
is selected.
STATUS: HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER = OFF HIGH ADJ CHAN POWER = ON
SAW FILTER BW Scale: 10 dB / div Scale: 10 dB / div
SAW = 6 MHz
SAW = 8 MHz
Fig. 2.8-75 IF selection of the EFA-ATSC depending on the device configuration
For bit error ratio (BER) measurements, the measurement speed and stability of display can be
modified. To illustrate this, the principle of BER measurement is briefly described below.
The Test Receiver EFA continuously evaluates the error correction events of the incoming data stream.
Two BERs are calculated simultaneously to and completely independently of each other: BER before
the Reed-Solomon decoder (BER BEFORE RS) and BER after the Reed-Solomon decoder (BER
AFTER RS), which is identical to the BER of the MPEG2 transport stream.
BER before the Reed-Solomon decoder (BER BEFORE RS): Within an MPEG2 frame of 208 bytes
(= 1632 bits) in length, 207 bytes (= 208 bytes – 1 sync byte) are checked for compliance by evaluating
the correction characteristics of the Reed-Solomon decoder. 207 bytes correspond to 1656 bits. If a bit
difference occurs, the count of the first counter is incremented. A second counter counts the transmitted
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.95
bits. The first counter is read out after every 6039 frames. When the second counter reaches a value of
6039 frames, the number of bits processed is:
bytes bit
6039 frames × 207 ×8 = 10 × 106 bits
frames byte
In this case, the BER is 1E-7. The value of the first counter forms the first sample of the BER
measurement before the Reed-Solomon decoder.
This method functions very accurately in practice provided that
a) the ratio between BER before Reed-Solomon decoder and BER after Reed-Solomon decoder
exhibits the following condition:
BER before Reed - Solomon decoder

≥ 100 , and
BER after Reed - Solomon decoder
b) an erroneous byte represents exactly one erroneous bit. This condition is well fulfilled especially for
noise.
BER after Reed-Solomon decoder (BER AFTER RS): This measured value is also derived from the
correction characteristics of the Reed-Solomon decoder. The 187 payload bytes (188 bytes – 1 sync
byte) of an MPEG2 frame are examined and checked for a set error indication flag. If a flag is set, at
least 11 bits are erroneous in the available MPEG2 frame (up to 10 erroneous bytes can be corrected
by the Reed-Solomon decoder in 8VSB/ATSC). When such a flag appears, a third counter is
incremented. The fourth counter counts the processed MPEG2 frames. When the fourth counter
reaches a value of 7353 frames, the number of bits processed is:
bytes bit
7353 frames ×187 ×8 = 11×106 bits
frames byte
An error indication flag stands for 11 erroneous bits. In this case, the BER is 1E-6. The value of the third
counter forms the first sample of the BER measurement after the Reed-Solomon decoder.
Processing of individual samples for BER values and selection of integration time
The further processing (integration) of samples is common to all three BER measurements. A dynamic
ring memory with up to 1000 cells is available for each measurement.
Depending on the BER rate, the test depth has to be adjusted. This is done either by using only the last
stored value to calculate the BER or by carrying out an integration over the last 10, 100, 1000, 10 K,
100 K, 1 M, 10 M, 100 M or 1 G measured values. In BER calculation, the unit automatically switches to
a longer integration time if this is expedient or necessary (see Running BER calculation at the end of
this section). The unit automatically switches back to a shorter integration time if this is desired by the
user.
result, e.g. following switch-on. The display, however, is very stable. This mode is useful for stationary
applications in which the test receiver is constantly used under the same operating conditions.
If a minimum integration time of 1 sample is selected, the receiver switches the measurement time to
1 sample when a high BER (>3E-6, BER AFTER RS: >3E-5) is measured. In calibration, for example,
this allows a change of the BER value to be detected immediately. However, the indication is relatively
unstable due to the short measurement time. In practice, a minimum integration time of 10 samples has
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.96
with a high number of samples. Two figures are therefore specified together with the BER value: the
first specifies the number of samples currently used for the displayed BER. The second number
specifies the number of samples currently aimed at (counter final value). The letters K, M and G stand
for multiplication by 103, 106 and 109; the digits following K, M and G are decimal places. (Example:
BER BEFORE RS = 7.2E-10 (1K44/10K) means: 1K44 = 1.44 x 103 = 1440 samples of 10 K=10 x 103
= 10000 samples have been processed). The memory has a limit of 1 000 000 000 = 1 x 109 samples.
In practice, this value means that recording is limited to a period of time of approximately 12 years. After
this period, the BER samples recorded first (which are now 12 years old) are overwritten by the current
measured values.
When the counter final value is reached, a switchover is made to running BER calculation: the last 10,
100, 1000, 10 K, 100 K, 1 M, 10 M, 100 M or 1G samples (depending on the final value required) are
combined to form one measured value so that a new set of values is obtained for each new sample.
The great advantage of this method is that the indicated BER is always the latest value, i.e. the
measured value is continuously updated. On the other hand, the system is flexible enough to
immediately reduce the number of integrated samples for a sudden deterioration of the input signal
quality (e.g. when a noise generator is connected).
count. The other counts can be deduced from this:
Individual samples
st
1 measured
2nd measured
3rd measured
4th measured
5th measured
6th measured
7th measured
8th measured
9th measured
10th measured
11th measured
12th measured
14th measured
14th measured
15th measured
16th measured
Fig. 2.8-76 Measurement of BER: running BER calculation over 10 samples
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.97
The Test Receiver EFA-ATSC is equipped with two interfaces for transmitted data: the parallel MPEG2
interface and the serial MPEG2 interface. Both are internationally standardized by the “DVB-TM Ad hoc
Group Physical Interfaces”. Via each interface, the 188 information bytes of a complete MPEG2 frame
(1 segment) are transmitted.

according to the LVDS (low voltage differential signalling) standard, which provides symmetrical data.
The key characteristics are:
Source impedance: 100 Ω

Signal amplitude: 247 mV to 454 mV
13 2 1

25 14
Non-inverting output Inverting output
Name
(pin No.) (pin No.)
CLOCK 1 14
GND 2 15
DATA 7 3 16
DATA 6 4 17
DATA 5 5 18
DATA 4 6 19
DATA 3 7 20
DATA 2 8 21
DATA 1 9 22
DATA 0 10 23
DATA VALID 11 24
PSYNC 12 25
GND 13 -
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.98
Übertragung der 188 Informationsbytes

Transmission of 188 information bytes
SY 1 2 3 4 5 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 SY 1 2 DATA(0...7)
CLOCK
PSYNC
DATA VALID
SY: sync byte
SY: Sync-Byte
Fig. 2.8-78 Signals at parallel interface
transmission links (several hundred meters) can be implemented. The key characteristics are:

Source impedance: 75 Ω, unbalanced (BNC)
DC component: 0V
Signal amplitude: 0.8 ±0.08 V into 75 Ω
70 MHz over the used length
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.99

Measurement Function
To minimize the contribution to the overall signal degradation on the path to the receiver, amplification
of the transmitted RF signals should be as pure as possible. However, it is necessary to limit the power
of the transmitted signal (clipping) to avoid unnecessarily reducing the lifetime of transistor transmitter
output stages. For this reason, particular attention is given to the CCDF measurement as well as to the
related crest factor û/urms in the development and operation of high-power transmitters.
In practice, two different definitions of the CCDF function are used, which provide different results.
Osc Osc
LO LO
RF IF IF RF IF Reso- Envelope
Filter ADC CCDF lution Detector, CCDF
(SAW) BW Video BW
Mixer Mixer
Fig. 2.8-79 Signal path for determining CCDF(RF) with Test Receiver EFA (left) and with a
spectrum analyzer, or CCDF(ENV) with Test Receiver EFA (right), simplified
representation
Definition 1: Sampling of the RF/IF signal

In the Test Receiver EFA, the modulated signal is mixed into a suitable intermediate frequency, where it
is digitized (Fig. 2.8-79 left). The digital samples are used directly to evaluate and display the
CCDF(RF). For an ideal continuous wave signal (CW signal), the crest factor is therefore 3.0 dB. IF
filtering is carried out by means of a SAW filter adapted to the signal bandwidth; video filtering of the
signal is not carried out. This means that the signal itself is not changed.
Definition 2: Sampling the envelope

The central element of a spectrum analyzer is the envelope detector. This is where a level is assigned
to a modulated signal by means of suitable time filtering (Fig. 2.8-79 right). The high-frequency
modulation component is removed from the signal, and only an "envelope" signal is used. In the case of
bandwidth (VBW) do not impair the signal:
BWResolution > BWSignal , BWVideo ≥ 3∗ BWResolution .
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.100
For CCDF(RF), the Test Receiver EFA analyzes the signal as it is received at the RF connector (carrier
signal measurement, see section 2.8.10.4.1). In particular, a pure CW signal has a crest factor of 3.0 dB
in accordance with its definition. However, the CCDF(ENV) measurement in the Test Receiver EFA with
of (ideally) 0.0 dB. Investigations have shown that with signals of any type, the crest factors of both
methods differ by 3.0 dB. In general, however, conversion cannot be carried out between the two traces
by simply taking the 3 dB difference into consideration. Fig. 2.8-80 shows the time characteristic of a
modulated signal. In addition, the example shows the data from which the CCDF measurement is
calculated with the Spectrum Analyzer FSP and the Test Receiver EFA.
Fig. 2.8-80 Time characteristic of a modulated signal. The graph shows the original wave
form, the samples that are used by the Test Receiver EFA in the CCDF(RF)
measurement, and the envelope of the signal that is used by the Spectrum
Analyzer FSP and by the Test Receiver EFA during CCDF(ENV).
Fig. 2.8-81 Comparison of the two measurements CCDF(RF) (left) and CCDF(ENV) (right) of
an ideal 8VSB/ATSC signal with the Test Receiver EFA.
The crest factor in the CCDF(ENV) measurement is 3 dB lower than in the
CCDF(RF) measurement.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.101
Fig. 2.8-82 Measuring the CCDF with the Spectrum Analyzer FSP, same signal as in Fig.
2.8-81. The crest factor is 3 dB lower in comparison to the measurement with the
EFA.
Measuring the CCDF is a simple and effective method of determining nonlinear characteristics of active
elements. If the measurement of the CCDF is to be referred to the signal actually transmitted (instead of
to the envelope), it is advisable to use the Test Receiver EFA with its CCDF(RF) measurement. This
instrument also determines the crest factor for the signal that is actually transmitted.
Several channel frequency tables are stored in the EFA. These can be selected via the SPECIAL
FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION function, see section 2.8.6.1. The frequency setting is carried out
in the RF menu by entering the channel or special channel number, see section 2.8.4. Channels with
"0" datum are not selectable.
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.102

No center frequency vision carrier No center frequency vision carrier
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0
2 57000000 55250000 2 57000000 55250000
3 63000000 61250000 3 63000000 61250000
4 69000000 67250000 4 69000000 67250000
5 79000000 77250000 5 79000000 77250000
6 85000000 83250000 6 85000000 83250000
7 177000000 175250000 7 177000000 175250000
8 183000000 181250000 8 183000000 181250000
9 189000000 187250000 9 189000000 187250000
10 195000000 193250000 10 195000000 193250000
11 201000000 199250000 11 201000000 199250000
12 207000000 205250000 12 207000000 205250000
13 213000000 211250000 13 213000000 211250000
14 473000000 471250000 14 123000000 121250000
15 479000000 477250000 15 129000000 127250000
16 485000000 483250000 16 135000000 133250000
17 491000000 489250000 17 141000000 139250000
18 497000000 495250000 18 147000000 145250000
19 503000000 501250000 19 153000000 151250000
20 509000000 507250000 20 159000000 157250000
21 515000000 513250000 21 165000000 163250000
22 521000000 519250000 22 171000000 169250000
23 527000000 525250000 23 219000000 217250000
24 533000000 531250000 24 225000000 223250000
25 539000000 537250000 25 231000000 229250000
26 545000000 543250000 26 237000000 235250000
27 551000000 549250000 27 243000000 241250000
28 557000000 555250000 28 249000000 247250000
29 563000000 561250000 29 255000000 253250000
30 569000000 567250000 30 261000000 259250000
31 575000000 573250000 31 267000000 265250000
32 581000000 579250000 32 273000000 271250000
33 587000000 585250000 33 279000000 277250000
34 593000000 591250000 34 285000000 283250000
35 599000000 597250000 35 291000000 289250000
36 605000000 603250000 36 297000000 295250000
37 611000000 609250000 37 303000000 301250000
38 617000000 615250000 38 309000000 307250000
39 623000000 621250000 39 315000000 313250000
40 629000000 627250000 40 321000000 319250000
41 635000000 633250000 41 327000000 325250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 333000000 331250000
43 647000000 645250000 43 339000000 337250000
44 653000000 651250000 44 345000000 343250000
45 659000000 657250000 45 351000000 349250000
46 665000000 663250000 46 357000000 355250000
47 671000000 669250000 47 363000000 361250000
48 677000000 675250000 48 369000000 367250000
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.103

49 683000000 681250000 49 375000000 373250000
50 689000000 687250000 50 381000000 379250000
51 695000000 693250000 51 387000000 385250000
52 701000000 699250000 52 393000000 391250000
53 707000000 705250000 53 399000000 397250000
54 713000000 711250000 54 405000000 403250000
55 719000000 717250000 55 411000000 409250000
56 725000000 723250000 56 417000000 415250000
57 731000000 729250000 57 423000000 421250000
58 737000000 735250000 58 429000000 427250000
59 743000000 741250000 59 435000000 433250000
60 749000000 747250000 60 441000000 439250000
61 755000000 753250000 61 447000000 445250000
62 761000000 759250000 62 453000000 451250000
63 767000000 765250000 63 459000000 457250000
64 773000000 771250000 64 465000000 463250000
65 779000000 777250000 65 471000000 469250000
66 785000000 783250000 66 477000000 475250000
67 791000000 789250000 67 483000000 481250000
68 797000000 795250000 68 489000000 487250000
69 803000000 801250000 69 495000000 493250000
70 809000000 807250000 70 501000000 499250000
71 815000000 813250000 71 507000000 505250000
72 821000000 819250000 72 513000000 511250000
73 827000000 825250000 73 519000000 517250000
74 833000000 831250000 74 525000000 523250000
75 839000000 837250000 75 531000000 529250000
76 845000000 843250000 76 537000000 535250000
77 851000000 849250000 77 543000000 541250000
78 857000000 855250000 78 549000000 547250000
79 863000000 861250000 79 555000000 553250000
80 869000000 867250000 80 561000000 559250000
81 875000000 873250000 81 567000000 565250000
82 881000000 879250000 82 573000000 571250000
83 887000000 885250000 83 579000000 577250000
84 0 0 84 585000000 583250000
85 0 0 85 591000000 589250000
86 0 0 86 597000000 595250000
87 0 0 87 603000000 601250000
88 0 0 88 609000000 607250000
89 0 0 89 615000000 613250000
90 0 0 90 621000000 619250000
91 0 0 91 627000000 625250000
92 0 0 92 633000000 631250000
93 0 0 93 639000000 637250000
94 0 0 94 645000000 643250000
95 0 0 95 93000000 91250000
96 0 0 96 99000000 97250000
97 0 0 97 105000000 103250000
98 0 0 98 111000000 109250000
99 0 0 99 117000000 115250000
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.104

0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0
2 57000000 55250000 2 57000000 55250000
3 63000000 61250000 3 63000000 61250000
4 69000000 67250000 4 69000000 67250000
5 79000000 77250000 5 79000000 77250000
6 85000000 83250000 6 85000000 83250000
7 177000000 175250000 7 177000000 175250000
8 183000000 181250000 8 183000000 181250000
9 189000000 187250000 9 189000000 187250000
10 195000000 193250000 10 195000000 193250000
11 201000000 199250000 11 201000000 199250000
12 207000000 205250000 12 207000000 205250000
13 213000000 211250000 13 213000000 211250000
14 473000000 471250000 14 123000000 121250000
15 479000000 477250000 15 129000000 127250000
16 485000000 483250000 16 135000000 133250000
17 491000000 489250000 17 141000000 139250000
18 497000000 495250000 18 147000000 145250000
19 503000000 501250000 19 153000000 151250000
20 509000000 507250000 20 159000000 157250000
21 515000000 513250000 21 165000000 163250000
22 521000000 519250000 22 171000000 169250000
23 527000000 525250000 23 219000000 217250000
24 533000000 531250000 24 225000000 223250000
25 539000000 537250000 25 231000000 229250000
26 545000000 543250000 26 237000000 235250000
27 551000000 549250000 27 243000000 241250000
28 557000000 555250000 28 249000000 247250000
29 563000000 561250000 29 255000000 253250000
30 569000000 567250000 30 261000000 259250000
31 575000000 573250000 31 267000000 265250000
32 581000000 579250000 32 273000000 271250000
33 587000000 585250000 33 279000000 277250000
34 593000000 591250000 34 285000000 283250000
35 599000000 597250000 35 291000000 289250000
36 605000000 603250000 36 297000000 295250000
37 611000000 609250000 37 303000000 301250000
38 617000000 615250000 38 309000000 307250000
39 623000000 621250000 39 315000000 313250000
40 629000000 627250000 40 321000000 319250000
41 635000000 633250000 41 327000000 325250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 333000000 331250000
43 647000000 645250000 43 339000000 337250000
44 653000000 651250000 44 345000000 343250000
45 659000000 657250000 45 351000000 349250000
46 665000000 663250000 46 357000000 355250000
47 671000000 669250000 47 363000000 361250000
48 677000000 675250000 48 369000000 367250000
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.105

49 683000000 681250000 49 375000000 373250000
50 689000000 687250000 50 381000000 379250000
51 695000000 693250000 51 387000000 385250000
52 701000000 699250000 52 393000000 391250000
53 707000000 705250000 53 399000000 397250000
54 713000000 711250000 54 405000000 403250000
55 719000000 717250000 55 411000000 409250000
56 725000000 723250000 56 417000000 415250000
57 731000000 729250000 57 423000000 421250000
58 737000000 735250000 58 429000000 427250000
59 743000000 741250000 59 435000000 433250000
60 749000000 747250000 60 441000000 439250000
61 755000000 753250000 61 447000000 445250000
62 761000000 759250000 62 453000000 451250000
63 767000000 765250000 63 459000000 457250000
64 773000000 771250000 64 465000000 463250000
65 779000000 777250000 65 471000000 469250000
66 785000000 783250000 66 477000000 475250000
67 791000000 789250000 67 483000000 481250000
68 797000000 795250000 68 489000000 487250000
69 803000000 801250000 69 495000000 493250000
70 809000000 807250000 70 501000000 499250000
71 815000000 813250000 71 507000000 505250000
72 821000000 819250000 72 513000000 511250000
73 827000000 825250000 73 519000000 517250000
74 833000000 831250000 74 525000000 523250000
75 839000000 837250000 75 531000000 529250000
76 845000000 843250000 76 537000000 535250000
77 851000000 849250000 77 543000000 541250000
78 857000000 855250000 78 549000000 547250000
79 863000000 861250000 79 555000000 553250000
80 869000000 867250000 80 561000000 559250000
81 875000000 873250000 81 0 0
82 881000000 879250000 82 0 0
83 887000000 885250000 83 0 0
84 0 0 84 0 0
85 0 0 85 0 0
86 0 0 86 0 0
87 0 0 87 0 0
88 0 0 88 0 0
89 0 0 89 0 0
90 0 0 90 0 0
91 0 0 91 0 0
92 0 0 92 0 0
93 0 0 93 0 0
94 0 0 94 0 0
95 0 0 95 0 0
96 0 0 96 0 0
97 0 0 97 0 0
98 0 0 98 111000000 109250000
99 0 0 99 117000000 115250000
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.106

0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 107000000 105250000
2 50000000 48250000 2 114000000 112250000
3 57000000 55250000 3 121000000 119250000
4 64000000 62250000 4 128000000 126250000
5 177000000 175250000 5 135000000 133250000
6 184000000 182250000 6 142000000 140250000
7 191000000 189250000 7 149000000 147250000
8 198000000 196250000 8 156000000 154250000
9 205000000 203250000 9 163000000 161250000
10 212000000 210250000 10 170000000 168250000
11 219000000 217250000 11 233000000 231250000
12 226000000 224250000 12 240000000 238250000
13 0 0 13 247000000 245250000
14 0 0 14 254000000 252250000
15 0 0 15 261000000 259250000
16 0 0 16 268000000 266250000
17 0 0 17 275000000 273250000
18 0 0 18 282000000 280250000
19 0 0 19 289000000 287250000
20 0 0 20 296000000 294250000
21 473000000 471250000 21 305000000 303250000
22 481000000 479250000 22 313000000 311250000
23 489000000 487250000 23 321000000 319250000
24 497000000 495250000 24 329000000 327250000
25 505000000 503250000 25 337000000 335250000
26 513000000 511250000 26 345000000 343250000
27 521000000 519250000 27 353000000 351250000
28 529000000 527250000 28 361000000 359250000
29 537000000 535250000 29 369000000 367250000
30 545000000 543250000 30 377000000 375250000
31 553000000 551250000 31 385000000 383250000
32 561000000 559250000 32 393000000 391250000
33 569000000 567250000 33 401000000 399250000
34 577000000 575250000 34 409000000 407250000
35 585000000 583250000 35 417000000 415250000
36 593000000 591250000 36 425000000 423250000
37 601000000 599250000 37 433000000 431250000
38 609000000 607250000 38 441000000 439250000
39 617000000 615250000 39 449000000 447250000
40 625000000 623250000 40 457000000 455250000
41 633000000 631250000 41 465000000 463250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 0 0
43 649000000 647250000 43 0 0
44 657000000 655250000 44 0 0
45 665000000 663250000 45 0 0
46 673000000 671250000 46 0 0
47 681000000 679250000 47 0 0
48 689000000 687250000 48 0 0
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.107

49 697000000 695250000 49 0 0
50 705000000 703250000 50 0 0
51 713000000 711250000 51 0 0
52 721000000 719250000 52 0 0
53 729000000 727250000 53 0 0
54 737000000 735250000 54 0 0
55 745000000 743250000 55 0 0
56 753000000 751250000 56 0 0
57 761000000 759250000 57 0 0
58 769000000 767250000 58 0 0
59 777000000 775250000 59 0 0
60 785000000 783250000 60 0 0
61 793000000 791250000 61 0 0
62 801000000 799250000 62 0 0
63 809000000 807250000 63 0 0
64 817000000 815250000 64 0 0
65 825000000 823250000 65 0 0
66 833000000 831250000 66 0 0
67 841000000 839250000 67 0 0
68 849000000 847250000 68 0 0
69 857000000 855250000 69 0 0
70 865000000 863250000 70 0 0
71 0 0 71 0 0
72 0 0 72 0 0
73 0 0 73 0 0
74 0 0 74 0 0
75 0 0 75 0 0
76 0 0 76 0 0
77 0 0 77 0 0
78 0 0 78 0 0
79 0 0 79 0 0
80 0 0 80 0 0
81 0 0 81 0 0
82 0 0 82 0 0
83 0 0 83 0 0
84 0 0 84 0 0
85 0 0 85 0 0
86 0 0 86 0 0
87 0 0 87 0 0
88 0 0 88 0 0
89 0 0 89 0 0
90 0 0 90 0 0
91 0 0 91 0 0
92 0 0 92 0 0
93 0 0 93 0 0
94 0 0 94 0 0
95 0 0 95 0 0
96 0 0 96 0 0
97 0 0 97 0 0
98 0 0 98 0 0
99 0 0 99 0 0
2068.0950.12-14.04 2.8.108
R&S® EFA Model 60/63/70/73, Option B20 QAM Analyzer/Demodulator
2.9 Operation as Test Receiver/Demodulator QAM Signals ..........................................2.9.3

2.9.1 Introduction and Overview .............................................................................................2.9.3
2.9.1.1 Quick Reference ............................................................................................................2.9.4
2.9.2 MODE Menu ..................................................................................................................2.9.5
2.9.3 INPUT Menu/Input Selection .........................................................................................2.9.6
2.9.3.1 Standard Test Receiver EFA Model 60/70 ...................................................................2.9.6
2.9.3.2 Demodulator EFA Model 63/73 ......................................................................................2.9.8
2.9.3.3 High-End Test Receiver EFA Model 63/73 with EFA-B3 Preselector Option ............. 2.9.10
2.9.4 RF Menu ..................................................................................................................... 2.9.12
2.9.5 STATUS Menu ............................................................................................................ 2.9.14
2.9.5.1 ORDER OF QAM ........................................................................................................ 2.9.14
2.9.5.2 SET SYMBOL RATE................................................................................................... 2.9.15
2.9.5.3 SAW FILTER BW ........................................................................................................ 2.9.15
2.9.5.4 BEEPER...................................................................................................................... 2.9.16
2.9.6 SPECIAL FUNCTION Menu ....................................................................................... 2.9.18
2.9.6.1 CHANNEL DEFINITION ............................................................................................. 2.9.18
2.9.6.2 MPEG DATA OUTPUT ............................................................................................... 2.9.22
2.9.6.3 EQUALIZER ................................................................................................................ 2.9.24
2.9.6.4 LOOP SETTINGS ....................................................................................................... 2.9.25
2.9.6.5 DISPLAY ..................................................................................................................... 2.9.27
2.9.6.6 BER/FEC..................................................................................................................... 2.9.30
2.9.7 ALARM Menu.............................................................................................................. 2.9.31
2.9.7.2 Alarm Register ............................................................................................................ 2.9.34
2.9.8 MEASURE Menu ........................................................................................................ 2.9.39
2.9.8.1 Measurement Window ................................................................................................ 2.9.40
2.9.8.3 Histograms .................................................................................................................. 2.9.46
2.9.8.4 Measurements in the Frequency Domain ................................................................... 2.9.49
2.9.8.6 QAM Parameters ........................................................................................................ 2.9.71
2.9.8.7 Noise Generator (ADD. NOISE) ................................................................................. 2.9.73
2.9.9 Menu Overview ........................................................................................................... 2.9.74
2.9.10 Hints and Applications ................................................................................................ 2.9.85
2.9.10.3 Assignment and Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs ............................ 2.9.93
2.9.10.4 Definition and Application of the CCDF and
Amplitude Distribution Measurement Function ........................................................... 2.9.95
2.9.10.5 Application and Interpretation of Constellation Diagram............................................. 2.9.97
2.9.10.6 Definitions, Formulas and Measurement Limits of QAM Parameters...................... 2.9.100
2.9.10.7 Channel Frequency Tables ....................................................................................... 2.9.106
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.1
QAM Analyzer / Demodulator R&S ® EFA Model 60/63/70/73, Option B20
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.2
2.9 Operation as Test Receiver/Demodulator QAM

Signals
Note: For the sake of clarity, the QAM Test Receiver EFA to the ITU-T J.83/A/B/C Standards will
be designated simply as the "EFA-QAM" instead of "EFA Model 60/63/70/73 / Option
EFA-B20" in the following.

The Test Receiver EFA-QAM measures quadrature-amplitude-modulated signals (QAM) as used in
digital video broadcasting via cable networks (CATV).
In Europe and Japan, the QAM transmission of TV signals in CATV networks is designated DVB-C, in
the United States J.83/B.
The individual transmission standards are combined in the ITU-T J.83 standard:
ITU-T J.83/A Transmission standard as used in Europe.
ITU-T J.83/B Transmission standard as used in USA.
ITU-T J.83/C Transmission standard as used in Japan.
The key parameters of the ITU-T J.83/A/B/C standards are shown in the following table:
ITU-T J.83/A ITU-T J.83/B ITU-T J.83/C
EFA model or EFA 60/63 EFA 70/73 EFA 60/63

EFA option EFA-B20 with EFA-K21 EFA-B20 with EFA-K23 EFA-B20 with EFA-K21
FEC RS 204/188 RS 128/122 RS 204/188
Modulation mode 16-, 32-, 64-, 256QAM 64QAM 256QAM 64QAM
Trellis code rate no Trellis coding 14/15 19/20 no trellis coding
Roll-off factor 0.15 0.18 0.12 0.13
Channel bandwidth 8 MHz 6 MHz 6 MHz 6 MHz
Table 2.9-1 Overview of QAM transmission standards for TV signals

The instrument has a number of special characteristics for measuring QAM signals, which make it
particularly suitable for accurate analysis and measurement of all the important parameters.
The input signal is processed in line with the transmission standard. This includes demapping,
deinterleaving, and the Viterbi and Reed-Solomon decoders. The decoded MPEG-2 data is made
available in serial (TS-ASI interface) as well as parallel (TS-PARALLEL) form. Irrespective of the
measurement selected, the data is simultaneously available at all interfaces whenever required.
Extremely powerful digital signal processing allows accurate analysis of the applied QAM signal. A
newly developed data storage technique permits very flexible and efficient collection of measurement
results for all the relevant signal parameters, providing valuable information on problems that may occur
during transmission. A central feature is the constellation diagram display on the LCD, which can be
individually configured and permits a variable number of symbols to be displayed (to ). This allows
signal events covering an extended period of time to be displayed. A large number of useful functions
for specifically measuring QAM signals have been implemented in this instrument for the first time.
Another feature is the automatic storage of various messages in an alarm register.
The Test Receiver EFA-QAM is optionally available as a receiver with tracking selection or as a
demodulator with a non-selective receiver section. The test receiver with tracking channel selection is
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.3
selective RF input is particularly suited for direct monitoring and quality control of QAM transmitters.
The demodulator can be upgraded to the high-end measurement receiver.
This powerful instrument can, of course, be used at any time for applications in research and
development laboratories, quality assurance, service, as well as for monitoring transmitters and
production of TV consumer electronics.
With the appropriate options, the Test Receiver EFA provides a one-box solution capable of detecting,
demodulating, decoding, and measuring digital TV signals to the ITU-T J.83/A/B/C standards, to the
8VSB/ATSC standard, as well as analog NTSC signals. The instrument is configured for the specific
application required via the MODE key. If, for example, demodulation according to the ITU-T J.83/B
standard is required of the EFA-QAM, the QAM / J.83/B ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR softkey must be
pressed in the MODE menu. All the hardkeys are assigned a specific function irrespective of the
demodulator/decoder modules integrated in the EFA. The functions of the INPUT and RF menus are
largely identical. The STATUS and SPECIAL FUNCTION menus depend on the demodulator mode
selected in the MODE menu and have completely different structures. Only the SETUP menu is
identical for all EFA modes. It is described in section 2.3.2.
This manual presents and describes the various functions in their logical order.
For users who are basically familiar with the EFA, the steps required for direct synchronization of a
QAM signal are listed below in sequence:
2. Select the desired mode in the MODE menu.
3. Press PRESET.
4. Select input (INPUT).
5. Set receive frequency (RF).
6. Select filter bandwidth (STATUS:SAW FILTER BW menu).
In the MEASURE menu, the constellation diagram can now be displayed, or another of the
measurements selected.
For possible causes of non-synchronization, see 2.9.8.1.8.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.4
2.9.2 MODE Menu

depends on the options installed. For demodulation, decoding and analysis, select the desired
demodulator mode. The currently selected demodulator mode is in inverse video. Use the cursor keys
(and ) to select the desired demodulator mode. The selected demodulator mode is activated by
pressing the ENTER key. The device settings of the RF, INPUT, STATUS, ALARM and SPECIAL
FUNCTION menus are assigned to the MODE and saved accordingly. That is to say, if the MODE is
changed, the EFA restores the settings last used in the relevant demodulator mode. The default
settings (PRESET and RESET) such as QAM order, SAW filter bandwidth, symbol rate and roll-off
factor depend on the QAM demodulator mode, see chapter 2.9.5.
Note: This chapter (2.9) describes only the QAM demodulator modes. For descriptions of the
other demodulator modes, see the relevant chapters.
The content of the MODE menu depends on the device options installed. Fig. 2.9-1 shows two
examples:
MODE menu with the options: MODE menu with the options:
 EFA-K21 DVB-C FIRMWARE  EFA-B4 MPEG2 DECODER
 EFA-K22 ATSC FIRMWARE  EFA-B30 NTSC/BTSC DEMODULATOR
 EFA-K23 J.83/B FIRMWARE  EFA-K21 DVB-C FIRMWARE
 EFA-K22 ATSC FIRMWARE
 EFA-K23 J.83/B FIRMWARE
Fig. 2.9-1 The MODE menu depends on the device options installed
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.5
2.9.3 INPUT Menu/Input Selection

In the INPUT menu, the input selection, RF input attenuator and preamplifier settings can be made. All
the settings in the INPUT menu refer to the selected demodulation mode (MODE menu), i.e. if the
demodulation mode is changed, the settings previously selected in that mode are effective.
The INPUT menu of the test receiver with tracking channel selection (EFA model 60/70) is different
from that of the non-selective demodulator (EFA model 63/73). If the non-selective demodulator
(EFA model 63/73) is equipped with the EFA-B3 PRESELECTOR option, the preselector is also
controlled via the INPUT menu. The description of the INPUT menu is organized according to
instrument models:
 EFA model 60/70 or EFA receiver model plus EFA-B20 option with EFA-K21/K23,
see section 2.9.3.1
 EFA model 63/73 or EFA demodulator model plus EFA-B20 option with EFA-K21/K23,
see section 2.9.3.2
 EFA model 63/73 plus EFA-B3 option (PRESELECTOR) or EFA demodulator model plus EFA-B3
and EFA-B20 options, see section 2.9.3.3
2.9.3.1 Standard Test Receiver EFA Model 60/70
Fig. 2.9-2 INPUT menu of standard test receiver EFA model 60/70, here in demodulator
mode ITU-T J.83/B
EFA model, this can be a 50  or 75  input. The message INPUT 75 OHM REAR indicates that the
displayed, the BNC connector on the front panel is enabled. This input allows QAM signals with a
channel center frequency of 48 MHz to 862 MHz to be received.
The IF input of the test receiver is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 . The input is
located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF center frequency is 36.000 MHz.
displayed:
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.6
Fig. 2.9-3 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of EFA-QAM standard test receiver, here in
demodulator mode ITU-T J.83/B
set.
demodulated signal.
Note: When the attenuator is controlled manually, the receivable level range of the test receiver
is considerably restricted.
In the Auto mode, the attenuator is controlled automatically depending on the measured input level.
The following receive level ranges apply to the EFA-QAM standard test receiver, a switching hysteresis
of 1 dB being effective in each case.
Attenuator
ATTEN Preamp OFF Preamp ON
AUTO
0 dB < -37 dBm < -47 dBm
40 dB -2 dBm to +3 dBm -12 dBm to -7 dBm
50 dB +8 dBm to +13 dBm -2 dBm to +3 dBm
55 dB > +13 dBm > +3 dBm
Table 2.9-2 Switching thresholds of input attenuator of EFA-QAM test receiver model 60/70
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.7
of the receiver is somewhat higher. A passive attenuator with an attenuation range of 55 dB is
connected ahead of the selective receive section. The attenuator can be set in steps of 5 dB. In
automatic attenuator control mode, the switching thresholds of the attenuator Table 2.9-2 are the same
in the LOW NOISE and LOW DIST modes.
Using the 10 dB PREAMP key, a low-noise preamplifier can be connected to improve the receiver
noise figure to typically 6 dB. This is useful when low-level signals are received. The attenuator is
correctly set in automatic operation. For the switching thresholds with automatic attenuator control and
preamplifier activated, see Fig. 2.9-3.
2.9.3.2 Demodulator EFA Model 63/73
Fig. 2.9-4 INPUT menu of EFA-QAM demodulator, here in DVB-C mode (J.83/A or J.83/C)
located on the rear panel and has an impedance of 50 . This input allows QAM signals with a channel
center frequency of 42 MHz to 1000 MHz to be received. It is suitable for carrying out measurements on
transmitters where only one carrier signal is available. The test signals are not subject to filtering of any
kind in the RF receiver section. These characteristics have a number of advantages:
 Optimum adjustment of the RF input, return loss 30 dB.
 Best possible instrument characteristics with regard to linear distortion, since there is no RF
selection.
 The internal level setting is optimized for reception of a single signal. This allows the best possible
signal/noise ratio to be obtained, (typically inherent SNR = 48 dB).
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.8
Image frequency = RF + 72 MHz
The IF input of the demodulator is activated with the IF key. The input impedance is 50 . The input is
located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF center frequency is 36.000 MHz. For other
intermediate frequencies, use one of the RF inputs.
Fig. 2.9-5 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of EFA-QAM demodulator, here in DVB-C mode
optimized depending on the level of the receive signal. The automatically selected setting appears in
the display header above the measured level. The AUTO setting is generally recommended.
For special applications, it may be useful to set the attenuation switch manually, which has the following
advantages:
 No switching of input attenuation in the event of level loss or large level variations.
 Measurements can be reproduced exactly. With automatic control, the input attenuation switch may
be set differently due to the switching hysteresis.
Level attenuation switch Level range

MANUAL LOW+PREAMP <-1 dBm
MANUAL LOW -1 dBm to +9 dBm
MANUAL HIGH >9 dBm
Table 2.9-3 Level switching thresholds of RF input DEMOD
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.9
2.9.3.3 High-End Test Receiver EFA Model 63/73 with EFA-B3 Preselector
Option
If the demodulator EFA model 63/73 is equipped with the EFA-B3 (preselector) option, the RECEIVER
and DEMOD keys can be used to switch between the selective (RECEIVER) and non-selective
(DEMOD) input. This model provides three RF inputs: 50  (N connector) and 75  (BNC connector)
selective inputs, as well as 50 (N connector) non-selective input.
Fig. 2.9-6 INPUT menu of high-end Test Receiver EFA-QAM with option EFA-B3
The selective inputs are available as 50  (N connector) and 75  (BNC connector) inputs. When the
RECEIVER input is activated, the RF INPUT 50/75 key is used to select either the selective 50  or the
75  input.
The selective RF inputs allow QAM signals with a channel center frequency of 4 MHz to 1000 MHz to
be received.
The input is located on the rear panel and labelled X10. The IF center frequency is 36.000 MHz. For
other intermediate frequencies, use one of the RF inputs.
displayed:
Fig. 2.9-7 INPUT: ATTENUATION menu of high-end Test Receiver EFA-QAM with option
EFA-B3
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.10
the range 0 dB to 55 dB. Settings can be made using the cursor keys (up or down ) or by direct entry
via the numeric keypad and confirmation with ENTER. When entries are made directly, the entered
numerals are rounded to a value divisible by 5. Where receive conditions are exceptionally critical, the
manual mode can be used to improve the intermodulation or noise characteristics of the demodulated
signal.
a brief sync loss.
When Auto is set, the attenuator is controlled automatically depending on the measured input level.
The following switching thresholds apply, a switching hysteresis of 1 dB being effective in each case.
Attenuator setting with Input level

ATTENuation AUTO
0 dB <-41 dBm
20 dB -26 to -21 dBm
55 dB >+9 dBm

switching thresholds of the attenuator are independent of the LOW NOISE, NORMAL and LOW DIST
modes.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.11
2.9.4 RF Menu
The RF menu is selected via the RF key in the MAIN FUNCTION block. The receive frequency of the
QAM signal to be demodulated and analyzed is set in this menu. The settings in this menu are assigned
to the demodulator mode (MODE menu, section 2.9.2). That is to say, when the demodulator mode is
changed, the RF used last in the selected demodulator mode is restored, see also section 2.9.2.
Fig. 2.9-8 RF menu of EFA-QAM
The desired receive channel can be set by entering the channel center frequency (RF), the channel or
special channel (CHANNEL or SPECIAL CHANNEL), or by calling up a previously stored RF (RCL RF).
The current RF settings are shown in the display.
Pressing the RF softkey allows the channel center frequency to be entered via the numeric keypad, or
changed via the cursor keys. If the set frequency is within 40 kHz of the frequency of a channel or
special channel of the selected channel frequency table, the corresponding channel number is
displayed.
defined in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu (section 2.9.6.1). The
Pressing the SPECIAL CHANNEL softkey allows the desired special channel number to be entered via
the numeric keypad, or changed via the cursor keys. The associated channel frequency table can be
selected and defined in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu (section 2.9.6.1). The
corresponding channel center frequency is displayed.
A receive frequency previously stored in the RF MEMORY with STO RF can be recalled by pressing the
of the numeric keypad or the cursor keys. If the receive frequency is selected using the RCL RF
function, the RF memory number and the associated text (see STO RF) are displayed in the header. Up
to 100 memory locations (0 to 99) can be used.
The currently set frequency can be stored in the RF memory and assigned to a memory location
number using the STO RF key. Pressing the STO RF key allows the desired RF memory number to be
entered via the numeric keypad and confirmed with ENTER. A text can be edited by pressing the EDIT
TEXT key and assigned to the previously selected RF memory number.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.12

Example: Saving the channel center frequency 123.456789 MHz with channel designation
 RF menu
 RF
 123.456789 <ENTER>
 STO RF ...
 99 <ENT>
 EDIT TEXT ...
 Edit "Test"
 SAVE & EXIT
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.13
2.9.5 STATUS Menu

The STATUS menu is selected using the STATUS key in the MAIN FUNCTION block. The following
parameters are displayed for example:
Fig. 2.9-10 STATUS menu of EFA-QAM, here in J.83/B operating mode

In the STATUS menu, all the main device parameters of the mode selected in the MODE menu are
displayed and set. The settings include: order of QAM, symbol rate, SAW filter bandwidth, as well as
roll-off factor and configuration of the beeper. The default settings in this menu depend on the QAM
mode.
DVB-C ITU-T J.83/B DVB-C
QAM MODE
ITU-T J.83/A 64-QAM 256-QAM ITU-T J.83/C
Symbol rate 6.9000000 Msymb/s 5.0569410 Msymb/s 5.3605370 Msymb/s 5.2739786 Msymb/s
SAW filter bandwidth 8 MHz 6 MHz 6 MHz 6 MHz
Roll-off factor 0.15 0.18 0.12 0.13
Table 2.9-5 Default settings depending on selected demodulator mode (MODE menu)
Settings concerning input selection or attenuator and preamplifier control must be made in the INPUT
menu, see section 2.9.3.
2.9.5.1 ORDER OF QAM
The order of QAM is determined in the modulator and must be set accordingly in the QAM receiver. All
common QAM orders (4-, 16-, 32-, 64-, 128- and 256QAM) can be demodulated.
In the ITU-T J.83/B transmission standard, only the 64QAM and 256QAM orders are defined. The EFA-
QAM can provide a valid MPEG transport stream for these orders only. The EFA-QAM is however also
able to demodulate 4-, 16-, 32- and 128QAM signals. With the exception of the decoder function and bit
error ratio measurement, all measurements can be carried out with the EFA-QAM
In particular in conjunction with the special function I/Q POSITION: NORMAL (see section 2.9.6.2.4)
any continuous QAM signals can be synchronized even without an MPEG transport stream and
analyzed with respect to MER, modulation characteristics and other parameters (back channel
measurements).
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.14
2.9.5.2 SET SYMBOL RATE
The symbol rate is determined in the modulator and must be set accordingly in the QAM receiver.
Pressing the SET SYMBOL RATE key allows the desired symbol rate to be entered directly via the
numeric keypads. The symbol rate setting after an instrument reset or preset depends on the
demodulator mode, see Table 2.9-6.
The symbol rate determines the bandwidth of the QAM signal. This has to be considered when
selecting the SAW filter bandwidth, see also section 2.9.5.3.
The internal noise generator is adapted to the set symbol rate so that the selected C/N power ratio is
always referred to the set symbol rate.
The IF bandwidth of the receiver is selected using the SAW FILTER BW softkey. To avoid the QAM
signal spectrum being clipped, the IF bandwidth must be selected at least as large as the required
transmission bandwidth of the QAM signal. The required transmission bandwidth of a QAM signal is
calculated from the symbol rate and the roll-off factor.
SAW FILTER BW required transmission bandwidth = symbol rate * (1 + roll-off)
Example of selecting the SAW filter:
What transmission bandwidth is required by a 64QAM signal with a symbol rate of
5.056941 Msymb/s and a roll-off factor of 0.18?
The required transmission bandwidth = 5.056941 Msymb/s * (1 + 0.18) = 5.967190 MHz.
To avoid clipping of the QAM signal by the EFA-QAM, a SAW FILTER BW of at least 6 MHz
must be selected.
The EFA-QAM has three slots for SAW filters. SAW filters with different bandwidths are available for the
SAW filter slots.
Note: The 6 MHz and the 7 MHz filter cannot be fitted at the same time.
SAW filter bandwidth Option Rohde & Schwarz Order No.

6 MHz EFA-B11 2067.3691.00
7 MHz EFA-B12 2067.3591.00
8 MHz EFA-B13 2067.3579.03
2 MHz EFA-B14 2067.3562.00
Table 2.9-6 Aviable SAW filter bandwidths
The SAW filters used are identified automatically. Unused SAW filters are displayed in italics and
cannot be selected.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.15
The filter optimally selects signals transmitted with 6 MHz channel spacing. This applies to the
terrestrial broadcasting of TV signals to the 8VSB/ATSC standard as well as to QAM signals to the ITU-
T J.83/B/C standard for broadcasting in cable systems.
In Europe, the channel bandwidth in the VHF range is 7 MHz. In addition to analog TV signals, DVB-C
signals are transmitted in this frequency range. This optional filter ensures optimal filtering of the 7 MHz
channel.
The filter optimally selects signals transmitted with 8 MHz channel spacing, such as QAM signals to the
DVB-C standard (ITU-T J.83/A).
This filter is particularly important for 8VSB/ATSC, since it is the only one that ensures error-free
measurement of the shoulder distance to FCC recommendation. For more details, see chapter 2.8.
The filter selects the receive signal in a bandwidth of 2 MHz. It is used for selecting back-channel
information.
2.9.5.4 BEEPER
The internal acoustic signal generator can be configured in the BEEPER... submenu. In the event of
different kinds of error, the signal generator is active if the appropriate parameter has been set to
ENABLED, or inactive if the parameter is set to DISABLED. The following errors can be signalled
acoustically:
 Signal level below the threshold set in alarm register, see section 2.9.7.3.
 Sync byte of MPEG2 frame not found
 Measured logarithmic MER (rms value) is below the threshold set in the alarm register, see section
2.9.7.3.
 Measured linear MER or EVM (rms value) is above the threshold set in the alarm register, see
section 2.9.7.3.
 Reed-Solomon decoder has corrected at least one faulty byte.
 Reed-Solomon decoder was unable to correct at least one faulty MPEG2 frame, which means that
the MPEG2 frame contains faulty bytes.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.16
Fig. 2.9-11 STATUS: BEEPER menu in DVB-C ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR mode
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.17

In the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu, the channel definitions (selection of a channel frequency table) can
be selected. In addition, special settings are offered (settings for equalizer and RF control loop), which
do not have to be changed in normal operation. In this menu the instrument can be set to a state where
normal operation is not always guaranteed. If a special function of this type is selected, the yellow LED
next to the key comes on. This LED goes off only when all of these functions have been reset to their
standard values (with the exception of the functions CHANNEL DEFINITION and DISPLAY). For the
standard values, see section 2.9.9 Menu Overview.
Fig. 2.9-12 SPECIAL FUNCTION menu in DVB-C mode
Fig. 2.9-13 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu in DVB-C mode
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.18
In the RCL TABLE menu, a predefined channel frequency table can be selected. The EFA-QAM
contains the main standard channels tables (STANDARD TABLE), see also section 2.9.10.7 Channel
Frequency Tables. These tables can be used as the basis for programming user-specific channel tables
(USER TABLE).
Fig. 2.9-14 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: RECALL and CHANNEL

DEFINITION EDIT menus in ITU-T J.83/B mode

activated channel frequency table. Pressing STANDARD TABLE or USER TABLE key displays the list
of the channel frequency tables stored in the EFA. The desired table is selected using the SELECT
TABLE key and activated by pressing ENTER. Table names displayed in italics have not yet been
defined by the user and cannot be selected. Up to three user-specific channel frequency tables can be
stored.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.19
2.9.6.1.2 Generating User-Specific Channel Tables (USER TABLE):
in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu, see Fig. 2.9-13.
COPY TABLE
Fig. 2.9-15 Copying a channel frequency table in ITU-T J.83/B mode
USER TABLE 2.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.20
EDIT TABLE
TABLE function.
First, press the EDIT TABLE key in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION menu, see Fig.
2.9-13. Then use the SELECT TABLE key to select the table that you wish to change.
 EDIT TABLE NAME
Fig. 2.9-16 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: EDIT TABLE NAME menu in
ITU-T J.83/B mode
If you wish to change the table name, press the EDIT TABLE NAME key. You can now use the editor
to change the name of the table. The cursor in the NAME text field can be moved using the LEFT and
maximum of 20 characters is permitted. In the above example, the table name was changed to "Rudy's
Table". After entering the desired name, press SAVE&EXIT.
 EDIT TABLE DATA
Fig. 2.9-17 SPECIAL FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION: EDIT TABLE DATA menu in
ITU-T J.83/B mode
Every table contains two channel frequency allocations, which can be selected using the CHANNEL
and SPECIAL CHANNEL keys. Every table has 100 memory locations. Memory locations with the
frequency value 0.000000 MHz cannot subsequently be called up in the RF menu. The channel number
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.21
for which the frequency is to be changed is selected using the CHANNEL UP and CHANNEL DOWN
keys. The frequency value is entered using the hardkeys of the VARIATION and DATA blocks. Once
the channel table has been changed, press the ESCape hardkey and then the EXIT softkey. The
channel table becomes effective after it has been selected using the RCL TABLE function, see section
2.9.6.1.1.
Clearing user-specific channel tables (CLEAR TABLE)
channel tables.
2.9.6.2 MPEG DATA OUTPUT
In the SPECIAL FUNCTION: MPEG DATA OUTPUT menu, settings for the MPEG output data stream
can be made. The IQ POSITION function in this menu can be used to select the demodulator setting for
the sideband position of the QAM signal.
Fig. 2.9-18 SPECIAL FUNCTION: MPEG DATA OUTPUT menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode
2.9.6.2.1 Special Function: ERROR INDICATION BIT in MPEG FRAME
The ERROR INDICATION BIT is part of every MPEG frame. It is set if the Reed-Solomon decoder was
unable to correct the transmission errors of this MPEG frame. The ERROR INDICATION BIT IN MPEG
FRAME softkey is used to select whether in the case of errors this bit is to be set (ENABLED) in the
MPEG output data stream or not (DISABLED).
The standard setting is ENABLED. If DISABLED has been selected, the LED next to the SPECIAL
FUNCTION hardkey lights.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.22
2.9.6.2.2 PARALLEL MPEG DATA PLL
The output stage of the parallel MPEG data output has a phase-locked loop (PLL) for eliminating phase
jitter of the edges. The PARALLEL MPEG DATA PLL softkey is used to select whether the PLL is to
be activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF).
The standard setting is ON. If OFF has been selected, the LED next to the SPECIAL FUNCTION
hardkey lights.
2.9.6.2.3 MPEG FRAME SIZE

The MPEG output data can be output in 188-byte or 204-byte format. The MPEG FRAME SIZE softkey
is used to select output of the MPEG data in 188 BYTE or 204 BYTE format.
The standard setting is 188 BYTE. If 204 BYTE has been selected, the LED next to the SPECIAL
FUNCTION hardkey lights. For more information about the MPEG output, see section 2.9.10.3
(Assignment and Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs).
2.9.6.2.4 IQ POSITION
The demodulator of the EFA-QAM can demodulate QAM signals with normal or inverted sideband. The
user selects the demodulator setting with the IQ POSITION softkey. In the AUTO setting, the
demodulator automatically detects the sideband position of the QAM signal. For detecting the sideband
position, the automatic mode uses the FEC flag of the Reed-Solomon decoder.
Note: Stable synchronization of the QAM demodulator in AUTO setting is only possible with the
MPEG frame signal.
In the NORMAL or INVERTED setting, the QAM demodulator is set to manual sideband selection. In
the NORMAL setting, the demodulator expects a QAM signal with normal sideband. In the INVERTED
setting, the demodulator expects a QAM signal with inverted sideband.
Note: Stable synchronization of QAM signals without MPEG frame (e.g. PRBS) is only possible if
the selection of the sideband position of the QAM demodulator has been set to manual
mode (i.e. NORMAL or INVERTED).
The standard setting is AUTO. If NORMAL or INVERTED has been selected, the LED next to the
SPECIAL FUNCTION hardkey lights.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.23
2.9.6.3 EQUALIZER
The EFA-QAM is equipped with a powerful self-adapting equalizer. This equalizer can be configured in
the SPECIAL FUNCTION: EQUALIZER menu.
Fig. 2.9-19 SPECIAL FUNCTION: EQUALIZER menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode

The self-adapting equalizer can be frozen (freezing the coefficients) and switched off using the
EQUALIZER softkey. In the ON position, the equalizer adapts itself to the QAM signal received and
compensates for the linear distortion. When the equalizer is switched ON after FREEZE, the filter
coefficients effective last are retained. The equalizer is "frozen". When the equalizer is switched OFF,
the filter coefficients are set so that the frequency response of the received signal is not affected. When
the instrument is preset or reset, the equalizer is set to ON.
Note 1: Measurement of amplitude, phase and group-delay frequency response, polar plot, and
echo pattern can be carried out only if the equalizer is switched on.
Note 2: If the instrument is switched off, or if there is a power failure, the frozen equalizer data will
be lost.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.24
2.9.6.4 LOOP SETTINGS
In the SPECIAL FUNCTION: LOOP SETTINGS menu, the bandwidths of the control loops can be set.
Fig. 2.9-20 SPECIAL FUNCTION: LOOP SETTINGS menu in ITU -T J.83/B mode
2.9.6.4.1 CARRIER FREQUENCY LOOP BANDWIDTH

The CARRIER FREQUENCY LOOP BANDWIDTH softkey allows the PLL bandwidth of the carrier
frequency loop to be set. In the LOW setting, the PLL bandwidth is small, i.e. even phase noise close to
the carrier is not suppressed by the demodulator and is reflected in the test results. This setting is also
recommended for carrier frequency measurements (default setting).
In the HIGH setting, the PLL bandwidth is large, i.e. phase noise close to the carrier is partially or
completely suppressed by the demodulator. This setting should only be selected if the demodulation
results for impaired receive signals are to be improved.
Depending on the setting the following PLL bandwidths are set:
CARRIER FREQUENCY LOOP

BANDWIDTH
LOW available upon request
MEDIUM available upon request
HIGH available upon request
2.9.6.4.2 BAUD RECOVERY LOOP BANDWIDTH
The BAUD RECOVERY LOOP BANDWIDTH softkey allows the PLL bandwidth of the phase-locked
loop to be set. In the LOW setting, the PLL bandwidth is small. A symbol rate jitter at the transmitter end
is reflected in the demodulation result (default setting).
In the HIGH setting, the PLL bandwidth is large, i.e. the demodulation components I and Q are affected
by symbol rate variations at the transmitter end. A low-frequency symbol rate jitter at the transmitter end
is suppressed by the demodulator.
BAUD RECOVERY LOOP

BANDWIDTH
LOW available upon request
MEDIUM available upon request
HIGH available upon request
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.25
2.9.6.4.3 AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL
Pressing the AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL key allows the gain control speed to be set. For
measurement tasks, the automatic gain control (AGC) should be set to SLOW. If SLOW is selected, the
AGC is set so that even superimposed low-frequency signal impairments (e.g. hum) are not
suppressed. As a result, these impairments of the QAM signal can be measured. This setting is made
after an instrument reset or preset.
If the test receiver is used as a receiver in a transposer system, for example, FAST is preferable, since
slow level variations and superimposed low-frequency impairments are then suppressed by the test
receiver. The quality of the demodulated impaired QAM signals is thus improved.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.26
2.9.6.5 DISPLAY
The DISPLAY... key is used to configure the measure menu. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.9-21 SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode
2.9.6.5.1 CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM ZOOM
The constellation diagram displayed can be zoomed in by a factor 4 using the CONSTELLATION
DIAGRAM ZOOM key. To select the quadrant, press the softkey repeatedly.
 OFF: normal display of constellation diagram Q

 Q1: positive I components and positive Q components
Q2 Q1
 Q2: negative I components and positive Q components I
 Q3: negative I components and negative Q components
 Q4: positive I components and negative Q components Q3 Q4
The SPEC FUNC LED lights when zoomed display of the constellation diagram is selected.
Fig. 2.9-22 Zoomed constellation diagram of 1st quadrant, 64QAM
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.27
2.9.6.5.2 Selecting the QAM PARAMETER MER% / EVM%
The QAM PARA/HISTORY/ALARM key is used to select whether the modulation error ratio (MER) or
the error vector magnitude (EVM) are to be shown in the linear display (in %). The modulation error
ratio is selected with MER%. The modulation error is referred to the average signal power. If EVM% is
selected, the measured value is referred to the maximum amplitude.
The selection affects the following functions:
 MEASURE: QAM PARAMETERS, see 2.9.8.6
 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: HISTORY: CONFIG 2nd SCREEN, see 2.9.8.5.4.2
 ALARM, see 2.9.7.1
 MEASURE, see 2.9.8.1.2
2.9.6.5.3 MEASURE DISPLAY
This key is used to configure the appearance of the MEASURE menu. In the FULL position, a detailed
MEASURE menu is offered with numerous types of display. In the PARTIAL position, a definable
measured value can be zoomed in so that it can be read at a distance of some meters. The measured
value to be zoomed in is selected by means of the MEASUREMENT ZOOM key (see below).
Fig. 2.9-23 Measurement window in the MEASURE DISPLAY: FULL (left) and PARTIAL (right)
settings (example: BER BEFORE RS)
In the PARTIAL mode, the following parameters are not displayed due to the zoom window being
selected:
 SET RF,
 CALC RF,
 FREQUENCY OFFSET,
 SET SYMBOL RATE and
 SYMBOL RATE OFFSET.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.28
2.9.6.5.4 MEASUREMENT ZOOM
The MEASUREMENT ZOOM key can be used to select the measured value to be zoomed in if the
MEASUREMENT ZOOM: PARTIAL mode is selected. One of eight measured values can be selected
for zoom display (see example in Fig. 2.9-23):
 FREQUENCY OFFS (frequency offset),
 LEVEL,
 BER BEFORE RS (bit error ratio before Reed-Solomon decoder),
 BER AFTER RS (bit error ratio after Reed-Solomon decoder),
 SYMB RATE OFFS (symbol rate offset in Hz),
 MER/EVM% (MER or EVM in % depending on setting in
SPEC FUNC: DISPLAY: VSB PARA/ HISTORY/ ALARM)
 MER dB (modulation error ratio in dB),
 ERR/s (segment error ratio in mode J83/B or packet error ratio in mode J83/A and J83/C).
2.9.6.5.5 SHOULDER ATTENUATION (SPECTRUM)

Using this key, you can specify whether the shoulder attenuation should be calculated in the
MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: SPECTRUM menu or whether this calculation should be switched
off. If ETR290 is selected, the shoulder attenuation is calculated according to ETSI TR 101290. For
more information about the shoulder attenuation measurement, see section 2.9.8.4.1.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.29
2.9.6.6 BER/FEC
This menu is used to make settings for the bit-error-ratio (BER) measurement.
Fig. 2.9-24 SPECIAL FUNCTION: BER/FEC menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode
The MIN BER INTEGRATION (SAMPLES) key can be used to influence the integration characteristics
of the BER measurement. For details of the operating principle and application of this function, see
section 2.9.10.2. The preset value is 10 samples.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.30
2.9.7 ALARM Menu

2.9.7 ALARM Menu.............................................................................................................. 2.9.31
2.9.7.2 Alarm Register ............................................................................................................ 2.9.32
The alarm register is an internal memory where all alarm messages are stored together with their
Every second the EFA checks whether any of the following errors has occurred in the QAM signal:
 Input level (LV): level at the RF or IF inputs below the threshold value
 Synchronization (SY): QAM synchronization or frame synchronization of the MPEG-2 transport
stream;
 Logarithmic modulation error ratio (ME) below the set threshold value;
 Linear error vector magnitude / linear modulation error ratio (EV) above the set threshold value;
 Data error in MPEG2 transport stream caused by uncorrectable events (DE).
since the register was called up last. The LED goes out when the alarm register is called up with the
ALARM key. An example is given in Section 2.9.7.1.
All alarm messages are also made available electrically (positive logic) at the USER PORT as the TTL
interface. For an alarm message to be output, the alarm criterion must be fulfilled and the alarm
activated, see section 2.9.7.1. The message is active as long as the alarm criterion persists. The alarm
thresholds are configurable, see section 2.9.7.3. In addition to the individual messages, a summary
alarm message (SUM ALARM) is output. The summary alarm message is obtained by ORing the
individual alarms.
Pin assignment of the USER PORT connector:
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Alarm Pin
Sum alarm 1
Level 2
MPEG TS Sync 18
MER dB 19
EVM/MER % 20
BER BEFORE RS 22
Data Error 23
Ground 40 to 48
+5 V (200 mA) 49, 50
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.31
Any of the alarm messages can be disabled so that it is not entered in the alarm register. This is done
by pressing the ALARM key in the function key block and then the ALARM CONFIG: REGISTER...
softkey. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.9-26 ALARM: CONFIG menu

should not be signalled, select DISABLED . Pressing this key again switches back to ENABLED. Any
change in the configuration is stored in the alarm register. If an alarm is disabled, the EFA enters a " 
" in the relevant column. An enabled alarm is indicated by " - - ".

Disabling an alarm is only useful, for example, if the cable network operator is not interested in the data
errors (DE). In this case, the lines available in the alarm register may be used for relevant messages.
be signalled via seven integrated relays (floating signalling lines). To configure the relays, press
ALARM: CONFIG: RELAYS... . The following window appears (provided the associated hardware is
fitted):
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.32
present. In the NONE position, the alarm is not signalled to any relay. Please note that for signalling to
The relays are connected to the USER PORT (X34) as follows:

X34-26 X34-27 X34-28 X34-29 X34-30 X34-31 X34-32 X34-25
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
17 2 1
33 18
50 34
Relay X34, pin

R1 26
R2 27
R3 28
R4 29
R5 30
R6 31
R7 32
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.33
Every second the EFA checks whether any of the following errors has occurred in the QAM signal:
 Input level (LV): level at the RF or IF inputs below the threshold value
 Synchronization (SY): QAM synchronization or frame synchronization of the MPEG2 transport
stream;
 Logarithmic modulation error ratio (ME) below the threshold value;
 Linear error vector magnitude / linear modulation error ratio (EV) above the threshold value;
 BER before Reed-Solomon decoder (BR) above the threshold value
 Data error in MPEG2 transport stream caused by uncorrectable events (DE).
If one of the above errors has been identified, it is entered in the register with the abbreviation in
brackets (for how to disable messages: see section 2.9.7.1). Please note the following:
 If, for example, several data errors occur within one second, the data error messages (DE) are
combined to form one entry.
 Alarm messages are not registered every second in the alarm register. An alarm is recorded once at
the time when it first occurs (e.g. "BR"), and at the time when it disappears for the first time ( " - - " ).
 When an alarm has been DISABLED in the ALARM CONFIG... menu, two asterisks ( " " ) are
entered in the relevant column. They indicate that an alarm has been masked and cannot trigger an
alarm message. For technical reasons, MER and EVM cannot be calculated with the following
measurements: constellation diagram, histogram I/Q, spectrum, amplitude distribution, CCDF. While
these measurements are active, the MER and EVM measurements are also marked with the two
asterisks ( " " ).
 The alarm messages are always entered in the associated column of the alarm register. They are in
the following order (from left to right): LV SY ME EV BR DE.
Pressing the ALARM key in the function key block causes the alarm register to appear on the LC
Alarm messages are entered in the register in chronological order. The most recent entry is entered in
the bottom line. Pressing the LINE: NEWEST softkey displays the line entered last at the bottom of the
screen. The number at the beginning of each line indicates the line of the alarm register currently
displayed.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.34
When LINE: MAN is selected, any line of the alarm register can be displayed by entering a number
(confirm with ENTER) or by means of the cursor keys. Any new messages that arrive continue to be
entered in the register. The current alarm message is displayed again when the LINE: NEWEST softkey
is pressed. The register contains 1000 lines. When this number is reached, the oldest messages are
automatically overwritten by the newest ones, starting at line 0. In this case, the entry in line 0 is the
newest and not the oldest entry.
Two entries in the alarm register are made automatically by the EFA without an alarm message being
received:
 Date and time when the register was cleared (REGISTER CLEARED).
 Date and time to which the internal system clock was changed last (TIME CHANGED).
If date or time are changed (in the SETUP menu), the register is completely cleared. This is to avoid
the indication of any inconsistent information (e.g. negative times).
The EFA continuously monitors the applied QAM signal for compliance with the user-defined limit
values. These limit values are error thresholds. If one of these limits is exceeded, the ALARM LED on
the front panel lights and a message with date and time is entered in the alarm register, provided that
this type of alarm has not been disabled (see section 2.9.7.1). This applies to the following parameters:
 LEVEL: Monitoring of input level (40.0 dBµV = -67.0 dBm at 50 )

 MER dB: Monitoring of modulation error ratio (30.00 dB);
 MER % / EVM %: Monitoring of modulation error ratio / error vector magnitude (2.00 %);
 BER BEFORE RS: Monitoring of bit error ratio before Reed-Solomon decoder (2.0 E-4);
Values in brackets are preset in the EFA-QAM (PRESET values).
To change the thresholds, press the ALARM THRESH... key in the ALARM menu. The following menu
is displayed:
Fig. 2.9-30 ALARM THRESHOLD menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode
The limit value for level monitoring is set by pressing the LEVEL key. The limit value is always entered
in the unit in which the measured level is displayed. The unit of the measured level can be defined in the
SETUP: LEVEL UNITS... menu. The setting range is 20 dBV to 130 dBV (-87 dBm to +23 dBm for an
input impedance of 50 ). The entry of the limit value is confirmed with the ENTER key.
The limit values for the modulation error ratio MER (dB) can be set after pressing the appropriate key.
A numeric value can now be directly entered.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.35
The limit values for the modulation error ratio MER % or the error vector magnitude EVM % can be
set after pressing the appropriate key. A numeric value can now be directly entered. For details refer to
section 2.9.6.5.2.
The limit values for the bit error ratio before the Reed-Solomon decoder can be set after pressing
the appropriate key. A numeric value can now be directly entered. The lowest useful threshold that can
be entered is 0.1E-15. In this case, an alarm is triggered whenever the BER is not 0.0. Note that the
exponent entered should always be a two-digit number. If only one digit is required it should be
completed by a leading 0 (e.g. 2.1E-04). The setting range is 0.1E-15 to 5.0E-03.
Note: If 0.1E-15 is chosen as the alarm limit value, a period of several years is required until this
resolution (0.1E-15) is obtained because of the finite transmission capacity of the QAM
signal. This period is necessary to transmit 1E+16 bits via the QAM channel. However, the
BER measurement is hardware designed up to the value of 0.1E-15.
The EFA can statistically evaluate the messages recorded in the alarm register. The evaluation takes
into account the whole monitoring period, i.e. all the alarm messages that occurred between the last
entry of REGISTER CLEARED or TIME CHANGED and calling up the statistics function. The evaluated
period is indicated in the statistics (MONITORING TIME). The statistics function is called up by pressing
the ALARM function key and then the STATISTICS... softkey. The following menu is displayed, for
example:
Fig. 2.9-31 ALARM: STATISTICS menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode
The displayed times are the sums of times during which an alarm was active over the monitoring period.
In the case of the MPEG DATA ERROR TIME (DE) message, the number of events (to be more
precise, the duration of the event in seconds) is summed.
Statistical values are additionally converted and indicated as an error in %. The percentage values are
always referred to the elapsed monitoring time (MONITORING TIME). A value of 0.13 % for MPEG
DATA ERROR TIME would mean that faulty MPEG2 data was detected in 0.13 % of the monitoring
period. At this point, it is not possible to distinguish whether the error lasted for one second or whether it
Information on the frequency of occurrence of the error or correction events is provided by the MPEG
DATA ERROR CNT AFTER RS and CORR CNT BEFORE RS counters, which indicate the absolute
number of faulty MPEG2 frames detected (MPEG DATA ERROR CNT, 1 frame comprises 188 payload
bytes) or the absolute number of corrected bytes (CORR CNT BEFORE RS). When the alarm register is
cleared, the two counters are reset to 0. The counting limit is 4 294 836 225. When this figure is
reached, the counter stops.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.36
To allow accurate and easy reading, the statistics display is not constantly updated. If required, the
Note: The two counters MPEG DATA ERROR CNT AFTER RS and CORR CNT BEFORE RS
are reset to 0 when the alarm register is cleared. If in the course of time more than 1000
entries are made in the alarm register, the MONITORING TIME in the register and the
statistical calculation are referred to the period indicated in the register, but the two
counters are not reset. They show the total count since the register was cleared even if
there are more than 1000 entries in the alarm register.
The statistics help the user to assess the QAM signal over an extended period of time. The error
indication in % is particularly important as a proof of the correct functioning of a transmission link.
The currently displayed screen content can be printed at any time by simply pressing the HARDCOPY
key. A precondition is that the printer driver in the SETUP: PRINTER menu has been set correctly.
Since there are many different options for printing the alarm register or parts thereof, these are offered
in a separate menu. This menu can be opened by pressing the ALARM key in the function key block
and then the PRINT softkey. The following menu will be displayed:
Fig. 2.9-32 ALARM: PRINT menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode
The alarm register continues to be displayed; only the softkeys have changed. Now the desired printout
can be selected. Pressing the ACTUAL key once switches the EFA to a status in which the header of
the hardcopy with the most important settings is printed first. Each alarm message that subsequently
arrives is then output separately to the printer. In this case, the ACTUAL field is in inverse video. This
function is disabled when the ACTUAL key is pressed again. It is used to continuously record incoming
alarm messages. Date and time are indicated in each printed line.
Note: If no printer is connected or if a connected printer has run out of paper, an error message is
displayed briefly in the EFA display and the print job is aborted. This also happens when
the current line is printed (PRINT: ACTUAL). After the error has been eliminated (e.g. a
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.37
Pressing the LAST LINES... key allows any number of lines to be printed starting from the alarm
message received last. To select this function, press the LAST LINES... softkey. The following menu is
displayed:
Fig. 2.9-33 ALARM: PRINT: LAST LINES... menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode
The value can be varied by an entry via the numeric keypad (confirm with ENTER) or by means of the
The procedure for printing alarm messages with LINE... is very similar. In contrast to the printout
selected with LAST LINES..., any group of lines in the alarm register can be printed. The EFA asks for
the numbers of the start and end line, which can be entered separately. Entries are made in the way
described for the printout selected with LAST LINES... . When the PRINT key is pressed, the alarm
messages pertaining to the selected lines are printed. If the start-line number is higher than the stop-line
Example:
START LINE = 995
STOP LINE = 005
Print jobs that have been started can be aborted with the ABORT key.
The alarm register of the EFA is cleared automatically when

 the supply voltage is switched on, or
 the PRESET key is pressed, or
 date or time are changed.
The register can also be cleared manually. This is done by pressing the ALARM function key and then
Pressing the YES softkey clears the register completely, and the date and time of clearing are entered
in line 0 of the register. New alarm messages can now be entered in the register.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.38
2.9.8 MEASURE Menu

The Test Receiver EFA-QAM offers the user a large number of different measurements for assessing
the transmission quality of QAM signals. It is recommended that you read the following operating
instructions in order to utilize the various capabilities of the instrument. This section is structured as
follows:
2.9.8 MEASURE Menu ........................................................................................................ 2.9.39

2.9.8.1 Measurement Window .............................................................................................. 2.9.40
2.9.8.1.1 Level Measurement..................................................................................................... 2.9.40
2.9.8.1.2 Modulation................................................................................................................... 2.9.41
2.9.8.1.3 FREQUENCY OFFSET Measurement ....................................................................... 2.9.41
2.9.8.1.4 SYMBOL RATE OFFSET and TS BIT RATE Measurements .................................... 2.9.42
2.9.8.1.5 BER Measurement...................................................................................................... 2.9.42
2.9.8.1.6 PACKET ERROR RATIO and SEGMENT ERROR RATIO Measurements............... 2.9.43
2.9.8.1.7 PACKET ERROR / s and SEGMENT ERROR / s Measurements ............................. 2.9.43
2.9.8.1.8 Messages in the Measurement Window..................................................................... 2.9.43
2.9.8.2 Constellation Diagram .............................................................................................. 2.9.45
2.9.8.2.1 Symbol Counter, HOLD and FREEZE ........................................................................ 2.9.45
2.9.8.3 Histograms ................................................................................................................ 2.9.46
2.9.8.3.1 Histogram I.................................................................................................................. 2.9.47
2.9.8.3.2 Histogram Q ................................................................................................................ 2.9.48
2.9.8.4 Measurements in the Frequency Domain............................................................... 2.9.49
2.9.8.4.1 Frequency Spectrum and Shoulder Attenuation......................................................... 2.9.49
2.9.8.4.2 Amplitude/Phase/Group-Delay Frequency Response
and Polar Plot.............................................................................................................. 2.9.55
2.9.8.5 Measurements in the Time Domain......................................................................... 2.9.59
2.9.8.5.1 Amplitude Distribution and CCDF ............................................................................... 2.9.59
2.9.8.5.2 Measuring the Channel Impulse Response (Echo Pattern)........................................ 2.9.64
2.9.8.5.3 Measuring EYE MONITORING................................................................................... 2.9.65
2.9.8.5.4 HISTORY Measurement ............................................................................................. 2.9.67
2.9.8.6 QAM Parameters ....................................................................................................... 2.9.71
2.9.8.6.1 I/Q AMPLITUDE IMBALANCE .................................................................................... 2.9.72
2.9.8.6.2 I/Q QUADRATURE ERROR ....................................................................................... 2.9.72
2.9.8.6.3 CARRIER SUPPRESSION ......................................................................................... 2.9.72
2.9.8.6.4 PHASE JITTER........................................................................................................... 2.9.72
2.9.8.6.5 SIGNAL / NOISE RATIO............................................................................................. 2.9.72
2.9.8.6.6 MODULATION ERROR RATIO.................................................................................. 2.9.73
2.9.8.6.7 ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE ................................................................................ 2.9.73
2.9.8.7 Noise Generator (ADD. NOISE)................................................................................ 2.9.73
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.39
The Test Receiver EFA-QAM includes a measurement window in which all the main parameters are
clearly displayed. To activate this display, press the MEASURE key in the function key block. With
synchronized demodulator, for example, the following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.9-34 MEASURE menu in ITU-T J.83/B mode
The main settings (receive frequency, attenuator setting) and the measured level of the received signal
are displayed in the status line at the top of the screen. This status line is displayed in most menus.
In the main field of the measurement window, the most important measurements are displayed
according to the generic terms FREQUENCY, MODULATION and BER (bit error ratio) / SEG ERR
(segment error) / PACK ERR (packet error).
The SAW filter bandwidth setting (STATUS: SAW FILTER BW menu) is displayed in the bottom quarter
of the main field. Furthermore, messages concerning the synchronization status of the instrument, for
example, are displayed, see section 2.9.8.1.8, Messages in the Measurement Window. If the
demodulator/decoder is synchronized, the measured MPEG transport stream rate TS BIT RATE is
displayed.
2.9.8.1.1 Level Measurement
The EFA-QAM calculates the receive level via the automatic gain control (AGC) voltage, which controls
the gain control elements of the receiver. A PI regulator controls the gain control elements so that the
demodulation level is always kept constant. This means that there is a fixed relationship between the
AGC voltage and the level at the receiver input. The EFA-QAM uses this relationship for level
measurements. The level value displayed corresponds to the rms value of the received signal.
The level measurement bandwidth corresponds to the receiver bandwidth selected. This depends on
the receiver input and the SAW filter selected. Selectivity characteristics of the RF inputs and SAW
filter, see section 2.9.10.1.
Automatic control of the receiver input attenuator is carried out via level measurement. The attenuation
currently set is displayed in the header above the measured level value, e.g. ATTEN: 45 dB. If the
signal level at the selected receiver input cannot be levelled out by the automatic gain control (AGC),
the message "UNDER" is displayed if the receiver level is too low. If the level is too high, "OVER" is
displayed. The measured level always refers to the receiver input selected and is updated every second
on the display. The level unit is configured in the SETUP: LEVEL UNITS menu. The level calculation
takes into account whether the 50 or 75 input of the receiver is selected.
Note: UNDER or OVER may be displayed if the receiver input attenuator has been set manually
(INPUT:ATTEN... menu).
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.40
2.9.8.1.2 Modulation
The MODULATION message in the second quarter of the main field of the measurement window
indicates whether the demodulator/decoder is synchronized to the applied signal. If the
demodulator/decoder is synchronized, the QAM order set in the STATUS menu (e.g. 64QAM) is
displayed. If the receiver cannot synchronize to the receive signal, "- - -" is displayed.
The MER (modulation error ratio) and EVM (error vector magnitude) are displayed in the same segment
of the measurement window. These values reflect the quality of the QAM signal. They indicate the ratio
of the error vector to the signal power. For more information on determining the modulation error, see
sections 2.9.8.6.6 and 2.9.8.6.7.
The only difference in determining the MER or EVM modulation error is the reference used. In the
SPEC FUNC: DISPLAY: QAM PARA / HISTORY / ALARM menu, users can specify whether the
modulation error should be specified in the form of MER % or EVM %, depending on which they are
more familiar with.
2.9.8.1.3 FREQUENCY OFFSET Measurement
The difference between the RF set in the RF menu and the measured carrier frequency is indicated by
means of the FREQUENCY OFFSET parameter. The FREQUENCY OFFSET is defined as follows:
Frequency Offset Measured RF Set RF
The resolution for the measured value is 0.1 Hz. The measured carrier frequency of a synchronized
QAM signal is displayed in the CALC FREQUENCY line. For error-free synchronization of the EFA-
QAM, the frequency offset can be 100 kHz. If the receiver is not synchronized, "- - -" is displayed.
The message in the FREQUENCY OFFSET line shows immediately whether the demodulator/decoder
is synchronized to the signal applied. If the receiver is unable to synchronize to the receive signal, "- - -"
is displayed. All the other measured values in this window are then suppressed, and "- - -" is displayed
in each case. Possible causes of an non-synchronized demodulator/decoder include:
 input level too low (measured level UNDER is displayed),
 input level too high (measured level OVER is displayed),
 receiver attenuator control set to manual (INPUT menu), see section 2.9.3,
 wrong receiver input selected (INPUT menu), see section 2.9.3,
 receive frequency set incorrectly (check via FREQUENCY SPECTRUM function), see section 0,
 order of QAM or symbol rate set incorrectly (STATUS menu), see section 2.9.5.2.
For further causes, see also 2.9.8.1.8 Messages in the Measurement Window.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.41
2.9.8.1.4 SYMBOL RATE OFFSET and TS BIT RATE Measurements
The symbol rate determines the bandwidth of the QAM signal and is therefore the most important
transmission parameter.
The TV Test Receiver EFA-QAM measures the symbol rate of the received QAM signal, compares the
measured symbol rate with the symbol rate set by the user, and displays the symbol rate offset as an
absolute value in Hz.
SymbolRatOffset MeasuredSy mboRate SetSymbolR ate
The resolution of the measured value is 0.1 Hz; if no external reference signal is applied, the accuracy
is typically less than ±1 ppm (parts per million). With EFA models, permitting an external a 10 MHz
reference signal to be used (standard as of January 2003), an accuracy of ±0.1 Hz can be achieved.
The Test Receiver EFA-QAM can correctly synchronize signals with an offset of ±150 ppm.
In the case of a synchronized QAM signal, the MPEG transport stream rate (TS BIT RATE) in Mbit/s is
displayed below the dotted line in the measurement window. The MPEG transport stream rate is
calculated from the measured symbol rate.
During normal operation, the Test Receiver EFA-QAM continuously calculates the BER. The bit error
ratios before and after the Reed-Solomon decoder are displayed. The BER measurements are carried
out completely automatically and independently of each other. The instrument selects the required
integration rate depending on the error rate measured. The integration rate is indicated in brackets after
the measured value. It is always specified in "samples".
The first value in brackets indicates the number of samples currently recorded. The second value
shows the number of samples used by the instrument after the measurement has been completed (final
count). The indication (1K33/10K0) means that 1330 of the 10000 desired measurement results (final
count) have already been collected and stored. Of course, the BER can be evaluated now, but the
accuracy is not yet optimal. The first value is regularly increased until the final count is reached.
When the final count is reached, a switchover is made to the next higher range (running BER
calculation): the last 10, 100, 1000, 10 K, 100 K, 1 M, 10 M, 100 M or 1 G samples (depending on the
final count required) are combined to form one measured value so that a new set of values is obtained
for each new sample. The great advantage of this method is that the indicated BER is always the most
recent value, i.e. the measured value is continuously updated. The system is also flexible enough to
immediately reduce the number of integrated samples should a sudden deterioration of the input signal
quality occur.
 a basic system setting (e.g. ADD. NOISE) has been modified,

 the RESET BER key in the measure menu is pressed.
For further information on BER measurements, see section 2.9.10.2.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.42
2.9.8.1.6 PACKET ERROR RATIO and SEGMENT ERROR RATIO Measurements
Simultaneously with the calculation of the bit error ratio BER, the Test Receiver EFA-QAM computes
the ratio of incorrectly transmitted MPEG2 frames during normal reception.
According to ITU-T J.83/B, a 188-byte MPEG frame is defined as a segment, whereas the DVB-C
standard or ITU-T J.83/A and ITU-T J.83/C define a frame as a packet. The measurement result is thus
displayed as segment error ratio (SEG ERR RATIO) or packet error ratio (PACK ERR RATIO),
depending on the operating mode.
In the calculation of the packet (segment) error ratio, the integration rate is determined separately
according to the principle used for calculating the bit error ratio. The integration rate is indicated in
brackets to the right of the measured value.
2.9.8.1.7 PACKET ERROR / s and SEGMENT ERROR / s Measurements
In contrast to the packet (segment) error ratio, this measurement yields the number of faulty MPEG2
frames in the last second. If no error occurs in the MPEG data stream, "00000" is displayed. If a data
error does occur, the number of faulty packets or segments is displayed for one second..
Depending on the operating mode, the measurement result is displayed as the number of packet errors
per second (PACK ERR / s) or segment errors per second (SEG ERR / s).
2.9.8.1.8 Messages in the Measurement Window
If the demodulator/decoder has not synchronized to the input signal, the TS BIT RATE value in the
measurement window is replaced by the messages:
 MPEG TS UNSYNC and

 CARRIER LOOP OUT OF LOCK
If troubleshooting is carried out, the measured level should be taken into account.
The meaning of the messages and their possible sources are as follows:
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.43
CARRIER LOOP OUT Clock rate recovery or carrier recovery not Receive frequency set incorrectly.
OF LOCK synchronized. The message CARRIER
LOOP OUT OF LOCK always appears Symbol rate set incorrectly.
together with the message MPEG TS
UNSYNC. Amplitude noise of receive signal too high.
Phase noise of receive signal too high.
SAW filter deactivated although adjacent

channels are occupied.
RF input attenuator set to incorrect value in

manual control.
Other modulator or transmitter error
MPEG TS UNSYNC No MPEG2 sync word found. Signal to be measured does not include an
MPEG2 transport stream. This is the case,
for example, if PRBS data is transmitted.
BER is too large.
IQ POSITION function (SPECIAL

FUNCTION: MPEG DATA OUTPUT menu)
not set to AUTO.
Table 2.9-8 Meaning of messages in the measurement window

If a hardware-related error occurs, the SELFTEST ERROR CODE is displayed in the bottom line of the
measurement window. The decoded SELFTEST ERROR message is displayed in the
PRESET:SERVICE: SELFTEST menu. To display this message, press the PRESET, SERVICE and
SELFTEST keys. The menu is typically as follows:
Fig. 2.9-35 PRESET: SERVICE: SELFTEST menu
A distinction is drawn between messages that indicate hardware faults (such as 56 MHz CLOCK, which
means that the 56 MHz clock generator has failed) and messages that indicate a non-synchronized
state (e.g. ATSC/QAM or MPEG TS, which indicate a non-synchronized demodulator/decoder). If a
QAM signal is synchronized, all the messages should be displayed as OK. In the lower part of the
screen, the test results are displayed. These can be used by trained service personnel to carry out
troubleshooting.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.44
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) while the constellation diagram is displayed.
The EFA-QAM is switched to the constellation analyzer mode by pressing the CONSTELL DIAGRAM...
key. The constellation diagram is an extremely useful tool for assessing the quality of the transmitted
signal. Fig. 2.9-36 shows a correctly synchronized constellation diagram for a QAM transmission. The
constellation diagram can be considered as a plane of complex numerical values, each value in this
plane being defined by its inphase component (I component, horizontal axis) and its quadrature
component (Q component, vertical axis). The complex numerical values can be interpreted as
amplitude and phase, the amplitude being measured from the center of the diagram.
Fig. 2.9-36 MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM: CONST DIAG menu with activated
equalizer; here 64QAM in ITU-T J.83/B mode
The decision field limits are entered in the constellation diagram as vertical and horizontal lines. All the
measured values within such a decision field are assigned to a specific identical bit pattern in the
demapping block. The more measured values lie in the center of such a decision field, the larger is the
margin of the transmission link for interference such as noise.
For detailed evaluation, the constellation diagram display can be zoomed in by a factor 4. The quadrant
is set and selected in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu, see section 2.9.6.5.1.
2.9.8.2.1 Symbol Counter, HOLD and FREEZE

The user can adapt the constellation diagram display to his requirements by means of the SYMBOL
CNT, HOLD, and FREEZE keys.
The desired symbol number is set by pressing the SYMBOL CNT key and then entering a number via
the numeric keypad (confirm with ENTer). The value entered is limited to 999 999 999 displayed
symbols. The HOLD key can be used to display more symbols. In this case, the editor window of
SYMBOL CNT indicates "infinite". The previously selected number of symbols is reset by pressing the
SYMBOL CNT key again.
If the number of symbols is very large, it would take a very long time to display a complete
measurement with the required number of symbols. For this reason, the screen is refreshed at regular
intervals to provide the user with a first impression of the measurement even if the required number of
symbols has not yet been reached. The count of the symbol counter is also displayed at the top of the
measurement window.
Note: The calculations of the QAM parameters are independent of the symbol counter setting.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.45
The FREEZE: ON key is used to freeze the measurement window currently displayed. This function is
useful if, for example, a particular event should be halted on the display for printing. The measurement
continues in the background, however, and can be reactivated by pressing the key again (FREEZE:
OFF).
2.9.8.3 Histograms
As an alternative to the constellation diagram, Histogram I or Histogram Q can be displayed in the

MEASURE: CONSTELL DIAGRAM menu. The histograms show the frequency distribution versus the I
or Q components. The functions with SYMBOL CNT, HOLD and FREEZE correspond to those of the
constellation diagram. Scaling is carried out automatically and cannot be set manually. The SCALE key
is used to select either the linear (LIN) or logarithmic (LOG) display. The display shows the density of
the distribution function.
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) while the histogram is displayed.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.46
2.9.8.3.1 Histogram I
The HISTOGRAM I measurement function calculates the amplitude distribution of the I component. Fig.
2.9-37 shows the typical distribution of the I component of a QAM signal. For calculating the distribution
density, the symbol counter can be set from 1 to 999 999 999. The HOLD key can be used to process a
greater number of symbols. In this case, the editor window of SYMBOL CNT indicates "infinite". The
previously selected number of symbols is reset by pressing the SYMBOL CNT key again. The symbols
that have already been processed for the calculation are displayed at the top of the measurement
window. In the example below, Fig. 2.9-37, 1 million symbols (1.00000E+06 SYMBOLS PROCESSED)
measured data is continuously updated (pipeline structure).
Fig. 2.9-37 The MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM: HISTOGRAM I menu with linear
scale; here 64QAM in ITU-T J.83/B mode
The abscissa is scaled in amplitude steps from -8 to +8, with the decision field limits for 64QAM
transmission at the amplitude steps -6, -4, -2, 0, +2, +4 and +6. The current relative distribution density
(integral calculation of the density over the decision field in question) is indicated as a numeric value at
the top of the display. With an ideal uniform distribution, 0.125 symbol components are allotted to each
of the eight decision fields, see Fig. 2.9-38.
For lack of space, the distribution density values cannot be shown in the display for 256QAM and
128QAM transmission. These values can only be queried by means of remote control via IEC/IEEE bus
or RS232 interface, using the command READ:QAM:HISTogram:VALue?. The measured density
values are output with six decimal places. See also section 3.C.7.8.3.1.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.47
2.9.8.3.2 Histogram Q
The HISTOGRAM Q measurement function calculates the amplitude distribution of the Q component.
Fig. 2.9-38 shows the typical distribution of the Q component of a QAM signal. For calculating the
distribution density, the symbol counter can be set from 1 to 999 999 999. The HOLD key can be used
to process a greater number of symbols. In this case, the editor window of SYMBOL CNT indicates
"infinite". The previously selected number of symbols is reset by pressing the SYMBOL CNT key again.
The symbols already processed for the calculation are displayed at the top of the measurement
window. In the example below, Fig. 2.9-38, 1 million symbols (1.00000E+06 SYMBOLS PROCESSED)
measured data is continuously updated (pipeline structure).
Fig. 2.9-38 MEASURE: CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM: HISTOGRAM Q menu with logarithmic

scale
The abscissa is scaled in amplitude steps from -8 to +8, with the decision field limits for 64QAM
transmission at the amplitude steps -6, -4, -2, 0, +2, +4 and +6. The current relative distribution density
(integral calculation of the density over the decision field in question) is indicated as a numeric value at
the top of the display. With an ideal uniform distribution, 0.125 symbol components are allotted to each
of the eight decision fields, see Fig. Fig. 2.9-38.
For lack of space, the distribution density values cannot be shown in the display for 256QAM and
128QAM transmission. These values can only be queried by means of remote control via IEC/IEEE bus
or RS232 interface, using the command READ:QAM:HISTogram:VALue?. The measured density
values are output with six decimal places. See also section 3.C.7.8.3.1.
The functions SYMBOL CNT, HOLD, FREEZE, and SCALE correspond to the HISTOGRAM I
measurement, see section 2.9.8.3.1.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.48
2.9.8.4.1 Frequency Spectrum and Shoulder Attenuation
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) while the spectrum is displayed.
The spectrum measurement function is started by pressing the MEASURE hardkey and then the
FREQUENCY DOMAIN and SPECTRUM softkeys. The measurement is based on the sampled values
of the input signal. The input signal is sampled after the receiver input selection. This means that the
measurement range (frequency span) is determined by the SAW filter selected in the STATUS menu.
For further details, see section 2.9.5.3. The samples are transformed to the frequency domain by
means of a fast Fourier transform (FFT). The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.9-39 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: SPECTRUM menu in DVB-C mode

The level scale is normalized to the total power. This must be taken into account if an adjacent-channel
transmitter is received and OFF is selected in the STATUS: SAW FILTER BW menu. The level scale is
set automatically and cannot be modified manually.
The scaling of the frequency axis is relative to the RF or IF set in the INPUT menu. The numeric values
of the frequency axis refer to the channel center frequency.
If the signal spectrum is inverted due to internal mechanisms, this is taken into account in the display
and corrected. In other words, the spectrum of the signal referred to the receiver input is always
displayed (lower frequency on the left, higher frequency on the right).
2.9.8.4.1.1 Measuring Shoulder Attenuation
To measure the shoulder attenuation, press the MEASURE key and then the FREQUENCY DOMAIN...
and SPECTRUM softkeys. The shoulder attenuation measurement is carried out in line with the
recommendations of ETSI (Document TR 101290). If the shoulder attenuation is not to be calculated,
select OFF in the SPECIAL FUNCTION: DISPLAY: SHOULDER ATTENUATION menu.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.49
Max. level of QAM signal

Level
Upper shoulder attenua tion

Lower shoulder attenuation
300 kHz Symbol_rate (1+ r) / 2 Symbol_rate (1+ r) / 2 300 kHz
500 kHz 500 kHz

RF
700 kHz
Symbol_rate (1+ r) 700 kHz
Frequency
Fig. 2.9-40 Determination of shoulder attenuation to ETSI TR 101290
The shoulder attenuation to ETSI TR 101290 denotes the power ratio between the maximum power of
the QAM signals and the spurious emissions above and below the useful channel. The same bandwidth
is used for measuring the maximum power and the unwanted spurious emissions. The measurement
bandwidth is automatically set by the EFA-QAM depending on the set frequency span and the selected
detector.
In accordance with the recommendations of document ETSI TR 101290, the shoulder attenuation is
measured in several steps.
1. Searching the maximum power of the QAM signal within the transmission channel.
2. Measuring the power of the spurious emissions 300 kHz and 700 kHz above and below the QAM
transmission channel.
3. Drawing a straight line connecting the two measurement points at 300 kHz and 700 kHz below and
above the useful signal.
4. Parallel shifting of this straight line until it intersects with the maximum occurring in the frequency
range 300 kHz to 700 kHz above or below the QAM signal.
5. Calculating the level at 500 kHz above (upper shoulder) and below (lower shoulder) the QAM
spectrum by substitution in the straight-line equation.
6. The ratio between the maximum power stated in item 1 and the level calculated in item 5 yields the
values for the upper and the lower shoulder attenuation to ETSI TR 101290.
The frequency ranges used to determine the spurious emissions are automatically defined by the EFA-
QAM and are coupled to the set symbol rate and roll-off-factor.
All measurements are carried out with the currently selected detector and the currently set bandwidth.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.50
Note: The smallest measurement bandwidth is set when the peak detector is selected. The
measurement bandwidth is then 11.8 kHz and independent of the set frequency span.
When the RMS detector is selected, the measurement bandwidth is set automatically
depending on the frequency span.
For correct measurement of the shoulder attenuation the set receiver bandwidth (SAW FILTER BW in
STATUS menu) must be sufficiently large. The minimum receiver bandwidth required for measuring the
shoulder attenuation to ETSI TR 101290 can be calculated as follows:
SAW FILTER BW / MHz  symbol rate / Msymb/s (1 + r) + 2 0.7 MHz
r: roll-off factor
If this requirement cannot be fulfilled because the appropriate options are not available (see section
2.9.5.3) or because of the symbol rate and roll-off factor, either the SAW filter selection must be
switched off (SAW FILTER BW: OFF) or an extension (see section 2.9.8.4.1.1.1 for further information)
for the measurement of the shoulder attenuation can be used.
For correct determination of the shoulder attenuation, setting of the appropriate frequency span is also
important:
Start frequency / MHz ≤ - symbol rate / Msymb/s (1 + r) / 2 – 0.7 MHz
Stop frequency / MHz  symbol rate / Msymb/s (1 + r) / 2 + 0.7 MHz
r: roll-off factor
Note: For error-free determination of the shoulder attenuation, a signal with negligible frequency
offset must be applied. The frequency offset can be checked in the main MEASURE
window.
If one of the above requirements for determining the shoulder attenuation cannot be fulfilled, the value
concerned is marked by a preceding asterisk (*). In such a case, the shoulder attenuation is calculated
on the basis of the data available in the limited frequency range. The measured values are also marked
by an asterisk (*) if the SAW filter selection has been switched off, since the results of the shoulder
attenuation measurement may be degraded due to convolution or aliasing effects.
Note: The MER measurement (alarm, history, remote control )is not available while the
MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: SPECTRUM function is selected.
2.9.8.4.1.1.1 Extension for Measuring the of Shoulder Attenuation
To avoid possible convolution or aliasing effects, it is necessary to switch on the SAW filter selection
when determining the shoulder attenuation. On the other hand, the selected receiver bandwidth (SAW
FILTER BW in the STATUS menu) must be large enough to perform a correct measurement. If this
requirement cannot be fulfilled because of QAM signals with a large symbol rate or because appropriate
options are not available, EFA-QAM provides an extended function for measuring the shoulder
attenuation.
To use this extension, proceed as follows:
1. In the STATUS menu, set the symbol rate and roll-off factor corresponding to the QAM signal to
be analyzed.
2. Activate the SAW filter selection (STATUS menu). The filter bandwidth must meet the following
requirement:
SAW FILTER BW / MHz ≥symbol rate / Msymb/s (1 + r) – 0.1 MHz
3. To measure the lower shoulder attenuation, the QAM signal should be applied with a frequency
offset of 1 MHz 250 kHz relative to the set receive frequency. To measure the upper shoulder
attenuation, correspondingly a signal with an offset of –1 MHz 250 kHz should be applied.
4. For measuring the lower shoulder attenuation, the following applies to the start and stop
frequencies:
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.51
Start frequency / MHz ≤- symbol rate / Msymb/s (1 + r) / 2 + 0.05 MHz

Stop frequency / MHz ≥+ SAW FILTER BW / MHz / 2
For measuring the upper shoulder attenuation, the following applies correspondingly:
Start frequency / MHz ≤- SAW FILTER BW / MHz / 2
Stop frequency / MHz ≥+ symbol rate / Msymb/s (1 + r) / 2 – 0.05 MHz
If these conditions are met, an algorithm is activated which searches within the displayed spectrum for a
rising (falling) edge that is interpreted as the left (right) channel edge of the QAM spectrum. Occasional
edges, such as those caused by a discrete interference (sine) signal, are ignored.
If a rising (falling) edge of a spectrum considered a QAM channel offset by +1 MHz 250 kHz (-1 MHz
250 kHz) is found, this point is interpreted as the channel edge and the lower (upper) shoulder
attenuation is determined. The following two diagrams illustrate the situation in the event the extension
for calculating the shoulder attenuation is activated:
Fig. 2.9-41 Display of the left (right) shoulder attenuation for a QAM signal with a frequency
offset of +1 MHz (-1 MHz).
Each diagram in Fig. 2.9-41 each shows an example in which only the left (left-hand diagram) or right
shoulder attenuation (right-hand diagram) is displayed. To indicate that a QAM signal offset by ±1 MHz
was detected and the extension for determining the shoulder attenuation is active, "+1 MHz" or
"-1 MHz" is displayed.
Note: Because of the frequency offset of ±1 MHz, EFA-QAM can no longer synchronize to the
applied signal. For this reason no further measurements can be performed and no MPEG
data stream is available.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.52
2.9.8.4.1.2 START FREQ, STOP FREQ

The frequency range to be displayed is set by pressing the START FREQ and STOP FREQ keys and
entering a numeric value on the keypad (confirm with ENTER). The frequencies must be selected
relative to the set receive frequency (channel center frequency). Depending on the SAW filter
bandwidth selected, the following frequency limits can be set:
Input limits Start frequency Stop frequency

SAW OFF - 4.48 MHz + 4.48 MHz
Table 2.9-9 Limits of start and stop frequencies depending on SAW filter bandwidth selected
The minimum frequency range that can be set is 1.3 MHz.
Note: If a SAW filter is activated and the frequency range is selected to exceed the SAW filter
bandwidth, an Info box is displayed for several seconds, which prompts the user either to
adapt the frequency range to the selected SAW filter bandwidth or to select a different
SAW filter with a larger bandwidth or deactivate the SAW filter. This message is displayed
until the frequency range has been adapted or the SAW filter setting corrected.
2.9.8.4.1.3 DETECTOR
N N
The spectrum is calculated by means of 2 FFT, which can be interpreted as a filter bank comprising 2
N
The number of available results (2 ) is larger than the pixel columns available for display. For this
reason, several individual values of the result field are assigned to a pixel column. Pressing the
DETECTOR toggle key defines the principle used to group the individual values. The following can be
selected:
 MIN: the smallest value of a group is displayed
 RMS: the root mean square is taken of the (amplitude) values of a group. This corresponds to
averaging the power values (rms value)
 MAX: the largest value of a group is displayed
The following graph shows the principle of grouping several values or of the detector function:
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.53
Result field of 2N FFT:
n=0 n=2N-1
Group
Assignment of result
p=0 p=1 … p=P-1
Fig. 2.9-42 Operation of DETECTOR function
When selecting the detector mode, it must be noted that in the cases of MIN and MAX the resolution
bandwidth (RBW) is independent of the frequency range selected. If the rms detector is used, the
resolution bandwidth is automatically adapted to the selected frequency range.
bandwidth, is displayed at the top of the diagram.
2.9.8.4.1.4 PEAK HOLD
The PEAK HOLD key of the spectrum function enables the user to detect sporadic sinusoidal spurious
signals, for example. Pressing this key starts the measurement again, and all the maximum or minimum
values obtained since the start of the measurement are displayed. Pressing the key a second time
starts a new measurement. This function is coupled with the setting of the DETECTOR mode. If the rms
detector is used, the peak hold function cannot be selected. If the detector is set to MAX or MIN
detector, the maximum or minimum values are detected by the peak hold function.
2.9.8.4.1.5 AVERAGE CNT
For a more accurate spectrum analysis, the display must be made easier to interpret by averaging. For
this purpose, the spectrum function offers a very powerful averaging function. Press the AVERAGE
CNT key in the SPECTRUM measurement. Pressing this key several times changes the display from
OFF to a numeric value that can be entered via the numeric keypad (confirm with ENTER). The
following limit values must be complied with:
1 AVERAGE CNT 999.
 AVERAGE CNT 180: All frequency characteristics displayed are stored in a pipeline structure
and used for averaging. When the number of traces set in AVERAGE CNT is reached, the
oldest traces are discarded.
 AVERAGE CNT >180: The frequency characteristics are averaged by means of recursion.
The progress of the averaging process is shown at the top of the display (AVG), provided that
AVERAGE CNT is not set to OFF or 1. The first figure indicates the current number of traces used, and
the second figure the target value (setting of AVERAGE CNT counter).
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.54
2.9.8.4.2 Amplitude/Phase/Group-Delay Frequency Response and Polar Plot
The Test Receiver EFA-QAM is equipped with a powerful self-adapting equalizer. The filter coefficients
are used by the EFA-QAM to calculate the linear distortion of the transmission channel. The following
measurements can be performed at the same time:
 Amplitude frequency response and phase frequency response, or
 Amplitude frequency response and group-delay frequency response, or
 Polar plot (complex representation in polar coordinates)
To select the measurement, press the second softkey in the MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN menu
until the desired type of representation is displayed in inverse video.
Fig. 2.9-43 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: AMPL/PHASE and AMPL/GD menu
The unit of the amplitude scale is decibel (dB); the unit of the phase is scale degree (°); and the unit of
the group delay scale is microseconds (s) or nanoseconds (ns). The scale of the quantities is
automatically adapted to the measured value and cannot be changed manually. The measured peak-to-
peak values are output in the bottom line of the display.
Fig. 2.9-44 Error messages with deactivated equalizer or non-synchronized receiver
Amplitude, phase, group-delay frequency response and polar plot can only be measured with the
equalizer activated, see also section SPECIAL FUNCTION: EQUALIZER. If the equalizer is not
activated, the following message is displayed: "THE EQUALIZER MUST BE SWITCHED ON IN
SPECIAL FUNCTION MENU EQUALIZER", see Fig. 2.9-44. In addition, these measurements are
restricted to signals with a symbol rate of at least 1 Msymb/s (symbol rate setting is in the STATUS:
SET SYMBOL RATE menu). If the selected symbol rate is less than 1 Msymb/s and EFA was able to
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.55
synchronize the applied signal, the message "THIS MEASUREMENT IS AVAILABLE FOR SYMBOL
RATES EQUAL TO 1Msymb/s OR HIGHER" will appear. Another prerequisite for these
measurements is a QAM demodulator synchronized to the receive signal. With a non-synchronized
demodulator, the message SYNC FAILED is displayed, Fig. 2.9-44.
In the QAM mode, the frequency span always corresponds to the symbol rate and is automatically
adapted. Manual setting is not possible.
POLAR PLOT
The POLAR PLOT is a different type of channel frequency response display. Here the amplitude error
vector is displayed with the corresponding phase length depending on the modulation frequency. The
locus of this error vector is known as POLAR PLOT. With POLAR PLOT, the ideal QAM signal is a
single point in the middle of the measurement window.
Fig. 2.9-45 MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: POLAR PLOT menu. Left, with a very high
quality receive signal; right, with an echo attenuated by 10 dB and lagging by
0.1 µs.
The scaling of the real and imaginary axis is carried out automatically and cannot be set manually.
Note 1: To minimize the instrument error of the EFA-QAM, the SAW filter should not be activated
(STATUS: SAW FILTER BW OFF menu) for the frequency response measurement if
permitted by the receive signal (e.g. adjacent-channel occupancy). Due to their technology,
SAW filters exhibit an amplitude and phase ripple that may become visible in the
measurement result.
Note 2: The display modes for the channel frequency response and the channel impulse response
are not completely independent of each other; these are interpreted in the one direction or
the other. The display modes are equivalent and this is physically correct. If the cause of a
distortion is, for example, an echo, a frequency response can still be displayed. The
frequency response is simply another way of displaying the echo.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.56
2.9.8.4.3 Measurement of Phase Jitter and Amplitude Jitter Spectrum
Note: The MER measurement (alarm, history, remote control) is not available while the
MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: PHASE/AMPL JITTER function is selected
This measurement function is available starting with software version 5.10.
The R&S EFA-QAM function for measuring the phase jitter and amplitude jitter spectra makes it
possible to analyze and monitor the quality of the various mixer oscillators and amplifier loops of a
transmitter. Jitter analysis can easily be performed during normal operation without switching off the
carrier modulation.
These measurement functions are started by first pressing the MEASURE key (hardkey) and then
FREQUENCY DOMAIN and PHASE JITTER or AMPL JITTER on the softkey bar. A display similar to
the following will appear:
Fig. 2.9-46 The MEASURE: FREQUENCY DOMAIN: PHASE JITTER menu display (left) with
NOISE set and AMPL JITTER (right) with CW set. The graph on the right shows a
discrete noise line at 50 kHz.
The horizontal axis shows the frequency range in logarithmic scale subdivided at 1-2-4-6-8. The
frequency range is fixed and depends on the symbol rate of the signal. The vertical axis definition
depends on the setting of APPLICATION.
 NOISE: This setting is recommended for the analysis of noise-like interferences. It is not suitable for
the analysis of discrete noise lines.
In this mode, the phase or amplitude jitter interference is displayed in dBc/Hz (reference value is
the power of either the unmodulated carrier or the entire QAM signal, effective noise bandwidth = 1
Hz). The combination of several frequency points into a pixel column yields the average power
density (RMS detector) in this case.
 CW: This setting should be activated when discrete interferences need to be analyzed. The
frequency characteristic of the phase or amplitude jitter is specified in dBc. Unlike when NOISE is
set, the effective noise bandwidth is the bandwidth specified under RBW. It is displayed on top of
the diagram in this mode.
The combination of several frequency points into a pixel column yields the maximum power density
(MAX detector) in this case.
To average the displayed measured jitter spectra over time (power density averaging), the number of
characteristics to be averaged can be defined by setting the AVERAGE CNT counter. The value range
is as follows: 1 = AVERAGE CNT = 9999. Pressing the AVERAGE CNT softkey again deactivates
averaging.
The bottom line will show the current setting of the equalizer (EQU) and the carrier frequency loop
bandwidth (CF LOOP).
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.57
Measurement is based on the demodulated I/Q baseband data after the equalizer. The R&S EFA-QAM
partially suppresses jitter of the carrier phase or the input signal gain. Depending on the bandwidth of
the control loops in the R&S EFA, high-frequency jitter may not be eliminated. Uneliminated phase jitter
is indicated by jitter in the constellation diagram in the tangential direction, while amplitude jitter is
indicated as an error in the radial direction in the constellation diagram. This is shown in the following
example of two constellation diagrams whose signals are impaired by phase and amplitude jitter:
Fig. 2.9-47 Constellation diagram of a QAM signal impaired by phase jitter (left) or amplitude
jitter (right). Phase jitter affects the constellation diagram tangentially, while
amplitude jitter would cause radial distortions.
Jitter spectra can be measured only if the receiver is synchronized to the incoming signal. If
synchronization fails, a message box stating SYNC FAILED appears. The jitter spectrum is obtained by
comparing a sequence of receive signal I/Q data with the ideal position (in the center of the decision
field). Depending on the measurement that is set, the amplitude or phase component is analyzed from
the difference signal:
 PHASE JITTER: The ratio of the amplitude of the received I/Q value to the ideal position is
assumed to be 1 (ideal). The determining factor is the sequence of phase errors φ(t).
This measurement can be used to monitor the phase stability quality of the oscillators used to
generate the QAM signal.
 AMPL JITTER: In this measurement, the error in the tangential direction φ(t) is assumed to be zero.
The determining factor in each case is the ratio of the amplitude of the received I/Q value to the
amplitude of the ideal position. The chronological sequence of amplitude ratios A(t) is processed
further.
This measurement is useful for checking amplifier control loops in the transmission path.
In Fig. 2.9-46, the current setting of the carrier frequency loop bandwidth (SPEC FUNC: LOOP
SETTINGS menu) is displayed in the bottom right of the diagram. This value should always be set to
LOW when measuring the jitter spectra to prevent the measurement result from being affected if the
control loop bandwidth is too large. If this bandwidth is not set to LOW, a message box indicating that
the bandwidth needs to be corrected appears for several seconds.
A further recommendation is to set the equalizer to ON when measuring the jitter spectrum (SPEC
FUNC: EQUALIZER menu). This prevents linear distortions from affecting the jitter spectrum result. If
the equalizer is not activated, a message box indicating that the equalizer needs to be set to ON will
appear for several seconds.
If a noise signal is added (e.g. white noise), it will cause radial and tangential interference in the
constellation diagram. It will thus limit the dynamic range for measuring the jitter spectra.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.58
The MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN menu comprises the following measurements:

 Amplitude distribution
 Complementary cumulative distribution function (CCDF)
 Echo pattern
 History
 Eye monitoring
2.9.8.5.1 Amplitude Distribution and CCDF

specified how often the signal observed reaches or exceeds a specific level.
HISTORY, IEC/IEEE bus) in the amplitude distribution/CCDF measurement mode.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.59
2.9.8.5.1.1 Amplitude Distribution
In this measurement, the EFA-QAM records 10.24 million instantaneous values of the sampled carrier
frequency signal and accumulates their frequency of occurrence. The rms value is determined from this
distribution and displayed; it is used as a reference for the display of the voltage level on a logarithmic
scale.
The measured values are displayed together with reference values (dotted lines) indicating the
distribution function of an ideal QAM signal. The reference values depend on the following parameters
which can be selected in the STATUS menu:
 Order of QAM
 Roll-off factor
These two parameters are also displayed on the screen for identification of the reference values used.
The measurement itself can be carried out without any synchronization to the input signal and is
independent of the selection of the two parameters.
To activate the amplitude distribution measurement, press the MEASURE function key and then the
TIME DOMAIN key. Next, press the AMPLDIST(RF) / CCDF(RF) / CCDF(ENV) toggle key repeatedly
until AMPLDIST(RF) appears in the softkey field in inverse video. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.9-48 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: AMPLDIST(RF) menu. Reference values displayed as
dotted lines.
vertical axis indicates the frequency of occurrence. The (bell-shaped) distribution density of the QAM
signal is divided into several 1 dB windows to determine the amplitude distribution. In the
AMPLDIST(RF) measurement, the height of the different columns represents the frequency of
occurrence within the corresponding 1 dB window.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.60
The figure below demonstrates this calculation method:

Distribution density function
rms voltage (0 dB)
+1 dB
+2 dB
+3 dB
+4 dB
+5 dB
+6 dB
+7 dB
+8 dB
Voltage
Integral of distribution density function
of voltage taken from (rms value) to
(rms value +1 dB)
Fig. 2.9-49 Distribution density function of a QAM signal. The distribution density function is
subdivided into 1 dB steps for calculating the amplitude distribution. The size of
the hatched area corresponds to the height of the first column in the
AMPLDIST(RF) diagram.
The display is updated after every 102400 values (1 %). The data is collected until the final value is
To compare the distribution of the applied signal to that of an ideal QAM signal, the reference values
are shown as dotted horizontal lines. The reference values depend on the order of QAM and on the roll-
off factor. Depending on the selected order of QAM and roll-off factor, the appropriate reference values
are displayed by the EFA-QAM. They are only valid for the QAM signal and cannot be applied to other
signals.
An ideal signal is applied if all the column heights of the measured distribution are identical to the
heights of the reference values. A deviation from the ideal distribution is therefore identified by the
deviations of the column heights and the value of the crest factor (for example, due to the clipping
effects of the transmitter output stage).
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.61
2.9.8.5.1.2 CCDF (Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function)
The CCDF is a measurement function similar to the amplitude distribution measurement. Unlike
amplitude distribution, the curve indicates how often a particular voltage level is reached or exceeded.
The CCDF measurement is divided into two methods, CCDF(RF) and CCDF(ENV), whose distribution
characteristics are based on different data.
To activate the CCDF measurement, press the MEASURE function key and then the TIME DOMAIN
key. Next, press the AMPLDIST(RF) / CCDF(RF) / CCDF(ENV) toggle key repeatedly until, depending
on the desired measurement, CCDF(RF) or CCDF(ENV) appears in the softkey field in inverse video.
Fig. 2.9-50 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: CCDF(RF) and CCDF(ENV) menu. The reference
values are marked by short horizontal lines in 1 dB steps.
frequency signal are recorded according to the same method used with amplitude distribution, and the
distribution density is determined. In contrast to this, the CCDF(ENV) measurement, which records the
distribution density of the envelope of the carrier frequency signal, is based on only 1 million frequency
points.
The rms value of the carrier frequency signal (CCDF(RF)) or envelope signal (CCDF(ENV)) is
determined from this distribution and is used as a reference for the display of the voltage level on a
logarithmic scale.
vertical axis marks the CCDF values.
In contrast to amplitude distribution, the individual points of this trace indicate how often a certain
voltage level is reached or exceeded. The indicated frequency refers to the total number of read
samples specified under ACQUisition. From a physical point of view, the CCDF measurement is the
integral of the distribution function (integration from observed level to infinity). Direct comparison of
measured values and theoretical reference values enables information on the nonlinear response of all
types of active elements to be acquired at a glance.
In addition to the graphic display of the CCDF values, the level at which the distribution reaches the
value 1E-3 is numerically displayed. To compare this value with that of an ideal QAM signal, the
difference to the ideal level is given in the Δ (delta) line. These two values therefore indicate which
minimum level above the rms value of the signal is present during 0.1% of the time, allowing an initial
quantitative statement to be made about the nonlinearity of the measured signal.
To compare the distribution of the applied signal with that of an ideal QAM signal in greater detail, the
reference values are displayed as short horizontal lines in a 1 dB grid. The voltage level associated with
each reference line is highlighted by a scaling line extended up to the reference value. In order to
clearly identify the value measured at such levels, the points at which the trace crosses the extended
scaling lines are in inverse video.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.62
The reference values depend on the order of QAM and on the roll-off factor. Depending on the selected
order of QAM and roll-off factor, the appropriate reference values are displayed by the EFA-QAM. They
are only valid for the QAM signal and cannot be applied to other signals.
The great advantage of the CCDF measurement is that the useful signal itself is directly measured; it is
not necessary to transmit complex test sequences.
2.9.8.5.1.3 Crest Factor
Information on the crest factor is determined from the distribution density characteristic and displayed in
the upper right-hand corner of the diagram. The displayed values refer to the type of the analyzed
signal: the characteristic of the instantaneous values of the carrier frequency signal in the
AMPLDIST(RF) and CCDF(RF) measurements or the characteristic of the envelope in the CCDF(ENV)
measurement. There are three categories of values:
 MARGIN: This value indicates the crest factor that could currently be measured due to the
clipping effects from the test receiver. This value is a measure for margin.
 MAX: The maximum crest factor is the ratio of the maximum voltage to the rms value of
the voltage characteristic. The maximum voltage that has occurred since the start
of the measurement is used.
 CURR: In contrast to MAX, the current samples under ACQUisition are used for
calculation.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.63
2.9.8.5.2 Measuring the Channel Impulse Response (Echo Pattern)
The powerful channel estimation routine of the EFA-QAM allows fast assessment of the linear distortion
of the transmission channel (see also section 2.9.8.4.2). In the channel impulse response diagram
(ECHO PATTERN), the channel estimation data is interpreted as the result of echo interference. The
 s (microseconds)
 km (kilometers), and
 miles (miles; 1 mile = 1.609344 km).
To activate this measurement, press the MEASURE key in the function key block and then the TIME
DOMAIN keys. Now, repeatedly press the fourth key from the top until the desired unit appears in the
softkey field in inverse video. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.9-51 The MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: ECHO PATTERN menu shows a QAM signal with
echoes. The test signal has a pre-echo (1 µs / -20 dB) and three post-echoes (1 s
/ -30 dB, 15 s / -20 dB and 20 s / -25 dB. The main pulse can be seen at 0 s.
The delays can be read more precisely in the zoomed-in display on the right.
In the Echo Pattern display mode, the position of the main pulse at t = 0 can be clearly identified. The
pre-echoes are displayed to the left of the main pulse and the post-echoes to the right. Pre-echoes may
be generated especially by crosstalk in filters, whereas post-echoes are mainly caused by reflections.
The unit of the level scale is decibel (dB). This setting is fixed and normalized to the level of the main
pulse. The scale of the time/distance axis can be zoomed for better identification of very close echoes.
To zoom the scale, press the RANGE key repeatedly until the desired subrange is displayed.
The NUM VALUES ON/OFF key can be used to divide the screen: below the graphical display of the
channel impulse response up to ten echoes are sorted according to their respective level values and
listed in numeric form. Only echoes with an amplitude greater than -40 dB relative to the main pulse are
taken into consideration.
Note: Spectrum and channel response diagrams are not independent display modes; rather, the
interpretation is carried out in the one direction or the other. The display modes are
equivalent and this is physically correct. If the cause of distortion is an echo, for example, a
spectrum can still be displayed. The spectrum is simply another way of displaying the
echo.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.64
2.9.8.5.3 Measuring EYE MONITORING
Usually, digitally modulated signals are presented graphically in a constellation diagram, the most
important display form for such signals to date. This kind of display, however, has also distinct
disadvantages. In particular, the constellation diagram does not provide sufficient information on the
temporal behaviour of any interference. For example, periodically occurring interference pulses cannot
be detected. Moreover, the constellation diagram shows only a small part of the data actually available,
because measured values are recorded displayed only within a narrow time window. Numerous
measured values are not detected at all, which results in large time gaps.
This drawback can now be eliminated thanks to an innovative hardware topology. In practice, a large
number of detectors operating in parallel are used to permanently monitor the entire range of the I/Q
samples. If a measured value assigned to a certain detector is acquired by the receiver, the detector
stores the information. This configuration allows 100 % measured-data acquisition. Interference with
very short pulses (e.g. 10 ns) can be recorded even if just a single symbol has been impaired in the
transmission.
Fig. 2.9-52 Consecutive constellation diagrams are each reduced by one dimension
(projection of I axis onto Y axis) and then graphically displayed as a function of
time
Left: eye monitoring measurement with 20 sec display time: the 64QAM signal was impaired
by 25 ns pulses every 2 seconds (see markers); all pulses were continuously detected
by the instrument. At least two impaired samples per pulse become visible (I and Q
component), depending on whether only one symbol or two symbols have been
impaired.
Right: eye monitoring measurement with a displayed time interval of 4 days: the 64QAM
signal is affected by periodic interference
Eye monitoring differs from the well-known eye diagram in that it clearly assigns I/Q samples in time
and does not display redundant information. The two diagrams graphically display the eye height, but
only eye monitoring ensures continuous data acquisition. Eye monitoring can thus be considered as a
follow-on development of the eye diagram.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.65
2.9.8.5.3.1 FREEZE
A measurement in progress can be stopped on the display by activating the FREEZE function. The
measurement, however, continues to run in the background. To display the measurement again, press
FREEZE once more. The measurement continues to run in the background irrespective of FREEZE;
FREEZE only reefers to the display and not to the measurement itself.
2.9.8.5.3.2 INTERVAL
The eye monitoring time interval to be displayed can be configured by the user within a wide range.
Press the INTERVAL key to display a list of the settable time intervals, which can be selected with the
softkeys marked as up and down cursor keys. The entry is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey.
Fig. 2.9-53 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: EYE MONITORING: INTERVAL menu
A user-defined time window is displayed starting with the smallest interval (20 seconds). When this
interval has elapsed, the instrument automatically switches to the next higher interval (and so on) until
the user-selected time window is displayed. The display is then switched to the scroll mode, i.e. new
measured values are shown at the right edge of the display and the oldest measured values are cleared
from the left edge. The entire user-defined time window with the current measured values is thus
continuously displayed. The maximum time window which can be displayed comprises 1000 days. Of
course, continuous measured-value acquisition is also obtained with this setting.
Note: The INTERVAL key can be used to increase the time interval displayed. The data already
collected is compressed in a larger interval when automatic switchover is carried out. If the
time that has elapsed since the start of the measurement is longer than the time set in the
INTERVAL menu, the data already measured is reset and the measurement is restarted.
2.9.8.5.3.3 RESTART
2.9.8.5.3.4 ADD NOISE
A noise signal can be added to the receive signal. For details refer to section 2.9.8.7.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.66
is automatically started immediately after the EFA-QAM has been switched on (measurement in the
background).
For technical reasons, the measurement parameters EVM and MER cannot be calculated while the
constellation diagram, histogram I/Q, spectrum, amplitude distribution or CCDF are active. While these
measurements are active, the EVM or MER trace is shown as an interrupted line.
To display the recorded parameters, start this measurement by pressing the MEASURE key in the
function key block and then the keys TIME DOMAIN and HISTORY. The following menu is displayed:
Fig. 2.9-54 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: HISTORY menu

In the graph on the left, the time characteristic of the input level and the MER value are displayed. It can
clearly be seen how the input level slowly drops before dropping out completely. This results in a sync
loss and MPEG data error. After a level failure of 8 seconds, the input level is -22 dBm and remains
constant, but the measured MER is only approx. 36 dB. At the end of the time window, the measured
MER reaches a value of 43 dB.
In the graph on the right (similar measurement conditions as in the graph on the left), the time
characteristic of the input level and all the parameters recorded in the HISTORY measurement are
displayed in a table with the maximum, minimum, and average values measured in the set time interval.
Times during which measurements were not possible (sync loss), are not considered for the min, max
and average values (measurement parameters marked by ).
In the HISTORY measurement, the screen comprises a part that is permanently displayed (upper half)
and another part that can be configured by the user (lower half, 2nd screen).
The upper half of the screen always displays the level characteristic of the input signal. The level unit on
the vertical axis is the one set in SETUP: LEVEL UNITS. The horizontal axis indicates the time
reference.
The graphs are updated every second. At the beginning of the measurement, the characteristics are
the graphs is reached, the scaling of the time axis changes to the next higher time interval, if required.
This is repeated until a preset maximum time interval is attained. From this time, the oldest measured
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.67
2.9.8.5.4.1 INTERVAL
Press the INTERVAL key to display a list of the settable time intervals, which can be selected with the
softkeys marked as up and down cursor keys. The entry is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey.
is compressed in a larger interval when automatic changeover is carried out. If the time
that has elapsed since the start of the measurement is longer than the time set in menu
item INTERVAL, the data already measured is reset and measurement is restarted.
data error (D. ERR). The indicated synchronization refers to the status of FEC (forward error
correction). When the traces are directly above the reference line, synchronization is correct and the
MPEG transport stream is error-free.
2.9.8.5.4.2 CONFIG 2nd SCREEN
Fig. 2.9-55 MEASURE: TIME DOMAIN: HISTORY: CONFIG 2nd SCREEN menu
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.68
The graphs or the table below the level characteristic can be freely selected. To do so, press the
CONFIG 2nd SCREEN key. The softkey labelling is then replaced by a selection of graphs that can be
displayed in the lower half of the HISTORY screen. The softkey labelling remains in this form until a
selection is made by pressing a key. The following graphs can be selected:
BER BEFORE RS: The bit error ratio before the Reed-Solomon decoder is displayed. The vertical
axis has logarithmic scaling. If the bit error ratio is 0, this is shown by a line below
the least-significant scaling line.
BER AFTER RS: The bit error ratio after the Reed-Solomon decoder is displayed. The vertical axis
has logarithmic scaling. If the bit error ratio is 0, this is shown by a line below the
BER B&A RS: The two bit error ratios (BER before and after the Reed-Solomon decoder) are
displayed in one diagram.
 MER dB: The time characteristic of the modulation error ratio is displayed. This is
specified in logarithmic scale (dB) and refers to the average power of the useful
signal minus the pilot carrier power. For information on defining the measured
value, see section 2.9.8.6.1. For technical reasons, MER cannot be calculated
with the following measurements: constellation diagram, histogram I/Q,
spectrum, amplitude distribution and CCDF. While these measurements are
activated, the MER measurement is represented by an interrupted line.
EVM/MER %: The time characteristic of the modulation error vector EVM or error ratio MER is
recorded in linear scale (%). EVM or MER must be selected in the SPECIAL
FUNCTION: DISPLAY menu, see section 2.9.6.5.2. For more information on the
definition of EVM and MER, see section 2.9.8.6.1. For technical reasons, EVM %
and MER % cannot be calculated with the following measurements: constellation
diagram, histogram I/Q, spectrum, amplitude distribution and CCDF. While these
measurements are activated, the EVM % / MER % measurement is represented
by an interrupted line.
 NUMERIC VALUES: A numeric list of all parameters acquired in the HISTORY measurement is
displayed in tabular form. Based on all acquired parameters of the measurement
interval represented in the graphs, the current value (CURRent), the
minimum/maximum value and the corresponding average value are calculated
and entered in the table. If the bit error ratio cannot be indicated (e.g. due to
synchronization loss), this is marked by an asterisk (*). In this case,
: TEMPORARY NOT MONITORED lights up below the table. If the modulation
errors MER and EVM cannot be determined, this is displayed in the same way.
The times, during which the bit error ratios or the modulation error is not defined,
are not taken into account in the calculation of the average values (AVG). If a
value cannot be specified, this is indicated by three dashes (---). Bit error ratios
undergo linear averaging, level and MER and EVM undergo square averaging
(averaging power values).
RESET BER key was pressed in the MEASURE menu.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.69
2.9.8.5.4.3 FREEZE
measurement continues to run in the background. To display the continued measurement, press
FREEZE again.
2.9.8.5.4.4 AVERAGE, MAX; MIN, MAX&MIN
All detectors operate in parallel with the HISTORY function. The measured values are stored for each
measurement by taking all the detectors into account. It is thus possible to select the desired detector
afterwards without having to restart the measurement. The detectors have the following characteristics:
AVERAGE: Averages the measured values that are combined to form one point on the screen. For the
level, MER, and EVM measurement, the power is averaged (root mean square). Averaging
is linear for the BER measurements. Connecting lines are drawn for AVERAGE values.
MAX: Displays the MAX value of the measured values, the time position of which is assigned to a
pixel column. The MAX values are connected by lines.
MIN: Displays the MIN value of the measured values, the time position of which is assigned to a
pixel column. The MIN values are connected by lines.
MAX&MIN: Displays the MAX and MIN value of the measured values, the time position of which is
2.9.8.5.4.5 Restart
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.70
2.9.8.6 QAM Parameters
The QAM parameters provide information on the quality of the transmitted QAM signal.
To display the QAM parameters, press the MEASURE key and then the QAM PARAMETERS... key.
Fig. 2.9-56 The MEASURE: QAM PARAMETERS menu
To determine the QAM parameters, the demodulated I and Q data is collected and saved. A digital
signal processor (DSP) calculates the following transmission parameters from the data:
 I/Q AMPLITUDE IMBALANCE in %
 I/Q QUADRATURE ERROR in degrees
 CARRIER SUPPRESSION in dB
 PHASE JITTER (rms) in degrees
 SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO on a logarithmic scale (dB)
 MODULATION ERROR RATIO (rms) on a logarithmic scale (dB)
 MODULATION ERROR RATIO (min) on a logarithmic scale (dB)
 MODULATION ERROR RATIO (rms) on a linear scale (%)
 MODULATION ERROR RATIO (max) on a linear scale (%)
 ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE (rms) on a linear scale (%)
 ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE (max) on a linear scale (%)
Note 1: The error on the linear scale is displayed as MODULATION ERROR RATIO or as ERROR
Note 2: For definitions, calculation formulas and measurement limits of the individual parameters
see section 2.9.10.5
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.71
2.9.8.6.1 I/Q AMPLITUDE IMBALANCE
The I/Q AMPLITUDE IMBALANCE parameter describes the amplitude imbalance of the I and Q
components of the complex baseband signal. It can only be produced due to different gains in the two
signal paths of the transmitter. The inherent error of the Test Receiver EFA-QAM is negligible due to
the fully digital modulation.
Note: For definitions, calculation formulas and measurement limits see section 2.9.10.6.
2.9.8.6.2 I/Q QUADRATURE ERROR
The I/Q QUADRATURE ERROR parameter (sometimes also referred to as "quadrature offset") is the
difference between the phase angles of the I and Q components referred to 90°. The quadrature error is
caused by an error of the phase shifter in the I/Q modulator. After demodulation, the I and Q
components are no longer orthogonal to each other. The inherent quadrature error of the EFA-QAM is
negligible due to the fully digital design of the test receiver.
2.9.8.6.3 CARRIER SUPPRESSION

The CARRIER SUPPRESSION parameter (carrier leakage) is the ratio of the carrier leakage power
(averaging of all signal vectors) to the rms power of the QAM signal (rms value of all ideal signal
vectors). Carrier leakage is caused by DC components in complex baseband signals or by carrier
crosstalk in the modulator.
2.9.8.6.4 PHASE JITTER
The PHASE JITTER parameter is a phase noise measure of the QAM signal, i.e. system-inherent
phase modulation is not considered in its calculation. Phase jitter is caused by modulation and by
conversion oscillators. In the demodulation process, phase jitter causes inaccuracies in signal sampling.
2.9.8.6.5 SIGNAL / NOISE RATIO

The SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO is a measure for determining the modulation error caused by amplitude
noise. The SIGNAL/NOISE RATIO denotes the ratio of the QAM signal power to the noise power. The
symbol rate is used for calculating the noise power bandwidth. In signal amplification, the noise is
added to the QAM signal.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.72
2.9.8.6.6 MODULATION ERROR RATIO
The MODULATION ERROR RATIO (MER) parameter reflects the quality of the QAM signal. All
modulation and transmission errors affect the measured MER. This means that it is not possible to
recognize whether the transmission error was caused by amplitude noise, phase noise, linear or non-
linear distortion.
EFA-QAM calculates the rms value and the peak value and displays them on a linear (%) and
logarithmic (dB) scale:
 The MER(rms) value is the ratio of the rms error vector to the signal power. It is output on a linear
and logarithmic scale.
 The MER(min) value is the ratio of the error vector with the maximum amplitude to the signal power
on a logarithmic scale.
 The MER(max) value is the ratio of the error vector with the maximum amplitude to the signal
power on a linear scale.
Note 2: For definitions, calculation formulas and measurement limits see section 2.9.10.6.
2.9.8.6.7 ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE
The ERROR VECTOR MAGNITUDE (EVM) parameter reflects the quality of the QAM signal. All
modulation and transmission errors affect the measured EVM. This means that it is not possible to
recognize whether the transmission error was caused by amplitude noise, phase noise, linear or non-
linear distortion.
EFA-QAM calculates the rms value and the peak value and displays them on a linear (%) and
logarithmic (dB) scale:
 The EVM(rms) value is the ratio of the rms error vector to the maximum signal power. It is output
on a linear scale.
 The EVM(max) value is the ratio of the error vector with the maximum amplitude to the maximum
signal power on a linear scale.
Note 2: For definitions, calculation formulas and measurement limits see section 2.9.10.6.
2.9.8.7 Noise Generator (ADD. NOISE)
All the measure menus allow the internal noise generator to be activated. The noise generator is
switched on and off by pressing the ADD. NOISE key (toggle function). If the noise generator is
deactivated, the message ADD. NOISE OFF is displayed. If the noise generator is activated, the ratio of
carrier power to noise signal power is displayed. With the noise generator activated, the numeric value
of the desired C/N ratio can be entered in dB. The noise power is referred to the bandwidth of the
baseband signal of the useful signal (symbol rate).
The noise generator allows conclusions to be drawn on the system characteristics (END, system
margins).
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.73
2.9.9 Menu Overview

Note: When the PRESET key is pressed, the settings or numeric values printed in bold are
used.
When the RESET key is pressed (PRESET: SERVICE: RESET menu), the settings and
numeric values in brackets and bold (abc) are also used.
MODE Menu
MODE NTSC / BTSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR

8VSB / ATSC ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
QAM / DVB-C / J.83/A ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
QAM / J.83/B ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
QAM / DVB-C / J.83/C ANALYZER/DEMODULATOR
MPEG2 DECODER QAM / J.83B
MPEG2 DECODER QAM / DVB-C / J.83A
MPEG2 DECODER QAM / DVB-C / J.83C
INPUT Menu
EFA Model 60/70
INPUT RECEIVER
IF
ATTEN... AUTO
RECEIVER) LOW NOISE
LOW DIST
10 dB PREAMP
INPUT Menu
EFA Model 63/73
INPUT RECEIVER (preset with RF preselection option EFA-B3 fitted)
RF INPUT 50 ohm
75 ohm
IF
DEMOD (preset without RF preselection option EFA-B3 fitted)
ATTEN... AUTO
(only with INPUT: DEMOD) MANUAL LOW+PREAMP
MANUAL LOW
MANUAL HIGH
ATTEN... AUTO
(only with INPUT: RECEIVER) MANUAL (numeric entry) 0, 5, 10, 15, to 50, 55 dB
LOW NOISE
NORMAL
LOW DIST
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.74
RF Menu
RF RF (numeric entry) Entry of receive frequency in MHz

(preset/reset does not change frequency setting)
CHANNEL (numeric entry)
SPECIAL CHANNEL (numeric entry)
RCL RF (numeric entry)
STO RF... (numeric entry)
EDIT TEXT... LEFT
RIGHT
GET CHARACTER
DELETE CHARACTER
SAVE & EXIT
STATUS Menu
STATUS ORDER OF QAM 4
16
32
64
128
256
SET SYMBOL RATE (numeric entry) 0.100000 to 6.999000 Msymb/s
The reset and preset values depend on the demodulator mode:
J.83/A: 6.900000 Msymb/s
J.83/B, 64QAM: 5.056941 Msymb/s
J.83/B, 256QAM: 5.360537 Msymb/s
J.83/C: 5.273979 Msymb/s
SAW FILTER BW 6.0 MHz
2.0 MHz
7.0 MHz
8.0 MHz
J.83/A: 8.0 MHz
J.83/B: 6.0 MHz
J.83/C: 6.0 MHz
OFF (if the appropriate preset filter is not installed)
ROLLOFF FACTOR 0.12
0.13
0.15
0.18
J.83/A: 0.15
J.83/B, 64QAM: 0.18
J.83/B, 256QAM: 0.12
J.83/C: 0.13
BEEPER... LEVEL < THRESHOLD ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
MER dB< THRESHOLD ENABLED
DISABLED
EVM/MER % > THRESHOLD ENABLED
DISABLED
(REED-SOLOMON) DISABLED
MPEG DATA ERROR
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.75
MEASURE Menu
MEASURE CONSTELL DIAGRAM... SYMBOL CNT (numeric entry) 10000

1 to 10 000 to 999 999 999
HOLD
FREEZE ON
OFF
CONST DIAG
HISTOGRAM I SCALE LIN
HISTOGRAM Q LOG
ADD. NOISE OFF
(numeric entry)
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB, if symbol rate
3 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB, if symbol rate is 1 to
2.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=15 to 56.0 dB, if symbol rate is 0.3 to
0.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=20 to 56.0 dB, if symbol rate is 0.1 to
0.299999 Msymb/s
FREQUENCY DOMAIN... SPECTRUM... AVERAGE CNT OFF
1 to 50 to 9999
(numeric entry)
PEAK HOLD (not with RMS detector)
DETECTOR MIN
RMS
MAX
START FREQ
(numeric entry referred to RF)
-4.48 MHz to +3.14 MHz
STOP FREQ
(numeric entry referred to RF)
-3.18 MHz to +4.48 MHz
ADD. NOISE OFF
(numeric entry)
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
3 to
6.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
1 to
2.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=15 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
0.3 to
0.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=20 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
0.1 to
0.299999 Msymb/s
AMPL/PHASE DETECTOR RMS
AMPL/GD PEAK
POLAR PLOT
PHASE / AMPL AVERAGE OFF
JITTER... CNT 1 to 50 to 9999
(numeric entry)
FREEZE ON
OFF
PHASE JITTER
AMPL JITTER
APPLICATION CW
NOISE
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.76
MEASURE Menu
ADD. NOISE OFF

(numeric entry)
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
3 to
6.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
1 to
2.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=15 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
0.3 to
0.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=20 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
0.1 to
0.299999 Msymb/s
ADD. NOISE OFF
(numeric entry)
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB, if symbol rate is
3 to 6.999999 Msymb/s
1 to 2.999999 Msymb/s
0.3 to 0.999999 Msymb/s
0.1 to 0.299999 Msymb/s
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.77
MEASURE Menu
MEASURE TIME DOMAIN... ECHO PATTERN... RANGE FULL

1
2
3
FREEZE ON
OFF
NUM VALUES ON
OFF
SCALE µs
KM
MILES
ADD. NOISE OFF
(numeric entry)
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
3 to
6.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
1 to
2.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=15 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
0.3 to
0.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=20 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
0.1 to
0.299999 Msymb/s
AMPLDIST(RF)
CCDF(RF)
CCDF(ENV)
EYE MONITORING... FREEZE ON
OFF
INTERVAL.. 20 SECONDS
40 SECONDS
1 MINUTE
2 MINUTES
4 MINUTES
10 MINUTES
20 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
2 HOURS
5 HOURS
10 HOURS
1 DAY
2 DAYS
5 DAYS
10 DAYS
20 DAYS
50 DAYS
100 DAYS
200 DAYS
500 DAYS
1000 DAYS
RESTART
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.78
MEASURE Menu
MEASURE ADD. NOISE OFF

(numeric entry)
C/N=5 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
3 to
6.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=10 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
1 to
2.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=15 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
0.3 to
0.999999 Msymb/s
C/N=20 to 56.0 dB,
if symbol rate is
0.1 to
0.299999 Msymb/s
HISTORY... CONFIG 2nd BER
SCREEN... BEFORE RS
BER
AFTER RS
BER
B&A RS
MER dB
EVM/MER %
NUMERIC VALUES
FREEZE ON
OFF
AVERAGE
MAX
MIN
MAX&MIN
INTERVAL.. 1 MINUTE
2 MINUTE
5 MINUTE
10 MINUTE
20 MINUTE
30 MINUTE
1 HOUR
2 HOUR
5 HOUR
10 HOUR
1 DAY
2 DAYS
5 DAYS
10 DAYS
20 DAYS
50 DAYS
100 DAYS
200 DAYS
500 DAYS
1000 DAYS
RESTART
ADD. NOISE OFF
(numeric entry)
3 to 6.999999 Msymb/s
1 to 2.999999 Msymb/s
0.3 to 0.999999 Msymb/s
0.1 to 0.299999 Msymb/s
QAM PARAMETERS... CONSTELL DIAGRAM... As for CONSTELL DIAGRAM...
FREQUENCY DOMAIN... As for FREQUENCY DOMAIN...
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.79
MEASURE Menu
TIME DOMAIN... As for TIME DOMAIN...
MEASURE ADD. NOISE OFF

(numeric entry)
3 to 6.999999 Msymb/s
1 to 2.999999 Msymb/s
0.3 to 0.999999 Msymb/s
0.1 to 0.299999 Msymb/s
RESET BER
ADD. NOISE OFF
(numeric entry)
3 to 6.999999 Msymb/s
1 to 2.999999 Msymb/s
0.3 to 0.999999 Msymb/s
0.1 to 0.299999 Msymb/s
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.80
SETUP Menu
SETUP TIME TIME (numeric entry)

DATE...
DATE (numeric entry)
REMOTE... IEC625 0 to 6 to 30
IEEE488... (numeric entry)
RS232... BAUD RATE 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
DATA BITS 7BIT
8BIT
PARITY NO
EVEN
ODD
STOP BITS 1BIT
2BIT
HANDSHAKE NO
XON/XOFF
HARDWARE
PRINTER... PRINTER TYPE EPSON COMP
R&S PUD COMP
HP COMP
FORMFEED NO
AFTER PRINTOUT
LEVEL UNITS... dBpW
dBW
dBm
dBV
dBmV
V/mV
External
LCD INVERS ON
OFF
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.81
SPECIAL CHANNEL DEFINITION... RCL TABLE STANDARD TABLE

FUNCTION USER TABLE
SELECT TABLE
ENTER
COPY TABLE COPY FROM
COPY TO
ENTER
ENTER
EDIT TABLE EDIT TABLE NAME
EDIT TABLE DATA
SELECT TABLE
EXIT
MPEG DATA OUTPUT... ERROR INDICATION BIT IN ENABLED
MPEG FRAME DISABLED
PARALLEL MPEG DATA PLL ON
OFF
MPEG FRAME SIZE 188 BYTES
204 BYTES
IQ POSITION AUTO
NORMAL
INVERTED
EQUALIZER... EQUALIZER ON
FREEZE
OFF
LOOP SETTINGS... CARRIER FREQUENCY LOOP LOW
BANDWIDTH MEDIUM
HIGH
BAUD RECOVERY LOOP LOW
BANDWIDTH MEDIUM
HIGH
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL SLOW
FAST
DISPLAY... CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM OFF
ZOOM Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
QAM PARAMETERS/ MER %
HISTORY/ALARM EVM %
PARTIAL
BER BEFORE RS
BER AFTER RS
SHOULDER ATTENUATION ETR 290
(SPECTRUM) OFF
BER/FEC... MIN BER INTEGRATION 1
(SAMPLES) 10
100
1000
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.82
ALARM Menu
ALARM REGISTER CLEAR... NO

YES
THRESHOLD... LEVEL (numeric entry)
20 to 40.0 to 130 dBuV
MER dB (numeric entry)
0 to 30 to 50 dB
EVM/MER % (numeric entry)
0.20 to 2.00 to 65 %
BER BEFORE RS (numeric entry)
0.1E-15 to 2.0E-04 to 9.9E-05
CONFIG... LEVEL ENABLED
DISABLED
MPEG TS SYNC ENABLED
DISABLED
MER dB ENABLED
DISABLED
EVM/MER % ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
LINE NEWEST
MAN
PRINT... LAST LINES... (Entry of the number of the last
lines to be printed, start with
PRINT.)
0 to 5 to 999
PRINT
ABORT
LINES... START LINE

0 to 999
STOP LINE
0 to 20 to 999
PRINT
ABORT
ACTUAL
LINE NEWEST
MAN
ABORT
STATISTICS... REFRESH
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.83
PRESET Menu
PRESET PRESET... YES

NO
SOFTWARE OPTIONS... SERIAL NUMBER (the serial number is entered in the factory and
cannot be changed)
OPTION KEY

NO
DELETE RAM... YES
NO
RESET... YES
NO
BOARD INFO... (Overview of the modules
installed)
SELFTEST... Selftest overview
STO Menu
STO (numeric entry) 0 to 4
RCL Menu
RCL (numeric entry) 0 to 4
HARDCOPY
HARDCOPY Writes the current display data to RAM
AUDIO
AUDIO The AUDIO menu is only available if the option MPEG DECODER EFA-B4 is installed. See section MPEG
DECODER.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.84
2.9.10 Hints and Applications

2.9.10.1 Receiver Selectivity Characteristics ....................................................................... 2.9.86
2.9.10.1.1 RF Selectivity .............................................................................................................. 2.9.86
2.9.10.1.2 IF Selectivity ................................................................................................................ 2.9.87
2.9.10.2 Function and Selection of Integration Time for BER Measurements .................. 2.9.88
2.9.10.2.1 Calculation of Bit Error Ratios..................................................................................... 2.9.88
2.9.10.2.2 Processing of Individual Samples for BER Values and Selection of Integration Time 2.9.91
2.9.10.3 Assignment and Functions of Parallel and Serial MPEG2 Outputs..................... 2.9.93
2.9.10.4 Definition and Application of the CCDF and Amplitude Distribution Measurement
Function ..................................................................................................................... 2.9.95
2.9.10.4.1 Definitions of CCDF .................................................................................................... 2.9.95
2.9.10.4.2 Comparison of Carrier Signal and Baseband Signal Measurement........................... 2.9.96
2.9.10.4.3 Conclusion .................................................................................................................. 2.9.96
2.9.10.5 Application and Interpretation of Constellation Diagram ..................................... 2.9.97
2.9.10.5.1 Amplitude Imbalance................................................................................................... 2.9.98
2.9.10.5.2 Quadrature Error ......................................................................................................... 2.9.98
2.9.10.5.3 Carrier Leakage .......................................................................................................... 2.9.99
2.9.10.5.4 Additive Gaussian Noise ............................................................................................. 2.9.99
2.9.10.5.5 Phase Jitter ............................................................................................................... 2.9.100
2.9.10.6 Definitions, Formulas and Measurement Limits of QAM Parameters ............... 2.9.100
2.9.10.6.1 Amplitude Imbalance................................................................................................. 2.9.100
2.9.10.6.2 Quadrature Error ....................................................................................................... 2.9.101
2.9.10.6.3 Carrier Suppression .................................................................................................. 2.9.101
2.9.10.6.4 Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) ..................................................................................... 2.9.101
2.9.10.6.5 Phase Jitter ............................................................................................................... 2.9.101
2.9.10.6.6 Accuracy of Measured Values .................................................................................. 2.9.102
2.9.10.6.7 Modulation Error Ratio (Error Vector Magnitude) ..................................................... 2.9.103
2.9.10.6.8 Other Errors .............................................................................................................. 2.9.105
2.9.10.7 Channel Frequency Tables .................................................................................... 2.9.106
2.9.10.7.1 Channel Table USA .................................................................................................. 2.9.107
2.9.10.7.2 Channel Table CANADA........................................................................................... 2.9.109
2.9.10.7.3 Channel Table KOREA ............................................................................................. 2.9.111
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.85
2.9.10.1 Receiver Selectivity Characteristics
2.9.10.1.1 RF Selectivity
Fig. 2.9-57 shows the typical RF selectivity of the EFA-B3 option. The image frequency rejection is
more than 100 dB.
The RF input DEMOD shows no RF selectivity (image frequency rejection = 0 dB).
Scale: 10 dB / div
SAW = OFF
(100 MHz)
Fig. 2.9-57 RF selectivity of option EFA-B3
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.86
2.9.10.1.2 IF Selectivity
Fig. 2.9-58 shows the typical IF selectivity of the EFA-QAM depending on the device configuration.
STATUS: Scale: 10 dB / div

SAW FILTER BW 2 MHz / div
SAW = 6 MHz
SAW = 8 MHz
SAW = 2 MHz
SAW = 7 MHz
Fig. 2.9-58 IF selectivity of the EFA-QAM depending on the device configuration
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.87
For bit error ratio (BER) measurements, the measurement speed and stability of display can be
modified. To illustrate this, the principle of BER measurement is briefly described below.
2.9.10.2.1 Calculation of Bit Error Ratios
The Test Receiver EFA continuously evaluates the error correction events of the incoming data stream.
Two BERs are calculated simultaneously to and completely independently of each other: BER before
the Reed-Solomon decoder (BER BEFORE RS) and BER after the Reed-Solomon decoder (BER
AFTER RS), which is identical to the BER of the MPEG2 transport stream.
2.9.10.2.1.1 BER Calculation in ITU-T J.83/A/C (DVB-C) Mode
The calculation of the bit error ratios "BER before RS" and "BER after RS" is independent of the order
of QAM.
MPEG TS
203 bytes + 1 sync byte RS decoder 187 bytes + 1 sync byte
204 / 188
Fig. 2.9-59 Reed-Solomon decoder in ITU-T J.83/A/C mode
BER before Reed-Solomon decoder

The "BER before RS" is the bit error ratio before error correction by the Reed-Solomon decoder. The
calculation of the BER before RS is based on 10 million transmitted bits (before RS). A counter is
provided for this purpose, which counts the sent MPEG TS frames. The sync byte is not error-protected
and therefore not considered in the error calculation.
The first 6158 frames form the first BER sample. A second counter increments the errors occurred and
is read out at the end of each BER sample (every 6158 frames) to update the BER measurement. An
-7
errored bit within a BER sample corresponds to a bit error ratio of 1.0x10 .
The Reed-Solomon decoder can correct 8 bytes per frame. If more errors occur within one frame, the
RS decoder can correct none of the errors occurred. The non-correctable frames are also counted. For
the BER calculation, a non-correctable frame is assumed to have 9 errors. For calculating the BER it is
also assumed that one corrected byte has one bit error. If the error counters are read out after 6158
MPEG TS frames, the "BER before RS" can be calculated according to the following formula:
(number of corrected errors) 9 
( number of non - correctable frames)
BER before RS 
10 million bits

100 , and
noise.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.88
To allow even smaller bit error ratios to be determined quantitatively, the BER samples and their error
count results are continuously incremented. The counters are only reset by a sync loss or by actuating
the RESET BER key, whereupon a new BER measurement is started.
BER after Reed-Solomon decoder

The "BER after RS" is the bit error ratio at the output of the Reed-Solomon decoder and hence
equivalent to the bit error ratio of the MPEG TS data stream. The RS decoder (204, 188, 8) can correct
eight errored bytes. If nine or more bytes are erroneous, the complete frame will not be corrected. The
non-correctable frames are counted. A non-correctable frame is assumed to have nine bit errors. A non-
-6
correctable frame is to cause a bit error rate of 1.0x10 . This will be the case if after 9 million
transmitted bits (after RS) a frame could not be corrected. An MPEG TS frame counter is available for
counting the transmitted bits.
9 million bits
Number of MPEG TS frames  6016.04 6016 MPEG TS frames
(188 1) 8 bits
If the error counter is read out after 6016 transmitted MPEG TS frames, the "BER after RS" can be
calculated according to the following formula:
9
( number of non - correctable frames)
BER after RS  number of non - correctable frames 10 -6
910 6
6016 frames represent one BER sample. To allow even smaller bit error ratios to be determined
quantitatively, the BER samples and their error count results are continuously incremented. The
counters are only reset by a sync loss or by actuating the RESET BER key, whereupon a new BER
measurement is started.
2.9.10.2.1.2 BER Calculation in ITU-T J.83/B Mode
The calculation of the bit error ratios "BER before RS" and "BER after RS" is independent of the order
of QAM.
128 symbols 122 symbols MPEG TS
7 bits
7 bits RS decoder 7 bits 188 bytes
128 / 122
8 bits
Fig. 2.9-60 Reed-Solomon decoder in ITU-T J.83/B mode
BER before Reed-Solomon decoder

The "BER before RS" is the bit error ratio before error correction by the Reed-Solomon decoder. The
calculation of the BER before RS is based on 10 million transmitted bits (before RS). With a Reed-
Solomon decoder to ITU-T J.83/B standard, the sync byte is also protected and has to be considered in
the calculation of the bit error ratio.
10 million bits
Number of RS frames (10 million bits)  11160.71 RS frames
128symbols 7bits
To transmit 10 million bits, 11160.71 Reed-Solomon frames are required.
Number of bits after RS 11160.71 RS frames 122 symbols 7 bits 9531250 bits
11160.71 Reed-Solomon frames correspond to a data quantity of 9.53125 million bits at the output of
the RS decoder.
9531250 bits
Number of MPEG TS frames  6337.26 6337 MPEG TS frames
188 bytes 8 bits
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.89
A counter is available for counting the MPEG TS frames. The first 6337 MPEG TS frames form the first
BER sample. A second counter increments the errors occurred and is read out at the end of each BER
sample to update the BER measurement. An errored bit within a BER sample corresponds to a bit error
-7
ratio of 1.0x10 .
The Reed-Solomon decoder can correct up to three symbols per frame. If more errors occur within a
frame, the RS decoder can correct none of the errors occurred. The non-correctable frames are also
counted. For the BER calculation, a non-correctable frame is assumed to have four errors. For
calculating the BER it is also assumed that once corrected symbol has one bit error. If the error
counters are read out after 6337 MPEG TS frames, the "BER before RS" can be calculated according
to the following formula:
(number of corrected errors) 4 

(number of non - correctable frames)
BER before RS 
10 million bits

100 , and
noise.
To allow even smaller bit error ratios to be determined quantitatively, the BER samples and their error
count results are continuously incremented. The counters are only reset by a sync loss or by actuating
the RESET BER key, whereupon a new BER measurement is started.
BER after Reed-Solomon decoder

The "BER after RS" is the bit error ratio at the output of the Reed-Solomon decoder and hence
equivalent to the bit error ratio of the MPEG TS data stream. The RS decoder (128, 122, 3) can correct
three errored symbols. If four or more symbols are erroneous, the complete frame will not be corrected.
The non-correctable frames are counted. A non-correctable frame is assumed to have four bit errors.
-6
A non-correctable frame is to cause a bit error rate of 1.0x10 . This will be the case if after 4 million
transmitted bits (after RS) a frame could not be corrected. An MPEG TS frame counter is available for
counting the transmitted bits.
4 million bits
Number of MPEG TS frames (4 million bits)  2659.57 2660 MPEG TS frames
188 8 bits
If the error counter is read out after 2660 transmitted MPEG TS frames, the "BER after RS" can be
calculated according to the following formula:
4
(number of non - correctable RS frames)
BER after RS  number of non - correctable RS frames 
10-6
4 10 6
2660 frames represent one BER sample. To allow even smaller bit error ratios to be determined
quantitatively, the BER samples and their error count results are continuously incremented. The
counters are only reset by a sync loss or by actuating the RESET BER key, whereupon a new BER
measurement is started.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.90
2.9.10.2.2 Processing of Individual Samples for BER Values and Selection of

Integration Time
The further processing (integration) of samples is common to all three BER measurements. A dynamic
ring memory with up to 1000 cells is available for each measurement.
Depending on the BER rate, the test depth has to be adjusted. This is done either by using only the last
stored value to calculate the BER or by carrying out an integration over the last 10, 100, 1000, 10 K,
100 K, 1 M, 10 M, 100 M or 1 G measured values. In BER calculation, the unit automatically switches to
a longer integration time if this is expedient or necessary (see Running BER calculation at the end of
this section). The unit automatically switches back to a shorter integration time if this is desired by the
user.
result, e.g. following switch-on. The display, however, is very stable. This mode is useful for stationary
applications in which the test receiver is constantly used under the same operating conditions.
If a minimum integration time of 1 sample is selected, the receiver switches the measurement time to
1 sample when a high BER (>3E-6, BER AFTER RS: >3E-5) is measured. In calibration, for example,
this allows a change of the BER value to be detected immediately. However, the indication is relatively
unstable due to the short measurement time. In practice, a minimum integration time of 10 samples has
with a high number of samples. Two figures are therefore specified together with the BER value: the
first specifies the number of samples currently used for the displayed BER. The second number
specifies the number of samples currently aimed at (counter final value). The letters K, M and G stand
3 6 9
for multiplication by 10 , 10 and 10 ; the digits following K, M and G are decimal places. (Example:
3 3
BER BEFORE RS = 7.2E-10 (1K44/10K) means: 1K44 = 1.44 x 10 = 1440 samples of 10 K=10 x 10
9
= 10000 samples have been processed). The memory has a limit of 1 000 000 000 = 1 x 10 samples.
In practice, this value means that recording is limited to a period of time of approximately 12 years. After
this period, the BER samples recorded first (which are now 12 years old) are overwritten by the current
measured values.
When the counter final value is reached, a switchover is made to running BER calculation: the last 10,
100, 1000, 10 K, 100 K, 1 M, 10 M, 100 M or 1G samples (depending on the final value required) are
combined to form one measured value so that a new set of values is obtained for each new sample.
The great advantage of this method is that the indicated BER is always the latest value, i.e. the
measured value is continuously updated. On the other hand, the system is flexible enough to
immediately reduce the number of integrated samples for a sudden deterioration of the input signal
quality (e.g. when a noise generator is connected).
count. The other counts can be deduced from this:
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.91
Individual samples
1 st measured
value nd
2 measured
value rd
3 measured
value th
4 measured
value th
5 measured
value th
6 measured
value th
7 measured
value th
8 measured
value th
9 measured
value
10th measured
value
11th measured
value
12th measured
value
14th measured
value
14th measured
value
15th measured
value
16th measured
value
Fig. 2.9-61 Measurement of BER: running BER calculation over 10 samples
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.92
The Test Receiver EFA-QAM is equipped with two interfaces for transmitted data: the parallel MPEG2
interface and the serial MPEG2 interface. Both are internationally standardized by the “DVB-TM Ad hoc
Group Physical Interfaces”. For both interfaces, it is possible to select, in the SPECIAL FUNCTION:
MPEG DATA OUTPUT: MPEG FRAME SIZE menu, whether 16 clock signals should be added to the
188 information bytes of an MPEG2 frame, which elapse during the error control bytes (204 bytes
altogether).
according to the LVDS (low voltage differential signalling) standard, which provides symmetrical data.
The key characteristics are:
Source impedance: 100 

Signal amplitude: 247 mV to 454 mV
13 2 1

25 14
Name Non-inverting output Inverting output

(pin No.) (pin No.)
CLOCK 1 14
GND 2 15
DATA 7 3 16
DATA 6 4 17
DATA 5 5 18
DATA 4 6 19
DATA 3 7 20
DATA 2 8 21
DATA 1 9 22
DATA 0 10 23
DATA VALID 11 24
PSYNC 12 25
GND 13 -
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.93
Übertragungofder
Transmission the188
188Informationsbytes
information bytes
SY 1 2 3 4 5 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 SY 1 2 DATA(0...7)
CLOCK
PSYNC
DATA VALID
SY: sync
SY: Sync-Byte
byte

(SPECIAL FUNCTION: MPEG DATA OUTPUT: MPEG FRAME SIZE)
Transmission
Übertragungofder
the188
188Informationsbytes
information bytes 16Takte
16 cyclesfürforFehlerschutzbytes
error control byte
SY 1 2 3 4 5 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 SY 1 2 3

DATA(0...7)
CLOCK
PSYNC
DATA VALID
SY:
SY: sync byte
Sync-Byte

(SPECIAL FUNCTION: MPEG DATA OUTPUT: MPEG FRAME SIZE)
transmission links (several hundred meters) can be implemented. The key characteristics are:

Source impedance: 75 , unbalanced (BNC)
DC component: 0V
Signal amplitude: 0.8 0.08 V into 75 
70 MHz over the used length
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.94

Measurement Function
To minimize the contribution to the overall signal degradation on the path to the receiver, amplification
of the transmitted RF signals should be as pure as possible. However, it is necessary to limit the power
of the transmitted signal (clipping) to avoid unnecessarily reducing the lifetime of transistor transmitter
output stages. For this reason, particular attention is given to the CCDF measurement as well as to the
related crest factor û/urms in the development and operation of high-power transmitters.
In practice, two different definitions of the CCDF function are used, which provide different results.
Osc Osc
LO LO
RF IF IF RF IF Reso- Envelope
Filter ADC CCDF lution Detector, CCDF
(SAW) BW Video BW
Mixer Mixer
Fig. 2.9-65 Signal path for determining CCDF(RF) with Test Receiver EFA (left) and with a
spectrum analyzer or CCDF(ENV) with Test Receiver EFA (right), simplified
representation
2.9.10.4.1.1 Definition 1: Sampling of the RF/IF signal

In the Test Receiver EFA, the modulated signal is mixed into a suitable intermediate frequency, where it
is digitized (Fig. 2.9-65 left). The digital samples are used directly to evaluate and display the
CCDF(RF). For an ideal continuous wave signal (CW signal), the crest factor is therefore 3.0 dB. IF
filtering is carried out by means of a SAW filter adapted to the signal bandwidth; video filtering of the
signal is not carried out. This means that the signal itself is not changed.
2.9.10.4.1.2 Definition 2: Sampling the Envelope

The central element of a spectrum analyzer is the envelope detector. This is where a level is assigned
to a modulated signal by means of suitable time filtering (Fig. 2.9-65 right). The high-frequency
modulation component is removed from the signal, and only an "envelope" signal is used. In the case of
bandwidth (VBW) do not impair the signal:
BWResolution > BW Signal , BW Video 3BWResolution .
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.95
For CCDF(RF), the Test Receiver EFA analyzes the signal as it is received at the RF connector (carrier
signal measurement, see section 2.9.10.4.1). In particular, a pure CW signal has a crest factor of 3.0 dB
in accordance with its definition. However, the CCDF(ENV) measurement in the Test Receiver EFA with
of (ideally) 0.0 dB. Investigations have shown that with signals of any type, the crest factors of both
methods differ by 3.0 dB. In general, however, conversion cannot be carried out between the two traces
by simply taking the 3 dB difference into consideration. Fig. 2.9-66 shows the time characteristic of a
modulated signal. In addition, the example shows the data from which the CCDF measurement is
calculated with the Spectrum Analyzer FSP and the Test Receiver EFA.
Fig. 2.9-66 Time characteristic of a modulated signal. The graph shows the original
waveform, the samples that are used by the Test Receiver EFA in the CCDF(RF)
measurement, and the envelope of the signal that is used by a spectrum analyzer
(e.g. FSP) and by the Test Receiver EFA during CCDF(ENV).
ideal QAM signal with the Test Receiver EFA.
The crest factor in the CCDF(ENV) measurement is 3 dB lower than in the CCDF(RF)
measurement.
Measuring the CCDF is a simple and effective method of determining nonlinear characteristics of active
elements. If the measurement of the CCDF is to be referred to the signal actually transmitted (instead of
to the envelope), it is advisable to use the Test Receiver EFA with its CCDF(RF) measurement. This
instrument also determines the crest factor for the signal that is actually transmitted.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.96
2.9.10.5 Application and Interpretation of Constellation Diagram
In this section, the basic causes of specific modulation errors are described with the aid of simulated
constellation diagrams. Using simulated data is expedient especially because it allows different effects
to be demonstrated separately.
The following examples were generated with the I/Q Simulation Software IQSIM from Rohde &
Schwarz. This software allows errors to be introduced into an ideal QAM signal. In the examples shown
below, the following basic settings were used:
 Cosine roll-off filtering with roll-off factor r = 0.15 and
 PRBS (pseudo random binary sequence) data stream; no coding.
In practice, there is always a combination of various modulation errors that may be difficult to separate
and identify. To this end, the Test Receiver EFA-QAM evaluates the measured constellation diagram
using mathematical and statistical methods and furnishes a quantitative representation of results.
All constellation diagrams shown are based on 64QAM modulation. The effects of the modulation errors
shown however apply to all other orders of QAM.
Firstly, a constellation diagram is shown, representing an ideal, undisturbed 64QAM signal:
Fig. 2.9-68 Constellation diagram of ideal 64QAM signal
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.97
2.9.10.5.1 Amplitude Imbalance
Amplitude imbalance describes the different gains of the I and Q components of a signal. Such a
difference in amplitude can be due only to different gain in the two signal paths of the transmitter, since
with complete digital modulation the inherent inaccuracy of the receiver is negligibly small. In a
constellation diagram, amplitude imbalance shows by one signal component being expanded and the
other one being compressed. This is due to the fact that the receiver AGC makes for a constant
average signal level:
Fig. 2.9-69 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with 20% amplitude imbalance
2.9.10.5.2 Quadrature Error
The quadrature error (frequently also referred to as quadrature offset) is the difference between the
phase angles of the I and Q components referred to 90°. A quadrature error is caused by an error of the
phase shifter of the I/Q modulator. The I and Q components are in this case not orthogonal to each
other after demodulation. As the test receiver is of digital design throughout, its inherent phase error
can be assumed to be zero. In the constellation diagram, a quadrature error shows up by the signal
states being arranged in a distorted order. The center points of four adjacent decision fields form a
rhombus rather than a square.
Fig. 2.9-70 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with 8° quadrature error
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.98
2.9.10.5.3 Carrier Leakage
Carrier leakage is a special type of interference, whose frequency equals the carrier frequency in the
RF channel. Carrier leakage can be superimposed on the QAM signal only in the I/Q modulator. The
interference and the carrier having the same frequency, a DC component is obtained in the baseband,
whose distribution to the I and the Q component depends on the phase difference between the carrier
leakage and the restored carrier. The magnitude of the DC component is equal to the radius of a circle
that would be obtained in the event of a frequency offset of the interference relative to the carrier signal.
In the constellation diagram, carrier leakage shows up as a shifting of the signal states corresponding to
the DC components of the I and Q components:
Fig. 2.9-71 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with carrier leakage in the I component
(CS = 22 dB)
2.9.10.5.4 Additive Gaussian Noise
Noise can disturb the digitally modulated signal during analog transmission, i.e. in the RF channel.
Additive superimposed noise normally has a constant power density and a Gaussian amplitude
distribution throughout the bandwidth of a channel. If no other error is present at the same time, the
points representing the ideal signal status are expanded to form circular "clouds":
Fig. 2.9-72 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with additive noise (SNR = 30.0 dB)
For the interpretation of the above constellation diagram please note that the same diagram may be
obtained also for other types of interference so that a distinction from noise-produced patterns cannot
be made:
 impulsive noise,
 nonlinearities in amplifiers,
 intermodulation,
 errors due to uncompensated echoes and linear frequency response.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.99
Phase jitter or phase noise in the QAM signal is caused by transposers in the transmission path or by
the I/Q modulator. It may also be produced in carrier recovery, a possibility that is to be excluded here.
In contrast to the phase error described above, phase jitter is a statistical quantity that affects the I and
the Q path equally. In the constellation diagram, phase jitter shows up by the signal states being shifted
about their coordinate origin:
Fig. 2.9-73 Constellation diagram of 64QAM signal with phase jitter: PJ RMS = 1.73°
2.9.10.6 Definitions, Formulas and Measurement Limits of QAM Parameters
The constellation diagram of a demodulated QAM signal is an excellent tool also for a quantitative
assessment of the above-named transmission parameters, allowing fast and accurate conclusions to be
drawn as to interference in transmission. The constellation diagram as a graphical tool for the
qualitative assessment of a signal has been described in section 2.9.10.5. This section deals with some
basic algorithms that allow a quantitative assessment of the parameters named above. The calculations
are based on the constellation diagram in a modified form. The I/Q values are available as discrete
values due to digital signal processing. Additionally, it should be known how frequently each I/Q value
occurred within a given measurement time (e.g. 1 s).
2.9.10.6.1 Amplitude Imbalance
The amplitude imbalance (AI) can be determined by two-dimensional averaging for all points of a
decision field. By evaluating the center points thus formed separately for the I and Q components, the
distances between the points are obtained for each component. Next, the distances between the points
are averaged separately for I and Q, resulting in an average I and an average Q distance (expressed as
vI and vQ). From this, the amplitude imbalance is determined:
v 
AI 2 1100%
v 1 
where v 1 min(v I , v Q ) and v2 max( v I , v Q ) .
The result will always be 0 because the I and Q paths of the demodulator cannot be unambiguously
assigned to the corresponding paths of the modulator since it is not known if the phase locks at n 90 .
For all calculations described below, the previous results are modified such that the effect of amplitude
imbalance is eliminated. In other words, the center points are calculated that would be obtained if there
was no amplitude imbalance.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.100
2.9.10.6.2 Quadrature Error
The quadrature error (QE) can be determined from the modified center points. To this end, the
gradients of the regression lines drawn through the center points in the I and Q directions are
calculated, in this case too by separate evaluation of the I and Q components. From the gradients,
angles 1 and 2 are obtained directly using the arcsin function:
180
QE  1 2 [°] .

Again, for all further calculations, the center points are determined that would be obtained if no
quadrature error was present.
To calculate the carrier suppression (CS), the distance between the calculated and the ideal center
points is determined. From this, the carrier leakage power PCL is obtained. Moreover, the effective
signal power Psig can easily be determined from the constellation diagram. It depends on the order of
the QAM.
CS 10 
lg( PCL / PSig ) [dB].
2.9.10.6.4 Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)
To determine the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), only the four innermost decision fields of the constellation
diagram are used.
The standard deviation  N can be calculated by means of statistical methods. From the standard
deviation 
N, the rms value of the noise power N and the SNR are obtained directly as follows:
SNREVAL = 10 x lg(PSig/N) [dB] where N = k × N .

2
According to the definition of the DVB Measurement Group, the SNR value is a pure baseband quantity.
This means that the calculated SNR (SNREVAL ) cannot be compared directly with the C/N value of the
transmission channel. The difference between SNREVAL and C/N lies in the root-cosine rolloff filtering
and the time quantization of the baseband signal (0.166 dB for r = 0.15, noise bandwidth = 6.9 MHz,
symbol rate = 6.9 MSPS).
As a last step, the rms value of the phase jitter is to be determined. To this end, the four outer corners
of the constellation diagram are assessed since it is there where phase jitter has the strongest effect.
Now the frequency distribution is determined for each decision field along the four circular paths farthest
away from the center point, which is the coordinate origin of the constellation diagram. Here, too, the
standard deviation  PJ+N can be calculated, which is in addition affected by noise. According to the
addition theorem of the Gaussian distribution, the following applies:
PJ  2PJN 2N .

The rms phase jitter can thus be obtained by means of trigonometric conversion.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.101
2.9.10.6.6 Accuracy of Measured Values
With an ideal QAM signal, all measured I/Q values lie exactly in the centers of the decision fields. If a
signal is distorted, e.g. through amplitude imbalance, phase error or carrier leakage, the measured I/Q
values will not be in the centers of the decision fields but still concentrated on a single point in each
field. The measured values are available in discrete form as a result of digital processing of the I/Q
coordinates. The resolution of the measured values can be considerably increased by superimposing a
small noise component (SNR < 45 dB) on the signal to be analyzed and, using the method described
above, forming an average over several discrete values and the above-named frequency distribution.
This effect is shown in the following diagram for a signal distorted by amplitude imbalance:
0.015
0.010
0.005
v I/Q, actual, fine- v I/Q, set
0.000
1000 ( v -v )
I/Q,actual, fine, with noise I/Q, set
-0.005
-0.010
-0.015
0.86 0.9 0.94 0.98 1.02 1.06 1.1 1.14 1.18
v I/Q, set
Fig. 2.9-74 Improvement of accuracy with superimposed noise (SNR = 45 dB)
In the above diagram, the scaling for the gain calculated from the measured values containing noise is
increased by a factor of 1000. Thus the resolution for the analysis is improved by a factor of approx.
1000. The same applies to the calculation of the other parameters. The background noise shown in the
above example is present on every real transmission path and results in a drastic improvement of the
resolution of the calculated parameters. A vital precondition for achieving meaningful results is a
sufficiently large number of I/Q values measured to form the basis for calculating the parameters in
question (law of large numbers). With the Test Receiver EFA-QAM, parameter calculation is based on
almost 1,000,000 measured values shown on the display, which affords the necessary confidence level.
With this data acquisition rate, a typical refresh rate of results of approx. 1 s is obtained.
For calculation of the parameters, there are limit values that are listed in the table below. The limits
result from the quantization of the measured I/Q values on the one hand and from the location of the
decision fields, i.e. their distance from the center point. For each limit value specified, all other
interfering quantities are assumed to be zero.
Order of QAM AImax PEmax CSmax CSmin PJ max
4 ### ### 90.0° 0.14 dB 60 dB 11.26°

16 190.80 % 36.15° 7.26 dB 60 dB 4.17°
32 61.54 % 23.06° 10.56 dB 60 dB 2.59°
64 37.10 % 15.39° 13.78 dB 60 dB 1.85°
128 19.19 % 9.82° 17.28 dB 60 dB 1.22°
256 13.34 % 6.73° 20.45 dB 60 dB 0.86°
Table 2.9-11 Theoretical maximum and minimum values of calculated parameters for various
orders of QAM
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.102
2.9.10.6.7 Modulation Error Ratio (Error Vector Magnitude)
The modulation error ratio (MER) is not a single physical error but the combination of all impairments
that occur. The MER is a calculated quantity indicating the mean or maximum deviation of the I/Q
values from ideal signal states and thus provides a measure of signal quality. The MER is specified as
rms and as peak value. To calculate the MER, all decision fields are investigated one after the other:
 To obtain the peak MER, the maximum magnitude of the difference vector (error vector) formed by
the vectors of the ideal and the actual signal states is determined for each decision field. From the
maximum value of these results, the peak MER is calculated using the following formula:
max 
errorvecto r 
MER PEAK 100  %
VM
where VM is the rms value of the amplitudes of all ideal signal states.
 To obtain the rms MER, the squares of the magnitudes of all difference vectors formed by the
vectors of the ideal and the actual signal states are added up, and the number of symbols is
counted. Then the rms MER is calculated as follows:
The following diagram shows the vectors used for calculating the MER:
Actual status
Error vector
Q
Ideal center point
Actual status
Ideal center point
I
Fig. 2.9-75 Positions of vectors used to determine the MER
(64QAM; first quadrant only)
The peak and rms MER can also be specified on a logarithmic scale. The following formula is to be
used for the conversion:
MER%

MER dB 20 
lg  dB  .
 100 
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.103
 To obtain the maximum value of the error vector magnitude (EVM), the maximum magnitude of the
difference vector (error vector) formed by the vectors of the ideal and the actual signal states is
determined for each decision field. From the maximum value of these results, the maximum EVM is
calculated using the following formula:
max errorvector 
EVM MAX 100  %
SigMax
where SigMax is the maximum ideal amplitude of all ideal signal states, i.e. the ideal amplitude of
the outer corners of the constellation.
 To obtain the rms EVM, the squares of the magnitudes of all difference vectors formed by the
vectors of the ideal and the actual signal states are added up, and the number of symbols is
counted. Then the rms EVM is calculated as follows:
For quantized I/Q values, the maximum value is output in discrete form only, since no averaging is
performed in the calculation.
The term "modulation error ratio" and the specified method of calculation were declared international
standard by the DVB Measurement Group. Since in non-European countries the "error vector
magnitude" is often specified instead, the conversion rule for the two quantities is given in the table
below. The two quantities differ only in the reference used: the modulation error ratio is referred to the
rms value of the baseband signal, whereas the error vector magnitude is referred to the peak value of
the baseband signal.
Order MER [%]  EVM [%] EVM [%]  MER [%] MER [dB]  EVM [dB] EVM [dB]  MER [dB]
4 EVM = MER MER = EVM |EVM| = MER MER = |EVM|
16 EVM = MER / 1.342 MER = EVM * 1.342 |EVM| = MER + 2.56 dB MER = |EVM| - 2.56 dB
Table 2.9-12 Conversion of MER and EVM
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.104
2.9.10.6.8 Other Errors
This section describes the effects of such errors on the QAM signal that have not been investigated
before.
Impulsive noise
Impulsive noise is caused by switching and ignition processes. The pulses are very short and of widely
differing shapes. Since the analysis of the constellation diagram is based on a very large number of
symbols, the time characteristic of the QAM signal and the information regarding any superimposed
noise is lost. Moreover, there is no information as to what symbols were incorrectly demodulated. It is
therefore not possible to evaluate impulse noise with the aid of the constellation diagram. Eye
monitoring is an ideal measurement in this case.
Nonlinearities of amplifiers
Nonlinearities of amplifiers cause amplitude and phase distortion of modulated signals. Since linear
QAM modulation is employed mainly in cable systems, where signal levels are relatively low, feedback
amplifiers can be used. These amplifiers are sufficiently linear so that the effect on the QAM signal is
negligibly small.
Intermodulation
For multichannel cable transmission, much greater demands are made on amplifier linearity.
Intermodulation between adjacent channels is critical especially with higher-order QAM modulation. It is
second- and third-order nonlinearities that are of practical relevance. Intermodulation on a DVB channel
CN with a carrier frequency of 
N N =  1 2 ) is obtained for the following channel configuration, for
example:
Amplitude
N = 1 - 2
CN C2 C1
0 N 2 1 2 + 1 
Intermodulation of C 1 and C 2 in channel CN Further intermodulation of C 1 and C2
Fig. 2.9-76 Intermodulation due to 2nd-order nonlinearities
3rd-order nonlinearity is caused by the cubic component of the amplifier characteristic. Intermodulation
on a DVB channel CN with a carrier frequency N is obtained, for example, for the following channel
configuration (N = 24-3 ):
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.105
ωN = 2ω4 - ω3
Amplitude
CN C4 C3
0 ωN ω4 ω3 2ω4 - ω3 ω
Intermodulation Further intermodulation

of C3 and C4 in channel CN of C 3 and C4
Fig. 2.9-77 Intermodulation due to 3rd-order nonlinearities
Intermodulation between adjacent channels can be regarded as additive random noise. It has the effect
of additive noise, therefore special requirements have to be fulfilled with higher-order QAM modulation.
Intermodulation cannot be analyzed by means of the constellation diagram. For the analysis methods
described so far, intermodulation is interpreted as noise and covered by the S/N ratio information.
Frequency and phase errors, echoes

Possible causes:
1. Reflections in cables (echoes) caused by mismatched cable terminations and return loss from the
equipment connected.
2. Tolerances of the pulse shaping filters resulting in inter-symbol interference (ISI) because the first
Nyquist criterion is not fulfilled.
3. Amplitude frequency response and group-delay distortion resulting from the lowpass characteristics
of cables and amplifiers and from amplitude and phase ripple from channel filters.
In contrast to the errors described above, the errors listed here can be compensated well by the test
receiver. This is possible by means of a self-adapting equalizer integrated in the Test Receiver EFA-
QAM .
Several channel frequency tables are stored in the EFA. These can be selected via the SPECIAL
FUNCTION: CHANNEL DEFINITION function, see section 2.9.6.1. The frequency setting is carried out
in the RF menu by entering the channel or special channel number, see section 2.9.4. Channels with
"0" datum are not selectable.
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.106

0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0
2 57000000 55250000 2 57000000 55250000
3 63000000 61250000 3 63000000 61250000
4 69000000 67250000 4 69000000 67250000
5 79000000 77250000 5 79000000 77250000
6 85000000 83250000 6 85000000 83250000
7 177000000 175250000 7 177000000 175250000
8 183000000 181250000 8 183000000 181250000
9 189000000 187250000 9 189000000 187250000
10 195000000 193250000 10 195000000 193250000
11 201000000 199250000 11 201000000 199250000
12 207000000 205250000 12 207000000 205250000
13 213000000 211250000 13 213000000 211250000
14 473000000 471250000 14 123000000 121250000
15 479000000 477250000 15 129000000 127250000
16 485000000 483250000 16 135000000 133250000
17 491000000 489250000 17 141000000 139250000
18 497000000 495250000 18 147000000 145250000
19 503000000 501250000 19 153000000 151250000
20 509000000 507250000 20 159000000 157250000
21 515000000 513250000 21 165000000 163250000
22 521000000 519250000 22 171000000 169250000
23 527000000 525250000 23 219000000 217250000
24 533000000 531250000 24 225000000 223250000
25 539000000 537250000 25 231000000 229250000
26 545000000 543250000 26 237000000 235250000
27 551000000 549250000 27 243000000 241250000
28 557000000 555250000 28 249000000 247250000
29 563000000 561250000 29 255000000 253250000
30 569000000 567250000 30 261000000 259250000
31 575000000 573250000 31 267000000 265250000
32 581000000 579250000 32 273000000 271250000
33 587000000 585250000 33 279000000 277250000
34 593000000 591250000 34 285000000 283250000
35 599000000 597250000 35 291000000 289250000
36 605000000 603250000 36 297000000 295250000
37 611000000 609250000 37 303000000 301250000
38 617000000 615250000 38 309000000 307250000
39 623000000 621250000 39 315000000 313250000
40 629000000 627250000 40 321000000 319250000
41 635000000 633250000 41 327000000 325250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 333000000 331250000
43 647000000 645250000 43 339000000 337250000
44 653000000 651250000 44 345000000 343250000
45 659000000 657250000 45 351000000 349250000
46 665000000 663250000 46 357000000 355250000
47 671000000 669250000 47 363000000 361250000
48 677000000 675250000 48 369000000 367250000
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.107

49 683000000 681250000 49 375000000 373250000
50 689000000 687250000 50 381000000 379250000
51 695000000 693250000 51 387000000 385250000
52 701000000 699250000 52 393000000 391250000
53 707000000 705250000 53 399000000 397250000
54 713000000 711250000 54 405000000 403250000
55 719000000 717250000 55 411000000 409250000
56 725000000 723250000 56 417000000 415250000
57 731000000 729250000 57 423000000 421250000
58 737000000 735250000 58 429000000 427250000
59 743000000 741250000 59 435000000 433250000
60 749000000 747250000 60 441000000 439250000
61 755000000 753250000 61 447000000 445250000
62 761000000 759250000 62 453000000 451250000
63 767000000 765250000 63 459000000 457250000
64 773000000 771250000 64 465000000 463250000
65 779000000 777250000 65 471000000 469250000
66 785000000 783250000 66 477000000 475250000
67 791000000 789250000 67 483000000 481250000
68 797000000 795250000 68 489000000 487250000
69 803000000 801250000 69 495000000 493250000
70 809000000 807250000 70 501000000 499250000
71 815000000 813250000 71 507000000 505250000
72 821000000 819250000 72 513000000 511250000
73 827000000 825250000 73 519000000 517250000
74 833000000 831250000 74 525000000 523250000
75 839000000 837250000 75 531000000 529250000
76 845000000 843250000 76 537000000 535250000
77 851000000 849250000 77 543000000 541250000
78 857000000 855250000 78 549000000 547250000
79 863000000 861250000 79 555000000 553250000
80 869000000 867250000 80 561000000 559250000
81 875000000 873250000 81 567000000 565250000
82 881000000 879250000 82 573000000 571250000
83 887000000 885250000 83 579000000 577250000
84 0 0 84 585000000 583250000
85 0 0 85 591000000 589250000
86 0 0 86 597000000 595250000
87 0 0 87 603000000 601250000
88 0 0 88 609000000 607250000
89 0 0 89 615000000 613250000
90 0 0 90 621000000 619250000
91 0 0 91 627000000 625250000
92 0 0 92 633000000 631250000
93 0 0 93 639000000 637250000
94 0 0 94 645000000 643250000
95 0 0 95 93000000 91250000
96 0 0 96 99000000 97250000
97 0 0 97 105000000 103250000
98 0 0 98 111000000 109250000
99 0 0 99 117000000 115250000
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.108

0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0
2 57000000 55250000 2 57000000 55250000
3 63000000 61250000 3 63000000 61250000
4 69000000 67250000 4 69000000 67250000
5 79000000 77250000 5 79000000 77250000
6 85000000 83250000 6 85000000 83250000
7 177000000 175250000 7 177000000 175250000
8 183000000 181250000 8 183000000 181250000
9 189000000 187250000 9 189000000 187250000
10 195000000 193250000 10 195000000 193250000
11 201000000 199250000 11 201000000 199250000
12 207000000 205250000 12 207000000 205250000
13 213000000 211250000 13 213000000 211250000
14 473000000 471250000 14 123000000 121250000
15 479000000 477250000 15 129000000 127250000
16 485000000 483250000 16 135000000 133250000
17 491000000 489250000 17 141000000 139250000
18 497000000 495250000 18 147000000 145250000
19 503000000 501250000 19 153000000 151250000
20 509000000 507250000 20 159000000 157250000
21 515000000 513250000 21 165000000 163250000
22 521000000 519250000 22 171000000 169250000
23 527000000 525250000 23 219000000 217250000
24 533000000 531250000 24 225000000 223250000
25 539000000 537250000 25 231000000 229250000
26 545000000 543250000 26 237000000 235250000
27 551000000 549250000 27 243000000 241250000
28 557000000 555250000 28 249000000 247250000
29 563000000 561250000 29 255000000 253250000
30 569000000 567250000 30 261000000 259250000
31 575000000 573250000 31 267000000 265250000
32 581000000 579250000 32 273000000 271250000
33 587000000 585250000 33 279000000 277250000
34 593000000 591250000 34 285000000 283250000
35 599000000 597250000 35 291000000 289250000
36 605000000 603250000 36 297000000 295250000
37 611000000 609250000 37 303000000 301250000
38 617000000 615250000 38 309000000 307250000
39 623000000 621250000 39 315000000 313250000
40 629000000 627250000 40 321000000 319250000
41 635000000 633250000 41 327000000 325250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 333000000 331250000
43 647000000 645250000 43 339000000 337250000
44 653000000 651250000 44 345000000 343250000
45 659000000 657250000 45 351000000 349250000
46 665000000 663250000 46 357000000 355250000
47 671000000 669250000 47 363000000 361250000
48 677000000 675250000 48 369000000 367250000
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.109

49 683000000 681250000 49 375000000 373250000
50 689000000 687250000 50 381000000 379250000
51 695000000 693250000 51 387000000 385250000
52 701000000 699250000 52 393000000 391250000
53 707000000 705250000 53 399000000 397250000
54 713000000 711250000 54 405000000 403250000
55 719000000 717250000 55 411000000 409250000
56 725000000 723250000 56 417000000 415250000
57 731000000 729250000 57 423000000 421250000
58 737000000 735250000 58 429000000 427250000
59 743000000 741250000 59 435000000 433250000
60 749000000 747250000 60 441000000 439250000
61 755000000 753250000 61 447000000 445250000
62 761000000 759250000 62 453000000 451250000
63 767000000 765250000 63 459000000 457250000
64 773000000 771250000 64 465000000 463250000
65 779000000 777250000 65 471000000 469250000
66 785000000 783250000 66 477000000 475250000
67 791000000 789250000 67 483000000 481250000
68 797000000 795250000 68 489000000 487250000
69 803000000 801250000 69 495000000 493250000
70 809000000 807250000 70 501000000 499250000
71 815000000 813250000 71 507000000 505250000
72 821000000 819250000 72 513000000 511250000
73 827000000 825250000 73 519000000 517250000
74 833000000 831250000 74 525000000 523250000
75 839000000 837250000 75 531000000 529250000
76 845000000 843250000 76 537000000 535250000
77 851000000 849250000 77 543000000 541250000
78 857000000 855250000 78 549000000 547250000
79 863000000 861250000 79 555000000 553250000
80 869000000 867250000 80 561000000 559250000
81 875000000 873250000 81 0 0
82 881000000 879250000 82 0 0
83 887000000 885250000 83 0 0
84 0 0 84 0 0
85 0 0 85 0 0
86 0 0 86 0 0
87 0 0 87 0 0
88 0 0 88 0 0
89 0 0 89 0 0
90 0 0 90 0 0
91 0 0 91 0 0
92 0 0 92 0 0
93 0 0 93 0 0
94 0 0 94 0 0
95 0 0 95 0 0
96 0 0 96 0 0
97 0 0 97 0 0
98 0 0 98 111000000 109250000
99 0 0 99 117000000 115250000
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.110

0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 107000000 105250000
2 50000000 48250000 2 114000000 112250000
3 57000000 55250000 3 121000000 119250000
4 64000000 62250000 4 128000000 126250000
5 177000000 175250000 5 135000000 133250000
6 184000000 182250000 6 142000000 140250000
7 191000000 189250000 7 149000000 147250000
8 198000000 196250000 8 156000000 154250000
9 205000000 203250000 9 163000000 161250000
10 212000000 210250000 10 170000000 168250000
11 219000000 217250000 11 233000000 231250000
12 226000000 224250000 12 240000000 238250000
13 0 0 13 247000000 245250000
14 0 0 14 254000000 252250000
15 0 0 15 261000000 259250000
16 0 0 16 268000000 266250000
17 0 0 17 275000000 273250000
18 0 0 18 282000000 280250000
19 0 0 19 289000000 287250000
20 0 0 20 296000000 294250000
21 473000000 471250000 21 305000000 303250000
22 481000000 479250000 22 313000000 311250000
23 489000000 487250000 23 321000000 319250000
24 497000000 495250000 24 329000000 327250000
25 505000000 503250000 25 337000000 335250000
26 513000000 511250000 26 345000000 343250000
27 521000000 519250000 27 353000000 351250000
28 529000000 527250000 28 361000000 359250000
29 537000000 535250000 29 369000000 367250000
30 545000000 543250000 30 377000000 375250000
31 553000000 551250000 31 385000000 383250000
32 561000000 559250000 32 393000000 391250000
33 569000000 567250000 33 401000000 399250000
34 577000000 575250000 34 409000000 407250000
35 585000000 583250000 35 417000000 415250000
36 593000000 591250000 36 425000000 423250000
37 601000000 599250000 37 433000000 431250000
38 609000000 607250000 38 441000000 439250000
39 617000000 615250000 39 449000000 447250000
40 625000000 623250000 40 457000000 455250000
41 633000000 631250000 41 465000000 463250000
42 641000000 639250000 42 0 0
43 649000000 647250000 43 0 0
44 657000000 655250000 44 0 0
45 665000000 663250000 45 0 0
46 673000000 671250000 46 0 0
47 681000000 679250000 47 0 0
48 689000000 687250000 48 0 0
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.111

49 697000000 695250000 49 0 0
50 705000000 703250000 50 0 0
51 713000000 711250000 51 0 0
52 721000000 719250000 52 0 0
53 729000000 727250000 53 0 0
54 737000000 735250000 54 0 0
55 745000000 743250000 55 0 0
56 753000000 751250000 56 0 0
57 761000000 759250000 57 0 0
58 769000000 767250000 58 0 0
59 777000000 775250000 59 0 0
60 785000000 783250000 60 0 0
61 793000000 791250000 61 0 0
62 801000000 799250000 62 0 0
63 809000000 807250000 63 0 0
64 817000000 815250000 64 0 0
65 825000000 823250000 65 0 0
66 833000000 831250000 66 0 0
67 841000000 839250000 67 0 0
68 849000000 847250000 68 0 0
69 857000000 855250000 69 0 0
70 865000000 863250000 70 0 0
71 0 0 71 0 0
72 0 0 72 0 0
73 0 0 73 0 0
74 0 0 74 0 0
75 0 0 75 0 0
76 0 0 76 0 0
77 0 0 77 0 0
78 0 0 78 0 0
79 0 0 79 0 0
80 0 0 80 0 0
81 0 0 81 0 0
82 0 0 82 0 0
83 0 0 83 0 0
84 0 0 84 0 0
85 0 0 85 0 0
86 0 0 86 0 0
87 0 0 87 0 0
88 0 0 88 0 0
89 0 0 89 0 0
90 0 0 90 0 0
91 0 0 91 0 0
92 0 0 92 0 0
93 0 0 93 0 0
94 0 0 94 0 0
95 0 0 95 0 0
96 0 0 96 0 0
97 0 0 97 0 0
98 0 0 98 0 0
45 99 0 0 99 0 0
2068.0950.12-15.00 2.9.112

MAN12EFA1500_01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAN12EFA1500_01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Broadcasting Division

Preparation for Use

General Device Settings

Demodulation of AM-TV signals with IRT 2-

Operation as a Test Receiver / Demodulator EFA Model 90/93,

Operation as Test Receiver / Demodulator

Operation as Test Receiver/Demodulator for

Operation as Test Receiver/Demodulator EFA Model 60/63/70/73,

1 Preparation for Use ................................................................................ 1.1

1.1 Legend for Front View ......................................................................................................1.2

2067.3004.12 1.1 E-14

2067.3004.12 1.2 E-14

1 Preparation for Use

2067.3004.12 1.1 E-14

1.1 Legend for Front View

Fig. 1-1 Front view

2067.3004.12 1.2 E-14

Fig. 1-2 Front view

2067.3004.12 1.3 E-14

Fig. 1-3 Front view

Headphone connector with 3.5-mm jack plug

2067.3004.12 1.4 E-14

1.2 Legend for Rear View

Fig. 1-4 Rear view

2067.3004.12 1.5 E-14

Fig. 1-5 Rear view

*)1 Only provided and connected if analog receiver is integrated.

2067.3004.12 1.6 E-14

Fig. 1-6 Rear view

X31 (TS PARALLEL)

X21 (RF 50  DEMOD)

X22 (RF RECEIVER)

X33 (RS 232)

*)1 Only provided if NICAM demodulator is installed.

2067.3004.12 1.7 E-14

Fig. 1-6 Rear view

2067.3004.12 1.8 E-14

1.3 Unpacking the Unit

1.4 Putting into Operation

2067.3004.12 1.9 E-14

1.4.1 Positioning the Unit

Positioning the unit flat:

Positioning the unit upright:

Mounting the unit in a 19'' Rack:

2067.3004.12 1.10 E-14

1.4.2 Connecting the Unit to AC Supply, AC Supply Voltage and Fuses

Since the unit is fitted with a switching power supply, it can be

Voltage ranges of the switching power supply (automatic switchover):

1.4.3 EMC Protective Measures

2067.3004.12 1.11 E-14

Connect the unit to the AC supply (see section

The following operations take place during switch-on:

IEC-625/IEEE 488 - ADDRESS: 6

2067.3004.12 1.12 E-14

1.4.5 Setting the Contrast of the Display

1.4.6 Installing the Firmware

To carry out the firmware update proceed as follows:

Initial update - No runnable firmware in the unit

2067.3004.12 1.13 E-14

1.4.7 Connecting Input and Output Signal

*)1 RF input on the front or rear panel 50 or 75 

1.4.8 Battery Backed Memory

2067.3004.12 1.14 E-14

1.5 Functional Test